Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout_UNC CH Cardinal Parking Deck Elevator Modernization, SCO 19-20134-01A - BAR Closeout - rev 11072023.pdfTTHHEE UUNNIIVVEERRSSIITTYY OOFF NNOORRTTHH CCAARROOLLIINNAA AATT CCHHAAPPEELL HHIILLLL CCAARRDDIINNAALL PPAARRKKIINNGG DDEECCKK EELLEEVVAATTOORR MMOODDEERRNNIIZZAATTIIOONN SSCCOO IIDD## 1199--2200113344--0011AA,, CCIIPP 772244--CCNN00000000 BBAARR PPRROOJJEECCTT NNOO.. 0011--2211--004488 140 MANNING DRIVE CHAPEL HILL, NC 27599-6122 WARRANTIES & CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS May 3, 2023 Revised November 7,2023 Owner: The State of North Carolina through Facilities Services Division of The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill 103 Airport Drive CB#1090 Chapel Hill, NC 27599 Contractor: Bar Construction Company, Inc. 611 A Industrial Ave Greensboro, NC 27406 Ph. 336-274-2477 Architect:RND Architects, PA 3608 University Drive, Suite 204 Durham, NC 27707 Ph. 919-490-1266 (Volume 1 of 2) SeCTion 1 General requiremenTS 01 01 00 MAIN Table of Contents (LINKED) 01 02 00 Contact List 01 03 00 General Contractor 01 BAR Warranty 02 Affidavit of Release of Liens 03 Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims 04 Return Keys Receipt 05 Releases and Waives from each Sub & Supplier with a list Page from Owner email citing article 4) alternate to Article 36 Statement List of BAR’s contracted Subs & Suppliers o Dixie Coating o Resolute Elevator o Trademasters Service o BFPE International o Electrical Technologies o Hockaday Mechanical Corp o Brock Contract Services o Seegars Fence Co., Inc. 06 Receipt of Electrical Certification The universiTy of norTh Carolina aT Chapel hill Cardinal parking deCk elevaTor modernizaTion sCo id# 19-20134-01a, Cip 724-Cn0000 Bar projeCT no. 01-21-048 WarranTies & CloseouT doCumenTs 01 01 00 MAIN TABLE OF CONTENTS (LINKED) SECTION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 01 00 00 Cover Sheet 01 01 00 Table of Contents 01 02 00 Contact List 01 03 00 General Contractor 01 BAR Warranty 02 Section 316 – BAR Affidavit of Release of Liens 03 Section 317 – BAR Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims 04 Return Keys Receipt 05 Releases and Waives from each Sub & Supplier with a list Page from Owner email citing article 4) alternate to Article 36 Statement List of BAR’s contracted Subs & Suppliers o Dixie Coating o Resolute Elevator o Trademasters Service o BFPE International o Electrical Technologies o Hockaday Mechanical Corp o Brock Contract Services o Seegars Fence Co., Inc. 06 Receipt of Electrical Certification SECTION 2 – WARRANTIES: Division 01 – General Section 017700 Contractor’s Warranty BAR Construction Company Inc. Division 09 – Finishes Section 096519 - Resilient Tile Flooring - Brock Contract Services Section 099123 - Interior Painting - Dixie Coating Company Division 14 – Conveying Equipment Section 142400 Hydraulic Elevators - Resolute Elevator Division 22 - Plumbing 220000 Plumbing - Hockaday Mechanical Corporation Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 230000 Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) - Trademasters Services Inc. Division 26 - Electrical Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding - Electrical Technologies, Inc. Divisions 28 – Electronic Safety and Security 283111 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System - BFPE International Section 3 - O & M MANUALS: Division 09 – Finishes Section 099123 - Interior Painting - Dixie Coating Company Maintenance & Repair Procedures Division 14 – Conveying Equipment Section 142400 Hydraulic Elevators - Resolute Elevator UNC-CH Cardinal Parking Deck Close Out Warranty Final Acceptance Hydraulic Acceptance Test NCDOL Inspection Report Resolute O&M’s •GAL Manufacturing o Galaxy eHydro Connection Drawings o Controller Drawings o GALaxy eHydro Controller System •MOVFR Door Operator o Installation Manual •EECO o Layout Drawings o Jackunits •IDEC Elevator Products •Innovation Industries - As-builts Division 22 - Plumbing 221429 Sump Pump - Hockaday Mechanical Corporation Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 238126.13 Ductless Minisplit - Trademasters Services Inc. Division 26 - Electrical Section 260000 - Electrical - Electrical Technologies, Inc. O&M Manual Gear •Circuit Breakers •Installation Instructions •Schneider Warranty Lighting Panel D Punch List WarrantyDivisions 28 – Electronic Safety and Security 283111 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System - BFPE International SECTION 4 – AS-BUILTS Division 01 – General – BAR Construction Company, Inc. 017700 BAR As-Builts A001 Cover Sheet A002 Building Code Summary A101 Reference Floor Plans A201 Enlarged Floor Plans and Sections M101 Mechanical Plans E101 Electrical Demolition Plans, Specifications & Symbols Legend E102 Electrical Renovation Plans E103 Power Risers & Details E104 Electrical Panel Schedules and Details E105 Fire Penetration and Fire Alarm Details E106 Telecommunications Plan P101 Plumbing Plans and Specifications P102 Plumbing Details 21048 Ground Rod Detail Division 14 – Conveying Equipment 142400 Hydraulic Elevators - Resolute Elevator (See O&M’s) Divisions 26 - Electrical 260000 Electrical Electrical Technologies, Inc. – Electrical As-builts: E101 Electrical Demolition Plans, Specifications & Symbols Legend E102 Electrical Renovation Plans E103 Power Risers & Details E104 Electrical Panel Schedules and Details E105 Fire Penetration and Fire Alarm Details E106 Telecommunications Plan Divisions 28 – Fire Alarm 283111 Fire Alarm BFPE - Fire Alarm As-builts: FA101 Elevator Lobby Layout FA201 Installation Notes FA202 Detailed Riser 01-21-048 Q21-206 Anticipated: 3/1/2022 Raleigh Inspections Permit No NA (SCO project #19-20134-01A) General Superintendent Keith Chapman Cell phone 336-215-2641 Contractor Pin: Email kchapman@barconstruction.com 057507#Superintendent Curtis Fields ULOCO ticket Cell phone 336-336 317-1032 #Email curtisbar76@gmail.com update:Job Meeting Date & Time 12/29/2021 11am every 2 weeks UNC Chapel Hill Errol Simon Construction Services - CB 1825 T - 103 Airport Drive F - Giles Horney Bldg - Room Number 221 M - 919-903-6169 Chapel Hill, NC 27599-1825 Errol@fac.unc.edu Dwayne Layton Bar Construction Company T - 336-274-2477 611 A Industrial Ave F - 336-274-8694 Greensboro, NC 27406 M - 336-908-4917 dlayton@barconstruction.com Steve Pulling, AIA RND Architects, PA T - 919-490-1266 3608 University Drive, Suite 204 F - Durham, NC 27707 M - Steve@rndpa.com; SPulling@RNDarchitects.com Dennis Hayes / Charles T. Crowl Edmondson Engineers, PA T - 919-544-1936 1920 Hwy 5, Suite 700 F - 919-544-2540 Durham, NC 27713 dennis@edmpa.com Rusty S. Stewart Stewart Elevator Consulting, LLC T - 919-894-1814 Whispering Pines, NC M - 910-514-3071 qei653@gmail.com Shelton Bunting Occupational Safety Consultants T - 336-736-9232 132 Home Place Drive F - Randleman, NC 27317 M - 336-736-9232 tsbunting77@gmail.com Division 1 - General Information Engineer (PME) Elevator Consultant Bar Job No: General Contractor (UNCCH) Cardinal Parking Deck Elevator Modernization (CIP 724 – CN0000 - SCO# 19-20134-01A) Safety Consultant Chapel Hill, NC 27599-6122 Quote No: Owner Architect T-line title: UNC Cardinal Parking Deck Elev 140 Manning Drive Project Completion Date: 12/12/2022 10:50 AM 01-21-048 Q21-206 Anticipated: 3/1/2022 Bar Job No: (UNCCH) Cardinal Parking Deck Elevator Modernization (CIP 724 – CN0000 - SCO# 19-20134-01A) Chapel Hill, NC 27599-6122 Quote No: T-line title: UNC Cardinal Parking Deck Elev 140 Manning Drive Project Completion Date: Chris Hallyburton (Owner) T - 336-399-1162 Northstate Utility Locating, Inc. M - PO Box 9 nslocating.com Colfax, NC 27235 Pam Ringer (Call to Schedule***) T - 336-970-0323 Pam@nslocating.com McKenzie Barnes A Sani-Can Service Inc.T - 336-375-5001 2316 Joe Brown Drive F - 336-375-4454 Greensboro, NC 27405 M - servicegbo@asanican.com Jason Ferguson Concrete Technology Services T - 919-817-3968 2501 Capital Blvd., Ste 104 F - Raleigh, NC M - 919-610-4970 jferguson@ctsinc.org Charles W. Sugg, Sr - President Dixie Coating Company T - 919-735-8924 326 Belfast Road F - 919-735-8920 Goldsboro, NC 27530 M - dixiecoating@raleigh.twcbc.com Eric D. Christian Brock Contract Services T - 919-570-1300 PO Box 33415 F - 919-570-1305 Raleigh, NC 27636 M - echristian@brockcontract.com Jonathan Fox, Vice President T - 919-903-0189 F - 336-232-9789 Resolute Elevator M - 336-792-0862 P.O. BOX 0723 jfox@resoluteelevator.com Snow Camp, NC 27349 Trey Gerringer - Admin Asst T - 919-903-0189 F - 336-232-9789 M - tgerringer@resoluteelevator.com Painting Saw-cut and removal of SOG Chemical Toilet Division 2- Existing Conditions Rubber Tiles for Cab Interior w/ minor floor patch Elevator Private Locate Division 14 - Conveying Equipment Division 9 - Finishes 12/12/2022 10:50 AM 01-21-048 Q21-206 Anticipated: 3/1/2022 Bar Job No: (UNCCH) Cardinal Parking Deck Elevator Modernization (CIP 724 – CN0000 - SCO# 19-20134-01A) Chapel Hill, NC 27599-6122 Quote No: T-line title: UNC Cardinal Parking Deck Elev 140 Manning Drive Project Completion Date: Robert (Bob) R. Carter T 919-773-2008 ext 104 F 919-773-1337 Hockaday Mechanical Corp M - 919-277-0140 or 919-724-2054 3717 Auburn Church Road bob@hmcor.com Garner, NC 27529 Jeremiah Stiers - PM T 919-773-2008 F 919-773-1337 M - 919-414-6474 jeremiah@hmcor.com Wayne Sheppard, PM T - 919-382-3330 F - 919-382-3332 M - 919-730-4457 wayne@trademastersnc.com Rick Moser - President T - 919-382-3330 F - 919-382-3332 Trademasters Services Inc.Service - 919-680-6400 5012 Neal Road Rick@trademastersnc.com Durham, NC 27705 Karen Karns (Karen L. Jackson) T - 919-382-3330 x850 F - 919-382-3332 karen.k@trademastersnc.com Connie (handles COI's) T - 919-382-3330 F - 919-382-3332 connie@trademastersnc.com Joe Hackett AR Contact: 919-382-3330 x-810 accounts_receivable@trademastersnc.com Division 23 - HVAC Division 22 - Plumbing HVAC Plumbing 12/12/2022 10:50 AM 01-21-048 Q21-206 Anticipated: 3/1/2022 Bar Job No: (UNCCH) Cardinal Parking Deck Elevator Modernization (CIP 724 – CN0000 - SCO# 19-20134-01A) Chapel Hill, NC 27599-6122 Quote No: T-line title: UNC Cardinal Parking Deck Elev 140 Manning Drive Project Completion Date: Michael Duquette*** New main contact as of 1/31/2022 T- 336-578-7274 ext 202 F- 336-578-9552 M- (336) 380-9880 michaeld@etiteam.com Jeff Hill Electrical Technologies T- 336-578-7274 PO Box 5127 F- 336-578-9552 [100 Electric Ave, Burlington, NC 27215]M- 336-516-4933 Burlington, NC 27216 hillj@etiteam.com; constructionteam@etiteam.com Timothy D. Shores T- 336-578-7274 ext 202 F- 336-578-9552 M- 336-239-9070 Timothys@etiteam.com; constructionteam@etiteam.com Jacob Sheppard - Fire Alarm Sales (Change Orders) T - 919-550-2699 ext 218 M - 804-525-0181 jsheppard@bfpe.com Jean Paul Foisy - System Designer T - 919-550-2699 M - jfoisy@bfpe.com BFPE International Joe Brown - Installation, Programming and Testing 115 Bestwod Drive T - 919-550-2699 Clayton, NC 27520 F - M - 919-868-6185 jabrown@bfpe.com Brian Donnelly - submittals and shop drawings T - 919-550-2699 M - bdonnelly@bfpe.com Division 26 - Electrical Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security Digital Addressable Fire Alarm System Electrical 12/12/2022 10:50 AM 01 03 00 General ContraCtor 01 BAR Warranty 02 Affidavit of Release of Liens 03 Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims 04 Return Keys Receipt 05 Releases and Waives from each Sub & Supplier with a list Page from Owner email citing article 4) alternate to Article 36 Statement List of BAR’s contracted Subs & Suppliers o Dixie Coating o Resolute Elevator o Trademasters Service o BFPE International o Electrical Technologies o Hockaday Mechanical Corp o Brock Contract Services o Seegars Fence Co., Inc. 06 Receipt of Electrical Certification 19-20134-01a; CIP 724-CN0000 SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 03 05 RELEASES AND WAIVES FROM EACH SUB & SUPPLIER WITH A LIST Page 2 from Owner email dated July 18, 2023 which cites in article 4) an alternate to providing the Article 36 Statement “hold harmless” is Releases & Waives from each Sub & Supplier with a list List of BAR’s contracted Subs & Suppliers providing the Section 316 Release of Liens form attached to the same email from the Owner: o Dixie Coating o Resolute Elevator o Trademasters Service o BFPE International o Electrical Technologies o Hockaday Mechanical Corp o Brock Contract Services o Seegars Fence Co., Inc. 2 Hard copy description: Submit (3) hard copies of O&M docs in 3 ring binder with (2) thumb drives total  (paper clipped to ring of (2) binders).        Also include the following electronically and in the binder.   I’ll need items 1‐7 from you; see attached docs for your use.   Return Keys receipt for all keys and passes.       REQUIRED DOCUMENTS DEPARTMENT  1) Certificate for Payment   (AIA Doc G702 or Equivalent)   Include. Appendix E.  Contractor  2) Prime Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment  (Section 317 or AIA G706)  Contractor  3) Release of Liens –  (Section 316 or AIA Doc G706A)  Contractor  4) Article 36 Statement   (“hold harmless”)  OR  Releases & Waives from each Sub & Supplier  with a list  Contractor  5) Consent of Surety – Code/Item Only  (AIA Doc G707)   Contractor  6) Warranties & Guarantees Contractor  7) Receipt of Electrical Certification Contractor  8) Certificate of Compliance – Starts on final  equipment acceptance  Designer  9) Certificate of Completion Designer       Thanks, Errol Simon : UNC Construction Manager : errol@fac.unc.edu; Phone:  919.903.6169(m.)   From: Dwayne Layton <dlayton@barconstruction.com>   Sent: Monday, July 17, 2023 2:12 PM  To: Simon, Errol <errol@fac.unc.edu>; dennis <dennis@edmpa.com>; Vasavada, Sejalben T <sejv@unc.edu>;  Meinert, Michael <misha.meinert@fac.unc.edu>  Cc: Steve Pulling <steve@rndpa.com>; Matthews, Justin Byron <jbmatthe@email.unc.edu>; Register, Cindy  <cynthia.register@facilities.unc.edu>; Timothy Shores <Timothys@etiteam.com>; Zettel, Paul R  <zettel@psafety.unc.edu>  Subject: RE: Inspection CIP‐724, Inspection‐Cardinal Deck Elevator Replacement    Errol,    ETI completed their work on Friday and sent pictures to Dennis.  Please let me know if you have any  questions.  Thanks.      Dwayne Layton  Project Manager  BAR Construction Company  611‐A Industrial Ave.  SECTION 2 WARRANTIES Division 01 – General Section 017700 Contractor’s Warranty BAR Construction Company Inc. Division 09 – Finishes Section 096519 - Resilient Tile Flooring - Brock Contract Services Section 099123 - Interior Painting - Dixie Coating Company Division 14 – Conveying Equipment Section 142400 Hydraulic Elevators - Resolute Elevator Division 22 - Plumbing 220000 Plumbing - Hockaday Mechanical Corporation Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 230000 Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) - Trademasters Services Inc. Division 26 - Electrical Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding - Electrical Technologies, Inc. Divisions 28 – Electronic Safety and Security 283111 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System - BFPE International P.O Box 723 Snow Camp, North Carolina 27349 Tel: 919.903.0189 Fax: 336.232.9789 www.ResoluteElevator.com Warranty Statement Equipment manufactured and sold by Resolute Elevator LLC is backed by the following warranty: For the benefit of the original user Resolute Elevator LLC warrants all new equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship; and will replace or repair, any part or parts which Resolute Elevators’ examination shows to have failed under normal use and service by the original user within one year following initial certification inspection by the State. Such repair or replacement shall be free of charge for work performed during regular working hours of the elevator trade. Resolute Elevator LLC obligation under this warranty is conditioned upon its receiving prompt notice of claimed defects. In the event of modernization this warranty shall not extend to any parts or components not installed, replaced, or refurbished by Resolute Elevator LLC during the modernization process. Any issues caused by or pertaining to these parts and components are expressly excluded from this warranty and shall be the responsibility of the owner. This warranty is expressly made by Resolute Elevator LLC and accepted by the purchaser in lieu of all other warranties including warranties of merchantability and fitness for purposes, whether written, oral, expressed, implied or statutory. Resolute Elevator LLC shall not be liable for normal wear and tear, nor any contingent, incidental, or consequential damage or expense due to partial or complete inoperability of the subject equipment for any reason whatsoever. This warranty shall not apply to equipment or parts thereof which have been altered or repaired, or damaged by improper application, or subjected to misuse, neglect, or accident. This warranty is void if maintenance is not administered as per Resolute Elevator’s MCP Program, all warranty and Maintenance work must be completed by Resolute Elevator technicians during this warranty period. Maintenance: Resolute Elevator LLC shall furnish maintenance and call back service at our negotiated rate only on the components replaced or refurbished by Resolute Elevator LLC on the elevator only for the period, if any, specified in the contract documents from when the elevator was inspected by the State or placed in use. This service shall consist of examination of equipment, adjustments, lubrication, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep equipment in proper operation, except such adjustments, parts or repairs made necessary by abuse, misuse, or any other causes beyond control of Resolute Elevator LLC. Trained employees of Resolute Elevator will do the work during our regular work hours. Resolute Elevator, LLC Owner:______________________________ Project:________________________________ Contact Name:_________________________ Signature: ______________________________ Signature:_____________________________ Print name: _____________________________ Phone #:______________________________ Warranty Effective Date: __________________ Email:________________________________ SECTion 3 o&M’S (opEraTion & MainTEnanCE ManualS) Division 09 – Finishes Section 099123 - Interior Painting - Dixie Coating Company Maintenance & Repair Procedures Division 14 – Conveying Equipment Section 142400 Hydraulic Elevators - Resolute Elevator UNC-CH Cardinal Parking Deck Close Out Warranty Final Acceptance Hydraulic Acceptance Test NCDOL Inspection Report Resolute O&M’s •GAL Manufacturing o Galaxy eHydro Connection Drawings o Controller Drawings o GALaxy eHydro Controller System •MOVFR Door Operator o Installation Manual •EECO o Layout Drawings o Jackunits •IDEC Elevator Products •INNOVATION INDUSTRIES As-Builts Division 22 - Plumbing 221429 Sump Pump - Hockaday Mechanical Corporation Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 238126.13 Ductless Minisplit - Trademasters Services Inc. Division 26 - Electrical Section 260000 - Electrical - Electrical Technologies, Inc. O&M Manual Gear Lighting Panel D Punch List Warranty Divisions 28 – Electronic Safety and Security 283111 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System - BFPE International P.O. Box 723 Snow Camp, NC 27349 P: 919-903-0189 F: 336-232-9789 State ID: 8359 UNC-CH Cardinal Parking Deck Close Out P.O Box 723 Snow Camp, North Carolina 27349 Tel: 919.903.0189 Fax: 336.232.9789 www.ResoluteElevator.com Warranty Statement Equipment manufactured and sold by Resolute Elevator LLC is backed by the following warranty: For the benefit of the original user Resolute Elevator LLC warrants all new equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship; and will replace or repair, any part or parts which Resolute Elevators’ examination shows to have failed under normal use and service by the original user within one year following initial certification inspection by the State. Such repair or replacement shall be free of charge for work performed during regular working hours of the elevator trade. Resolute Elevator LLC obligation under this warranty is conditioned upon its receiving prompt notice of claimed defects. In the event of modernization this warranty shall not extend to any parts or components not installed, replaced, or refurbished by Resolute Elevator LLC during the modernization process. Any issues caused by or pertaining to these parts and components are expressly excluded from this warranty and shall be the responsibility of the owner. This warranty is expressly made by Resolute Elevator LLC and accepted by the purchaser in lieu of all other warranties including warranties of merchantability and fitness for purposes, whether written, oral, expressed, implied or statutory. Resolute Elevator LLC shall not be liable for normal wear and tear, nor any contingent, incidental, or consequential damage or expense due to partial or complete inoperability of the subject equipment for any reason whatsoever. This warranty shall not apply to equipment or parts thereof which have been altered or repaired, or damaged by improper application, or subjected to misuse, neglect, or accident. This warranty is void if maintenance is not administered as per Resolute Elevator’s MCP Program, all warranty and Maintenance work must be completed by Resolute Elevator technicians during this warranty period. Maintenance: Resolute Elevator LLC shall furnish maintenance and call back service at our negotiated rate only on the components replaced or refurbished by Resolute Elevator LLC on the elevator only for the period, if any, specified in the contract documents from when the elevator was inspected by the State or placed in use. This service shall consist of examination of equipment, adjustments, lubrication, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep equipment in proper operation, except such adjustments, parts or repairs made necessary by abuse, misuse, or any other causes beyond control of Resolute Elevator LLC. Trained employees of Resolute Elevator will do the work during our regular work hours. Resolute Elevator, LLC Owner:______________________________ Project:________________________________ Contact Name:_________________________ Signature: ______________________________ Signature:_____________________________ Print name: _____________________________ Phone #:______________________________ Warranty Effective Date: __________________ Email:________________________________ N C Department of Labor Elevator Bureau 1101 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, NC 27699-1101 INSPECTION REPORT IMPORTANT: Always use State Number in any correspondence relating to your equipment www.nclabor.com/elevator.htm 919-707-7927 Report Number 22318-91-035 State Number 8359 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- EQUIPMENT INSPECTED -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- State Number: 8359 Type of Unit: Passenger Floor to Floor: 1 to 4 Capacity: 2500 Manuf: OTIS Speed: 100 Landings: 4 Installed: 05/23/1975 Rope Size: Volts: 440 Complied: 06/11/1975 Entrances: 1 OWNER OCCUPANT U.N.C.CARDINAL DECK C B 1815 AIRPORT DRIVE MANNING DRIVE CHAPEL HILL, NC, 27514 CHAPEL HILL, NC, 27514 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- INSPECTION INFORMATION -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Inspection Date 11/08/2022 Type Inspection Alteration Certificate Status Issued Inspector 91 - Dixon County ORANGE 68 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- VIOLATIONS -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- SCOPE Modernization of Passenger Elev-New Controller, Pumping Unit, Hoistway Door, Tracks etc... [recd 07/13/2022] Notify the Elevator Bureau in writing on Corrected Violations Form when the following corrections have been made in order to bring your equipment into complainace with current codes. Violations pointed out to: Dan M. RESOLUTE Inspector __________________________ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- THIS IS NOT AN INVOICE To make changes to the invoice mailing address please call: 919-733-0372 An invoice will be mailed to: U.N.C. C B 1815 AIRPORT DRIVE CHAPEL HILL, NC, 27514 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Page 1 of 1 P.O. Box 723 Snow Camp, NC 27349 P: 919-903-0189 F: 336-232-9789 State ID: 8359 UNC-CH Cardinal Parking Deck Close Out P.O Box 723 Snow Camp, North Carolina 27349 Tel: 919.903.0189 Fax: 336.232.9789 www.ResoluteElevator.com GAL Manufacturing Corporation RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG1-JOB.DWG 4/28/2022 201 DRAWN BY ENGINEER REV DESCRIPTION DATE DOCUMENT # DATE SHEET OF GAL VERSION # GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 BY A B C D E F G H 1 2 3 4 5 CASE 10.49.0 KH 1 -X - 2 -X - 3 -X - 4 -X - RJC RJC 11" X 17" 120 VAC 1Ø 60HZ 15A 120V L15A L15 L15 EG EG EG EG EG EG L25 CONTROL CABINET LIGHT L1 L2 GFCI DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. BY 6 7 8 9 10 A B C D E F G H X4 X2 X1 X3 X2 X4 GND LIN SYSTEM TRANS AGC L120 3A AGC S10 3A AGC L24 3A AGC C24 3A MDL DP1 4A AGC C120 3A MDL DP2 4A S10 L120 C120-T4 S10-T3 C24V-T7 24VDC C24VF* C24 TRAVELER 24VDCC L24C L24 CONTROLLER L24V 24VDCC C24C* C24C-T6 24VDC L24VF* L24C X1 *DFC DOOR PWR DP1-T1 X4 *DFP DP2-T2 L120 GND 24VDCC 24VDC 24VDC PWR +- 24 VDC PWR GALX-1135AN eHYDRO POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD NP 5 6 NP 13 14 EML 1 2 EML 3 4 UPO1 UPO2 EG 6A 120V 6A 120V DIS DIS1 UPS NPP 9 1 NP 21 22 EMLA1 A2 GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/8/18 INTERLOCKED WITH NP OUTPUT INPUT DISCONECT 1.0 UPI1 UPI2 DIS 1L1 2T1 DIS 5L3 6T3 EG UP1 UP2 LEGEND TERMINAL ON GALX-1135AN TERMINAL NOT ON GAL BOARD WIRE, FIELD(BY OTHERS) TRACE, P.C. BOARD WIRE, CONTROL POWER WIRE, GND / COMMON WIRE, 24V WIRE, EARTH GROUND EML MOTOR STARTER POWER MAIN LINE DISCONNECT AND FUSES FUSED 15A DISCONNECT CAB LIGHTS AND CONTROLLER LIGHT POWER EARTH GROUND AUX DEVICES TRAVEL CABLE MOTOR LINE FILTER 120VAC SIGNAL POWER 120VAC LOGIC POWER 120VAC CAR POWER 24V CAR POWER 24V LOGIC POWER DOOR POWER TRANSFORMER 0 H6 20 8 H5 23 0 H4 46 0 H2 24 X6 0 X4 11 5 X3 23 0 X1 24 0 H3 48 0 H1 X2 0 X5 SYSTEM COM 115VAC 230VAC 480V L1 480V 480 VAC 3PH 60HZ L3 NP 3 4 NP 1 2 L2 NPA1 A2 NPP 12 8 EML 21 22 H4 H2 H3 H1 X1 X2 AT Q EM L 1 A XF EML TRANSFORMER 50VA NPP13 14 INTERLOCKED WITH EML L2-EML ATQ ATQ 0.3A 0.3A L1-EML RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG2-POWER1.DWG 4/28/2022 202 750VA 2A 2A RJC 11" X 17" RJC TRF 9 5 TRF 9 1 J1 JUMP ONLY ON DISPATCH CAR POWERS THE FIRE AND EMERGENCY CIRCUITS TRH 9 5 TRH 9 1 J2 JUMP ONLY ON DISPATCH CAR POWERS THE HALL CALL CIRCUITS FEP HCP DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. BY 11 12 13 14 15 A B C D E F G H L120 AGC FEP 3A AGC HCP 2A TRF13 14 TRH13 14 HCO FEO 5VDC POWER SUPPLY CPU BOARD GALX-1132AN +5V 0V +5V 0V MDL F1 3A CONNECT FEP CAR TO CAR TO CAR n-1 FEI TO CAR n-1 HCI CONNECT HCP CAR TO CAR CONNECTOR BOARD MACHINE ROOM CAN GND L24V L24C HALL CALL FIRE/EMP FEI TO CAR n+1 FEO HCI TO CAR n+1 HCO HCOM CONNECT HCOM CAR TO CAR24DCC 24VDC 24VDC L120 GND LIN GND GALX-1135AN POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD AREA E8 POWER FOR CONTROLLER I/O BOARDS AREA E9 GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/8/18 1.0 FEPW* HCF* HCOM* 24VDC 24VDC 24VDCC LEGEND TERMINAL ON GALX-1111AN TERMINAL ON GALX-1121AN TERMINAL ON GALX-1135/1116AN TERMINAL NOT ON GAL BOARD WIRE, FIELD(BY OTHERS) TRACE, P.C. BOARD WIRE, CONTROL POWER WIRE, GND / COMMON WIRE, 24V WIRE, EARTH GROUND SEE AREA E10 TWISTED PAIR TERMINAL ON GALX-1132AN GND LIN 5V 0V +5V +5V 0V 0V L24V L24C L120 GND C2L C2H +5V +5V 0V 0V +24V 24CM 120V GND GALX-1111AN MOTHER BOARD GALX-1121AN C2LC2L C2H +5V C2H +5V +5V+5V 0V0V 0V +24V 0V +24V 24CM24CM 120V GND 120V GND RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG3-POWER2.DWG 4/28/2022 203 GOV-H23 11" X 17" CAR TOP STOP FIREFIGHTERS STOP GOV FSTP1 FSTP PIT SWITCH BROKEN TAPE CONT'R STOP S10-H24 GOV-H22 PS-H19 PS-H18 HSS-H17 HSS-T18 HSS HSS-T18 CAR SAFETIES EXT CSS CSS-IN1 CTS-IN2 CTS FFSW CST CST-T17 FFSW CTS CSS GND-T5 GND-T5 CST-T17 FSTi MRSW CST MRSW RUN CIRCUITS POWER AREA A29 120VAC SIGNAL POWER AREA G10 HOISTWAY CAR MACHINE ROOM SAFETIES SAFETIES SAFETIES INSPECTION SWITCH POWER AREA B36 S10 IN CAR STOP DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. BY 16 17 18 19 20 A B C D E F G H TOP TERM LIMIT TLH-H21 TLH-H20 EMERGENCY EXIT HSS EXT MOD 3-7 MOD 3-6 MOD 3-5 MOD 2-1 MOD 7-4 EXT ON GALX1134 Note: Additional hatch safties may be put in series with the broken tape switch. GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/8/18 1.0 IM-7 ON GALX1134 IM-5 ON GALX1134 IM-6 ON GALX1134 IM-3 IM-2 ON GALX1134 LEGEND TERMINAL ON GALX-1134AN TERMINAL ON GALX-1121AN TERMINAL NOT ON GAL BOARD WIRE, FIELD(BY OTHERS) TRACE, P.C. BOARD WIRE, CONTROL POWER WIRE, GND / COMMON WIRE, 24V WIRE, EARTH GROUND OUTPUT, TRIAC INPUT INPUT Note: Additional car safeties may be put in series here. RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG4-SAFETIES.DWG 4/28/2022 204 RJC 11" X 17" GND COMMON AREA E9 RJC 120VAC SIGNAL POWER AREA G10 S10-S6 DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. BY 21 22 23 24 25 A B C D E F G H LOS LOS-S4 TPL TPL-S3 OIL LEVEL LOW OIL TEMP LOW LPS LPS-S5 MOD 3-1 MOD 3-2 MOD 3-3 GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/8/18 LOW PRESSURE 1.0 9 5 BFR LEGEND TERMINAL ON GALX-1121AN TERMINAL NOT ON GAL BOARD WIRE, FIELD(BY OTHERS) TRACE, P.C. BOARD WIRE, CONTROL POWER WIRE, GND / COMMON WIRE, 120V WIRE, EARTH GROUND INPUT INPUT, I/O RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG5-RELAYS.DWG 4/28/2022 205 RJC RJC 11" X 17" CONTROLLED BY MAIN MICRO THROUGH THE SAFETY PAL DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. BY 26 27 28 29 30 A B C D E F G H C 61 62 FACTORY SETTINGS START TIME START MODE SOFT STOP TIME PHASE ROTATION ABC OFF OFF 2 SEC. 1 2 3 4 5 6 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ON OFF 1-OFF,2-OFF,8-OFF 3-OFF 6-OFF,7-OFF 9-OFF FUNCTION VALUE SW SETTING S&S SOFTSTARTER C 61 62 9897 CA2 A1 OVLD/FLT CURRENT LIMIT 300%/35%4-OFF,5-ON PHASE IMBALANCE ENABLED 10-OFF 7 8 IN2 OVERLOAD TRIP CLASS 10 11-ON,12-OFF OVERLOAD RESET AUTO 13-ON AUX #1 SETTING UP-TO-SPEED 14-ON MOTOR CONN. TYPE DELTA 15-OFF STOP DELAY 0.0 SEC.16-OFF 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1-L1 PB1 C 1-L1 2-T1 3-L2 PB2 C 3-L2 4-T2 5-L3 PB3 C 5-L3 6-T3 T6 2-T1 T4 4-T2 T5 6-T3 A2 A1 1413 UP TO SPEED IN1 12 9 5 2 6 3 10 7 4 1 11 8 PUMP MOTOR #1 MOTOR STARTER POWER GNDCOMMON AREA E9 MTO MCI MC CONTROLLER ENABLE AREA E19 MRSW S10SIGNAL POWER AREA H9 GND COMMON AREA E9 SPD SPD CFLT CFLT MRSW-S2 P STE P MC TPH TPH-S1 MTO OVERLOAD THERMAL MOTOR OVERLOAD THERMAL MOTOR WITHOUT HOT OIL THERM THERMOSTAT HOT OIL WITHOUT MOD 3-4 MOD 7-5 MOD 7-6 MOD 7-7 MOD 7-8 GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/8/18 P OUTPUT 1.0 STE LEGEND TERMINAL ON GALX-1121AN TERMINAL NOT ON GAL BOARD WIRE, FIELD(BY OTHERS) TRACE, P.C. BOARD WIRE, CONTROL POWER WIRE, GND / COMMON WIRE, 120V WIRE, EARTH GROUND RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG6-STARTER.DWG 4/28/2022 206 RJC RJC 11" X 17" CONTROLLED BY MAIN MICRO RELAY13 14 THROUGH THE SAFETY PAL INPUT DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. BY 31 32 33 34 35 A B C D E F G H RJC RJC 11" X 17" BY MAIN MICRO LEGEND THROUGH THE INPUT P OUTPUT CONTROLLED BY NTS PROCESSOR THROUGH THE SAFETY PAL P OUTPUT GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/8/18 1.0 6 7 5 4 8 10 UP LEVELING DOWN FULL SPEED DOWN LEVELING +24VDC 1 2 3 BLAIN VALVE 19 + SIGNAL - RUN 3L2 4T2 DOWN 1L1 2T1 UP 4T2 3L2 SUF 5 9 SDF 9 5 INS 9 5 DOWN 4T2 3L2 3 COND. SHIELDED COLOR CODE FOR REFERENCE ONLY BY: OTHERS DOWN UP SUi SDFi SDi RUNi SUFi POWER AREA E19 SUF SU SD SDF GND MRSW UNi DNi UTi DTi SUFC SUC SDC SDFC RUNR13 14P RUN RUNR 5 9 TSD P SDF P SD P SU P SUF RUN CIRUITS SUF SU SD SDF SUFC SUC SDC SDFC RUNR13 14P RUN Term Speed Dev P SDF P SD P SU P SUF TSD MOD 6-3 MOD 4-5 MOD 4-1 MOD 4-6 MOD 4-2 MOD 4-8 MOD 4-4 MOD 4-7 MOD 4-3 MOD 6-1 GALX-1145AN 1314SDF DF SC GALX-1145AN A2A1DOWN SD SC GALX-1145AN A2A1UP U SC GALX-1145AN 1413SUF UF SC GALX-1145AN A2A1RUN MRSW SC UP FULL SPEED INSPECTION GALX-1145AN BOARD BLAIN SEV CARD BSD 7 1 2 3 4 5 12 GALX-1145AN 1413INS IN IN1 GND AREA E8 L24V L24V AREA H8 UP 21 22 DOWN 22 21 RUN 22 21 CCF1CCF IHS CCF IHS CCF L24C AREA H8 AREA H8 P UT P UN P DN P DT L24V DOWN STOP VALVE 11 12 13 MRSW AREA A31 20 18 17 R1 1413BFR TERMINAL ON GALX-1121AN TERMINAL NOT ON GAL BOARD TERMINAL ON I/O BOARD WIRE, FIELD(BY OTHERS) TRACE, P.C. BOARD WIRE, 120V WIRE, GND / COMMON WIRE, 24V WIRE, EARTH GROUND RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG7-VALVE.DWG 4/28/2022 207 RJC RJC 11" X17" INSPECTION CONTROLLER UP DOWN AUTO MRIN MRIU MRID INS IU ID ICA-T12 INS-IN4 ID-IN7 IU-IN5 ICA-T12 ICC CTA-IN3 BYPASS POLE #1POLE #1 SW1 SW2 CAR HOISTWAY BYPASSINSPECTION/ ACCESS INSP NORM ICI ICI-T11ICI ACCESS ACC TAU TAD BAU BAD ACC-T10 BAD-H12 BAU-H13 TAU-H10 TAD-H9 ACC TOP ACCESS UP OFF DN BOT ACCESS UP OFF DN ENABLE IEN IEN-IN6 INS-T16 ID-T14 IU-T15 IEN-T13 INS-T16 ID-T14 IU-T15 IEN-T13 MRIE ICA ICI-T11 ACC-T10 COMMON AREA E9 GND DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. BY 36 37 38 39 40 A B C D E F G H Controller Enable AREA E19 MRSW-H11 GLB MRSW-H14 MOD 7-3 MOD 7-2 MOD 7-1 MOD 8-8 MOD 5-6 MOD 5-1 MOD 6-8 MOD 6-6 MOD 6-7 MOD 6-5 MOD 8-6 MOD 8-7 MOD 2-7 MOD 2-8 MOD 2-5 MOD 2-6 FLCT-IN8 FBCT-IN9 C24C-IN10 C24V-T7FLCT FBCT C24V-T7 24V CAR POWER AREA H9 GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/8/18 C24C-T6 24V CAR POWER AREA H9C24C-T6 1.0 OMOD-1 OMOD-2 LEGEND TERMINAL ON GALX-1121AN TERMINAL ON GALX-1134AN TERMINAL NOT ON GAL BOARD WIRE, FIELD(BY OTHERS) TRACE, P.C. BOARD WIRE, GND / COMMON INPUT INPUT, I/O INS UP INS DN ENABLE INSPECTION NORM INS FIRE LIGHT CAR TOP FIRE BUZZER CAR TOP CTS-IN2INSPECTION SWITCH POWER AREA E17 RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG8-INSPECTION.DWG 4/28/2022 208 CT-18 RJC RJC 11" X 17" (TOP ACCESS FLOOR) (NON-ACCESS FLOORS) (BOTTOM ACCESS FLOOR) DLT-H3 DLM-H5 DLB-H7 BYPASS HOISTWAY POLE #2SW2 DLT DLT-1 DLM DLM-1 DLB DLB-1 LBP COMMON AREA E9 GND 120VAC AREA G10 S10-H4 S10120 VAC AREA G10 SIGNAL POWER SIGNAL POWER DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. BY 41 42 43 44 45 A B C D E F G H S10-H6 S10-H8 MOD 5-5 MOD 1-5 MOD 1-6 MOD 1-3 MOD 1-4 MOD 1-1 MOD 1-2 GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/8/18 1.0 LEGEND TERMINAL ON GALX-1121AN TERMINAL NOT ON GAL BOARD WIRE, FIELD(BY OTHERS) TRACE, P.C. BOARD INPUT INPUT, I/O TERMINAL ON GALX-1123AN NOTE: CONTACTS SHOWN WITH THE DOORS IN THE CLOSED AND LOCKED POSITION. HOISTWAY DOOR INTERLOCK HOISTWAY DOOR INTERLOCK FRONT HOISTWAY DOOR INTERLOCK RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG9-LOCKS.DWG 4/28/2022 209 DP1-D1 DP2-D2 DP1-T1 DP2-T2 OPERATOR G.A.L. MOVFR DOOR LI N E CN3 SHLD CANL CANH WITH CAN-BUS INTERFACE GS-T9GS-T9 GS GS-1 CAR GATE S10-T3S10-T3S10-D3 GS-D4 BYPASS CAR POLE #2SW1 GBP 120 VAC AREA H9 S10 COMMON AREA E9 GND CANH CANL SHLD CANH YEL-R CANL YEL-W CANH YEL-R CANL YEL-W COMMUNICATION TO GALX-1132AN CPU BOARD CAN-SHLD TWISTED SHIELDED PAIR GS1 GS DP1-T1 DP2-T2 DOOR POWER AREA H7 SIGNAL POWER 120VAC SIGNAL POWER AREA H10 MOUNTED IN COP OR ON CAR TOP CLOSE OPEN NUDG HEAVY DCL DOL DPM EE CONTROLLER OUTPUTS INPUTS 0V LC/SE +V REOPEN 0V LC/SE +V REOPEN EDGE DETECTOR GALX-1134 BOARD RJC RJC AUTO DOOR SW4 AD IND SW3 IND DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. BY 46 47 48 49 50 A B C D E F G H GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/8/18 JP2 FRONT DOOR JUMP FOR 1.0 MOD 8-5 MOD 8-6 MOD 5-7 MOD 5-3 MOD 5-4 L1 L2 LEGEND TERMINAL ON GALX-1121/35AN TERMINAL ON GALX-1134AN TERMINAL NOT ON GAL BOARD TERMINAL ON I/O BOARD WIRE, FIELD(BY OTHERS) TRACE, P.C. BOARD WIRE, CONTROL POWER WIRE, GND / COMMON WIRE, 24V WIRE, EARTH GROUNDTERMINAL ON RELAY BOARD RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG10-DOOR_OPERATOR.DWG 4/28/2022 2010 RJC RJC 11" X17" COMMUNICATION TO GALX-1121AN COMMUNICATION TO GALX-1121AN NTS PROCESSOR C120-T4 GND-T5 C120-T4 GND-T5 GALX-1134AN COP BOARD COMMON AREA E9 120VAC SIGNAL POWER AREA G10 CANH CANL SHIELD CANH/BLUE-R CANL/BLUE-W CANH CANL SHLD TWISTED SHIELDED PAIR CANH/RED-R CANL/RED-W TWISTED SHIELDED PAIR 24 VDC SEL CAN NTS CAN RJ45 SELECTOR GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/8/18 1.0 BRACKET AT EACH FLOOR CLIP SHOW WITH CAR AT FLOOR LEVEL CAMERA 1 CAMERA 2 ABSOLUTE ENCODED TAPE RESOLUTION .5MM SIL 3 CERTIFIED OPTICAL POSITIONING HEAD LEGEND TERMINAL ON GALX-1121AN TERMINAL ON GALX-1134AN TERMINAL NOT ON GAL BOARD WIRE, FIELD(BY OTHERS) TRACE, P.C. BOARD WIRE, CONTROL POWER WIRE, GND / COMMON WIRE, 24V WIRE, EARTH GROUND WIRE, TWISTED SHIELD RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG11-SELECTOR.DWG 4/28/2022 2011 DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 BY 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/9/18 51 52 53 54 55 A B C D E F G H 11" X 17" SW1 CONFIG ONTEST R->T R->A MES POS +5V 0V +5V 0V +24V 24CM C24V C24C +5V+5V 0V0V C2HC2H C2LC2L 120V GND C120 GND COM/CE1 +V/CE2 DATA/CE3 GALX-1134AN COP BOARD 24VDC CE 3 WIRE CE3 C.E. DIGITAL P.I. CE2 CE1 SEE PI MANUFACTURER'S MANUAL FOR SWITCH CONFIGURATIONCAR PI DISPLAY TO I/O BOARDS MOUNTED IN COP OR ON THE CAR TOP C120-T4 C24V-T7 GND-T5 C120-T4 C24V-T7 GND-T5 IN COP OR ON CAR TOP C24C-T6C24C-T6 GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/8/18 COMMON 120V CAR POWER 24V CAR COMMON 24V CAR POWER 5VDC LOGIC POWER CAR CAN BUS CPU CAR CAN BUS CPU 5VDC LOGIC POWER 5VDC LOGIC POWER 5VDC LOGIC POWER CHIME CE3 CE2 CE1 LEGEND TERMINAL ON GALX-1111AN TERMINAL ON GALX-1134 TERMINAL ON GALX-1114 TERMINAL NOT ON GAL BOARD TERMINAL ON GALX-1123AN WIRE, FIELD(BY OTHERS) TRACE, P.C. BOARD COMMON AREA E9 120V CAR POWER AREA G9 24V CAR POWER AREA G9 24V CAR POWER AREA G9 CE CAB LANTERNS TYPICAL GALX-1111AN CONNECTOR BOAD RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG12-PI.DWG 4/28/2022 2012 DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 BY 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/9/18 56 57 58 59 60 A B C D E F G H RJC RJC 11" X 17" CAR (CAB) LIGHTS L15 L25 EG EG L25 L15 IN POWER CABINET L15 L25 EG EG L25 L15 IN COP TRAVEL CABLE BLACK WHITE GREEN CAB LIGHTS & CONTROLLER LIGHT POWER AREA C6 EARTH GROUND AREA A7 CAR LIGHTS FAN HIGH OFF LOW EM LT TEST 120VAC OUTLET LIG LIGSLIGHT 1 9 FANSFANFAN 9 1 2 SPD FAN CAR TOP LIGHT ON CAR TOP LT SW 120VAC OUTLET GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/8/18 1.0 LIGHT13 14 FAN13 14 5V 0VQ3 Q2 LOCAL 5V ON GALX-1134 LOCAL 0V ON GALX-1134 LEGEND TERMINAL ON GALX-1136AN TERMINAL ON GALX-1134AN TERMINAL ON GALX-1121AN TERMINAL NOT ON GAL BOARD TERMINAL ON GALX-1123AN WIRE, FIELD(BY OTHERS) TRACE, P.C. BOARD WIRE, CONTROL POWER WIRE, GND / COMMON WIRE, 24V WIRE, EARTH GROUND EM LIGHT PWR PK -+BELL AC -+LAMPS ALARM ALARM ALARM BELL EMERGENCY LIGHT RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG13-CAR_LIGHTING.DWG 4/28/2022 2013 DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 BY 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/9/18 61 62 63 64 65 A B C D E F G H FIELD WIRE TRACE ON A BOARD TERMINAL ON COP NAME TERMINAL ON CAR TOP BOX NAME IN M A I N C O P GALX-1134 GND 120V 24CM +24V 0V 0V +5V +5V C2H C2L BOARD GALX-1123AN GND 120V 24CM +24V 0V 0V +5V +5V C2H C2L GND 120V 24CM +24V 0V 0V +5V +5V C2H C2L BOARD(S) GALX-1111AN CONN BOARD(S) GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/8/18 1.0 TWISTED SHIELDED PAIR RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG14-COP_CONNECTIONS.DWG 4/28/2022 2014 DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 BY 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/9/18 66 67 68 69 70 A B C D E F G H LEGEND TERMINAL NOT ON GAL BOARD WIRE, FIELD(BY OTHERS) TRACE, P.C. BOARD WIRE, CONTROL POWER WIRE, GND / COMMON WIRE, 24V WIRE, EARTH GROUND DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. BY WIRE, 120V TERMINAL ON GALX-1134AN TERMINAL ON GALX-1135AN TERMINAL ON GALX-1121AN FAN L120 AREA H9 COMMON AREA E8 EHYDRO COOLING FANS RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG15-Optional.DWG 4/28/2022 2015 DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 BY 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/9/18 71 72 73 74 75 A B C D E F G H DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 BY 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/9/18 76 77 78 79 80 A B C D E F G H RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG16-IO-Cntlr1.DWG 4/28/2022 2016 GN D 12 0 V 24 C M +2 4 V 0V 0V +5 V +5 V C2 H C2 L GN D 12 0 V 24 C M +2 4 V 0V 0V +5 V +5 V C2 H C2 L 24 VAC/DC I/O EXPANDER CANCAN ENABLE COMM: FLASHING = COMMUNICATING TO MAIN CPU MCU: FLASHING = BOARD IS OPERATING +5V: ON SOLID = +5V IS ON INFO PUSH TO DISPLAY I/O ON DISPLAY GALX-1111AN HIGH RISE J4 BUS TERM J1 J2 J3 CONTROLLER I/O 1 FEP FS BP FSX MES ALT MRS HWS HWS2 EMP 5VDC LOGIC POWER AREA D12 LOCAL CAN BUS LCANH & LCANL FROM CPU BOARD FEPAREA D13 NOTE: FIRE MAIN FLOOR DEFAULT SETTING IS FIRST LANDING. FIRE ALT FLOOR DEFAULT SETTING IS SECOND LANDING. CHANGE PARAMETERS -> ADJUSTABLE VARIABLE -> EMERGENCY SERVICE. L24CAREA H8 IN1 IN2 IN3 FIRE PH1 RESET FIRE SERV NORM IN4 AUX FIRE IN5 ANY SMOKE DETECT IN6 EGRESS SMOKE DETECT IN7 MACHINE ROOM SMOKE DETECT IN8 HOISTWAY SMOKE DETECT #1 IN9 HOISTWAY SMOKE DETECT #2 EML 5 6 IN10 GALX-1149AN SW1 CONFIG ON1 2 4 8 16 32 FLIP AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 1-32: ADDRESS FLIP: ROTATES TEXT 180° AUX1: TOGGLE 24/12 INPUTS AUX2: FUTURE USE AUX3: FUTURE USE GN D 12 0 V 24 C M +2 4 V 0V 0V +5 V +5 V C2 H C2 L GN D 12 0 V 24 C M +2 4 V 0V 0V +5 V +5 V C2 H C2 L 24 VAC/DC I/O EXPANDER CANCAN ENABLE COMM: FLASHING = COMMUNICATING TO MAIN CPU MCU: FLASHING = BOARD IS OPERATING +5V: ON SOLID = +5V IS ON INFO PUSH TO DISPLAY I/O ON DISPLAY GALX-1111AN HIGH RISE J4 BUS TERM J1 J2 J3 CONTROLLER I/O 1 RTLH 5VDC LOGIC POWER AREA D12 LOCAL CAN BUS LCANH & LCANL FROM CPU BOARD L24VAREA H8 L24CAREA H8 IN13 LOBBY RETURN GALX-1149AN SW1 CONFIG ON1 2 4 8 16 32 FLIP AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 1-32: ADDRESS FLIP: ROTATES TEXT 180° AUX1: TOGGLE 24/12 INPUTS AUX2: FUTURE USE AUX3: FUTURE USE DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 BY 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/9/18 81 82 83 84 85 A B C D E F G H RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG17-IO-Cntlr2.DWG 4/28/2022 2017 GN D 12 0 V 24 C M +2 4 V 0V 0V +5 V +5 V C2 H C2 L GN D 12 0 V 24 C M +2 4 V 0V 0V +5 V +5 V C2 H C2 L 24 VAC/DC I/O EXPANDER CANCAN ENABLE COMM: FLASHING = COMMUNICATING TO MAIN CPU MCU: FLASHING = BOARD IS OPERATING +5V: ON SOLID = +5V IS ON INFO PUSH TO DISPLAY I/O ON DISPLAY GALX-1111AN HIGH RISE J4 BUS TERM J1 J2 J3 CONTROLLER I/O 2 OPENL OSERL ISER FLH IHSi CCF MSPI1 MSPI2 MSPI3 5VDC LOGIC POWER AREA D12 LOCAL CAN BUS LCANH & LCANL FROM CPU BOARD L24VAREA H8 L24CAREA H8 OUT1DOOR OPEN LIGHT OUT2OUT OF SERV LIGHT OUT3IN SERVICE OUT4FIRE LIGHT HALL INS HIGH SPEED (SEE AREA B35) CONTACT CONFIRM (SEE AREA D35) IN7 OUT7 SPARE RE-ALLOCATABLE CONTROLLER IO IN8 OUT8 SPARE RE-ALLOCATABLE CONTROLLER IO IN9 OUT9 SPARE RE-ALLOCATABLE CONTROLLER IO GALX-1123AN 24V 120V CN2 CN3 SW1 CONFIG ON1 2 4 8 16 32 FLIP AUX1 1-32: ADDRESS FLIP: ROTATES TEXT 180° AUX1: FUTURE USE DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 BY 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/9/18 86 87 88 89 90 A B C D E F G H RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG18-IO_COP1.DWG 4/28/2022 2018 GN D 12 0 V 24 C M +2 4 V 0V 0V +5 V +5 V C2 H C2 L GN D 12 0 V 24 C M +2 4 V 0V 0V +5 V +5 V C2 H C2 L 24 VAC/DC I/O EXPANDER CANCAN ENABLE COMM: FLASHING = COMMUNICATING TO MAIN CPU MCU: FLASHING = BOARD IS OPERATING +5V: ON SOLID = +5V IS ON INFO PUSH TO DISPLAY I/O ON DISPLAY GALX-1111AN HIGH RISE J4 BUS TERM J1 J2 J3 COP I/O 1 FS2OF FS2H FS2C DCB DOB ALM INDC FL FBNB HB ED 5VDC LOGIC POWER FROM GALX-1134AN COP BOARD CAR CAN BUS CANH & CANL FROM CPU BOARD C24VAREA H9 C24CAREA H9 IN1 IN2 FIRE PH II HOLD ON OFF *DCB, DOB, AND FL TO BE WIRED IN PARALLEL TO THE FIREFIGHTER'S COMPARTMENT IN3 CANCEL IN4 DOOR CLOSE IN5 DOOR OPEN IN6 ALARM IN7 INDEPENDENT OUT8FIRE LIGHT OUT9FIRE/NUDGING BUZZER OUT10HANDICAP BUZZER IN11 DOOR HOLD GALX-1123AN 24V 120V CN2 CN3 SW1 CONFIG ON1 2 4 8 16 32 FLIP AUX1 1-32: ADDRESS FLIP: ROTATES TEXT 180° AUX1: FUTURE USE GN D 12 0 V 24 C M +2 4 V 0V 0V +5 V +5 V C2 H C2 L GN D 12 0 V 24 C M +2 4 V 0V 0V +5 V +5 V C2 H C2 L 24 VAC/DC I/O EXPANDER CANCAN ENABLE COMM: FLASHING = COMMUNICATING TO MAIN CPU MCU: FLASHING = BOARD IS OPERATING +5V: ON SOLID = +5V IS ON INFO PUSH TO DISPLAY I/O ON DISPLAY GALX-1111AN HIGH RISE J4 BUS TERM J1 J2 J3 COP I/O 2 1C 2C 3C 4C CSPI1 CSPI2 CSPI3 EDL FDLT 5VDC LOGIC POWER FROM GALX-1134AN COP BOARD CAR CAN BUS CANH & CANL FROM CPU BOARD C24VAREA H9 C24CAREA H9 IN1 OUT1 1C IN2 OUT2 2C IN3 OUT3 3C IN4 OUT4 4C IN5 OUT5 SPARE RE-ALLOCATABLE CAR IO IN6 OUT6 SPARE RE-ALLOCATABLE CAR IO IN7 OUT7 SPARE RE-ALLOCATABLE CAR IO OUT8DOOR HOLD OUT9FRONT DOOR CLOSE LT GALX-1123AN 24V 120V CN2 CN3 SW1 CONFIG ON1 2 4 8 16 32 FLIP AUX1 1-32: ADDRESS FLIP: ROTATES TEXT 180° AUX1: FUTURE USE DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 BY 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/9/18 96 97 98 99 100 A B C D E F G H RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG20-IO_MAP1.DWG 4/28/2022 2020 G49 F49 F48 D33M4-8DNi GLB GS GS-1 DTi B47M8-6 B47M8-5 E37M5-6 D33M4-7 TSD UNi M6-3 M4-6 D31 D32 AUTO AD CST DLT-1 DLM-1 DLB-1 BAU BAD ACC DLT DLM DLB GALX-1121AN RUN MC D35 B29 M6-1 M6-7 M6-5 M6-8 M5-5 M7-2 M2-1 G19 D41 D42 D42 D41 D42 D42 M1-2 M1-6 M1-4 M1-5 M1-3 M7-4 M1-1 TAU TAD M2-7 M2-8 RUNi E38 E39 E39 M5-1 M2-5 M2-6 MRSW MRIU MRID MRIN LBP IU E39 E39 C34 G19 E38 E38 E38 D44 E37 M5-4 M8-7 M7-1 M7-3 M3-7 E39 M5-3 M8-6 IND ICI INS HSS ID E36 E37 G16 E39 SUFi M4-1 RLM M1-7 RLM-1 M1-8 MRIE M6-6 RGS RGS-1 IEN GOV M8-1 M8-2 M8-8 M3-6 UTi M4-5 DT B34 G17 B52 B52 D42 D42 D31 D31 MOD INPUT LOCATION OUTPUT LOCATION E37 E38 S10 M3-5 G17 FSTP OM-4 FLCT FSTP1 OM-3 G18 OUTPUT LOCATION DET CSS CTS D47IM-8 F18 F18 IM-6 IM-5 INPUT LOCATION FBCT G18 GALX-1134AN COP BOARD # SUi M4-2 D32 SDFi M4-3 D34 SDi M4-4 D33 MC1i M6-1 M3-2LOS E22 M3-1LPS E22 TPL M3-3 E22 TPH M3-4 G29 SPD M7-6 G29 CFLT G29M3-5 M7-7MTO G29 M3-8MCI G30 GBP M5-7 MC1 B30 DN B33 UT UN C31 B32 SU C32 SD C33 SDF C34 SUF C31 STE G28 MAIN IO BOARD FFSW DETR EXT G18IM-3 D52 D18 IM-4 IM-7 FSTi G18IM-2 MOD # CUL OM-2 CDL OM-1 D36 D36 MOD # FSTP FSTP1 G30 1.0 E65 E65 IN1 IN2 IC No.INPUT LOCATION IC No.OUTPUT LOCATION IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 GALX-1149AN 1ST CONT. IO FEP 71C FS 71C BP 71C FSX 72C MES 72C ALT 72C MRS 73C HWS 73C HWS2 73C EMP 74C IN13 IN14 IC No.INPUT LOCATION IC No.OUTPUT LOCATION IN15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 IN20 IN21 IN22 IN23 IN24 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 OUT17 OUT18 OUT19 OUT20 OUT21 OUT22 OUT23 OUT24 GALX-1149AN 2ND CONT. IO RTLH 71G IN1 IN2 IC No.INPUT LOCATION IC No.OUTPUT LOCATION IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 GALX-1123AN 3RD CONT. IO IHSi 77C CCF 77C MSPI1 78C MSPI2 78C MSPI3 78C OPENL 76C OSERL 76C ISER 76C FLH 77C IHS 77C MSPO1 78C MSPO2 78C MSPO3 78C IN1 IN2 IC No.INPUT LOCATION IC No.OUTPUT LOCATION IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 GALX-1123AN 1ST COP IO FS2OF 81C FS2H 81C FS2C 81C DCB 82C DOB 82C ALM 82C INDC 83C ED 84C FL 83C FBNB 83C HB 84C IN1 IN2 IC No.INPUT LOCATION IC No.OUTPUT LOCATION IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 GALX-1123AN 2ND COP IO 1C 81G 2C 81G 3C 81G 4C 82G CSPI1 82G CSPI2 82G CSPI3 83G 1CA 81G 2CA 81G 3CA 81G 4CA 82G CSPO1 82G CSPO2 82G CSPO3 83G EDL 83G FDLT 83G INPUT LOCATIONADDRESS HCP 1U 2D 2U 3D 3U 4D - 90C 90C 89C 89C 89C 89C 88C 88C GALX-1137AN SERIAL MODULES 1 2 3 4 DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 BY 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/9/18 101 102 103 104 105 A B C D E F G H RESOLUTE ELEVATOR, LLC UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK CAR 1: CAR 1 702178-21 702178-21-PG21-RELAY_MAP.DWG 4/28/2022 2021 DRAWN BY ENGINEER SCALE REV DESCRIPTION DATE HDT DOCUMENT No. DATE SHEET OF SIZE REVPART No. GAL Manufacturing Company, LLC 50 E. 153rd St. Bronx, NY 10451-2104 BY 1.0 INITIAL RELEASE RJC 3/9/18 SCKT-0024N RELAY 4 POLE DIN RAIL MOUNTED FRONT VIEW 9101112 14 13 1234 8 7 6 5 1234 8 7 6 5 9101112 14 13 DIN RAIL MOUNTED 912 14 14 8 5 14 8 5 912 14 13 13 SCKT-0144N RELAY 2 POLE FRONT VIEW RELAY 1 POLE PCB MOUNTED FRONT VIEW 13 14 11 9 9 55 L120 L24 C24 C120 DP2 DP1 HCP FEP S10 3AMP AGC 3AMP AGC 3AMP AGC 3AMP AGC 3AMP AGC 4AMP MDL 4AMP MDL 3AMP AGC 3AMP AGC FUSE LAYOUT GALX-1135AN RUN RUN RELY-0254N F35 F34 TRF TRANSFER FIRE PWR RELY-0254N C15 C13 C13 TRH TRANSFER HALL PWR RELY-0254N C15 C14 C14 SDF SOLENOID DWN FAST RELY-0254N D34 E33 SUF SOLENOID UP FAST RELY-0254N D31 E32 FAN FAN PWR SAVINGS RELY-0263N E64 F66 LIGHT LIGHT PWR SAVINGS RELY-0263N E64 F66 INS INSPECTION RELY-0291N C35 E33 DOWN DOWN RELY-0261N D33 E32 E33 C9 C35 RUN RUN RELY-0261N D34 E32 E32 C35 UP UP RELY-0261N D32 E32 E32 C35 NP NORMAL POWER RELY-0105N D7 C8 C8 C9 C9 C10 EML EMERGENCY LOWERING RELY-0105N D10 C8 C9 B79 D7 BFR BLAIN FAULT RELAY RELY-0029N F34 D22 NPP NORMAL PWR PILOT RELY-0144N D7 C10 D7 D7 Controller GALaxy GALaxy eHydro eHydro The Intelligent Choice in Light Curtains ScanGUARD No one has to be reminded of the immense passenger safety and systems benefits a light curtain provides. When the ‘beams’ are blocked it signals the Door Operator (or another interface) to adjust door mechanism speed and torque and provide both a physical and audible warning to passengers obstructing the doorway. Over the years manufacturers have provided light curtain systems with a bewildering variety of features and this has greatly complicated the selection process. Once only basic factors such as functionality, product price and durability were the prime points of comparison for product selection. Today though one must also consider voltage requirements, the number of light beams, range of detection, or whether you require 2D, or 3D zone capabilities. And while advances in the field have led to more sophisticated feature-rich devices, their complex design has also made them harder to install, maintain, and in many cases less robust and able to stand up to current system realities. A Light Curtain That Offers You Economy and Simplicity. Certainly, there’s a need in our industry for hi-tech, feature-rich, light curtain systems. However, most installations simply require a durable light curtain that meets basic code requirements. One that offers good overall value, is efficient, and is both fast and easy to install. The question then should be why would anyone want to spend more for a light curtain that offers far more than what they truly need? It’s more than a practical consideration, let’s not forget that complex, options-loaded systems offer more opportunities for breakdowns. That’s why we offer ScanGUARD®. It is a highly rugged, vandal-resistant, simple-to-use light curtain that can be installed very quickly. And it comes at an unbeatable price, which makes it the intelligent choice for professionals performing new installations or mod jobs. With The Features You Need. ScanGUARD®connects directly to MOVFR and MOVFE Door Operators and works on side and center opening doors. It provides 63 non-parallel infrared beam paths, which function even in the most extreme sunlight conditions. ScanGUARD® offers a detection range of 0-6 ft. (0-1.83 m). Seven feet (2.14 m) long, this light curtain uses a 24 V DC power source and offers a slim 1.18 x 0.81 in. (30 x 20 mm) aluminum alloy profile. ScanGUARD®comes complete with all mounting hardware, clips, cables (Super Flex), 9⁄64 in. (3.6 mm) drill bit, full instructions, and a 24-month factory warranty from GAL. ScanGUARD®: Features. • Durable/Proven Design. Vandal Resistant — comes with 24-month factory warranty. • Easy/Fast Installation: Connects directly to MOVFR and MOVFE Door Operators. • 63 Non-parallel beam paths (crossbeams) that function even in the most extreme sunlight conditions. • Detection range: 0-6 ft. (0-1.83 m). • Installs on Side and Center Door configurations. • All Mounting Hardware provided. Comes with clips, non-proprietary cables (Super Flex), 9⁄64 in. (3.6 mm) drill bit, and full instructions. • Tolerant of all environmental, electrical and radio interference. • Power: 24 V DC. • Economically priced. Excellent choice for new or modernization projects. ScanGUARD®provides 63 non-parallel infrared beam paths with a range of 0-6 ft. (0-1.83 m). ScanGUARD®: The intelligent choice in Light Curtains. GAL_0818_EN Does a change in Elevator Code leave you wondering if we could provide a solution? Or would you simply like more information on how to get the most from a GAL product? Whatever your question is, we’re ready to help because GAL provides tech support at no cost to customers. This includes free phone support and training for maintenance organization, and on-line, web-based remote monitoring. We also offer free monthly training courses in our Bronx, NY facility. Our classes include reviews of GALaxy Controls, Door Equipment, and other products as well. Should you ever require specialized training regarding the GALaxy eHydro please contact us, so we can provide assistance. Unlocking the full potential of e Hydro with GAL product training GAL 50 East 153rd Street Bronx, NY 10451-2104 Ph: 718.292.9000 Fax: 718.292.2034 www.gal.com GAL Regional Service Centers Miami 15825 NW 15th Ave. Miami Gardens, FL 33169 Chicago 1930 East Devon Ave. Elk Grove Village,IL 60007 Los Angeles 9704 Jordan Circle, Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670 ® Our GALaxy eHydro Controller makes wiring much easier to perform. Ask any mechanic what they’re looking for in a Hydraulic Controller and you’ll get plenty of suggestions. But at the top of their list will be a demand for a system that makes wiring simpler, faster, and reduces the chance for connection error. Fortunately, that is just what our GALaxy eHydro Controller provides to professionals. A streamlined design that makes installation far more economical. GALaxy eHydro features a streamlined layout that removes wiring obstructions, reduces the total number of wires needed for connection, and uses coded boards to make wiring sequential and practically foolproof to perform. To speed repair, GALaxy eHydro is composed of small input modules instead of long, bulky PC boards. eHydro uses both serial communications and a universal connector, so you can use any car or hall fixture with only minimal wiring. A secure, built-in Wi-Fi link. When it comes to head-scratching situations there are few places that offer more opportunities than within an elevator hoistway. Particularly when you find yourself trying to troubleshoot an on-site problem. Fortunately, eHydro provides a secure, built-in Wi-Fi connection that permits you to obtain the answers you need through your smartphone, laptop or tablet with our eHydro App. No Internet connection is required. The eHydro App helps you troubleshoot problems efficiently. With our eHydro App you can use your own mobile device from inside the Machine Room to adjust system variables, check car status, review fault logs, examine car and hall input/outputs, and examine group and trace screens. The App offers an easy-to-use, intuitive, graphical interface, making diagnostics much more efficient and less time-consuming to perform. eHydro is available free from Google Play™ and the Apple App Store SM . Streamlined functionality... with a simple modular design. The system’s use of serial communications to the car reduces traveler wire counts (only 11-18 AWG Control wires) and simplifies field connection. With GALaxy eHydro a Car Top Interface is optional. Instead the COP (Car Operating Panel) serves as the central hub for gathering data from the Door Opener (MOVFR or MOVFE) or CAN (Controller Area Network), APS System, and Inspection Station, which is then relayed back to eHydro. GALaxy e Hydro upgrades easily. Our Controller permits fast and easy software updates in the field. Instead of disassembling boards or manipulating chips, system upgrades can be performed via SD flash card. GALaxy eHydro automatically stores job parameters and set-up data. Should you require assistance, fault logs can be transmitted to GAL’s Tech Support for review at no charge. A single 32-Bit Dual Core CPU runs both the Car and Groups, and a LCD User Interface within the Controller makes it easy to review key data. eHydro provides a LCD Display Interface (no service tool is required) and utilizes replaceable, plug-in control outputs protected from short circuits. The eHydro App can be downloaded from: ©2018 Google LLC All rights reserved. Google Play is a trademark of Google LLC. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. GALaxy eHydro System: Features and Options GALaxy eHydro GALaxy eHydro reduces the number of wires needed for connection, and its streamlined design makes routing far simpler. Plug and play APSS for real accuracy. GALaxy eHydro provides a true advancement in APSS (Absolute Positioning Selector System) accuracy through the use of a dual-camera sensor that can easily be positioned on the car crosshead (sensing guide rail mounted code tape), door operator or car door sill. The sensor scans a code tape using IR illumination. All key data is relayed to eHydro, which the Controller uses to calculate car velocity and the position. With this touch-less system — which does not rely on magnets to determine position — accuracy within 1 ⁄64 in. (0.5 mm) is assured. The APS system is insensitive to dust and smoke, is SIL 3 certified, and pre-drilled holes are provided to make installation easy and quick. eHydro eliminates wiring headaches. GALaxy eHydro gives elevator professionals a Controller specifically designed for installations of up to six cars, eight floors, and is rated for speeds of up to 200 fpm. But best of all, eHydro delivers a durable, cost-effective choice that dramatically speeds up installation, and makes wiring far simpler to perform. Easier to wire. Economical to install. Essential to use. APS sensor and Code Tape Components GALaxy eHydro System Wiring Overview: Method A A B C D E A. GALaxy eHydro B. Car Operating Panel (COP) C. Hall Call D. MOVFR* E. APS Sensor F. Inspection Station *Note: GAL MOVFE can also be used. Components GALaxy eHydro System Wiring Overview: Method B Connection to COP made via Traveling Cable A B C D E F F D Connection to TOC Inspection Station/Junction Box via Traveling Cable A. GALaxy eHydro B. Top of Car (TOC) Inspection Station/ Junction Box C. Hall Call D. MOVFR* E. APS Sensor F. Car Operating Panel (COP) *Note: GAL MOVFE can also be used. Ready-to-ship Signal Fixtures sold exclusively with eHydro. A Hydraulic Controller that delivers true efficiency. Features • Designed to handle up to six cars per group. • For low/mid-rise buildings up to eight floors. • Requires fewer wires for connection. • TOC Unit optional. Primary connection mode is Traveling Cable in swing return. • Serial Link to Car, Hall Stations and Lanterns. • APSS features plug-in camera reading Optical Tape 1⁄64 in. (0.5 mm accuracy). • Manual set-up not required. • Simple board design features coded inputs/outputs making wiring simple. • Full-color Wiring Diagrams (per 8.6.1.2.2 On-Site Documentation) are easy to follow. “Quick Start” sheet is provided. • Diagnostics are detailed on the Main I/O board through a LCD display and the eHydro App (mobile device via Wi-Fi interface. LEDs are provided on the Controller input and output in the Machine Room and on the car. • Free Tech Support. • Software updates provided via SD Card. Options • Battery Lowering • Call Card Security (Key Switch and Card Reader) • Hall Card Security • Wi-Fi User Interface App • Freight Door Interface • Short Floors GAL offers this solid family of four attractive, highly durable and reliable signal fixture styles sold exclusively with our GALaxy eHydro Controller. GALaxy eHydro can be wired to work with any signal fixture you choose. However, dedicated, easy-to-order fixtures offer real benefits in time and cost savings during installation. Since they’re already in stock and ready-to-ship they can be delivered onsite more quickly. These signal fixtures come prewired (which saves you more time and effort) and they’re designed to provide plug-and-play ease of use. In addition to utility and speedy delivery they add a stylish look— but they’re built to be tough as well. If you’re searching for an attractive blend of solid construction that can handle heavy punishment, and you really want to exploit all the advantages in economy that eHydro provides, then look to these dedicated fixtures that are available exclusively when you purchase our eHydro Controller. *California Building Code Compliant Option Available : GAL also provides a ready-to-ship pushbutton that meets CBC requirements. This option is available for California installations only. Please contact the GAL Sales Team for additional details. Conventional Architectural Vandal-Proof Our GALaxy eHydro Controller makes wiring much easier to perform. Ask any mechanic what they’re looking for in a Hydraulic Controller and you’ll get plenty of suggestions. But at the top of their list will be a demand for a system that makes wiring simpler, faster, and reduces the chance for connection error. Fortunately, that is just what our GALaxyeHydro Controller provides to professionals. A streamlined design that makes installation far more economical. GALaxyeHydro features a streamlined layout that removes wiring obstructions, reduces the total number of wires needed for connection, and uses coded boards to make wiring sequential and practically foolproof to perform. To speed repair, GALaxyeHydro is composed of small input modules instead of long, bulky PC boards. eHydro uses both serial communications and a universal connector, so you can use any car or hall fixture with only minimal wiring. A secure, built-in Wi-Fi link. When it comes to head-scratching situations there are few places that offer more opportunities than within an elevator hoistway. Particularly when you find yourself trying to troubleshoot an on-site problem. Fortunately, eHydro provides a secure, built-in Wi-Fi connection that permits you to obtain the answers you need through your smartphone, laptop or tablet with our eHydro App. No Internet connection is required. The eHydro App helps you troubleshoot problems efficiently. With our eHydro App you can use your own mobile device from inside the Machine Room to adjust system variables, check car status, review fault logs, examine car and hall input/outputs, and examine group and trace screens. The App offers an easy-to-use, intuitive, graphical interface, making diagnostics much more efficient and less time-consuming to perform. eHydro is available free from Google Play™ and the Apple App Store SM . Streamlined functionality... with a simple modular design. The system’s use of serial communications to the car reduces traveler wire counts (only 11-18 AWG Control wires) and simplifies field connection. With GALaxy eHydro a Car Top Interface is optional. Instead the COP (Car Operating Panel) serves as the central hub for gathering data from the Door Opener (MOVFR or MOVFE) or CAN (Controller Area Network), APS System, and Inspection Station, which is then relayed back to eHydro. GALaxy e Hydro upgrades easily. Our Controller permits fast and easy software updates in the field. Instead of disassembling boards or manipulating chips, system upgrades can be performed via SD flash card. GALaxyeHydro automatically stores job parameters and set-up data. Should you require assistance, fault logs can be transmitted to GAL’s Tech Support for review at no charge. A single 32-Bit Dual Core CPU runs both the Car and Groups, and a LCD User Interface within the Controller makes it easy to review key data. eHydro provides a LCD Display Interface (no service tool is required) and utilizes replaceable, plug-in control outputs protected from short circuits. The eHydro App can be downloaded from: ©2018 Google LLC All rights reserved. Google Play is a trademark of Google LLC. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. GALaxy eHydro System: Features and Options GALaxy eHydro GALaxy eHydro reduces the number of wires needed for connection, and its streamlined design makes routing far simpler. Plug and play APSS for real accuracy. GALaxy eHydro provides a true advancement in APSS (Absolute Positioning Selector System) accuracy through the use of a dual-camera sensor that can easily be positioned on the car crosshead (sensing guide rail mounted code tape), door operator or car door sill. The sensor scans a code tape using IR illumination. All key data is relayed to eHydro, which the Controller uses to calculate car velocity and the position. With this touch-less system — which does not rely on magnets to determine position — accuracy within 1 ⁄64 in. (0.5 mm) is assured. The APS system is insensitive to dust and smoke, is SIL 3 certified, and pre-drilled holes are provided to make installation easy and quick. eHydro eliminates wiring headaches. GALaxy eHydro gives elevator professionals a Controller specifically designed for installations of up to six cars, eight floors, and is rated for speeds of up to 200 fpm. But best of all, eHydro delivers a durable, cost-effective choice that dramatically speeds up installation, and makes wiring far simpler to perform. Easier to wire. Economical to install. Essential to use. APS sensor and Code Tape Components GALaxy eHydro System Wiring Overview: Method A A B C D E A. GALaxy eHydro B. Car Operating Panel (COP) C. Hall Call D. MOVFR* E. APS Sensor F. Inspection Station *Note: GAL MOVFE can also be used. Components GALaxy eHydro System Wiring Overview: Method B Connection to COP made via Traveling Cable A B C D E F F D Connection to TOC Inspection Station/Junction Box via Traveling Cable A. GALaxy eHydro B. Top of Car (TOC) Inspection Station/ Junction Box C. Hall Call D. MOVFR* E. APS Sensor F. Car Operating Panel (COP) *Note: GAL MOVFE can also be used. Ready-to-ship Signal Fixtures sold exclusively with eHydro. A Hydraulic Controller that delivers true efficiency. Features • Designed to handle up to six cars per group. • For low/mid-rise buildings up to eight floors. • Requires fewer wires for connection. • TOC Unit optional. Primary connection mode is Traveling Cable in swing return. • Serial Link to Car, Hall Stations and Lanterns. • APSS features plug-in camera reading Optical Tape 1⁄64 in. (0.5 mm accuracy). • Manual set-up not required. • Simple board design features coded inputs/outputs making wiring simple. • Full-color Wiring Diagrams (per 8.6.1.2.2 On-Site Documentation) are easy to follow. “Quick Start” sheet is provided. • Diagnostics are detailed on the Main I/O board through a LCD display and the eHydro App (mobile device via Wi-Fi interface. LEDs are provided on the Controller input and output in the Machine Room and on the car. • Free Tech Support. • Software updates provided via SD Card. Options • Battery Lowering • Call Card Security (Key Switch and Card Reader) • Hall Card Security • Wi-Fi User Interface App • Freight Door Interface • Short Floors GAL offers this solid family of four attractive, highly durable and reliable signal fixture styles sold exclusively with our GALaxy eHydro Controller. GALaxy eHydro can be wired to work with any signal fixture you choose. However, dedicated, easy-to-order fixtures offer real benefits in time and cost savings during installation. Since they’re already in stock and ready-to-ship they can be delivered onsite more quickly. These signal fixtures come prewired (which saves you more time and effort) and they’re designed to provide plug-and-play ease of use. In addition to utility and speedy delivery they add a stylish look— but they’re built to be tough as well. If you’re searching for an attractive blend of solid construction that can handle heavy punishment, and you really want to exploit all the advantages in economy that eHydro provides, then look to these dedicated fixtures that are available exclusively when you purchase our eHydro Controller. *California Building Code Compliant Option Available : GAL also provides a ready-to-ship pushbutton that meets CBC requirements. This option is available for California installations only. Please contact the GAL Sales Team for additional details. Conventional Architectural Vandal-Proof Our GALaxy eHydro Controller makes wiring much easier to perform. Ask any mechanic what they’re looking for in a Hydraulic Controller and you’ll get plenty of suggestions. But at the top of their list will be a demand for a system that makes wiring simpler, faster, and reduces the chance for connection error. Fortunately, that is just what our GALaxyeHydro Controller provides to professionals. A streamlined design that makes installation far more economical. GALaxyeHydro features a streamlined layout that removes wiring obstructions, reduces the total number of wires needed for connection, and uses coded boards to make wiring sequential and practically foolproof to perform. To speed repair, GALaxyeHydro is composed of small input modules instead of long, bulky PC boards. eHydro uses both serial communications and a universal connector, so you can use any car or hall fixture with only minimal wiring. A secure, built-in Wi-Fi link. When it comes to head-scratching situations there are few places that offer more opportunities than within an elevator hoistway. Particularly when you find yourself trying to troubleshoot an on-site problem. Fortunately, eHydro provides a secure, built-in Wi-Fi connection that permits you to obtain the answers you need through your smartphone, laptop or tablet with our eHydro App. No Internet connection is required. The eHydro App helps you troubleshoot problems efficiently. With our eHydro App you can use your own mobile device from inside the Machine Room to adjust system variables, check car status, review fault logs, examine car and hall input/outputs, and examine group and trace screens. The App offers an easy-to-use, intuitive, graphical interface, making diagnostics much more efficient and less time-consuming to perform. eHydro is available free from Google Play™ and the Apple App Store SM . Streamlined functionality... with a simple modular design. The system’s use of serial communications to the car reduces traveler wire counts (only 11-18 AWG Control wires) and simplifies field connection. With GALaxy eHydro a Car Top Interface is optional. Instead the COP (Car Operating Panel) serves as the central hub for gathering data from the Door Opener (MOVFR or MOVFE) or CAN (Controller Area Network), APS System, and Inspection Station, which is then relayed back to eHydro. GALaxy e Hydro upgrades easily. Our Controller permits fast and easy software updates in the field. Instead of disassembling boards or manipulating chips, system upgrades can be performed via SD flash card. GALaxyeHydro automatically stores job parameters and set-up data. Should you require assistance, fault logs can be transmitted to GAL’s Tech Support for review at no charge. A single 32-Bit Dual Core CPU runs both the Car and Groups, and a LCD User Interface within the Controller makes it easy to review key data. eHydro provides a LCD Display Interface (no service tool is required) and utilizes replaceable, plug-in control outputs protected from short circuits. The eHydro App can be downloaded from: ©2018 Google LLC All rights reserved. Google Play is a trademark of Google LLC. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. GALaxy eHydro System: Features and Options GALaxy eHydro GALaxy eHydro reduces the number of wires needed for connection, and its streamlined design makes routing far simpler. Plug and play APSS for real accuracy. GALaxy eHydro provides a true advancement in APSS (Absolute Positioning Selector System) accuracy through the use of a dual-camera sensor that can easily be positioned on the car crosshead (sensing guide rail mounted code tape), door operator or car door sill. The sensor scans a code tape using IR illumination. All key data is relayed to eHydro, which the Controller uses to calculate car velocity and the position. With this touch-less system — which does not rely on magnets to determine position — accuracy within 1⁄64 in. (0.5 mm) is assured. The APS system is insensitive to dust and smoke, is SIL 3 certified, and pre-drilled holes are provided to make installation easy and quick. eHydro eliminates wiring headaches. GALaxy eHydro gives elevator professionals a Controller specifically designed for installations of up to six cars, eight floors, and is rated for speeds of up to 200 fpm. But best of all, eHydro delivers a durable, cost-effective choice that dramatically speeds up installation, and makes wiring far simpler to perform. Easier to wire. Economical to install. Essential to use. APS sensor and Code Tape Components GALaxy eHydro System Wiring Overview: Method A A B CD E A. GALaxyeHydro B. Car Operating Panel (COP) C. Hall Call D. MOVFR* E. APS Sensor F. Inspection Station *Note: GAL MOVFE can also be used. Components GALaxy eHydro System Wiring Overview: Method B Connection to COP made via Traveling Cable A B CD E F F D Connection to TOC Inspection Station/Junction Box via Traveling Cable A. GALaxyeHydro B. Top of Car (TOC) Inspection Station/ Junction Box C. Hall Call D. MOVFR* E. APS Sensor F. Car Operating Panel (COP) *Note: GAL MOVFE can also be used. Ready-to-ship Signal Fixtures sold exclusively with eHydro. A Hydraulic Controller that delivers true efficiency. Features • Designed to handle up to six cars per group. • For low/mid-rise buildings up to eight floors. • Requires fewer wires for connection. • TOC Unit optional. Primary connection mode is Traveling Cable in swing return. • Serial Link to Car, Hall Stations and Lanterns. • APSS features plug-in camera reading Optical Tape 1⁄64 in. (0.5 mm accuracy). • Manual set-up not required. • Simple board design features coded inputs/outputs making wiring simple. • Full-color Wiring Diagrams (per 8.6.1.2.2 On-Site Documentation) are easy to follow. “Quick Start” sheet is provided. • Diagnostics are detailed on the Main I/O board through a LCD display and the eHydro App (mobile device via Wi-Fi interface. LEDs are provided on the Controller input and output in the Machine Room and on the car. • Free Tech Support. • Software updates provided via SD Card. Options • Battery Lowering • Call Card Security (Key Switch and Card Reader) • Hall Card Security • Wi-Fi User Interface App • Freight Door Interface • Short Floors GAL offers this solid family of four attractive, highly durable and reliable signal fixture styles sold exclusively with our GALaxy eHydro Controller. GALaxy eHydro can be wired to work with any signal fixture you choose. However, dedicated, easy-to-order fixtures offer real benefits in time and cost savings during installation. Since they’re already in stock and ready-to-ship they can be delivered onsite more quickly. These signal fixtures come prewired (which saves you more time and effort) and they’re designed to provide plug-and-play ease of use. In addition to utility and speedy delivery they add a stylish look— but they’re built to be tough as well. If you’re searching for an attractive blend of solid construction that can handle heavy punishment, and you really want to exploit all the advantages in economy that eHydro provides, then look to these dedicated fixtures that are available exclusively when you purchase our eHydro Controller. *California Building Code Compliant Option Available : GAL also provides a ready-to-ship pushbutton that meets CBC requirements. This option is available for California installations only. Please contact the GAL Sales Team for additional details. Conventional Architectural Vandal-Proof Controller GALaxy GALaxy eHydro eHydro The Intelligent Choice in Light Curtains Scan GUARD No one has to be reminded of the immense passenger safety and systems benefits a light curtain provides. When the ‘beams’ are blocked it signals the Door Operator (or another interface) to adjust door mechanism speed and torque and provide both a physical and audible warning to passengers obstructing the doorway. Over the years manufacturers have provided light curtain systems with a bewildering variety of features and this has greatly complicated the selection process. Once only basic factors such as functionality, product price and durability were the prime points of comparison for product selection. Today though one must also consider voltage requirements, the number of light beams, range of detection, or whether you require 2D, or 3D zone capabilities. And while advances in the field have led to more sophisticated feature-rich devices, their complex design has also made them harder to install, maintain, and in many cases less robust and able to stand up to current system realities. A Light Curtain That Offers You Economy and Simplicity. Certainly, there’s a need in our industry for hi-tech, feature-rich, light curtain systems. However, most installations simply require a durable light curtain that meets basic code requirements. One that offers good overall value, is efficient, and is both fast and easy to install. The question then should be why would anyone want to spend more for a light curtain that offers far more than what they truly need? It’s more than a practical consideration, let’s not forget that complex, options-loaded systems offer more opportunities for breakdowns. That’s why we offer ScanGUARD®. It is a highly rugged, vandal-resistant, simple-to-use light curtain that can be installed very quickly. And it comes at an unbeatable price, which makes it the intelligent choice for professionals performing new installations or mod jobs. With The Features You Need. ScanGUARD®connects directly to MOVFR and MOVFE Door Operators and works on side and center opening doors. It provides 63 non-parallel infrared beam paths, which function even in the most extreme sunlight conditions. ScanGUARD® offers a detection range of 0-6 ft. (0-1.83 m). Seven feet (2.14 m) long, this light curtain uses a 24 V DC power source and offers a slim 1.18 x 0.81 in. (30 x 20 mm) aluminum alloy profile. ScanGUARD®comes complete with all mounting hardware, clips, cables (Super Flex), 9⁄64 in. (3.6 mm) drill bit, full instructions, and a 24-month factory warranty from GAL. ScanGUARD®: Features. • Durable/Proven Design. Vandal Resistant — comes with 24-month factory warranty. • Easy/Fast Installation: Connects directly to MOVFR and MOVFE Door Operators. • 63 Non-parallel beam paths (crossbeams) that function even in the most extreme sunlight conditions. • Detection range: 0-6 ft. (0-1.83 m). • Installs on Side and Center Door configurations. • All Mounting Hardware provided. Comes with clips, non-proprietary cables (Super Flex), 9⁄64 in. (3.6 mm) drill bit, and full instructions. • Tolerant of all environmental, electrical and radio interference. • Power: 24 V DC. • Economically priced. Excellent choice for new or modernization projects. ScanGUARD®provides 63 non-parallel infrared beam paths with a range of 0-6 ft. (0-1.83 m). ScanGUARD®: The intelligent choice in Light Curtains. GAL_0818_EN Does a change in Elevator Code leave you wondering if we could provide a solution? Or would you simply like more information on how to get the most from a GAL product? Whatever your question is, we’re ready to help because GAL provides tech support at no cost to customers. This includes free phone support and training for maintenance organization, and on-line, web-based remote monitoring. We also offer free monthly training courses in our Bronx, NY facility. Our classes include reviews of GALaxy Controls, Door Equipment, and other products as well. Should you ever require specialized training regarding the GALaxy eHydro please contact us, so we can provide assistance. Unlocking the full potential of e Hydro with GAL product training GAL 50 East 153rd Street Bronx, NY 10451-2104 Ph: 718.292.9000 Fax: 718.292.2034 www.gal.com GAL Regional Service Centers Miami 15825 NW 15th Ave. Miami Gardens, FL 33169 Chicago 1930 East Devon Ave. Elk Grove Village,IL 60007 Los Angeles 9704 Jordan Circle, Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670 ® i GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Manual GAL Manufacturing Corporation LLC 50 East 153rd Street Bronx, NY 10451 Technical Support: 1‐877‐425‐7778 ii Foreword GAL Manufacturing has developed this manual with usability and safety in mind. General and specific safety notices and precautions are defined in the manual. However, GAL Manufacturing cannot be responsible for any injury to persons or damage to property (including the elevator equipment) resulting from negligence, misuse of the equipment, misinterpretation of instructions included in this manual, or due to any other cause beyond the control of GAL Manufacturing. All drawings, illustrations, and information herein are the property of GAL Manufacturing and must not be made public or reproduced by any individual or entity other than the purchaser hereof without the express written permission of GAL Manufacturing. Revision 7.1 GAL Part Number: DOC-0119N iii GALaxy eHydro Controller Manual………………………………………………………………………………i Foreword...…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...ii Table of Contents………..…………………………………………………………………………………………iii Section 1 - Product Description ........................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Product Code Compliance ......................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Physical Layout of the Controller ............................................................................................... 1-2 1.4 Selector System ......................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.4.1 Absolute Position System (APS) Selector .......................................................................... 1-3 1.4.2 Primary and Secondary Position Feedback ....................................................................... 1-4 1.5 Sequence of Operation .............................................................................................................. 1-5 1.6 Modes of Operation .................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.6.1 Reset Mode ........................................................................................................................ 1-6 1.6.2 Safety String Open Mode ................................................................................................... 1-6 1.6.3 Controller Inspection Mode ................................................................................................ 1-6 1.6.4 Car Top Inspection Mode ................................................................................................... 1-6 1.6.5 Access Mode ...................................................................................................................... 1-7 1.6.6 Independent Service Mode ................................................................................................ 1-7 1.6.7 Load Weighing Bypass Mode ............................................................................................ 1-7 1.6.8 Attendant Service Mode ..................................................................................................... 1-8 1.6.9 Code Blue Hospital Service Mode ..................................................................................... 1-8 1.6.10 Fire Service Phase I Mode ................................................................................................. 1-8 1.6.11 Fire Service Phase I Alternate Return Mode...................................................................... 1-9 1.6.12 Fire Service Phase II Mode ................................................................................................ 1-9 1.6.13 Emergency Power Sequencing .......................................................................................... 1-9 1.6.14 Emergency Power Battery Lowering ................................................................................ 1-10 1.6.15 Earthquake Mode ............................................................................................................. 1-10 1.6.16 Stalled (Low Oil) Mode ..................................................................................................... 1-10 1.6.17 Automatic Mode ............................................................................................................... 1-10 Section 2 - Installation .......................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1 General Information.................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Site Selection ............................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.3 Environmental Considerations ................................................................................................... 2-1 2.4 Wiring Guidelines and Instructions ............................................................................................. 2-1 2.4.1 Wiring Schematics .............................................................................................................. 2-2 2.4.2 Proper Field Wiring ............................................................................................................. 2-2 2.4.3 Ground Wiring .................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.4.4 Hoistway Wiring .................................................................................................................. 2-2 2.4.5 Elevator Car Wiring ............................................................................................................ 2-3 2.4.6 Machine Room Wiring ........................................................................................................ 2-3 2.5 Normal and Top Terminal Slowdown Limits .............................................................................. 2-3 2.6 Top Terminal Limit Switches ...................................................................................................... 2-4 2.7 Selector Installation .................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.7.1 APS (Absolute Position System) Selector Installation ....................................................... 2-4 2.7.1.1 Installation of the Encoded Tape and APS Camera ...................................................... 2-4 2.7.2 APS Selector Floor Position Setup (Hoistway Learn) ...................................................... 2-14 2.7.2.1 Verify that the APS Selector Camera is Installed Correctly and Communicating. ....... 2-14 2.7.2.2 Set the Adjustable Variables – “NTS Proc Adj Vars” in the Controller. ........................ 2-15 2.7.2.3 Zero the Hoistway ........................................................................................................ 2-15 2.7.2.4 Setting Hoistway Floor Levels with APS Selector ........................................................ 2-16 Section 3 - GALaxy Startup and Adjustment ...................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 Procedure for Initial Power-up of Controller ............................................................................... 3-1 3.1.1 Checking Main Line Voltage............................................................................................... 3-1 Table of Contents iv 3.1.3 Verify the Main CPU is Operating ...................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Start-Up Procedures................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2.1 Requirements for a running platform during initial startup ................................................. 3-2 3.2.2 Complete the Installation of Equipment ............................................................................. 3-4 3.3 Adjustment Procedures .............................................................................................................. 3-5 3.3.1 Set Toggle Switches ........................................................................................................... 3-5 3.3.2 Ready the Car to Run on Inspection .................................................................................. 3-5 3.3.3 Prepare for the Car for Hoistway Learn ............................................................................. 3-6 3.3.4 Verify the Hoistway ............................................................................................................. 3-7 3.4 Adjust the Elevator ..................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.4.1 Automatic Run .................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.4.2 Adjust the Slowdown Distances ......................................................................................... 3-8 3.4.3 Adjust the Stop ................................................................................................................... 3-9 3.4.4 Verify Proper Operation of All Safety Circuits and Signal Devices .................................. 3-10 3.4.5 Perform Required Tests ................................................................................................... 3-10 Section 4 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 General Information.................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Microprocessor CPU .................................................................................................................. 4-1 4.3 Input/Output Boards ................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.4 Run Sequence ............................................................................................................................ 4-2 4.5 The Safety PAL Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-3 4.6 Safety PAL ................................................................................................................................. 4-5 4.7 System Faults ............................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.8 Main CPU Inputs and outputs .................................................................................................... 4-6 4.9 NTS Processor Inputs and Outputs ......................................................................................... 4-11 4.10 Relocate I/Os ............................................................................................................................ 4-12 4.10.1 Relocate I/Os – Add IO Relocation .................................................................................. 4-13 4.10.2 Relocate I/Os – Remove Relocation IO ........................................................................... 4-14 4.10.3 Car Trace Screen ............................................................................................................. 4-15 Section 5 LCD Interface ........................................................................................................................ 5-1 5.1 Operating the LDC Interface ...................................................................................................... 5-1 5.2 LCD Menus ................................................................................................................................ 5-2 5.2.1 Elevator Status ................................................................................................................... 5-2 5.2.2 Main Menu ........................................................................................................................ 5-12 5.2.3 Date and Time .................................................................................................................. 5-13 5.2.4 Set Calls and Lockouts ..................................................................................................... 5-14 5.2.5 Inputs and Outputs ........................................................................................................... 5-17 5.2.6 Job Statistics .................................................................................................................... 5-20 5.2.7 Adjustable Variables ......................................................................................................... 5-21 5.2.8 Diagnostics ....................................................................................................................... 5-22 5.2.9 Software Utilities ............................................................................................................... 5-29 5.2.10 Hoistway Tables ............................................................................................................... 5-33 5.2.11 Fault Log........................................................................................................................... 5-39 Section 6 - Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults ................................................................................ 6-40 6.1 Main CPU Faults ...................................................................................................................... 6-40 6.2 Device Fault in Fault Log ......................................................................................................... 6-84 6.3 Detailed Faults Data and Description ....................................................................................... 6-99 6.3.1 Detailed Fault I/O Data Example .................................................................................... 6-112 6.3.2 Detailed Fault I/O Data Form ......................................................................................... 6-115 Section 7 - Main CPU Adjustable Variables ........................................................................................ 7-1 Section 8 - Appendix A ......................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 Testing Stall Mode & Low Oil Operation .................................................................................... 8-1 8.2 Reset Low Oil, Hot Oil, or MC/SPD Fault................................................................................... 8-2 8.3 Performing a Stop Ring Test ...................................................................................................... 8-2 v 8.4 Testing NTSD ............................................................................................................................. 8-2 8.5 Testing Terminal Speed Reducing Device ................................................................................. 8-3 8.6 Testing the Load Weighing Device ............................................................................................ 8-3 8.7 Testing Phase 2 Operation With a Ground or Short Circuit ....................................................... 8-3 8.8 Testing Phase 1 & 2 Operation After Power Interruption and Restoration ................................ 8-3 8.9 Testing Recycling Operation ...................................................................................................... 8-4 8.10 Testing Plunger Gripper Operation ............................................................................................ 8-4 8.11 Testing Phase 1 Operation Under Special Conditions ............................................................... 8-4 8.12 Testing Phase 2 Operation Under Special Conditions ............................................................... 8-5 8.13 Testing Plunger Following Guide Protection .............................................................................. 8-6 8.14 Testing the Auxiliary Power Supply With the D isconnect Switch Open ..................................... 8-6 8.15 Testing Low Pressure Switch ..................................................................................................... 8-6 8.16 Testing Low Pressure Switch ..................................................................................................... 8-6 vi SYMBOLS USED IN THIS MANUAL CAUTION This manual uses the CAUTION symbol to identify procedures and practices that may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage, if not followed correctly. DANGER This manual uses the DANGER symbol as an alert to a danger of electrocution or an acute electrical shock. The DANGER symbol provides elevator personnel with a warning of severe personal injury or potential fatality that can result if safety precautions are not observed. NOTE / INFORMATION In this manual, this symbol identifies information helpful to elevator personnel when carrying out a specific procedure or task. NOT APPLICABLE / DOES NOT EXIST When this symbol appears inside a table, it indicates that a value or property is not defined, or is nonexistent, for the item listed. vii WARNINGS AND CAUTIONARY NOTES Installation and wiring must be in accordance with the national electrical code, all local codes, and all elevator safety codes and standards. The 3‐phase AC power supply to the equipment must originate from a properly fused disconnect or circuit breaker that is properly designed and sized for the specific controller requirements and the “Short Circuit Current Rating” listed on the controller. Improper motor branch circuit protection will void warranty and may create a hazardous condition. Wiring to the controller terminals must be installed in a careful, neat manner. Stranded wire conductors must not have strands left out of the terminals. Leaving strands of wire out of the terminals can create a potential short circuit. All terminals and cable connectors must be seated properly. (See the IMPORTANT notice on the next page.) Elevator control products must be installed by elevator personnel who have been trained in the construction, maintenance, repair, inspection, and testing of elevator equipment. The elevator personnel must comply with all applicable safety codes and standards. This equipment is an O. E. M. product designed and manufactured to comply with ASME A17.1-2016/CSA B44-16 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that the installation is performed safely and that the installation complies with all applicable codes. Proper grounding is vitally important to the safe and successful operation of this system, and proper grounding should be installed to comply with all applicable codes . A separate ground wire should be installed from the building earth ground to the earth ground terminal in each controller. Proper conductor size must be utilized for grounding. In order to minimize resistance to ground, the shortest possible length should be used for the ground conductor. Do not install the controller in a hazardous area where excessive vapors and chemical fumes are present. Do not install the controller in a dusty area. Do not install the controller in a carpeted area. The space in which the controller equipment is installed should be temperature controlled, moisture free, and should be maintained within a temperature range of 32° F and 110°F. The space in which the controller equipment is installed should be kept clean. The controller should be kept dry and should not be exposed to moisture or water condensation. Make sure the power supply voltage feeding the controller equipment does not fluctuate by more than +/- 10%. Every safety precaution, whether or not specifically stated in this document, must be implemented when installing, adjusting, or servicing elevator equipment. All safety precautions must be followed to ensure the safety of elevator personnel and the general public. Use only the correct rated fusing for controller protection. Use of improperly rated fusing will void the warranty. viii IMPORTANT NOTICE Most of the field connections to GALaxy controls are made using stranded wire. When inserting this stranded wire into the terminals – especially those for EPD’s (Electrical Protective Devices) – care must be taken to ensure that all the strands are properly inserted into the terminals. Improper stripping and insertion may leave strands outside of the terminals. Strands not properly inserted into the terminals may make contact with wires from an adjacent terminal. The danger associated with an occurrence as described above has led GAL Manufacturing to recommend that, for all connections to the Electrical Protective Devices listed in ASME A17.1-2016/CSA B44-16, Requirements 2.26.2.1 through 2.26.2.39, elevator personnel must follow the guidelines listed below: • Inspect all terminals used to connect Electrical Protective Devices. Ensure that the cage clamp is fully open before inserting a wire into the terminal block. • Perform corrective action for wires with stray strands by one of the following methods: o Reconnect the wire with all wire strands correctly installed into the terminal. Visually verify that no wire strands are outside of the terminal. The conductor should be stripped and inserted completely into the terminal in such a manner that no more than two millimeters of bare wire is visible; or o Attach a ferrule to the end of field wire for safety devices (as pictured below in Figures 0-1 and 0-2) and insert the ferrule into the terminal; or o Use an acceptable method such as tinning. • After removal and replacement of any of these field wires, the actual Electrical Protective Device should be checked for proper operation. Figure 0-1 Crimp Tool for Ferrule Figure 0-2 Stranded Wire with Ferrule Attached GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 1 – Product Description 1-1 Section 1 - Product Description The GALaxy traction elevator controller is a computer-based system that offers superior performance, flexibility and reliability. It has been designed to save time in installation and troubleshooting, but it is still very important that the field personnel familiarize themselves with this manual before attempting to install the equipment. 1.1 Product Code Compliance • CSA B44.1-14/ASME A17.5-2014 • ASME A17.1-2016/CSA B44-16 1.2 Specifications Standard Features: • Inspection Operation (car top and controller) • Access Operation • Independent Service • Fire Service Phase I • Fire Service Phase I Alternate Return • Fire Service Phase II • Emergency Power • Earthquake Service • On Board Diagnostics LEDs • On Board LCD Interface • Motor Protection Timers • Door Motor Protection Timer • Field Adjustable Parameters • Elevator Duty Rated NEMA Motor Environment: • 32° F to 110° F ambient • 12,000 feet altitude • 95% humidity Optional Features: • Selective Rear Doors • Attendant Service • Code Blue Hospital Service • Security • Remote Diagnostics • Emergency Power GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 1 – Product Description 1-2 1.3 Physical Layout of the Controller Figure 1-0 shows the general layout of the GALaxy eHydro Controller cabinet. The components in the cabinet include the following items. 1) Main I/O Board: The 1121 main control board contains input and output devices, controller switches, fuses and field wiring terminal connections. This board also includes the, the Safety PAL and the NTS Processor. 2) Main CPU: The 1132 CPU board is a dual core 32-bit CPU. It executes the main control system programs. The main core runs the car operation and the secondary core runs the group operation. The LCD Interface mounted on the Main CPU provides a user interface to all controller adjustment and setup parameters. It also shows diagnostic information. 3) PI Driver Board: Driver for CE or E-Motive Position Indicator Displays. 4) Car I/O Panel: Provides space for additional car I/O. 5) Terminal Block and Options: Space for additional terminal blocks, optional contactors and circuit breakers. 6) Power Supplies: A 5 VDC power supply for the controller 5 Volt power and a 24 VDC supply for all call button and lantern power. 7) Soft Starter: Controls the soft start and running of the pump motor. 8) Power Distribution Board: Contains fuses and distributes 120 VAC and 24 VDC for the system. 9) Transformer: Transforms the line voltage to the proper voltages for signals and other controller functions. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 1 – Product Description 1-3 Figure 1-0: Typical Physical Layout of Top Cabinet 1.4 Selector System The selector system for the GALaxy controller is an Absolute Position System with an encoded touchless tape. 1.4.1 Absolute Position System (APS) Selector The Absolute Position System Selector uses an encoded tape that is read by two independent cameras. The dual camera device is SIL3 rated to supply position and velocity data over two independent CAN bus channels. One CAN bus channel connects directly to the MAIN CPU and the second CAN bus channels connects directly to the NTS processor. During setup both processors learn the hoistway floor positions and slowdown limits. Each process or’s outputs control signals and door zone status to the Safety PAL for independent redundancy checking. This selector system delivers 0.5mm accuracy, 50.8 pulses per inch. A block diagram of the Absolute Position System is shown in Figure 1-1. . 1 Main I/O Board . Main CPU 2 3 . PI Driver Board 4 . Car I/O 5 . Terminal Block and Option Section 6 . Power Supplies 7 . Soft - Starter 8 . Power Distribution 9 . Transformer GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 1 – Product Description 1-4 Figure 1-1: Absolute Position System Selector 1.4.2 Primary and Secondary Position Feedback The Main CPU receives position feedback from the channel A camera CAN bus and builds a table of floor positions and slowdowns for each floor during setup. On a normal run, the Main CPU uses the slowdown points to initiate a slowdown to the appropriate floor and uses the floor position to determine the door zone and exact stopping position. The NTS processor receives position feedback from the channel B camera CAN bus and builds an independent table of floor door zone positions and normal terminal slowdow n limits (UN, UT, DN, and DT) during setup. On a normal run, the NTS processor uses the NTS slowdown points to independently remove power from the appropriate run valves as a redundancy to slowdown and stop the car at terminal landings. Both the Main CPU and NTS processor outputs door zone and control signals, (SU, SUF, SD, SDF for the Main CPU and UN, UT, DN, DT for the NTS processor), to the Safety PAL to make hardware- controlled decisions that the car is safe to run. To protect the car from hitting the stop ring at a speed greater than 50 fpm in the up direction, two mechanical switches are wired in the hoistway at the top terminal landing. The first switch actuated GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 1 – Product Description 1-5 while running up to the top terminal floor is the Terminal Speed Device (TSD) lim it switch that directly removes power from the up fast valve. The top most limit switch is the Terminal Limit Hatch switch (TLH) that directly removes power from pump motor and all valves. 1.5 Sequence of Operation Normal elevator operation, Automatic Mode, is selective-collective. When the elevator is traveling upwards to answer calls, all up hall calls at floors above the car are answered in the order reached by the car, regardless of the order in which the calls were registered. Upon reaching each lan ding with a car call or hall call registered, the car and hall doors at that floor are automatically opened. The doors stay opened for a dwell time that is field adjustable. There are three different dwell times depending on whether it is a lobby call, car call, or hall call. The door will close before the set dwell time has elapsed if a passenger presses the door close button and the minimum door open time has expired. The door will reopen before it is fully closed if the door open button is pressed, if a passenger pushes on the safety edge, if the photo-eye light beam is interrupted, or if a call for that floor in the direction of travel is pushed. The door will close when the door opening condition is eliminated. When the door has fully closed, the calls are answered. When all up hall calls and car calls above the car have been answered, the elevator reverses direction and travels downward to answer car calls and down hall calls placed below the car. The calls are answered as previously described for up calls. When all calls below a down car are answered, the car reverses direction to repeat the cycle. In short, an elevator traveling up will bypass down hall calls, and an elevator traveling down will bypass up hall calls. In buildings with more than one elevator grouped together, the actual time of arrival, “real time”, is used to estimate how long each elevator will take to answer a hall call. The elevator that can respond the fastest takes the call. Real-time based dispatching permits the controllers to quickly respond to actual demand for elevator service. Some of the criteria used to estimate the time of arrival are as followed: • Actual elevator floor to floor run times. • Actual run time to the floor whether it is a multi-floor run or a one floor run. • Whether the elevator is in or out of service. • Whether the elevator is in load weigh bypass mode. • The direction and position of each elevator in the group. • The average door cycle time at each stop. • Status of each elevator, accelerating, full speed, dece lerating, actual time in motion. • Number of stops required due to car calls. • Number of stops required due to previously assigned hall calls. • System demand. The above performance criteria are continuously measured and stored for improved accuracy in the dispatching algorithm. All of the above data is continuously scanned, and the hall calls are reassigned if the conditions change and another car can respond faster. The ability to measure actual hall waiting time virtually eliminates long waiting and improves the average hall call waiting intervals throughout the building. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 1 – Product Description 1-6 1.6 Modes of Operation 1.6.1 Reset Mode Reset mode is initiated when the elevator power is first turned on, or when the system is reset. When the reset mode is initiated, the controller performs internal tests to ensure that both the car and controller are electrically operational before putting the car into service. The car will not move until reset mode is completed. Some of the internal tests that the controller performs are as follows: is the safety string made up; is the elevator on inspection operation; is the door close limit open; are the interlocks made up; is hoistway position correct. If all the safeties are made up, and the elevator is on automatic operation, and it is at floor level, the elevator will go into automatic mode. If the elevator is not at floor level, it will run slow speed down to the nearest floor, level into the floor, and reset the floor position count. 1.6.2 Safety String Open Mode Safety string open mode is initiated when a safety is open. Some of the safeties are listed below: • Reverse phase relay • Governor overspeed switch • Top Terminal Limit Switch • Pit switch • Hatch Safety Switch • Exit Door Switch • Car Safeties • Car top stop switch • Fire Fighters Stop Switch • In-Car Stop Switch • Controller Stop Switch When the safety string is made back up, the elevator will go back to reset mode. 1.6.3 Controller Inspection Mode The controller inspection mode is initiated by placing the “INS” switch on the 1121 board in the inspection position (down). Controller inspection mode permits oper ation of the car from the machine room. This mode performs the following operations: • Enables the controller inspection “ENABLE”, “UP” and “DOWN” push buttons • Door locks are active and must be closed to move the car. • Pressing the controller “ENABLE” and “UP” pushbuttons causes the elevator to move at inspection speed in the up direction. • Pressing the controller “ENABLE” and “DOWN” pushbuttons causes the elevator to move at inspection speed in the down direction. 1.6.4 Car Top Inspection Mode This inspection mode is initiated by placing the inspection switch on top of the car in the inspection position. Inspection mode permits operation of the car from the car top inspection station. This mode performs the following operations: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 1 – Product Description 1-7 • Disables access top and access bottom hall switches. • Disables the controller "ENABLE", "UP" and "DOWN" push buttons. • Door locks and Car gates/locks are active and must be closed or the door lock and gate bypass switch or switches must be active to move the car. • Enables the car top inspection station "SAFE", "UP" and "DOWN" push buttons • Pressing the inspection station "UP" and "SAFE” pushbuttons causes the elevator to move at inspection speed in the up direction. • Pressing the inspection station "DOWN" and "SAFE" pushbuttons causes the elevator to move at inspection speed in the down direction. 1.6.5 Access Mode The access mode is initiated by placing the key operated access switch located in the car operating panel to the on position. Access mode allows entrance into the Hoistway by qualified and authorized elevator personnel for equipment inspection and service. Access to the top of the car is possible from the top landing, and access to the pit is possible from the bottom landing. Enabling this mode permits the following operation: • Enables the access key switches at the top and bottom landing in the entrance door jamb s. • Bypasses the gate switch to allow car movement with the car door open. • Bypasses the top or bottom landing hall door lock, depending on which terminal access switch is being keyed. • Turning the access key switch to the up position causes the elevator to move at access speed in the up direction. • Turning the access key switch to the down position causes the elevator to move at access speed in the down direction. 1.6.6 Independent Service Mode The independent service mode is initiated by placing the key operated independent switch located in the car operating panel to the on position, or by placing the controller toggle switch “IND” to the down position. Independent mode permits operation of the car with an operator. This mode performs the following operations: • Hall initiated calls are ignored. • Hall lanterns and gongs are disabled. • The doors open automatically and stay open until closed by the operator. • Closing the doors requires constant pressure on the door close button. • When the car door is closed, the car answers the nearest car-initiated call in the direction of travel. 1.6.7 Load Weighing Bypass Mode The load weighing bypass mode is initiated when the car is loaded to a predetermined percentage of full capacity, by closing a connection between terminals “LC” and “LW” or from serial communication from a load weighing device. Load weigh bypass mode allows the car to answer car calls and lighten the load before answering any more hall calls. This mode performs the following operations: • Hall initiated calls are ignored. • All other elevator functions operate as if on fully automatic service. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 1 – Product Description 1-8 1.6.8 Attendant Service Mode The attendant service mode is initiated by placing the key operated attendant switch located in the car operating panel to the on position. Attendant mode permits operation of the car with an attendant. This mode performs the following operations: • The doors open automatically and stay open until closed by the attendant. • Closing the doors requires a momentary pressure on the door close button, or the up or down buttons located in the car operating panel. • Hall initiated calls are answered unless there is constant pressure on the bypass button. • Hall lanterns and gongs are enabled. • The direction of preference can be specified by momentary pressure on the up or down buttons located in the car operating panel. 1.6.9 Code Blue Hospital Service Mode Code blue hospital service mode is initiated by turning one of the code blue switches, located at each floor where medical emergency service is required, to the on position. A car is selected to respond to the code blue call. That car will perform the following: • Cancel all car calls • Any hall calls previously assigned will be transferred to another car. • If traveling toward the code blue call, it will proceed nonstop to the code blue call floor. • If traveling away from the code blue call, it will slow down and stop at the nearest floor, maintain doors closed, reverse direction and proceed nonstop to the code blue call floor. • If at a floor other than the code blue call floor, the elevator will close the doors and proceed nonstop to the code blue call floor. • Once at the code blue call floor, the doors will open and remain open. • The code blue in car switch located in the car operating panel must then be turned to the on position. If the code blue in car switch is not turned to the on position within 60 sec onds from the time the doors reach full open on the code blue call floor, the car will revert back to normal operation. • Upon activation of the key switch, it will allow the car to accept a car call for any floor, close the doors, and proceed nonstop to the floor desired. • The return of the code blue in car key switch to the normal position will restore the car to normal service. 1.6.10 Fire Service Phase I Mode Fire service phase I is initiated when the primary smoke sensor is activated, or the fire key switch located in the hall station on the primary return floor is turned to the on position. The primary return floor is usually the lobby floor but could be another landing if it better serves the needs of emergency personnel when fighting a fire or performing rescues. When fire service phase I is enabled: • The fire emergency return light illuminates, and the fire buzzer sounds. • The emergency stop switch is disabled when the door closes (depending on code requirement). • The car travels to the primary return floor without answering any calls, then parks with the door open. The fire buzzer turns off, but the fire emergency return light stays illuminated. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 1 – Product Description 1-9 • If the car is at a landing with the doors open, the doors will close, and the car will return non- stop to the primary return floor. • If the car is traveling away from the primary return floor, the car will stop at the next landing, and then go immediately to the primary return floor. • Turning the fire service key switch to the bypass position will restore the elevator to normal service. • The elevator will perform per ASME A17.1 requirement 2.27.3 unless otherwise specified. 1.6.11 Fire Service Phase I Alternate Return Mode Fire service phase I alternate return is initiated when the smoke sensor in front of the elevator at the primary return floor is activated. When fire service phase I alternate return is enabled: • The fire emergency return light illuminates and the fire buzzer sounds. • The emergency stop switch is disabled when the door closes (depending on code requirement). • The car travels to the alternate return floor without answering any calls, then parks with the door open. The fire buzzer turns off, but the fire emergency return light stays illuminated. • If the car is at a landing with the doors open, the doors will close, and the car will return nonstop to the alternate return floor. If the car is traveling away from the alternate return floor, the car will stop at the next landing, and then go immediately to the alternate return floor. • Turning the fire service key switch to the bypass position will restore the elevator to normal service. • The elevator will perform per ASME A17.1 requirement 2.27.3 unless otherwise specified. 1.6.12 Fire Service Phase II Mode To initiate fire service phase II, the car must first have been placed in fire service phase I, and, as a result, be parked at the designated level with the door fully open. Following that, the key operated fire service phase II switch, located in the car operating panel must be placed in the on position. Fire service phase II permits operation of the car by a fire fighter. This mode performs operations in accordance with ASME A17.1 requirement 2.27.3 as follows: • The doors close only with constant pressure on the door close button, after they have been fully opened. • The doors open only with constant pressure on the door open button, after they have been fully closed. • Hall lanterns and gongs are disabled. Safety edge and electric eye are disabled • All registered car calls can be canceled with momentary pressure on the call cancel button located in the car operating panel. • All hall calls are disabled. • To remove the car from fire service phase II the car must be at the fire return landing with the doors in the fully open position and the phase II switch turned to the o ff position. • See ASME A17.1 requirement 2.27.3 for specific operation of fire service phase II. 1.6.13 Emergency Power Sequencing Emergency Power is initiated when a connection is made between terminals “HC” and “EMP”. This mode performs the following operations: • All cars are returned to the bottom floor one at a time, and cycle the door. • The door open button remains active. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 1 – Product Description 1-10 • If a car is selected to run it will go back into normal operation. • Removing the connection between terminals “HC” and “EMP” will remove the cars from emergency power operation. 1.6.14 Emergency Power Battery Lowering Emergency Power Lowering is initiated when power is lost, and the Normal Power Relay drops out. When this occurs, the power circuit switches to the UPS backup power and activates the EMP input. This mode performs the following operations: • The car returned to the bottom floor and cycles the door. • The car cannot run but the door open button remains active. • When normal power is returned to the controller, the Normal Power relay is picked removing power from the EMP input and the car will return to normal operation. 1.6.15 Earthquake Mode Earthquake mode is initiated upon activation of a seismic switch. This mode performs the following operations: • If in motion the car will proceed to the nearest available floor. • Once at a floor, the car will cycle the doors and shut down. • The door open button remains active. 1.6.16 Stalled (Low Oil) Mode Stalled mode is initiated when the elevator has been in run mode longer than the field adjustable anti - stall timer. This mode performs the following operations: • Turns off the pump motor and stops the elevator. • The car is returned nonstop to the bottom floor. • Upon reaching the bottom floor, the doors cycle, then the elevator is shut down. • The door open button remains active. 1.6.17 Automatic Mode Since this is the normal operating mode, the controller automatically enters this mode if none of the previously described modes are activated, and if no fault is detected. The following operations are performed in automatic mode: • The car operates in selective-collective control sequence when answering calls. • Hall and car calls are functional. • Hall lanterns and gongs are operational. • Simplex Cars Park at the last call answered unless simplex lobby parking has been enabled in the program. In a multi-car group, a car is parked at the lobby if no other demand exists and parking is enabled. • The doors remain closed when the car is parked GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-1 Section 2 - Installation 2.1 General Information This section provides basic guidelines and recommendations for the proper installation of the controller equipment. These guidelines should be used as general instructions. They are not intended to usurp local codes and regulations. 2.2 Site Selection There are several factors that elevator personnel should consider when choosing a location for installing this product. The elevator controller should be installed at a location that provides the most convenient access for adjustment, inspections, and repairs. If at all possible, elevator personnel should have an unobstructed view of the machine when standing in front of the controller. A safe and adequate workspace around the controller must be provided. Work areas must be free of any items that might interfere with the proper routing of conduits or hinder the opening of cabinet doors. All clearances, workspaces, lighting, and guarding around the controller must comply with governing codes . 2.3 Environmental Considerations The controller package is provided with a standard type 1 enclosure. This type of controller should be installed in a clean, dry, and non-corrosive environment. Ideally, the equipment room should be temperature controlled between 70° F and 90° F. However, control equipment will function properly within an ambient temperature range of 32° to 110° F. If temperatures remain at the upper and lower extremes of this range for an extended period of time, the life expectancy of the control equipment may be reduced. It is important to always keep the controller dry, clean, and free of any dust and debris. The control system is designed to have a high immunity to electrical noise, radio frequency radiation, and magnetic interference. However, high levels of these items could cause interference with certain parts of the control system. The power supply feeding the controller should have a fluctuation of no greater than + or - 10%. 2.4 Wiring Guidelines and Instructions See the IMPORTANT NOTICE on page “viii” of this manual GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-2 2.4.1 Wiring Schematics A complete set of wiring schematics and connection diagrams will be provided for each job. Each set of wiring schematics and connection diagrams are job specific. The job name and number will be listed in the bottom right corner of each page of these documents. 2.4.2 Proper Field Wiring Most of the field connections to GALaxy controls are made using stranded wire. When inserting this stranded wire into the terminals – especially those for EPD’s (Electrical Protective Devices) – care must be taken to ensure that all the strands are properly inserted into the terminals. Improper stripping and insertion may leave strands outside of the terminals. Strands not properly inserted into the terminals may make contact with wires from an adjacent terminal. The danger associated with an occurrence as described above has led GAL Manufacturing to recommend that, for all connections to the Electrical Protective Devices listed in ASME A17.1- 2016/CSA B44-16, Requirements 2.26.2.1 through 2.26.2.39, elevator personnel must follow the guidelines listed below: • Inspect all terminals used to connect Electrical Protective Devices. Ensure that the cage clamp is fully open before inserting a wire into the terminal block. • Perform corrective action for wires with stray strands by one of the following methods: o Reconnect the wire with all wire strands correctly installed into the terminal. Visually verify that no wire strands are outside of the terminal. The conductor should be stripped and inserted completely into the terminal in such a manner that no more than two millimeters of bare wire is visible; or o Attach a ferrule to the end of field wire for safety devices (as pictured in Figures 0 -1 and 0-2) and insert the ferrule into the terminal; or o Use an acceptable method such as tinning. • After removal and replacement of any of these field wires, the actual Electrical Protective Device should be checked for proper operation. 2.4.3 Ground Wiring Proper grounding of the power supply, controller, elevator car, and hoistway is required. Separate conductors should be run for EG (earth ground) and GND terminals. These terminals and conductors are detailed on the wiring schematics. 2.4.4 Hoistway Wiring All hoistway wiring is detailed on the wiring schematics and connection diagrams. The number of required hoistway conductors is listed in the connection diagrams. A job specific “pull sheet” is also included in the connection diagrams. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-3 2.4.5 Elevator Car Wiring All elevator car wiring is detailed on the wiring schematics and connection diagrams including the wiring to the car station, door operator, car top selector, and inspection station. The number of required traveling cable conductors is listed in the connection diagrams. A job specific “pull sheet” is also included in the connection diagrams. 2.4.6 Machine Room Wiring All machine room wiring is detailed on the wiring schematics and connection diagrams including the main power supply wiring, motor wiring, and field wiring. 2.5 Normal and Top Terminal Slowdown Limits The terminal slowdown limits include the Normal Terminal Slowdown Limits (including UN, UT, DN and DT) and the Top Terminal Limits (including TSD and TLH). The Normal Terminal Slowdown Limits are read from absolute positions on an encoded tape. The TSD and TLH limits are mechanical switches. The Normal Terminal Limits are used to cause the car to slowdown and stop at or near the terminal landing if the normal stopping means does not function properly. The NTS processor monitors the position of the car in the hoistway from the APS selector camera and turns off the appropriate limit switch, when the limit position is reached, independent of the Main CPU. The Top Terminal Slowdown limits are used to prevent the car from hitting the stop ring on the hydraulic jack at a speed greater 50 fpm. TSD and TLH limits must be mechanical switches installed on all GALaxy eHydro controlled elevators and must be set to activate mechanically from the movement of the car. The distance that the limits are placed from the terminal landing depends on the spee d of the car. Table 2-0 shows the slowdown limit locations with respect to contract speed. All distances are shown in inches. The distances listed represent the distance from the terminal landing when the slowdown switch is actuated. Table 2-0: Slowdown Distances from Terminal Landings GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-4 • * UT and DT limit distances are setup by parameters in the NTS Processor. UN and DN limits are always 2” above and below the top and bottom terminal landings respectively. The up and down directional limit switches UN and DN will be set to open two inches past the terminal floor levels on the NTS processor and MAIN CPU. With the Absolute Position System (APS) selector camera, the slowdown limit positions are automatically calculated by the NTS processor and Main CPU boards. If the calculated slowdown values are not adequate, the distances for the NTS Processor and the Main CPU can be modified from the Main CPU LCD Interface under the “NTS Proc Adj Vars” menu. The Main CPU slowdown distances will always match the NTS processor distances. 2.6 Top Terminal Limit Switches The Top Terminal Limit Hatch (TLH) switch should be set to open four inches above the top terminal floor level. The Terminal Slowdown (TSD) switch should b e set to open at the appropriate table value. These two switches must be mechanical switches. For the requirements for a running platform during initial start-up, refer to the GALaxy eHydro Quickstart Guide or Section 3.2.1 of this manual. 2.7 Selector Installation 2.7.1 APS (Absolute Position System) Selector Installation 2.7.1.1 Installation of the Encoded Tape and APS Camera Always handle the encoded tape with care to make sure that the encoded surface of the tape is not damaged. Do not kink the tape or bend the tape in too tight of a radius. When installing the tape, make sure that no grease, dirt, or debris is on the encoded surface of the tape. The general configuration of the APS (Absolute Position System) Selector is shown in Figure 2-0. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-5 Figure 2-0: APS Selector General Configuration Camera and Cam mounted on the Elevator GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-6 To install the APS Selector, follow steps 1 through 8 below: Step 1: Install top selector bracket and attach the encoded tape. • Mount the top J-hook selector bracket to the rail. • Make sure the bracket is high enough that, when the car is on the stop ring above the top terminal landing, that the encoded tape is still within the field of view of the APS cameras, and that nothing on the car contacts the bracket. • Attach the encoded tape to the top bracket keeping the encoded tape as close to the rail as possible. See Figure 2-1. • Make sure to feed the tape through the front side of the bracket first (the side facing the car), and then bend it around the top of the bracket and lace it back down. Make sure that the encoded side of the tape faces the car and that the “LEFT” markings on the tape are on the left side. See Figures 2-2 and 2-3. • Fasten the tape with the supplied bracket and screws. Figure 2-1: Encoded Tape Mounting – Top Bracket GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-7 Step 2: Run down on inspection while unrolling the encoded tape. • Run down on inspection while unrolling the tape. See Figure 2-4. • Make sure you do not kink the tape or bend it in too tight of a radius. The tape can be damaged, and it should be handled with care. • Mount a J-hook selector bracket and guide clip with a door zone bridge for each floor. See Figures 2-5 and 2-10. • When the elevator is at floor level the door zone bridge should be positioned at the midpoint between the two APS cameras. See Figure 2-14. The exact positioning of this bracket and guide clip will be set in section 2.7.2.4. • Where there are tall floor heights or blind hoistways, mount J-hook selector brackets and guide clips without door zone bridges, at locations as needed, that will hold the encoder tape at the proper position with respect to the guide rails and APS camera. See Figure 2-6. • Make sure your hands are clean and you do not leave any grease or dirt on the front of the tape. Figure 2-2: Front View of Encoded Tape Figure 2-3: Side View of Top Bracket GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-8 Step 3: Install the bottom selector bracket and attach the encoded tape. • Mount the bottom selector bracket onto the car guide rail as shown in Figure 2-7. • Make sure the bracket is low enough that, when the car fully compresses car buffer, that the encoded tape is still within the field of view of the APS cameras, and that nothing on the car contacts the bracket. • Attach the encoded tape to the rail bracket with the slack tape switch. • Make sure to feed the tape through the front side of the bracket (the side facing the car) first, and then bend it back up toward the back of the tape. See Figure 2-8. • Push the bracket down until the springs are depressed to the mark in order to properly tension the encoded tape. See Figure 2-9. • The slack tape switch should be properly installed and wired according to the wiring schematics and connection diagrams Figure 2-4: Unroll the Encoded Tape Figure 2-5: Guide Clip with Door Zone Bridge Figure 2-6: Guide Clip without Door Zone Bridge GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-9 Figure 2-8: Side View of Encoded Tape Attachment to the Bottom Bracket Figure 2-7: Lower Bracket Mounting GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-10 Step 4: Install the selector mounting bracket. • Mount the selector mounting bracket to the cross head. • Use the roller or slide shoe guide bolts to hold the camera bracket. The face of the bracket should be about 5 ½ inches from the back of the rail. See Figures 2-10 and 2-11. • The back of the bracket should be as close as possible to the crosshead channel. • Use a level and make sure it is plumb and level. Figure 2-9: Lower Bracket with Springs Properly Compressed to the Marks Figure 2-10: APS Camera and Mounting Bracket GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-11 Step 5: Install the APS Camera. • Mount the camera on the mounting bracket. • The APS camera should be centered with the encoded tape. • The face of the camera should be 4 inches from the face of the tape. See Figure 2-12. Figure 2-11: Top View of APS Camera and Mounting Bracket Figure 2-12: APS Camera Mounted 4 Inches From Encoded Tape GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-12 Step 6: Wire the APS Selector Camera according to the connection diagrams. • The APS selector should be wired according to the job specific wiring schematic and connection diagrams. See Figure 2-11. Prior to performing “Step 7” below, the eHydro controller must be installed, and the APS selector must be properly wired according to the wiring schematics. See Section 3 of this manual. Step 7: Perform a fine adjustment of the APS camera. • Make the fine adjustment of the camera using the LED array on the top of the APS camera. See Figure 2-14. • Adjust the camera so only the green LED in the middle of the 4 red arrows is on. See Figure 2-16. • Temporarily obstruct the field of view of the APS camera for 5 seconds, and then remove the obstruction. Two red alignment spotlights should appear on the encoded tape. These spotlights represent the center of the field of view of each APS camera. Adjust the camera so the spotlights are in the center of the encoded tape. See Figure 2-15. • Level the APS camera with a leveling device. The APS camera must be parallel and square to the encoded tape. See Figure 2-17. • The PWR and STAT LED’s indicate the status of the APS. See Table 2-1. Figure 2-13: Wire APS Camera According to Wiring Schematic and Connection Diagram GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-13 LED Color Function OFF ON Slow Blinking (1 Hz) Fast Blinking (5 Hz) PWR Green Supply voltage No power Power OK -- -- STAT Red Status signal No errors Reading error APS internal fault Communication error Figure 2-14: LED Array on APS Camera Figure 2-15: APS Camera Alignment Spotlights Figure 2-16: Fine Adjustment of the Camera Sensor Table 2-1: APS Camera, PWR and STAT LED’s GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-14 2.7.2 APS Selector Floor Position Setup (Hoistway Learn) The hoistway learn procedure requires that the selector camera communicates properly with the Main CPU and the NTS processor. The hoistway learn procedure also requires that the APS camera module communicates properly with both CPUs on the selector interface board and with the main CPU in the controller. Proceed to Section 3 of this manual, and, once the “Prepare the Car for Hoistway Learn” section is reached in section 3.3.3, return to section 2.7.2.1. 2.7.2.1 Verify that the APS Selector Camera is Installed Correctly and Communicating. From the Diagnostic menu on the LCD Interface, select the Sel CAN Com Status. Verify that the CPU to Selector Rx Error Cnt is zero, that the Rx Data Cnt is counting and that the On-line status equals 1. Verify that the CNT A is not zero, that there are no Errors or Warnings and that the alignment is centered and contrast shows OK. Also verify that the NTS to Selector status shows that the Rx Error Cnt is zero, that the Rx Data Cnt is counting and that the On-line status equals 1. Continue to verify that the CNT B value for NTS Processor is not zero, that there are no Errors or Warnings and that the alignment is centered and contrast shows OK. Figure 2-17: APS Camera Orientation GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-15 2.7.2.2 Set the Adjustable Variables – “NTS Proc Adj Vars” in the Controller. The following parameters must be setup prior to learning any floor positions. • Set “Top Speed” to the contract speed of the job. • Set “Num Valid Fl” to the number of floors with openings on this elevator. • Set “UT Limit Dist” and “DT Limit Dist”. If set to zero, the distance is set automatically from the slowdown table in the manual. If the parameter is changed, it will not take ef fect until a learn operation is done at the top and bottom floor. It is recommended to set both parameters to zero unless the slowdown distance need to be adjusted. • Set “Can Baud Rate” to 0. 0 is 115.2K Baud. This parameter should not need to be change d. 2.7.2.3 Zero the Hoistway After the NTS Processor parameters are setup, navigate to the Elevator Setup menu and select Learn Hoistway. The diagram below, Figure 2-18, shows the initial part of Learn Hoistway process if done from the machine room. To setup the hoistway from the car, you will only have to enter this menu the first time to zero the hoistway table. Note that the number of valid floors and top speed will be verified during this process. Be sure to select YES for First Time Setup and press ENTER. When you see the message, “Setup Active. Hit Up or Dn to Scroll thru”, press MODE to escape to the main menu. You are now ready to setup the floors from the car. Figure 2-18: Learn Hoistway From Car GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-16 2.7.2.4 Setting Hoistway Floor Levels with APS Selector • Put the elevator on car top inspection. Temporarily set the car door bypass switch to the BYPASS position. Setting the car door bypass switch to the BYPASS position will allow the car to be moved on car top inspection with the car door open. All safety precautions must be followed to ensure the safety of elevator personnel and the general public when moving the car on car top inspection with the car door bypass switch in the BYPASS position. • Move the jumper on the GALX-1134AN COP board to the setup position. See Figure 2-19. Run/Setup Jumper Figure 2-19: GALX-1134AN COP Interface Board Setup Jumper GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-17 • Move the car on inspection so that it is exactly level with a floor. Pressing the door open button, while moving the car on inspection, will change the inspection speed to 3 fpm during the inspection run. This allows the car to be positioned at exactly floor level. The inspection speed will return to the value set for “Inspect Speed” in the “Car Motion” Sub Menu when the door open button is not pressed. • Adjust the J-hook bracket and guide clip so the door zone bridge is positioned at the midpoint between the two APS cameras. If the alignment spotlights are not visible, temporarily obstruct the field of view of the APS camera for 5 seconds, and then remove the obstruction. Two red alignment spotlights should appear on the encoded tape. See Figures 2-15 and 2-20. Figure 2-20: APS Selector Alignment Spotlights GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 2 –Installation 2-18 • To record the floor position, press the buttons on the car operating panel in the following sequence. o Press the 2nd floor car call button o Press the 1st floor car call button o Press the 2nd floor car call button o Press the 1st floor car call button o Press the Door close button The car call light for floors 1 and 2 will illuminate momentarily and then turn off. After the two car call lights turn off, press the following button on the car operating panel. o Press the car call button for the floor where the car is currently located. This car call light will flash on and off for approximately 5 seconds and then remain off. This indicates that the floor position was recorded successfully. If the car call light does not flash, but remains illuminated, the floor was not recorded successfully. If the floor position was not recorded successfully, verify that the APS SEL adjustable variables are set properly. The 1st floor car call is the car call for the bottom terminal landing. The 2nd floor car call is the car call for the landing that is one floor above bottom terminal landing. The actual floor markings for these floors may not be “1” and “2”. • Repeat this process until all valid floors have been recorded. Set the car door bypass switch to the OFF position. • The hoistway learn is now complete. • Proceed to section 3.3.3. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 3 – GALaxy Startup and Adjustment 3-1 Section 3 - GALaxy Startup and Adjustment 3.1 Procedure for Initial Power-up of Controller 3.1.1 Checking Main Line Voltage Prior to powering up the controller or attempting to run the hydraulic pump motor, the following steps should be completed: • Familiarize yourself with the wiring schematics. All safety precautions, including precautions related to electrical safety, must be followed to ensure the safety of elevator personnel and the general public. • Before applying power to the controller, the following items should be verified by the proper electrical authority. o Verify that the disconnecting means is properly sized and is lockable. o Verify that the voltage supplying the elevator controller is correct as indicated on the “Controller Input” of the controller data tag. o Verify that the conductors supplying the disconnecting means are properly sized. o Verify that the conductors from the disconnecting means to the controller are properly sized. o Verify that power supply feeding the controller has the proper fuse protection or circuit breaker protection. Verify that the power supply feeding the controller is properly grounded and that the groun ding conductor is properly sized. 3.1.2 Check Controller Voltage Turn the main line disconnect to the on position. Check the voltage at R, S, and T on the Soft-Starter. Verify that all three phases are present. Check the voltage at fuses L1 and L2 on controller. If correct, check that the voltage at terminals “S10” and “L120” with respect to “GND” reads 120 VAC. Check that the voltage across terminals “C24V” to “C24C”and “L24V” to “L24C” each reads 24 VDC. If any of these voltages are not correct, check wiring diagram to determine problem before continuing. Verify what the voltage for “FEP” and “HCP” match the voltage specified on the schematic. 3.1.3 Verify the Main CPU is Operating Check to make sure that the “axy” of GALaxy on the Main CPU LCD interface is blinking. If the “axy” is blinking, continue to the next step. If not, check voltage at terminals 5V to 0V on the 1121 Main I/O board to insure 5VDC. If 5VDC is present and the “axy” on the Main CPU LCD interface is not blinking, then contact factory. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 3 – GALaxy Startup and Adjustment 3-2 3.2 Start-Up Procedures 3.2.1 Requirements for a running platform during initial startup 1) Wire Hydraulic Pumping Unit and Main Line Power as shown in the job connection diagrams. 2) If elevator requires a Governor, install and wire the Governor as shown in the job connection diagrams. 3) Add temporary connections on the GALX-1121 Main I/O Board and on the I/O expansion boards as shown in Figures 1, 2, and 3. 4) Set the toggle switches on the Main I/O Board as shown in Figure 3. 5) Place CN18 on pins 2 and 3, in the temporary “Test Mode” configuration, on the GALX-1121 Main I/O Board, as shown in Figure 3. All temporary connections must be removed before placing the elevator in service. Figure 3-0: Typical I/O Expansion Board Fire I/O Board Figure 3-1: GALX-1121 Main I/O Board With Run Bug. See Figure 3-2 For Run Bug Stop Switch. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 3 – GALaxy Startup and Adjustment 3-3 Figure 3-2: GALX-1121 Main I/O Board See Figure 3-1 For Run Bug Connections GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 3 – GALaxy Startup and Adjustment 3-4 6) Check/set parameters in the controller LCD user interface. See “eHydro Controller Settings” in Table 3-0. Preset the following parameters from the LCD User Interface “Adjustable Variables” menu. Adjustable Variables - Car Motion Adjustable Variables - System Options APS Dead Zone = 0.25 inches Hall Lan Baud = 3 (19,200) Stop On PosCnt = 0 (To be set in final setup) Adjustable Variables - NTS Processor High Spd Ins = 0 (0=slow speed inspection) Top Speed = Contract Speed Number Valid Fl = Number of Valid Floors UT Limit Dist = 0 DT Limit Dist = 0 7) Preset the hydraulic valve according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 8) Verify that the hydraulic pumping unit motor rotates in the correct direction. 9) If the motor rotation is not correct, disconnect power and swap the motor starter wires connected to the “Softstarter” terminals 1-L1 and 3-L2. After swapping these wires, re-apply power and verify that the motor rotates in the correct direction. 10) If the Sprecher Schuh Softstarter generates a “Phase Reversal” fault, verify that dip switch 9 on the Softstarter is set properly. See the Sprecher Schuh Softstarter manual for instructions on the proper setting for dip switch 9. • Verify that the elevator is safe to operate as a running platform and that all individuals are clear of moving machinery. • Make sure all hoistway and car doors are closed. 11) Adjust the speed of the platform in the up and down directions according to the hydraulic valve manufacturer’s instructions. 3.2.2 Complete the Installation of Equipment Before beginning the adjustment process, the installation of all equipment should be complete including the following items. See Section 2 for the installation procedures. • All field wiring, safety circuits, and safety devices should be installed. • The APS selector system should be installed including the “door zone bridge” guide clips . • All Terminal Limit switches should be installed. • All car doors and car door electric contacts or car door interlocks should be installed. • All hoist doors and hoistway door interlocks should be installed. Table 3-0: eHydro Controller Settings GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 3 – GALaxy Startup and Adjustment 3-5 3.3 Adjustment Procedures • Remove all temporary connections. • Verify that all safety circuits and safety devices are installed and functioning properly. • Verify that all car door electric contacts or car door interlocks are functioning properly. • Verify that all hoistway door interlocks are functioning properly. • Verify that all hoistway doors and car doors are closed. • Verify that the elevator is safe to operate and that all individuals are clear from moving equipment. 3.3.1 Set Toggle Switches Set all toggle switches on the 1121 Main I/O board as follows: • DOOR LOCKS - "OFF" • IND - "IND" • AUTO DOOR - "OFF" • STOP - "RUN" 3.3.2 Ready the Car to Run on Inspection The car should be ready to run on inspection if all is wired correctly. Select the “Elevator Status” on the Main CPU LCD interface. The display should show INS on the car service area of the first main display. Pressing the DOWN button to the next display will show the type of inspection the car is on as in the list below: • Machine Room • Car Top • Access • In-Car • Car Top Lock Bypass • Car Top Gate Bypass • Car Top G & L Bypass • COB HW Setup Jumper To run the car from the machine room, Machine Room inspection should be displayed. The “inspection string” consists of contacts from the inspection switches and the gate and lock bypass switches in series as shown in Figure 3-3. One and only one of the five inspection inputs should be on for the car to run.. NOTE: Any one of the following conditions will generate an inspection error. • More than one inspection input is on • No inspection input is on • Gate or Lock Bypass switch in the BYPASS position when the car is not on car top inspection GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 3 – GALaxy Startup and Adjustment 3-6 Figure 3-3: Inspection String Circuit 3.3.3 Prepare for the Car for Hoistway Learn Return to section 2.7.2.1, “Veirfy that the APS Selector Camera is installed Correctly and Communicating”. Complete sections 2.7.2.1 through 2.7.2.4. After completing section 2.7.2.4, return to this section, 3.3.3, and complete the following items. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 3 – GALaxy Startup and Adjustment 3-7 • Place the RUN/SETUP jumper on the GALX-1134AN COP Interface Board to the RUN position. • Place the CN18 jumper on the GALX-1121An MAIN I/O board to No Test Mode 1 – 2. • Check that all the floor positions have been learned by selecting “Hoistway Tables”->” Dpy APS Sel Valid Floors”. The display should show a bit set for each valid floor. Even though the car may start at floor 2 or 3 and even skip floors, the selector always starts from one and increments the floors consecutively to show only valid floors. If there are 5 valid floors, 5 bits must be set. • If a bit is zero, then run the car on inspection to that floor, make sure the car is dead level and learn the floor from the procedure in sections 2.7.2.1 through 2.7.2.4., or from the LCD Interface, “Elevator Setup”->” Learn Hoistway”. Follow the prompt from the LCD display and make sure not to mistakenly clear the hoistway table if floors have already been learned. Select to NO when prompted to “Clear HW Table<U/D>? No”. 3.3.4 Verify the Hoistway With all the floors learned, run the car on inspection fro m bottom to top and verify that door zone signals (UL, DL and DZ) and the NTS limit output modules (UN, DN, UT and DT) all work as expected. The NTS top and bottom limits are set automatically from a table when the top or bottom floor is learned respectively. To manually change the NTS limits, perform the following items. • Change the “UT Limit Dist” or “DT Limit Dist” value from the “Adjusta ble Variables”->” NTS Proc Adj Vars”->” menu. The value is set in inches from the terminal floor. • Run the car to the top or bottom floor, learn the floor and then run to the opposite floor and again learn the floor. The new distances will be used at each terminal landing. The selector will use the internal table value if limit distance parameter that is set to zero. 3.4 Adjust the Elevator 3.4.1 Automatic Run • Turn the "AUTO DOOR" switch to the "OFF" position and the "IND" switch to the "IND" position. • Take the car off of inspection operation to allow it to relevel to a floor. If the learn procedure was successful, the elevator should be ready to make an automatic run. • From the Main CPU LCD interface, press the MODE button until the Elevator Status display is shown. See Figure 3-4. Pressing ENTER from any screen in the Elevator Status display will access the car call popup window. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 3 – GALaxy Startup and Adjustment 3-8 • Press ENTER, select a car call floor and press ENTER again. The elevator should run to answer the call. • When the elevator levels in and stops at the floor, the doors will remain closed. The speed of the car can be monitored on this screen with each run as well as the pump motor “ ”, the direction “ ”, the slow speed valve “ ” and the high-speed valve “f” (up fast or down fast). • Press the UP or DOWN button until the Accel/Decel screen is displayed as shown in Figure 3-5. Each time the car runs, the Accel/Decel screen will show the acceleration rate and deceleration rate in the up or down direction. The deceleration rate is displayed as a negative number. In the example above, the up direction run acceleration rate is 55 fpm/s and the deceleration rate is 58 fpm/s. The down direction run accel and decel rates are 63 and -67, respectively. Also shown on the screen are the up and down slowdown distances (USD, DSD) displayed as 20.0 inches each and the up and down leveling distances (ULD, DLD) displayed as 10.8 and 0 inches. The ULD or DLD values are only valid after the car levels into the floor in the respective direction. The displayed values on each of the above status screens can be used to aid in adjusting the slow speed and high-speed valves. 3.4.2 Adjust the Slowdown Distances When the hoistway floor positions are initially set to zero, the slowdown values are also set to zero. Then when the hoistway learn is complete, any slowdown values that are zero are set from an internal slowdown table to give the mechanic a starting poin t. To adjust the slowdown, run the car on automatic to each floor, and adjust the hydraulic valve to provide a smooth deceleration and leveling speed into the floor. After setting the deceleration rate on the hydraulic valve, the slowdown distances ca n be adjusted to provide approximately 2 to 3 inches of stabilized leveling speed. Refer to the hydraulic valve manufacturer’s adjustment procedure to properly adjust the hydraulic valve. To adjust the individual floor slowdown distances can be adjusted by changing the individual floor up or down slowdown count values by navigating to the "Hoistway Tables" menu and then "Floor & SD Figure 3-4: Elevator Status Display Figure 3-5: Accel/Decel Display GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 3 – GALaxy Startup and Adjustment 3-9 Count" display. See Figure 3-6. From this screen, Down Slowdown (DS) count, the floor count and Up Slowdown (US) count can be set. Press UP or DOWN to access the desired floor and then press ENTER to go into edit mode. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to position the cursor “>” to the desired DS slowdown or US slowdown count, and then press ENTER again to edit that count. After the value is changed, press ENTER to save the value. Press MODE to exit out of this menu. The slowdown counts can be changed for any floor. 3.4.3 Adjust the Stop When at floor level, the “UL, DL, & DZ” LEDs should be on. If the elevator continually tries to seek floor level by leveling up and down, try the following steps to correct the problem: • Reduce the leveling and re-leveling velocity by adjusting the leveling speed adjustment on the valve. • Increase the APS Dead Zone parameter in the Car Motion menu. If the car stops hard, readjust the final stop on the valve. Again, refer to the adjustment procedure of the valve manufacturer. Make sure the "Soft Stop Time" parameter is set to about 1.5 seconds. The floor level positions are set by placing the car at the exact floor location and then selecting to learn the floor position. When the floor position is learned, the count value is automatically placed in the Hoistway Table as a count that is read from the tape. The UL and DL locations are calculated to be 8 inches apart + or – the APS Dead Zone distance parameter. No door zone magnet is used. An exact stop can be achieved with setting the car to stop on pulse counts. With "Stop On Pos Cnt = 1", adjustment for the Up or Down Level Distance is found in the “UL & DL Distance” menu in “Hoistway Tables”. See Figure 3-7. The Pulses/Inch (PPI=50.8) is also display on this screen. Be familiar with how much each pulse will affect the stop. The variables “Dn Level” and “Up Level” are used as the number of pulse counts to continue moving before issuing a stop sequence after the exact level position of the door zone is reached (UL and DL both on). “Dn Level” is used when the car is running down and “Up Level” when the car is running up. Changing the "Dn Level" and the "Up Level" variables will change the leveling distance at all floors. Figure 3-6: Accel/Decel Display Figure 3-7: UL & DL Distance Display GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 3 – GALaxy Startup and Adjustment 3-10 To make floor position count changes at individual floors select the "Hoistway Tables" menu and then the "Floor & SD Count" screen. See Figure 3-8. Hit UP or DOWN to access the desired floor and then press ENTER to go into edit mode. Change the floor count to the desired location and then run the car away from the floor and then back again. If the car stops in the desired level position, place the car on inspection and learn the floor from the procedure in section 2.7.2. The floor position can also be relearned in the Machine Room from the LCD Interface, “Elevator Setup”->” Learn Hoistway”. Follow the prompt from the LCD display and make sure not to mistakenly clear the hoistway table if floors have already been learned, i.e., select NO when prompted to “Clear HW Table<U/D>? No”. When the new value for the floor is learned, the floor count value is also updated in the NTS Processor. This will make sure that the door zone positions for both the Main CPU and the NTS Processor turn on at the same time. 3.4.4 Verify Proper Operation of All Safety Circuits and Signal Devices • Remove all temporary connections. • Verify that all safety circuits and safety devices are installed and functioning properly. • Verify that all car door electric contacts or car door interlocks are functioning properly. • Verify that all hoistway door interlocks are functioning properly. • Verify that all signal devices are functioning properly. 3.4.5 Perform Required Tests Complete all required inspections and tests before placing the elevator in service. Figure 3-7: Floor and SD Count Display GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-1 Section 4 Troubleshooting 4.1 General Information The GALaxy controller is equipped with a number of features that aid in troubleshooting any problems that may occur. The physical layout of the controller provides ready access to all I/O to make voltage measurements. All I/O boards, except for the Main I/O board, have LED’s that monitor the state of the input. The controller is equipped with an LCD interface on the Main CPU board that displays the I/O status of Main I/O board, Safety PAL (FPGA) and the NTS Processor. The LCD Interface section describes the use of the Main CPU LCD interface. In this section, the basic points of troubleshooting will be detailed. 4.2 Microprocessor CPU The CPU is very reliable and normally trouble free. With power turned on, the “axy” in GALaxy on the Main CPU LCD interface should be blinking at one second intervals to indicate that the CPU is running. If it is not blinking, then check voltage at the 5V terminal with respect to the 0V terminal on the Main I/O board. This voltage should read 5VDC. If not, then check the input and output voltage of the DC power supply. If the “axy” is not blinking and 5VDC is present at the 5V terminal with respect to the 0V terminal, then contact the factory. All job parameters that are field adjustable are stored in a non- volatile MRAM chip on the Main CPU board. 4.3 Input/Output Boards The two main sections of all the I/O boards are the low voltage and the high voltage sections. The low voltage section consists of all the digital interfacing necessary for the CPU to communicate with the field components. The high voltage section consists of the field components (buttons, switches, lights, relays and sensors) and their associated input and output signals. The standard voltage for the Main I/O board and the COP board is 120VAC. However, the I/O expansion boards can accept a voltage range fr om 24 VAC, 24 VDC and 120 VAC. Serial Hall Call and Hall lantern board are only 24 VDC. It is very important that the wiring schematics are reviewed in order to determine the voltages for which the controller was designed before applying power. The majority of problems that may arise with the control system are due to faulty inputs or outputs on the high voltage side of the system. For example, having a limit switch not feeding voltage or an acknowledgment light turning on. The GALaxy control system is designed to enable the technician to check both the high voltage section and the low voltage section to correct the problem. The high voltage section is checked with a digital voltmeter, or if available, with the individual LEDs that are associated with the input. Depending on the particular input or output, the voltage measured at the terminal will either be “high” or “low” with respect to its reference point. For example, to determine if the car top inspection input switch was conducting, the voltage should be measured at terminal “INS” with respect to “GND”. If the switch is feeding it should read 120VAC. If the switch is open, the voltage should read less than 50VAC. The previous example determines whether or not the field component is functioning properly. However, to determine if the signal is actually being communicated to the CPU, the signal must be checked on the low voltage section of the board. The low voltage section is checked from the Main CPU LCD interface. Using the previous example, from the Main CPU LCD interface, navigate to the "Inputs and Outputs" menu, "Car Inputs and Outputs" and scroll through the I/O list until the "INS" input is located. The LCD will display "INS " if the inspection switch is feeding and "INS " if the switch is open. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-2 All of the I/O’s are optically isolated between the high voltage section and the low voltage section. The inputs on the GALX-1121 Main I/O board and the GALX-1134 COP board are separated into 8 inputs per board (GALX4-0048N input board) that mounts on the larger boards. If an input is determined to be faulty, the GALX4-0048N board is replaced instead of the input opto-isolator chip. The outputs that are plugged into the GALX-1121 Main I/O board are short circuit protected and can withstand a direct short across the terminals. There are two outputs per output board and are covered with a red plastic protective case. If an output on the MAIN I/O board is determined to be faulty, then the GALX4-0049N output board is replaced. The input opto-isolators and the output solid-state relays on the 1106 and 1107 I/O boards are socketed IC's that are labeled on the silk screen of the various I/O boards with a "U" number (for example U45). If it is determined through the previous troubleshooting procedures that the input signal is present at the terminal, but is not being communicated to the CPU, the input opto-isolator may be defective and can be replaced in the field. If it is determined that the CPU is communicating the output signal to the solid - state relay, but the voltage does not go high at the terminal, the solid-state relay may be defective and can be replaced in the field. The 1123 I/O board has current limiting inputs and short circuit protected outputs. If it is determined that any I/O on the 1123 board is faulty, the board must be replaced. Any time IC’s or I/O boards are replaced, the power should be turned off and care should be taken in removal of the old chip or board and replacement of the new one. All of the I/O and their associated IC’s or boards are listed in the wiring schematics. 4.4 Run Sequence The following diagram in Figure 4-0 shows the run sequence of the controller for an up and down run. Note that the RUN relay picks before SU or SD but drops at the same time as SU or SD. Figure 4-0: RUN Sequence GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-3 4.5 The Safety PAL Functions The Safety PAL monitors the Main CPU RUN and Door Zone outputs, the NTS Terminal Limit and Door Zone outputs, car Inspection and Door Gate/Lock inputs, and the speed outputs from both the Main CPU and the NTS. The Safety PAL’s job is to interrupt or prevent a run operation in case of an unsafe conditions. Run Control - CPU Control outputs gated by Safety PAL: SU – Solenoid Up Command MC – Motor Contactor SD – Solenoid Down Command MC1 – Dual Motor Contactor SUF – Solenoid Up Fast Command STE – Soft-Starter Enable SDF – Solenoid Down Fast Command RUN – Run Relay Command Door Zone Status – CPU Control and NTS MCU Control UL – Up Level DL – Down Level DZ – Door Zone SEL_OK – Communications to Selector OK and no Selector Fault SPD150 – Speed greater than 150 fpm SPD75 – Speed greater than 75 fpm Door Status: DLT – Door Lock Top GS – Car Gate Switch or Lock DLM – Door Lock Middle RLM – Rear Lock Middle DLB – Door Lock Bottom RGS – Rear Gate Switch or Lock GBP – Gate Bypass LBP – Lock Bypass Inspection Status & Control: GLB – Gate/Lock Bypass AUTO– Automatic Operation INS– Car Top Inspection ICI – In Car Inspection IU – Car Top Inspection Up ACC – Access ID – Car Top Inspection Down TAU – Top Access Up MRIN – Motor Room Inspection TAD – Top Access Down MRIU – Motor Room Inspection UP BAU – Bottom Access Up BAD – Bottom Access Down MRID – Motor Room Inspection Down Terminal Limit Status – NTS MCU Control outputs gated by Safety PAL: UN – Up Normal Limit UT – Up Terminal Slowdown DN – Down Normal Limit DT – Down Terminal Slowdown Figure 4-1 illustrates all the Main CPU, NTS Processor and Safety PAL functions: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-4 Figure 4-1: Main CPU, NTS and Safety PAL System GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-5 Figure 4-2: GALX-1121 Main I/O Board 4.6 Safety PAL The Safety PAL has a fault LED located in the middle left of the board that indicates there is a PAL fault. See Figure 4-2. Important: When the LED is on, the car is prevented from running. The Safety PAL performs the following functions: • Verifies that the Up or Down Fast solenoid turns off when the terminal limits are activated • Verifies that the doors are closed and safe to run • Verifies all inspection operations • Verifies that the car velocity is not greater than 150 fpm in the door zone and with the doors open or running on inspection. While the Safety PAL cannot turn on any run control signals, it can turn off the f ollow signals from the Main CPU: RUN, SU, SUF, SD, SDF, MC, MC1, STE and from the NTS Processor: UN, UT, DN, and DT. When troubleshooting errors detected by the Safety PAL, take the following steps: Check LED status of the PAL FAULT. • Check the NTS CPU and NTS COM are blinking at one second intervals. Check that the NTS CPU FAULT LED is off. • From the Main CPU LCD interface, navigate to the "NTS Inputs and Outputs" menu, and view all of the I/O status of the NTS CPU. Navigate to the “PAL Inputs and Outputs” menu and view all of the I/O status of the Safety PAL. • From the Main CPU LCD interface, navigate to the "Fault Log" menu, and view the recorded faults for any fault related to the NTS processor or I/O’s that are input to the Safety PAL. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-6 4.7 System Faults Faults that are detected by the Main CPU can be viewed on the Main CPU LCD interface by navigating to the "Fault Log" menu, "View Fault Log". The lists of possible faults detected by the Main CPU are listed in section 6, Main CPU Faults. By pressing the "ENTER" button on the Main CPU LCD interface when the particular fault is being displayed, the interface will display detailed information for that fault in the same format as the Elevator Status Screens. In general, when a fault occurs, the system records the state of 168 bytes of data and stores the data in two different buffers, the normal and long-term fault buffers. The normal fault buffers can hold the last 50 faults that occurred, and the long-term fault buffer holds the last 350 faults that occurr ed. The data in the normal fault buffer is accessed from the “Fault Log” menu. The long-term fault buffer can be copied to the SD Card and viewed from a PC using a text editor such as Word Pad. 4.8 Main CPU Inputs and outputs Table 4-1: Main CPU Inputs & Outputs Name Description 1CA-nCA 1st – Nth Floor Car Call Acknowledge Outputs 1CAR-nCAR 1st – Nth Floor Rear Car Call Acknowledge Outputs 1C-nC 1st – Nth Floor Car Call Inputs 1CR-nCR 1st – Nth Floor Rear Car Call Inputs 1U-(n-1) U 1st – (Nth-1) Floor Up Hall Call Inputs 1UA-(n-1) UA 1st – (Nth-1) Floor Up Hall Call Acknowledge Outputs 1UAR-(n-1) UAR 1st – (Nth-1) Floor Rear Up Hall Call Acknowledge Outputs 1UR-(n-1) UR 1st – (Nth-1) Floor Rear Up Hall Call Inputs 2DA-nDA 2nd – Nth Floor Down Hall Call Acknowledge Outputs 2DAR-nDAR 2nd – Nth Floor Rear Down Hall Call Acknowledge Outputs 2D-nD 2nd – Nth Floor Down Hall Call Inputs 2DR-nDR 2nd – Nth Floor Rear Down Hall Call Inputs ACC Access Operation Input AD Automatic Door Switch Input ALM COP Alarm Input ALMR Rear COP Alarm Input ALT Alternate Fire Smoke Detector Sensor Input ATT Attendant Operation Input ATTDN Attendant Down Input ATTUP Attendant Up Input AUTO Automatic Operation Input BAD Bottom Access Down Input BAU Bottom Access Up Input BF Bottom Final Input BP Fire Phase I Smoke Detector Bypass Input BUZ Machine Room Buzzer Output GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-7 Table 4-1: Main CPU Inputs & Outputs Name Description CDL Cab Down Lantern Output COL Counter Weight Collision Switch Input (Traction Elevators) CS In Car Stop Switch Input CSPI1-3 Car Spare Input 1 – 3 CSPO1-3 Car Spare Output 1 – 3 CSS Car Safety String Input CST Car Stop Switch Input CTA Car Top Automatic Input INS Car Top Inspection Input CTS Car Top Stop Switch Input CUL Cab Up Lantern Output DC Door Close Output DCB Door Close Button Input DCBR Door Close Button Rear Input DCC DAC Clear Output DCL Door Close Limit Input DCLR Door Close Limit Rear Input DCR Door Close Rear Output DDA Down Direction Arrow Output DET Detector Edge Input DETR Rear Detector Edge Input DL or DLc Down Level Position from Main CPU position reference DLB Door Lock Bottom Input. DLB-1 Door Lock Bottom Secondary Input DLM Door Lock Middle Input DLM-1 Door Lock Middle Secondary Input DLO or DLcO Down Level Output LED from Main CPU DLT Door Lock Top Input DLT-1 Door Lock Top Secondary Input DN Down Normal Limit NTS Processor Output DNi Down Normal Limit Input from NTS Processor Output DN-1 or DNc Down Normal Output from Main CPU position reference DO Door Open Output DOB Door Open Button Input DOBR Door Open Button Rear Input DOL Door Open Limit Input DOLR Door Open Limit Rear Input DOR Door Open Rear Output DPM Door Protect Monitor Input DT Down Terminal Limit NTS Processor Output DTi Down Terminal Limit Input from NTS Processor Output GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-8 Table 4-1: Main CPU Inputs & Outputs Name Description DT-1 or DTc Down Terminal Slowdown Output from Main CPU position reference DZ Door Zone Input from Safety PAL (And of NTS and Main CPU) DZ-1 or DZc Door Zone Output from Main CPU position reference DZA or DZAc Door Zone Output from Main CPU position reference DZO or DZcO Door Zone Output LED from Main CPU ED Extended Door Time Input EE Electric Eye Input EER Electric Eye Rear Input EMP Emergency Power Input EPS Emergency Power Select Input EPT Emergency Power Transfer Input EQ Earthquake Sensor Input EXT Car Top Exit Switch Input FAN Cab Fan Output FB Fire Buzzer Output FBNB Fire Buzzer/Nudging Buzzer Output FF Full Field Pilot Output FFS Fire Fighters Stop Switch Input FL Fire Phase I Light Output FS Fire Phase I On Hall Switch Input FS2 Fire Switch Phase II On Input FS2C Fire Switch Phase II Call Cancel Input FS2H Fire Switch Phase II Hold Input FST Fire Stop Switch Override Output FSTi Fire Stop Switch Override Input FSTP Fire Stop Switch Override Output GBP Gate Switch Bypass Input. GLB Gate or Lock Bypass Open GOV Governor Switch Input GS Car Gate Switch Input GS-1 Gate Switch Secondary Input. GSPI1-3 Group Spare Input 1 – 3 GSPO1-3 Group Spare Output 1 – 3 GTS Rope Gripper Trip Switch Input. HB Handicap Buzzer Output HBE Handicap Buzzer Enable Input HSS Hatch Safety String Input HWLRN Hoistway Learn HWS Hoistway Smoke Sensor Input HWS2 Hoistway Smoke Sensor 2 Input HWSET COP Hoistway Setup Mode Jumper Input GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-9 Table 4-1: Main CPU Inputs & Outputs Name Description ICI In-Car Inspection Input. ICR Inconspicuous Riser Input ID Car top Inspection Down Input IEN Car Top Inspection Enable IFB Inspection Fire Buzzer Output IFL Inspection Fire Light Output IND Independent Input INDC Independent Input in COP ISER In Service Output ISPD Inspection Speed Output IU Car Top Inspection Down Input L120 Lantern 120 VAC L120B Lantern 120 VAC Secondary Input LBP Lock Bypass Input LD Down Hall Lantern Output LDR Rear Down Hall Lantern Output LIG Cab Light Output LOS Low Oil Switch Input LPS Low Pressure Switch Input LU Up Hall Lantern Output LUR Rear Up Hall Lantern Output LWA Load Weighing Anti-nuisance LWB Load Weighing Bypass Input LWD Load Weighing Dispatch MC Motor Contactor Output MC1 Dual Motor Contactor Output MC1i Dual Motor Contactor Input. MCi Motor Contactor Input. MES Main Egress Smoke Detector Sensor Input MRID Motor Room Inspection Down Input. MRIE Motor Room Inspection Enable Input MRIN Motor Room Inspection Input. MRIU Motor Room Inspection Up Input. MRS Motor Room Smoke Sensor Input MRSW Motor Room Stop Switch MSPI1-3 Machine Room Spare Input 1 – 3 MSPO1-3 Machine Room Spare Output 1 – 3 MTO Motor Overload NBFB Nudging/Fire Buzzer Output NTSCM NTS Com COP LED Output NTSF NTS Processor Fault GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-10 Table 4-1: Main CPU Inputs & Outputs Name Description NUD Door Nudging Output NUDR Door Nudging Rear Output OVL Overload Input P1-Pn 1ST – Nth Discrete Floor Position Indicator Outputs PALF Safety PAL Fault PS Pit Switch Input RDOOR Rear Door Jumper RGS Rear Car Gate Switch Input. RGS-1 Rear Car Gate Switch Secondary Input RLM Rear Lock Middle Input. RLM-1 Rear Lock Middle Secondary Input RPM Rear Door Protection Monitor RST Reset Drive Output RTL Return to lobby Input RUN Run Output Relay Control RUNi Run Input S10 Run Control 120 VAC S10 Controller Power Input SD Solenoid Down Run Output SDF Solenoid Down Fast Output SDFi Solenoid Down Fast Input SDi Solenoid Down Run Input SE Safety Edge Input SELCM Selector Com COP LED Output SELOK Selector Okay SER Safety Edge Rear Input SP150 Speed Greater than 150 fpm SP75 Speed Greater than 75 fpm SPD Motor Up to Speed STE Soft-Starter Enable SU Solenoid Up Output SUF Solenoid Up Fast Output SUFi Solenoid Up Fast Input SUi Solenoid Up Input TAD Top Access Down Input. TAU Top Access Up Input. TF Top Final Input TPH Oil Temperature High TPL Oil Temperature Low TPL Temp Low Input (Hydraulic Elevators) TSD Terminal Speed Device GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-11 Table 4-1: Main CPU Inputs & Outputs Name Description TSTM Test Mode Jumper UDA Up Direction Arrow Output UL or ULc Up Level Position from Main CPU position reference ULO or ULcO Up Level Output LED from Main CPU UN Up Normal Limit NTS Processor Output UNi Up Normal Limit Input from NTS Processor Output UN-1 or UNc Up Normal Output from Main CPU position reference UT Up Terminal Limit NTS Processor Output UTi Up Terminal Limit Input from NTS Processor Output UT-1 or UTc Up Terminal Slowdown Output from Main CPU position reference 4.9 NTS Processor Inputs and Outputs Table 4-2: NTS Processor Inputs & Outputs Name Description DL Down Level Position (internal) DN Down Normal Limit Output DNo Down Normal Output (internal) DT Down Terminal Slowdown Limit Output DTo Down Terminal Slowdown Output (internal) DZ Door Zone Position Output DZA Door Zone Auxiliary (internal) DZC Door Zone Clip Output DZo Door Zone Output (internal) SOK Selector Okay Output TST Test Mode Input Jumper UL Up Level Position (internal) UN Up Normal Limit Output UNo Up Normal Output (internal) UT Up Terminal Slowdown Limit Output UTo Up Terminal Slowdown Output (internal) GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-12 4.10 Relocate I/Os Special Relocation I/O’s are located on the Machine Room CAN bus, the Car Top CAN bus and the Group CAN bus. Each CAN bus has three inputs and three outputs for this purpose and are named as follows: MRCAN CTCAN GRCAN Inputs Outputs Inputs Outputs Inputs Outputs MSPI1 MSPO1 CSPI1 CSPO1 GSPI1 GSPO1 MSPI1 MSPO2 CSPI2 CSPO2 GSPI2 GSPO2 MSPI3 MDPO3 CSPI3 CSPO3 GSPI3 GSPO3 Table 4-3: I/O Relocation Table The locations of these I/O are preset in the io.dat file and can be viewed on the diagnostic I/O display or on the board electronic ink label. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-13 4.10.1 Relocate I/Os – Add IO Relocation Figure 4-3: To relocate the I/O, select the “Relocate IOs” menu from the “Inputs and Outputs” menu. Then select the “Add I/O Relocation”. Use the Up or Down button to select the input type and location such as CSPI1, (CTCAN car spare input 1). The type is an input and CSPI1 is located where the desired Input will be relocated. Hit the Enter button and then the Up or Down to select the I/O to be relocated. Only I/O’s allowed on the selected bus will be displayed. When you reach the I/O to be relocated, then hit GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-14 the Enter button again. Once an I/O has been selected, power must be cycled on the controller for the relocation to take place. 4.10.2 Relocate I/Os – Remove Relocation IO Figure 4-4: To remove an individual I/O from the relocation table, select the “Remove Relocation IO” menu and then hit the Up/Down buttons to select the I/O location (Machine Room Spare Input 2 – MSPI2) and then hit the Enter Button. Use the Up/Down buttons change th e IO selection to None (Select I/O: None) and then hit enter. Again, power must be cycled for the IO change to take place. To remove all I/O relocations, select the “Clear Relocation Table” menu and hit enter. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-15 4.10.3 Car Trace Screen The controller continually stores 168 bytes of critical data every 20 milliseconds (can be set to 10, 20, 30 or 40) in a 500-frame circular trace buffer. This continues until a command is given to stop storing in which 35 additional frames are stored and then the update is stopped. The purpose of this buffer is to capture 465 frames of data prior to an event and then 35 frames after the event. The user can manually stop the trace buffer while viewing data in the Elevator Status display by pressing ENTER and then Mode for the Trace Popup window and then hitting ENTER to stop the trace. The trace can also be stopped by setting up a trace trigger from an occurrence of a fault or state change. Once the trace buffer is stopped, the Elevator Status screens becomes the Trace buffer screens. The Elevator Status screen will stay in the trace mode until the trace is restarted. The trace update rate and trigger parameters can be altered by the user to enable the capture data for a specific problem. The trace setup is accessed from the Software Utilities menu and is shown below: Figure 4-5: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-16 A description of each trace setup menu is show below: • Stop Trace – Stops the trace recording. • Start Trace – Starts the trace recording. • Trace Time Interval – Modify the time interval from 10 to 20, 30 or 40 msec. Extends the trace time from 5 seconds to 10, 15 or 20 seconds respectively. • Trace Trigger Arm – Arm the trace for a condition after power up. The arm condition has to be met before the trigger condition is checked. The Arm conditions are show below: o Always Armed o Power Up Reset o Initial At Floor o Motion Start o Initial Stop o Relevel Start o Front Door Open Start o Front Door Dwell Start o Front Door Close Start o Rear Door Open Start o Rear Door Dwell Start o Rear Door Close Start o Inspection Start o Safety String Start • Trace Trigger Window – Time window for logic events to be considered valid. When the trigger condition is set for more than one condition and a trigger condition occurs momentarily, this is the duration of time that the momentary condition is considered v alid. A value of 35 should work fine. • Setup Trace Trigger – The logic condition for the trace trigger to occur. There is an “AND” trigger variable and an “OR” trigger variable. When a trigger condition is selected, the user must set it in the “AND” or “OR” trigger variable. A trigger condition cannot be set in both trigger variables. The trigger occurs when all the “AND” conditions are met or any of the “OR” conditions are met. In addition, the trigger ARM must also be active. Trigger conditions can be set from the following: o Fault Change o Fault Match o Service Change o Service Match o Procedure Change o Procedure Match o Run Status Change o Run Status Match o Slowdown Change o Slowdown Match o Rear Slowdown Change o Rear Slowdown Match o Status Change o Status Match o Status 2 Change o Status 2 Match o Fault Bits 0 Change o Fault Bits 0 Match o Fault Bits 1 Change o Fault Bits 1 Match o Fault Bits 2 Change o Fault Bits 2 Match o Fault Bits 3 Change o Fault Bits 3 Match o NTS Status 1 Change o NTS Status 2 Change o NTS Command 1 Change o NTS Command 2 Change o NTS Door Zone Change o NTS Limit Change o Status 3 Change o Status 4 Change GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-17 • Show Trace Trigger Logic – Displays the trace trigger logic. • Clear Trace Trigger Logic – Clears the trace trigger logic. The Trace Screen is the “Elevator Status Screen” but it is not being continuously updated. Instead the trace screen allows the user to step through each buffer frame to catch extremely quick ch anges in the status while the car was running. To keep track of which frame is being viewed, the trace index (tix) is displayed on the main status screen and then momentarily on all other status screens. Figure 4-6: To navigate the trace screens, hit the UP or DOWN buttons to change to the next status screen. To increment to the next trace frame, hit the ENTER button. Hitting the ENTER button will cause the trace index to increment by 1. To increment or decrement quickly through each frame, hit and hold the ENTER button and then hit the UP button to increment the index by 10 or the DOWN button to decrement by 10. The trace time interval is defaulted to 20 milliseconds and can be change to 10, 20, 30 or 40 milliseconds. Each time the trace index is incremented, the frame displayed shows data that occurred GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 4 - Troubleshooting 4-18 20 milliseconds later. If the time interval is set to 10 milliseconds, then the next frame displayed would show data that is 10 milliseconds later. Note, changing the time interval while the trace is stopped will cause the trace data to be lost and the trace will be restarted. When the trace buffer is triggered (stopped) and the Elevator Status screen is viewed, the trace index (tix) will equal 464, the point at which the trigger occurred. Since the index starts at 0 and ends at 499 (500 frames), 464 is at the 465th location and there are 35 more trace frames until the trace index rolls over to the beginning at 0. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-1 Section 5 LCD Interface 5.1 Operating the LDC Interface The LCD interface uses a 4 line by 20-character display and four buttons. This interface allows the user to adjust parameters, view critical controller information, to implement the controller setup and to view the elevator status. Upon power-up the Elevator Status screen is displayed. Hitting the mode button twice will bring you out to the main menu showing a blinking GALaxy name to indicate the controller is running. The four buttons used with the LCD display are, UP, DOWN, MODE and ENTER. The UP and DOWN buttons are used to scroll up and down to each menu item. When an appropriate menu item is reached, the ENTER button is used to select the item. Some menu items, once selected, show a second menu. Again, use the UP and DOWN buttons to scroll through the menu items and the ENTER button to select the item. The MODE button is used to go back to the previous menu. When a menu item is an adjustable variable, select the item with the ENTER button and change the variable with the UP or DOWN button. The MODE button is used to move the cursor to the next dig it. When the appropriate value is reached, used the ENTER button to complete the variable change operation and return to the current menu. To adjust the brightness of the display, the Adjust LCD Display menu allows the user to adjust the contrast and the brightness. The LCD Menus are show in the following section. Figure 5-0: LCD Interface GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-2 5.2 LCD Menus 5.2.1 Elevator Status Figure 5-1: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-3 5.2.1.1 Elevator Status Screens: The Elevator Status Display is show immediately after a power up. Critical information for the controller is displayed in several screens that are continuously updated. These screens show the car status, control I/O’s and fault information. The Up and Down buttons allow the user to rotate to each status screen. To get back to the initial status screen, press the Mode button. To exit the Elevator Status Display and to view the Main menu, press the Mode button while in the initial status screen. The following information is displayed on the status screens: Figure 5-2: Elevator Status Display GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-4 Table 5-0: Elevator Service = (SAF) Safety String = (LPR) Low Pressure = (INS) Inspection = (HOT) Hot Oil Operation = (RST) Reset Mode = (ADO) Auto Door Off = (TST) Test Mode Service = (ROT) Riot Control = (HSU) Hoistway Setup = (CEO) Car Sw Elevator Off = (FFS) Fire Fighter's Stop Switch = (HEO) Hall Sw Elevator Off = (MRS) Machine Room Stop Switch = (COF) Car Off Switch = (MOS) Motion Stop = (RTL) Return To Lobby = (AFS) At Floor Shutdown - (IND) Independent Service = (CMF) Comm Fail = (VIP) Priority VIP Service = (DCF) Door Close Fail = (LWC) Calibrate Load Weigher = (DPS) Door Protection Svc = (JAK) Jack Reset Service = (STA) Stalled Out Of Svc = (OVL) Load Weigh Overload = (Low Oil Service = (LWB) Load Weighing Bypass = (EAQ) Earthquake Service = (EDT) Extended Door Time = (EMP) Emergency Power Service = (RSU) Reset Going Up = (FS2) Fire Service Phase 2 = (RSD) Reset Going Dow = (FSM) Fire Phase 1 Main Return = (SEC) Security Recall = (FSA) Fire Phase 1 Alt Return = (TUG) TUG Service = (EPR) Emergency Power Recall = (SAB) Sabbath Service = (HSV) Hospital Service = (ATT) Attendant Service = (MED) Medical Emergency Service = (HOM) Homing = (CBL) Code Blue = (AUT) Automatic Service Table 5-1: Elevator Procedure 1 = Reset Mode 12 = Safety String Open 2 = Inspection 13 = Elevator Off Line 3 = Motion Mode: Up Fast 14 = Elevator Parked 4 = Motion Mode: Up Transition 15 = Waiting At Floor 5 = Motion Mode: Leveling Up 16 = Doors Procedure 6 = Motion Mode: Down Fast 17 = Elevator Stalled (or Low Oil) 7 = Motion Mode: Down Transition 18 = Elevator Resetting Hydro Jack 8 = Motion Mode: Leveling Down 19 = Elevator on Low Oil Pressure mode 9 = Motion Mode: Emergency Stop 20 = Elevator is in Automatic Learn Hoistway 10 = Motion Mode: Not Used 21 = Elevator is in Emergency Power Recovery 11 = Motion Mode: Emergency Slowdown 22= Hot Oil Mode GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-5 When a system fault occurs, it will be displayed on the bottom line of the second status display screen in place of “No Current Fault”. The fault will remain for 60 seconds if not additional fault occurs. Figure 5-3: Second Status Display Table 5-2: Fault Status See the CPU FAULTS Section Table 5-3: Door Status Elev Door Closed F2CPO Door Opening F2HLD Door Opening Elev Door Opening F2CPO Door Closed F2HLD Door Closed Elev Door Dwelling F2CPO Door Closing F2HLD Door Closing Elev Door Open F2CPC Door Open F2MBC Door Open Elev Door Closing F2CPC Door Opening F2MBC Door Opening Elev Door Nudging F2CPC Door Closed F2MBC Door Closed F1RET Door Open F2CPC Door Closing F2MBC Door Closing F2CPO Door Open F2HLD Door Open Table 5-4: Rear Door Status Rear Door Closed F2CPO RDor Opening F2HLD RDor Opening Rear Door Opening F2CPO RDor Closed F2HLD RDor Closed Rear Door Dwelling F2CPO RDor Closing F2HLD RDor Closing Rear Door Open F2CPC RDor Open F2MBC RDor Open Rear Door Closing F2CPC RDor Opening F2MBC RDor Opening Rear Door Nudging F2CPC RDor Closed F2MBC RDor Closed F1RET RDor Open F2CPC RDor Closing F2MBC RDor Closing F2CPO RDor Open F2HLD RDor Open GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-6 Table 5-5: STATUSF: Control Status Flag (Pops up over current fault) Bit 0: (sfS10) NO S10 power Bit 17: Bit 1: (sfHC) NO HC power Bit 18: Bit 2: (sfSS) NO SS input Bit 19: Bit 3: Bit 20: Bit 4: Bit 21: (sfSHD) Shutdown (too many run attempts Bit 5: (sfIO) I/O error during redundancy check with faults) Bit 6: (sfINS) Inspection or lock bypass fault Bit 22: (sfAST) Annual Safety Test Bit 7: (sfBPI) Binary Position Input Error Bit 23: (sfSAF) Waiting for Safe (Door Locks and Bit 8: (sfPOS) Position Error Gate) Bit 9: (sfAD) No automatic Doors Bit 24: (sfTLM) UT or DT limit error Bit 10: (sfSTP) Stop switch open Bit 25: Bit 11: (sfDZ) Door Zone fault Bit 26: (sfDZF) UL, DL and DZ off at floor Bit 12: (sfGDL) Gate or Door lock fault Bit 27: Bit 13: Bit 28: (sfFST) Fire Fighter Stop Switch Bit 14: (sfDCL)No DCL Bit 29: (sfSEL) Selector Can error Bit 15: (sfDCC) No Door Close Contact Bit 30: (sfUDL) UL or DL fault Bit 16: Bit 31: (sfLEV) Leveling fault Table 5-6: STATUSF2: Control Status Flag (Pops up over current fault) Bit 0: (sfHWI) Hardware Init fault Bit 16: Bit 1: (sfFDC) Front Door Closing Fault Bit 17: (sfIOT) IO Test in progress Bit 2: (sfRDC) Rear Door Closing Fault Bit 18: Bit 3: (sfLVF) Line Voltage Fault Bit 19: Bit 4: (sfDVF) Door Voltage Fault Bit 20: (sfNIT) Non Interference timer Bit 5: Bit 21: (sfDRQ) Door open request Bit 6: (sfDMO) Door motor overload Bit 22: (sfDPM) Waiting for DPM Bit 7: (sfHWL) Learn Hoistway Fault Bit 23: (sfRPM) Waiting for RPM Bit 8: Bit 24: (sfVSC) Viscosity operation Bit 9: Bit 25: (sfLVR) Leveling request Bit 10: Bit 26: Bit 11: (sfAFS) At Floor Shutdown Bit 27: Bit 12: Bit 28: (sfEES) Front EE Test failed fault Bit 13: (sfRSR) Reset run fault Bit 29: (sfERS) Rear EE Test failed fault Bit 14: Bit 30: Bit 15: (sfCOP) COP can comm error Bit 31: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-7 Table 5-7: STATUSF3: Control Status Flag (Pops up over current fault) Bit 0: Bit 16: Bit 1: Bit 17: Bit 2: Bit 18: Bit 3: (sfASC) APS Selector CAN Fault Bit 19: Bit 4: (sfNAC) NTS APS Selector CAN Fault Bit 20: Bit 5: (sfMSP) MC/SPD I/O Fault Bit 21: Bit 6: (sfSSA) Stop Switch Anti-Creep Releveling Bit 22: Bit 7: Bit 23: Bit 8: Bit 24: Bit 9: Bit 25: Bit 10: Bit 26: Bit 11: Bit 27: Bit 12: Bit 28: Bit 13: Bit 29: Bit 14: Bit 30: Bit 15: Bit 31: The Elevator State Machine screen shows the last state that was executed when checking the Doors, when checking to determine if a Run is required, checking to Start a run and checking to relevel the car. Figure 5-4: Elevator State Machine Screen GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-8 Table 5-7: CkStS: Check Start Status State 0 = No Start Op 20 = SUF Fail Off 1 = CCF Off Up 21 = SUF On w/SU 2 = CPU UN Off 22 = Run Up 3 = FSTU Fail On 23 = CPU DN Off 4 = SPD Failed On 24 = FSTD Fail On 5 = MC Failed On 25 = RUND Fail On 6 = MC Failed Off 26 = RUND Fail Off 7 = SPD Fail Off 27 = CPU Out On Dn 8 = RUNU Fail On 28 = CCF On w/RunD 9 = RUNU Fail Off 29 = NTS Out On Dn 10 = CPU Out On Up 30 = NTS DN Off 11 = CCF On w/RunU 31 = SD Failed On 12 = NTS Out On Up 32 = CPU DT Off 12 = NTS UN Off 33 = NTS DT Off 14 = SU Failed On 34 = SDF Failed On 15 = CPU UT Off 35 = SD Failed Off 16 = NTS UT Off 36 = CCF On w/SD 17 = SUF Failed On 37 = SDF Fail Off 18 = SU Failed Off 38 = SDF On/W SD 19 = CCF On w/SU 39 = RUN Down Table 5-8: CkLevS: Check Level Start Status State 0 = No Level Op 10 = Level Up 1 = CPU UN Off 11 = CPU DN Off 2 = MC Failed Off 12 = RUND Fail On 3 = SPD Fail Off 13 = RUND Fail Off 4 = RUNU Fail On 14 = CPU Out On Dn 5 = RUNU Fail Off 15 = NTS DN Off 6 = CPU Out On Up 16 = SD Failed Off 7 = NTS UN Off 17 = SDF Failed On 8 = SU Failed Off 18 = Level Down 9 = SUF Failed On GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-9 Table 5-9: CkDrS: Check Door Status State 0 = No Door Op 21 = At Floor Chk 1 = Fire Door 22 = Front DPM 2 = Med Em Svc 23 = Rear DPM 3 = EAQ Door Open 24 = CodeBlue RCL 4 = EMP Wait DC 25 = CodeBlue Svc 5 = EMP Home DO 26 = VIP Recall 6 = EMP Home DC 27 = VIP Service 7 = EMP RCL Door 28 = Independent 8 = Stall Op Door 29 = Overload 9 = Hot Oil Door 30 = Elevator Off 10 = MedEm RCL @Fl 31 = Prison Svc 11 = MedEm RCL 32 = Push Button 12 = MedEm Wait Sw 33 = Attendant 13 = MedEm Svc Op 34 = Extended Door 14 = Hospital Svc 35 = Sabbath 15 = CB Ovr FS RCL 36 = RTL Door Cl 16 = CB Ovr FS Svc 37 = Lobby Recall 17 = F1 Recall @FL 38 = Car Elev Off 18 = F1 Recall 39 = HW Elev Off 19 = F1 Complete 40 = Automatic 20 = F1 or F2 Table 5-10: Front SD (FSd): Front Slowdown Flags Bit 0: (UC) Up Hall Call Slowdown Bit 8: (IU) IR Up Hall Call Slowdown Bit 1: (DC) Down Hall Call Slowdown Bit 9: (ID) IR Down Hall Call Slowdown Bit 2: (CC) Car Call Slowdown Bit 10: Bit 3: Bit 11: Bit 4: (UD) Up Call Door Open Request Bit 12: Bit 5: (DD) Down Call Door Open Request Bit 13: Bit 6: (CD) Car Call Door Open Request Bit 14: Bit 7: Bit 15: Table 5-11: Rear SD (RSd): Rear Slowdown Flags Bit 0: (UC) Up Hall Call Slowdown Bit 8: (IU) IR Up Hall Call Slowdown Bit 1: (DC) Down Hall Call Slowdown Bit 9: (ID) IR Down Hall Call Slowdown Bit 2: (CC) Car Call Slowdown Bit 10: Bit 3: Bit 11: Bit 4: (UD) Up Call Door Open Request Bit 12: Bit 5: (DD) Down Call Door Open Request Bit 13: Bit 6: (CD) Car Call Door Open Request Bit 14: Bit 7: Bit 15: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-10 5.2.1.2 Car Call Popup Display From any screen on the Elevator Status display, hitting Enter cause a Car Call Popup display to appear. Use the Up and Down buttons to select the desired car call and then press Enter to activate the call. Use the Mode button to exit the Car Call Popup display without entering a call. Figure 5-5: Car Call Popup Display 5.2.1.3 Trace Popup Display To enter the Trace Popup display press and hold the ENTER button and then press the MODE button. The Trace Popup display allows the user to either stop/start the trace buffer or to exit the Elevator Status Display. To stop the trace buffer, press ENTER and then Mode for the Trace Popup window and then press ENTER to stop the trace. After the trace buffer is stopped, the Elevator Status display becomes the Trace Display. See the next section on how to navigate the Trace Display. To restart the trace buffer, press ENTER and then MODE button to view the Trace Popup display and then press ENTER to start the trace. Figure 5-6: Stop Trace Popup Display Figure 5-7: Start Trace Popup Display GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-11 5.2.1.4 Trace Display The controller continually stores 168 bytes of critical data every 20 milliseconds (can be changed to 10, 20, 30 or 40) in a 500-frame circular trace buffer. This continues until a command is given to stop storing data in which 35 additional frames are stored and then the update is stopped. The purpose of this buffer is to capture 465 frames of data prior to an event and then 35 frames after the event. The frame number of the trace screens being displayed is show as the trace index (tix) and it ranges fr om 0 to 499. When the trace screens are initially displayed, the index will start at 464, the frame where the command to stop was made. Figure 5-8: To navigate the trace screens, press the UP or DOWN buttons to change to the next screen. To increment to the next trace frame, press the ENTER button. Pressing the ENTER button will cause the trace index to increment by 1. To increment or decrement quickly through each frame, press and hold the ENTER button and then press the UP button to increment the index by 10 or the DOWN button to decrement by 10. When viewing the trace screens, keep in mind that the data is not live but recorded. Also, on the initial trace screen, the trace index (tix=) is displayed as part of that screen. On all other trace screens, the trace index pops up while pressing the ENTER button but goes away to allow viewing of the entire screen. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-12 5.2.2 Main Menu The LCD Main Menu give the user access to all parameters and diagnostics information. Once in the menu from the exiting the Elevator Status Screen, the menu is accessed from the UP, DOWN, MODE and ENTER buttons. The LDC Main Menu is show below: Figure 5-9: Main Menu GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-13 5.2.3 Date and Time The Date and Time menu allows the user to set the controller real-time calendar clock date and time. It is important to set the date and time to local values so that all faults are displayed in the fault log with accurate information. Figure 5-10: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-14 5.2.4 Set Calls and Lockouts 5.2.4.1 Set Car Calls The user can set car and hall calls from the Set Calls & Lockout menu. Note that hall call can only be set from this menu if this car is acting as the group car. Rear car calls and lockouts are displayed only when the car has a rear door. Figure 5-11: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-15 5.2.4.2 Car Call Lockouts The Car Call can be locked out from the Car Call Lockout menu. Select the floor using the UP and DOWN buttons and then hit ENTER to lockout the call. The locked-out call will display an asterisk next to the floor number. Hitting ENTER a second time will unlock the call and remove the asterisk. Figure 5-12: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-16 5.2.4.3 Car Call Test This menu allows the mechanic to initiate a continuous test of the elevator. The test can be conducted with the “AUTO DOORS” switch set to “ON” or “OFF”. By following the instructions from the menu, the “Car Call Test” can be initiated or discontinued. When performing the “Car Call Test”, the car will answer all the registered calls in one direction. When the last call has been answered, the calls will be reinitiated automatically, and the car will answer the calls in the opposite direction. Figure 5-13: This operation will continue until the test is discontinued from the LCD interface, the car is taken out of automatic operation, or a fault occurs. The car will not perform the Car Call Test if it is on Independent Service. When performing the Car Call Test with the “AUTO DOORS” switch set to “OFF”, it is recommended to set the non-interference time (Car Timers->Non Interfer T) to at least 5 seconds. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-17 5.2.5 Inputs and Outputs The Input and Output menus show the status of all inputs and outputs for the MAIN CPU, the GROUP, the NTS processor and the Safety PAL. The status of the I/O is shown as a closed diamond “ ” for ON and an open diamond “ ” for OFF. A description every input and output used on the controller and the board it is located on is shown in the Troubleshooting section. The controller determines which boards are used depending on the options selected and the number of front and rear floors. All I/O locations are determined from an io.dat file on the SD Card. I/O’s on lines 0-13 and 138-146 of the io.dat file are placed at hardware dependent locations and their table location should never be changed. Figure 5-14: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-18 5.2.5.1 Relocate I/Os The Relocation I/O menus allow the user to relocate up to three inputs and three outputs on each of the Machine Room CAN bus, the Car Top CAN and the Group CAN bus. Details of relocating the I/Os are described in the troubleshooting section of this manual. Figure 5-15: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-19 5.2.5.2 Remove Relocation I/O Figure 5-16: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-20 5.2.6 Job Statistics The Job Statistics menu shows the number car calls and the number and percent of hall calls serviced since the job was started or since the job statistics were cleared. Figure 5-17: Listed are all the categories maintained: # of Car Calls # of Up Hall Calls # of Down Hall Calls # of Up Hall Calls < 15 sec # of Up Hall Calls < 30 sec # of Up Hall Calls < 45 sec # of Up Hall Calls < 60 # of Up Hall Calls > 60 sec # of Down Hall Calls < 15 sec # of Down Hall Calls < 30 sec # of Down Hall Calls < 45 sec # of Down Hall Calls < 60 sec # of Down Hall Calls > 60 % of Hall Calls with < 15 sec % of Hall Calls with < 30 sec % of Hall Calls with < 45 sec % of Hall Calls with < 60 sec % of Hall Calls with > 60 sec Table 5-12: Job Statistics GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-21 5.2.7 Adjustable Variables This Adjustable Variables menu allows modification of numerous field adjustable parameters for the Main CPU and the NTS Processor. Refer to the Adjustable Variables section for a list of all parameters and their functions. Figure 5-18: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-22 5.2.8 Diagnostics The diagnostics menu shows the communications status to all serial devices. For most devices, the device version and the transmit/receive counts are displayed. The transmit/receive counts should always be incrementing for all devices. All CAN bus communications ports show a “TxErr” and “RxErr” error counts that should always be zero. A non-zero value of the error count on a CAN channel or a receive counter not incrementing on any serial channel indicates a poor cable connection or electrical noise on the cable. Figure 5-19: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-23 5.2.8.1 Group Comm Status Figure 5-20: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-24 5.2.8.2 Group Can Comm Status Figure 5-21: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-25 5.2.8.3 Car Can Comm Status Figure 5-22: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-26 5.2.8.4 Machine Room Can Comm Status Figure 5-23: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-27 5.2.8.5 SPI Comm Status Figure 5-24: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-28 5.2.8.6 APS Selector Comm Status Figure 5-25: 5.2.8.7 Hall Lantern Comm Status Figure 5-26: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-29 5.2.9 Software Utilities The software utilities menu allows the user to view the controller software version, run power -up mode, test the CPU watchdog timer, access SD Card operations, access WiFi setup, change the floor PIs, setup the trace buffer trigger conditions and copy floor tables to the NTS processor. Figure 5-27: Software Version: Display the software version, revision and interim revision in the form 8.00.20. Run Power-Up Mode: The Power-Up Mode is a program that executes first upon power up of the controller. It checks that there is a valid controller program in memory and that a valid cons.dat file is on the SD Card. Once this is validated, the power up program runs the controller program. If the power up program is executed from the controller program or if during power up, the user presses and holds the enter and mode buttons, this routine does not run the controller program but stays in the power up routine to allow for updates of the controller program. The Power-Up Mode is also used to upload new controller software for the Main CPU from the SD Card. Test Watchdog Reset: The watchdog is a CPU timer that must be updated periodically in software to confirm that the program is still running correctly. If the watchdog is not updated, the timer will expire and cause the CPU to do a hard reset to allow the program to restart. To test the watchdog timer, when the command is given, the controller program sits in an infinite software loop without updating the watchdog time to test that the reset function works. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-30 Reset Debug Variables: The debug variables are set by a software engineer to aid in debugging a software problem. Some problems are especially difficult to catch because they occur infrequently or at seemingly random times. The debug variables are displayed in the detailed Elevator Status Menu so that a mechanic can view the variable and report back to the software engineer. The reset debug variables menu allows the mechanic to reset the variables to zero to aid in debugging. SD Card Read/Write Data: This menu is explained in detail in the next section. SD Card Status: This is the Secured Digital Card Status showing if the card has been initialized (Init=1), if it is standard or High Capacity (HC=1), and if it can operate at an acceptable voltage level (VStat=1). 5.2.9.1 SD Card Rear/Write Data This menu item allows the user to read and write controller data to and from the SD Card. Figure 5-28: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-31 5.2.9.2 Power-Up Mode When the Main CPU powers up, it runs a power-up routine that verifies the checksum of the controller program in local flash memory and then verifies that the job configuration file is on the SD Card. If all is okay, the power-up routine jumps to the controller program. If the power up does not pass verifications, program control stays in the power-up routine and the elevator is not allowed to run. To enter power- mode (run the power-up routine), cycle the power while pressing the ENTER and MODE buttons on the LCD Display Interface and then release the button when the display indicates to do so. Alternately, this mode can also be entered by placing the car on inspection and selecting the Run Power Up Mode sub- menu item located in the Software Utilities menu. Figure 5-29: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-32 5.2.9.3 Update Verify Program This menu is used to check the integrity of the CONS file, the controller program and the SD card itself. It is also used to update the controller software. To update controller software, make sure the car is on inspection, make sure the SD Card is installed with the latest controller software and then follow the menu to Load SD Card Program. Figure 5-30: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-33 5.2.10 Hoistway Tables The Hoistway Tables menu show the normal Floor Position Count, normal Slowdown Counts, the Short Floor Slowdown Counts, the CPU Terminal Limit Distanced Counts, the UL and DL Distances Counts for the Main CPU and the Valid Floors and Clips for the NTS Processor. Figure 5-31 GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-34 5.2.10.1 Floor & Slowdown Counts This menu is useful for checking the position count and set the slowdown count values for each floor. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to select the floor and then ENTER to edit values for that floor. The initial values for the slowdown counts for each floor are calculated from the velocity of the car when the learn hoistway procedure is completed. If the position count for a floor is zero, the hoistway has not finished being learned or has not been retained in memory. The Short FL SD Counts menu table are use only at the short floor locations. Figure 5-32: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-35 5.2.10.2 CPU Terminal Limit Distance The CPU Terminal Limit Distance Counts show the Main CPU’s normal terminal limit slowdown values. When the hoistway learn is completed, this table is updated according to the car velocity and will match the slowdown value that are used by the NTS processor. This table cannot be edited from this menu. To alter the slowdown values, change the slowdown values for the NTS processor and relearn the top and bottom floors. Figure 5-33: 5.2.10.3 UL & DL Distance Counts When the “Stop On Pulse Counts” parameter is set to 1 and the car hits the dead level position of the floor count, i.e. when both UL and DL are on, the controller will continue to run until the count for the UL or DL Level counts is reached (UL if going up and DL if going down). This menu allows the UL and Dl Level count to be modified. Figure 5-34: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-36 5.2.10.4 NTS Valid Floors & Clips The NTS Valid Floors and Clips menu shows the valid floors learned in the NTS Processor’s hoistway table during setup and the valid clips read at each floor while running. The clip locations are learned after the car has been setup and is running on automatic at which time the NTS Processor creates a table of floors with valid clips. If the car stops at a floor and does not read a valid clip for three consecutive stops, the car will shut down with NTS DZ Clip Fault. Figure 5-34: 5.2.10.5 Elevator Setup The Elevator Setup menu allows the user to learn the hoistway floor locations, reset fault conditions and open or close the door on inspection. Figure 5-35: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-37 5.2.10.6 Learn Hoistway The controller uses an absolute position tape to maintain the position of the elevator. There are two mechanisms to learn the position count for each floor, one from the machine room using this menu and the second from the car operating station with the COP setup jumper installed. During the initial installation, the floor positions would typically be setup from the car station. See section 2 for the APS Selector Floor Position Setup. Once the floors have been learned but the terminal limits positions have to be modified, it is convenient to follow the learn hoistway menu to relearn the top and bottom floors in order to record the new limit positions. The mechanic can run the car to the top or bottom floor, set the UT or DT Limit count position from the NTS Proc Adj Vars menu and then learn the floor. The new value for the normal terminal limit is then setup in the NTS processor and the Main CPU. To set the opposite terminal limit, the mechanic would run the car to the opposite terminal floor and then again relearn the floor. Note: The UT limits are learned only when the top floor is learned and the DT limit when the bottom floor is learned. Figure 5-36: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-38 5.2.10.7 Open/Close Door The menu is used to open or close the front or rear door while the car is in a valid door zone and the car is on inspection. Figure 5-37: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 5 – LCD Interface 5-39 5.2.11 Fault Log This menu allows the user to view or clear the fault log. The View Fault Log menu displays the fault, the car PI “P”, the building floor position “F”, the number of occurrences, the car service, time and date the fault occurred and the process mode. Faults are displayed in the order of occurrence with the index number displayed on the left as the “ix” number (ix=2, index = 2nd fault). The largest index number signifies the last fault that has occurred. Faults are stored in a circular buffer that fits up to 50 faults. Once the buffer is full, the next fault overwrites the oldest fault. Refer to the CPU Faults section for a detailed description, possible causes and corrective actions of the faults. Figure 5-38: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-40 Section 6 - Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6.1 Main CPU Faults Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix APS Sel CAN Bus Off APS (Absolute Position System) CAN Bus Comm Off Fault • From the LCD user interface, select the Diagnostic menu and then the Sel CAN Com Status menu. The Rx Error Cnt should be zero and the Rx Data Cnt should be incrementing. If the selector board is not communicating it will show with the online status equal to 0. If the Rx Error Cnt is not zero, there is most likely a connection problem from the COP to the Main I/O board. • Verify that the APS Camera CAT-6 Ethernet cable is connected to the Ethernet jack on the COP board. • Check the terminal connection for the twisted pair wires. Verify that CANH and CANL on the 1134 COP board are wired to CANH and CANL on the 1121 Main I/O board respectively. • Make sure the CAT-6 cable is not run in parallel with any high voltage wires. • Noise on the CAN Bus, verify that the shield wire is connected according to the job print. APS SEL CAN Com Err APS selector communication error. • From the LCD user interface, select the Diagnostic menu and then the Sel CAN Com Status menu. The Rx Error Cnt should be zero and the Rx Data Cnt should be incrementing. If the selector board is not communicating it will show with the online status equal to 0. If the Rx Error Cnt is not zero, there is most likely a connection problem from the COP to the Main I/O board. • Verify that the APS Camera CAT-6 Ethernet cable is connected to the Ethernet jack on the COP board. • Check the terminal connection for the twisted pair wires. Verify that CANH and CANL on the 1134 COP board are wired to CANH and CANL on the 1121 Main I/O board respectively. APS Selector CAN Err APS (Absolute Position System) Selector CAN comm error • Verify that the APS Camera CAT-6 Ethernet cable is connected to the Ethernet jack on the COP board. • Check the terminal connection for the twisted pair wires. Verify that CANH and CANL on the 1134 COP board are wired to CANH and CANL on the 1121 Main I/O board respectively. • Make sure the CAT-6 cable is not run in parallel with any high voltage wires. • Noise on the CAN Bus, verify that the shield wire is connected according to the job print. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-41 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix APS Selector Fault APS (Absolute Position System) Selector Fault. This fault may occur due to either an internal error, communications error, position validation error, velocity validation error on the APS Selector. • From the LCD user interface, select the Diagnostic menu and then the Sel CAN Com Status menu. The Rx Error Cnt should be zero and the Rx Data Cnt should be incrementing. If the selector board is not communicating it will show with the online status equal to 0. If the Rx Error Cnt is not zero, there is most likely a connection problem from the COP to the Main I/O board.• From the LCD user interface, verify that the NTS processor is also communicating properly with the APS Selector.• Possible solution is to clean the APS tape with damp soft cloth.• Check the APS Camera and make sure both LEDs on the camera are green. If not refer to the installation procedure to adjust the camera alignment to the tape. ASV Time- out Car 1 Automatic Service Time-out Car 1 • Car was not able to answer group hall call within the automatic service time-out timer. Look for fault condition on car. ASV Time- out Car 2 Automatic Service Time-out Car 2 • Car was not able to answer group hall call within the automatic service time-out timer. Look for fault condition on car. ASV Time- out Car 3 Automatic Service Time-out Car 3 • Car was not able to answer group hall call within the automatic service time-out timer. Look for fault condition on car. ASV Time- out Car 4 Automatic Service Time-out Car 4 • Car was not able to answer group hall call within the automatic service time-out timer. Look for fault condition on car. ASV Time- out Car 5 Automatic Service Time-out Car 5 • Car was not able to answer group hall call within the automatic service time-out timer. Look for fault condition on car. ASV Time- out Car 6 Automatic Service Time-out Car 6 • Car was not able to answer group hall call within the automatic service time-out timer. Look for fault condition on car. ASV Time- out Car 7 Automatic Service Time-out Car 7 • Car was not able to answer group hall call within the automatic service time-out timer. Look for fault condition on car. ASV Time- out Car 8 Automatic Service Time-out Car 8 • Car was not able to answer group hall call within the automatic service time-out timer. Look for fault condition on car. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-42 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix At Floor Shutdown At floor shutdown • Car faulted out while at floor. Look at the fault log for a different fault at the same time to determine cause of failure Aut Swg Fr Door Open Automatic Swing Front Door Open Fault. The swing door can only close by removing the door open signal and allowing the door to close mechanically. With this fault the door stayed open when the open signal was removed. • Verify that the door that the ADO output has not failed on. If so then replace the output chip.• Verify that the door is not binding and is preventing from closing. Aut Swg Rr Door Open Automatic Swing Rear Door Open Fault. The swing door can only close by removing the door open signal and allowing the door to close mechanically. With this fault the door stayed open when the open signal was removed. • Verify that the door that the ADOR output has not failed on. If so then replace the output chip. • Verify that the door is not binding and is preventing from closing. Bot Door Lock Fault The Bottom Door Lock failed on while the door was open. • Faulty door lock. • Door lock not adjusted properly. • Jumper placed on door lock circuit. • Faulty wiring to DLB input. • Faulty DLB and DLB-1 inputs (For this to occur both DLB and DLB-1 inputs must fail on). • DOL input failed. Replace DOL input chip. • Door operator open limit DOL is not adjusted properly Car 1 Comm Loss The group car is not communicating with Car 1. • Faulty wiring from R/T+ and R/T- from car to car. • Faulty U6 driver chip on 1132 board. • Noise on shield wire. Connect shield only on one end. • Noise on the communication wires. Run wires in separate conduit. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-43 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Car 2 Comm Loss The group car is not communicating with Car 2. • Faulty wiring from R/T+ and R/T- from car to car. • Faulty U6 driver chip on 1132 board. • Noise on shield wire. Connect shield only on one end. • Noise on the communication wires. Run wires in separate conduit. Car 3 Comm Loss The group car is not communicating with Car 3. • Faulty wiring from R/T+ and R/T- from car to car.• Faulty U6 driver chip on 1132 board.• Noise on shield wire. Connect shield only on one end.• Noise on the communication wires. Run wires in separate conduit. Car 4 Comm Loss The group car is not communicating with Car 4. • Faulty wiring from R/T+ and R/T- from car to car. • Faulty U6 driver chip on 1132 board. • Noise on shield wire. Connect shield only on one end. • Noise on the communication wires. Run wires in separate conduit. Car 5 Comm Loss The group car is not communicating with Car 5. • Faulty wiring from R/T+ and R/T- from car to car. • Faulty U6 driver chip on 1132 board. • Noise on shield wire. Connect shield only on one end. • Noise on the communication wires. Run wires in separate conduit. Car 6 Comm Loss The group car is not communicating with Car 6 • Faulty wiring from R/T+ and R/T- from car to car. • Faulty U6 driver chip on 1132 board. • Noise on shield wire. Connect shield only on one end. • Noise on the communication wires. Run wires in separate conduit. Car 7 Comm Loss The group car is not communicating with Car 7 • Faulty wiring from R/T+ and R/T- from car to car. • Faulty U6 driver chip on 1132 board. • Noise on shield wire. Connect shield only on one end. • Noise on the communication wires. Run wires in separate conduit. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-44 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Car 8 Comm Loss The group car is not communicating with Car 8 • Faulty wiring from R/T+ and R/T- from car to car. • Faulty U6 driver chip on 1132 board. • Noise on shield wire. Connect shield only on one end. • Noise on the communication wires. Run wires in separate conduit. Car Call Light Fuse Car Call Light Fuse Blown • Check for short on the Car Call Light circuit. Car Call Power Fuse Car Call Power Fuse Blown • Check for short on Car Call Power circuit. Car Com Device Reset Serial Car board reset unexpectedly. Usually caused by loss of power to the individual board. • Usually caused by loss of power to the individual board. Check for loose connection on power to board.• Faulty I/O board. Car Gate Safe Fault Car Gate safe fault • The car was either running or preparing to run and lost a car gate or car lock input. Check the adjustment of the door. Car Safe Fault The Car Safe Fault occurs from the wanting to run but does not have a critical input energized. Some of the conditions for a car safe fault will also cause other faults to be logged. • The car does not have the gate or lock inputs and is running or trying to run • The stop switch is open • An inspection string input fault. Only one input should be on in the inspection string (AUTO, CTI, ICI, ACC or MRI) • Gate or Lock Bypass switch is on when not on car top inspection Car Safe Fault Preop The car had a car safe fault while pre- opening the door. • The car lost the DZ input while leveling into the floor and the door was open. Car Safe Fault Start The car had an onward call, had the door close limit but the car gate or door locks did not make after a 3 second time- out. • The locks are not making properly when the door closes. • The door is not closing properly. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-45 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Car Safety Sw. Fault Car Safety Switch Fault • Verify that the car safety is not tripped. • Faulty wiring in the car safety circuit (CSS input). Car Top Exit Switch Car Top Exit Switch Off fault. The car top exit switch input is off. • Refer to the schematic for the safety string circuit. Car Top Stop Switch Car top stop switch • Indicates that the Car Top Stop Switch opened the safety string. Safety String Fault. Refer to Safety String section on the job schematics. • Check the safety string points with a meter, if there is voltage on the input but the input is not on, replace the input board. CCB Device Fault Car Call Board Device Fault. On the LCD Interface, this fault is display as an abbreviated device name and device fault. Please see the device faults forfurther information. • Look at the details of the fault. The device name and the error code that caused the fault are listed.• Look up the fault code for the device for debugging information. CCB No Comm Aux Bd 1 Car Call Board local aux board 1 comm loss • Comm loss to RGB Auxiliary Car Call Board. Check wiring and bus termination jumpers on boards. If problem persists, check Car Comm Status under diagnostics. CCB No Comm Aux Bd 2 Car Call Board local aux board 2 comm loss • Comm loss to RGB Auxiliary Car Call Board. Check wiring and bus termination jumpers on boards. If problem persists, check Car Comm Status under diagnostics. CCB No Comm Board 1 Car Call Board local board 1 comm loss • Comm loss to RGB Car Call Board. Check wiring and bus termination jumpers on boards. If problem persists, check Car Comm Status under diagnostics. CCB No Comm Board 2 Car Call Board local board 2 comm loss • Comm loss to RGB Car Call Board. Check wiring and bus termination jumpers on boards. If problem persists, check Car Comm Status under diagnostics. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-46 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix CCF Input Failed Off Contact Confirm Fault input failed off. This input is used with an electronic Bucher valve. The CCF input did not turn on during start. • Faulty CCF input. Replace the input board. • Faulty Valve Interface. Please refer to schematic for interface circuit. CCF Input Failed On Contact Confirm Fault input failed on. This input is used with an electronic Bucher valve. The CCF input did not turn on during start. • Faulty CCF input. Replace the input board. • Faulty Valve Interface. Please refer to schematic for interface circuit. CFLT Fail Off Fault CFLT Input Failed OFF. The soft-starter fault relay is check once a day from the controller by cycling the STE, Starter Enable, output off and then on. When STE is turned off the CFLT input should go on. After the CFLT input turns on, STE is turned back on and CFTL is expected to turn back off. If CFLT turns on and does not turn back on, this fault is logged. • Faulty soft-starter fault relay. Replace the fault relay.• Faulty CFLT input. Replace the input board.• Faulty STE output. Check that the STE output cycles off and on by placing the car on inspection, change the time on the Set Date and Time menu to 23:59 and then wait a minute for the timer to roll over. Place the car on automatic and watch the STE output. Once the flag is set from the date rollover and the car does a redundancy test, the output will be cycled. After STE turns off and then back on, the soft-starter fault relay should cycle as well leaving the fault relay energized and the CFLT input off. If the STE output does not cycle, replace the output module. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-47 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix CFLT Failed On Fault CFLT Input Failed ON. The soft-starter fault relay is check once a day from the controller by cycling the STE, Starter Enable, output off and then on. When STE is turned off the CFLT input should go on. After the CFLT input turns on, STE is turned back on and CFTL is expected to turn back off. If CFLT stays on and does not turn back off, this fault is logged. • Faulty soft-starter fault relay. Replace the fault relay. • Faulty CFLT input. Replace the input board. • Faulty STE output. Check that the STE output cycles off and on by placing the car on inspection, change the time on the Set Date and Time menu to 23:59 and then wait a minute for the timer to roll over. Place the car on automatic and watch the STE output. Once the flag is set from the date rollover and the car does a redundancy test, the output will be cycled. After STE turns off and then back on, the soft-starter fault relay should cycle as well leaving the fault relay energized and the CFLT input off. If the STE output does not cycle, replace the output module. COP CAN Com Error COP Board Can Communication Error. • Faulty Can communication wire connection. Verify proper twisted pair wires to the traveling cable CANH and CANL terminals on the Main I/O board and on the COP board. • Noise on the Can bus. Verify that the shield wire is connected according to the job print. • Verify the proper placement of the CAN Bus termination resistors. It is best to have only one termination resistor at each end of the serial link. Too many resistors will pull the line down. CPU APS DZOff Fault The DZ-1/DZc input is set from a position count from the APS Selector. This fault occurs if the DZ-1/DZc input is not on when the DZ input from the SAFETY PAL is on. • The DZ/DZp output from the SAFETY PAL comes from the combination of the following signals: NTS dz output, NTS communicating with APS selector, Main CPU dz output and Main CPU communicating with APS selector.• The Main CPU dz output is DZO/DZcO and is set from the status of DZ- 1/DZc (the selector position count). DZO/DZcO and DZ- 1/DZc will always match. When DZO/DZcO is on, DZ from the SAFETY PAL can be off due status of the DZ signal from the NTS processor. However, when DZO/DZcO is off, DZ from the SAFETY PAL must also be off. Contact the factory if this fault occurs. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-48 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix CPU DN Off Fault CPU DN-1 Failed Off during start or leveling. The controller is attempting to run the car high speed in the up direction but the UT input is off. • Faulty Communications with the APS selector. Check for APS selector CAN faults. Follow the possible cause/suggested fix for the APS SEL CAN Com Err fault. • Improper learn of the hoistway. Make sure the hoistway learn has been completed for every floor. Check the Hoistway table for errors. CPU DT Off Fault CPU DT-1 Failed Off during start. The controller is attempting to run the car high speed in the up direction but the UT input is off. • Faulty Communications with the APS selector. Check for APS selector CAN faults. Follow the possible cause/suggested fix for the APS SEL CAN Com Err fault. • Improper learn of the hoistway. Make sure the hoistway learn has been completed for every floor. Check the Hoistway table for errors. CPU UN Off Fault CPU UN-1 Failed Off during start or leveling. The controller is attempting to run the car high speed in the up direction but the UT input is off. • Faulty Communications with the APS selector. Check for APS selector CAN faults. Follow the possible cause/suggested fix for the APS SEL CAN Com Err fault. • Improper learn of the hoistway. Make sure the hoistway learn has been completed for every floor. Check the Hoistway table for errors. CPU UT Off Fault CPU UT-1 Failed Off during start. The controller is attempting to run the car high speed in the up direction but the UT input is off. • Faulty Communications with the APS selector. Check for APS selector CAN faults. Follow the possible cause/suggested fix for the APS SEL CAN Com Err fault. • Improper learn of the hoistway. Make sure the hoistway learn has been completed for every floor. Check the Hoistway table for errors. CTCan Bus Off Error CTCan Bus Off Error. The Can bus has been inactive for too long a period of time. • Faulty CAN bus wiring. Check the Can bus terminal connections on all boards. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-49 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix CTCAN Device Fault Device on the Car Top CAN Port has a Fault. On the LCD Interface, this fault is display as an abbreviated device name and device fault. Please see the device faults for further information. • Look at the details of the fault. The device name and the error code that caused the fault are listed. • Look up the fault code for the device for debugging information. CTCAN Device Reset Device on the Car Top CAN Port has reset. On the LCD Interface, this fault is display as an abbreviated device name and device fault. Please see the device faults for further information. • Look at the details of the fault. The device name and the error code that caused the fault are listed. • The device requested an initialization packet from the main CPU. Typically, this occurs during power up or from a power cycle of the individual device. • Ignore the error if the controller power has been cycled. Otherwise, check the device communications and power connections. DL Failed On Fault DL Failed On Fault. The DL leveling input did not turn off during a run. The DL input is set from a count from the APS selector. • The APS selector did not change count during a run. Check for faults related to the APS selector. Verify that the APS selector counts change while the car is running. • The elevator did not leave the floor on a run attempt. Verify that the elevator can run from the landing. Check the fault log for another fault that could prevent the car from running. DL20 Phone Test Failed Phone Test from DL20 phone monitoring device indicated a failure • Refer to the manufacturers troubleshooting guide for the DL20. DLB & DLB-1 Opposite Input failure on one of the Door Lock Bottom (DLB) inputs. • Faulty DLB or DLB-1 input (replace input chip). DLM & DLM- 1 Opposite Input failure on one of the Door Lock Middle (DLM) inputs. • Faulty DLM or DLM-1 input (replace input chip). DLT & DLT-1Opposite Input failure on one of the Door Lock Top (DLT) inputs. • Faulty DLT or DLT-1 input (replace input chip). GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-50 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Dn Directional Fault Car unexpectedly hit the Down Normal Limit while running down. • The Safety PAL detected a fault condition and turned off the UN output from the NTS processor. • The NTS processor detected a fault condition and turned off the UN output. • APS Selector communications loss to the Main CPU. • APS Selector communications loss to the NTS processor. • Selector not reading the correct position from the tape. Door Close Fault The door did not reach the Door Close Limit within the door close protection time. • Door Close Limit (DCL) not adjusted properly. • Faulty Door Close Limit (DCL). Replace DCL input chip. • Trash in the door track preventing door from closing. Door Lock Safe Fault Door lock safe fault • The car was either running or preparing to run and lost a door lock input. Check the adjustment of the door. Door Low Voltage Flt Door Line Voltage Low • Voltage Sensor Board Related. Voltage being monitored for Door Operator dropped below the setting for parameter 'Low Door Volt ' Door Motor Overload Door Motor Overload • Door Motor Overload signal tripped. Check Input chip for DMO signal Door Open Fault The door did not reach the Door Open Limit within the door open protection time. • Door Open Limit (DOL) not adjusted properly. • Faulty Door Open Limit (DOL). Replace DOL input chip. Door Zone Aux On Flt The auxiliary door zone DZA/DZAc set from the position count of the APS selector did not go off during a run. • The APS selector did not change count during a run. Check for faults related to the APS selector. Verify that the APS selector counts change while the car is running. • The elevator did not leave the floor on a run attempt. Verify that the elevator can run from the landing. Check the fault log for another fault that could prevent the car from running. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-51 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Door Zone Off Fault Door Zone Off Fault occurs when the car does not have DZ when UL and DL are on. • The DZ/DZp output from the SAFETY PAL comes from the combination of the following signals: NTS dz output, NTS communicating with APS selector, Main CPU dz output and Main CPU communicating with APS selector.• Verify that the Main CPU and the NTS processor are communication with the APS selector.• Verify that the Main CPU and the NTS processor have valid floor tables. Door Zone On Fault The door zone input DZ is set from the count of the APS selector and the DZ input did not turn off during a run. • The APS selector did not change count during a run. Check for faults related to the APS selector. Verify that the APS selector counts change while the car is running. • The elevator did not leave the floor on a run attempt. Verify that the elevator can run from the landing. Check the fault log for another fault that could prevent the car from running. DoorZone Aux Off Flt Door Zone Auxiliary Off Fault occurs when the car does not have DZA/DZAc when UL and DL are on. • Verify that the Main CPU is communicating with the APS selector. • Verify that the Main CPU has a valid floor table. DPM Input Fault The DPM input fault occurs when door opens and the DPM input did not go off. • DPM switch not setup properly on the door operator. • Faulty DPM input. Replace DPM input chip. DPM Off/GS or DL On DPM Off with Gate Switch or Door Lock On. The Door Protection Module input must go on before gate switch or door lock inputs go on. • The DPM switch on the door operator is not setup properly. DPM should turn on before the Gate Switch is made. • There is no DPM input on the door operator. Jump the DPM input to the GS-1 terminal. • Fault DPM input. Replace the DPM input chip. DT Failed On Fault DT I/O Failed On. The car is on a door zone and at the bottom floor but the DT-1 input (from the Main CPU count) did not activate (go off). • The down slowdown count for the bottom floor is set incorrectly. Review the hoistway slowdown table and if this value is incorrect, relearn the bottom floor position. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-52 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix DT Limit Fault DT Limit from the NTS processor turned off before the normal slowdown point was reached. • The DT limit from the NTS processor is too far from the bottom landing. Adjust the DT limit closer to the landing by changing the NTS DT limit count and the relearning the bottom floor.• The slowdown position is set too close to the bottom landing. Adjust the bottom floor slowdown count in the Hoistway Table Floor & SD Counts menu. DTc Limit Fault DTc Limit from the Main CPU turned off before the normal slowdown point was reached. • The DT limit from the Main CPU is too far from the bottom landing. Adjust the DTc limit closer to the landing by changing the NTS DT limit count and the relearning the bottom floor. • The slowdown position is set too close to the bottom landing. Adjust the bottom floor slowdown count in the Hoistway Table Floor & SD Counts menu. DZ Off Redundancy Ck The door zone input went off during the redundancy check. • Check that the elevator is holding in the door zone. • The DZ/DZp output from the SAFETY PAL comes from the combination of the following signals: NTS dz output, NTS communicating with APS selector, Main CPU dz output and Main CPU communicating with APS selector. A loss from any of these signals could cause the DZ/DZp output from the SAFETY PAL to turn off unexpectedly. Check for faults related to the APS selector. EE Tst EE1 Failed OFF Electric Eye Test. Freight door electric eye input EE1 failed off. • Verify that the electric eye input EE1 pulses on during the electric eye test. • Possible faulty electric eye device. • Possible faulty EE1 input - replace the input. EE Tst EE1 Failed ON Electric Eye Test. Freight door electric eye input EE1 failed on. • Verify that the electric eye input EE1 is off before the electric eye test. • Possible faulty electric eye device. • Possible faulty EE1 input - replace the input. EE Tst EE2 Failed OFF Electric Eye Test. Freight door electric eye input EE2 failed off. • Verify that the electric eye input EE2 pulses on during the electric eye test. • Possible faulty electric eye device. • Possible faulty EE2 input - replace the input. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-53 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix EE Tst EE2 Failed ON Electric Eye Test. Freight door electric eye input EE2 failed on. • Verify that the electric eye input EE2 is off before the electric eye test. • Possible faulty electric eye device. • Possible faulty EE2 input - replace the input. EE Tst EER1Faild OFF Electric Eye Test. Freight rear door electric eye input EER1 failed off. • Verify that the electric eye input EER1 pulses on during the electric eye test.• Possible faulty electric eye device.• Possible faulty EER1 input - replace the input. EE Tst EER1 Faild ON Electric Eye Test. Freight rear door electric eye input EER1 failed on. • Verify that the electric eye input EER1 is off before the electric eye test. • Possible faulty electric eye device. • Possible faulty EER1 input - replace the input. EE Tst EER2 Faild OFF Electric Eye Test. Freight rear door electric eye input EER2 failed off. • Verify that the electric eye input EER2 pulses on during the electric eye test. • Possible faulty electric eye device. • Possible faulty EER2 input - replace the input. EE Tst EER2 Faild ON Electric Eye Test. Freight rear door electric eye input EER2 failed on. • Verify that the electric eye input EER2 is off before the electric eye test. • Possible faulty electric eye device. • Possible faulty EER2 input - replace the input. Emrgncy Dispatch Flt Controllers went in emergency Dispatch Operation • Loss of communication with the hall call boards • Loss of communication with the group • Losing the HCP input EP Recall Car 1 OTS Emergency Power Recall Car Out of Service Car 1. Car 1 was out of service while elevators were in an Emergency Power Recall Sequence. • Check faults for car 1 GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-54 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix EP Recall Car 2 OTS Emergency Power Recall Car Out of Service Car 2. Car 2 was out of service while elevators were in an Emergency Power Recall Sequence. • Check faults for car 2 EP Recall Car 3 OTS Emergency Power Recall Car Out of Service Car 3. Car 3 was out of service while elevators were in an Emergency Power Recall Sequence. • Check faults for car 3 EP Recall Car 4 OTS Emergency Power Recall Car Out of Service Car 4. Car 4 was out of service while elevators were in an Emergency Power Recall Sequence. • Check faults for car 4 EP Recall Car 5 OTS Emergency Power Recall Car Out of Service Car 5. Car 5 was out of service while elevators were in an Emergency Power Recall Sequence. • Check faults for car 5 EP Recall Car 6 OTS Emergency Power Recall Car Out of Service Car 6. Car 6 was out of service while elevators were in an Emergency Power Recall Sequence. • Check faults for car 6 GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-55 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix EP Recall Car 7 OTS Emergency Power Recall Car Out of Service Car 7. Car 7 was out of service while elevators were in an Emergency Power Recall Sequence. • Check faults for car 7 EP Recall Car 8 OTS Emergency Power Recall Car Out of Service Car 8. Car 8 was out of service while elevators were in an Emergency Power Recall Sequence. • Check faults for car 8 EPRecall Car1 Tim-ot Emergency Power Recall Time-out Car 1. Car 1 timeout while it was in Emergency power recall mode. • Make sure the field variable 'Recall Timeout' is set properly to allow the car enough time to recover if it is between floors and away from Emergency Power Floor• Verify the speed of the car during recovery operation. EPRecall Car2 Tim-ot Emergency Power Recall Time-out Car 2. Car 2 timeout while it was in Emergency power recall mode. • Make sure the field variable 'Recall Timeout' is set properly to allow the car enough time to recover if it is between floors and away from Emergency Power Floor • Verify the speed of the car during recovery operation. EPRecall Car3 Tim-ot Emergency Power Recall Time-out Car 3. Car 3 timeout while it was in Emergency power recall mode. • Make sure the field variable 'Recall Timeout' is set properly to allow the car enough time to recover if it is between floors and away from Emergency Power Floor • Verify the speed of the car during recovery operation. EPRecall Car4 Tim-ot Emergency Power Recall Time-out Car 4. Car 4 timeout while it was in Emergency power recall mode. • Make sure the field variable 'Recall Timeout' is set properly to allow the car enough time to recover if it is between floors and away from Emergency Power Floor • Verify the speed of the car during recovery operation. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-56 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix EPRecall Car5 Tim-ot Emergency Power Recall Time-out Car 5. Car 5 timeout while it was in Emergency power recall mode. • Make sure the field variable 'Recall Timeout' is set properly to allow the car enough time to recover if it is between floors and away from Emergency Power Floor • Verify the speed of the car during recovery operation. EPRecall Car6 Tim-ot Emergency Power Recall Time-out Car 6. Car 6 timeout while it was in Emergency power recall mode. • Make sure the field variable 'Recall Timeout' is set properly to allow the car enough time to recover if it is between floors and away from Emergency Power Floor • Verify the speed of the car during recovery operation. EPRecall Car7 Tim-ot Emergency Power Recall Time-out Car 7. Car 7 timeout while it was in Emergency power recall mode. • Make sure the field variable 'Recall Timeout' is set properly to allow the car enough time to recover if it is between floors and away from Emergency Power Floor • Verify the speed of the car during recovery operation. EPRecall Car8 Tim-ot Emergency Power Recall Time-out Car 8. Car 8 timeout while it was in Emergency power recall mode. • Make sure the field variable 'Recall Timeout' is set properly to allow the car enough time to recover if it is between floors and away from Emergency Power Floor• Verify the speed of the car during recovery operation. Estop Fault An emergency stop occurred while moving or attempting to move. This fault is recorded after three emergency stops occurred in a row. • Lost UN while running up at contract speed. • Lost DN while running down at contract speed. • The MC contactor did not energize or dropped out while running • The MC input did not turn on or dropped out while running. • The stop switch was pulled while running. • The car was not safe usually from clipping a door lock. See Car Safe Fault. • Low Pressure Switch activated during the run. • Low Oil Switch activated during the run. • High Temperature sensor activated during the run. • The stall protection timer timed-out. • An emergency power recall was initiated while the car was running up. FDoor Close Cont Flt Door Close Contact safe fault • The car was either running or preparing to run and lost a front door close contact input. Check the adjustment of the door. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-57 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix FEP Fuse Blown Fault Fire/Emergency Circuit Fuse is Blown • Short Circuit on the FEP Circuit. Refer to the schematic and check the circuit with a meter. FETST OFF Fault Front Door Electric Eye Test Failed OFF. Output is turned on cause the electric eye outputs to controller input EE1 and EE2 to pulse. • FETST output or FETST input failed in the off state. • Replace the FETST output chip. • Replace the FETST input chip. FETST ON Fault Front Door Electric Eye Test Failed ON. Output is turned on cause the electric eye outputs to controller input EE1 and EE2 to pulse. • FETST output or FETST input failed in the on state. • Replace the FETST output chip. • Replace the FETST input chip. Field Vars Deflt Ini Field Variables Default Initialization. Field adjustable variables are being initializedfor the first time. • Job related parameters are invalid. This error occurs on the first time the GALX-1132 CPU board is being powered up. Fire Fighter Stop Sw Fire Fighter Stop Sw • Fire Fighter Stop switch is pulled. • Faulty wire connection in the Fire Fighter stop switch circuit. Front Det Edge Fault Front Detector Edge Time-out • The Electric Eye signal stayed on continuously for longer than the parameter 'EE Time-out' is set to. FST I/O Failed Off The FST input on the 1134 COP board did not pick up when expected. • Faulty FST output chip. Replace output chip. • Faulty FSTI input chip. Replace input chip. FST I/O Failed On The FST input on the 1134 COP board did not drop out when expected. • Faulty FST output chip. Replace output chip. • Faulty FSTI input chip. Replace input chip. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-58 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix FSTP I/O Failed Off The FSTP input on the 1134 COP board did not pick up when expected. • Faulty FST1 output chip. Replace output chip. • Faulty FSTI input chip. Replace input chip. FSTP I/O Failed On The FSTP input on the 1134 COP board did not drop out up when expected • Faulty FST1 output chip. Replace output chip. • Faulty FSTI input chip. Replace input chip. FVARS Backup Init Field Variables Backup Init. Field variables backed up for the first time. Older software did not backup the field variables. When new software replaces the older software, this error will be displayed. • If this error occurs every time the CPU powers up, then the CPU may be faulty and should be replaced. FVARSBackup Tbl Cksm Field Variables Backup Table Checksum Error. The verification checksum for the backup field variable table has failed. During power outages or brown-outs, enough noise can be generated on the 5V DC supply to cause an error in reading the field variables table on power up. For this reason, we keep the data in two separate tables. If only one table checksum error occurs, then valid data will be restored. • No action is required. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-59 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix FVARS Backup Tbl Err Field Variables Backup Table Error. The field variables from the backup MRAM table does not match the variable read into memory from the main MRAM table. Most likely, if this error occurs, other FVARS errors will also occur. • A once-in-a-while occurrence of this error can be ignored if it is not accompanied by the following errors: FVARS Both Tbl Chksum error or FVARS Tbl Chksum Error. • If either error occurs with this error, the main CPU board should be replaced. FVARS Both Tbl Chksum Field Variables Both Table Checksum Table error. The verification checksum for both the main field variable table and backup table has failed. Field Variable data is stored in two separate MRAM tables and a checksum of each table is stored in a separate location. When the system powers up, the checksum of each table is verified. If one table fails verification, the field variables are copied from the table that passed verification and then both tables are updated with valid data. If both checksum verifications fail, data is copied from the main table and an error code is displayed. • If this fault occurs, replace the main CPU board. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-60 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix FVARS Tbl Chksum Err Field Variables Table Checksum Error. The verification checksum for the main field variable table has failed. During power outages or brown- outs, enough noise can be generated on the 5V DC supply to cause an error in reading the field variables table on power up. For this reason, we keep the data in two separate tables. If only one table checksum error occurs, then valid data will be restored. • No action is required. Gate Switch Fault The Gate Switch failed on while the door was open. • Gate switch not adjusted properly. • GS input failed on. Replace GS input on 1102 board. Gate/Lock Byp Sw Flt The gate or lock bypass switch was on while the car was NOT on car top inspection. • Gate or Lock bypass switch on the controller 1121 board is in the on position.• Gate or Lock bypass input failed on. Replace GBP OR LBP input chip on 1121 board. Governor Switch Flt Governor Switch Tripped. • Verify that the governor switch is set properly. GOVRi Input On Fault GOVRi input failed on. • The GOVRi input chip failed. Replace the chip. • The governor reset switch is stuck on. • The GOVRi input is jumped on. GRCan Bus Off Error GRCan Bus Off Error. The Can bus has been inactive for too long a period of time. • Faulty CAN bus wiring. Check the Can bus terminal connections on all boards. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-61 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix GRCAN Device Fault Device on the Group CAN Port has a Fault. On the LCD Interface, this fault is display as an abbreviated device name and device fault. Please see the device faults for further information. • Look at the details of the fault. The device name and the error code that caused the fault are listed. • Look up the fault code for the device for debugging information. GRCAN Device Reset Device on the Group CAN Port has reset. On the LCD Interface, this fault is display as an abbreviated device name and device fault. Please see the device faults for further information. • Look at the details of the fault. The device name and the error code that caused the fault are listed. • The device requested an initialization packet from the main CPU. Typically, this occurs during power up or from a power cycle of the individual device. • Ignore the error if the controller power has been cycled. Otherwise, check the device communications and power connections. Group Comm Loss The car that was acting as the group car has stopped communicating. • Faulty wiring from TX+/TX- from car to car. • Faulty U6 driver chip on the GALX-1132 CPU board (next to the connector for the group comm). Call GAL. • Noise on shield wire. Connect shield only on one end. • Noise on the communication wires. Run wires in separate conduit. GS & GS_1Opposite Input failure on one of the Gate Switch (GS) inputs. • GS or GS-1 input failed on. Replace GS or GS-1 input chip.• Check status of input from Input and Output menu on the LCD interface. Hall Call Light Fuse Hall Call Light Fuse Blown • Check for short on the Hall Call Light circuit. Hatch Safety Fault Hatch Safety Fault. The HSS input is off. • A device contact in the hatch safety string has opened. • The HSS input has failed off. HC Com Device Reset Serial Hall Call board reset unexpectedly. Usually caused by loss of power to the individual board. • Usually caused by loss of power to the individual board. • Faulty power connection to board. • Fault hall call board. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-62 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix HC DrvBd Rx from Bot The Hall Call Driver Board is not receiving packets from the bottom station. • Cable is bad or disconnected • Cables going to wrong port (i.e., switched TO ABOVE and TO BELOW) • Transmitter from device above or below is bad, check faults for that device. • Receiver on board is bad – replace device HC DrvBd Tx to Bot The Hall Call Driver Board is cannot internally read information that it transmitter to the bottom station • Cable connecting two devices could be flip- flopped (i.e., gray wire goes from pin 1 on one end to pin 8 on the other end). Disconnect cable, and if fault changes to Rx Fault, the problem is the cable. • Cables going to wrong port (i.e., switched TO ABOVE and TO BELOW) • Transmitter is bad – replace the Device. HC DvrBd Rx from Top The Hall Call Driver Board is not receiving packets from the top station. • Cable is bad or disconnected • Cables going to wrong port (i.e., switched TO ABOVE and TO BELOW) • Transmitter from device above or below is bad, check faults for that device. • Receiver on board is bad – replace device HC DvrBd Too Few Dev The Hall Call Driver Board has too few stations detected based on the controller configuration. This fault will only trigger if loop is closed. • Check configuration and number of stations HC DvrBd TooMany Dev The Hall Call Driver Board has too many stations detected based on the controller configuration. • Check configuration and number of stations GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-63 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix HC DvrBd Tx to Top The Hall Call Driver Board cannot internally read information that it transmitted to top station. • Cable connecting two devices could be flip- flopped (i.e., gray wire goes from pin 1 on one end to pin 8 on the other end). Disconnect cable, and if fault changes to Rx Fault, the problem is the cable. • Cables going to wrong port (i.e., switched TO ABOVE and TO BELOW) • Transmitter is bad – replace the Device. HC Fuse Blown Fault The HC input is off. No power on HC. • Make sure that the hall call power for each car is in phase. During a power up for car 1 while car 2 is powering the hall call power could cause a momentary short if the hall call power for each car is not in phase. • Short circuit in the hall call lighting circuitry. HCB Device Fault Hall Call Board Device Fault. On the LCD Interface, this fault is display as an abbreviated device name and device fault. Please see the device faults for further information. • Look at the details of the fault. The device name and the error code that caused the fault are listed. • Look up the fault code for the device for debugging information. Hoist Motor Overload Hoist Motor Overload • Hoist Motor Overload signal tripped. Check Input chip for HMO input Hoistway Default Ini Hoistway Default Initialization. Hoistway values are being initialized for the first time. • Job related hoistway setup information is invalid. This occurs on the first time the GALX- 1132 CPU board is being powered up. Hoistway Learn Fault Car is on automatic and the hoistway has not been learned. • Hoistway learn procedure needs to be performed. • Faulty ram-flash memory chip. • Faulty APS Selector. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-64 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Hoistway Update Init Hoistway Update Initialization. Table of door zone positions for hoistway used to update position count while traveling has been initialized for the fires time. • Job related hoistway setup information is invalid. This occurs on the first time the GALX- 1132 CPU board is being powered up. Hot Oil Fault Hot Oil Fault • The hot oil detection TPH input is turned Off. The input is in series with the normally closed Hot Oil Thermostat. Check for defective input or defective sensor. • Refer to the schematics and check the wiring from the MRSW terminal to the thermostat and from the thermostat to the TPH input terminal. HW Count Read Fault Hoistway Count Read Fault. The position count read from the selector changed by more than 4 inches in less than 3 milliseconds. The type of error would occur from an incorrect read of the position count. • Check the APS selector tape for debris, oil or grease. Wipe the tape down with al clean soft cloth. HWSlowdown Cnt Flt Hoistway Slowdown Count Fault. During the verification of the slowdown table in flash memory, a normal up or down slowdown count was greater than 50 inches or a short floor up or down slowdown count was greater than 30 inches. • Review the hoistway slowdown tables and correct the out- of-range slowdown count. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-65 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix IHS I/O Failed Off Inspection High Speed I/O Failed Off. This input is used with an electronic Bucher valve. The IHS input or output failed off. • Faulty IHS input. Replace or relocate the input board. • Faulty IHS output. Replace or relocate the output. IHS I/O Failed On Inspection High Speed I/O Failed On. This input is used with an electronic Bucher valve. The IHS input or output failed on. • Faulty IHS input. Replace or relocate the input. • Faulty IHS output. Replace or relocate the output. Inspection Input Flt More than one input is on in the inspection string. The inspection string condition is also shown on the safety processor. • Faulty Top of Car inspection wiring. Verify voltage on CTA and ICA terminals when car top inspection switch is in the run position. Verify INS input when switch in the inspection position. • Verify that one and only one inspection string inputs is on: AUTO, MRI, INS, ICI and ACC. • Faulty inspection string input: AUTO, MRI, INS, ICI or ACC. Replace faulty input chip Inspection Up/Dn Sw An up or down inspection run input was on when first entering into inspection operation. This caused from a faulty inspection up or down switch or from someone holding the up or down run button when placing the car on inspection. • Faulty inspection up or down input: IU, ID, MRIU, MRIU, BAD, BAU, TAD or TAU. Replace faulty input chip. • Faulty inspection wiring keeping an inspection up or down input on. • Placing the car on inspection while holding an up or down run button Invald DT or DT1 Cnt Invalid DT or DT1 Count. The position count for DT is greater than the count for DT1 • Invalid hoistway learn or the hoistway learn is not complete. Re-learn the hoistway or complete the hoistway learn.• The bottom terminal floor limits are calculated and stored when the bottom floor is learned. Bring the car to the bottom floor and re-learn the floor position.• If this problem is not corrected with a hoistway learn, contact the factory GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-66 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Invalid DN or DT Cnt Invalid DN or DT Count. The position count for DN is greater than the count for DT • Invalid hoistway learn or the hoistway learn is not complete. Re-learn the hoistway or complete the hoistway learn. • The bottom terminal floor limits are calculated and stored when the bottom floor is learned. Bring the car to the bottom floor and re-learn the floor position. • If this problem is not corrected with a hoistway learn, contact the factory Invalid Floor Count Invalid Floor Count. The floor count of the floor above must always be larger than the floor below. An above floor count was lower than the floor below in the floor hoistway table. • Invalid hoistway learn or the hoistway learn is not complete. Re-learn the hoistway or complete the hoistway learn. • Check the hoistway table and verify that the floor position counts are getting larger as the floor number increases, i.e., the third floor should be a larger number than the second floor. • If this problem is not corrected with a hoistway learn, contact the factory Invlid Top Floor Cnt Invalid Top Floor Count. The top floor count is zero. • Invalid hoistway learn or the hoistway learn is not complete. Re-learn the hoistway or complete the hoistway learn. • Verify that the top floor count is correct distance from the bottom. • Bring the car to the top floor and re-learn the floor position. • If this problem is not corrected with a hoistway learn, contact the factory L1 Low Line Voltage L1 Line Voltage Low • Voltage Sensor Board Related. Voltage being monitored on L1 dropped below the setting for parameter ' Low Line Volt ' L2 Low Line Voltage L2 Line Voltage Low • Voltage Sensor Board Related. Voltage being monitored on L2 dropped below the setting for parameter ' Low Line Volt ' L3 Low Line Voltage L3 Line Voltage Low • Voltage Sensor Board Related. Voltage being monitored on L3 dropped below the setting for parameter ' Low Line Volt ' Level Stop Cnt Fault Leveling stop fault occurred from incorrect count. As the car was leveling off the pulses, UL or DL turned off. • The UL or DL Distance value set too high or the APS Dead Zone parameter is set to small. Increase the dead zone or decrease the UL or DL distance setting.• This fault can sometimes occur from multiple re-levels. Check the leveling setup of the car. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-67 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Load Weigh Var Init Load weigher init • Invalid load weigher table on power up. The load weigher table will be re-initialized to zero and the load weigher must be re-setup. • If this error persists, the MRAM on the CPU board is faulty. Replace the CPU board. • Ignore this error if the load weigher is not being used. Lobby Hall Call Fuse Lobby Call common fuse • Lobby Common fuse blown. Check Input chip for LHC Low Pressure Fault Low Oil Pressure Fault. The low oil pressure switch has been activated. • Low oil in the tank. • Faulty LOS input if low oil switch option is being used. Replace the LOS input chip. • Faulty Low Oil Switch. If low oil switch option is being used. • Verify the operation of the low oil switch. Lowoil Switch Fault Low Oil Switch Fault. The low oil switch became active • Low oil in the hydraulic tank • Faulty wiring to the low oil input • Faulty low oil input. Replace LOS input. LW Calibration Error Load Weigher Calibration Error. The load weigher attempted to do an automatic calibration and could not be calibrated. • The load weigher device should be re- calibrated according to the manufacturer’s instructions. LW Load Table Fault A fault was detected in the Load weigher load tables. The empty load value was greater than or equal to the full load value at a valid floor. • The load weigher might not be calibrated properly • The load weigher setup might have been interrupted before being completed. • Faulty load weigher device. • The load weigher device is not setup. • The load weigher data was not stored properly in the MRAM memory or was not read in properly on power up. • Invalid load weigher data read from or written to the SD card during an SD card job setup read. Machine Room Stop Sw Machine Room Stop Switch is Opened • Turn off the Machine Room Stop Switch.• Faulty Machine Room Stop Switch GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-68 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix MC I/O Failed Off The MC input or output has failed off. • Faulty MCCi input chip. Replace input chip. • Faulty MCC output chip. Replace output chip. • No Power at the MRSW terminal. Refer to the schematics and check the circuit with a meter. MC I/O Failed On The MC input or output has failed on. • Faulty MCi input chip. Replace input chip. • Faulty MC output chip. Replace output chip. Mid Door Lock Fault The Middle Door Lock failed on while the door was open. • Faulty door lock. • Jumper on door lock circuit. • Door lock not adjusted properly. • Faulty wiring to DLM input. Faulty DLM and DLM-1 inputs (For this to occur both DLM and DLM-1 inputs must fail on). • DOL input failed. Replace DOL input chip. • Door operator open limit DOL is not adjusted properly Motion Exit Ins Flt Emergency motion exit from inspection • Car was in motion before going in inspection Mode. Check for inspection inputs faulting out or Automatic input going low. • The car inspection switch was turned on while the car was on automatic and in motion. MRAM Hardware Fault MRAM Fault The MRAM is tested on power up and has failed the test. Replace the CPU board. MRAM Write Error MRAM Write Error. After parameter data RAM has been modified through the user interface, the data is automatically written to MRAM for non-volatile storage. After the data is store it is compared with the original parameter data. If it does not match a fault is recorded. • This error should not occur. If it does occur, the problem is either a fault CPU board or MRAM chip. Replace the CPU board. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-69 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix MRCan Bus Off Error MRCan Bus Off Error. The Can bus has been inactive for too long a period of time. • Faulty CAN bus wiring. Check the Can bus terminal connections on all boards. MRCAN Device Fault Device on the Machine Room CAN Port has a Fault. On the LCD Interface, this fault is display as an abbreviated device name and device fault. Please see the device faults for further information. • Look at the details of the fault. The device name and the error code that caused the fault are listed. • Look up the fault code for the device for debugging information. MRCAN Device Reset Device on the Machine Room CAN Port has reset. On the LCD Interface, this fault is display as an abbreviated device name and device fault. Please see the device faults for further information. • Look at the details of the fault. The device name and the error code that caused the fault are listed. • The device requested an initialization packet from the main CPU. Typically, this occurs during power up or from a power cycle of the individual device. • Ignore the error if the controller power has been cycled. Otherwise, check the device communications and power connections. NTS DN Failed Off NTS DN I/O Failed Off during start or leveling. The controller is attempting to run the car in the down direction but the UN input is off. • The DN output failed. Replace the DN output module. • The DN input failed. Replace the DN input board. • The NTS processor has turned the DN output off. Check for errors from the NTS processor. • The NTS processor has a position error from the APS selector. Verify the setup of the APS selector and that the NTS processor is communicating with the selector. • The Safety PAL has determined that it is unsafe to run the car such as the doors are open. Check for a Safety Pal Fault and check the status of the I/Os of the Safety PAL. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-70 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix NTS DNFailed On NTS DN I/O Failed On during start. As part of the redundancy check, the Main CPU sends a command to the NTS processor to turn of the UN, DN, UT and DT outputs prior to turning on any valve outputs to verify that the NTS outputs have not faulted on. During this process, the DN output or the DN input stayed on. • DN output shorted on. Replace the output module.• DN input failed on. Replace the input board.• DN test jumper left on the module. Remove the test jumper. NTS DT Failed Off NTS DT I/O Failed Off during start. The controller is attempting to run the car high speed in the down direction but the DT input is off. • The DT output failed. Replace the DT output module. • The NTS processor has turned the DT output off. Check for errors from the NTS processor. • The NTS processor has a position error from the APS selector. Verify the setup of the APS selector and that the NTS processor is communicating with the selector. • The Safety PAL has determined that it is unsafe to run the car such as the doors are open. Check for a Safety Pal Fault and check the status of the I/Os of the Safety PAL. NTS DT Failed On NTS DT I/O Failed On during start. As part of the redundancy check, the Main CPU sends a command to the NTS processor to turn of the UN, DN, UT and DT outputs prior to turning on any valve outputs to verify that the NTS outputs have not faulted on. During this process, the DT output or the DT input stayed on. • DT output shorted on. Replace the output module. • DT input failed on. Replace the input board. • DT test jumper left on the module. Remove the test jumper. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-71 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix NTS UNFailed Off NTS UN I/O Failed Off during start or leveling. The controller is attempting to run the car in the up direction but the UN input is off. • The UN output failed. Replace the UN output module.• The UN input failed. Replace the UN input board.• The NTS processor has turned the UN output off. Check for errors from the NTS processor.• The NTS processor has a position error from the APS selector. Verify the setup of the APS selector and that the NTS processor is communicating with the selector.• The Safety PAL has determined that it is unsafe to run the car such as the doors are open. Check for a Safety Pal Fault and checkthe status of the I/Os of the Safety PAL. NTS UN Failed On NTS UN I/O Failed On during start. As part of the redundancy check, the Main CPU sends a command to the NTS processor to turn of the UN, DN, UT and DT outputs prior to turning on any valve outputs to verify that the NTS outputs have not faulted on. During this process, the UN output or the UN input stayed on. • UN output shorted on. Replace the output module. • UN input failed on. Replace the input board. • UN test jumper left on the module. Remove the test jumper. NTS UT Failed Off NTS UT I/O Failed Off during start. The controller is attempting to run the car high speed in the up direction but the UT input is off. • The UT output failed. Replace the UT output module. • The NTS processor has turned the UT output off. Check for errors from the NTS processor. • The NTS processor has a position error from the APS selector. Verify the setup of the APS selector and that the NTS processor is communicating with the selector. • The Safety PAL has determined that it is unsafe to run the car such as the doors are open. Check for a Safety Pal Fault and check the status of the I/Os of the Safety PAL. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-72 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix NTS UTFailed On NTS UT I/O Failed On during start. As part of the redundancy check, the Main CPU sends a command to the NTS processor to turn of the UN, DN, UT and DT outputs prior to turning on any valve outputs to verify that the NTS outputs have not faulted on. During this process, the UT output or the UT input stayed on. • UT output shorted on. Replace the output module.• UT input failed on. Replace the input board.• UT test jumper left on the module. Remove the test jumper. NTS Vars Setup Fault An NTS variable is setup incorrectly. When the Main CPU sent a floor setup command to the NTS processor it detected that either the number of valid floors or top speed of the car did not meet the job configuration values. • Correct the valid number of floor and tops speed parameters in the NTS processor. PALF Input Failed Off PALF Input Failed to turn on as expected • Safety PAL device did not operate as expected. Replace the MAIN I/O Board. PALF Input Failed On PALF Input Failed to turn off as expected • Safety PAL device did not operate as expected. Replace the MAIN I/O Board. Position Fault The Terminal limits do not match the car position (UT or DT is hit but the car position is not at the top or bottom floor). • NTS selector not setup properly. • CPU APS selector not setup properly. • Improper adjustment of UT or DT limit counts GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-73 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Power Up Reset Whenever power is cycled on the controller this error will indicate that the controller CPU was reset • This error code is normal for a power loss. If power was not lost and the CPU re-boots, verify the +5VDC on the CPU power connector reads in the range of 4.90 and 5.1 VDC. If out of range, adjust the 5VDC supply pot for the correct voltage. Pulse Error > 75 fpm Pulse count shows a travel distance less than 2 inches while the car demand velocity is greater than 75 fpm. • Make sure that the APS selector is working properly. Check for APS selector faults and make the appropriate corrections. RCM / Lock Flt Retiring Cam/Lock fault. Job has door contacts and door lock inputs as well as retiring cam output. Door locks are not coming on when trying to leave the floor. • Door Contacts were already closed and the controller attempted to energize the retiring cam (RCM) several times and the door locks did not turn on. After 4 attempts, it will declare this fault. Check locks or retiring cam device. RDoor Close Cont Flt Rear Door Close Contact safe fault • The car was either running or preparing to run and lost a rear door close contact input. Check the adjustment of the door. Rear Bot Lock Fault The Rear Bottom Door Lock failed on while the door was open (door on the rear door open limit). • Faulty door lock. • Jumper placed on door lock circuit. • Rear door lock not adjusted properly. • Faulty wiring to DLB input. Faulty DLB and DLB-1 inputs (For this to occur both DLB and DLB-1 inputs must fail on). • DOLR input failed. Replace DOLR input chip. • Rear door operator open limit is not adjusted properly Rear Det Edge Fault Rear Detector Edge Time-out • The Rear Electric Eye signal stayed on continuously for longer than the parameter 'EE Time-out' is set to. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-74 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Rear Door Close Flt The rear door did not reach the Rear Door Close Limit within the door close protection time. • Rear Door Close Limit (DCLR) not adjusted properly. • Faulty Rear Door Close Limit (DCLR). Replace DCRL input. • Trash in door track preventing door from closing. Rear Door Open Fault The rear door did not reach the Rear Door Open Limit within the door open protection time. • Rear Door Open Limit (DOLR) not adjusted properly.• Faulty Rear Door Open Limit (DOLR). Replace DOLR input. Rear Gate Sw Fault The Rear Gate Switch failed on while the door was open. • Rear Gate switch not adjusted properly. • RGS input failed on. Replace RGS input. Rear Mid Lock Fault The Middle Door Lock failed on while the door was open. • Faulty door lock. • Jumper placed on door lock circuit. • Rear door lock not adjusted properly. • Faulty wiring to RLM input. Faulty RLM and RLM-1 inputs (For this to occur both RLM and RLM-1 inputs must fail on). • DOLR input failed. Replace DOLR input chip. • Rear door operator open limit is not adjusted properly Rear Top Lock Fault The Rear Top Door Lock failed on while the door was open. • Faulty door lock. • Jumper placed on door lock circuit. • Rear door lock not adjusted properly. • Faulty wiring to DLT input. Faulty DLT and DLT-1 inputs (For this to occur both DLT and DLT-1 inputs must fail on). • DOLR input failed. Replace DOLR input chip. • Rear door operator open limit is not adjusted properly GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-75 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Reset Fault Anytime the system detects one of the following faults or conditions, a reset fault is logged: • Power is cycled • Controller finds itself out of the door zone. • Terminal limits do not match the current position. • Car has been switched off of inspection. • After an open safety string has been closed. • This fault is logged under normal conditions. Check the fault log for error that would indicate a fault condition prior to the reset fault. RETST OFFFault Rear Door Electric Eye Test Failed OFF. Output is turned on cause the electric eye outputs to controller input EER1 and EER2 to pulse. • RETST output or RETST input failed in the on state.• Replace the RETST output chip.• Replace the RETST input chip. RETST ON Fault Rear Door Electric Eye Test Failed ON. Output is turned on cause the electric eye outputs to controller input EER1 and EER2 to pulse. • RETST output or RETST input failed in the on state. • Replace the RETST output chip. • Replace the RETST input chip. RGS & RGS- 1 Opposite Input failure on one of the Rear Gate Switch (RGS) inputs. • Faulty RGS or RGS-1 input. Replace input chip. RLM & RLM- 1 Opposite Input failure on one of the Rear Lock Middle (RLM) inputs • Faulty RLM or RLM-1 input. Replace input chip. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-76 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix RPM Input Fault RPM Input Fault. The Rear Door Protection input stayed on when the rear door reached full open. • RPM switch not setup properly on the door operator. Faulty RPM input. Replace RPM input chip. RPM Off/RGS or DL On RPM Off with Rear Gate Switch or Door Lock On. The Rear Door Protection Module input must go on before rear gate switch or door lock inputs go on. • The RPM switch on the door operator is not setup properly. • There is no RPM input on the door operator. Jump the RPM input to the RGS terminal. • Faulty RPM input. Replace the RPM input chip. Run Fault: Shutdown Run Fault: Shutdown. If the car attempts to run 4 consecutive times and incurs a specific type of emergency stop without making a successful run, the car is shut down and this error code is shown. The specific types of emergency stops to cause this fault are as follows: 1. The car attempted to run and the position counts changed in the wrong direction.2. The car went on low oil while running.3. The car went on Hot Oil while running. • Verify that the position counts change in the appropriate direction while the car is running. A pulse direction fault will also be recorded.• For a low oil condition, check the oil level in the tank. Check the operation of the Low Oil Switch. A low oil fault will also be recorded.• For Hot Oil, check the operation of the TPH sensor and verify that the input is working properly. A hot oil fault will also be recorded. RUN I/O Failed Off The RUN input or output has failed off. • The RUN relay failed to pick or the RUN relay contact has failed to close. Replace the RUN relay. • Faulty RUNi input. Replace the RUNi input chip. • Faulty RUN output. Replace the RUN output chip. • Voltage feed through one of the valve solenoids. Refer to the schematic and check the circuit with a meter. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-77 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix RUN I/O Failed On The RUN input or output has failed on. • The RUN relay has failed on or RUN relay contact has failed in the closed position. Replace the RUN relay. • Faulty RUNi input. Replace the RUNi input chip. • Faulty RUN output. Replace the RUN output chip. • The solenoid common is shorted to GND. Refer to the schematic and check the circuit with a meter. Run Inhibit Rset Cnt Run inhibit from reset count • Once the car is in Reset mode, the controller attempted 5 times to come off reset but it keeps being sent back to the reset mode because of a fault condition. S10 Fuse Blown Fault The S10 input is off. No Power on S10 • Short from S10 to GND. Safety String Fault Safety string fault occurs from the following conditions:• The safety string is open from one of the following inputs being off: GOV, HSS, EXT, CSS, CTS, FFS, CST, MRSW. • The safety string is open (One or more of the safety inputs are off). Refer to the job prints and check all circuits ahead of the MRSW input. SD I/O Failed Off The SD input or output has failed off. • Faulty SDi input. Swap input board to see if SDi input chip is bad and replace input board if necessary. • The SD solenoid is shorted to GND at the SD terminal. Refer to the schematic and check the circuit with a meter. • Faulty SD output. Swap the output with another device to verify if the output is bad and replace if necessary. SD I/O Failed On The SD input or output has failed on. • Faulty SDi input. Swap input board to see if SDi input chip is bad and replace input board if necessary. • The SD test jumper was left on the output after an I/O test. Remove test jumper. • Voltage back feed through the SD coil. Verify that the SD solenoid is connected to the solenoid common. Refer to the schematic and check the circuit with a meter. • Faulty SD output. Swap the output with another device to verify if the output is bad and replace if necessary. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-78 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix SDF I/O Failed Off The SDF input or output has failed off • Faulty SDFi input. Swap input board to see if SDFi input chip is bad and replace input board if necessary. • The SDF solenoid is shorted to GND at the SDF terminal. Refer to the schematic and check the circuit with a meter. • Faulty SDF output. Swap the output with another device to verify if the output is bad and replace if necessary. SDF I/O Failed On The SDF input or output has failed on. • Faulty SDFi input. Swap input board to see if SDFi input chip is bad and replace input board if necessary. • The SDF test jumper was left on the output after an I/O test. Remove test jumper. • Voltage back feed through the SDF coil. Verify that the SDF solenoid is connected to the solenoid common. Refer to the schematic and check the circuit with a meter. • Faulty SDF output. Swap the output with another device to verify if the output is bad and replace if necessary. SDF I/O OnFault SDF I/O Failed on when stopped at the floor. After the car stops at the floor and the RUN output drops, the SUF and SDF I/Os are check to verify that they have turned off. • Verify that the LED on the output module has turned off. If not, then replace the output module.• Check for voltage on the solenoid terminal. If there is no voltage then replace the appropriate input board.• If there is voltage on the solenoid terminal, remove the output module. If the voltage goes away with the removal of the output module, replace the output module. Shutdown Alarm Shutdown Alarm: The controller is out of service from a fault condition for a time period greater than adjustable shutdown alarm timer. • This error is logged so the system can send notification from the Galileo Monitoring System. Check the previous error that was logged to determine the cause. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-79 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix SPD I/O Off Fault SPD I/O Failed off fault. The Up to Speed input SPD did not turn on when the soft- starter was turned on to start the motor. • The input failed off. With the car on inspection, momentarily jump the SPD input to 120 VAC and monitor the input status on "Inputs and Outputs" status screen of the LCD Display. If the SPD input turns on, the input is fine and if not then replace the input board. • The Up to Speed output from the soft-starter did not turn on. If the motor is rotating at rated rpm, the output from the soft-starter is bad. Contact Tech Support. • If the motor does not start, verify that the MC contactor is turning on, verify that the motor is wired per the job schematic and verify that the motor is the proper voltage. SPD I/O On Fault SPD I/O Failed on fault. The Up to Speed input SPD was on before the soft-starter was turned on by the MC output. • The Up to Speed input SPD failed on. Replace the input board. • The Up to Speed contact failed on in the soft- starter. Read the voltage on the output of the Up to Speed contact to GND. If 120 VAC is present, contact Tech Support. SPD Off Fault Moving Up to Speed SPD Input Off Fault while Moving. The SPD input went off while the car trying to run up and the MC output was on. • Faulty SPD input. Replace the input board. • Faulty connection from the soft-starter Up to Speed output to the SPD input on the Main I/O board. Check the wiring and the terminal connection. • Faulty Up to Speed output on the soft-starter. Contact Tech Support. Speed Control Exit Speed Control Exited from a fault condition. • The Electrical Safety String was open during a run. Check the safety string inputs.• The S10 input turned off. Possible short in traveling cable or bad S10 input. Correct short condition or replace S10 input on 1102 board.• Inspection Switch applied during run. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-80 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Stalled Fault Stall Fault occurs if the motion run timer exceeds the stall protection time. The motion run timer is incremented while the car is trying to run. • The elevator may have stalled from an improper valve adjustment. Verify the valve adjustment during high speed and leveling in both directions. • Increase Stall Timer on the controller under Adjustable Variables and Car Timers. Set the timer to allow the car to run the entire hoistway at the recovery speed. • The recovery speed parameter may need to be increased to 50 fpm or higher. Typically, do not set higher than 80 fpm. If the recovery speed parameter has been changed. Run the car in between floors on inspection and then return the car to automatic. Verify that the car recovers to a landing without overshooting the floor. Stop Switch Fault Stop switch is pulled while the car is in motion. • Stop switch is pulled. • Faulty wire connection in the stop switch circuit. SU I/O Failed Off The SU input or output has failed off • Faulty SUi input. Swap input board to see if SUi input chip is bad and replace input board if necessary. • The SU solenoid is shorted to GND at the SU terminal. Refer to the schematic and check the circuit with a meter. • Faulty SU output. Swap the output with another device to verify if the output is bad and replace if necessary. SU I/O Failed On The SU input or output has failed on. • Faulty SUi input. Swap input board to see if SUi input chip is bad and replace input board if necessary. • The SU test jumper was left on the output after an I/O test. Remove test jumper. • Voltage back feed through the SU coil. Verify that the SU solenoid is connected to the solenoid common. Refer to the schematic and check the circuit with a meter. • Faulty SU output. Swap the output with another device to verify if the output is bad and replace if necessary. SUF I/OFailed Off The SUF input or output has failed off. • Faulty SUFi input. Swap input board to see if SUFi input chip is bad and replace input board if necessary.• The SUF solenoid is shorted to GND at the SUF terminal. Refer to the schematic and check the circuit with a meter.• Faulty SUF output. Swap the output with another device to verify if the output is bad and replace if necessary. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-81 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix SUF I/O Failed On The SUF input or output has failed on. • Faulty SUFi input. Swap input board to see if SUFi input chip is bad and replace input board if necessary. • The SUF test jumper was left on the output after an I/O test. Remove test jumper. • Voltage back feed through the SUF coil. Verify that the SUF solenoid is connected to the solenoid common. Refer to the schematic and check the circuit with a meter. • Faulty SUF output. Swap the output with another device to verify if the output is bad and replace if necessary. SUF I/O On Fault SUF I/O Failed on when stopped at the floor. After the car stops at the floor and the RUN output drops, the SUF and SDF I/Os are check to verify that they have turned off. • Verify that the LED on the output module has turned off. If not then replace the output module. • Check for voltage on the solenoid terminal. If there is no voltage then replace the appropriate input board. • If there is voltage on the solenoid terminal, remove the output module. If the voltage goes away with the removal of the output module, replace the output module. Top Door Lock Fault The Top Door Lock failed on while the door was open. • Faulty door lock. • Jumper on door lock circuit. • Door lock not adjusted properly. • Faulty wiring to DLT input. • Faulty DLT and DLT-1 inputs (For this to occur both DLT and DLT-1 inputs must fail on). • DOL input failed. Replace DOL input chip. • Door operator open limit DOL is not adjusted properly Trace Trigger The Data Trace has been triggered. This is not a fault UL and DL Off Fault Both UL and DL level inputs are off when car is at a floor. These two inputs are set from counts from the APS selector. • Verify that the Main CPU is communicating with the APS selector.• Verify that the Main CPU has a valid floor table. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-82 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix UL DL Dist Too Large The UL and DL distance settings are the number of counts the car runs after the UL and DL dead level inputs are active. If the UL or DL distance is set greater than 2 inches, the controller will get this error when it attempts to verify the hoistway table. • The UL and DL distances are set in the Hoistway Tables menu on the LCD display interface. Select the UL & DL Distance menu and then set the UL or DL distance to the proper value. UL Failed On Fault UL Failed On Fault. The UL input did not go off during a run. The UL input is set from a count from the APS selector. • The APS selector did not change count during a run. Check for faults related to the APS selector. Verify that the APS selector counts change while the car is running. • The elevator did not leave the floor on a run attempt. Verify that the elevator can run from the landing. Check the fault log for another fault that could prevent the car from running. UL, DL & DZ Off at FL UL, DL & DZ inputs off at floor. The car thinks it should be at a floor or is at a floor and all the floor inputs have turned off. • Verify that the Main CPU is communicating with the APS selector. • Verify that the Main CPU has a valid floor table. Up Directional Fault Car unexpectedly hit the Up Normal Limit while running up. • The Safety PAL detected a fault condition and turned off the UN output from the NTS processor. • The NTS processor detected a fault condition and turned off the UN output. • APS Selector communications loss to the Main CPU. • APS Selector communications loss to the NTS processor. • Selector not reading the correct position from the tape. User Variable Init User variable initialization User related parameters such a password and telephone numbers are being initialized. This error occurs on the first time the GALX-1132 CPU board is being powered up. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-83 Table 6-0: Main CPU Faults Faults Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix UT Failed On Fault UT I/O Failed On The car is on a door zone and at the top floor but the UT-1 input (from the Main CPU count) did not activate (go off). • The Up slowdown count for the top floor is set incorrectly. Review the hoistway slowdown table and if the value is incorrect, relearn the top floor position. UT Limit Fault UT Limit from the NTS processor turned off before the normal slowdown point was reached. • The UT limit from the NTS processor is too far from the top landing. Adjust the UT limit closer to the landing by changing the NTS UT limit count and the relearning the top floor. • The slowdown position is set too close to the top landing. Adjust the top floor slowdown count in the Hoistway Table Floor & SD Counts menu. UTc Limit Fault UTc Limit from the Main CPU turned off before the normal slowdown point was reached. • The UT limit from the Main CPU is too far from the top landing. Adjust the UTc limit closer to the landing by changing the NTS DT limit count and the relearning the top floor. • The slowdown position is set too close to the top landing. Adjust the top floor slowdown count in the Hoistway Table Floor & SD Counts menu. Wrong Dir Pls Run Dn Wrong Direction Pulses while car running down. The pulse counts should be counting down while the car is running down. • Make sure that the APS selector is working properly. Check for APS selector faults and make the appropriate corrections. Wrong Dir Pls Run Up Wrong Direction Pulses while car running up. The pulse counts should be counting up while the car is running up. • Make sure that the APS selector is working properly. Check for APS selector faults and make the appropriate corrections. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-84 6.2 Device Fault in Fault Log This section describes the specific device faults from devices on the Machine Room CAN BUS (MRCAN), Car Top CAN BUS (CTCAN) and Group CAN BUS (GRCAN) serial ports. When a device sends a fault to the Main CPU, the Main CPU logs the fault according to t he CAN BUS port that the device is connected. For example, if a device on the Machine Room Can bus (MRCAN) has a fault, the fault is logged as a MRCAN Device Fault. When the fault is received from a device on a Hall Call Driver Board or a Car Call Driver Board, the fault is logged as an HCB Device Fault or a CCB Device Fault, respectively. The actual fault that occurred on the device is stored as part of the fault data and can be viewed when selecting the details of the fault from the Galileo or the fault log that is stored on the SD Card. When viewing the faults on the LCD Display Interface, instead of showing an MRCAN Device Fault, a GRCAN Device Fault, a CTCAN Device Fault, an HCB Device Fault or a CCB Device fault, an abbreviation of the device name and bus is displayed followed by the actual device fault. The format for the data displayed on the LCD Interface is as follows: DevP## FAULT Where Dev is the device name such as SEB (serial expansion board) and P## is the port and address number if applicable. The CAN BUS ports are listed as G=GRCAN, C=CTCAN and M=MRCAN. The ## is the device number having a value between 1 and 99. FAULT is the specific device fault. A list of the device names is show below: NTS – NTS Processor DOOR – Front Door Operator on CTCAN port RDOR – Rear Door Operator on CTCAN port LW M – Load Weighing Device on MRCAN port LW C – Load Weighing Device on CTCAN port VS M – Voltage Sensing Device on MRCAN port VS C – Voltage Sensing Device on CTCAN port VS G – Voltage Sensing Device on GRCAN port PI M – PI Device on MRCAN port PI C – PI Device on MRCAN port SEBM – Serial Expansion Board on MRCAN port SEBC – Serial Expansion Board on CTCAN port SEBG – Serial Expansion Board on GRCAN port COP – Car Operating Board on CTCAN port HCD – Hall Board on HC Driver Board on GRCAN port HCB – Hall Call Board on GRCAN port An example of an APS Com Fault for the NTS processor device would be displayed as “NTS APS Com Fault”. In addition, a stuck Up button on a hall call driver board device would be displayed as “HCD 14 Stck Up Buttn”. To troubleshoot the device fault, look up the FAULT portion of the message and follow the described suggestion. Similarly, when a device is reset on one of the CAN BUS ports, the device name, port and address number is displayed the same as described above but with the FAULT section being shown as “Device Reset”. An example of a Serial Expansion Board #05 device reset on the group can bus (GRCAN) would be “SEBG05 Device Reset”. The device faults are listed in the following tables: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-85 Table 6-1: Device Faults from the CTCAN, GRCAN and MRCAN Serial Ports Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix APS Com Fault NTS Processor has a communications fault with the APS selector head. • Faulty communications from the NTS CAN terminals on the 1121 MAIN I/O board to the NTS CAN terminals on the 1134 COP board. Make sure the CANH and CANL wires match. • Termination resistors are usually place at the far end of each BUS. Verify the placement of the Termination resistors. • Check the RJ-45 connection from the 1134 COP board to the APS selector camera. • Try moving the termination resistors to other locations. • Faulty device, try replacing each board individually, the 1121 Main I/O board, the 1134 COP board and APS selector camera. Comm Fault Device has a communications fault. • Faulty communications wiring to the device. • Termination resistors are usually place at the far end of each BUS. Verify the placement of the Termination resistors. • Try moving the termination resistors to other locations. • Faulty device, replace board. DZ Clip Fault The NTS processor has a DZ clip fault. The NTS processor keep track of when the door zone clip is read at each floor. If it enters a floor and the clip is not read at that floor three times in a row, this fault is logged. • Check the placement of the clip when the car is dead level to the floor. The clip should be in between the two channels of APS cameras. Momentarily place your hand in front of the camera to cause the red LED markers to turn on. The clip should be roughly in the middle of the red LED markers. • Verify that the clip is not broken or that the correct clip is installed. Replace or install the correct clip. HW Fl Cnt Inv Hoistway Floor Count is Invalid on the NTS processor. One or more floor count of an above floor is less than the floor below. • The hoistway floor table is not setup properly. Check the valid floor table of the NTS processor on the LCD Interface in the Hoistway Table Valid Floor and Clips menu. Run car to the floor with the position of the invalid floor or floors and learn the floor position. • Complete the setup process. • Faulty NTS processor. Replace the 1121 Main I/O board. Contact Tech Support. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-86 Table 6-1: Device Faults from the CTCAN, GRCAN and MRCAN Serial Ports Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix HW Fl Cnt=0 F Hoistway Floor Count = 0 Fault on the NTS processor. The hoistway floor table is not setup properly. • Check the valid floor table of the NTS processor on the LCD Interface in the Hoistway Table Valid Floor and Clips menu. Run car to the floor with the position of the invalid floor or floors and learn the floor position. • Complete the setup process. • Faulty NTS processor. Replace the 1121 Main I/O board. Contact Tech Support. HW Valid Fl F Hoistway Valid Floor Fault on the NTS processor. The device hoistway table has the hoistway learn flag set, indicating that it had been setup but the but one or more floor is not valid. The hoistway floor table is not setup properly. • Check the valid floor table of the NTS processor on the LCD Interface in the Hoistway Table Valid Floor and Clips menu. Run car to the floor with the position of the invalid floor or floors and learn the floor position. • Complete the setup process. • Faulty NTS processor. Replace the 1121 Main I/O board. Contact Tech Support. SPI Com Fault NTS Processor has a communications fault on the SPI bus to the 1132 Main CPU Board. • Check that the 1132 Main CPU board is installed properly on the 1121 Main I/O board. • Faulty 1132 Main CPU board. Replace the board. • Faulty 1121 Main I/O board. Replace the board. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-87 Table 6-2: Faults from the Hall Call Driver Board Devices on the GRCAN Serial Port Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Ax Dn In Ovld HCB Aux Down input overload • Controller detected overload in the input from the Aux terminal at the station. To identify fault device refer to Detailed Fault Log 'dev' and 'dv2' will provide address for Serial Driver address and Station where the fault was generated. Ax Up In Ovld HCB Aux Up input overload • Controller detected overload in the input from the Aux terminal at the station. To identify fault device refer to Detailed Fault Log 'dev' and 'dv2' will provide address for Serial Driver address and Station where the fault was generated. Dev Comm Loss The Driver does not see this HCB device • Comm faults above and below a device – check wiring • Board not powering up – check 24VAC and MCU on device • Fuses blown on driver Dev Comm Loss The Driver does not see this HCB device • Comm faults above and below a device – check wiring • Board not powering up – check 24VAC and MCU on device • Fuses blown on driver Device Reset The HCB has just comeback online • Fixed previous problem. There is a power/communication problem, where the board is either resetting (power) or temporarily losing communication on both ports. Device Reset The HCB has just comeback online • Fixed previous problem. There is a power/communication problem, where the board is either resetting (power) or temporarily losing communication on both ports. Dn FET Open HCB fet open down • Replace GALX-1054AN Dn FET Open HCB fet open down • Replace GALX-1054AN Dn FET Short HCB fet short down • Replace GALX-1054AN Dn FET Short HCB fet short down • Replace GALX-1054AN GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-88 Table 6-2: Faults from the Hall Call Driver Board Devices on the GRCAN Serial Port Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Dn Input Ovld HCB Down input overload • Controller detected overload in the input from the LED board at the station. To identify fault device refer to Detailed Fault Log 'dev' and 'dv2' will provide address for Serial Driver address and Station where the fault was generated. Dn LED Open HCB led open down • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. Dn LED Open HCB led open down • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. Dn LED Short HCB led short down • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. Dn LED Short HCB led short down • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. FET Open BluD HCB fet open blue down • Replace the GALX-1093AN board – dev / dev 2 can pinpoint which 1093 is at fault. FET Open BluU HCB fet open blue up • Replace the GALX-1093AN board – dev / dev 2 can pinpoint which 1093 is at fault. FET Open GrnD HCB fet open green down • Replace the GALX-1093AN board – dev / dev 2 can pinpoint which 1093 is at fault. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-89 Table 6-2: Faults from the Hall Call Driver Board Devices on the GRCAN Serial Port Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix FET Open GrnU HCB fet open green up • Replace the GALX-1093AN board – dev / dev 2 can pinpoint which 1093 is at fault. FET Open RedD HCB fet open red down • Replace the GALX-1093AN board – dev / dev 2 can pinpoint which 1093 is at fault. FET Open RedU HCB fet short red up • Replace the GALX-1093AN board – dev / dev 2 can pinpoint which 1093 is at fault. FET Shrt BluD HCB fet short blue down • Replace the GALX-1093AN board – dev / dev 2 can pinpoint which 1093 is at fault. FET Shrt BluU HCB fet short blue up • Replace the GALX-1093AN board – dev / dev 2 can pinpoint which 1093 is at fault. FET Shrt GrnD HCB fet short green down • Replace the GALX-1093AN board – dev / dev 2 can pinpoint which 1093 is at fault. FET Shrt GrnU HCB fet short green up • Replace the GALX-1093AN board – dev / dev 2 can pinpoint which 1093 is at fault. FET Shrt RedD HCB fet short red down • Replace the GALX-1093AN board – dev / dev 2 can pinpoint which 1093 is at fault. FET Shrt RedU HCB fet short red up • Replace the GALX-1093AN board – dev / dev 2 can pinpoint which 1093 is at fault. Invalid Floor HCB has invalid floor • This fault is only intended for internal use to identify floors that need to be skipped in diagnostics. It should never occur Invalid Floor HCB has invalid floor • This fault is only intended for internal use to identify floors that need to be skipped in diagnostics. It should never occur GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-90 Table 6-2: Faults from the Hall Call Driver Board Devices on the GRCAN Serial Port Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix LED Open BluD HCB led open blue down • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. LED Open BluU HCB led open blue up • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. LED Open GrnD HCB led open green down • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. LED Open GrnU HCB led open green up • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. LED Open RedD HCB led open red down • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. LED Open RedU HCB led short red up • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-91 Table 6-2: Faults from the Hall Call Driver Board Devices on the GRCAN Serial Port Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix LED Shrt BluD HCB led short blue down • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. LED Shrt BluU HCB led short blue up • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. LED Shrt GrnD HCB led short green down • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. LED Shrt GrnU HCB led short green up • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. LED Shrt GrnU HCB led short green up • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. LED Shrt RedD HCB led short red down • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-92 Table 6-2: Faults from the Hall Call Driver Board Devices on the GRCAN Serial Port Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix LED Shrt RedU HCB led short red up • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. LED Shrt RedU HCB led short red up • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. Low Sply Volt Hall call board has low supply voltage • Low voltage at Hall call device level. To identify fault device refer to Detailed Fault Log 'dev' and 'dv2' will provide address for Serial Driver address and Station where the fault was generated. No Dn LED Brd HCB No Down Led Board Detected • HCB board could not detect an LED board • Replace LED board (GALX-1085AN) No Dn LED Brd HCB No Down Led Board Detected • HCB board could not detect an LED board • Replace LED board (GALX-1085AN) No Up LED Brd HCB No Up Led Board Detected • HCB board could not detect an LED board • Replace LED board (GALX-1085AN) No Up LED Brd HCB No Up Led Board Detected • HCB board could not detect an LED board • Replace LED board (GALX-1085AN) Rx<-above fl HCB rx fault up to above floor • Receiver on board is bad – replace device • Cable is bad or disconnected • Cables going to wrong port (i.e., switched to above and to below) • Transmitter from device above is bad. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-93 Table 6-2: Faults from the Hall Call Driver Board Devices on the GRCAN Serial Port Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Rx<-above fl HCB rx fault up to above floor • Receiver on board is bad – replace device • Cable is bad or disconnected • Cables going to wrong port (i.e., switched to above and to below) • Transmitter from device above is bad. Rx<-below fl HCB rx fault down from below floor • Receiver on board is bad – replace device • Cable is bad or disconnected • Cables going to wrong port (i.e., switched to above and to below) • Transmitter from device below is bad. Rx<-below fl HCB rx fault down from below floor • Receiver on board is bad – replace device • Cable is bad or disconnected • Cables going to wrong port (i.e., switched to above and to below) • Transmitter from device below is bad. Stck Dn Buttn HCB stuck button down • Button is physically stuck – fix button • Input is stuck on or shorted – replace device Stck Dn Buttn HCB stuck button down • Button is physically stuck – fix button • Input is stuck on or shorted – replace device Stck Up Buttn HCB stuck button up • Button is physically stuck – fix button • Input is stuck on or shorted – replace device Stck Up Buttn HCB stuck button up • Button is physically stuck – fix button • Input is stuck on or shorted – replace device Tx->above fl Can't internally read information from Transmitter to device above • Cable connecting two devices could be flip- flopped (i.e., gray wire goes from pin 1 on one end to pin 8 on the other end). Disconnect cable, and if fault changes to Rx Fault, the problem is the cable. • Transmitter is bad, Replace the Device GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-94 Table 6-2: Faults from the Hall Call Driver Board Devices on the GRCAN Serial Port Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Tx->above fl Can't internally read information from Transmitter to device above • Cable connecting two devices could be flip- flopped (i.e., gray wire goes from pin 1 on one end to pin 8 on the other end). Disconnect cable, and if fault changes to Rx Fault, the problem is the cable. • Transmitter is bad, Replace the Device Tx->below fl Can't internally read information from Transmitter to device below • Cable connecting two devices could be flip- flopped (i.e., gray wire goes from pin 1 on one end to pin 8 on the other end). Disconnect cable, and if fault changes to Rx Fault, the problem is the cable. • Transmitter is bad, Replace the Device Tx->below fl Can't internally read information from Transmitter to device below • Cable connecting two devices could be flip- flopped (i.e., gray wire goes from pin 1 on one end to pin 8 on the other end). Disconnect cable, and if fault changes to Rx Fault, the problem is the cable. • Transmitter is bad, Replace the Device Up FET Open HCB fet open up • Replace GALX-1054AN Up FET Open HCB fet open up • Replace GALX-1054AN Up FET Short HCB fet short up • Replace GALX-1054AN Up FET Short HCB fet short up • Replace GALX-1054AN Up Input Ovld HCB Up input overload • Controller detected overload in the input from the LED board at the station. To identify fault device refer to Detailed Fault Log 'dev' and 'dv2' will provide address for Serial Driver address and Station where the fault was generated. Up LED Open HCB led open up • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-95 Table 6-2: Faults from the Hall Call Driver Board Devices on the GRCAN Serial Port Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix Up LED Open HCB led open up • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. Up LED Short HCB led short up • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. Up LED Short HCB led short up • Make Sure there is a GALX-1056AN attached to the proper connector (Up LED always attached to CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if only down call at that station (like the top floor), otherwise attached via ribbon at CN6. • Replace GALX-1056AN for the associated up or down call. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-96 Table 6-3: Faults from the COP Board Devices on the CTCAN Serial Port Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix FET Open Blue Car Call Board FET open blue • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, 'dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. FET Open Grn Car Call Board FET open green • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, 'dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. FET Open Red Car Call Board FET open red • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, 'dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. FET Short Grn Car Call Board FET short green • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, 'dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. FET Short Red Car Call Board FET short red • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, 'dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. FET Shrt Blue Car Call Board FET short blue • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, 'dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-97 Table 6-3: Faults from the COP Board Devices on the CTCAN Serial Port Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix LED Open Blue Car Call Board LED open blue • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, 'dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. LED Open Grn Car Call Board LED open green • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, 'dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. LED Open Red Car Call Board LED open red • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, 'dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. LED Short Red Car Call Board LED short red • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. LED Shrt Blue Car Call Board LED short blue • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, 'dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. LED Sht Green Car Call Board LED short green • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, 'dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-98 Table 6-3: Faults from the COP Board Devices on the CTCAN Serial Port Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix No LED Board Car Call LED board missing • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, 'dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. Stuck Button Car Call Board stuck button • Faulty LED signal from RGB Board. Look at detailed car faults log to determine device. 'dev' gives you address for global CAN device, 'dv2' gives you local CAN device and 'pf1' the number for the IO location within the local board. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-99 6.3 Detailed Faults Data and Description Example of data stored on the SD Card for the standard or long-term fault log: 8 Inspection Input Flt 11:54:21 2/06/2016 Position = 1 Occurrences = 1 srv=001, prc=002, drf=000, rdf=000, dpr=000, dir=000, emp=000, med=000 cbl=000, equ=000, fir=000, rfi=000, hsf=000, stf=000, cal=000, esp=000 nst=000, rlv=000, ste=001, dfs=000, st0=000, ins=01h, nds=000, dev=00h pf1=00h, pf2=00h, dv2=00h, io0=55h, io1=01h, io2=03h, io3=ffh, io4=b0h io5=c8h, io6=15h, io7=33h, io8=f0h, io9=21h, ioA=f1h, ioB=7fh, ioC=ffh ioD=ffh, ioE=f5h, ioF=01h, ioG=4dh, ioH=ffh, ioI=00h, ioJ=00h, ioK=00h ioL=00h, ioM=00h, ioN=00h, ioO=05h, ioP=16h, ioQ=00h ioR=00h, ioS=09h, ioT=16h statusf=00000040h, statusf2=00000000h statusf3=00000000h, statusf4=00000000h DPP Count = 8025, Floor Count = 8025, SD Count = 0 Enc Vel = 0, Enc Dir = 0 Flt Bits 1 = 0h, Flt Bits 2 = 0h, Flt Bits 3 = 0h, Flt Bits 4 = 0h SS Status=0000h, PWR Status=0000h, Run Status=30805ff8h NTS Poscnt = 7895, NTS Vel = 0 NTS Cmd1 = 0h, NTS Cmd2 = 10h, NTS Stat1 = 0h, NTS Stat2 = 80h NTS DoorZone = 0h, NTS Limits = 0h Nudg Flags=00h, Door Req=08h, Call Flags=00h Chk Run=1bh, Chk Start=00h, Chk Level=00h, Chk Door=28h Front SD=0000h, Rear SD=0000h, Motion Tmr=00001 PAL Status=00h, Inspect Svc=000 Percent Load= 0 GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-100 SRV: SRV Service Flag 0 = Safety String 23 = Low Pressure 1 = Inspection 24 = Hot Oil 2 = Reset Mode 25 = Auto Door Off 3 = Configuration Mode 26 = Riot Control 4 = Hoistway Setup 27 = Car Sw Elevator Off 5 = Fire Fighters Stop Switch 28 = Hall Sw Elevator Off 6 = Machine Room Stop Switch 29 = Car Sw Elevator Off2 7 = Motion Stop 30 = Return to Lobby 8 = AT Floor Shutdown 31 = Independent Service 9 = Comm Fail 32 = Priority Service 10 = Door Close Fail 33 = Calibrate Load Weigher 11 = Gate and Lock 34 = Reset Jack Service 12 = Stalled 35 = Load Weigh Overload 13 = Low Oil 36 = Load Weighing Bypass 14 = Earthquake 37 = Extended Door Time 15 = Emergency Power 38 = Reset Going Up 16 = Fire Phase 2 39 = Reset Going Down 17 = Fire Phase 1 Main 40 = Security Recall 18 = Fire Phase 1 Alt 41 = TUG Service 19 = Emergency Power Recall 42 = Sabbath Service 20 = Hospital Service 43 = Attendant Service 21 = Medical Emergency Service 44 = Homing 22 = Code Blue 45 = Automatic Service PRC: Process Flag 1 = Reset Mode 12 = Safety String Open 2 = Inspection 13 = Elevator Off Line 3 = Motion Mode: Up Fast 14 = Elevator Parked 4 = Motion Mode: Up Transition 15 = Waiting At Floor 5 = Motion Mode: Leveling Up 16 = Doors Procedure 6 = Motion Mode: Down Fast 17 = Elevator Stalled (or Low Oil) 7 = Motion Mode: Down Transition 18 = Elevator Resetting Hydro Jack 8 = Motion Mode: Leveling Down 19 = Elevator on Low Oil Pressure mode 9 = Motion Mode: Emergency Stop 20 = Elevator is in Automatic Learn Hoistway 10 = Motion Mode: Not Used 21 = Elevator is in Emergency Power Recovery 11 = Motion Mode: Emergency Slowdown 22= Hot Oil Mode GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-101 DRF: Front Door Flag RDF: Rear Door Flag 0 = Door Closed 1 = Door Opening 2 = Door Dwelling 3 = Door Closing 4 = Door Nudging Closed 0 = Door Closed 1 = Door Opening 2 = Door Dwelling 3 = Door Closing 4 = Door Nudging Closed DPR: Direction Preference Flag DIR: Car Direction Flag 0 = None 1 = Up 2 = Down 0 = None 1 = Up 2 = Down EMP: Emergency Power Flag 0 = Not on Emergency Power 1 = On Emergency Power Waiting 2 = On Emergency Power Waiting with Doors Open 3 = On Emergency Power Returning Home 4 = On Em. Power Returned Home with Doors Open 5 = On Em. Power Returned Home with Doors Closed 6 = On Emergency Power and Selected to Run 7 = On Emergency Power waiting with Doors Closed MED: Medical Emergency 0 = No Medical Emergency Service 1 = Recall Car to Medical Emergency Recall Floor 2 = At Return Floor with Door Open (Return Complete) 4 = On EMS Car Call Service 5 = On EMS Car Hold Service (key off but not at the recall floor) CBL: Code Blue Flag 0 = No Code Blue 1 = Recall to Emergency Floor 2 = At Code Blue Floor 3 = At Code Blue Floor with Door Open 4 = Finished Code Blue GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-102 EQU: Earthquake Flag 0 = Not on Earthquake Operation 1 = Earthquake Sensor Activated 2 = Counterweight Derailment Sensor Activated 3 = Recover Away from the Counterweight 4 = Stopped at a Floor FIR: Fire Flag 0 = Not on Fire Service 1 = Phase 1 Main Egress Return 2 = Phase 1 Alternate Egress Return 3 = Phase 1 Completed 4 = Phase 2 Door Hold 5 = Phase 2 Constant Pressure Door Open 6 = Phase 2 Constant Pressure Door Close 7 = Phase 2 Door Hold 8 = Phase 2 Momentary DCB Door Close RFI: Rear Fire Flag 0 = Not on Fire Service 1 = Phase 1 Main Rear Egress Return 2 = Phase 1 Alternate Rear Egress Return 3 = Phase 1 Completed 4 = Phase 2 Rear Door Hold 5 = Phase 2 Constant Pressure Rear Door Open 6 = Phase 2 Constant Pressure Rear Door Close 7 = Phase 2 Rear Door Hold 8 = Phase 2 Momentary DCB Rear Door Close HSF: High Speed Flag STF: Start Flag 0 = No High Speed 1 = High Speed 0 = Not valid Start 1 = Start of Run CAL: Direction of Calls 0 = No Call 1 = Above Call 2 = Below Call 3 = Above and Below Calls ESP: Emergency Stop Flag NST: Need to Stop Flag 1 = Emergency Stop 1 = Car need to stop at next floor RLV: Re-level Flag STE: Step Flag 1 = Car in re-leveling 1 = Step to the next position (non-distance feedback) GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-103 DSF (dsf): Door Status Flags Bit 0: (preDO) Pre-open Door Flag Bit 4: (rdsUP) Rear Door Open Sequence Up Pilot Bit 1: (dsUP) Door Open Sequence Up Pilot Bit 5: (rdsDP) Rear Door Open Sequence Dn Pilot Bit 2: (dsDP) Door Open Sequence Down Pilot Bit 6: (rdsNP) Rear Door Open Sequence No Pilot Bit 3: (dsNP) Door Open Sequence No Pilot Bit 7: STO: Next Stop Floor – Floor Number of next stop INS: Inspection Status Flag (Status bit set to “1” when switch is on) Bit 0: (INS) Car Top Inspection Bit 1: (MRIN) Machine Room Inspection Bit 2: (ACC) Access Bit 3: (ICI) In Car Inspection Bit 4: (LBP) Lock Bypass Bit 5: (GBP) Gate Bypass Bit 6: (AUTI) Not in Automatic (AUTO==0) NDS: Next Car Up Door Sequence 0 = Initiate Next Up Door Open 1 = Opening Next Up Door 2 = Door full open on Next Up 3 = Allow door close for onward call 4 = Allow door close while on next up DEV: Device Number DV2: Device 2 Number PF1: Program Flag 1 PF2: Program Flag 2 STATUSF: Control Status Flag (Status bit set to “1” when status active) Bit 0: (sfS10) NO S10 power Bit 17: Bit 1: (sfHC) NO HC power Bit 18: Bit 2: (sfSS) NO SS input Bit 19: Bit 3: Bit 20: Bit 4: Bit 21: (sfSHD) Shutdown (too many run attempts Bit 5: (sfIO) I/O error during redundancy check with faults) Bit 6: (sfINS) Inspection or lock bypass fault Bit 22: (sfAST) Annual Safety Test Bit 7: (sfBPI) Binary Position Input Error Bit 23: (sfSAF) Waiting for Safe (Door Locks and Bit 8: (sfPOS) Position Error Gate) Bit 9: (sfAD) No automatic Doors Bit 24: (sfTLM) UT or DT limit error Bit 10: (sfSTP) Stop switch open Bit 25: Bit 11: (sfDZ) Door Zone fault Bit 26: (sfDZF) UL, DL and DZ off at floor Bit 12: (sfGDL) Gate or Door lock fault Bit 27: Bit 13: Bit 28: (sfFST) Fire Fighter Stop Switch Bit 14: (sfDCL) No DCL Bit 29: (sfSEL) Selector Can error Bit 15: (sfDCC) No Door Close Contact Bit 30: (sfUDL) UL or DL fault Bit 16: Bit 31: (sfLEV) Leveling fault GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-104 STATUSF2: Control Status Flag (Status bit set to “1” when status active) Bit 0: (sfHWI) Hardware Init fault Bit 16: Bit 1: (sfFDC) Front Door Closing Fault Bit 17: (sfIOT) IO Test in progress Bit 2: (sfRDC) Rear Door Closing Fault Bit 18: Bit 3: (sfLVF) Line Voltage Fault Bit 19: Bit 4: (sfDVF) Door Voltage Fault Bit 20: (sfNIT) Non-Interference timer Bit 5: Bit 21: (sfDRQ) Door open request Bit 6: (sfDMO) Door motor overload Bit 22: (sfDPM) Waiting for DPM Bit 7: (sfHWL) Learn Hoistway Fault Bit 23: (sfRPM) Waiting for RPM Bit 8: Bit 24: (sfVSC) Viscosity operation Bit 9: Bit 25: (sfLVR) Leveling request Bit 10: Bit 26: Bit 11: (sfAFS) At Floor Shutdown Bit 27: Bit 12: Bit 28: (sfEES) Front EE Test failed fault Bit 13: (sfRSR) Reset run fault Bit 29: (sfERS) Rear EE Test failed fault Bit 14: Bit 30: Bit 15: (sfCOP) COP can comm error Bit 31: STATUSF3: Control Status Flag (Status bit set to “1” when status active) Bit 0: Bit 16: Bit 1: Bit 17: Bit 2: Bit 18: Bit 3: (sfASC) APS Selector CAN Fault Bit 19: Bit 4: (sfNAC) NTS APS Selector CAN Fault Bit 20: Bit 5: (sfMSP) MC/SPD I/O Fault Bit 21: Bit 6: (sfSSA) Stop Switch Anti-Creep Releveling Bit 22: Bit 7: Bit 23: Bit 8: Bit 24: Bit 9: Bit 25: Bit 10: Bit 26: Bit 11: Bit 27: Bit 12: Bit 28: Bit 13: Bit 29: Bit 14: Bit 30: Bit 15: Bit 31: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-105 STATUSF4: Control Status Flag (Status bit set to “1” when status active) Bit 0: Bit 16: Bit 1: Bit 17: Bit 2: Bit 18: Bit 3: Bit 19: Bit 4: Bit 20: Bit 5: Bit 21: Bit 6: Bit 22: Bit 7: Bit 23: Bit 8: Bit 24: Bit 9: Bit 25: Bit 10: Bit 26: Bit 11: Bit 27: Bit 12: Bit 28: Bit 13: Bit 29: Bit 14: Bit 30: Bit 15: Bit 31: DPP Count (DPC): Position counts in pulses Floor Count (FPC) = Floor Count in pulses Slowdown Count (SDC): Slowdown counts in pulses Enc Vel: Velocity feedback from Encoder in fpm Enc Dir: Encoder Direction 0=none, 1=up,2=down Flt Bits 1 (FltB1): Faults Bits 1 (Byte 0) Bit 0: (fHWLN) Hoistway Not Learned (1=fault) Bit 4: Bit 1: (fHWI) Hardware Init Fault (1=fault) Bit 5: Bit 2: Bit 6: Bit 3: Bit 7: Flt Bits 2 (FltB2): Fault Bits 2 (Byte 1) Bit 0: (fCOPC) COP CAN COM error Bit 4: Bit 1: (fSPBC) NTS SPI COM error Bit 5: (fSELC) APS Selector CAN COM error Bit 2: Bit 6: Bit 3: Bit 7: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-106 Flt Bits 3 (FltB3): Fault Bits 3 (Byte 2) Bit 0: Bit 4: Bit 1: Bit 5: Bit 2: (fMTOL) Door Motor Overload Bit 6: Bit 3: Bit 7: Flt Bits 4 (FltB4): Fault Bits 4 (Byte 3) Bit 0: Bit 4: Bit 1: Bit 5: Bit 2: Bit 6: Bit 3: Bit 7: SS Status: Safety String Status Bit 0: (ssGOV) Governor input open Bit 8: (ssFFS) Fire Fighter Stop Switch Bit 1: Bit 9: (ssCST) Car Stop Switch Bit 2: Bit 10: (ssMRS) Machine Room Stop Switch Bit 3: Bit 11: Bit 4: (ssHSS) Hoistway Safety Bit 12: (ssEXT) Car Exit Switch open Bit 5: (ssCTS) Car Top Stop switch open Bit 13: Bit 6: (ssCSS) Car Safety Switch open Bit 14: Bit 7: Bit 15: PWR Status: Power Status Bit 0: (psHC) Hall call power loss Bit 8: Bit 1: (psHCL) Hall call light power loss Bit 9: Bit 2: (psCC) Car call power loss Bit 10: Bit 3: (psCCL) Car call light power loss Bit 11: Bit 4: (psLHC) Lobby Hall common power loss Bit 12: Bit 5: (psFEP) Fire/Emergency Power Loss Bit 13: Bit 6: Bit 14: Bit 7: Bit 15: GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-107 Run Status: Control Run Status Flag (Status bit set to “1” when status active) Bit 0: (rsRUN) Car is running Bit 1: (rsDNR) Down run signal Bit 2: (rsUP) Up run signal Bit 3: (rsDL) Down door zone Limit Bit 4: (rsUL) Up door zone limit Bit 5: (rsDZ) Door Zone Bit 6: (rsDLT) Door Lock Top Bit 7: (rsDLM) Door Lock Middle Bit 8: (rsDLB) Door Lock bottom Bit 9: (rsGS) Gate Switch Bit 10: (rsRLM) Rear Door Lock Middle Bit 11: (rsRGS) Rear Gate Switch Bit 12: (rsDOL) Door open limit (0=active) Bit 13: (rsDCL) Door Close Limit (0=active) Bit 14: (rDOLR) Rear door open limit (0=active) Bit 15: (rDCLR) Rear door close limit (0=active) Bit 16: (rsEE) Electric eye or Detector Edge Bit 17: (rsSE) Safety Edge Bit 18: (rsEER) Rear Electric eye or Detector edge Bit 19: (rsSER) Rear Safety Edge Bit 20: (rsHSF) High Speed Flag Bit 21: (rsSTF) Start Flag Bit 22: (rLSTF) Leveling Start Flag Bit 23: (rsDZA) Door Zone OR'd Bit 24: (rsDO) Door Open Bit 25: (rsDC) Door Close Bit 26: (rsDOR) Rear Door Open Bit 27: (rsDCR) Rear Door Close Bit 28: (rsUN) Up Normal Limit Bit 29: (rsDN) Down Normal Limit Bit 30: Bit 31: NTS Count: NTS Processor Position count in pulses NTS Vel: NTS Processor Velocity in fpm NTS Cmd: NTS Processor Command1 Bit 0: 1 = Mark Floor Bit 4: Bit 1: 1 = Bottom Floor Bit 5: 1 = Clear Hoistway Table Bit 2: 1 = Top Floor Bit 6: Bit 3: 1 = Enter HW Learn Mode Bit 7: 1 = Reset Fault NTS Cmd: NTS Processor Command2 Bit 0: 1 = NTS Test Bit 4: Bit 1: 1 = Automatic Door Disable Bit 5: 1 = Reset tx/rx count Bit 2: Bit 6: 1 = Set NTS Down Slowdown Bit 3: Bit 7: 1 = Set NTS Up Slowdown GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-108 NTS Stat: NTS Processor Status1 Bit 0: (HWLrn) Hoistway Learn Bit 4: NTS APS Selector OK Bit 1: APS Can Fault Bit 5: Bit 2: (ClipF) DZ Clip Fault Bit 6: NTS APS Setup Fault Bit 3: Bit 7: NTS Stat: NTS Processor Status2 Bit 0: Direction Up Bit 4: Velocity Fault Bit 1: Direction Down Bit 5: Bit 2: Direction Fault Bit 6: Setup/Test Jumper Bit 3: Limit (EMSD) Fault Bit 7: Rear Door Jumper NTS Stat: NTS Processor Door Zone Bit 0: (UL) Up Door Zone Limit Bit 4: (DZ Clip) Door Zone Clip Bit 1: (DZ) Door Zone Bit 5: Bit 2: (DZA) Door Zone Auxiliary Bit 6: Bit 3: (DL) Down Door Zone Limit Bit 7: NTS Stat: NTS Processor Limits Bit 0: (UN) Up Normal Directional Limit Bit 4: (DN) Down Normal Directional Limit Bit 1: (UT) Up Terminal Slowdown Limit Bit 5: (DT) Down Terminal Slowdown Limit Bit 2: Bit 6: Bit 3: (DL) Down Door Zone Limit Bit 7: Nudg Flags (Nud): Door Nudging Flags Bit 0: (ngUP) Nudging Closed with Up Pilot Bit 1: (ngDP) Nudging Closed with Down Pilot Bit 2: (ngNP) Nudging Closed with No Pilot Bit 3: Bit 4: (rngUP) Rear Nudging Closed with UP Bit 5: (rngDP) Rear Nudging Closed with Down Bit 6: (rngNP) Rear Nudging Closed with No Pilot Bit 7: Door Req (DRq): Door Request Flags Bit 0: (doRQ) Front Door Open Request Bit 1: (dbRQ) Front Door Open Button Request Bit 2: (cdRQ) Front Car Call Door Open Request Bit 3: (doEN) Front Door Open Enable Bit 4: (rdoRQ) Rear Door Open Request Bit 5: (rdbRQ) Rear Door Open Button Request Bit 6: (rcdRQ) Rear Car Call Door Open Request Bit 7: (rdoEN) Rear Door Open Enable Call Flags (CFg): Onward Call Flags Bit 0: (dcAB) Directional Call Above Bit 1: (dcBL) Directional Call Below Bit 2: (owcAB) Onward Call Above Bit 3: (owcBL) Onward Call Below Bit 4: (occAB) Onward Car Call Above Bit 5: (occBL) Onward Car Call Below Bit 6: (ohcAB) Onward Hall Call Above Bit 7: (ohcBL) Onward Hall Call Below GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-109 CkRunS: Check Run Status State 0 = No Run Op 17 = Door Request 1 = HW Learn Flt 18 = Door Open 2 = PAL Fault 19 = Door Closing 3 = Comm Error 20 = PreTq NewPref 4 = IO Test 21 = DC No DO Seq 5 = Norm Stop Tmr 22 = UC No DO Seq 6 = ATT No DC CC 23 = LC No DO Seq 7 = ATT No UP/DN 24 = RDC No DO Seq 8 = ATT No DClose 25 = RUC No DO Seq 9 = No ATT UP 26 = Viscosity 10 = No ATT No DC 27 = Relevel Req 11 = CarSw No DC 28 = No Calls 12 = CarSw DC Hold 29 = Earthquake 13 = Man Door Time 30 = No DCl 14 = SafeTest Year 31 = No Rear DCL 15 = SafeTst Month 32 = No SAFE 16 = SafeTest Day 33 = Running CkStS: Check Start Status State 0 = No Start Op 20 = SUF Fail Off 1 = CCF Off Up 21 = SUF On w/SU 2 = CPU UN Off 22 = Run Up 3 = FSTU Fail On 23 = CPU DN Off 4 = SPD Failed On 24 = FSTD Fail On 5 = MC Failed On 25 = RUND Fail On 6 = MC Failed Off 26 = RUND Fail Off 7 = SPD Fail Off 27 = CPU Out On Dn 8 = RUNU Fail On 28 = CCF On w/RunD 9 = RUNU Fail Off 29 = NTS Out On Dn 10 = CPU Out On Up 30 = NTS DN Off 11 = CCF On w/RunU 31 = SD Failed On 12 = NTS Out On Up 32 = CPU DT Off 12 = NTS UN Off 33 = NTS DT Off 14 = SU Failed On 34 = SDF Failed On 15 = CPU UT Off 35 = SD Failed Off 16 = NTS UT Off 36 = CCF On w/SD 17 = SUF Failed On 37 = SDF Fail Off 18 = SU Failed Off 38 = SDF On/W SD 19 = CCF On w/SU 39 = RUN Down GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-110 CkLevS: Check Level Start Status State 0 = No Level Op 10 = Level Up 1 = CPU UN Off 11 = CPU DN Off 2 = MC Failed Off 12 = RUND Fail On 3 = SPD Fail Off 13 = RUND Fail Off 4 = RUNU Fail On 14 = CPU Out On Dn 5 = RUNU Fail Off 15 = NTS DN Off 6 = CPU Out On Up 16 = SD Failed Off 7 = NTS UN Off 17 = SDF Failed On 8 = SU Failed Off 18 = Level Down 9 = SUF Failed On CkDrS: Check Door Status State 0 = No Door Op 21 = At Floor Chk 1 = Fire Door 22 = Front DPM 2 = Med Em Svc 23 = Rear DPM 3 = EAQ Door Open 24 = CodeBlue RCL 4 = EMP Wait DC 25 = CodeBlue Svc 5 = EMP Home DO 26 = VIP Recall 6 = EMP Home DC 27 = VIP Service 7 = EMP RCL Door 28 = Independent 8 = Stall Op Door 29 = Overload 9 = Hot Oil Door 30 = Elevator Off 10 = MedEm RCL @Fl 31 = Prison Svc 11 = MedEm RCL 32 = Push Button 12 = MedEm Wait Sw 33 = Attendant 13 = MedEm Svc Op 34 = Extended Door 14 = Hospital Svc 35 = Sabbath 15 = CB Ovr FS RCL 36 = RTL Door Cl 16 = CB Ovr FS Svc 37 = Lobby Recall 17 = F1 Recall @FL 38 = Car Elev Off 18 = F1 Recall 39 = HW Elev Off 19 = F1 Complete 40 = Automatic 20 = F1 or F2 GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-111 Front SD (FSd): Front Slowdown Flags Bit 0: (UC) Up Hall Call Slowdown Bit 8: (IU) IR Up Hall Call Slowdown Bit 1: (DC) Down Hall Call Slowdown Bit 9: (ID) IR Down Hall Call Slowdown Bit 2: (CC) Car Call Slowdown Bit 10: Bit 3: Bit 11: Bit 4: (UD) Up Call Door Open Request Bit 12: Bit 5: (DD) Down Call Door Open Request Bit 13: Bit 6: (CD) Car Call Door Open Request Bit 14: Bit 7: Bit 15: Rear SD (RSd): Rear Slowdown Flags Bit 0: (UC) Up Hall Call Slowdown Bit 8: (IU) IR Up Hall Call Slowdown Bit 1: (DC) Down Hall Call Slowdown Bit 9: (ID) IR Down Hall Call Slowdown Bit 2: (CC) Car Call Slowdown Bit 10: Bit 3: Bit 11: Bit 4: (UD) Up Call Door Open Request Bit 12: Bit 5: (DD) Down Call Door Open Request Bit 13: Bit 6: (CD) Car Call Door Open Request Bit 14: Bit 7: Bit 15: Motion Tmr: Motion Timer – Timer while the car is in or attempting motion. 100 msec PAL Stat: Safety PAL Status Bit 0: PAL Fault Bit 4: NTS Speed >= 75 fpm Bit 1: Test Mode Jumper Bit 5: NTS Speed >= 150 fpm Bit 2: Rear Door Jumper Bit 6: NTS Selector OK Bit 3: NTS Fault Bit 7: NTS Door Zone Inspect Svc: Inspection Service 0 = Invalid Inspection Input 1 = Car Top Inspection 2 = Machine Room Inspection 3 = Access Inspection 4 = In-Car Inspection 5 = Car Top Inspection Lock Bypass 6 = Car Top Inspection Gate Bypass 7 = Car Top Inspection Gate and Lock Bypass % Load: Percent Load Calculated load value from the load weigher GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-112 6.3.1 Detailed Fault I/O Data Example The data in the I/O block is read from left to right with the left-most bit being the MSB (Most Significant Bit) and the right-most bit being the LSB (Least Significant Bit). Each bit represents the state (on or off) of the corresponding I/O. The table below provides the HEX number and the associated Binary number. CONVERSION TABLE HEX BINARY DECIMAL 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 2 0 0 1 0 2 3 0 0 1 1 3 4 0 1 0 0 4 5 0 1 0 1 5 6 0 1 1 0 6 7 0 1 1 1 7 8 1 0 0 0 8 9 1 0 0 1 9 A 1 0 1 0 10 B 1 0 1 1 11 C 1 1 0 0 12 D 1 1 0 1 13 E 1 1 1 0 14 F 1 1 1 1 15 GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-113 The example below shows how to interpret the detailed fault data for the I/O blocks. Given that IO0 is a value of “D1” hex. Place the “D” in the first hex value block and then the “1” in the second hex value block. Follow the red arrows below. Go to the next diagram to convert the inputs to binary. HEX BINARY 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 3 0 0 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 5 0 1 0 1 6 0 1 1 0 7 0 1 1 1 8 1 0 0 0 9 1 0 0 1 A 1 0 1 0 B 1 0 1 1 C 1 1 0 0 D 1 1 0 1 E 1 1 1 0 F 1 1 1 1 I/O BLOCK IO0 HEX VALUE D 1 BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off I/O NAME SDi SD SDF SDFi SUi SU SUFi SUF GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-114 Place the Binary value for D (1101) in the first four bit locations and then place the binary value for 1 (0001) in the last four bit locations. HEX BINARY 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 3 0 0 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 5 0 1 0 1 6 0 1 1 0 7 0 1 1 1 8 1 0 0 0 9 1 0 0 1 A 1 0 1 0 B 1 0 1 1 C 1 1 0 0 D 1 1 0 1 E 1 1 1 0 F 1 1 1 1 I/O BLOCK IO0 HEX VALUE D 1 BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off 1 1 O 1 0 0 0 1 I/O NAME SDi SD SDF SDFi SUi SU SUFi SUF GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-115 6.3.2 Detailed Fault I/O Data Form I/O BLOCK IO0 HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME SDi SD SDFi SDF SUi SU SUFi SUF I/O BLOCK IO1 HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME TPH TPL LOS LPS RUNi RUN I/O BLOCK IO2 HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME TAD TAU BAD BAU TSD HSS GOV I/O BLOCK IO3 HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME RLM-1 RLM DLT-1 DLT DLM-1 DLM DLB-1 DLB I/O BLOCK IO4 HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME DNi DTi UTi UNi RDOOR TSTM PALF NTSF GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-116 I/O BLOCK IO5 HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME SP150 SP75 HWLRN SELOK DZp DLled DZled ULled I/O BLOCK IO6 HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME STE CFLT SPD MTO MCi MC I/O BLOCK IO7 HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME ID IU INS CST L120B L120 S10 I/O BLOCK IO8 HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME RGS-1 RGS GS-1 GS ACC ICI ICA IEN I/O BLOCK IO9 HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME MRSW MRID MRIE MRIU MRIN AUTO GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-117 I/O BLOCK IOA HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME GBP LBP IND AD I/O BLOCK IOB HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME DTc DNc UTc UNc DLc DZAc DZc ULc I/O BLOCK IOC HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME I/O BLOCK IOD HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-118 I/O BLOCK IOE HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME HWS MRS ALT MES FSX BP FS FEP I/O BLOCK IOF HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME EMP EPT EPS HWS2 I/O BLOCK IOG HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME HWSET FFS DETR FSTi CTS EXT DET CSS I/O BLOCK IOH HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME FSTP FST CDL DUL FAN LIG IFB IFL I/O BLOCK IOI HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-119 I/O BLOCK IOJ HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME I/O BLOCK IOK HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME I/O BLOCK IOL HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME I/O BLOCK IOM HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME I/O BLOCK ION HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-120 I/O BLOCK IOO HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME SE DCL DOL EE DPM I/O BLOCK IOP HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME RVD REV DO HVD DC NUD I/O BLOCK IOQ HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME INDC* ALM* DOB DCB FS2C FS2H FS2OF I/O BLOCK IOR HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME 8C 7C 6C 5C 4C 3C 2C 1C I/O BLOCK IOS HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME SER DCLR DOLR EER RPM GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 6 – Main CPU Faults & Detailed Faults 6-121 I/O BLOCK IOT HEX VALUE BINARY Inputs 0=OFF 1=ON Outputs 0=On 1=Off MSB LSB I/O NAME RVDR REVR DOR HVDR DCR NUDR Note: I/O location depends on specific job. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-1 Section 7 - Main CPU Adjustable Variables This section includes all the CPU Adjustable Variables as well as the NTS Adjustable Variables , and the Velocity Slowdown Table. Table 7-1: Car Motion Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description Acc DT Dist 0 120 24 inches Access DT Distance. Distance from DT limit for the bottom access limit to be software activated. The controller counts pulses from the DT limit. Acc UT Dist 0 120 24 inches Access UT Distance. Distance from UT limit for the top access limit to be software activated. The controller counts pulses from the UT limit. APS Dead Zone 0.1 0.5 0.25 inches APS Selector Dead Zone. This is the distance that the car can move without calling for a relevel. High Spd Ins 0 1 0 - High Speed Inspection. Set to run car on high speed while on inspection. Preopen Delay 0 3200 0.5 sec Preopen Delay. Delay time to preopen the door starting from when the car reaches 3 inches from dead level and the door can safely be opened. Short Fl hsf 0 1 0 - Short Floor hsf (high speed flag) with no high speed valve. Controller makes a run but only with one valve. 0=HS Output 1=No HS Out ShortFl Cntrl 0 7 0 - Short Floor Control. 0 = Default is that the car relevels to the short floor. +1 = Car will make a run between very short floors instead of re- leveling. +2 = Short floor slowdown magnets between short floors (non-distance feedback). +4 = Mid Short floor slowdown magnets between short floors (non-distance feedback). GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-2 Table 7-1: Car Motion Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description Shrt Fl Dn SD 0 30 0 sec Short Floor Down Slowdown. Hydro - There are no slow down magnets between short floors. This is a timer to run down high speed in seconds. If the timer is set to zero, controller will immediately level looking for the other zone. This parameter should only be used if second selector is utilized. Shrt Fl Up SD 0 30 0 sec Short Floor Up Slowdown. Hydro - There are no slow down magnets between short floors. This is a timer to run up high speed in seconds. If the timer is set to zero, controller will immediately level looking for the other zone. This parameter should only be used if second selector is utilized. ShrtMidF DnSD 0 30 0 sec Short Mid Floor Down Slowdown. Hydro - To be used in second and higher short floor. There are no slow down magnets between short floors. This is a timer to run down high speed in seconds. If the timer is set to zero, controller will immediately level looking for the other zone. This parameter should only be used if second selector is utilized. ShrtMidF UpSD 0 30 0 sec Short Mid Floor Up Slowdown. Hydro - To be used in second and higher short floor. There are no slow down magnets between short floors. This is a timer to run up high speed in seconds. If the timer is set to zero, controller will immediately level looking for the other zone. This parameter should only be used if second selector is utilized. Soft Stop Tim 0.2 5 1 sec Soft Stop Time. The time the motor is kept running after the valve is turned off. StopOn PosCnt 0 1 0 - Stop On Position Count. Enable to stop the elevator on position pulse count. Used only for tapeless application. This requires cons file setting to be enabled and readjustment of leveling sensors for it to work. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-3 Table 7-2: Car Timers Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description AdvDoor EnTim 0 240 0 sec Advanced Door Enable Time. Door open advance enable time to open the opposite door when operating with non-simultaneous doors. If there is a request for both doors, instead of waiting for the first open door to close completely before opening the second door, the second door starts to open after the advance door enable time while the first door is closing. Att Buz Delay 0 900 60 sec Attendant Buzzer Delay. Buzzer sounds if a hall call is entered and the car has not started moving within this delay time. This function is disabled when set to zero. AttBuz On Tim 1 30 5 sec Attendant Buzzer On Time. Cycle on timer to turn attendant buzzer on and off once attendant delay time function has been met (See ATTBuz Delay). AttBuzOff Tim 0 30 0 sec Attendant Buzzer Off Time. Cycle off time to turn attendant buzzer on and off once attendant delay time function has been met (See ATT Buz Delay). Buzzer will stay on continuously if this timer set to zero. AutoSwg DODly 0 10 1 sec Auto Swing Door Open Delay. Delay time to enable the auto swing door open output. CB Door Time 1 3200 60 sec Code Blue Door Time. Door time for Code Blue operation once elevator is at the emergency floor before EMS is energized CC Dwell 1 60 2 sec Car Call Dwell. Door open dwell time when answering a car call only. Chime on CC T 0.1 2 0.2 sec Chime on Car Call Time. Handicap buzzer on CC. Length of beep time. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-4 Table 7-2: Car Timers Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description CL Pulse Time 0 320 5 sec Car Lantern Pulse Time Door Dly Time 0 1.5 0 sec Door Delay Time. Delay time between DO and DC to switch when opening or closing the door. Door Fail Tim 10 3200 25 sec Door Fail Time. Time with power on the door without getting the door open limit. EE Test Time 0 2 0.2 sec Electric Eye Test for Automatic Freight Doors EE Time-out 0 3200 40 sec Electric Eye Time-out Time. If the Electric Eye or detector edge is on continuously for this amount of time, it will be flagged as timed-out and the controller will ignore the EE input and close the door on nudging. When set to zero, this feature is disabled. F1 DC Tim-out 10 60 20 sec Fire phase 1 Door Close Time-out. The amount of time it will take before the car doors start to close while the car is on Independent or Attendant service prior to recalling the elevator on Fire Phase 1. Fault Time 0 10 2 sec Fault Time. Delay time before allowing the car to run after a fault occurs. FR DC Tim-out 1 3200 1 sec Freight Door Close Time-out. The amount of time prior to closing the doors on automatic freight door operation. FR Pwr DO Tim 0 30 1 sec Freight Door Power Door Open Time. The amount of time to turn on the power door open relay on automatic freight door operation. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-5 Table 7-2: Car Timers Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description Hall Lant Dly 0 15 0 sec Hall Lantern Delay Time. By default, when set to zero, hall lanterns go off as soon as the car starts to slow down to arrive at a floor. When set to a nonzero value, this will be used as a timer for the hall lantern to go off prior to arriving at the floor. For example, if set to three seconds, hall lanterns will turn on approximately three seconds before the car arrives to the floor regardless of the speed of the car. We recommend to set this parameter for high speed cars. Handicap Dwll 1 120 25 sec Handicap Dwell. Extended door time from pressing the ED button in the car. HC Dwell 1 60 4 sec Hall Call Dwell. Door open dwell time when answering a hall call or both a hall and car call. HEOF AutoRstT 0 3200 0 sec HEOF Auto Reset Time. When the hall elevator off function is activated from the HEOF input being turned on, the car will be taken out of service until the input is turned off. Once the input is off, the car will stay out of service until the auto reset timer times out. IND Rcl2Lby T 10 60 20 sec Independent Recall to Lobby Timer. Recall delay for car in Independent when 'IND Rcl to Lby ' is set. Lant Off Time 0 2 0.2 sec Lantern Off Time. Used for double stroke gongs. The lantern off time is the delay time after the lantern first turns on until it turns off. Lant On Time 0 2 0.7 sec Lantern On Time. Used for double stroke gongs. The lantern will turn on, turn off and then turn on again. The Lantern on time is the delay time from when the lantern first turns on until it turns on the second time. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-6 Table 7-2: Car Timers Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description Lobby Dwell 1 60 5 sec Lobby Dwell. Door open dwell time for a car at the lobby. Lt/Fan Time 30 3200 360 sec Generator Run/Cab Light/Fan Time. Length of time to leave the generator running or the Cab light and fan on after there is no longer a demand to run. ManDo Buz Dly 0 900 0 sec Manual Door Buzzer Delay. On a car with manual doors, sound the buzzer if the door is left open and a call is entered after this time delay. This function is disabled when set to zero. Mx Door Hld T 0 3200 0 sec Maximum Door Hold Time. Maximum time to be allowed when the extended dwelling input (ED) is pressed. If set to zero, there will be no limit on how long the car will be held on ED. When set to a value, this will be the maximum allowed time for the car to be held by ED input, then car will go on regular dwelling timers (car or hall call dwelling timers) NonInterfer T 1 60 2 sec Non-Interference Time. Time between when you stop and when you can run again. Nudging Time 20 3200 60 sec Nudging Time. Delay time for a door to be held before going into nudging. OSER BtwFlr T 0 900 60 sec Out of Service Between Floors Time. Timer to control the OSERL output. Used with OSERL Control option 1 for 'between floors for over a minute' set to 2. OSER NoCall T 0 900 600 sec Out of Service Not Responding to Calls Time. Timer to control the OSERL output. Used with OSERL Control option 1 for 'not responding to calls' set to 1. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-7 Table 7-2: Car Timers Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description OSER SSopen T 0 900 60 sec Out of Service Safety String Open Time. Time to control the OSERL output. Used with OSERL control option 1 for ' SS open' set to 4. Pas Chime Tim 0.2 2 0.5 sec Floor Passing Chime Time. Length of time the floor passing chime will sound when a floor is passed. RC Pick Delay 0 7 0 sec Retiring Cam Pick Delay. The amount of delay time for the retiring cam to pick once the doors are closed. RCDrop Fail T 0.5 5.5 0.5 sec Retiring Cam Drop Fail Time. Retiring cam drop fail safe delay for manual doors. Delay time when car arrives to the floor before it drops the output. Relev Dly Tim 0 2 1 sec Relevel Delay Time. The amount of delay time before the car will re-level. This would be used for jobs that have excessive rope stretch. Reset Time 0 10 5 sec Reset Time. Delay time in the reset mode before allowing the car to run. RTL Dwell Tim 1 60 8 sec Return To Lobby Dwell Time. If Return To Lobby is set to cycle doors at the lobby, use this timer to control how long they will dwell before closing in return to lobby mode. Run Cycle Tim 0 300 0 hours Run Cycle Time. Used to initiate a run when the elevator has been sitting idle for a period of time. Used for jobs that have high friction bearing machines. Sabb Buzz Dly 1 10 5 sec Sabbath Door Buzzer Timer (prior to doors closing). Jobs where the light curtain is disabled in Sabbath operation require a buzzer prior to the door closing sequence. This timer warns people the light curtains are about to be enabled (output name: SABUZ) GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-8 Table 7-2: Car Timers Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description Sabbath Dwell 1 60 10 sec Sabbath Door Dwell Time. Car will wait this amount of time on every floor for Sabbath operation except at the lobby where it will follow the handicap dwell door time (separate timer). Sec Dis Time 0 3200 0 sec Security Disable Time. This timer is used with a security disable input button at the lobby. When the button is pressed, the car call security is disabled for the time value set from this parameter. Shrt Dwll Tim 0 60 1 sec Short Door Dwell Time. Door open dwell time when the doors re-open on a door open button, electric eye, safety edge or door hold button. Shutdn Alrm T 5 1500 120 sec Shutdown Alarm Timer. Stall Time 20 3200 60 sec Stall Time. Maximum time a run is requested but the car is not moving. VIP Door Time 1 3200 20 sec VIP Door Time. The amount of time the car will park at the VIP recall floor prior to going to automatic service. Y Delta Time 1 5 1.5 sec Y-Delta Time. Transfer time to change motor from Y start to Delta run. Timer also used for DEL or MCX turn on time with controllers without y-delta starters. Table 7-3: Car Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units 2nd Risr Lant 0 1 0 - Second Riser Lantern. Turn on cab lantern only when IR call answered. If this parameter is set cab lanterns will only turn on when answering second riser calls. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-9 Table 7-3: Car Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Arrival Lant 0 1 0 - Arrival Lantern. 1 = Activate lant/gong without onward call Behnd CC Canc 0 1 0 - Behind Car Call Cancel. When enabled the elevator will not latch any car calls in the opposite direction of travel. Cab Lant Ctrl 0 2 0 - Cab Lantern Control. The default is for the cab lanterns to go off when the door is fully open. This allows the cab lanterns to go off earlier. +1 = Ring cab lanterns as soon as door starts to open +2 = Ring the cab lanterns when the door reaches DPM point. ClGate NoPref 0 1 0 - Close Gate (Swing Door) When No Onward Preference. The gate on a swing door normally stays open until a call is placed. This bit causes the gate to close while the car is sitting at the floor. COP/Remote CC 0 7 0 - COP/Remote Car Call Select. 0 = Both COP and Remote Car Call Station used to enter calls. 1 = Separate: COP only or Remote CC only used to enter car calls. +2 = C-R: Car calls entered on the COP sets the acknowledgment light on the Remote station. +4 = R-C: Car calls entered on the Remote station sets the acknowledgment light on the COP. COP/RM Dis 0 14 0 - COP/Remote Disable. +1 = Up Direction Disable COP, +2 = Down Direction Disable COP, +4 = Up Direction Disable Remote Panel, +8 = Down Direction Disable Remote Panel DCB Canc Dwll 0 1 0 - Door Close Button Cancel Dwell Time. When this parameter is set to 1 we do not allow DCB to cancel the door dwell time. This basically disables DCB to shorten door dwell time. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-10 Table 7-3: Car Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units DO No ActvDOL 0 1 0 - Door Open Output When No Active DOL. When the door is fully open and hits the DOL, the DO is turned off and stays off even if the door drifts off of DOL. With this bit set, the DO output will turn on any time the DOL is lost. DOB Over Nudg 0 1 0 - DOB Over Nudging. If set, the door open button will open the door when the door is nudging closed. DoorOpenL Ctl 0 16 0 - Door Open Light Control. The way 'DoorOpenL Ctrl' parameter works is as below: +1 = Set OPENL on phase 1 completed +2 = Set OPENL on RTL return to lobby +4 = Set OPENL on emp returned home with doors open, also sets OPENL on emp and selected to run +8 = Set OPENL on when Lobby Floor +16 = Set OPENL all the time Double Stroke 0 1 1 - Double Stroke Gong Selection. Select 1 or 2 gongs for down hall calls. 0 = 1 gong 1 = 2 gongs. EE Canc Dwell 0 1 0 - Electric Eye Cancel Dwell. By turning this parameter on you disable the short dwelling door time from the electric eye signal (EE). By default the short dwelling time is enabled. Handcap T Flr Bottom Floor Top Floor 1 floor Handicap Time Floor. If the job is configured to have an extended door input at a hall station, this parameter configures the floor number when parameter will change door timing. It will operate for EDHL only HB/PI DisNoFl 0 1 0 - Handicap Buzzer/PI Display Control. When set to 1, do not sound HB or update floor PI when passing an invalid floor. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-11 Table 7-3: Car Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Invert CLF 0 1 1 - Invert The Logic For The Car Light Fan. If set to 0 car light fan is normally open. If set to 1 car light fan is normally closed. Invert LOS 0 1 0 - Invert Low Oil Switch (LOS) Invert LPS 0 1 0 - Invert Low Pressure Switch (LPS) Invert TPL 0 1 0 - Invert Temperature Low Switch (TPL) ISER Outp Ctl 0 7 0 - Invert In Service Output. 1 = The in service light output is turned off when the car is in service instead of turned on. 2 = The ISER output will function as an elevator in use light. 4 = This output functions as out of service from a shutdown and does not include independent, inspection or recovery mode. Lant Pref Dly 0 3 0 sec Lantern Preference Change Delay. When the direction preference for the elevator changes, we clear the lanterns and wait for this amount of time before the lanterns are turned on again. LbyLan NCU/IR 0 1 0 - Lobby Lantern NCU/IR. 0 = Light the lanterns on IR service at each floor. The lantern will not light at the lobby if next up operation is selected because the IR car will not be selected to be the next up car. 1 = The IR car will light the lantern at all the floors and the lobby even with the system on next up operation. Min Door T En 0 1 0 - Minimum Door Time Enable. 0 = Disabled 1 = The minimum door time for a car call or a hall call is set from the car or hall call dwell timers and cannot be shortened by the Door Close button. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-12 Table 7-3: Car Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units NCU Lant Ctrl 0 3 0 - Next Up Direction Lantern Control. +1 = Turn off hall lantern after next up time. +2 = Turn off cab lantern after next up time. NCU Pref Ctrl 0 1 0 - Next Up Preference Control. When set allows direction preference to change before the door starts to close after the next up door time. NoHC Dor Reop 0 3 0 - No Hall Call Button Door Reopen. When set do not reopen the door from an at floor hall call. Non-Simul Dor 0 2 0 - Non-Simultaneous Doors. 0 = Both front and rear doors will open at the same time if there is a demand at both the front and rear openings. 1 = The front doors will open first before the rear doors open if there is a demand to open. 2 = The rear doors will open first before the front doors open if there is a demand to open. Nudg No Calls 0 1 0 - Nudge with No Calls. If set the doors will close on nudging even if the elevator has no onward calls. Nudge Dis Ctl 0 7 0 - Nudging Disable Control. +1 = Do not turn on the NUD output when doors are in nudging close mode, basically you are disabling nudging output. +2 = When doors are in nudging close mode and SE input is ON, keep doors open and also keep FB/NB output latched. +4 = Sound the nudging buzzer but do not close the doors on nudging. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-13 Table 7-3: Car Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units OSERL OutCtl1 0 7 0 - Out of Service Light Control. +1 = Not responding to calls; +2 = Between floors for over a minute +4 = SS open. When this parameter as well as OSERL OutCtrl 2 is set to zero, the output will just operate as an Out of service light. OSERL OutCtl2 0 1 0 - Out of Service Light Control. + 1= Alarm. When this parameter as well as OSERL OutCtrl 2 is set to zero, the output will just operate as an Out of service light. Preopen Doors 0 3 0 - Preopen Doors. +1 = Will enable preopening of the doors. If retiring cam used with auto door, RCM will also turn on at the preopening point. +2 = Exclude short floors. RCF Output En 0 1 0 - Retiring Cam for Freight Output Enable. When you turn on this parameter a retiring cam output will be created in the controller, RCF, that mirrors the signal from RCM. You need to reboot CPU every time you change this parameter for change to take effect. RCM Control 0 3 0 - Retiring Cam Control. 1 = Hold the retiring cam up at the floor if there is no pilot to open the door (manual doors). The retiring cam will drop after 5 minutes. 2 = RCM output turns on when DZ hit to advance the RCM ahead of the door open (auto door with retiring cam) otherwise the default is that RCM turns on when dead level. If preopening is set RCM and DO turn on when DZ hit. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-14 Table 7-4: Service Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Acc Door Cls 0 1 0 - Access Door Close. When on access operation the car runs with the Door Lock and GS open. By turning this parameter on, the car needs to have the gate switch signal ON in order to run. It should be used on hoistways where the car door will physically hit something if moved on access operation Access Bot Fl Bottom Floor Top Floor 1 floor Access Bottom Floor. Floor for bottom access Access Top Fl Bottom Floor Top Floor 2 floor Access Top Floor. Floor for bottom access Att Buz ctrl 0 1 1 - Attendant Buzzer Control. 0 = Hall Calls only 1 = Hall Calls and Car Calls Att CC frm HC 0 1 0 - Attendant Car Call from Hall Call. 1 = When the car is on Attendant service the respective car call will register when a hall call is registered. CCPBS Grp Sec 0 1 0 - CCPBS On Group Car Call Security. This variable enables Car Call Push Button Security with group car call lockout switches. The configuration file (CONS) setting for security type and car call push button security must also be set. CCS on Sabb 0 1 0 - Car Call Security on Sabbath. When this parameter is enabled, sabbath car calls will not latch on floors that have been secured using car call lockouts security CEOF Cntrl 2 0 15 0 - Car Elevator Off Options 2: +1= Keep doors Closed (do not cycle on reversal), +2 = Do not blink Elevator Off Light, +4 = Elevator Off Auto Reset With Timer, +8 = Enable Elevator Off Light to indicate the car finished recall of elevator off mode GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-15 Table 7-4: Service Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units CEOF Control 0 7 0 - Car Elevator Off Options. +1 = Recall +2 = Keep Door Open +4 = Turn off CLF DOB Over Sec 0 5 0 - DOB Override Security. This parameter allows the car to open the door at a secured floor when the car is secured from the following conditions: 1 = The DOB will be allowed to open the door at any secured floor. 2 = The DOB can open the door at floors secured from group security floor mask table. 3 = Allows the DOB to open the front door at floors secured by car call lockout security (switches or card reader). 4 = Allows the DOB to open the rear door at floors secured from rear car call lockout security. 5 = Allows the DOB to open the door at floors locked out by group security floor mask tables when the car is also on independent. Door Hold Msg 0 1 0 - Door Hold Message. Set to enable Extended Door Time Message Indicator in CE Driver board ElevOff RetFl 0 Top Floor 0 floor Elevator Off Return Floor. Related to HEOF input. This setting is to be used in conjunction with 'Elev Off Ctl = +1'. If the elevator is configured to recall, this parameter will determine what floor the car should be recalled to in elevator off mode. if Parameter is set to zero, car will be returned to the Lobby. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-16 Table 7-4: Service Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Emer Dispatch 0 7 0 - Emergency Dispatch. This parameter is applied to both the car that is selected as the dispatcher and also the non-dispatcher cars. Dispatcher Car = If set to 1 and hall call power lost, the dispatcher car will set down hall calls above the lobby and up hall call at and below the lobby. Non-Dispatcher Cars = If set to a 1, and communications is lost to the dispatcher car, the car will dispatch itself to down hall calls above the lobby and up hall calls below the lobby. The front hall call and rear hall call bits settings are only used for the dispatcher car and when set, if communication is lost to a particular hall call board, hall calls are set for the affected floors. HC Ack Buz 0 1 0 - HC Acknowledge Attendant Buzzer. Buzz once (for one sec) every time a call comes in. 0 = Disable 1 = Enable HEOF Cntrl 2 0 15 0 - Hall Elevator Off Options 2. +1= Keep doors Closed (do not cycle) +2 = Do not blink HEOFL, +4 = Auto Reset when input off and timer expires. +8 = Use HEOFL to indicate car finished recall. HEOF Cntrl 3 0 1 0 - Hall Elevator Off Options 3. +1 = Only activate if doors are closed. See other Hall Elevator Off Options as well. HEOF Control 0 7 0 - Hall Elevator Off Control. +1 = Recall car when key switch activated. +2 = Keep door open at the shutdown floor. +4 = Allow the cab light and fan to time-out even though the door is open but the car is shut down. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-17 Table 7-4: Service Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units HEOF Override 0 3 0 - Hall Elevator off Override. 1= Override Independent Service after timer expires and then recall the car. 2 = Override Attendant Service after timer expires and then recall the car. IND DoorCl CC 0 1 0 - Independent Door Close Car Call. Enable to close the doors from a car call when the elevator is on Independent. Ind Over Sec 0 7 0 - Independent Overrides Security. 1 = Allow independent service to override security car call lockouts. 2 = Override Security Floor Mask configurations. 4 = Override remote car call station. IND Rcl 2 Lby 0 1 0 - Independent Recall to Lobby. Forces the car to recall to the lobby when on independent and no calls are made Ins Door Clos 0 1 0 - Inspection Door Close. 1 = The door close output will turn on when the up or down inspection run button is pressed. INSEC Out Ctl 0 1 0 - INSEC - In Security Output Invert. Output located on the car call security Board. 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Lobby Floor Bottom Floor Top Floor 1 floor Lobby Floor. LW Anti-nuisn 0 50 0 count Load Weighing Anti-Nuisance. Set to the maximum number of car calls that can been entered before all car calls are cancelled without the load switch LWA input on. Once the load switch is on, all car calls will stay latched. 0 = Disabled. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-18 Table 7-4: Service Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Manual Dir En 0 4 0 - Attendant Manual Direction Enable. 1 = Works in conjunction with the ATTUP and ATTDN to determine direction of travel. 2 = Reads the ATTUP input and use it as a START button. 4 = Will not allow car calls to be registered until the door is fully closed. No Psg RunCnt 0 10 0 count No Passenger Run Count. When set to a number other than zero, the car call antinuisance feature is activated. This count is the number of times the car will run from a car call without detecting that a passenger has broken the detector edge. Once the count is reached, all remaining car calls will be cancelled. PI Serv Msg 1 0 Max Service 0 Svc # PI Service Message 1. When the car service matches this number, user message 1 is sent to the PI display. This will correspond to user PI display message 17. PI Serv Msg 2 0 Max Service 0 Svc # PI Service Message 2. When the car service matches this number, user message 2 is sent to the PI display. This will correspond to user PI display message 18 PI Serv Msg 3 0 Max Service 0 Svc # Service Message 3 Display. Used for Custom messages. Need to be programmed by CE electronics and GAL for special messages Retrn To Lbby 0 7 0 - Return to Lobby Option. +1 = Cycle door at lobby, +2 = Cancel car calls when activated, +4 = Cycle door on reversal. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-19 Table 7-4: Service Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units RTL Door Sel 0 2 0 - Return To Lobby Door Select. This variable allow you to specify door open type on 'Return to Lobby' service. 0 = The car will open only front door 1 = The car will open only rear doors 2 = The car will open both front and rear Sabb Dis Ctl 0 7 0 - Sabbath Disable Control Variable. - Add all numbers of the features you want to disable while in Sabbath operation: +1 = PIs, +2 = Lanterns, +4 = Directional arrows Sabb En Ctl 0 7 0 - Sabbath Enable Control Variable. 0 = Disables all options. +1 = Allow IR momentarily to override Sabbath operation. +2 = Lobby Dwell time in Sabbath follows handicap door dwell time instead of the lobby dwell time. +4 = Wait until car is at lobby to turn off Sabbath operation Sabb En Ctl2 0 7 0 - Sabbath Enable control: +1 = When the car is placed on Sabbath operation, it waits to go to the lobby before switching to Sabbath Operation, +2 = Uses the cab lanterns as directional arrows. This allows people on the hall ways to know direction of travel for the elevator Sabbath Mode 0 1 0 - Sabbath Collective Mode. 0 = Down collective car calls 1 = Up collective car calls. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-20 Table 7-4: Service Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Sec ReasignCC 0 3 0 - Security Reassign Car Call. Re-assign secured car call to opposite door. Used with security configuration cons.dat file setting: cons[SecFlCfg] = 2. 0 = Disabled, +1 = In case front CC are secured, reassign them as rear, +2 = In case rear CC are secured, reassign them as front. Sec Recall 2 0 2 0 - Security Recall Control 2. 0 = Out of group on first recall. 1 = Out of group on all recalls. 2 = No out of group recalls. Security Flr 0 Top Floor 1 floor Security Floor. The security recall floor. This is the floor where the security guard would be stationed. This floor would not be locked out when on security. Security Rcl 0 15 0 - Security Recall Selection. 0 = No: No Recall, +1 = Recall to Security Floor on activation of security. +2 = Cycle front door once recalled to the Security Floor. +4 = Cycle rear door once recalled to the Security Floor. +8 = Always recall to security floor after each run. SR CCSec Dir 0 2 0 - Second Riser Car Call Security by Direction. Allows calls in the one direction but disables them in the other. 1 = Allow calls in the up direction (above the floor) but disable them going down, 2 = Allow calls in the down direction (below the floor) but disable then going up. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-21 Table 7-4: Service Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Stop At Lobby 0 15 0 - Stop at Lobby. 0 = do not automatically stop at lobby, +1 = The car will stop at the lobby when the car is traveling up and the car is below the lobby floor. +2 = The car will stop at the lobby when the car is traveling down and the car is above the lobby floor. +3 = The car will stop at the lobby when traveling in either direction. +4 = Stop at lobby with any onward call past the lobby. +8 = Recall to the lobby Svc Light Ctl 0 Max Service 0 Svc # Service Light Control. When the configuration file parameter cons[servOUT] is set to 1 or 2, the service output SERVO will turn on when the car service matches the car service number in this parameter. VIP Lant Ctrl 0 3 0 - VIP lantern Control. 0 = Do not ring lanterns on VIP, 1 = Ring up or down lantern at VIP floor when the door is fully open, 2 = Ring up or down lantern at VIP floor before the door is opened. VIP multicall 0 1 0 - VIP Multiple Calls. 0 = VIP feature works as single call 1 = The car will be allowed to make multiple VIP calls until no more car calls are entered and until the VIP sequence time-out timer is expired. VIP Operation 0 3 0 - VIP (Priority Call) Operation. +1 = Cancel hall call if no cars available for VIP call. +2 = Cancel car call upon initiation of being selected as the VIP car. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-22 Table 7-5: Emergency Services Field Variable Min Max Initial Units ALT Fire Flr Bottom Floor Top Floor 2 floor Alternate Fire Floor. AltRcl FS Off 0 3 0 - Alternate Floor Recall Fire Service Off. +1 = Have the elevator recall back to the alternate floor when the lobby fire switch is turned to the off position and car recalled to the main fire floor. +2 = Allows the car to return to the alternate landing even if sensor was reset Aux. Fire Sw 0 1 0 - Auxiliary Fire Switch. When set, the controller expects an auxiliary hall fire switch to be used. CB Buzz ctrl 0 1 0 - Code blue Buzzer Control. 1 = Turn buzzer on while in code blue recall CB over FS 0 1 0 - Code Blue over Fire Service. +1 Enable to have code blue prevent car from recalling in FS CB Over Ind 0 1 0 Code Blue Override Independent. 1 = Wait for timer to expire and then recall the car CB SingleCall 0 1 0 - Code Blue Single Car Call. 0 = Car on Code Blue operation allows multiple car calls on Hospital Service. 1 = Allow only a single call once place on Hospital Service. ClDoor F1 Rcl 0 1 0 - Close Door After Fire phase 1 Recall. 1 = Elevator will close the doors after phase 1 recall and reopen from a hall call (Denver Fire service amendment) Em Pwr Floor Bottom Floor Top Floor 1 floor Emergency Power Recall Floor. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-23 Table 7-5: Emergency Services Field Variable Min Max Initial Units EMS/HSafterCB 0 1 0 - EMS (Emergency Medical Service)/HS(Hospital Service) after Code Blue. This is a Code Blue bypass control. 0 = Car goes from Auto to Hospital service, bypassing the code blue sequence, when EMS switch is turned on. 1 = Hospital service only activates after a code blue recall. F1 DC Tim-out 10 60 20 sec Fire Phase 1 Door Close Time-out. The amount of time it will take before the car doors start to close while the car is on Independent or Attendant service prior to recalling the elevator on Fire Phase 1. F1 Door Dwell 1 90 60 sec Fire Phase 1 Door Dwell time. Fire Service Phase one complete dwell time when 'Cl Door F1 Rcl' parameter is set. (Denver FS phase1 dwell time) F2 STP Recovr 0 1 0 - Fire Service Phase 2 Recovery. After special device that prevents the car from running up has been activated. These devices are the Low Oil Switch, Hot Oil Switch, and battery backup lowering. Hydro Only F2DOB ovr DCB 0 1 0 - Fire Phase 2 Door Open Button Overrides the Door Close Button. 1 = Allows Door Open Button will override Door Close Button on phase 2. Fire Main Flr Bottom Floor Top Floor 1 floor Fire Main Floor Fire Option 0 3 0 - Fire Option. Recall Reset Selection: 0 = Reset fire service phase 1 after hall switch is turned off and car returns to fire floor. 1 = Reset phase 1 immediately after hall switch is turned off. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-24 Table 7-5: Emergency Services Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Fire Option 2 0 3 1 - Fire Option 2. +1 = Initiate a phase 2 recall only when the door is open (Chicago fire). +2 = Disable flashing FL on phase 2 (Chicago fire). Fire Sw Loc 0 4 0 - Fire Switch Location. Location of fire hall switch. 0 = Main/Alt Front, 1 = Main Rear/Alt Front, 2 = Main Front/Alt Rear, 3 = Main/Alt Rear, 4 = Set from Dispatcher Car selection. FireL Em Pwr 0 1 1 - Fire Light Control During Emergency Power. Enable to cause the fire light FL to turn off if the car is not selected to run. FireL OTS Ret 0 1 0 - Fire light Control for Out of Service Cars. Enabling this parameter will turn off the fire light in the event the car cannot recall for being out of service. It could be in Earthquake, low oil, stall, etc. Flash CBLight 0 1 0 - Flash Code Blue Light. When set to 1 the code blue light inside the car station will flash. Hall Fire Lt 0 4 0 - Hall Fire Light. The variable controls the FLH output on the controller so it can be used for a hall fire light or a fire security override. The default operation is that FLH turns on while the car is on phase 1 or phase 2 fire service. +1 = On while phase 1 is in effect, +2 = Flash FLH at 1 second intervals while activated, +4 = FLH follows the Fire Light (FL) logic. Hoistw FirRet 0 1 0 - Hoistway Fire Sensor Return Floor Selection. 0 = Return to the Main fire floor, 1 = Return to the Alternate fire floor. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-25 Table 7-5: Emergency Services Field Variable Min Max Initial Units HSV DoorCl CC 0 1 0 - Hospital Service Close door Car Call. Close the doors from a car call when the car is on Hospital Service. HWS2 Fire Loc 0 1 50 - Fire Service Hoistway HWS2 Sensor Location . 0 = Same HW 1 = Separate hoistway HWS2 Fire Ret 0 1 0 - Second Hoistway Fire Service Sensor Return Option. 0 = Main recall floor 1 = Alternate recall floor. MachRm FirRet 0 1 0 - Machine Room Fire Sensor Return Floor Selection. 0 = Return to the Main fire floor, 1 = Return to the Alternate fire floor. Med CCS Ovrrd 0 1 0 - Medical Service Override Car Call Security. 1 = Medical service car will override car call security. Med Em Floor Bottom Floor Top Floor 1 floor Medical Emergency Return floor. Med Em Sw Loc 0 1 0 - Medical Emergency Switch Location. Selects the switch location for the front or rear door. 0 = Front 1 = Rear MedDoorReopen 0 2 0 - Medical service Door Reopen. When car is on medical Service, this parameter determines the door open sequence for re-open: 0 = Stop, 1 = Constant pressure, 2 = Momentary to DOL MedInd Ovrrid 0 2 0 - Medical Service Overrides Independent Control: 0 = Immediate, 1 = After Delay, 2 = No override GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-26 Table 7-5: Emergency Services Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Rcl frm F1Alt 0 1 0 - Recall From Fire Phase 1 Alternate floor. If the car has returned to the alternate floor from a smoke sensor and when two fire hall switch are used, both must be on to recall the car from the alternate floor to the main floor. 1 = The car will recall from the alternate floor to the main floor from either hall fire key switch. (set to 1 for Mass. fire service.) Recall Reset 0 3 0 - Recall Reset Selection. 0 = Reset fire service phase 1 after hall switch cycled through reset and turned off and car returns to fire floor. 1 = Reset phase 1 immediately after hall switch is cycled through reset and then turned off. 2 = Reset fire service without cycling fire switch through reset but turned off only if the smoke sensors were not activated. Recall Reset2 0 1 0 - Recall Reset Selection 2: 0 = Reset fire service phase 1 with car at any floor. 1 = Reset phase 1 only if car at fire recall floor. Table 7-6: Group Dispatch Field Variable Min Max Initial Alt Lbby Flr 1 Top Floor 1 Alternate Lobby Floor. Galaxy groups can be configured to have an alternate lobby. Switching between regular lobby and alternate lobby can be done by means of liftnet, Galileo, controller input or service timer. Once the alternate lobby is enabled, controllers will use this landing as the lobby floor for all dispatching purposes. Alt Parkin Fl 1 Top Floor 1 Alternate Parking Floor. Normally, during parking operation, one elevator is always parked at the lobby. With alternate parking floor operation, a free car is parked at the alternate parking floor instead of the lobby floor. This operation is controlled by an input or from a service timer. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-27 Table 7-6: Group Dispatch Field Variable Min Max Initial Asgn ParkF DO 0 1 0 Assign Parking Floor with Door Open. By default, we only park cars that have the doors closed after a time delay. This parameters allows to re-assign parking to cars with doors open as long as they do not have a direction to run. AutoSVC tot T 10 3200 120 Auto Service Time Out Time. This time, in seconds, is used in conjunction with 'Auto SVC tm-out' and is the amount of time that the group will wait before setting a 'not moving/responding' car as timed out. AutoSVC T-out 0 1 0 Auto Service Time-out. 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable When this parameter is enabled and 'Auto SVC tot TM' parameter time is set accordingly, each car is checked for answering assigned hall calls. If the car does not move to answer calls in the required time, it is put into AST service. Hall calls that are assigned to that car are reassigned to working cars in the group. The group then periodically assigns hall calls to the AST car to verify if it can be put back into the group for normal operation. Dis Opp HC T 10 30 10 Disable Opposite Hall Call Time. Specify amount of time the opposite hall call will be disabled. Disabl Opp HC 0 15 0 Disable Opposite Hall Call after initial hall call is entered. When the first up or down hall call is registered, disable opposite call for the time set; +1 = Front HC riser, +2 = Rear HC riser, +4 = IR front HC riser,+8 = IR rear HC riser DnPeak Contrl 0 1 0 Down Peak Control 0 = Normal down peak 1 = Heavy down peak GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-28 Table 7-6: Group Dispatch Field Variable Min Max Initial DnPk Trig Cnt 1 100 12 Down Peak Trigger Count. Number of down hall calls above the lobby that are set within the down peak trigger time to place the system on down peak operation. DnPk Trig Tim 0 3200 60 Down Peak Trigger Time. The time interval to count the number of down hall calls above the lobby to activate down peak operation. DownPeak Pool 0 Number Cars 0 Down Peak Pool. Number of cars to be utilized for down peak. DownPeak Time 0 3200 180 Down Peak Duration Time. The duration time for down peak operation once down peak is activated. ETA Co CC Tim 0 60 15 ETA Coincident Car Call Time. Hall calls will be assigned to the car with the coincident car call unless the car without the coincident car call can reach the call faster then ETA Coincident Car Call Time. ETA Min Time 0 60 6 ETA Minimum Time. Minimum time for a hall call to be assigned to a new car, the difference in ETA must be greater than the ETA Minimum Time. Grp TimerPark 0 Number Cars 0 Group Service Timer Park Cars. This is the number of parking cars when parking is set from the Service Activation Timer for Group parking. Lobby Floor Bottom Floor Top Floor 1 Lobby Floor. Lobby Req Ctl 0 1 0 Lobby Request Control. If the lobby request variable is set to non-zero, then that is how many cars are requested to the lobby all the time. When this flag is set to 1, the lobby request is only used when next up is active. Next Up can be active all the time, from a dedicated input or from Up Peak. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-29 Table 7-6: Group Dispatch Field Variable Min Max Initial Lobby Request 0 Number Cars 0 Lobby Request. Number of Cars Requested to the Lobby floor. Used with Next Car Up operation. Next Car Up 0 7 0 Next Car Up. Set to 1 or 2 will activate the Next Car Up operation. 1 = The next up car will open its door at the lobby and keep it open. The car is allowed to leave the floor after the Lobby Dwell time expires but will remain at the floor with the door open until an onward call is assigned to it. 2 = The next up car will close its door after the Lobby Dwell time expires and go off of next up but will remain at the lobby. An up hall call at the lobby will cause the car to open its door and go on next up. 4 = Next up is activated on Up Peak detection only. Next up can also be activated from an input. Park Dly Time 0 120 8 Parking Delay Time. Time delay an idle car waits before being parked. Parking 0 Number Cars 1 Number of Cars to Park. One car is parked at the lobby. The remaining cars are parked at the most used floors of the building. If set to zero, no cars are parked. Parking Flr 1 0 Top Floor 0 Parking Floor 1. Floor to park the idle car. If set to zero, the group will use number of hall call history to decide where to park the car. The parking variable must be set to at least 1 for this function to work. See also Parking Type. Parking Flr 2 0 Top Floor 0 Parking Floor 2. Floor to park the idle car. If set to zero, the group will use number of hall call history to decide where to park the car. The parking variable must be set to at least 1 for this function to work. See also Parking Type. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-30 Table 7-6: Group Dispatch Field Variable Min Max Initial Parking Flr 3 0 Top Floor 0 Parking Floor 3. Floor to park the idle car. If set to zero, the group will use number of hall call history to decide where to park the car. The parking variable must be set to at least 1 for this function to work. See also Parking Type. Parking Flr 4 0 Top Floor 0 Parking Floor 4. Floor to park the idle car. If set to zero, the group will use number of hall call history to decide where to park the car. The parking variable must be set to at least 1 for this function to work. See also Parking Type. Parking Flr 5 0 Top Floor 0 Parking Floor 5. Floor to park the idle car. If set to zero, the group will use number of hall call history to decide where to park the car. The parking variable must be set to at least 1 for this function to work. See also Parking Type. Parking Type 0 3 0 Parking Type. Determines the type of parking operation that is implemented by the group. 0 = Park free cars to floors with the most hall calls for that 15 minute period. 1 = Divide the hoistway by the number of cars and place a car in each zone starting with the lobby. 2 = Park cars according to the adjustable variable parking floor. Note that during parking, a car is always parked at the Lobby except when the option for alternate parking floor is selected through an input. Parking Width 0 Top Floor 0 Parking Width. The number of floor that a car is within to be considered parked at the parking floor. See also Parking Type. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-31 Table 7-6: Group Dispatch Field Variable Min Max Initial Priorty Floor 0 Top Floor 0 High Priority Floor. When this parameter is set to a floor number other than zero the high priority operation is activated. If there is a call latched at the high priority floor and the timer set from the 'High Priority TM' expires, the group will choose the best car by considering only car calls. It will remove all hall calls on that best car except for the priority floor hall call. The car will serve all car calls and then service the priority floor before being assigned another hall call from the group. Priorty Flr T 6 254 60 High Priority Time. Works in conjunction with parameter 'High Priority Floor', it is the amount of time to wait before removing hall calls assigned to the selected best car. Up Peak Pool 0 Number Cars 1 Up Peak Pool. Number of cars to be utilized for up peak. Up Peak Time 0 3200 180 Up Peak Duration Time. The duration time for up peak operation once up peak is activated. If set to zero, up peak operation will never turn on. Up Pk Contrl 0 1 0 Up Peak Control. 0 = Normal up peak 1 = Heavy up peak UpPk CC Count 1 40 3 Up Peak Car Call Count. Number of car calls the car must have when leaving the lobby to count as an up peak trigger. UpPk Trig Cnt 1 100 3 Up Peak Trigger Count. The number of up peak triggers that are set within the up peak trigger time to activate up peak operation. Up peak triggers are counted when the car leaves the lobby with the load dispatch input set or with the more car calls than the up peak car call count. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-32 Table 7-6: Group Dispatch Field Variable Min Max Initial UpPk Trig Tim 0 3200 60 Up Peak Trigger Time. The time interval to count the number of up peak triggers. Table 7-7: Group Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description 1st Rcl EPSF2 0 Number Cars 2 Car First Return Car Emergency Power Service Feeder 2. This will be the first car recalled in Emergency Power (the rest are done sequentially in a loop) for power feeder 2 1st Run EPSF2 0 Number Cars 2 Car First Run Car Emergency Power Service Feeder 2. This will be the first car selected to run on emergency power (the rest are done sequentially in a loop) for power feeder 2 1stEP Run Car 0 Number Cars 1 Car First Emergency Power Run Car. This is the first car selected to run. If this car cannot run, the next consecutive car is selected. 1stRecall Car 0 Number Cars 1 Car First Recall Car. This is the first car allowed to recall during the emergency power recall sequence. The recall sequence continues in consecutive order and then loops around until all cars are recalled. 2nd IR Car 0 Number Cars 0 Car 2nd Inconspicuous Riser Car. Set this option to have a second car answer the Inconspicuous Risers. 2nd Riser Ctl 0 Number Cars 0 Car Second Riser Control. Defines the second riser operation. 0 = Car defined for second riser answer second riser call and standard hall calls. 1 = Car defined for second riser answer only second riser calls. 2 = Second riser call or’ed with standard riser calls if second riser operation not selected from input. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-33 Table 7-7: Group Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description ATT Pref Time 0 60 0 Sec Attendant ETA Preference Time. When set to nonzero, the car not on attendant service has this time added to its ETA time. This causes the attendant car to be given a preference for the hall call. CB Button Loc 0 2 0 - Code Blue Location. 0 = CB on CB, 1 = CB on HCB, 2 = CB on IR CB Car 2 0 Number Cars 0 Car Code Blue Car #2. When a Code Blue call is initiated, this will be the car to be sent to respond in the event that first 'Code Blue Car' is not available, see variables 'Code Blue Car' and 'CB Rcll Any Car' for more options. CB IR Penalty 0 60 10 sec IR Car Code Blue Penalty Time. It is used to calculate and give preference to cars in fully automatic operation CB Rcl anycar 0 1 0 - Code Blue Recall Any Call. 0= Disable 1 = Enables dispatcher to recall any car If Code Blue Cars 1 and 2 are not available. If you want to select any car as your primary option, make Code Blue Car and Code Blue Car #2 equal to zero and enable this setting. CB Req IndCar 0 1 0 - Code Blue Request Independent Car. Code blue request for car on independent operation. Set to 1 in dispatcher in all cars so the car could be requested (flash EML) if the car is in independent mode. CB Sel IR Car 0 1 0 - Code Blue Over IR Car CB SRiser Car 0 Number Cars 0 Car Code Blue Second Riser Car Select. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-34 Table 7-7: Group Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description Code Blue Car 0 Number Cars 0 Car Code Blue Car. When a code blue call is initiated, this will be the first car to be sent to respond. If car is not available, see variables 'Code Blue Car#2' and 'CB Rcll Any Car' for more options. Em Power Cars 1 Number Cars 1 Car Number of Emergency Power Cars. that can run at the same time on the emergency power source. Em Pwr Floor Bottom Floor Top Floor 1 Floor Emergency Power Recall Floor. Emer Dispatch 0 7 0 - Emergency Dispatch. This parameter is applied to both the car that is selected as the dispatcher and also the non-dispatcher cars. Dispatcher Car = If set to 1 and hall call power lost, the dispatcher car will set down hall calls above the lobby and up hall call at and below the lobby. Non-Dispatcher Car = If set to a 1, and communications is lost to the dispatcher car, the car will dispatch itself to down hall calls above the lobby and up hall calls below the lobby. The front hall call and rear hall call bits settings are only used for the dispatcher car and when set, if communication is lost to a particular hall call board, hall calls are set for the affected floors. EmPwr Op Outp 0 3 0 - Emergency Power Operation LED. This parameter controls the group outputs for emergency power status for each car. 0 = Outputs are on for cars that are operational. 1 = Outputs on for cars on normal power. 2 = Outputs on for car on emergency power. 3 = Outputs on for cars that are being recalled. EmPwr Pk Outp 0 2 0 - Emergency Power Park LED. This parameter controls the group outputs for emergency power parked status for each car. 0 = Cars are parked on emergency power. 1 = Cars are parked or selected to run. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-35 Table 7-7: Group Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description EP ATTcar 1st 0 1 0 - Emergency Power Attendant Car First. Select and Prioritize the attendant car for running on emergency power service. It won't be recalled. After recall is complete for the group, It recovers and goes back in service EP Man Sel En 0 3 1 - Emergency Power Manual Select Enable. 0 = The recall sequence is aborted and any moving car will stop at the next floor to allow the selected car to run. +1 = Car is selected to run when the currently selected car completes its recall. +2 = Makes the selected car wait for all the cars to recall before being selected to run. EP Rcl Out En 0 1 0 - Emergency cars finished Recalling Output Enable. It enables an output in the hall call board for Emergency Power Complete (EPCOM). This setting is only read in power up so after changing this setting you need to reboot the controller. EP Recall Dly 0 3200 30 Sec Emergency Power Recall Delay Time. Time delay before the group starts the emergency power recall sequence. EP Recovr Tim 1 60 20 Sec Emergency Power Recover Time. When elevators are in Emergency Power recall, this is the time that the dispatcher will wait for each car to recover to a floor. If the car is in the middle of a blind shaft, you need to calculate the time each car may take to get to a floor in emergency power recovery speed. GrpCC Ovrride 0 1 0 - Group Car Call Override. Normally visitor access allows the car call security to be overridden momentarily from a push button in an owners apartment. With this parameter set to 1, the security override works directly from a key switch input. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-36 Table 7-7: Group Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description GrpCC Sec OvT 1 240 60 Sec Group Car Call Security Override Timer. This is the amount of time that the car call security is overridden when a group car call security override button is pressed. Handicap Wait 0 255 0 Sec Handicap Car Wait Time. Special operation that when a passenger presses a handicap hall button, the group adds this time to the ETA of all cars that do not have enough capacity. See Handicap Capacity in car options. Normally, if a car is at the floor of the handicap hall call, it will get the assignment regardless of the handicap capacity unless this value is set to 255. HC Secur ctrl 0 2 0 - Hall Call Security Control. Set what riser the hall call security inputs work with: 0 = Only standard hall calls 1 = Standard hall calls and Second Riser hall calls 2 = Only Second Riser hall calls HC X-AssignEn 0 5 0 - Hall Call Cross Assignment Enable. 1 = Front Hall Call Cross Assignment is enabled. 4 = Rear Hall Call Cross Assignment is enabled. 5 = Front and rear Hall Call Cross Assignment is enabled. The group will look for cross assignment calls as well as hall calls. Power should be cycled on controller after this variable is modified so all communications to all devices are made. 2 = Hall Call Cross Cancellation is used and hall calls are are not cancelled when all cars are out of service. A setting of 3 for both hall call assignment and cancellation is not valid and may cause unpredictable results. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-37 Table 7-7: Group Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description HCasg SecType 0 15 0 - Hall Call Assignment Security Type. Use with Special Priority Service. Determines what hall calls should be given a special priority. Settings are 1 = Up 2 = Down 4 = Up Rear 8 = Down Rear HCX-AssignETA 0 500 60 Sec Hall Call Cross Assignment ETA Limit. If ETA for hall call assignment is greater than this ETA limit, the hall call will be cross-assigned to the old group controller. Invert HC Sec 0 1 0 - Invert Hall Call Security. 1 = Hall call security inputs are secured when the security input goes off from a normally closed switch. Normally, the security input must be on to secure the hall call. IR Car 0 7 0 Car Inconspicuous Riser Car. This car is assigned all the IR hall calls. IR Control 0 7 0 Car Inconspicuous Riser Control. This parameter alters how IR riser service is activated or deactivated. 0 = IR active from ICR or RICR input. +1 = IR activated when any IR call is activated.. +2 = Finish car calls then answer IR calls, +4 = Finish car call before going off IR. Nmbr Vip Cars 0 7 1 car Number of VIP Cars. Number of cars allow to service VIP (priority service) calls at one time. OTS No HCCanc 0 1 0 - Out of Service No Hall Call Cancelled. Do not cancel hall calls if cars are out of service. This is used in accordance with cross assignment feature. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-38 Table 7-7: Group Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description Recall Timout 1 600 60 Sec Recall Time-out. The time allowed for the car to reach the recall floor during the emergency power recall sequence. If this timer expires, the next car is selected to recall. Sabb Restart 0 3200 8 Sec Sabbath Restart Delay Time. The amount of time after the elevator answered the last sabbath call to restart the process. Single AutoPB 0 5 0 - Single Automatic Push Button Operation. 0 = Manual Doors (this would be the normal operation for cars with manual doors). 1 = Enable SAPB operation for simplex car with automatic doors. 2 = Disable SAPB operation for cars with manual doors. 3 = Invalid setting. 4 = Allow only one car call to be entered at floor for cars with manual doors regardless of the door position. 5 = Allow only one car call to be entered at floor for cars with automatic doors. This feature normally allows only hall calls and car calls to register when the doors are closed. SkpCar@RcFLD O 0 1 0 - Skip Car at Recall Floor with Door Open. While on Emergency Power Recall sequence: if enabled, out of service cars at the Emergency Power Recall floor with door open will be given a chance to run, 0 = Override immediately 1 = Override after timedelay. Time delay defined by variable 'EP Recover Tim'. SkpCarN@RcF DO 0 1 0 - Skip Car Not at Recall Floor with Door Open. While on Emergency Power Recall sequence: if enabled, out of service cars at the Emergency Power Recall floor with door open will be given a chance to run, 0 = Override immediately 1 = Override after timedelay. Time delay defined by variable 'EP Recover Tim'. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-39 Table 7-7: Group Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Units Description Vid Pos Car 1 1 Number Cars 1 Car Video Position Car 1. The column where the car is displayed on the dispatch screen starts from left to right for positions 1 through 6 (8 for high rise cars). Car 1 through 6 positions are defaulted to display positions 1 through 6 respectively. Changing the car’s video position changes the column where the car is displayed. Vid Pos Car 2 1 Number Cars 2 Car Video Position Car 2. See Video Position Car 1 for an explanation. Vid Pos Car 3 1 Number Cars 3 Car Video Position Car 3. See Video Position Car 1 for an explanation. Vid Pos Car 4 1 Number Cars 4 Car Video Position Car 4. See Video Position Car 1 for an explanation. Vid Pos Car 5 1 Number Cars 5 Car Video Position Car 5. See Video Position Car 1 for an explanation. Vid Pos Car 6 1 Number Cars 6 Car Video Position Car 6. See Video Position Car 1 for an explanation. VIP Buttn Loc 0 2 0 - VIP Button Location. 0 = VIP on VIP 1 = VIP on HCB, 2 = VIP on IR VIP Operation 0 3 0 - VIP (Priority Call) Operation. +1 = Cancel hall call if no cars available for VIP call. +2= Cancel car call upon initiation of being selected as the VIP car. X-Assign Cars 0 Number Cars 0 Car Cross Assignment Cars. Number of cars in the old group to assign calls using cross assignment system. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-40 Table 7-8: Color Lights Field Variable Min Max Initial Backlight Lt 0 63 0 Enable Backlight Output Lights for RGB Style Output Lights in COP. Bit0: Fire, Bit1: Medical, Bit2: Emergency, Bit3: OTS, Bit4: Att Up/Dn Light, Bit5: Non-CC CB Off Bright 0 100 20 Hall Call CB Light Off Brightness CB Off Color 0 15 0 Hall Call CB Light Off Color. 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White CB On Bright 0 100 100 Hall Call CB Light On Brightness GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-41 Table 7-8: Color Lights Field Variable Min Max Initial CB On Color 0 15 0 Hall Call Code Blue Light On Color. 0 Based on Parameters1 Red2 Orange 3 Yellow4 Chartreuse 5 Green6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet11 Magenta 12 Rose13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White CC Light Ctl 0 3 0 This configures the options for Flashing Car Call Lights. +1 = Flash Car Call Security +2 = Flash Attendant Annunciator Sequence CC Off Bright 0 100 20 Car Call Output Off Brightness for LED CC Off Color 0 15 15 Car Call Button Light Off Color. 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-42 Table 7-8: Color Lights Field Variable Min Max Initial CC On Bright 0 100 100 Car Call Output On Brightness for LED CC On Color 0 15 15 Car Call Button Light On Color. 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White CC Sec Bright 0 100 100 Car Call Security Light Brightness CC Sec Color 0 15 15 Car Call Button Security Color. 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-43 Table 7-8: Color Lights Field Variable Min Max Initial CCAttDn Color 0 15 0 Car Call Button Attendant Down Light Color. 0 Based on Parameters1 Red2 Orange 3 Yellow4 Chartreuse 5 Green6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet11 Magenta 12 Rose13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White CCAttDnBright 0 100 100 Car Call Button Attendant Down Brightness CCAttUp Color 0 15 0 Car Call Button Attendant Up Light Color. 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White CCAttUpBright 0 100 100 Car Call Button Attendant Up Light Brightness Em Lt Bright 0 100 100 Emergency Light Brightness GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-44 Table 7-8: Color Lights Field Variable Min Max Initial Emer Lt Color 0 15 0 Emergency Light Color. 0 Based on Parameters1 Red2 Orange 3 Yellow4 Chartreuse 5 Green6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet11 Magenta 12 Rose13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White Fir Lt Bright 0 100 100 Fire Light Brightness Fire Lt Color 0 15 0 Fire Light Color. 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White HC Off Bright 0 100 20 Hall Call Off Brightness. Select the brightness for LED hall call button, when button is NOT pressed. Used only with GAL serial hall button fixtures. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-45 Table 7-8: Color Lights Field Variable Min Max Initial HC On Brght 0 100 100 Hall Call On Brightness for LED Hall Call Buttons. Used only with GAL serial hall button fixtures. HC Sec Bright 0 100 100 Hall Call Security Brightness for Secured Floors. HC Sec Color 0 15 15 Select what color to illuminate the hall buttons when the system is on security. Used only with GAL serial hall button fixtures. 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White HC Sec Ctl 0 7 0 Hall Call Button Security Light. 1 = Invert security, +2 = Flash security, +4 = Master Security Enabled HCD Off Brght 0 100 20 Hall Call Light Off Brightness for LED Hall Call Buttons. Used only with GAL serial hall button fixtures. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-46 Table 7-8: Color Lights Field Variable Min Max Initial HCD Off Color 0 15 15 Select what color LED to illuminate on hall call button when button is NOT pressed. Used only with GAL serial hall button fixtures. 0 Based on Parameters1 Red2 Orange 3 Yellow4 Chartreuse 5 Green6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet11 Magenta 12 Rose13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White HCDn On Color 0 15 15 Hall Call Down On Light Color. Select what color to illuminate On hall call button when button is pressed. Used only with GAL serail hall button fixtures. 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-47 Table 7-8: Color Lights Field Variable Min Max Initial HCDn OnBright 0 100 100 Hall Call Light On Brightness for LED hHll Call Buttons. Used only with GAL serial hall button fixtures. HCU Off Brght 0 100 20 Hall Call Output Off Brightness for LED (higher number is brighter) HCU Off Color 0 15 15 Hall Call Button Up Light Off Color. Based on RGB intensity parameters. 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White HCU On Bright 0 100 0 Hall Call Output Up On Brightness for LED (higher number is brighter) GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-48 Table 7-8: Color Lights Field Variable Min Max Initial HCUp On Color 0 15 15 Hall Call Button Up Light On Color. Based on RGB inyensity parameters 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White IR Color Ctrl 0 1 0 IR Light Color Control.0 = IR Color, 1 = HC Color until IR activated IRD Off Brght 0 100 20 Hall Call IR Down Light Off Brightness IRD Off Color 0 15 15 Hall Call IR Down Light Off Color. 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-49 Table 7-8: Color Lights Field Variable Min Max Initial IRD On Bright 0 100 20 Hall Call IR Down Light On Brightness IRDn On Color 0 15 15 Hall Call IR Down Light On Color.0 Based on Parameters1 Red2 Orange 3 Yellow4 Chartreuse 5 Green6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet11 Magenta 12 Rose13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White IRU Off Brght 0 100 100 Hall Call IR Up Light Off Brightness IRU Off Color 0 15 15 Hall Call IR Up Light Off Color. 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White IRU On Bright 0 100 100 Hall Call IR Up On Brightness GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-50 Table 7-8: Color Lights Field Variable Min Max Initial IRUp On Color 0 15 15 Hall Call IR Up On Color.Base on RGB intensity parameters.0 Based on Parameters1 Red2 Orange 3 Yellow4 Chartreuse 5 Green6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet11 Magenta 12 Rose13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White Med Lt Bright 0 100 100 Medical Light Brightness Med Lt Color 0 15 0 Medical Light Color. 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White OTS Lt Bright 0 100 100 Out of Service Light Brightness GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-51 Table 7-8: Color Lights Field Variable Min Max Initial OTS Lt Color 0 15 0 Out of Service Light Color.0 Based on Parameters1 Red2 Orange 3 Yellow4 Chartreuse 5 Green6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet11 Magenta 12 Rose13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White Vip Off Brght 0 100 20 Hall Call VIP Light Off Brightness. Vip Off Color 0 15 0 Hall Call VIP Light Off Color. 0 Based on Parameters 1 Red 2 Orange 3 Yellow 4 Chartreuse 5 Green 6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan 8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet 11 Magenta 12 Rose 13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White Vip On Bright 0 100 100 Hall Call VIP Light On Brightness. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-52 Table 7-8: Color Lights Field Variable Min Max Initial Vip On Color 0 15 0 Hall Call VIP Light On Color.0 Based on Parameters1 Red2 Orange 3 Yellow4 Chartreuse 5 Green6 Aquamarine 7 Cyan8 Azure 9 Blue 10 Violet11 Magenta 12 Rose13 Rose White 14 Warm White 15 Cool White Table 7-9: System Options Field Variable Min Max Initial AP SSID Nmb 1 9 1 Network SSID Number. 1-9 sets the number to be appended to the SSID for AP WiFi cards Auto Flt Dpy 0 1 0 Automatic Fault Display. Enable to automatically display a fault on the LCD screen. AutWifi Setup 0 1 1 Automatic WiFi Setup. Turns on option to have controller automatically update wifi board for galileo if connection is lost. 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable CAN Baud Rate 0 1 0 CAN Baud Rate. Set to zero and do not change. Special jobs uitilize a different baud rate for CAN Bus. All devices need to be reconfigured for new rate. CAN Baud Rate, 0=115.2K, 1=57.6K GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-53 Table 7-9: System Options Field Variable Min Max Initial CAN Sync Cnt 0 7 4 CAN Sync Count. Frequency to update CAN Bus devices. Units are 1/4 seconds. It sets Synchronization Count in 250 millisecond increments COM1 Baud 0 9 6 Com 1 User Interface Baud Rate. Selects the bit rate of the COM 1 serial port. 0 = 2400 bps, 1 = 4800 bps, 2 = 9600 bps, 3 = 19200 bps, 4 = 38400 bps, 5 = 57600 bps, 6 = 115200 bps, 7 = 219254 bps, 8 = 226562.5 bps, 9 = 234375 bps. COM1 Port Sel 0 7 6 Com 1 Port Select. Selects the operation of COM 1 port. 0 = Comm Diag, 1 = Comm Debug, 2 = Galcom, 3 = DL20, 4 = Galcom Wireless, 5 = Galcom Ethernet, 6 = Galcom Wireless Flow Control, 7 = Galcom Ethernet Flow Control COM2 Baud 0 9 3 Com 2 User Interface Baud Rate. Selects the bit rate of the COM 2 serial port. 0 = 2400 bps, 1 = 4800 bps, 2 = 9600 bps, 3 = 19200 bps, 4 = 38400 bps, 5 = 57600 bps, 6 = 115200 bps, 7 = 219254 bps, 8 = 226562.5 bps, 9 = 234375 bps. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-54 Table 7-9: System Options Field Variable Min Max Initial COM2 Port Sel 0 7 0 Com 2 Port Select. Selects the operation of COM 2 port. 0 = Comm Diag, 1 = Comm Debug, 2 = Galcom, 3 = DL20, 4 = Galcom Wireless, 5 = Galcom Ethernet, 6 = Galcom Wireless Flow Control, 7 = Galcom Ethernet Flow Control COM3 Baud 0 3 2 COM3 Baud Rate. 0 = 2400 1 = 4800 2 = 9600 3 = 19200 Cpu Timg Outp 0 7 0 CPU Timing Output. The CPU has three test point pins that outputs timing signals depending upon the setting of this parameter. These are 5 Volt signals that can be monitored by an oscilloscope. 0 = Z6 LED 1 second pulse 1 = Inctime 2 = GrpIO 4 = 10 msec. Display T-out 0 3200 0 Display Time-out. Turn off the LCD Display after this timer times out. This function is disabled when set to zero. ExclusionFLT1 0 Max Faults 0 Exclusion fault 1. Set to fault code number. This prevents faults from being recorded in the fault log. It should only be set for nuisance and noncritical faults. Controller stills goes through all the logic for each fault code except, a call is not recorded in the fault log GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-55 Table 7-9: System Options Field Variable Min Max Initial ExclusionFLT2 0 Max Faults 0 Exclusion fault 2. Set to fault code number. This prevents faults from being recorded in the fault log. It should only be set for nuisance and noncritical faults. Controller stills goes through all the logic for each fault code except, a call is not recorded in the fault log ExclusionFLT3 0 Max Faults 0 Exclusion fault 3. Set to fault code number. This prevents faults from being recorded in the fault log. It should only be set for nuisance and noncritical faults. Controller stills goes through all the logic for each fault code except, a call is not recorded in the fault log ExclusionFLT4 0 Max Faults 0 Exclusion fault 4. Set to fault code number. This prevents faults from being recorded in the fault log. It should only be set for nuisance and noncritical faults. Controller stills goes through all the logic for each fault code except, a call is not recorded in the fault log ExclusionFLT5 0 Max Faults 0 Exclusion fault 5. Set to fault code number. This prevents faults from being recorded in the fault log. It should only be set for nuisance and noncritical faults. Controller stills goes through all the logic for each fault code except, a call is not recorded in the fault log ExclusionFLT6 0 Max Faults 0 Exclusion fault 6. Set to fault code number. This prevents faults from being recorded in the fault log. It should only be set for nuisance and noncritical faults. Controller stills goes through all the logic for each fault code except, a call is not recorded in the fault log GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-56 Table 7-9: System Options Field Variable Min Max Initial Hall Lan Baud 0 6 0 Hall Lantern COM Baud Rate. 0 = 2400, 1 = 4800 2 = 9600 3 = 19.2K 4 = 38.4K 5 = 57.6K 6 = 115.2K bits per second. Low Door Volt 0 600 198 Low Door Voltage. Settings for Line Voltage Monitor Board. It sets the value of voltage for 'Door Low Voltage Fault' to be triggered. Low Line Volt 0 600 198 Low Line Voltage. Settings for Line Voltage Monitor Board. It sets the value of voltage for a 'Low Line Voltage Fault' to be triggered. Password 0 9999 0 Password Code to modify and adjust field variables Pword Tim-out 0 3200 300 Password Time-out. The amount of inactive time for the LCD to lock out the field variables. Safe Test Day 1 31 0 Safety Test Day. SafeTest Year 2000 2999 0 Safety Test Year. SafeTst Month 1 12 0 Safety Test Month. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Section 7 – Main CPU Adjustable Variables 7-57 Table 7-10: NTS Processor Adjustable Variables Field Variables Min Max Initial Can Baud Rate 0 1 0 CAN Baud Rate. Set to zero and do not change. Special jobs uitilize a different baud rate for CAN Bus. All devices need to be reconfigured for new rate. CAN Baud Rate, 0 = 115.2K, 1 = 57.6K Debug Mode 0 7 0 Debug Mode Number Valid Fl 2 Top Floor 2 Number of Valid Floors. Top Speed 0 1600 200 Top Speed or Contract Speed of the car. UT Limit Dist 0 50 0 Up Terminal Limit Distance DT Limit Dist 0 50 0 Down Terminal Limit Distance Table 7-11: Velocity Slowdown Table FPM UN/DN * UT/DT * TSD TLH 50 2" above top floor and below bottom floor 5" 4" 4" above top floor 75 9" 7" 100 12" 10" 150 21" 17" 200 30" 22" GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Appendix A 8-1 Section 8 - Appendix A Every safety precaution, whether or not specifically stated in this document, must be implemented when installing, adjusting, or servicing elevator equipment. All safety precautions must be followed to ensure the safety of elevator personnel and the general public. The test procedures outlined in this Appendix provide a guide for elevator personnel to perform the specific tests in this Appendix. These test procedures are not intended to override or circumvent any procedure or test that is mandated by the applicable codes and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. All temporary connections must be removed before placing the elevator in service. If there are any questions in regard to the procedures for performing these tests with a GALaxy eHydro controller, please call GAL Manufacturing toll free at 1-(877) 425-7778 for free technical assistance. 8.1 Testing Stall Mode & Low Oil Operation Turn the power of on the controller. Temporarily remove SU-S12 and SUC-S11 connections from the controller. Restore power to the controller. If Return To Lobby is set to cycle doors at the lobby, set The “RTL Dwell Tim” to control how long the doors will dwell before closing in return to lobby mode. Temporarily set the “Stall Time” to 20. Place a call in the UP direction. The car will start going up, but when it changes to approach speed it will stall and then return to the lobby and cycle the door. After finishing the test remove power from the controller. Replace SU-S12 and SUC-S11 connections on the controller. Set the “Stall Time” to a value that will allow the elevator to make a complete run from the bottom floor to the top floor. Restore power to the controller. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Appendix A 8-2 8.2 Reset Low Oil, Hot Oil, or MC/SPD Fault To reset a Low Oil, Hot Oil or MC/SPD fault, first verify that the cause of the fault has been corrected and then follow the directions below: • Place the car on machine room inspection. • From the LCD Interface, select the Elevator Setup menu and press the enter button. • Use the up or down button to select the appropriate reset menu and press enter. • Follow the directions on the screen to press the appropriate buttons to reset the device 8.3 Performing a Stop Ring Test • Place a call to the top floor. • Put the car on machine room INSPECTION. • Turn off the power to the controller • Place the jumper CN18 on TEST MODE (position 2-3). • Turn on power to the controller. • Run the car UP on inspection from the machine room until the car stops on the “Top Terminal Limit”. • Turn off power to the controller. • Install a temporary connection between GOV-H22 and TLH-H21. • Turn on power to the controller. • Run the car UP on inspection to perform the stop ring test. • After the stop ring test is completed, run the car DOWN on inspection until the car is level at the top floor. • Turn off power to the controller. • Remove the temporary connection between GOV-H22 and TLH-H21. • Place the jumper CN18 on AUTO MODE (position 1-2). • 8.4 Testing NTSD The NTS processor has a separate CAN channel to the SI L 3 APS selector head. The NTS processor controls “UN”, “UT”, “DT”, “DN”. In “HOISTWAY TABLES”, “SET SLOWDOWN COUNTS”, “SET SLOWDOWN COUNTS FOR ALL”, set “UP” to a count of 102 or 2 inches. This distance is closer than the UT distance. With the car at the bottom floor set a call to the top floor. Notice the car slowdown normally but a “UT Limit Fault” is logged. Reset the “UP” count back to its prior value. Place the car on Inspection mode this will render the normal elevator stopping means inoperative. Run the car up on inspection verify the car stops 2 inches above the top floor. In “HOISTWAY TABLES”, “SET SLOWDOWN COUNTS”, “SET SLOWDOWN COUNTS FOR ALL”, set “DOWN” to a count of 102 or 2 inches. This distance is closer than the DT distance. With the car at the top floor set a call to the bottom floor. Notice the car slowdown normally but a “DT Limit Fault” is logged. Reset the “DOWN” count back to its prior value. Place the car on Inspection mode this will render the normal elevator stopping means GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Appendix A 8-3 inoperative. Run the car down on inspection verify the car stops 2 inches below the bottom floor. Place the controller inspection switch into the auto position. 8.5 Testing Terminal Speed Reducing Device The terminal speed reducing device shall be installed for the up direction where the car speed exceeds 0.25m/s (50ft/min) to ensure the plunger does not strike its solid limit of travel at a speed in excess of .25m/s (50 ft/min). With the car at the bottom floor, place a call one floor above. While the car is running CAREFULY remove the wire from the TSD terminal. The TSD switch is directly in series with the UP Fast Solenoid. Verify the car immediately starts to slow down. The switch is independent of the normal stopping means, and normal terminal stopping device. Replace the wire back in the TSD. If the car ran longer than the low oil timer. To restore the car to normal operation, remove the jumper or replace the wire back, move the controller inspection switch to the inspection position, on the LCD Board GALX-1005 push the up button to go to “RESET FAULTS”, push the enter button, push the up button to go to the “Reset Low Oil” push the enter button, then place the controller inspection switch into the auto position. 8.6 Testing the Load Weighing Device With (100 or 125%) full load in car verify that the load weighing device does not interfere with Phase 1 [2.27.3.1.6] or Phase II [2.27.3.31(i)]. Where applicable, with the car on normal, automatic operation away from the designated level, simulate a full load (method varies according to device used); then activate Phase I and make sure that the car responds in accordance with Phase I requirements. Where applicable with the car on Phase II operation, simulate a full load (method varies according to device used), and make sure that the car responds in accordance with Phase II requirements. 8.7 Testing Phase 2 Operation With a Ground or Short Circuit Test that a ground or short circuit in electrical parts located at landing side of H/W enclosure and associated wiring will not disable Phase II operation after it is activated [2.27.3.4] 1) While the car is on Phase II, short to ground the HCP in the landing fixture. HCP is the controller power for all smoke detector contacts and Phase I switches. Verify that Phase II operation remains unaffected. 8.8 Testing Phase 1 & 2 Operation After Power Interruption and Restoration 1. Power off the controller while the car is on Phase I at any floor away from the designated landing. Restore power to the controller. The car will remain on Phase I and proceed to the designated level. 2. Power off the controller while the car is on Phase I at the designated landing. Restore power to the controller. The car will remain on Phase I at the designated landing. 3. Power off the controller at any landing while the car is on Phase II. Restore power to the controller. The car will remain on Phase II at that landing until the firefighter enters a call. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Appendix A 8-4 4. Power off the controller while the car is moving between floors and on Phase II. Restore power to the controller. The car will move to an available floor and stop. It will remain on Phase II at that landing until the firefighter enters a call. 8.9 Testing Recycling Operation With the car at the bottom floor, with the doors closed and no calls registered, from the GALX-1005 board change the time to 2:01 AM. The car should move down at leveling speed. While the car is leveling down register a hall call above the bottom floor. The car will continue to level down until the car rests on the springs. The car will level up to the bottom floor. 8.10 Testing Plunger Gripper Operation Test that the gripper will remain operational during a power failure. While the elevator is running down, remove power from the controller and verify the gripper sets. 8.11 Testing Phase 1 Operation Under Special Conditions While the car is at the top floor, CAREFULLY install a temporary connection from S10 terminal to LOS terminal. If a normally closed switch is used, then CAREFULLY remove the wire from the LOS terminal. This will initiate a low oil return or a plunger follower guide protection. While the car is returning, turn the fire service Phase I hall switch to the ON position. If the elevator is above the recall floor the elevator will stop at the recall floor and open its doors. If the elevator is below the recall floor the elevator will stop at the bottom floor and open its doors. The doors will close after the door time. Press the door open button and verify that the doors will open. To restore the car to normal operation, remove the temporary connection from S10 to LOS. If a normally closed switch is used, replace the wire back on LOS. Move the controller inspection switch to the inspection position, on the LCD Board GALX-1005 push the up button to go to “RESET FAULTS”, push the enter button, push the up button to go to the “Reset Low Oil” push the enter button, then place the controller inspection switch into the auto position. Turn the fire service Phase I switch to the RESET position then back to the OFF position. While the car is at the top floor, CAREFULLY install a temporary connection from FEP terminal to EMP terminal. This will initiate an auxiliary power lowering return. While the car is returning, turn the fire service Phase I hall switch to the on position. If the elevator is above the recall floor the elevator will stop at the recall floor and open its doors. If the elevator is below the recall floor the elevator will stop at the bottom floor and open its doors. The doors will close after the door time. Press the door open button and verify that the doors will open. To restore the car to normal operation, remove the temporary connection. Turn the fire service Phase I switch to the RESET position then back to the OFF position. While the car is at the top floor, turn the fire service Phase I hall switch to the ON position. While the car i s returning, CAREFULLY install a temporary connection from S10 terminal to LOS terminal. If a normally closed switch is used, then CAREFULLY remove the wire from the LOS terminal. If the elevator is above the recall floor the elevator will stop at the reca ll floor and open its doors. If the elevator is below the recall floor the elevator will stop at the bottom floor and open its doors. The doors will close after the door time. Press the door open button and verify that the doors will open. To restore the car to normal operation, remove the temporary connection from S10 to LOS. If a normally closed switch is used, replace the wire back on LOS. Move the controller inspection switch to the inspection position, on the LCD Board GALX- 1005 push the up button to go to “RESET FAULTS”, push the enter button, push the up button to go to GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Appendix A 8-5 the “Reset Low Oil” push the enter button, then place the controller inspection switch into the auto position. Turn the fire service Phase I switch to the RESET position then back to the OFF position. While the car is at the top floor, turn the fire service Phase I hall switch to the ON position. While the car is returning, CAREFULLY install a temporary connection from FEP terminal to EMP terminal. If the elevator is above the recall floor the elevator will stop at the recall floor and open its doors. If the elevator is below the recall floor the elevator will stop at the bottom floor and open its doors. The doors will close after the door time. Press the door open button and verify that the doors will open. To restore the car to normal operation, remove the temporary connection from FET to EMP. Turn the fire service Phase I switch to the RESET position then back to the OFF position. Turn the fire service Phase I hall switch to the ON position. After the elevator has returned to the recall floor and opened the doors, CAREFULLY install a temporary connection from S10 terminal to LOS terminal. If a normally closed switch is being used, then CAREFULLY remove the wire from the LOS terminal. Verify that the doors close and the fire light flashes on and off. To restore the car to normal operation, remove the temporary connection from S10 to LOS. If a normally closed switch is used, replace the wire back on LOS. Move the controller inspection switch to the inspection position, on the LCD Board GALX-1005N push the up button to go to “RESET FAULTS”, push the enter button, push the up button to go to the “Reset Low Oil” push the enter button, then place the controller inspection switch into the auto position. Turn the fire service Phase I switch to the RESET position then back to the OFF position. Turn the fire service Phase I hall switch to the ON position. After the elevator has returned to the recall floor and opened the doors, CAREFULLY install a temporary connection from FEP terminal to EMP terminal. Verify that the doors close and the fire light flashes on and off. To restore the car to normal operation, remove the temporary connection from FEP to EMP. Turn the fire service Phase I switch to the RESET position then back to the OFF position. 8.12 Testing Phase 2 Operation Under Special Conditions Turn the fire service Phase I hall switch to the ON position. After the elevator has returned to the recall floor and opened the doors turn the In Car Fire Service Phase II switch to the ON position. CAREFULLY install a temporary connection from LC terminal to LOS terminal. If a normally closed switch is used, then CAREFULLY remove the wire from the LOS terminal. Verify the fire light flashes on and off. Verify that only calls below the elevator will register. To restore the car to normal operation, remove the temporary connection from LC to LOS. If a normally closed switch is used, replace the wire back on LOS. Move the controller inspection switch to the inspection position, on the LCD Board GALX-1005 push the up button to go to “RESET FAULTS”, push the enter button, push the up button to go to the “Reset Low Oil” push the enter button, then place the controller inspection switch into the auto position. Turn the fire service Phase II switch to the OFF position. Turn the fire service Phase I switch to the RESET position then back to the OFF position. Turn the fire service Phase I hall switch to the ON position. After the elevator has returned to the recall floor and opened the doors turn the in car fire service phase II switch to the ON position. CAREFULLY install a temporary connection from FEP terminal to EMP terminal. Verify the fire light flashes on and off. Verify that only calls below the elevator will register. To restore the car to normal operation, remove the temporary connection from FEP to EMP. Turn the fire service Phase II switch to the OFF position. Turn the fire service Phase I switch to the RESET position then back to the OFF position. GALaxy eHydro Elevator Controller Appendix A 8-6 8.13 Testing Plunger Following Guide Protection While the car is at the top floor, CAREFULLY install a temporary connection from S10 terminal to LOS terminal. If a normally closed switch is being used, then CAREFULLY remove the wire from the LOS terminal. This will initiate a plunger follower guide protection. The elevator will return to the bottom floor and open its doors. The doors will close after the door time. Press the door open button and verify that the doors will open. To restore the car to normal operation, remove the temporary connection from S10 to LOS. If a normally closed switch is used, replace the wire back on LOS. Move the controller inspection switch to the inspection position, on the LCD Board GALX-1005 push the up button to go to “RESET FAULTS”, push the enter button, push the up button to go to the “Reset Low Oil” push the enter button, then place the controller inspection switch into t he auto position. 8.14 Testing the Auxiliary Power Supply With the Disconnect Switch Open Test that the auxiliary power supply will be interrupted when the main power supply disconnect switch is open [3.26.10]. Turn off the main disconnect switch and verify that the LCD display on the GALX-1005 board is off. With a voltage meter verify that there is no voltage between the LIN terminal and the GND terminal. To restore the car to normal operation, turn on the disconnect switch. 8.15 Testing Low Pressure Switch If the pressure switch is normally closed: While the car is at the top floor, CAREFULLY remove the wire from the LPS terminal. This will simulate a low pressure condition. Try to register a down call. The elevator should not move down. Press a hall call at the top floor. The doors should not open. To restore the car to normal operation, replace the wire back on LPS. 8.16 Testing Low Pressure Switch Were Applicable, simulate emergency power by installing a temporary connection from terminal FEP to terminal EMP. Make sure that the elevators comply with 2.27.2. To restore to normal operation , remove the temporary connection from EMP. The fastest, easiest, quietest, and most dependable door operator ever available from GAL is now even better. If you are not installing MOVFR, you don’t know how good a door operator can be. 2017MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL Doc. No. DOC-0015N Revision E (1/17) MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL Copyright © 2004, 2017, G.A.L. Manufacturing Corporation All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form, machine or natural, without the express written consent of G.A.L Manufacturing Corporation. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N MOVFR OPERATORS 1 Comments All G.A.L. door operators are factory adjusted and tested for the actual job requirements. When installed correctly, they may require minor adjustments to suit actual job conditions. Important Note All equipment must be installed, adjusted, tested and maintained to comply with all Federal, State, and Local codes. See section 7.6, page 24 in this manual for Kinetic Energy and closing force requirements. Before mounting the operator, check that the car door is plumb, free and moves easily without bind. Check the attached standard measurements sheets. Install the operator according to the measurements. Foreword It is the intent of this manual to give the reader certain key points of information critical to the proper installation of the door operator. It is not intended to give comprehensive installation procedures nor does it cover the installation of door headers, tracks, hangers, etc. It is hoped that the procedures presented in this manual will reduce the installation and adjustment time and result in a smooth, long lasting door operation. When properly installed, G.A.L. operators will give many years of trouble free service. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 2 MOVFR OPERATORS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. TABLE OF CONTENTS Comments ....................................................................................................................... 1 Important Note ................................................................................................................ 1 Foreword ......................................................................................................................... 1 MOVFR MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS ....................................................................... 3 1. MOVFR OPERATORS ................................................................................................ 4 2. DETERMINING THE HAND OF THE DOOR .............................................................. 5 3. MOUNTING THE OPERATOR ................................................................................... 6 4. PRE-ADJUSTMENT TIP ............................................................................................. 7 5. ADJUSTING SIDE SLIDE DOORS - SINGLE SPEED AND TWO SPEED ................. 8 5.1. Crank arm and clutch link positions with door closed......................................... 8 5.2. Crank arm and clutch link positions with door open ........................................... 9 6. ADJUSTING CENTER PARTING CAR DOORS ....................................................... 10 6.1. Crank arm and clutch link positions with door closed....................................... 10 6.2. Crank arm and clutch link positions with doors open ....................................... 11 6.3. Operator Data Tables for Side Slide and Center Parting doors ....................... 12 MOVFR ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS ....................................................................... 15 7. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................. 16 7.1. Overview .......................................................................................................... 16 7.2. Adjustment aids ............................................................................................... 16 7.3. Preliminary checks ........................................................................................... 19 7.4. Parameter unit ................................................................................................. 20 7.5. Parameter unit navigation ................................................................................ 20 7.6. Parameter adjustments .................................................................................... 24 7.7. Speed profiles of the MOVFR .......................................................................... 27 7.8. Cam setting versus Distance ........................................................................... 28 7.9. Rotational cam setting ..................................................................................... 29 7.10. Interfacing between G.A.L. certified light curtain and MOVFR ......................... 30 7.11. MOVFR connection diagram ............................................................................ 32 7.12. Fault description and fault reset ....................................................................... 33 7.13. Applications for the heavy input ....................................................................... 35 7.1.4 Parameters list ................................................................................................. 39 7.1.5 How to replace the drive .................................................................................. 45 MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N MOVFR OPERATORS 3 MOVFR MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 4 MOVFR OPERATORS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. 1. MOVFR OPERATORS The MOVFR door operator utilizes a 1/2 HP AC motor. The controls include the AC motor, a VVVF drive and a PC board. The illustrations on this page show the three different versions available (Left Hand, Right Hand and Center Parting) and the clearance envelopes. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N DETERMINING THE HAND OF 5 2. DETERMINING THE HAND OF THE DOOR G.A.L. door operators are available for left and right hand doors (center parting doors use a variation of the left hand operator). To determine the hand of the door, stand in the lobby facing the elevator doors. If the door closes to the left, it is a left hand door. If the door closes to the right, it is a right hand door. To swap hands in the field, see http://www.gal.com/downloads/Movfr/MOVFR_Hand_Swap_Procedures.pdf MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 6 MOUNTING THE OPERATOR | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. 3. MOUNTING THE OPERATOR As with all G.A.L. operators it is important to have the proper mechanical set up. Before continuing, check that doors are hung properly and glide freely with no binding. The spring closer should also be set so that the hoistway door will close fully on its own. The door operator should be mounted in the proper position with the drive arm plumb and the operator arms and pivots set according to the DATA sheets (DATA21 for single speed, DATA22 for two speed). Slight differences are acceptable. Install the isolation pads: Isolation pads for the operator base are provided to minimize noise and vibration transmission into the cab. These pads must be glued to the operator base before mounting it to the car top. Set the header plumb: Place the operator over the pre-tapped holes in the header assembly. Set the base flush with the face of the header assembly and tighten the front bolts only. Move the operator base and header until the header is perfectly plumb. Temporarily clamp the rear of the base to the operator support to prevent any further movement of the header. Side opening doors: With the header assembly correctly installed, the vertical centerline of the operator drive pulley should be 9 3/4” from daylite for a door opening of 22” to 44” and 14 3/4” for a door opening of 45” to 48” (see Figure 3 and Appendix drawings No. DATA21 and DATA22). Center parting doors: With the header assembly correctly installed, the center of the door opening lines up with the center of the header track. The center of the operator drive pulley should also line up with center of the opening (see Figure 6 and Appendix drawings No. DATA23). Determining the position of the front edge of the door operator base: Mount the drive arms to the drive arm support brackets on the header assembly for center parting doors and to the drive arm support bracket for side slide doors. The mounting brackets are slotted for fine adjustment later, if needed. At this time, position the arms in the center of the bracket and tighten it. Attach the clutch assembly to the drive door linkage, and then attach the clutch to the drive door using the pre-tapped holes or key-slots on the door panel. Tighten the clutch assembly to the drive door. Attach the other door (for center parting doors) to its linkage and tighten the door bracket to the center of the slots. Attach the connecting linkage(s) to the drive pulley, making sure that when the word “CLOSED” is on top, the doors will be closed. Tighten the linkage(s) to drive pulley. Raise or lower the rear operator support bracket mounted to the cab to vertically level the operator drive pulley. This helps to prevent binds in the opening and closing. Check that the operator arms hang free and are not forced to or away from the operator drive pulley. Slide the operator forward or backward, if necessary. Turn the drive pulley by hand, making sure that the drive arms and connecting links are made in parallel planes to the door and track. If necessary, slide the operator base forward or backward. Proper positioning of the operator is critical to the life of the arm bearings. Bending of the drive arms will place stress on the bearings, reducing their operating life. Once the operator base is in correct position, drill the holes to permanently fasten the rear of the operator and tighten all mounting bolts. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N PRE-ADJUSTMENT TIP 7 4. PRE-ADJUSTMENT TIP BEFORE PROCEEDING TO THE ADJUSTMENT SECTIONS, READ THE FOLLOWING TIPS (REFER TO FIGURE 1) Note: The stop rollers are factory set and should not be adjusted. Make sure that in both directions the operator stops against the stop roller and the operator links and bearings are not under stress. For easier setup during installation do not mount door restricting components until operator adjustments are made. Think of the drive pulley crank arm(s) and the connecting link(s) as each having its own function. The crank arm determines the total door travel. The further the arm is away from the drive pulley centerline, the further the door travels. The connecting link determines the door position. The longer the arm, the further the door is from the jamb. Example: The door opening is 42” but the door travels only 40” as stopped by the open and close stop rollers. To correct the under travel, when in the full open position extend the connecting link from the drive pulley to move the door half way to the desired open position and retighten bolts. Then close the operator onto the close stop roller, loosen the crank arm bolts, position the door in the closed position (1 inch past daylite) and tighten. This will lengthen the crank arm dimension, increasing the travel. Open the door onto the open stop roller and check the door position. If the door is not in the proper open position, repeat the above steps until correct positions are reached and then ensure all the bolts are properly tightened. Remember the stop rollers are factory set and should not be adjusted. Make sure that in both directions the operator stops against the stop roller and the operator links and bearings are not under stress. FIGURE 1 DRIVE PULLEY AND CONNECTING LINK MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 8 ADJUSTING SIDE SLIDE DOORS - SINGLE SPEED AND TWO SPEED | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. 5. ADJUSTING SIDE SLIDE DOORS - SINGLE SPEED AND TWO SPEED 5.1. Crank arm and clutch link positions with door closed The door closed is the most important position. Always end adjustments by checking this position. With the door closed and overlaps checked, the car doors should not be closed against a bumper or the strike jamb. Clearance of 1/16” is recommended. Mark the door position on the header for easier reference and repeating. Mount the operator arms per appropriate template. To adjust, ensure the operator is closed against the stop and loosen the connecting link and crank arm bolts. Position the door to the closed position and re-tighten all bolts. If necessary, move the bolts to new holes. Referring to Figure 2, with the door fully closed, the crank arm should be a few degrees above the horizontal and the clutch link about 20 degrees above the horizontal. This setting will help prevent slamming, yet still allow manual opening of the doors when the car is stopped at a landing during a power failure. FIGURE 2 DOOR FULLY CLOSED MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ADJUSTING SIDE SLIDE 9 5.2. Crank arm and clutch link positions with door open While opening and closing the door, please move the door manually. Check for binding to ensure maximum bearing life. Referring to Figure 3, the best door opening operation occurs when the crank arm and the connecting link are roughly in a straight line (this holds the doors open against the force of the spring or reel closer). The clutch link is about horizontal and the car door is flush with the return jamb. If the door does not open flush with the return jamb, adjust the connecting link to bring the door half way to the correct position. Then close the door and adjust the crank arm for door closed position (see previous section). Reopen door and check opening. Repeat as necessary. FIGURE 3 DOOR FULLY OPENED MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 10 ADJUSTING CENTER PARTING CAR DOORS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. 6. ADJUSTING CENTER PARTING CAR DOORS We recommend adjusting the driven car door so that it over travels the center of the opening by 1/2”. This will allow the car door to match the hoistway door and jambs when fully open (if a double clutch system is used, center the doors). The car doors should not be closed hard against each other. Mark the door position on the header for easier reference and repeating. NOTE: Center parting doors should be set up as two separate operations. First, set up the left (clutch side) door and then the right (driven side) door. The door closed is the most important position. Always end adjustments by checking this position. 6.1. Crank arm and clutch link positions with door closed Do not have pressure on the meeting car doors; otherwise it will place unwanted stress on the arms and bearings. Mount the operator arms per appropriate template. To adjust, ensure the operator is closed against the stop and loosen the connecting link and crank arm bolts. Position the door being adjusted in the closed position and re-tighten all bolts. If necessary, move the bolts to new holes. Referring to Figure 5, with the doors fully closed, the connecting links should be about 1 1/2” from the horizontal centerline of the pulley. The clutch link should be at about 20 degrees above the horizontal as shown. This setting will help prevent slamming, yet still allow manual opening of the doors when the car is stopped at a landing during a power failure. FIGURE 5 DOOR FULLY CLOSED FIGURE 4 CLUTCH ALIGNMENT MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ADJUSTING CENTER 11 6.2. Crank arm and clutch link positions with doors open While opening and closing the door, please move the door manually. Check for binding to ensure maximum bearing life. As with side slide doors, the best door opening operation occurs when the crank arm and the connecting link are roughly in a straight line (this holds the doors open against the force of the spring or reel closer). The clutch link is about horizontal and the car door is flush with the return jamb. If the door does not open flush with the return jamb, adjust the connecting link to bring the door half way to the correct position. Then close the door and adjust the crank arm for door closed position (see previous section). Reopen door and check opening. Repeat as necessary. Referring to Figure 6, with the doors fully open, the connecting links should be about 1 1/2” apart. The clutch link should be no more than 10 degrees above the horizontal. FIGURE 6 DOOR FULLY OPENED MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 12 ADJUSTING CENTER PARTING CAR DOORS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. 6.3. Operator Data Tables for Side Slide and Center Parting doors MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ADJUSTING CENTER 13 MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 14 ADJUSTING CENTER PARTING CAR DOORS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ADJUSTING CENTER 15 MOVFR ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 16 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. 7. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS ADJUSTING INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE G.A.L. VARIABLE FREQUENCY CLOSED LOOP DOOR OPERATOR TYPE MOVFR 7.1. Overview MOVFR door operator can be purchased for either 115VAC or 230VAC. It is controlled by a variable voltage, variable frequency (VVVF) closed loop drive. The control includes a ½ HP 3-Ph AC Motor, a VVVF Drive, and a PC board. It features Keypad programming with digital display, door position optical cams, sequential Light Emitting Diodes (LED) for door speed positions, obstruction detection signal, and DPM Fault Monitor* signal. A Heavy Door Input and an Auxiliary Cam are also available, when needed. MOVFR accepts input control signals, Door Close Command (CLOSE), Door Open Command (OPEN), Nudging Command (NUDG.), Heavy Door Command (HEAVY) from 24 to 230V AC or DC**. The Output contacts rated at 10Amp, 230VAC, and they are: Door Close Limit (DCL), Door Open Limit (DOL), Re-Open (REOPEN), Door Protection Monitor (DPM), and Auxiliary (AUX). *: The Fault Monitor is a G.A.L. patented door lock and gate switch protection device. Its purpose is to meet the ASME A17.1 RULE 210.15 and CAN/CSA-B44-M90 RULE 3.12.1.5. **: If the input signal voltage is 60 volts or less, Jumpers on Input Modules must be removed. 7.2. Adjustment aids Switches, LEDs, small pushbuttons, and a Parameter Unit are available to aid the adjustment of the operator (see Figure 7). Two toggle switches and four small pushbuttons are provided to facilitate the adjusting procedure as described below: 1. RUN/CAM SETUP switch - The RUN position is for Normal operation. The CAM SETUP position allows adjusting the cams and turning on the appropriate LEDs without applying power to the motor. 2. AUTO/MAN. Switch - AUTO position is for Normal operation. The MAN. position allows opening and closing the door by means of the OPEN or CLOSE pushbutton. 3. OPEN or CLOSE pushbutton - These are used to open or close doors when the AUTO/MAN. switch is in the MAN. position. 4. NUDG. Pushbutton - This allows closing the door at a reduced speed (nudging speed) when the AUTO/MAN. switch is in the MAN. position and constant pressure is applied to CLOSE pushbutton & NUDG pushbutton. 5. HEAVY pushbutton - When the AUTO/MAN. switch is in the MAN. position, if a constant pressure is applied to the HEAVY pushbutton, it will work in conjunction with OPEN, CLOSE, or NUDG. pushbuttons to open, close or nudge the door. 6. On the drive, the Green LED indicates the drive has power, the Red LED indicates an Alarm has occurred and shutdown the drive. If this occurs, make a visual inspection of the door, and if there are no visible problems, place the AUTO/MAN. switch in the MAN. position and press the RESET key on the Parameter unit to Reset the MOVFR Drive. Then re-cycle power with the Main switch on the MOVFR drive. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 17 Make sure that all is clear before returning to AUTO mode. Use the Parameter unit to view the Alarm history. LED pilot lights: A Red LED is provided on each of the four input modules (OPEN, CLOSE, NUDG., HEAVY). Heavy input is optional and only available if ordered. Jumpers on the input modules must be removed if input signal voltage is 60 volts or less (see Figure 8). Note! LEDs on input modules use the power of the Elevator controller to turn them on, not the power of the MOVFR. In AUTO mode, appropriate LEDs must be lit for door(s) to open or close. Red LEDs for inputs Control signal Indicators The input jumpers must be removed if the input signal voltage is 60v or less. FIGURE 7 ADJUSTMENT TOGGLES AND PUSHBUTTONS FIGURE 8 INPUT MODULES MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 18 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. FIGURE 9 MOVFR BOARD Other LEDs described below are provided to indicate the position of the speed cams, limit cams and modes of operation. When a cam blocks an optical sensor, the function is activated and the corresponding LED turns on (see Figure 9). These LEDs are: 1. HSC: High Speed Close. 2. FSC: Final Speed Close. 3. DCL: Door Close Limit (DCL output relay is energized when the DCL LED light turns on). 4. SSO: Slow Start Open. 5. HSO: High Speed Open. 6. MSO: Medium Speed Open. 7. FSO: Final Speed Open. Note: The combination of Cam#1(SSO/FSO) and Cam#2(MSO) produces SSO, HSO, MSO, and FSO. See 7.7 CAM SETTINGS VS. DISTANCE for appropriate settings. 8. DOL: Door Open Limit (DOL output relay is energized when the DOL LED turns on). 9. HOLDING: Door is in DOL or DCL. (When the door is fully open or fully closed, a minimal amount of power is applied to the motor to prevent drifting). 10. NUDG: Door is closing at Reduced speed (Nudging). 11. RE-OPEN: Door re-opening features have activated (the RE-OPEN LED light turns on when RE-OPEN output relay is energized from Light Curtain, Stall Reverse, or Frequency Failure). 12. STALL REVERSE: In the close direction, if the door exceeds the Torque Limit set by Par. 9, the STALL REVERSE LED turns on and the RE-OPEN relay is energized. 13. FREQ. FAILURE: In the close direction, if the door exceeds the Speed Limit set by Par. 0, the FREQ. FAILURE LED will turn on and the RE-OPEN relay will be energized. 14. DPM (Door Protection Monitor): A car door closed contact for safety features such as G.A.L. Fault monitor (DPM LED light turns on when DPM relay is energized). 15. FAULT: If the FAULT LED light is on, it indicates that there is a Fault in the drive. 16. AUX: The AUX. LED & AUX Relay will turn on when the AUX cam is blocked. AUX. Cam and AUX. Relay are optional and available upon request. 17. RUN: For normal operation 18. CAM SETUP: For setup 19. AUTO: For auto mode 20. MAN: For manual mode 21. CLOSE: For manual close 22. OPEN: For manual open 23. NUDG: For manual nudge 24. HEAVY: For manual heavy door 25. LED1: Will be blinking with patterns described below MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 19 Toggle Switches RUN CAM SETUP AUTO Blinking 1 time for every second Blinking 3 times for every second MAN. Blinking 3 times for every second Blinking 3 times for every second Slow blinking, once for every second, indicates that the heartbeat of MCU is OK. Fast blinking, 3 times for every second, reminds users to switch back to AUTO mode before closing the enclosure. Parameter unit: Plug Parameter unit into the drive to change values of pertinent parameters (see Figure 11). CAN bus module: If Controller Area Network (CAN) Protocol (only used for GALaxy Controllers) is employed to communicate with the MOVFR, then a CANbus Module MOVFR-0502AN must be used. Input modules, output Relays and connector CN1 are no longer needed. The green LED1, on the MOVFR-0502AN, is used to indicate that Power is provided to the CANbus Module. COMM LED2: Will be blinking with patterns described below Status COMMUNICATION IS OK NO COMMUNICATION Blinking Pattern Blinking 1 time for every second ON (Solid) 7.3. Preliminary checks This procedure is to ensure that the motor turns in the correct direction and all speed signals are in the working order. A. Place the RUN/CAM SETUP switch in the RUN position and place the AUTO/MAN switch in the MAN. Position. B. With the door fully closed, press and hold the OPEN pushbutton while observing the door movement. If the motor turns in the wrong direction, turn Power OFF, swap any two of the three motor leads (U,V,W). The door should change speed as the various cams operate the speed controlling speed sensors. C. The door should start moving at low speed with the SSO sensor blocked and then accelerate to high Speed (HSO) as the SSO sensor is unblocked. Deceleration takes place when the MSO sensor is blocked, then more deceleration with the FSO sensor is blocked, and finally the DOL sensor is blocked and the HOLDING LED turns on. A little power will apply to the motor to hold doors open. D. When the door is fully opened, press and hold the CLOSE pushbutton. The door should start accelerating to high speed (HSC) and then decelerating as the FSC sensor is blocked. Finally, the DCL sensor is blocked and the HOLDING LED turns on. Again, a little power will apply to the motor to hold doors open. (See 7.7 CAM SETTING VS. DISTANCE). FIGURE 10 CANbus MODULE MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 20 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. FIGURE 11 PARAMETER UNIT 7.4. Parameter unit The parameter unit is a tool to assist users in the following tasks: • Changing speed values, acceleration, deceleration, torque, maximum closing speed, carrier frequency, and stall reverse limit. • Downloading and uploading programs to and from the drives. • Monitoring currents, voltages, speeds, inputs, outputs, and faults. • Resetting the drive. 7.5. Parameter unit navigation A. How to change parameters: Press . Enter a Parameter Number. Press . Enter a new Value. Press . Wait for the Completed Signal from the Display. B. How to read (COPY All Parameters) from the drive: Note 1 : The Parameter Unit is capable to store four Sets of Default Parameters and one set of Working Parameters. To Copy a Default Set of Parameters into the Working Set Parameters, see item 8th of Section F. Note 2 : To Transfer data from one drive to another, users must first READ(COPY) from the First Drive. Press . Press . Press . Wait for the Completed Signal from the Display. C. How to write (DOWNLOAD All Parameters) to the drive: Set RUN/CAM setup switch to CAM setup. Press . Press . Press . Wait for the Completed Signal from the Display. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 21 D. Default settings for the MOVFR drive: MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 22 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. E. Convenience keys: Press to check the Speed in Hz Example: Press to check Input & Output Signals. Inputs: Z: (Reserved) C: Door Close O: Door Open R: Reset V: Heavy Door L: Control Bit L M: Control Bit M H: Control Bit H Outputs: S: Over Speed T: Over Torque F: Fault Example: Press to check the recent Faults. Press or to view all the Faults Example: Press to check the Output Voltage. Example: Press to check the Output Current. Example: Press to Reset the Drive. F. The keys: Press the key will allow users to view, change, and reset to G.A.L. Default parameters. Press or to navigate through all the items in the VIEW section. Press to view an item. At any time, Press to get back to the Previous Display. Output HSC Frequency 19Hz Z C O R V L M H S T F 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Present Under Fault Voltage Output Voltage 132.00v Output Current .0.78A MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 23 1st. V/I/H Displays the Output Voltage, Output Current, Command Speed, and Actual Speed. 2nd. I/O Displays the Input and Output Signals ZCORVLMH STF 1= Activate 0= Deactivate (See the Convenience keys in part E) 3rd. Faults. (See the Convenience keys in part E) Press or to View all the Faults. 4th. Counters. There are 2 Counters. Counter 1 will count up to 9,999 times. Counter 2 will count up to 60,000 times. When Counter 1 reaches 9999,Counter 2 will increase 1 The total count will be 600,000,000 times. Press or to View Counter 1 or Counter 2. 5th. User List. The User List includes all the Default settings for the MOVFR drive in part D. Press , Press or to view all the Parameters in the User List. NOTE: Users can also change the Value of Parameters in this stage by doing the following: Press , Enter the new value, then Press . Press to get back to the Previous Display. 6th. Max. cl. Speed Press to view the Maximum Closing Speed. Press to get back to the Previous Display. 7th. Max. cl. Force Press to view the Maximum Closing Force. Press to get back to the Previous Display. 8th. GAL Defaults Press , Press or to pick one of the four sets of Parameters Standard C/P (Center Parting) Standard S/O (Side Opening) Waterproof C/P (Center Parting) Waterproof S/O (Side Opening) Set RUN/CAM SETUP switch to CAM SETUP Press to copy the chosen set of Parameters to the Working Set of Parameters MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 24 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. G. LED indicators: There are 7 LEDs on the Parameter Unit. DO, DC, NUD, HLD, PRG, FLT, OVT. DO=Door Open, DC=Door Close, NUD=Nudging, HLD=Holding, PRG=Programming Mode, FLT=Fault, OVT=Over Torque. These LEDs indicate the present status of the MOVFR. 7.6. Parameter adjustments CAUTION! All equipment must be installed and adjusted to meet Federal, State/Provincial, and Local Codes. NOTE 1: The closing Kinetic Energy is affected by the speed and the mass of the door. The closing Kinetic Energy must not exceed Code Limits. For more details about the Kinetic Energy of the G.A.L door operators, go to the section of Kinetic Energy & G.A.L. Door Operators of the link: http://www.gal.com/content/products/downloads/doors/operators/default.htm NOTE 2: The Closing Torque is affected by the Torque adjustment. The Closing Torque must not exceed Code Limits. NOTE 3: Whenever changing any value in the Closing Direction Parameters, the door should be rechecked to meet the Code requirement. A. Closing sequence: MAXIMUM CLOSE SPEED (Par. 0): This Parameter is the Limit of the Closing speed. The Default value of this Parameter is 30Hz. If the Closing speed is higher than 30Hz, the Drive will turn on the Frequency Failure (FF) output and activate the Reopen Relay. Users should bear in mind that the Reopen Relay Contact, once activated, will send the re-open signal to the Main Controller ONLY and will wait for the OPEN signal from the Main Controller to Reopen the door. MOVFR will NOT reopen the door by itself. HOLDING TORQUE (Par. 1): The Holding Torque is activated when the door reaches DOL or DCL. HOLDING SPEED (Par. 2): The Holding Speed is activated when the door reaches DOL or DCL. NOTE: The reason to apply the Holding Power when the door is fully closed or fully open is to prevent the door from drifting or rolling back. CAUTION! The Holding power should be less than 15W to prevent the motor from unnecessary heating, which would reduce its life. HIGH SPEED CLOSE – HSC (Par. 4): This is the highest speed for the overall Closing sequence. A higher value produces the faster speed. FINAL SPEED CLOSE – FSC (Par. 5): This is the Final Closing Speed. It should be set reasonably low so that when the DCL (Door Close Limit) and the Close Stop Roller are reached without slamming or bouncing. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 25 NUDGING SPEED (Par. 6): Nudging Speed is the reduced speed that is equal or less than 60% of the max. HSC. Nudging Speed only happens when DC (Door Close) and NUDG. (Nudging) input signals take place simultaneously. CLOSE ACCELERATION TIME (Par. 7): A higher value produces a slower acceleration rate for smoother operation. A lower value produces a faster acceleration rate for faster opening times. CLOSE DECELERATION TIME (Par. 8): Close Deceleration should be set so that the FSC is reached prior to the DCL and the Close Stop Roller position without bouncing. STALL REVERSE FORCE (Par. 9): The Default value of this Parameter is 1.5Amp. Whenever the current is above this value, the Drive will send a signal to turn on the STALL REVERSE LED and activate the REOPEN Relay. The range for this Parameter is 0-2Amp. If nuisance activation takes place, the value of this Parameter should be increased slightly. OVERLOAD (Par. 99) This is the Maximum Limit of the Motor Current. If the Motor Current exceeds this Limit, the Drive will be shutdown, generate the OVER CURRENT FAULT, and turn on the FAULT LED. Recycling the Power to MOVFR or pressing the RESET key of the Parameter Unit to Reset the Fault. However, a thorough inspection should be done before Resetting the Fault. B. Opening Sequence: QUICK STOP ON REVERSE (Par. 21): Parameter 21 determines how quick the closing door is stopped when a reopen signal is activated. The range of Parameter 21 is from 0 to 6Amp. The lower value setting will produce a longer time to stop before the door can reopen. When the reopen signal is applied, the door should not move more than 2 inches before it reopens. SLOW START OPEN – SSO (Par. 22): When the door starts to open, the value of Par. 22 is the speed at which the clutch engages the interlock rollers to unlock the hoistway door. A slower speed produces a smoother and quieter unlock. HIGH SPEED OPEN – HSO (Par. 23): This is the highest speed for the overall opening sequence. The higher value produces a faster speed. MEDIUM SPEED OPEN – MSO (Par. 24): This speed is used for a fast reopening in the final 1/3 to 1/4 of the opening. When properly adjusted, this speed has little or no effect during the full reopening cycle because the doors will decelerate through MSO zone. Virtually the doors will decelerate from HSO to FSO. FINAL SPEED OPEN – FSO (Par. 25) This is the Final Opening Speed. It should be set reasonably low so that the DOL (Door Open Limit) and the Open Stop Roller are reached without slamming or bouncing. OPEN ACCELERATION TIME (Par. 26). A higher value produces a slower acceleration rate for smoother operation. A lower value produces a faster acceleration rate for faster opening times. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 26 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. OPEN DECELERATION TIME (Par. 27). Open Deceleration should be set so that the FSC is reached prior to the DCL and the Close Stop Roller position without bouncing. SLOW SPEED TORQUE (Par. 28). This Parameter is set at 0 as a default value. The range of this Parameter is from 0 to 30%. It is a torque boost Parameter at low speed. It is a useful Parameter for the heavy doors, if needed. OPEN TORQUE (Par. 29) The Default value of this Parameter should be suitable for most doors. Nevertheless, the rule for adjustment for this Parameter is: A higher value will produce less torque, and vice versa. C. Carrier frequency: CARRIER FREQUENCY (Par. 51) The nominal frequency of the carrier wave is set by Parameter 51. The Default value is 10KHz. The MOVFR Drive is compliant with the CE regulation. However, if adjacent electronics, with poor EMI immunity, are affected by EMI of the MOVFR, users can lower the value of this Parameter to reduce the EMI level. The trade-off is the lower carrier frequency, the more audible noise will be produced by the motor. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 27 7.7. Speed profiles of the MOVFR MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 28 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. 7.8. Cam setting versus Distance MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 29 7.9. Rotational cam setting MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 30 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. 7.10. Interfacing between G.A.L. certified light curtain and MOVFR A. Procedure: To take full advantage of the MOVFR and simplify the REOPENING circuits for the Door Operators, the REOPEN relay in the MOVFR board should be used to Reopen the doors in cases of: • Exceeding the limit of the torque allowed. • Exceeding the limit of the speed allowed. • Obstructing the light curtain. The exceeding Torque and exceeding Speed features have already been built in the MOVFR board. Regarding the obstruction of the Infrared Light Curtains, the following illustration shows the interfacing procedure of a G.A.L. Certified Infra-Red Light Curtain and the G.A.L. MOVFR board. The following are the G.A.L. Certified Infrared Light Curtain Detectors, in alphabetical order, that are available from G.A.L Mfg. Corp (http://www.gal.com). Toll Free Phone: 1-877-425-3538 (877-GAL-ELEV) • Formula Systems • Janus • Scanguard • Tri-Tronics B. Operation: When obstruction on the edges occurs, the Reopen LED on the MOVFR will turn on and the Reopen relay will be activated. The Reopen contacts will send reopen signal to the main controller and wait for the DO (Door Open) Signal from the Main Controller to Reopen the door. Plug the enable chip into the socket U5 as shown. Make sure the RED mark is positioned in pin1 on left as shown. Call G.A.L. Mfg. Corp. to obtain the programmable DPPC-0001N enable chip. Remove jumper JP1 1 2 Plug the light curtain connectors into the mating connector CN4 & CN5. Note: connectors CN4 & CN5 are swappable. 3 Make sure that REOPEN contacts of the MOVFR are connected to the Main Controller. 4 MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 31 C. G.A.L. Certified Infrared Detector Edges Connection MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 32 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. 7.11. MOVFR connection diagram MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 33 7.12. Fault description and fault reset F01 HW Over Current The AC drive detects an abnormal increase in current. The maximum allowable hardware current is 300% (9A). When the drive output has exceeded this limit, the “F01” fault code will display on the parameter unit display. F02 Over Voltage The AC drive detects that the DC bus voltage has exceeded its maximum allowable value, 400V. When the DC bus voltage has exceeded this value, the “F02” fault code will display on the parameter unit display. F03 Heatsink OverTmp The AC drive temperature sensor detects excessive heat. When the Heat Sink temperature has exceeded 95oC, the “F03” fault code will display on the parameter unit display. F04 Drive Overload The AC drive detects excessive drive output current. The AC drive can withstand up to 150% of rated current (4.5A) for 1 minute. When this limit has been exceeded, the “F04” fault code will display on the parameter unit display. F07 Motor Overload The AC drive detects an excessive motor load. When the value of maximum allowable motor load, which is the setting value of Pr.#99 multiplied by 150% for 1 minute, has been exceeded, the “F07” fault code will display on the parameter unit display. F13 Ground Fault The AC drive output is abnormal. When the output terminal is grounded (short circuit current is 50% more than the AC drive rated current), the AC drive power module may be damaged. The short circuit protection is provided for AC drive protection, not user protection. F14 Under Voltage The AC drive detects that the DC bus voltage has fallen below its minimum value, 150VAC. When the input voltage has fallen below this value, the “F14” fault code will display on the parameter unit display. F33 Auto Reset Trials When the AC drive auto-resets a fault unsuccessfully, the “F33” fault code will display on the parameter unit display. F100 EEPROM failure When the internal memory IC cannot be programmed, the “F100” fault code will display on the parameter unit display. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 34 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. NOTE: All the above Faults are re-settable by changing the Value of Parameter 110 to 1 and using the following procedure: Set Par. 112 for the Number of Retries. Default Value:6 Range: 0  9 Increment: 1 After fault occurs, the AC drive can be reset/restarted automatically up to 10 times. Setting this parameter to 0 will disable the reset/restart operation after any fault has occurred. Set Par.113 for the Retry Waiting Time. Default Value: 2.5 Range: 0  120.0 Sec. Increment: 0.1 Sec. Sets the time between restart attempts when Auto Restart Tries is set to a value other than zero. Set Par. 114 for the Retry Selection. Default Value: 1023 Range: 0 1023 Increment: 1 Settings 1: Ground Fault can be auto reset 2: Over Voltage can be auto reset 4: Over Current can be auto reset 8: Low Voltage can be auto reset 16: Motor Over Load can be auto reset 32: Drive Over Temperature can be auto reset 64: Drive Over Load can be auto reset 128: Current sensor Broken can be auto reset 256: EEPROM Broken can be auto reset 512: Software Over Voltage can be auto reset Example: If a “Ground Fault”, “Over Current” and “Drive Over Load” needs to be auto reset then Par 114 should be set to 69 (1+4+64). The default value is “1023” which means all faults can be auto reset. Set Par. 115 for Reset Fault Default Value: 0 Range: 0  2 Increment: 1 Settings 0: Idle State 1: Resets the active fault but does not clear any fault buffer 2: Resets the active fault and clears all fault buffers to “0” Resets a fault and clears the fault buffer. Used primarily to clear a fault over network communications. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 35 7.13. Applications for the heavy input The door operator may operate two different hoist-way doors (one door is heavier than the other) in one elevator. As a result, the setting of Torque and Speed of one door may not be applicable for the other door. More importantly, it may be a code violation issue due to the constraint of the kinetic energy and the Torque allowance. The HEAVY input will resolve this issue. When the HEAVY input is activated, the Drive will operate with a different set of Parameters for the heavier door. In order to gain the access to the HEAVY set of Parameters, change the value of the Parameter 110 from 0 to 1. The HEAVY set of Parameters is located as follows: Pr.11 Heavy Door Close Holding Torque Unit: 0.1 % Default: 3 % Range: 0 ~ 30 % Increase the setting when the motor torque in low speed range is insufficient. Pr.12 Heavy Door Close Holding Speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 2.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.13 Heavy Door Close Torque (Base Freq.)Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 173.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz This parameter is used to adjust the AC drive output (voltage, frequency) to the motor rating. Pr.14 Heavy Door High Speed Close (HSC) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 19.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.15 Heavy Final Speed Close (FSC) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 5.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 36 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. Pr.16 Heavy Door Nudging Speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 9.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.17 Heavy Door Close Acceleration Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 6.0 Range: 0 ~ 320.0 Sec The Acceleration time is used to determine the time required for the AC drive to ramp from 0 Hz to its reference frequency (Pr.50). Pr.18 Heavy Door Close Deceleration Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 10.0 Range: 0 ~ 320.0 Sec The Deceleration time is used to determine the time required for the AC drive to decelerate from the reference frequency (Pr.50) down to 0 Hz. Pr.19 Heavy Door Stall Reverse Force (output current detection level) Unit: (0.1 %) Default: 1.2A Range: 0 ~ 200.0 %rated If the output current remains higher than this setting during AC drive operation, the output current detection signal is on from the open collector output terminal of the AC drive. Pr.31 Heavy Door Quick Stop on Reverse Unit: 0.1 A Default: 2.0A Range: 0~180 %rated This parameter determines the level of the DC braking current output to the motor during stopping. Pr.32 Heavy Door Slow Start Open (SSO) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 5.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.33 Heavy Door High Speed Open (HSO) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 45.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.34 Heavy Door Medium Speed Open (MSO) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 20.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.35 Heavy Door Final Speed Open (FSO) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 5.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 37 Pr.36 Heavy Door Open Acceleration Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 4.0 Sec Range: 0~400.0 Sec The Acceleration time is used to determine the time required for the AC drive to ramp from 0 Hz to its reference frequency (Pr.50). Pr.37 Heavy Door Open Deceleration Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 10.0 Sec Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Sec The Deceleration time is used to determine the time required for the AC drive to decelerate from the reference frequency (Pr.50) down to 0 Hz. Pr.38 Heavy Door Open Slow Speed Torque Unit: 0.1 % Default: 0 % Range: 0 ~ 30 % Increase the setting when motor torque in low speed range is insufficient. Pr.39 Heavy Door Open Torque (Second V/F (base frequency) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 80.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400 Hz Increase the setting when motor torque in low speed range is insufficient. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 38 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. Pr.45 Heavy Door DC Injection Brake Operation Frequency Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 60 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz This parameter determines the frequency that the DC braking will begin to output once frequency is reached during deceleration. Pr.46 Heavy Door DC Injection Brake Operation Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 1.0 Sec Range: 0 ~ 10.0 Sec This parameter determines the duration that the DC braking current will be applied to the motor during stopping. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 39 7.1.4 Parameters list Pr.0 Max. Close Speed (Close Speed detection) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 30.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz The output frequency detection signal is on when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the setting value. Pr.1 Close Holding Torque (torque boost) Unit: 0.1 % Default: 3 % Range: 0 ~ 30 % Increase the setting when motor torque in low speed range is insufficient. Pr.2 Close Holding Speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 2.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.3 Close Torque (Base Freq.) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 173.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz This parameter is used to adjust the AC drive output (voltage, frequency) to the motor rating. Pr.4 High Speed Close (HSC) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 19.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.5 Final Speed Close (FSC) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 5.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.6 Nudging Speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 9.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.7 Close Acceleration Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 6.0 Range: 0 ~ 320.0 Sec The Acceleration time is used to determine the time required for the AC drive to ramp from 0 Hz to its reference frequency (Pr.50). Pr.8 Close Deceleration Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 10.0 Range: 0 ~ 320.0 Sec The Deceleration time is used to determine the time required for the AC drive to decelerate from the reference frequency (Pr.50) down to 0 Hz. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 40 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. Pr.9 Stall Reverse Force (output current detection level) Unit: (0.1 %) Default: 1.2A Range: 0 ~ 200.0 %rated If the output current remains higher than this setting during AC drive operation, the output current detection signal is on from the open collector output terminal of the AC drive. Pr.11 Heavy Door Close Holding Torque Unit: 0.1 % Default: 3 % Range: 0 ~ 30 % Increase the setting when the motor torque in low speed range is insufficient. Pr.12 Heavy Door Close Holding Speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 2.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.13 Heavy Door Close Torque (Base Freq.) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 173.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz This parameter is used to adjust the AC drive output (voltage, frequency) to the motor rating. Pr.14 Heavy Door High Speed Close (HSC) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 19.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.15 Final Speed Close (FSC) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 5.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.16 Heavy Door Nudging Speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 9.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.17 Heavy Door Close Acceleration Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 6.0 Range: 0 ~ 320.0 Sec The Acceleration time is used to determine the time required for the AC drive to ramp from 0 Hz to its reference frequency (Pr.50). Pr.18 Heavy Door Close Deceleration Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 10.0 Range: 0 ~ 320.0 Sec The Deceleration time is used to determine the time required for the AC drive to decelerate from the reference frequency (Pr.50) down to 0 Hz. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 41 Pr.19 Heavy Door Stall Reverse Force (output current detection level) Unit: (0.1 %) Default: 1.2A Range: 0 ~ 200.0 %rated If the output current remains higher than this setting during AC drive operation, the output current detection signal is on from the open collector output terminal of the AC drive. Pr.20 Open Speed detection Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 30.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz The output frequency detection signal is on when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the setting value. Pr.21 Quick Stop on Reverse Unit: 0.1 A Default: 2.0A Range: 0~180 %rated This parameter determines the level of the DC braking Current output to the motor during stopping. Pr.22 Slow Start Open (SSO) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 5.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.23 High Speed Open (HSO) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 45.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.24 Medium Speed Open (MSO) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 20.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.25 Final Speed Open (FSO) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 5.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.26 Open Acceleration Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 4.0 Sec Range: 0~400.0 Sec The Acceleration time is used to determine the time required for the AC drive to ramp from 0 Hz to its reference frequency (Pr.50). MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 42 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. Pr.27 Open Deceleration Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 10.0 Sec Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Sec The Deceleration time is used to determine the time required for the AC drive to decelerate from the reference frequency (Pr.50) down to 0 Hz. Pr.28 Open Slow Speed Torque Unit: 0.1 % Default: 0 % Range: 0 ~ 30 % Increase the setting when motor torque in low speed range is insufficient. Pr.29 Open Torque (Second V/F (base frequency) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 80.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400 Hz Increase the setting when motor torque in low speed range is insufficient. Pr.31 Heavy Door Quick Stop on Reverse Unit: 0.1 A Default: 2.0A Range: 0~180 %rated This parameter determines the level of the DC braking Current output to the motor during stopping. Pr.32 Heavy Door Slow Start Open (SSO) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 5.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.33 Heavy Door High Speed Open (HSO) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 45.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.34 Heavy Door Medium Speed Open (MSO) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 20.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.35 Heavy Door Final Speed Open (FSO) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 5.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz Pr.36 Heavy Door Open Acceleration Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 4.0 Sec Range: 0~400.0 Sec The Acceleration time is used to determine the time required for the AC drive to ramp from 0 Hz to its reference frequency (Pr.50). MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 43 Pr.37 Heavy Door Open Deceleration Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 10.0 Sec Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Sec The Deceleration time is used to determine the time required for the AC drive to decelerate from the reference frequency (Pr.50) down to 0 Hz. Pr.38 Heavy Door Open Slow Speed Torque Unit: 0.1 % Default: 0 % Range: 0 ~ 30 % Increase the setting when motor torque in low speed range is insufficient. Pr.39 Heavy Door Open Torque (Second V/F (base frequency) Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 80.0 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400 Hz Increase the setting when motor torque in low speed range is insufficient. Pr.40 DC Injection Brake Operation Frequency Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 60 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz This parameter determines the frequency that the DC braking will begin to output once frequency is reached during deceleration. Pr.41 DC Injection Brake Operation Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 1.0 Sec Range: 0 ~ 10.0 Sec This parameter determines the duration that the DC braking current will be applied to the motor during stopping. Pr.45 Heavy Door DC Injection Brake Operation Frequency Unit: 0.1 Hz Default: 60 Hz Range: 0 ~ 400.0 Hz This parameter determines the frequency that the DC braking will begin to output once frequency is reached during deceleration. Pr.46 Heavy Door DC Injection Brake Operation Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 1.0 Sec Range: 0 ~ 10.0 Sec This parameter determines the duration that the DC braking current will be applied to the motor during stopping. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL 44 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS | DOC-0015N | G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. Pr.51 Max. Carrier Frequency Carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform Unit: 0.1k Hz Default: 11.0k Hz Range: 2.0 ~ 15.0kHz This parameter determines the maximum carrier frequency of the AC drive. From the table, the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the electromagnetic noise, heat dissipation of the AC drive, and the acoustic noise to the motor. Pr.67 Door Zone Functionality Unit: 1 Default: 0 Range: 0 ~ 1 0: Disable Door Zone Functionality 1: Enable Door Zone Functionality Pr.99 Motor Over Load Current Unit: 0.1 A Default: 2.5 A Range: 0 ~ 6 A The setting is proportional to the rated current of motor. Pr.110 User Group Read Selection Unit: 1 Default: 0 Range: 0 ~ 9999 When the setting value is 1, user can view and select parameters Pr.0~46, 51, 67, 99, 110 and 112~115. If the setting value is set to any other value (not 1), user can view and select parameters Pr.0~9, 20~29, 51 and 110 only. Pr.112 Number of Retries Unit: 1 Default: 6 Range: 0 ~ 9 After a fault occurs, the AC drive can be reset/restarted automatically up to 10 times. Setting this parameter to 0 will disable the reset/restart operation after any fault has occurred. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTING MANUAL G.A.L. Manufacturing Corp. | DOC-0015N ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 45 Pr.113 Retry Waiting Time Unit: 0.1 Sec Default: 2.5 Sec Range: 0 ~ 120.0 Sec Sets the time between restart attempts when Auto Restart Tries is set to a value other than zero. Pr.114 Retry Selection Unit: 1 Default: 1023 Range: 0 ~ 1023 1: Ground Fault can be auto reset 2: Over Voltage can be auto reset 4: Over Current can be auto reset 8: Low Voltage can be auto reset 16: Motor Over Load can be auto reset 32: Drive Over Temperature can be auto reset 64: Drive Over Load can be auto reset 128: Current sensor Broken can be auto reset 256: EEPROM Broken can be auto reset 512: Software Over Voltage can be auto reset If a “Ground Fault”, “Over Current” and “Drive Over Load” needs to be auto reset then Par114 should be set to 69 (1+4+64). The default value is “1023” which means all faults can be auto reset. Pr.115 Reset Fault Unit: 1 Default: 0 Range: 0 ~ 2 0: Idle State 1: Resets the active fault but does not clear any fault buffer 2: Resets the active fault and clears all fault buffers to “0” Resets a fault and clears the fault buffer. Used primarily to clear a fault over network communications. 7.1.5 How to replace the drive 1. Disconnect the door operator power from the machine room. 2. Flip ON-OFF switch on operator board to OFF position and the AUTO-MAN switch to the MAN position. Wait 10 minutes for the drive’s internal capacitor to completely discharge. 3. Unplug the ribbon cable from the drive. 4. Unplug the green power connector. 5. Remove drive mounting screws. 6. Install the new drive. 7. Plug in the green power connector. 8. Plug in the ribbon cable to the drive. 9. Reapply power to the drive but leave the switch in the MAN position for now. 10. WRITE the parameters from the parameter unit into the drive as explained in section 7.5. 11. Check door operation with the OPEN-CLOSE switch before returning the system to AUTO. MOVFR DOOR OPERATOR Parameter Unit with built-in diagnostics. Information now in plain English. Capable of holding 5 complete sets of parameters. Contractors can store one working set and all 4 GAL defaults (SS/2 SP/CP/2 SPCP). Optional ‘heavy door’ input. Now you can maximize door performance and still meet the kinetic energy requirements found in ASME A17.1 - 2000 + codes. Plug & Play Door Protection. No longer a need to locate, mount, or wire a power supply on the car top. GAL offers Formula Systems and Tri-Tronics edges at very attractive prices. Edges bought from GAL plug directly into the MOVFR operator, saving hours on installation. Closed Loop regulated speed via motor performance feedback. Perfect consistency from floor to floor. Automatically adjusts for wind and door conditions. Keypad Programming allows complete control for all speeds, torques, acceleration, and deceleration. Download all operating parameters from one operator for easy upload to all others. Incredibly fast and easy fine tuning, especially on multi-car banks. LED indication of all inputs and outputs. Mechanic friendly. Eliminates time spent trouble shooting. LED indication for every speed zone during open and close cycles. Test Push Buttons for open, close, and nudging. Allows testing of the mechanical set up before running on automatic. Only 3 Inputs needed: Door Open, Door Close, and Nudging (optional input for ‘heavy door’). Minimize wiring time. Universal Voltage Inputs will accept 24 to 300 volts, AC, DC, or dry set contacts. Can adapt to the output of virtually any elevator control. Perfect for modernizations. Water Resistant model available. Controls encased in gasketed housing. Motor rated for ‘wash down’ duty. Water resistant grommets for all wiring. Heavy Duty 1/2 HP motor. Can handle any application. Non Contact optical couplers (with available spare for extra functions). Substantially lowers routine maintenance. GAL Quality ● GAL Dependability ● GAL Support Phone: Fax: Web: Email: Toll Free: 718-292-9000 718-292-2034 www.gal.com info@gal.com 1-877-425-3538 50 East 153rd Street Bronx, NY 10451 GAL Manufacturing Company LLC Phone: Fax: Web: Email: Toll Free: 416-747-7967 416-747-9035 www.galcanada.com info@galcanada.com 1-888-425-2262 6500 Gottardo Court Mississauga, NO L5T 2A2 GAL Canada Elevator Products Phone:Fax:Web:Toll Free: 314-533-5700 314-533-5720 www.couriondoors.com 1-800-533-5760 3044 Lambdin Ave. St. Louis, Missouri 63115 Courion Phone: Fax: Web: 626-443-8616 626-443-8647 www.bore-max.com 3380 Gilman Road El Monte, CA 91732 Bore-Max Corporation 2017 Phone: Fax: Web: Email: 217-222-0466 217-222-0493 www.hollisterwhitney.com info@hollisterwhitney.com 2603 N 24th Street Quincy, IL 62305 Hollister-Whitney Elevator Corporation P.O Box 723 Snow Camp, North Carolina 27349 Tel: 919.903.0189 Fax: 336.232.9789 www.ResoluteElevator.com EECO Manufacturing Quality Control, is an essential and integral part of our manufacturing process. Every phase of production is monitored and checked to assure that each jack unit is built and assembled in accordance with engineering and customer specifications to meet the quality standards required by Elevator Equipment Corporation. From the initial process of material in the door, to the final process of placing the product on the truck, you can be assured that our high quality standards are met and that the finished product meets your requirements. The Electronic Leak Monitoring System is designed to detect the presence of a liquid in the space between the jack cylinder and the sealed PVC liner, and differentiates between oil and water which provides continual monitoring, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Built in LED lights indicate the presence of liquid. If oil is detected a buzzer will sound as an added indication. The control box can be tied into the controller to shut the system down, or to a phone system, to provide notice of a possible leak in the jack cylinder. EECO specializes in Jack Unit Replacement. We can provide an exact replacement, either piston, cylinder or complete jack units, regardless of original make or manufacturer. Before 1972 many companies installed hydraulic elevators with flat bottom in-ground jack units, many without any corrosion protection at all. Failures on these older designs may cause rupturing of the cylinder and uncontrolled decent of the elevator. Today's ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Section 8.6.5.8 requires single bottom jack units (cylinders) to be replaced with double bottom cylinders. Quality Assurance Jack, Piston or Cylinder Replacement Electronic Leak Monitoring System Cylinder Joint Types Butt WeldSlip FitThreaded APINo Weld Threaded Hydraulic Elevator Jack Unit Quotation Request / Order Form Date ____________ Date Required ____________ Quantity Required ______  In-ground  Holeless  Telescopic  Direct Acting  Cantilever  1:2 Roped  Complete Jack Unit  Cylinder Only  with Head  Seamless  Piston Only  with Head/Flange  Seamless  Single Piece  Multi-Piece No. of Sections ________ or Longest Section ________  API Threaded  Slip Weld  No Weld Threaded  Butt Weld Jack Unit Details  Platen Plate or  Isolated Platen  Pit Channels &/or  Buffers  PRV  NPT  Grooved  Shut Off _____ qty  NPT  Grooved Jack Unit Accessories Job Specifications Capacity __________ lbs_ Car Weight __________ lbs_ Piston Weight __________ lbs_ Total Gross __________ lbs_ Car Speed __________ fpm Piston Diameter __________ in__ or Circumference __________ in__ Wall Thickness __________ in__ Cylinder Diameter __________ in__ or Circumference __________ in__ Existing Casing Diameter __________ in__ Strike Plate Thickness __________ in__ Overhead __________ ft __________ in__ Total Floor Travel __________ ft __________ in__ Pit Depth __________ ft __________ in__ Top Overtravel __________ in__ with piston fully extended__ Bottom Overtravel ___________ in__ Runby, Spring Compression, and Clearance__  New Installation  Modernization  Replacement  Repair  Out of Service  Standard Paint  Tape Wrap  Epoxy Paint Coats/Layers ________ qty  Sealed PVC  Sch. 40  Sch. 80  Flexible Liner  Evacuation System  Electronic Leak Monitoring System  Provisions for Corrosion Prevention Compound  Buy American Act Requirement  Spare Packing Set  Provisions for Piston Gripper  Scavenger System  Biodegradable (Vegetable) Oil Isolation Thickness _______ ft _______ in_ Pick Up Point _______ ft _______ in_ (IT) (PUP) Holeless DimensionsIn-ground Dimensions (TPH) (BH) (PPT) (OL) (PCH) (DBC) Total Platform Height ________ in_ Bolster Height ________ in_ Platen Plate Thickness ________ in_ Outlet Location ________ in_ Pit Channel Height ________ in_ Distance Between Channels ________ in_  Future Travel Stop Ring ________ in  Jack Steadier Brackets ________ qty  Piston Clamps ________ qty  Lifting Clamps ________ qty Contact Sales for more Information Call: (888) 577-EECO (3326) Fax: (888) 577-3116 Email: sales@eecomail.com Visit: www.elevatorequipment.com Outlet Orientation  Parallel or  Perpendicular to Pit Channels Outlet Size ______ in  NPT  Grooved Special Requirements ______________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ Company ___________________________________________________ Address ___________________________________________________ City __________________________ .St. ______ Zip __________ Project Name ___________________________________________________ Contact ________________________________________________ Phone ________________ Ext. ______ Fax ________________ Email ________________________________________________ Ship Date Required _________________ Customer Information Provide data as complete as possible. Our ability to provide proper equipment depends upon the completeness and accuracy of the data that you furnish. FS-005Rev. 8/17/12 Hydraulic Jack Units Comparison PJR Series LJ SeriesElevator Equipment Corporation (EECO) has been manufacturing hydraulic elevator equipment since 1946, and is one of the leading suppliers in the industry for hydraulic jack units and replacement cylinders and pistons. EECO can provide jack units for any application, from small capacity residential to the largest freight elevators. EECO has over 30 standard size jack units with many piston wall thicknesses available to meet your predetermined specifications or our engineering and sales staff can work with you to determine which EECO Jack Unit is right for your application. All EECO jack units are manufactured with precision equipment, experienced production personnel, and a knowledgeable engineering staff to produce a quality product for our customers. The latest CNC equipment and technology is utilized to assure strict adherence to essential dimensions and tolerances. All EECO products are designed and manufactured in accordance with the Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, ASME A17.1/CSA B44. With years of testing and field study, EECO has designed jack units that are unparalleled in the industry for performance and reliability. The primary objective of Elevator Equipment Corporation is to provide a quality product that consistently meets or exceeds the contractual demands and expectations of our customers. Please see back page for reproducible request for quote form. EECO manufacturing facilities are located on the west coast in Los Angeles, California, and in the mid-west in Richmond, Indiana to provide prompt coast to coast service and support. For more information about EECO Hydraulic Jack Units Contact Us! Monday - Friday 8:00 am EST - 4:30 p.m. PST 888-577-EECO (3326) or email us at sales@eecomail.com For more details anytime visit us on the web www.elevatorequipment.com EECO can provide special size jack units to meet your requirements! Call us today for a quote: (888) 577-EECO! TJR & TJ3 Series To determine the proper size required, and maximum gross load versus travel or for other inquiries about collapsed height or bore hole requirements contact EECO. It is our goal to deliver a jack unit when needed. If rush delivery is required, EECO can manufacture and ship certain jack units in as little as 48 hours. Contact EECO for current lead times. Delivery & Lead Times SINGLE STAGE Single stage jack units (PJR and LJ series) consist of a single piston in a cylinder with head bearing and packing gland at the upper end where the piston collapses into the cylinder. Single stage jacks are designed for "guided" applications only, where the Jack unit is rigidly supported and guided through the use of guide rails and guide shoes. PJR jacks are available from 2.75" to 8.5" (70 to 220 mm) piston diameter, in a wide range of wall thicknesses. LJ jacks are available from 9.5" to 20" (241 to 508 mm) piston diameter, in a wide range of wall thicknesses. They can be provided in one section up to 70 ft (21 m). Multi-section jack units can be provided in as many sections as required for the application. Single stage jacks are designed for in-ground and holeless cantilever or dual system applications. PJR series: 680 psi (46.9 bar) maximum working pressure LJ series: 500 psi (34.5 bar) maximum working pressure TWO & THREE STAGE TELESCOPIC Two stage telescopic jack units (TJR series) consist of upper and lower pistons, a cylinder, and a head bearing and packing gland for each piston. The lower piston is fitted with an additional packing gland at the lower end which rides against the internally honed cylinder. Three stage telescopic jack units (TJ3 series) consist of upper, intermediate, and lower pistons, a cylinder, and a head bearing and packing gland for each piston. The intermediate and lower pistons are fitted with additional packing glands at their lower ends which ride against the internally honed cylinder and lower piston. All telescopic jacks have a synchronous design where all pistons raise and lower at the same speed and at the same time. Telescopic jacks are designed for "guided" applications only, where the Jack unit is rigidly supported and guided through the use of guide rails and guide shoes. In some applications a piston follower guide may be required on all moving heads to meet code requirements. (Contact EECO). Two stage telescopic jacks are available from 1.6" to 4.5" (41 to 114 mm) upper piston diameter, in a wide range of wall thicknesses. Three stage telescopic jacks are available from 1.6" to 2.5" (41 to 64 mm) upper piston diameter. Telescopic jacks are available in one section only (no multi-section) Two stage telescopic jacks are designed for in-ground and holeless cantilever or dual system applications. Three stage telescopic jacks are designed for only holeless cantilever or dual system applications. TJR series: 1200 psi (82.7 bar) maximum working pressure Designed for operating temperatures up to 150°F (65°C) maximum. Recommended operating temperature is 65° to 95°F (18° to 35°C). All EECO jack units are designed and manufactured in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. All steel parts are fabricated and machined from high strength carbon steel. All welding is in accordance with the requirements of Part 8 of ASME A17.1/CSA B44. EECO welding is CWB certified. The jack heads are designed for ease of disassembly when repacking. An oil collection groove is provided and arrangement is included to connect an oil drain line to catch and reclaim oil that collects in the groove (it is necessary for the piston to carry a film of oil through the packing in order to provide smooth and quiet operation). The packing gland arrangement consists of a "pressure balanced" "U" type seal, a bearing and a wiper ring. Seals are designed for 150°F (65°C) maximum operating temperature. Recommended good brand of ISO VG 32 turbine oil with a viscosity of 150 ssu @ 100o F (38o C). A biodegradable (vegetable) oil is acceptable if it meets the same specifications. The upper end of the piston is fitted with a drilled and tapped plate, to receive a standard bolt for attachment to the platen plate (special mounting arrangements can be provided). The bottom of the piston is closed with a steel plate and is fitted with a stop ring to prevent the piston from leaving the cylinder. The piston is ground and polished to a surface finish of 15 to 20 µin (.38 to .50 µm). Allowable variation in diameter after polishing is ± .015" (.381 mm). Multi-section pistons are joined with an internally threaded coupling, using Acme type thread for ease of assembly. All sections are assembled, sanded, and polished across the joints to ensure a matching surface. Jack units manufactured for in-ground, or partial in-ground, installations are furnished with a safety bulkhead and seamless steel pipe cap at the bottom of the cylinder. Holeless units include a flat steel mounting plate, all in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. Bleeder plugs are included to purge air from the jack unit. Standard pit supports are welded to the cylinder for mounting to pit channels when required (various designs can be provided to suit any requirement). A threaded or grooved oil line connection is provided. All cylinders are thoroughly cleaned, inspected, and tested for oil leaks; and then painted with a heavy coat of an anti-corrosive material. EECO offers several types of cylinder joints: 1. *API threaded coupling up through 16" (406 mm) cylinder OD. 2. *Slip-fit (slide together coupling, no threads). 3. *Butt-weld (with beveled ends for welding in field and "knock-off" pipe couplings for bolting the sections together during assembly and welding). * EECO ADVISES JOINTS MUST BE WELDED AFTER ASSEMBLY. 4. *No weld threaded coupling up through 10.75" (273 mm) cylinder OD. EECO can provide optional types of cylinder protection beyond the standard coating material, including: 1. Tape wrap (polyvinyl chloride tape), wrapped to a minimum of 20 mm thickness, or more as required. 2. Special epoxy paint. 3. PVC pipe, installed by an "Omega" style adapter ring and sealed at the top, with inspection ports as required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44. PVC is available as schedule 40 or schedule 80 and is furnished in the number of sections as required, with a pipe end cap for sealing the lower end. Other connection types available. Also available is an Electronic Leak Monitoring System for the sealed PVC cylinder protection. Other means of protection available are a Flexible Liner, or Corrosion Prevention Compound. Contact EECO for more details about all available corrosion protection options. Jack Types Description of Jack Unit Size Application Pressure Rating Temperature Material & Welding Head Bearing & Packing Gland Piston Cylinder Cylinder Joints Corrosion Protection Double Bearing - Double bearing jack units consist of a single piston in a cylinder with a head bearing and packing gland at the upper end. An additional support bearing is located below the head bearing to allow the piston to carry an eccentric (off center) load without external guides. These jacks are normally used in applications that are not within the scope of ASME A17.1/CSA B44 however, EECO double bearing jack units are still designed in accordance to these guidelines. In addition to hydraulic elevators EECO can provide jack units for any number of applications in other industries. Contact EECO for assistance with your custom engineered hydraulic jack requirements. Custom Applications PJR Series Cut Away Specifications TJR / TJ3 Overtravel Recommendations NOTE: All values and dimensions are subject to change without notice. TJR-250 Hydraulic Jack Units Comparison PJR Series LJ SeriesElevator Equipment Corporation (EECO) has been manufacturing hydraulic elevator equipment since 1946, and is one of the leading suppliers in the industry for hydraulic jack units and replacement cylinders and pistons. EECO can provide jack units for any application, from small capacity residential to the largest freight elevators. EECO has over 30 standard size jack units with many piston wall thicknesses available to meet your predetermined specifications or our engineering and sales staff can work with you to determine which EECO Jack Unit is right for your application. All EECO jack units are manufactured with precision equipment, experienced production personnel, and a knowledgeable engineering staff to produce a quality product for our customers. The latest CNC equipment and technology is utilized to assure strict adherence to essential dimensions and tolerances. All EECO products are designed and manufactured in accordance with the Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, ASME A17.1/CSA B44. With years of testing and field study, EECO has designed jack units that are unparalleled in the industry for performance and reliability. The primary objective of Elevator Equipment Corporation is to provide a quality product that consistently meets or exceeds the contractual demands and expectations of our customers. Please see back page for reproducible request for quote form. EECO manufacturing facilities are located on the west coast in Los Angeles, California, and in the mid-west in Richmond, Indiana to provide prompt coast to coast service and support. For more information about EECO Hydraulic Jack Units Contact Us! Monday - Friday 8:00 am EST - 4:30 p.m. PST 888-577-EECO (3326) or email us at sales@eecomail.com For more details anytime visit us on the web www.elevatorequipment.com EECO can provide special size jack units to meet your requirements! Call us today for a quote: (888) 577-EECO! TJR & TJ3 Series To determine the proper size required, and maximum gross load versus travel or for other inquiries about collapsed height or bore hole requirements contact EECO. It is our goal to deliver a jack unit when needed. If rush delivery is required, EECO can manufacture and ship certain jack units in as little as 48 hours. Contact EECO for current lead times. Delivery & Lead Times SINGLE STAGE Single stage jack units (PJR and LJ series) consist of a single piston in a cylinder with head bearing and packing gland at the upper end where the piston collapses into the cylinder. Single stage jacks are designed for "guided" applications only, where the Jack unit is rigidly supported and guided through the use of guide rails and guide shoes. PJR jacks are available from 2.75" to 8.5" (70 to 220 mm) piston diameter, in a wide range of wall thicknesses. LJ jacks are available from 9.5" to 20" (241 to 508 mm) piston diameter, in a wide range of wall thicknesses. They can be provided in one section up to 70 ft (21 m). Multi-section jack units can be provided in as many sections as required for the application. Single stage jacks are designed for in-ground and holeless cantilever or dual system applications. PJR series: 680 psi (46.9 bar) maximum working pressure LJ series: 500 psi (34.5 bar) maximum working pressure TWO & THREE STAGE TELESCOPIC Two stage telescopic jack units (TJR series) consist of upper and lower pistons, a cylinder, and a head bearing and packing gland for each piston. The lower piston is fitted with an additional packing gland at the lower end which rides against the internally honed cylinder. Three stage telescopic jack units (TJ3 series) consist of upper, intermediate, and lower pistons, a cylinder, and a head bearing and packing gland for each piston. The intermediate and lower pistons are fitted with additional packing glands at their lower ends which ride against the internally honed cylinder and lower piston. All telescopic jacks have a synchronous design where all pistons raise and lower at the same speed and at the same time. Telescopic jacks are designed for "guided" applications only, where the Jack unit is rigidly supported and guided through the use of guide rails and guide shoes. In some applications a piston follower guide may be required on all moving heads to meet code requirements. (Contact EECO). Two stage telescopic jacks are available from 1.6" to 4.5" (41 to 114 mm) upper piston diameter, in a wide range of wall thicknesses. Three stage telescopic jacks are available from 1.6" to 2.5" (41 to 64 mm) upper piston diameter. Telescopic jacks are available in one section only (no multi-section) Two stage telescopic jacks are designed for in-ground and holeless cantilever or dual system applications. Three stage telescopic jacks are designed for only holeless cantilever or dual system applications. TJR series: 1200 psi (82.7 bar) maximum working pressure Designed for operating temperatures up to 150°F (65°C) maximum. Recommended operating temperature is 65° to 95°F (18° to 35°C). All EECO jack units are designed and manufactured in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. All steel parts are fabricated and machined from high strength carbon steel. All welding is in accordance with the requirements of Part 8 of ASME A17.1/CSA B44. EECO welding is CWB certified. The jack heads are designed for ease of disassembly when repacking. An oil collection groove is provided and arrangement is included to connect an oil drain line to catch and reclaim oil that collects in the groove (it is necessary for the piston to carry a film of oil through the packing in order to provide smooth and quiet operation). The packing gland arrangement consists of a "pressure balanced" "U" type seal, a bearing and a wiper ring. Seals are designed for 150°F (65°C) maximum operating temperature. Recommended good brand of ISO VG 32 turbine oil with a viscosity of 150 ssu @ 100o F (38o C). A biodegradable (vegetable) oil is acceptable if it meets the same specifications. The upper end of the piston is fitted with a drilled and tapped plate, to receive a standard bolt for attachment to the platen plate (special mounting arrangements can be provided). The bottom of the piston is closed with a steel plate and is fitted with a stop ring to prevent the piston from leaving the cylinder. The piston is ground and polished to a surface finish of 15 to 20 µin (.38 to .50 µm). Allowable variation in diameter after polishing is ± .015" (.381 mm). Multi-section pistons are joined with an internally threaded coupling, using Acme type thread for ease of assembly. All sections are assembled, sanded, and polished across the joints to ensure a matching surface. Jack units manufactured for in-ground, or partial in-ground, installations are furnished with a safety bulkhead and seamless steel pipe cap at the bottom of the cylinder. Holeless units include a flat steel mounting plate, all in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. Bleeder plugs are included to purge air from the jack unit. Standard pit supports are welded to the cylinder for mounting to pit channels when required (various designs can be provided to suit any requirement). A threaded or grooved oil line connection is provided. All cylinders are thoroughly cleaned, inspected, and tested for oil leaks; and then painted with a heavy coat of an anti-corrosive material. EECO offers several types of cylinder joints: 1. *API threaded coupling up through 16" (406 mm) cylinder OD. 2. *Slip-fit (slide together coupling, no threads). 3. *Butt-weld (with beveled ends for welding in field and "knock-off" pipe couplings for bolting the sections together during assembly and welding). * EECO ADVISES JOINTS MUST BE WELDED AFTER ASSEMBLY. 4. *No weld threaded coupling up through 10.75" (273 mm) cylinder OD. EECO can provide optional types of cylinder protection beyond the standard coating material, including: 1. Tape wrap (polyvinyl chloride tape), wrapped to a minimum of 20 mm thickness, or more as required. 2. Special epoxy paint. 3. PVC pipe, installed by an "Omega" style adapter ring and sealed at the top, with inspection ports as required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44. PVC is available as schedule 40 or schedule 80 and is furnished in the number of sections as required, with a pipe end cap for sealing the lower end. Other connection types available. Also available is an Electronic Leak Monitoring System for the sealed PVC cylinder protection. Other means of protection available are a Flexible Liner, or Corrosion Prevention Compound. Contact EECO for more details about all available corrosion protection options. Jack Types Description of Jack Unit Size Application Pressure Rating Temperature Material & Welding Head Bearing & Packing Gland Piston Cylinder Cylinder Joints Corrosion Protection Double Bearing - Double bearing jack units consist of a single piston in a cylinder with a head bearing and packing gland at the upper end. An additional support bearing is located below the head bearing to allow the piston to carry an eccentric (off center) load without external guides. These jacks are normally used in applications that are not within the scope of ASME A17.1/CSA B44 however, EECO double bearing jack units are still designed in accordance to these guidelines. In addition to hydraulic elevators EECO can provide jack units for any number of applications in other industries. Contact EECO for assistance with your custom engineered hydraulic jack requirements. Custom Applications PJR Series Cut Away Specifications TJR / TJ3 Overtravel Recommendations NOTE: All values and dimensions are subject to change without notice. TJR-250 Hydraulic Jack UnitsComparison PJR Series LJ SeriesElevator Equipment Corporation (EECO) has been manufacturing hydraulic elevator equipment since 1946, and is one of the leading suppliers in the industry for hydraulic jack units and replacement cylinders and pistons. EECO can provide jack units for any application, from small capacity residential to the largest freight elevators. EECO has over 30 standard size jack units with many piston wall thicknesses available to meet your predetermined specifications or our engineering and sales staff can work with you to determine which EECO Jack Unit is right for your application. All EECO jack units are manufactured with precision equipment, experienced production personnel, and a knowledgeable engineering staff to produce a quality product for our customers. The latest CNC equipment and technology is utilized to assure strict adherence to essential dimensions and tolerances. All EECO products are designed and manufactured in accordance with the Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, ASME A17.1/CSA B44. With years of testing and field study, EECO has designed jack units that are unparalleled in the industry for performance and reliability. The primary objective of Elevator Equipment Corporation is to provide a quality product that consistently meets or exceeds the contractual demands and expectations of our customers. Please see back page for reproducible request for quote form. EECO manufacturing facilities are located on the west coast in Los Angeles, California, and in the mid-west in Richmond, Indiana to provide prompt coast to coast service and support. For more information about EECO Hydraulic Jack Units Contact Us! Monday - Friday 8:00 am EST - 4:30 p.m. PST 888-577-EECO (3326) or email us at sales@eecomail.com For more details anytime visit us on the web www.elevatorequipment.com EECO can provide special size jack units to meet your requirements! Call us today for a quote: (888) 577-EECO! TJR & TJ3 Series To determine the proper size required, and maximum gross load versus travel or for other inquiries about collapsed height or bore hole requirements contact EECO. It is our goal to deliver a jack unit when needed. If rush delivery is required, EECO can manufacture and ship certain jack units in as little as 48 hours. Contact EECO for current lead times. Delivery & Lead Times SINGLE STAGE Single stage jack units (PJR and LJ series) consist of a single piston in a cylinder with head bearing and packing gland at the upper end where the piston collapses into the cylinder. Single stage jacks are designed for "guided" applications only, where the Jack unit is rigidly supported and guided through the use of guide rails and guide shoes. PJR jacks are available from 2.75" to 8.5" (70 to 220 mm) piston diameter, in a wide range of wall thicknesses. LJ jacks are available from 9.5" to 20" (241 to 508 mm) piston diameter, in a wide range of wall thicknesses. They can be provided in one section up to 70 ft (21 m). Multi-section jack units can be provided in as many sections as required for the application. Single stage jacks are designed for in-ground and holeless cantilever or dual system applications. PJR series: 680 psi (46.9 bar) maximum working pressure LJ series: 500 psi (34.5 bar) maximum working pressure TWO & THREE STAGE TELESCOPIC Two stage telescopic jack units (TJR series) consist of upper and lower pistons, a cylinder, and a head bearing and packing gland for each piston. The lower piston is fitted with an additional packing gland at the lower end which rides against the internally honed cylinder. Three stage telescopic jack units (TJ3 series) consist of upper, intermediate, and lower pistons, a cylinder, and a head bearing and packing gland for each piston. The intermediate and lower pistons are fitted with additional packing glands at their lower ends which ride against the internally honed cylinder and lower piston. All telescopic jacks have a synchronous design where all pistons raise and lower at the same speed and at the same time. Telescopic jacks are designed for "guided" applications only, where the Jack unit is rigidly supported and guided through the use of guide rails and guide shoes. In some applications a piston follower guide may be required on all moving heads to meet code requirements. (Contact EECO). Two stage telescopic jacks are available from 1.6" to 4.5" (41 to 114 mm) upper piston diameter, in a wide range of wall thicknesses. Three stage telescopic jacks are available from 1.6" to 2.5" (41 to 64 mm) upper piston diameter. Telescopic jacks are available in one section only (no multi-section) Two stage telescopic jacks are designed for in-ground and holeless cantilever or dual system applications. Three stage telescopic jacks are designed for only holeless cantilever or dual system applications. TJR series: 1200 psi (82.7 bar) maximum working pressure Designed for operating temperatures up to 150°F (65°C) maximum. Recommended operating temperature is 65° to 95°F (18° to 35°C). All EECO jack units are designed and manufactured in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. All steel parts are fabricated and machined from high strength carbon steel. All welding is in accordance with the requirements of Part 8 of ASME A17.1/CSA B44. EECO welding is CWB certified. The jack heads are designed for ease of disassembly when repacking. An oil collection groove is provided and arrangement is included to connect an oil drain line to catch and reclaim oil that collects in the groove (it is necessary for the piston to carry a film of oil through the packing in order to provide smooth and quiet operation). The packing gland arrangement consists of a "pressure balanced" "U" type seal, a bearing and a wiper ring. Seals are designed for 150°F (65°C) maximum operating temperature. Recommended good brand of ISO VG 32 turbine oil with a viscosity of 150 ssu @ 100o F (38o C). A biodegradable (vegetable) oil is acceptable if it meets the same specifications. The upper end of the piston is fitted with a drilled and tapped plate, to receive a standard bolt for attachment to the platen plate (special mounting arrangements can be provided). The bottom of the piston is closed with a steel plate and is fitted with a stop ring to prevent the piston from leaving the cylinder. The piston is ground and polished to a surface finish of 15 to 20 µin (.38 to .50 µm). Allowable variation in diameter after polishing is ± .015" (.381 mm). Multi-section pistons are joined with an internally threaded coupling, using Acme type thread for ease of assembly. All sections are assembled, sanded, and polished across the joints to ensure a matching surface. Jack units manufactured for in-ground, or partial in-ground, installations are furnished with a safety bulkhead and seamless steel pipe cap at the bottom of the cylinder. Holeless units include a flat steel mounting plate, all in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. Bleeder plugs are included to purge air from the jack unit. Standard pit supports are welded to the cylinder for mounting to pit channels when required (various designs can be provided to suit any requirement). A threaded or grooved oil line connection is provided. All cylinders are thoroughly cleaned, inspected, and tested for oil leaks; and then painted with a heavy coat of an anti-corrosive material. EECO offers several types of cylinder joints: 1. *API threaded coupling up through 16" (406 mm) cylinder OD. 2. *Slip-fit (slide together coupling, no threads). 3. *Butt-weld (with beveled ends for welding in field and "knock-off" pipe couplings for bolting the sections together during assembly and welding). * EECO ADVISES JOINTS MUST BE WELDED AFTER ASSEMBLY. 4. *No weld threaded coupling up through 10.75" (273 mm) cylinder OD. EECO can provide optional types of cylinder protection beyond the standard coating material, including: 1. Tape wrap (polyvinyl chloride tape), wrapped to a minimum of 20 mm thickness, or more as required. 2. Special epoxy paint. 3. PVC pipe, installed by an "Omega" style adapter ring and sealed at the top, with inspection ports as required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44. PVC is available as schedule 40 or schedule 80 and is furnished in the number of sections as required, with a pipe end cap for sealing the lower end. Other connection types available. Also available is an Electronic Leak Monitoring System for the sealed PVC cylinder protection. Other means of protection available are a Flexible Liner, or Corrosion Prevention Compound. Contact EECO for more details about all available corrosion protection options. Jack Types Description of Jack Unit Size Application Pressure Rating Temperature Material & Welding Head Bearing & Packing Gland Piston Cylinder Cylinder Joints Corrosion Protection Double Bearing - Double bearing jack units consist of a single piston in a cylinder with a head bearing and packing gland at the upper end. An additional support bearing is located below the head bearing to allow the piston to carry an eccentric (off center) load without external guides. These jacks are normally used in applications that are not within the scope of ASME A17.1/CSA B44 however, EECO double bearing jack units are still designed in accordance to these guidelines. In addition to hydraulic elevators EECO can provide jack units for any number of applications in other industries. Contact EECO for assistance with your custom engineered hydraulic jack requirements. Custom Applications PJR Series Cut Away Specifications TJR / TJ3 Overtravel Recommendations NOTE: All values and dimensions are subject to change without notice. TJR-250 Manufacturing Quality Control, is an essential and integral part of our manufacturing process. Every phase of production is monitored and checked to assure that each jack unit is built and assembled in accordance with engineering and customer specifications to meet the quality standards required by Elevator Equipment Corporation. From the initial process of material in the door, to the final process of placing the product on the truck, you can be assured that our high quality standards are met and that the finished product meets your requirements. The Electronic Leak Monitoring System is designed to detect the presence of a liquid in the space between the jack cylinder and the sealed PVC liner, and differentiates between oil and water which provides continual monitoring, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Built in LED lights indicate the presence of liquid. If oil is detected a buzzer will sound as an added indication. The control box can be tied into the controller to shut the system down, or to a phone system, to provide notice of a possible leak in the jack cylinder. EECO specializes in Jack Unit Replacement. We can provide an exact replacement, either piston, cylinder or complete jack units, regardless of original make or manufacturer. Before 1972 many companies installed hydraulic elevators with flat bottom in-ground jack units, many without any corrosion protection at all. Failures on these older designs may cause rupturing of the cylinder and uncontrolled decent of the elevator. Today's ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Section 8.6.5.8 requires single bottom jack units (cylinders) to be replaced with double bottom cylinders. Quality Assurance Jack, Piston or Cylinder Replacement Electronic Leak Monitoring System Cylinder Joint Types Butt Weld Slip Fit Threaded API No Weld Threaded Hydraulic Elevator Jack Unit Quotation Request / Order Form Date ____________ Date Required ____________ Quantity Required ______  In-ground  Holeless  Telescopic  Direct Acting  Cantilever  1:2 Roped  Complete Jack Unit  Cylinder Only  with Head  Seamless  Piston Only  with Head/Flange  Seamless  Single Piece  Multi-Piece No. of Sections ________ or Longest Section ________  API Threaded  Slip Weld  No Weld Threaded  Butt Weld Jack Unit Details  Platen Plate or  Isolated Platen  Pit Channels &/or  Buffers  PRV  NPT  Grooved  Shut Off _____ qty  NPT  Grooved Jack Unit Accessories Job Specifications Capacity __________ lbs_ Car Weight __________ lbs_ Piston Weight __________ lbs_ Total Gross __________ lbs_ Car Speed __________ fpm Piston Diameter __________ in__ or Circumference __________ in__ Wall Thickness __________ in__ Cylinder Diameter __________ in__ or Circumference __________ in__ Existing Casing Diameter __________ in__ Strike Plate Thickness __________ in__ Overhead __________ ft __________ in__ Total Floor Travel __________ ft __________ in__ Pit Depth __________ ft __________ in__ Top Overtravel __________ in__ with piston fully extended__ Bottom Overtravel ___________ in__ Runby, Spring Compression, and Clearance__  New Installation  Modernization  Replacement  Repair  Out of Service  Standard Paint  Tape Wrap  Epoxy Paint Coats/Layers ________ qty  Sealed PVC  Sch. 40  Sch. 80  Flexible Liner  Evacuation System  Electronic Leak Monitoring System  Provisions for Corrosion Prevention Compound  Buy American Act Requirement  Spare Packing Set  Provisions for Piston Gripper  Scavenger System  Biodegradable (Vegetable) Oil Isolation Thickness _______ ft _______ in_ Pick Up Point _______ ft _______ in_ (IT) (PUP) Holeless Dimensions In-ground Dimensions (TPH) (BH) (PPT) (OL) (PCH) (DBC) Total Platform Height ________ in_ Bolster Height ________ in_ Platen Plate Thickness ________ in_ Outlet Location ________ in_ Pit Channel Height ________ in_ Distance Between Channels ________ in_  Future Travel Stop Ring ________ in  Jack Steadier Brackets ________ qty  Piston Clamps ________ qty  Lifting Clamps ________ qty Contact Sales for more Information Call: (888) 577-EECO (3326) Fax: (888) 577-3116 Email: sales@eecomail.com Visit: www.elevatorequipment.com Outlet Orientation  Parallel or  Perpendicular to Pit Channels Outlet Size ______ in  NPT  Grooved Special Requirements ______________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ Company ___________________________________________________ Address ___________________________________________________ City __________________________ .St. ______ Zip __________ Project Name ___________________________________________________ Contact ________________________________________________ Phone ________________ Ext. ______ Fax ________________ Email ________________________________________________ Ship Date Required _________________ Customer Information Provide data as complete as possible. Our ability to provide proper equipment depends upon the completeness and accuracy of the data that you furnish. FS-005 Rev. 8/17/12 Manufacturing Quality Control, is an essential and integral part of our manufacturing process. Every phase of production is monitored and checked to assure that each jack unit is built and assembled in accordance with engineering and customer specifications to meet the quality standards required by Elevator Equipment Corporation. From the initial process of material in the door, to the final process of placing the product on the truck, you can be assured that our high quality standards are met and that the finished product meets your requirements. The Electronic Leak Monitoring System is designed to detect the presence of a liquid in the space between the jack cylinder and the sealed PVC liner, and differentiates between oil and water which provides continual monitoring, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Built in LED lights indicate the presence of liquid. If oil is detected a buzzer will sound as an added indication. The control box can be tied into the controller to shut the system down, or to a phone system, to provide notice of a possible leak in the jack cylinder. EECO specializes in Jack Unit Replacement. We can provide an exact replacement, either piston, cylinder or complete jack units, regardless of original make or manufacturer. Before 1972 many companies installed hydraulic elevators with flat bottom in-ground jack units, many without any corrosion protection at all. Failures on these older designs may cause rupturing of the cylinder and uncontrolled decent of the elevator. Today's ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Section 8.6.5.8 requires single bottom jack units (cylinders) to be replaced with double bottom cylinders. Quality Assurance Jack, Piston or Cylinder Replacement Electronic Leak Monitoring System Cylinder Joint Types Butt WeldSlip FitThreaded APINo Weld Threaded Hydraulic Elevator Jack Unit Quotation Request / Order Form Date ____________ Date Required ____________ Quantity Required ______  In-ground  Holeless  Telescopic  Direct Acting  Cantilever  1:2 Roped  Complete Jack Unit  Cylinder Only  with Head  Seamless  Piston Only  with Head/Flange  Seamless  Single Piece  Multi-Piece No. of Sections ________ or Longest Section ________  API Threaded  Slip Weld  No Weld Threaded  Butt Weld Jack Unit Details  Platen Plate or  Isolated Platen  Pit Channels &/or  Buffers  PRV  NPT  Grooved  Shut Off _____ qty  NPT  Grooved Jack Unit Accessories Job Specifications Capacity __________ lbs_ Car Weight __________ lbs_ Piston Weight __________ lbs_ Total Gross __________ lbs_ Car Speed __________ fpm Piston Diameter __________ in__ or Circumference __________ in__ Wall Thickness __________ in__ Cylinder Diameter __________ in__ or Circumference __________ in__ Existing Casing Diameter __________ in__ Strike Plate Thickness __________ in__ Overhead __________ ft __________ in__ Total Floor Travel __________ ft __________ in__ Pit Depth __________ ft __________ in__ Top Overtravel __________ in__ with piston fully extended__ Bottom Overtravel ___________ in__ Runby, Spring Compression, and Clearance__  New Installation  Modernization  Replacement  Repair  Out of Service  Standard Paint  Tape Wrap  Epoxy Paint Coats/Layers ________ qty  Sealed PVC  Sch. 40  Sch. 80  Flexible Liner  Evacuation System  Electronic Leak Monitoring System  Provisions for Corrosion Prevention Compound  Buy American Act Requirement  Spare Packing Set  Provisions for Piston Gripper  Scavenger System  Biodegradable (Vegetable) Oil Isolation Thickness _______ ft _______ in_ Pick Up Point _______ ft _______ in_ (IT) (PUP) Holeless Dimensions In-ground Dimensions (TPH) (BH) (PPT) (OL) (PCH) (DBC) Total Platform Height ________ in_ Bolster Height ________ in_ Platen Plate Thickness ________ in_ Outlet Location ________ in_ Pit Channel Height ________ in_ Distance Between Channels ________ in_  Future Travel Stop Ring ________ in  Jack Steadier Brackets ________ qty  Piston Clamps ________ qty  Lifting Clamps ________ qty Contact Sales for more Information Call: (888) 577-EECO (3326) Fax: (888) 577-3116 Email: sales@eecomail.com Visit: www.elevatorequipment.com Outlet Orientation  Parallel or  Perpendicular to Pit Channels Outlet Size ______ in  NPT  Grooved Special Requirements ______________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ Company ___________________________________________________ Address ___________________________________________________ City __________________________ .St. ______ Zip __________ Project Name ___________________________________________________ Contact ________________________________________________ Phone ________________ Ext. ______ Fax ________________ Email ________________________________________________ Ship Date Required _________________ Customer Information Provide data as complete as possible. Our ability to provide proper equipment depends upon the completeness and accuracy of the data that you furnish. FS-005 Rev. 8/17/12 Email: sales@eecomail.com w Website: www.elevatorequipment.com w Telephone: (888) 577-3326 23 Power UnitsSubmErSiblE powEr unitS CommErCiAl SubmErSiblE powEr unitS EECO Commercial Flat Bottom Submersible Power Units are available in two depths, 18” and 24”. The 18” power units are the most compact and are particularly useful where Machine Room space is at a premium. They are lightweight for ease of handling, very quiet, and highly efficient. They are also our most economical units. EECO can also design and manufacture fully customized power units per the customer’s specifications. C D E E Silencer Valve MotorPump Optional Right Hand A F 1.50 7/8" Hole for Anchor Bolt 2.50"Typical all (4) corners G Optional Right Hand B Hinged CoverModel Dimensions in Inches(in)Gallons(gal) Dimensions in Centimeters(cm)Liters(lit) A B C D With UV-5 Usable Oil Charge Oil Total E F G SPUC-36 37.00 18.75 38.00 44.50 32.00 5.75 6.50 41 35 76 (94.0)(47.6)(96.5)(113.0)(81.3)(14.6)(16.5)(155)(132)(288) SPUC-48 49.00 18.75 38.00 56.50 32.00 5.75 6.50 54 47 101 (124.5)(47.6)(96.5)(143.5)(81.3)(14.6)(16.5)(204)(178)(382) SPU-36 37.00 24.75 46.00 41.00 32.00 16.00 8.15 54 69 123 (94.0)(62.9)(116.8)(104.1)(81.3)(40.6)(20.7)(204)(261)(466) SPU-48 49.00 24.75 46.00 52.75 40.00 16.00 8.15 73 92 165 (124.5)(62.9)(116.8)(134.0)(101.6)(40.6)(20.7)(276)(348)(625) Flat Bottom Commercial Power Units • Valve Return Filter (VRF) • 120 Starts Per Hour • Tank Mounted Starter Enclosure • Motor Starter • Wye-Delta • ATL • Solid State • Adjustable Load Weighing Switch • EECO Muffler • EECO Highly Effective Dampener • Oil Heater • Maxton Control Valves • Low Pressure Switch • N.O • N.O./N.C. • Viscosity Switch • Low Oil Switch • Hand Pump • OSHPD Approved Anchoring System • Constant Down Speed • Pre-Wired (JBox and Terminals) • Charcoal Breather • EECO UV5-BT Control Valve • EECO Silencer • Thermal Switch (Preset To 145°F) • Isolation Anchoring System • Oil Level Liquid Gauge • 80 Starts Per Hour • Pressure Gauge Fitting with 1/8” Shut Off Valve Standard Features Available Options DESCription oF A SubmErSiblE powEr unit EECO Submersible Power Units are designed with the directly connected pump and motor submerged in the oil reservoir. An EECO Silencer is located between the pump and the control valve as standard. The control valve and an optional muffler or dampener are mounted in the tank above the maximum oil level, providing access for valve adjustment. These components can also be located above the tank when greater oil capacity is required. Submersible pumps and motors are less costly than comparable air cooled components and are designed to allow for quick and easy installation. The insertion of the pump and motor in the oil helps to dampen noise generated during operation. Because the pump and motor are directly connected, the pump output flow rate is a result of the speed (RPM) of the motor. Therefore, the output flow rate is a consequence of available pump sizes. Email: sales@eecomail.com w Website: www.elevatorequipment.com w Telephone: (888) 577-332624 Power Units Model Capacities in Gallons (gal) Capacities in Liters (lit) Usable Oil Oil Required to Fill Tank With UV-5AT With UV-7B With UV-5AT With UV-7B Valve in Tank Valve Out Valve in Tank Valve Out Valve in Tank Valve Valve in Tank Valve OutLHRHLHRHOut SPU-60 91.00 71.00 112.00 71.00 112.00 159.00 139.00 205.00 139.00 205.00 (344)(269)(424)(269)(424)(602)(526)(776)(526)(776) SPU-72 109.00 86.00 135.00 86.00 135.00 190.00 167.00 246.00 167.00 246.00 (413)(326)(511)(326)(511)(719)(632)(931)(632)(931) SPU-84 127.00 100.00 157.00 100.00 157.00 222.00 195.00 287.00 195.00 287.00 (481)(379)(594)(379)(594)(840)(738)(1086)(738)(1086) SPU-96 145.00 114.00 180.00 114.00 180.00 253.00 222.00 328.00 222.00 328.00 (549)(432)(681)(432)(681)(958)(840)(1242)(840)(1242) Model Dimensions in Inches (in) Dimensions in Centimeters (cm) A B C D With UV-5AT With UV-7B E F G H J E F G H J SPU-60 60.25 24.00 44.00 64.50 38.00 34.88 10.50 8.50 56.00 35.25 35.25 9.63 9.63 58.00 (153.0)(61.0)(111.8)(163.8)(96.5)(88.6)(26.7)(21.6)(142.2)(89.5)(89.5)(24.4)(24.4)(147.3) SPU-72 72.25 24.00 44.00 76.50 38.00 34.88 10.50 8.50 56.00 35.25 35.25 9.63 9.63 58.00 (183.5)(61.0)(111.8)(194.3)(96.5)(88.6)(26.7)(21.6)(142.2)(89.5)(89.5)(24.4)(24.4)(147.3) SPU-84 84.25 24.00 44.00 88.50 38.00 34.88 10.50 8.50 56.00 35.25 35.25 9.63 9.63 58.00 (214.0)(61.0)(111.8)(224.8)(96.5)(88.6)(26.7)(21.6)(142.2)(89.5)(89.5)(24.4)(24.4)(147.3) SPU-96 96.25 24.00 44.00 100.25 38.00 34.88 10.50 8.50 56.00 35.25 35.25 9.63 9.63 58.00 (244.5)(61.0)(111.8)(254.6)(96.5)(88.6)(26.7)(21.6)(142.2)(89.5)(89.5)(24.4)(24.4)(147.3) EECO’s Commercial V-Bottom Submersible Power units are available in 60”, 72”, 84”, and 96” lengths and are 24” deep. Usable oil volumes range from 71 gal. to 180 gal. depending on size and configuration. V-Bottom Commercial Power Units SubmErSiblE powEr unitS Cont’D Email: sales@eecomail.com w Website: www.elevatorequipment.com w Telephone: (888) 577-3326 25 Power Units D A B C Residential, LULA, and MRL Submersible Power Units Model Dimensions in Inches(in)Gallons(gal) Dimensions in Centimeters(cm)Liters(lit) A B C D Usable Oil RPU 25.00 16.00 29.75 28.00 20 (63.8)(40.6)(58.4)(71.5)(76) LPU 36.00 16.00 31.50 40.00 15 (91.4)(40.6)(80.0)(101.6)(57) MPU 31.00 11.25 52.75 34.75 33 (78.7)(28.3)(134.3)(88.0)(125) Residential Power Unit (RPU) LU/LA Power Unit (LPU) MRL Power Unit (MPU) SubmErSiblE powEr unitS Cont’D 35 EECO COntrOl ValVE CatalOgUV-5at(C) & UV-5Bt(C) COntrOl ValVE UV-5(A/B)T & UV-5(A/B)TC Adjustment Procedure Up Adjustments (From Preset) 1. BP Bypass - Car at lower floor with no load. Disconnect U2. Register an up call. Car should not move. Turn BP CW until car moves, then CCW until car stalls plus a minimum of 1/2 turn. Stop pump motor. Reconnect U2. 2. UA Up Acceleration - Car at lower floor with no load. Turn UA CCW 2 1/2 turns from fully closed position. Register an up call and observe up acceleration. Turn UA CCW for faster or CW for slower up acceleration. Car should reach full speed in no more than 2 1/2 feet (.8m). DO NOT drag out acceleration. 3. UL Up Leveling - Car at lower floor with no load. Disconnect U1. Register an up call. Turn UL CCW (faster) or CW (slower) to set up leveling speed at 10 to 13 fpm (.05 to .07 m/sec). Leave U1 disconnected. 4. UT Up Transition - Car at lower floor with no load. Register an up call with U2 energized only. Car will move up at leveling speed. Turn UT CW until car speeds up, then slowly CCW until car slows down again. Reconnect U1. Register an up call and observe up transition. Turn UT CW (slower) or CCW (faster) until up transition is satisfactory. Slowdown switch should be located to give 3 to 4 inches (75 to 100mm) of stabilized leveling (see note 10 above). 5. US Up Stop - Car at lower floor with no load. Disconnect U2. Register an up call. Car should not move. Turn US CW until car moves, then CCW until car stops again. Reconnect U2. Register an up call and observe up stop. Turn US CW for softer stop or CCW for firmer stop. NOTE: Pump motor must run approximately 1 second after car has stopped. U1 - Up Fast solenoid U2 - Up Slow solenoid D1 - Down Fast Solenoid D2 - Down Slow Solenoid ML Manual Lowering - Turn ML out CCW to lower car at leveling speed. All electrical power MUST be off when using manual lowering! CW = Clockwise (IN)  Adjuster Presetting  CCW = Counter Clockwise (OUT) PRESETTING FUNCTION BP CCW to stop, CW 2 turns. (CCW - Delays up start) UA CW to stop. (CCW - Faster acceleration) UL CW to stop. (CCW - Faster speed) UT CCW to stop, CW 7 1/2 turns. (CW - Slower transition) US CCW to stop, CW 7 1/2 turns. (CW - Softer stop) RV Factory set at 550 psi (38 bar). (CW - Increase pressure) Up Do w n PRESETTING FUNCTION DL CW to stop, CCW 5 1/2 turns. (CW - Slower speed) DM CW to stop, CCW 5 1/2 turns. (CW - Slower speed) DSC CW to snap ring, CCW 6 turns. (CW - Slower speed) DC CCW to stop, CW 8 1/2 turns. (CCW - Firmer stop) DT Closed flush with lock nut. (CCW - Slower transition) DA CCW to stop. (CCW - Faster acceleration) RV Relief Valve 1) With fully loaded car and a pressure gauge installed on the pump gauge port, register an up call and record maximum pressure as car nears top landing. 2) Close main line valve and turn RV and UA out CCW to stop. 3) Register an up call. Turn RV CW to set relief pressure as required by local code (not to exceed 50% above maximum pressure recorded earlier). 4) Restart pump to check pressure relief setting. Seal RV as required. Open main line valve to the jack. Readjust UA for proper up acceleration. Down Adjustments (From Preset) 1. DL Down Leveling - Car at upper floor with no load. Disconnect D1. Register a down call. If car does not move, turn DC CW (1/8 turn at a time) until car moves down. Adjust DL to set down leveling speed at 7 to 9 fpm (.04 to .05 m/sec). Reconnect D1. 2. DM Down Main - For UV-5AT valves, car at upper floor with no load. Register a down call. Turn DM CW (slower) or CCW (faster) to set down speed at 25% less than contract (full load) speed (see note 9 above). For UV-5(A/B)TC valves DSC should be on preset and set down speed at full contract speed. 3. DSC Down Speed Control - Put full load on car and check speed in down direction. If speed is more than 5% different from contract speed turn DSC (CW) to decrease or (CCW) to increase speed within 5% of contract speed. Final DSC adjustment should be in 1/8 turn increments 4. DC Down Closing - Cycle empty car and observe down stop. Turn DC CW (softer stop and slower transition) or CCW (firmer stop and faster transition) until down stop is satisfactory (see note 8). For most applications, there is no need to adjust DT since down transition is satisfactory when DC is set. However, if DT requires further adjustment, go to step 4, otherwise go to step 5. 5. DT Down Transition - Car at upper floor with no load. Disconnect D1. Register a down call. Car should come down at leveling speed. Turn DT CCW until car speeds up, then slowly CW until car slows down again. Reconnect D1. Cycle car and turn DT CCW (slower) or CW (faster) until down transition is satisfactory. Readjust DL to maintain down leveling at 7 to 9 fpm (.04 to .05 m/sec). Slowdown switch should be located to give 3 to 4 inches (75 to 100mm) of stabilized leveling (see note 10 above). 6. DA Down Acceleration - Car at upper floor with no load. Turn DA CW to stop. Register a down call. Car should not move. Turn DA slowly CCW until car breaks away from the floor. Turn DA CW (slower) or CCW (faster) until down acceleration is satisfactory. 1. This information is to be used only by qualified hydraulic elevator professionals. 2. The optimum oil temperature to adjust the valve is between 80° to 100°F (27° to 38°C). If oil temperature exceeds 100°F (38°C), make down stop firmer. 3. The following instructions are for adjusting the valve starting with adjusters on preset. However, each new valve is adjusted to a set of standard conditions at the factory and you do not have to preset adjusters. You only need to adjust DM and BP. Other adjusters may require fine-tuning to suit your application. 4. Hand tighten the seal nuts on the adjusters - DO NOT over tighten. 5. Valve must be mounted with solenoids in vertical position. Five (5) inches (127mm) min. clearance is required to remove valve cover for service. 6. When disconnecting solenoids, do it electrically, not physically. 7. Both UA and DC adjusters have screened inputs and must be kept clean. EECO recommends use of a 5-micron filtration system. 8. If DC requires further fine-tuning after DA is adjusted, first open DA 3 turns, fine-tune DC and then readjust DA. 9. Down contract speed is full down speed with rated load on the car for standard UV-5AT control valves, down speed with empty car is less than contract speed depending on the ration of full-load to no-load pres- sures, approximately 25% less for a 2 to 1 pressure ratio (i.e., empty car down speed = full load (contract) down speed x .75). If constant down speed is required between no-load and full-load conditions, use UV-5A(B)TC valve. 10. DO NOT adjust the valve to suit switches. Adjust the switches (vanes / magnets) to suit the valve. Recommended slowdown distance is 2 in. for every 10 fpm of car speed. (not to exceed 2.5 in. per 10 fpm) P.O Box 723 Snow Camp, North Carolina 27349 Tel: 919.903.0189 Fax: 336.232.9789 www.ResoluteElevator.com IDEC Elevator Products CAB DRAWINGS FINAL (1)2500# OP. 42x84 SSCO UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK L 81 1/2" INSIDE SHELL 84" PLATFORM WIDTH 1 1/4" 2" 1 1/4" 47 1 / 2 " I N S I D E S H E L L 58 " P L A T F O R M D E P T H 8 1 / 4 " 2" 2" 2 1 / 4 " 20 3 / 4 " 2" 20 3 / 4 " REFLECTED CEILING PLAN B R F 47 1 / 2 " I N S I D E C L E A R 80" INSIDE CLEAR 24 3/4" 2" 24 3/4"26 1/2" 47 1 / 2 " I N S I D E C L E A R 2" 2" 21 7 / 8 " 21 7 / 8 " 76" SUSPENDED CEILING 2" 43 3 / 4 " S U S P E N D E D C E I L I N G FAN EMERGENCY EXIT 18" × 26" PLAN VIEW 8 1 / 4 " 42" CLEAR OPENING WIDTH21"21" C.D.I. 21"21"84" PLATFORM WIDTH 58 " P L A T F O R M D E P T H 6 4" 1 1/4" 2 1 / 4 " 2" 4 3/4" C.O.P. IDEC ELEVATOR PRODUCTS www.idecelevatorproducts.com 1900 AUSTRALIAN AVE RIVIERA BEACH, FL 33404 PH-954-618-0770 F-954-925-4141 1 2 REV.:DATE:DESCRIPTION:BY: FOR APPROVAL QTY. CAB(S) REQ'D: INT. SURFACE: CAPACITY: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - STANDARD GAL MOVFR ALUMINUM - NYLUBE 2SP IN C.O.P. STANDARD - 8000-P DW-2 - 1/4" DESCRIPTION GE N E R A L I N F O R M A T I O N FINISHED DETAILS 4 3 CA B C O M P O N E N T S QTY QTY DESCRIPTION GA № ASSY SHELL ASSEMBLY 16 RETURN ASSEMBLY STRIKE ASSEMBLY TRANSOM ASSEMBLY CANOPY 12 RAISED PANELS 1/2" MDF HANDRAIL 1 1/2" DIA (1)FLOOR FINSH BY OTHERS (2)STEEL CANOPY, (12 GA), BLACK (3)SS#4 (4)16 GA GALVANNEAL SHELL WITH SS#4 BASE, REVEALS, AND FRIEZE (5)5WL RAISED PANELS (6)STAINLESS STEEL #4 SUSPENDED CEILING W/ LED DOWNLIGHT (7)STAINLESS STEEL #4 HANDRAIL (8)CLEAR GLASS W/ LAMINATED SAFETY GLAZING CAB STEADIER DOOR OPERATOR TYPE CAR SILL DOOR DETECTOR FAN EMERGENCY LIGHT EMERGENCY EXIT PROTECTIVE PAD(S) PER GRP PAD HOOKS (2 GIBS) CAR DOOR FLOOR FINISH THICK FLOOR RECESS - 8 COMPANY : VERIFIED BY:ENGINEER:START DATE: REF:SHEET: PROJECT NAME: ADDRESS: CONTRACTOR: ARCHITECT: UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK RESOLUTE ELEVATOR 2500# APPROX. WEIGHT: 1456# 33.80 SQFT SCALE:---- 10.20.2021LKSR PRELIM 10.20.2021 PRELIMINARY DRAWING SR ---- 1 1 1 1 1 VIEW: 16 16 16 CAB DRAWINGS N/A N/A #1 4.12.2022 5WL RAISED PANELS ; ADDED ENTRANCES SR FINAL 5.18.2022 ROUND HANDRAIL SR 3 4" = 1'-0"1/2 TOP VIEW VIEW "B" W VIEW "L" VIEW "R" 86 1 / 2 " 96 " C A B H E I G H T 6" 3 1 / 2 " 5 7 1 72 " 91 " UN D E R S I D E O F C E I L I N G 5" WALL CROSS SECTION "W" 5 4 6 CONCEALED AIR VENTILATION SLOTS 3 3 ALUMINUM SILL 1 1 4" F L O O R R E C E S S 2" 91 " 17 13/32" 84 1 / 2 " D O O R O P E N I N G 5" 6" WALL PANEL FASTENER, TYP. WALL CROSS SECTION "D" 2 2" 5" 96 " C A B H E I G H T 12 " 5 55 836 " 8 APPLIED C.D.I. CUTOUT 3 1 4" x 11 1 4" VIEW "F"D 84 " C L E A R O P E N I N G 12 " C.O.P. 33 DOOR 3 DOOR 3 9 1/4" 65 1 / 4 " 17 3 / 8 " 4 4 4 3/16" STEEL PLATE 1/2" ALUMINUM SPACER WALL PANEL, TYP. BLOCKING SET SCREW Ø1 " 1 1/2" SHELL HANDRAIL DETAIL (N.T.S.) 1 12"Ø RAIL IDEC ELEVATOR PRODUCTS www.idecelevatorproducts.com 1900 AUSTRALIAN AVE RIVIERA BEACH, FL 33404 PH-954-618-0770 F-954-925-4141 1 2 REV.:DATE:DESCRIPTION:BY: FOR APPROVAL QTY. CAB(S) REQ'D: INT. SURFACE: CAPACITY: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - STANDARD GAL MOVFR ALUMINUM - NYLUBE 2SP IN C.O.P. STANDARD - 8000-P DW-2 - 1/4" DESCRIPTION GE N E R A L I N F O R M A T I O N FINISHED DETAILS 4 3 CA B C O M P O N E N T S QTY QTY DESCRIPTION GA № ASSY SHELL ASSEMBLY 16 RETURN ASSEMBLY STRIKE ASSEMBLY TRANSOM ASSEMBLY CANOPY 12 RAISED PANELS 1/2" MDF HANDRAIL 1 1/2" DIA (1)FLOOR FINSH BY OTHERS (2)STEEL CANOPY, (12 GA), BLACK (3)SS#4 (4)16 GA GALVANNEAL SHELL WITH SS#4 BASE, REVEALS, AND FRIEZE (5)5WL RAISED PANELS (6)STAINLESS STEEL #4 SUSPENDED CEILING W/ LED DOWNLIGHT (7)STAINLESS STEEL #4 HANDRAIL (8)CLEAR GLASS W/ LAMINATED SAFETY GLAZING CAB STEADIER DOOR OPERATOR TYPE CAR SILL DOOR DETECTOR FAN EMERGENCY LIGHT EMERGENCY EXIT PROTECTIVE PAD(S) PER GRP PAD HOOKS (2 GIBS) CAR DOOR FLOOR FINISH THICK FLOOR RECESS - 8 COMPANY : VERIFIED BY:ENGINEER:START DATE: REF:SHEET: PROJECT NAME: ADDRESS: CONTRACTOR: ARCHITECT: UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK RESOLUTE ELEVATOR 2500# APPROX. WEIGHT: 1456# 33.80 SQFT SCALE:---- 10.20.2021LKSR PRELIM 10.20.2021 PRELIMINARY DRAWING SR ---- 1 1 1 1 1 VIEW: 16 16 16 CAB DRAWINGS N/A N/A #1 4.12.2022 5WL RAISED PANELS ; ADDED ENTRANCES SR FINAL 5.18.2022 ROUND HANDRAIL SR 2/2 SIDE VIEW 12" = 1'-0" FINAL ENTRANCE DRAWINGS (4) OP. 42x84 SSPCO UNC-CH-CARDINAL PARKING DECK ELEVATION SECTION (N.T.S.) 84 "C L E A R O P E N I N G 2" 10 1/2" BR 14" 7 8" 83 4" H E A D E R P O C K E T " F L O O R T O F L O O R " " S L A B + F . F . 8" 5" BM BN 1 4" 84 12"D O O R H E I G H T 8" (4) PLAN SECTION 3 4" = 1'-0" 4" 42" OPENING 4" 10 1 / 4 " 5/ 8 " 5/ 8 " 10 1 / 4 " 93" BACK TO BACK STRUTS HOISTWAY 8" ENTRANCE FRAME 5" DOOR SPACE 1 3 / 4 " 13 / 1 6 " S I L L T H K SLAB 1/4" CLEAR 3 1/2" SILL TO BACK OF FRAME 2" SILL TO BACK OF DOOR 3 9/16" HEADER TO SILL LINE 10 3 / 4 " O P E N I N G T O TO P O F H E A D E R 2" 1/4" 3/ 4 " D O O R L A P 1/4" 1 1/4" DOOR THK JAMB DEPTH 8 3 / 4 " H A N G E R T R A C K P O C K E T DETAIL BM 1 1 2" = 1'-0" DETAIL BN 1 1 2" = 1'-0" AS NOTED1/2 *ALL FASCIA 48" WIDE 16 GA* FINISH / COLOR SPECIFICATION AND DATA GAL MOVFR NONE OPERATOR : AT ALL FLOORS DOOR FINISH LOBBY IDEC ELEVATOR PRODUCTS www.idecelevatorproducts.com 1900 AUSTRALIAN AVE RIVIERA BEACH, FL 33404 PH-954-618-0770 F-954-925-4141 REV.:DATE:DESCRIPTION:BY: FOR APPROVAL COMPANY : VERIFIED BY:ENGINEER:START DATE: REF:SHEET: PROJECT NAME: UNC-CH-CARDINAL PARKING DECK RESOLUTE ELEVATOR SCALE:- 10/28/2021LKSR PRELIM 10/28/2021 PRELIMINARY SR 42x84 SSPCO ENTRANCE DRAWINGS NOTES: 1.THIS ENTRANCE LAYOUT DRAWING REPRESENTS GENERAL DESIGN INTENT ONLY. THE ACTUAL AS-BUILT DETAILS MAY VARY FROM THAT SHOWN. 2.ALL FRAMES ARE SQUARE PROFILE, KNOCKDOWN CONSTRUCTION 3.ALL FASCIA PER ASME CODE REQUIREMENTS. 4.ALL INTERMEDIATE FASCIA ARE EXTRA COST OPTION KEYWAYS REQUIRED AT: FRAME FINISH LOBBY DOOR FINISH TYP. FRAME FINISH TYP. SILL FINISH FRAME CONSTRUCTION DRILLING DATA 20GA SS#4 / 16GA CRS CORE 16GA SS#4 ALUMINUM BOLTED W1/4" HEAD JAMB PROJ. GAL SHEET ROCK CMU BLOCK CMU BLOCK +SHEET ROCK WALL CONSTRUCTION 20GA SS#4 / 16GA CRS CORE 16GA SS#4 #1 4/12/2022 COMPLETE ENTRANCE ASSEMBLY ADDED SR FINAL 5/19/2022 FINAL - HALL STATION CUTOUT ADDED SR 6 3 2 4 6 10 11 7 8 6 5 1 9 STRUT DOOR OPEN DOOR OPEN 93" BACK TO BACK STRUTS 42"OPENING WIDTH 84 " O P E N I N G H E I G H T 2" 84 1 / 4 " S I L L T O H E A D E R VIEW FROM CORRIDOR STRUT EXTENSION FASCIA HEADER FASCIA GROUT STOP SILL STRUT EXTENSION SILL SUPPORT 12" = 1'-0"2/2 *ALL FASCIA 48" WIDE 16 GA* FINISH / COLOR SPECIFICATION AND DATA GAL MOVFR NONE OPERATOR : AT ALL FLOORS DOOR FINISH LOBBY IDEC ELEVATOR PRODUCTS www.idecelevatorproducts.com 1900 AUSTRALIAN AVE RIVIERA BEACH, FL 33404 PH-954-618-0770 F-954-925-4141 REV.:DATE:DESCRIPTION:BY: FOR APPROVAL COMPANY : VERIFIED BY:ENGINEER:START DATE: REF:SHEET: PROJECT NAME: UNC-CH-CARDINAL PARKING DECK RESOLUTE ELEVATOR SCALE:- 10/28/2021LKSR PRELIM 10/28/2021 PRELIMINARY SR 42x84 SSPCO ENTRANCE DRAWINGS NOTES: 1.THIS ENTRANCE LAYOUT DRAWING REPRESENTS GENERAL DESIGN INTENT ONLY. THE ACTUAL AS-BUILT DETAILS MAY VARY FROM THAT SHOWN. 2.ALL FRAMES ARE SQUARE PROFILE, KNOCKDOWN CONSTRUCTION 3.ALL FASCIA PER ASME CODE REQUIREMENTS. 4.ALL INTERMEDIATE FASCIA ARE EXTRA COST OPTION KEYWAYS REQUIRED AT: FRAME FINISH LOBBY DOOR FINISH TYP. FRAME FINISH TYP. SILL FINISH FRAME CONSTRUCTION DRILLING DATA 20GA SS#4 / 16GA CRS CORE 16GA SS#4 ALUMINUM BOLTED W1/4" HEAD JAMB PROJ. GAL SHEET ROCK CMU BLOCK CMU BLOCK +SHEET ROCK WALL CONSTRUCTION 20GA SS#4 / 16GA CRS CORE 16GA SS#4 #1 4/12/2022 COMPLETE ENTRANCE ASSEMBLY ADDED SR FINAL 5/19/2022 FINAL - HALL STATION CUTOUT ADDED SR TOTAL NUMBER ENTRANCES 4 QTY PER PROJ.PART NAME QTY PER ENTRANCES FINISH 4 ENTRANCE FRAMES 1 16GA SS#4 4 HATCH DOOR SET 1 20GA SS#4 4 HATCH SILL 1 SSP ALUMINUM 4 HEADER 1 GALV. 4 DUST COVER 1 GALV. 4 SILL SUPPORT 1 GALV. 4 GROUT ANGLE 1 GALV. 16 STRUT TIE SET 4 GALV. 8 STRUT 2 GALV. FASCIA AS REQ.GALV. 4 HARDWARE KIT 1 HALL STATION CUTOUT: FLR 1: 2 3 4" x 28 1 4" - 35 7 8" A.F.F. FLR 2: 2 3 4" x 14 1 4" - 37 7 8" A.F.F. FLR 3: 2 3 4" x 14 1 4" - 37 7 8" A.F.F. FLR 4: 2 3 4" x 14 1 4" - 37 7 8" A.F.F. P.O Box 723 Snow Camp, North Carolina 27349 Tel: 919.903.0189 Fax: 336.232.9789 www.ResoluteElevator.com Innovation Industries Inc. "F i n a l - A s - B u i l t " d r a w i n g s f o r y o u r r e c o r d s . N o f u r t h e r a p p r o v a l R e q u i r e d . "F i n a l - A s - B u i l t " d r a w i n g s f o r y o u r r e c o r d s . N o f u r t h e r a p p r o v a l R e q u i r e d . "F i n a l - A s - B u i l t " d r a w i n g s f o r y o u r r e c o r d s . N o f u r t h e r a p p r o v a l R e q u i r e d . "F i n a l - A s - B u i l t " d r a w i n g s f o r y o u r r e c o r d s . N o f u r t h e r a p p r o v a l R e q u i r e d . "F i n a l - A s - B u i l t " d r a w i n g s f o r y o u r r e c o r d s . N o f u r t h e r a p p r o v a l R e q u i r e d . Oct 14, 2022 UNC CARDINAL PARKING DECK O&M HOCKADAY MECHANICAL NAME Ryan Parker EMAIL raleigh@wilkinsonsupplyco.com Table of Contents VENDOR DESCRIPTION PAGE PUMP AND TANK Stancor Om50 4 Fluid Tank 7 Page 2 of 7 Owner’s and Operator’s Manual Oil-Minder®Simplex & Duplex Pump and Control Systems The Stancor Oil-Minder®Control and Pump System allows water to be automatically pumped from elevator pits, transformer vaults, and industrial sumps without danger of ejecting potentially harmful oily substances into sewers, rivers and waterways. There is no need for a separate oil-water separator. The product is engineered for efficient and trouble free pumping, even under the most severe conditions. The Stancor Oil-Minder®System is the overwhelming choice among design engineers and compliance authorities worldwide, and has a proven record for protecting valuable equipment and the environment. Features NEMA 4x weathertight corrosion resistant polycarbonate enclosures Stainless Steel sensor probe with patented electronic technology that repels dirt contamination Single direct plug-in power source for operation of entire system Solid state components Alarms, lights, silence switch, and remote monitoring circuit for oil, high liquid, and high amperage conditions as well as many custom options are available Complete factory assembly and testing insures quality of entire pump and control system Patented -Pat.#4,715,785, #4,752,188, #6,203,281 and others pending Oil-Minder®System can be combined with a variety of different pumps and valves Choice of: 115v, 208v or 220v (1 phase) OR 208v/230v/460v/575v (3 phase) LED indicator lights for oil spill, power, high liquid level, overload, and pump run UL 508 and 778 approved ENTELA tested and approved as a system "There Is Only One Oil-Minder®System and Stancor Makes It" Quality You Can Believe In STANCOR 2 Table of Contents Pump Selections –Pages 3-5 Oil-Minder®System Description –Page 6 Warning!–Page 7 Pump Installation and Operating Instructions –Pages 8-9 Care and Maintenance –Page 10 Performance & Operating Sequence –Pages 11-12 Typical Simplex Multi-Option Oil-Minder®System –Page 13 Control Wiring –Pages 14-15 OM-300 Wiring –Pages 16-17 Oil-Minder®Test Procedure –Pages 18-21 Duplex Oil-Minder®System –Pages 22-23 Wiring Diagrams –Pages 24-27 Control Board Specs & Oil Sensitivity Settings –Pages 28-29 Troubleshooting –Pages 30-32 Pump Service and Repair –Pages 33-34 Pump F.L.A.–Page 35 SE/SV-Series Dimensions –Page 36 Spare Parts Diagrams –Pages 37-38 SE/SV Pump Exploded Diagram –Page 39 SE/SV Pump Material Construction –Page 40 3 Description of Stancor Simplex Oil-Minder®Systems The Stancor Simplex Oil-Minder®System is available in two primary configurations, as follows: The Multi-Option Oil-Minder®System is designed for easy, fool-proof installation.All pump and control cables are factory wired into a wall mountable junction box. Between the junction box and the main Oil-Minder®control panel is a multi-pin quick connect cable. This single cord, 8-pin system allows the electrical cable between the junction box and control panel to be run through conduit and interconnected up to 250 feet long, using a single "push and turn" motion. There is no need for field wiring. Electrical Installation costs are reduced by approximately 75% and all connections are secure and water-tight.This system is available for pumps using less than 8 amps. The Junior or Direct Wire Oil-Minder®System is a good choice where the main control is located in the same area as the pump pit, or where the main control will be located remotely and conventional "hard wiring" is used between a junction box and the main control. Comparative features of each model are as follows: Feature included in standard package O/M Multi-Option O/M Junior/Direct Wire SE-40 (.4 HP) or SE-50 (.5 HP) 115V or 230V single phase pump x x Solid state NEMA 4x control panel x x Separate LED indicator lights on NEMA 4x control for A) oil alert, B) high water, C) high motor amps, D) power to system, and E) pump activation x x Self cleaning, hermetically sealed stainless steel oil detection probe x x Float switches for pump activation and high water alert x x Monitoring relays for alert conditions at remote locations x x High decibel, water tight horn and silence switch for alert conditions x x Direct plug-in activation of entire pump and control system from the main control panel (6' cord and molded plug included) x x Factory hard wiring of pump, oil probe, and floats into NEMA 4x junction box x Factory hard wiring of pump, oil probe, and floats directly into main NEMA 4x control panel x Junction box with male 8-pin cable receptacle x 25' 8-pin Quick Connect cable (expandable to 250' with interconnecting extension cables)x Female 8-pin cable receptacle installed in the NEMA 4x control panel x 4 General & Electrical Specifications (Special voltages and pump models available upon request) Model H.P.Voltage RPM Rated Full-Load Amps Discharge Size Max. Head Ft. Max. Flow GPM SE-50 0.5 115/230 460 3600 8/4 2"37'74 SE-40 0.4 115 3600 5 2"22'64 Standard Pump Selection Chart 5 Additional Pump Selections ASME A 17.1 Section 2.2.2.5 (2007) requires that, for each building elevator, the elevator sump pump shall be capable of pumping at least 3,000 gallons per hour. Therefore, after considering vertical lift and pipe friction losses, a larger pump selection may be necessary for certain projects. No matter what the pump capacity requirement may be, Stancor has an Oil-Minder®System that will do the job. Please refer to the chart below for additional commonly specified pump selections. Stancor manufactures pumps up to 75 HP, details of which can be found at www.stancorpumps.com. Specifications Output Discharge Rated Cable Pump & System Model HP Voltage Amps In.Max. Head (ft) Max. Capacity Length (ft) SE-40 O/M 4/10 115 5 2"22 64 GPM 16 SE-50 O/M 1/2 115/220/460 8/4/2 2"37 74 GPM 16 SE-100 O/M 1 115/220/460 14/7/3.5 2"50 100 GPM 33 SE-100HH O/M 1 115/220/460 16/8/4.5 2"80 80 GPM 33 SE-200 O/M 2 220/230/460 21/10/5.5 2" (3")62 172 GPM 33 SV-300 O/M 3 230/460 9/5.2 3" (4")70 210 GPM 33 SV-500 O/M 5 230/460 15/8.6 3" (4")80 280 GPM 33 SV-750 O/M 7.5 230/460 22.5/12.8 3" (4")90 330 GPM 33 1. Female threaded connection provided, standard 2. 208V available as special order 3. Models up to 7 amps are available with 8-pin quick connect cable and standard on all "O/M Multi- Option" Systems 4. All pumps available in 50 Hz configuration –consult factory SE Series Performance Curves SV Series Performance Curves 6 Oil-Minder®System Description The Stancor Oil-Minder®System is a submersible pump and control package designed to pump water out of elevator sumps without the danger of ejecting hydraulic fluid into sewers and waterways. This patented product has been used in thousands of applications for more than 20 years. The Oil-Minder®System consists of a watertight, corrosive-resistant control panel, a properly sized electric submersible pump and oil-sensing probe and solid-state electrical relay components. The submersible pump is permanently installed at the base of the elevator pit or vault and designed to turn on and off automatically when the built-in level switch is activated. A self-cleaning, hermetically sealed, stainless steel oil-sensing probe is mounted on the side of the pump. The probe is positioned at a point above the pump inlet, so that it sends a signal to a relay that shuts the pump off if oil is encountered before pollutants are ejected. If the water level in the elevator pit increases, the oil (which is lighter than water)will rise above the oil-sensing probe and allow the pump to function in the normal manner until the water is pumped down, and oil, once again, comes in contact with the probe. How the Stancor Oil Minder®System Works: 7 WARNING! Please read all installation and start-up instructions before proceeding to install the enclosed Stancor Oil-Minder®Pump and Control system. Failure to properly install and test this product can result in personal injury or equipment malfunction. 1. The tip of the oil detection probe must be above the center-line of the pump volute. Failure to position the oil detection probe above the center-line of the volute may cause the pump to activate even when oil is present in the sump.The probe is installed on standard systems by the factory and should not be altered. 2. The teeter float switch should be positioned such that the "off" activation point is above the tip of the oil detection probe and the "on" point is at or above the top of the pump. This will assure that the oil detection probe reacts to water or oil before the pump has the opportunity to turn on.The float is properly preset at the factory for standard systems unless otherwise specified. 3. All wiring should be in accordance with state and local codes. If internal control rewiring becomes necessary, be sure to follow the wiring schematic provided with these instructions. 4. Any technical questions should be directed to the technical department at Stancor, Inc. at 203-268-7513 8 Pump Installation and Operating Instructions Thank you for purchasing one of our pumps. This pump and control system carries a one year warranty. Should a fault develop that is due to either faulty materials or a fault in manufacture, the pump will be repaired or replaced free of charge. (See warranty for complete terms and conditions. Our range of Submersible Dewatering Pumps are suited for Dewatering or recirculating applications. They are extremely quiet in operation which makes them ideal for applications within construction areas for pits, waterfalls, general drainage, electrical utility pits, transformer vaults, parking garages, etc. Our range of Submersible Sewage Pumps are suited for sewage, light slurry and factory waste, sludge carry-off in wastewater-treatment, all sanitary applications, sewage and waste water duties. This Submersible Sump Pump has been factory checked prior to delivery; however, please check for any damage during transport and report same to the carrier without delay. Sales and service is available from Authorized Dealers. Consult the factory for the nearest repair center. Start-up Description Check the data tag for correct voltage. When permanently installing the pump in a sump, for example, make sure that the holding capacity of the sump is proportional to the capacity of the pump. If the sump is too small the pump will stop and start too often. Recommended maximum start-ups per hour is 10. If used with hose, check that no kinks or restrictions are present. Use a check valve if possible to prevent back-flow. Electrical Connection Check that the power is off and line is disconnected before working on the pump. Warning Always disconnect power before undertaking any work on pump, cable, control box or accessories. Handling Always lift the pump by its handle or attach a rope or wire to the handle for lifting or lowering. Never lift by the electrical cable, as it can easily be damaged causing dangerous electrical shorts. Rotation Make sure that the impeller rotates in the correct direction by tilting the pump slightly to one side and starting up the pump for a short moment. The impeller should turn clockwise. This test is only necessary for 3 phase pumps. Installation of the Pump Never place the pump on a loose or soft bottom. It could sink in and water will not reach the impeller. Install pump on solid bottom or hang pump by a wire. If pump is hung by a wire, it will have to be restricted from twisting during start-up. This can be done by securing the pump to one side of the sump. Pumps equipped with a volute should always be kept 3/4 submerged for proper motor cooling. Stops and starts should not exceed 10 times per hour. Make sure to size pump accordingly to sump size and water in-flow. Liquid Temperature The temperature of the water is not to exceed 104° F. Contact the factory for high temperature application; high temperature models are fitted to withstand temperatures of 190° F. 9 Depth of Submergence Maximum depth is 65 feet. Control Always mount control panel in a vertical position and in a dry area above ground near pump. If outdoor installation is applicable, make sure suitable control panel enclosure is used. (NEMA 4X enclosures are provided with the Oil-Minder®control.) Cold Weather Pump cannot freeze as long as it is running or is fully submerged in water. If it is removed from the liquid, empty the pump, clean and dry it. Store it in a space where the temperature is above 32° F (0° Celsius). If the pump has been exposed to freezing temperatures, let it thaw slowly before it is started again. Never thaw using flame or similar methods, as o-rings and other materials may be damaged. Overhaul General If the pump or the mechanical seals are new, the oil seal should be checked after 2 days or 48 hours of operation. After the initial inspection, a periodic maintenance check every 1000 hours of winning will suffice if pump is used in relatively clean water. If the liquid being pumped is very dirty or laden with abrasive material, the pump should be checked every 500 hours. When inspecting the oil in the oil housing, make sure that no water is present. Change the o-ring under the inspection plug after each inspection. Mechanical Seal Inspection Remove the oil inspection plug located on the side of the volute or on top of pump. Tilt the pump so that some oil is drained. If the color of the oil is light yellow-gray (milkish in appearance) or if there is a noticeable trace of water, the lower mechanical seal and seal ring should be inspected/replaced and the oil replaced. Check that the oil housing contains the correct quantity of oil. Check oil again after 15 hours. Repeat the above steps. Use oil as specified under "recommended lubrication," below. When installing mechanical seals, make sure a sleeve is used and that the shaft is well lubricated with the same oil as used in the oil housing or motor housing (oil filled motors use transformer oil). Recommended Lubrication 1. For oil-filled motors use transformer oil Grade 10 e.g. Esso univolt 62, shell Diala B or an equivalent grade. 2. The seal chamber pumps should be filled with any good quality hydraulic oil, viscosity 10W40 e.g. Esso Extra, Texaco Havoline Five Star, Mobil DTE, or equivalent. Inspection of Hydraulic Parts The pump housing (volute) and the impeller should be visually inspected every time an oil and stator inspection is made. Change parts if excessive wear has occurred or if performance of pump has dropped off. Note: If impeller is worn and needs replacing, always install a new oil lip seal and mechanical seal at the same time. 10 Care and Maintenance Safety Precautions Before starting work on the Oil-Minder®System make sure that the system is isolated from the power supply and cannot be energized. Inspection Regular inspection and preventive maintenance ensure more reliable operation. The system is designed to withstand water, oil, and moisture and requires minimal maintenance. Stancor recommends that the probe and connecting bracket be cleaned of any debris, calcium or iron deposits once every year (more frequently under severe conditions) and that the float switch is turned on to check pump operation during normal maintenance or every six months. 1. To clean probe use alcohol and an abrasive pad or steel wool. 2. To clean connecting bracket use a rag and alcohol. Remove all debris or iron deposits so as to prevent the possibility of shorting the probe. 11 Performance & Operating Sequence Stancor's Oil-Minder®product is intended to control a submersible pump for the purpose of maintaining sump pit liquid levels. The unique features offered by the Oil-Minder®System are the ability to sense oil floating on the top of the water, and preventing the pump from ejecting this oil into sewers, rivers, and waterways. In addition, the system provides for separate alarms in the event of an oil spill, high liquid level condition, or overcurrent condition due to a pump fault. The main float will rise (close) when the liquid level increases in the sump pit. The main pump relay should close to allow the pump to discharge the liquid as long as the oil sensor has a resistance to ground lower than the set point (i.e., the oil sensor is in conductive water and normal operation is allowed). The pump relay will open when the liquid level drops below the oil sensor probe tip (pump off). There is a one (1) second time delay after the liquid level drops below the oil sensor probe tip. At this point, the oil sensor probe voltage drops from 5VDC to 15 millivolts DC until the "pump-on" float rises again, at which point the oil sensor input voltage returns to 5VDC. The 15 millivolt input greatly reduced the potential field and subsequent metal ion exchange, thus preventing build up of foreign matter on the probe surface. If either float is closed, and the oil sensor measures a higher resistance than its set point, the pump is disabled and the oil LED, audible alarm, and remote alarm relay are energized. This failure condition is non-latching, and is automatically cleared by returning the oil sensor to a conductive fluid, or by lowering the floats. Other system features include overload protection and high level liquid alarming. The overload feature measures the motor current to determine if a locked rotor or other high-current condition exists. The maximum acceptable normal running amperage is user selected on the product faceplate. The NEMA trip class 5 overload curve is followed for tripping in the event that the motor amperage exceeds its trip point. In the event of an overload; the motor is disabled, while the overload LED, audible alarm, and the remote relay are energized. Automatic reset operation is configured via a p.c. board jumper header. Systems configured in manual reset will allow a reset only after a loss of power or by depressing the reset button. Systems configured in automatic mode will reset after 10 minutes. The 10 minute restart may be bypassed by removing and reapplying power or by depressing the reset button. Automatic mode is visually indicated by a flashing overload LED, while manual mode will have a solid overload LED. The high level liquid alarm is enabled by an additional float placed at a level in the pit above normal acceptable liquid levels. The rising of this float (closing) will cause the controller to energize the audible alarm, remote alarm relay, and the high level LED. The high level alarm will only be de- energized after the high level float drops to its normal state (open). The high level liquid alarm will not disable the pump motor from normal operation. An additional silence alarm button is provided to de-energize the audible alarm for the convenience of maintenance personnel. Depressing this button will not clear any fault, but merely silence the alarm for 5 minutes. If a fault is removed and returns, the audible alarm will reenergize as expected. 12 The Oil-Minder®System is available standard with a 1/2 horsepower, submersible pump that is prewired with a National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 4X control panel. Installation is as follows: 1. The pump is set in the base of the elevator pit. (The pump is equipped with its own intake stand and, therefore, does not need external support.) 2. The junction box is secured to the wall in a convenient location, usually near the pump, with four mounting screws. 3. The control panel is secured to the wall in a convenient location with four mounting screws,consistent with code requirements. 4. Using 8-pin quick connect cable (supplied with single phase full feature systems), interconnect the junction box and control panel. Use 2" watertight conduit according to NEC requirements, for the interconnection. Additional 8-pin cable lengths are available. Please consult your factory representative. 5. The electrical cord from the panel is plugged into the standard outlet, thereby activating the pump and control. The system is designed to withstand water, oil and moisture and requires minimal maintenance. Stancor recommends only that the probe is cleaned of any debris, calcium or iron deposits once every year (more frequently under sever conditions) and that the float switch is turned on to check pump operation during normal elevator maintenance, or every six months. The Oil-Minder®System includes high-level alarms and remote monitoring circuits The standard elevator Oil-Minder®system is supplied as a complete package as detailed on the following page. The illustrated package is shown with our most popular pump, the SE-50. However, the same physical layout applied to the full range of pumps available through your Stancor dealer. 13 1. Stancor Model SE-50 submersible effluent pump .5 HP, 115 volt, 3600 RPM, 2" discharge connection. 2. Stancor Oil-Minder®115V, 1Ø control system with built-in audible and visual alarm when pump does not run due to oil in pit or high liquid or high amperage condition. Provide silencing button for audible alarm built into panel. Panel shall have two contacts for a remote alarm location (one each for oil and high water or amperage alert). Junction box will be provided with multi-pin connector and cord in lengths as required, 25 ft. standard, optional 25 ft. increments. 3. Junction box will be provided with multi-pin connector and cord in lengths as required; 25 ft. is standard, optional 25 ft. increments available up to 250 ft. 4. All buried pump pressure discharge piping shall be protected with tapecoat CT corrosion protection tape. 5. Pump cable, probe cable, high liquid alarm cable, and pump "on" float cable (16 ft. length standard). 6. High liquid alarm float with clamp device to mount to pump discharge piping. 7. Pump On float. 8.Power cord and molded ground plug (6 ft. length). ITEMS 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 AND 8 ARE PROVIDED BY STANCOR AS A STANDARD PACKAGE. Typical Stancor Simplex Multi-Option Oil-Minder®System 14 Elevator Pit “Full Feature” Wiring –115V Color Code Oil-Minder®Control Box 15 Oil-Minder®Control Field Wiring “Jr”, Direct Wire, Transformer Vault Type 16 Full Feature OM-300 Vertical Style Float & Probe Wiring 17 Direct Wire Version OM-300 Vertical Style Float & Probe Wiring 18 SE-40/SE-50 Oil-Minder®System Test Procedure with RMS and High Level Alarm WARNING:Risk of electric shock -this pump is supplied with a grounding conductor and grounding-type attachment plug. To reduce the risk of electric shock, be certain that it is connected only to a properly grounded, grounding-type receptacle. ATTENTION:When required by local code, electrical connection shall be made using UL listed rigid metal conduit with water tight seal. CAUTION:This control is equipped with an automatic reset overload relay, pump motor may start automatically when the relay is in the automatic reset position. CAUTION:This pump has been evaluated for water use only. Read all instructions before installing the system. Pump Test 1.Verify Oil-Minder's®sensitivity setting: set at 5. 2.Insert electrical plug into wall outlet. Power indicator will light. 3.Short Oil-Minder®probe to pump housing with screw driver or shorting jumper, (no water in pit). 4.With short in place, manually raise "Pump On" float. Pump should turn on. "Pump Run" indicator will light. 5.Lower float. Pump will continue to run. 6.Remove short. Pump will then turn off. Oil Fault/RMS Test 1.Manually raise "Pump On" float with NO short on probe. The RMS System should then be activated. "Oil Fault" indicator will light. Alarm will sound. 2.To silence alarm, depress "Silence" button. 3.Lower float. RMS warning system will then turn off. High Alarm/RMS Test 1.Manually raise alarm float. The high level alarm will sound and the RMS system will activate ("High Level" indicator will light). 2.Depress reset button to reset the system. 3.Lower alarm float. Overload Setting 1.Verify that Overload Amp setting is set at 5 for SE-40 and 8 for SE-50 pump. 19 Pump Control Diagnostics Test (Reset Button Method) CAUTION!! THE FOLLOWING TEST SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED IF THERE IS NO CHANCE OF PUMPING OIL. THIS TEST IS A DIAGNOSTIC TEST AND WILL CAUSE THE PUMP TO RUN REGARDLESS IF OIL IS PRESENT OR NOT. Power up the oil-minder®, the power on led will light up green; depress the reset button and continue to hold, oil fault, high level and overload led will light up red. After 5 seconds the pump run led will light up green and power will be supplied to pump for a 5 second interval; if oil, air or dirt (dirt, calcium or iron deposits on the probe) is present the pump will still be powered up for 5 seconds, however, the oil fault led will light up (RED).This new feature gives maintenance personnel the ability to quickly check the functioning of the pump, oil-minder and control. Float switches will still have to be tested manually for assurance of their integrity. See following page for graphics detail of this procedure. 20 Stancor Oil-Minder®Version 2.01 with Test Mode 1 -POWER UP THE OIL-MINDER®, THE POWER ON LED WILL LIGHT UP GREEN 2 -DEPRESS THE RESET BUTTON AND CONTINUE TO HOLD. OIL FAULT, HIGH LEVEL AND OVERLOAD LED WILL LIGHT UP RED. 3 -AFTER 5 SECONDS (CONTINUE TO DEPRESS RESET BUTTON) THE PUMP RUN LED WILL LIGHT UP GREEP. IF WATER IS PRESENT POWER WILL BE SUPPLIED TO PUMP FOR A 5 SECOND INTERVAL. 4 -IF OIL IS PRESENT THE PUMP WILL STILL BE POWERED UP FOR 5 SECONDS, HOWEVER, THE OIL FAULT LED WILL LIGHT UP RED 21 Oil-Minder®System Test Procedure with RMS & High Level Alarm (OM-300 vertical float version) Pump Run Test (hands on method) 1.Verify Oil-Minder’s®sensitivity setting: set at 5. 2.Verify proper incoming power connection. Power indicator will light. 3.Short Oil-Minder®probe to pump housing with screw driver or jumper wire. 4.With short (jumper wire) in place, manually raise stainless steel ball float closest to the bottom of the probe, raise float (1/2”). Pump should turn on. Pump run indicator will light. 5.Lower float. Pump will continue to run. 6.Remove short. Pump will then turn off. Oil Fault/RMS Test 1.Manually raise stainless steel ball float closest to the bottom of the probe, raise float (1/2”) with NO short on probe. The RMS system should then be activated. Oil fault indicator will light. Alarm will sound (where applicable). 2.To silence alarm, depress silence button. 3.Lower float. RMS warning system will then turn off. High Alarm/RMS Test 1.Manually raise stainless steel ball float at the top of the probe assembly, raise float (1/2”). The high level alarm will sound (where applicable) and the RMS system will activate. (High level indicator will light). 2.Depress reset button to reset the system. 3.Lower alarm float. 22 The Stancor Duplex Oil-Minder®System provides for all the safety and operational features of the Simplex System, while allowing two pumps to operate together in the same sump. The Duplex Oil-Minder®Control alternates each pump upon start-up, assuring equal run time and wear. In the event of heavy inflow, both pumps will operate together until the water level recedes and both pumps are deactivated. The high level/lag pump float will activate an alarm if the water condition continues after a pre-set time point is reached (set for 6 seconds, adjustable between 6 seconds and 10 minutes).An alarm and separate diagnostic LED lights are provided for oil alert, high water, and high amperage (pump overload) conditions. Remote monitoring relays are also provided for alert conditions. A silence and reset switch clears the alarm mode once a fault is addressed.In addition, there are LED lights to "power" the system and to indicate "pump 1" and "pump 2" activation. As with all Stancor Oil- Minder®Systems, oil is contained in the sump while water is pumped on a fully automatic basis, assuring protection of the environment, personnel, and valuable equipment-even during an alarm condition. The standard Stancor Duplex Oil-Minder®System includes two SE-50 pumps (115v or 230v). However, Stancor can provide systems with any of its wide range of pumps up to 75 HP, with electrical provisions that meet the customer's requirements. Stancor Duplex Oil-Minder®System 23 Typical Stancor Duplex Oil-Minder®System 24 Single Phase Duplex Wiring (Typical) 25 Three Phase Simplex Wiring (Typical) 26 Three Phase Duplex Wiring (Typical) 27 Simplex & Duplex Large Enclosure Dimensions (Standard Systems) 28 Inputs 1.Oil sense input. Ground referenced 50K-200K ohms, 5VDC source. 2.Motor overload current measurement. Isolated from power system. Measurement range 3-100 amps. Trip class 5 (fixed). 3.Motor overload set point adjustment pot. Range 5-15 amps (linear adjustment). 4.Main float input (>2K ohms = open; <300 ohm = closed; 12VDC source). 5.High alarm float input (>2K ohms = open; <300 ohms = closed; 12VDC source). 6.Oil sensor sensitivity adjustment pot (range 1-10; 1=50K ohms; 10=200K ohms). 7.Automatic /Manual overload reset selector (header Jumper on p.c. board). 8.System reset button (p.c. button actuated from side of enclosure). Allows reset of system after and overload condition. 9.Alarm silence button (p.c. button actuated from side of enclosure). Outputs 1.Motor/pump control relay (Rated 1Hp@115VAC; 2Hp@230VAC). 2.Audible alarm output (12VDC, 300mA. Two pin locking header on p.c. board). 3.Alarm relay output (dry N.O. contacts rated 5amps@115/230VAC general purpose). 4.Power LED (green). 5.Oil alarm LED (red). 6.Overload LED (red). 7.High level alarm LED (red). 8.Pump run LED (green). 9.Oil sensor output, 15 millivolts at pump motor shutdown; 1 second time delay when liquid level reaches probe tip off point. Terminal Blocks: U.L. recognized 300VAC, 20 amps. Three side barrier with capture/pressure plate; combination head. Input: Standard: 90-125VAC (1 phase, 50-60Hz) Optional: 180-240VAC (1 phase, 50-60Hz) Oil-Minder®Control Board Specifications and Oil Sensitivity Settings 29 Stancor Oil-Minder®Controller Board Specifications Inputs/Oil Sensitivity Settings The oil sensor has a resistance to ground lower than the set point (i.e., the oil sensor is in conductive water and normal operation is allowed).The pump relay will open when the liquid level drops below the oil sensor probe tip (pump off).There is a one (1) second time delay after the liquid level drops below the oil sensor probe tip.At this point, the oil sensor probe voltage drops from 5VDC to 15 millivolts DC until the "pump-on" float rises again, at which point the oil sensor input voltage returns to 5VDC.The 15 millivolt input greatly reduces the potential field and subsequent metal ion exchange, thus preventing build up of foreign matter on the probe surface. Oil Sensitivity Settings Sensitivity position "1" = 50k ohms Sensitivity position "10" = 200k ohms Water = low resistance Oil = high resistance Sensitivity position "1" = the solution must be very conductive to pump (all water) Sensitivity position "10" = the solution does not have to be very conductive to pump (very oily/water mix) Sensitivity position "1" = the Oil Minder is very sensitive to any oil Sensitivity position "10" = the Oil Minder isn't very sensitive to oil 30 Troubleshooting Inspecting Motor Cable Carefully inspect the outer shield and the wire endings. If the outer shield has been damaged, water can enter the pump through the core. The cable should never be stretched by force and the pump never lifted by the motor cable. This could severely damage the cable and the cable glands in the cable holder. Perform continuity test on each lead. Detailed Overhaul A complete overhaul should be made if water has been detected in the stator housing, or if the pump has been in daily use for a year. The intervals can be increased if the pump has been permanently installed as a sump pump with automatic controls. Dismantle the pump completely, replace damaged or worn parts with new original parts. Clean all surfaces and check for cracks or damage. If water is present in stator housing and/or in oil chamber, replace mechanical seals, o-rings, oil seal and bearings. Do Not ... Lift the pump by the motor electrical cable Run the pump dry Attempt electrical repairs Run the pump if the motor is not at least 3/4 submerged for long periods of time Install the pump on soft or loose ground Run the pump backwards Troubleshooting 1. Pump Will Not Start The cause could be wrong voltage, no power, damaged cable, bad fuse, tripped circuit breaker, thermal contactor has opened due to overheated motor caused by locked rotor or wrong connections, or the thermal cut out switch has not reset (5 minutes). If the pump does not start from new, then the seal has possibly stuck due to the length of time it has been standing since it was manufactured. In this case, remove bottom strainer and turn the impeller nut clockwise with a pair of pliers. This will release the initial friction on the seal and once the power is connected will allow the pump to work. Note: if fitting an extension lead, a QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN should be consulted to ensure correct rating is provided. 2. Low Capacity or Low Head The cause can be clogged passages, e.g. the strainer, worn impeller or pump housing, broken pipes, damaged pipes, damaged or kinked hoses, discharge pipe or hose too long or too narrow, or wrong rotation (3 phase only). Insufficient liquid in sump Strainer blocked Impeller blocked Impeller damaged Entrained air present Excessive back pressure 31 3. Water in Stator Housing If water is found in the stator housing, the pump must be dismantled for a complete overhaul and the stator dried out. Probable causes: damaged, worn shaft seals or bad o-rings (check oil housing for water contamination)-change seals; damaged cable or cable gland (change). 4. Water in the Oil Housing Problem can be: worn or damaged oil lipseal, mechanical seals or o-rings. Change if needed. Leaking inspection plug or oil housing cover: change elastomers. If Pump Does Not Start 1. Check power supply, test voltage and amps. 2. Check circuit breaker, fuse and switch. 3. Check cable, contactor and connections. Test for continuity. Check stator for open or grounded stator coil. 4. Make sure that the impeller is clear of obstructions and is rotating freely. IMPORTANT! When trouble shooting always follow local, state and federal regulations regarding procedures and safety. If the pump still does not start, please contact closest available recommended repair shop. Oil-Minder®Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Possible Cause Action Overload tripped Reset button Defective float or probe Replace as necessary Defective Control Replace control Power supply failure Check out electrical system for loose connections Pump does not run Loose connection in pump or control panel Check and tighten connections Pump shuts off before water level reaches tip of probe Sensor setting set too low Adjust sensor setting upward by 1 increment; retest for proper shut off Steady in-flow of oil Repair defective source of oil leak Substantial quantity of oil in sump Remove oil, repair defective sourceRMS trips frequently Oil-filled pump motor could be leaking Repair or replace defective pump Improper overload setting Verify setting Debris in volute Remove debris Jammed impeller Inspect and remove debris from impeller Water in motor Repair or replace pump Wet or damaged wiring Inspect external cable and replace if worn or damaged Overload trips frequently Water in control Inspect/dry out control. Tighten cover clasp. Replace if shorted. For further assistance, consult the Stancor Product Service Department. 32 Trouble Cause Remedy (1) Power failure (2) Large discrepancy power source and voltage (3) Significant drop in voltage (1)~(3) Contact electric power company and devise counter-measures (4) Motor phase malfunction (4) Inspect electric circuit (5) Electric circuit connection faulty (5) Correct wiring (6) Faulty connection of control circuit (6) Inspect connections and magnetic switch (7) Fuse blown (7) Replace with correct type of fuse (8) Faulty magnetic switch (8) Replace with correct one (9) Water is not at level indicated by Float (9) Raise water level (10) Float is not in appropriate level (10) Adjust position of float (11) Float effective (11) Repair or replace (12) Short circuit breaker is functioning (12) Repair location of short circuit (13) Foreign matter clogging pump (13) Remove foreign matter (14) Motor burned out (14) Repair or replace Does not start. Starts, but immediately stops. (15) Motor bearing broken (15) Repair or replace (1) Prolonged dry operation has activated motor protector and caused pump to stop (1)Raise stop water level (2) High liquid temperature has activated motor protector and caused pump to stop (2) Lower liquid temperature Operates, but stops after a while. (3) Reverse rotation (3) Correct rotation (1) Reverse rotation (1) Correct rotation (see Operation) (2) Significant drop in voltage (2) Contact electric power company and devise counter-measures (3) Operating a 60Hz pump on 50Hz (3) Check nameplate (4) Discharge head is high (4) Recalculate and adjust (5) Large piping loss (5) Recalculate and adjust (6) Low operating water level causes air suction (6)Raise water level or lower pump (7) Leaking from discharge piping (7) Inspect, repair (8) Clogging of discharge piping (8) Remove foreign matter (9) Foreign matter in suction inlet (9) Remove foreign matter (10) Foreign matter clogging pump (10) Remove foreign matter Does not pump. Inadequate volume. (11) Worn impeller (11) Replace impeller (1) Unbalanced current and voltage (1) Contact electric power company and devise counter-measure (2) Significant voltage drop (2) Contact electric power company and devise counter-measure (3) Motor phase malfunction (3) Inspect connections and magnetic switch (4) Operating 50Hz pump on 60Hz (4) Check nameplate (5) Reverse rotation (5) Switch motor leads (3 phase only) (6) Foreign matter clogging pump (6) Remove foreign matter Over current (7) Motor bearing is worn or damaged (7) Replace bearing (1) Insufficient pumping (1) Check rotation (3 phase only) (2) Pump clogged with foreign matter (2) Disassemble and remove foreign matter (3) Piping resonates (3) Improve piping Pump vibrates; excessive operating noise.(4) Gate valve is closed too far (4) Open gate valve Troubleshooting 33 Operation 1. Before starting the pump a)After completing installation, measure the insulation resistance again as described in Installation. b)Check water level. If the pump is operated continuously for an extended period of time in a dry condition or at the lowest water level, the motor protector will be activated.Constant repetition of this action will shorten pump service life. Do not start the pump again in such a situation until after the motor has completely cooled. 2. Test Operation Non-automatic pump Automatic pump a)Turn the operating switch on and off a couple of times to check for normal pump start. Floating switch must be raised for the pump to start. b)Next, check direction of rotation.If discharge volume is low or unusual sounds are heard when the pump is operating, rotation has been reversed.When this happens, reverse two of the wires. Maintenance Check pressure, output, voltage, current and other specifications. Unusual readings may indicate. Refer to Troubleshooting and correct as soon as possible. 1. Daily Inspections Check current and ammeter fluctuation daily. If ammeter fluctuation is great, even though within the limits of pump rating, foreign matter may be clogging the pump. If the quantity of liquid discharged falls suddenly, foreign matter may be blocking the suction inlet. 2. Regular inspections a.Monthly inspections Measure the insulation resistance. The value should be more than 1M ohm.If resistance starts to fall rapidly even with an initial indication of over 1M ohm, this may be an indication of trouble and repair work is required. b.Annual inspections To prolong the service life of the mechanical seal by replacing the oil in the mechanical seal chamber once a year. Water mixed the oil or cloudy textures are indications of a defective mechanical seal requiring replacement. When replacing the oil, lay the pump on its side with filler plug on top. Inject suitable amount of turbine oil No. 32 (ISO VG-32) c.Inspections at 3-5 year intervals Conduct an overhaul of the pump. These intervals will preclude the possibility of future trouble. 3. Parts that will need to be replaced Replace the appropriate part when the following conditions are apparent. Replaceable part Mechanical seal Oil filler plug gasket Lubricating oil O-ring Replacement guide Whenever oil in mechanical seal chamber is clouded Whenever oil is replaced or inspected Whenever clouded or dirty Whenever pump is overhauled Frequency Annually A half yearly A half yearly Annually Note: above replacement schedule is based on normal operating conditions. Motor output 0.4HP 0.5HP 1HP 2HP 3HP 5HP 7.5HP Mechanical seal 12 Ø 19.875 (3/4”)Ø 25 Ø Oil seal 12 Ø x 24 Ø x 7t 18 Ø x 35 Ø x 7t Oil filler plug gasket (inner diameter) x (outer diameter) x (thickness) = 8.5 Ø x 13 Ø x 0.8 t PE washer Lubricating oil (turbine oil #32)120 cc 220 cc 500 cc 600 cc Pump Service and Repair 34 Disassembly and Assembly 1. Disassembly When disassembling pump, have a piece of cardboard or wooden board ready to place the different parts on as you work. Do not pile parts on top of each other. They should be laid out nearly in rows. The “O” ring and gasket cannot be used again once they are removed. Have replacement parts ready. Disassemble in the following order, referring to the sectional view. Be sure to cut off power source before beginning disassembly. (1) Remove pump casing bolts, raise the motor section and remove pump casing. (2) Remove shaft head bolt and impeller. (3) Remove oil filler plug and drain lubricating oil. (4) Remove intermediate casing bolts and intermediate oil chamber. (Remember that any lubricating oil remaining in the mechanical seal chamber will flow out). (5) Carefully remove mechanical seal, taking care not to scratch sliding surface or motor shaft. 2. Assembly Reassemble in reverse order of disassembly Be careful of the following points. (1) During re-assembly, rotate the impeller by hand and check for smooth rotation. If rotation is not smooth, perform steps (3) through (5) again. (2) Upon completion of re-assembly step (1) rotate the impeller by hand from the suction inlet and check that it rotates smoothly without touching the suction cover before operating the pump. Please obtain “O” rings, shaft seals and other parts from pump dealer. The table of dimensions is given in “Maintenance”. Nameplate format Pump Service and Repair 35 Phase VoltageModelItemHPHZ13115V230V460V 575V Amp v v 4.6SE-40 0.4HP 60Hz v v 2.3 v v 8 v v 4 v v 2SE/SS-50 0.5HP 60Hz v v 1 v v 12 v v 6 v v 3 v v 1.5 SE/SV/SS-100 1HP 60Hz v v 1.2 v v 12 v v 6 v v 3SE/SV/SS-200 2HP 60Hz v v 2.3 v v 9 v v 4.3SE/SV/SS-300 3HP 60Hz v v 3.5 v v 15 v v 7.5SE/SV/SS-500 5HP 60Hz v v 5.7 v v 21 v v 10.5SE/SV/SS-750 7.5HP 60Hz v v 8 v v 4.6SE-40A 0.4HP 60Hz v v 2.3 v v 8SE/SS-50A 0.5HP 60Hz v v 4 v v 12SE/SV/SS-100A 1HP 60Hz v v 6 SE/SV/SS SE/SV/SS-200A 2HP 60Hz v v 12 SB SB-12 0.2HP 60Hz v v 2.1 SL SL-75 0.75HP 60Hz v v 5 SSD-75 0.75HP 60Hz v v v 6/3 SSD-100 1HP 60Hz v v v v v 11/5.5/4/2SSD SSD-200 2HP 60Hz v v v v v 20/10/6/3 SSS-75 0.75HP 60Hz v v v v v 5/3/1.5/0.8SSSSSS-100 1HP 60Hz v v v v v 10/5/3/1.5 AHS-05 0.5HP 60Hz v v v 6/3.2 AHS-10 1HP 60Hz v v v v v 11/6.4/3.5/1.7 AHS-10 HH 1HP 60Hz v v v v v 12/6/3.5/1.7AHS AHS-25 HH 2.5HP 60Hz v v v v 13/6.6/3.5 Pump F.L.A. 36 Dimensions (mm) Type A A1 A2 A3 D D1 D2 H H1 H2 H3 SE-40 231 72 132 NA 145 66 78 396 266 110 110 SE-50 231 72 132 NA 145 66 78 421 291 110 110 SE-100 231 72 132 NA 145 66 78 496 339 110 110 *SE/SV-100 312 82 183 101 163 76 87 494 351 124 156 SE/SV-200 390 103 235 151 210 105 105 532 400 150 152 SE/SV-300 390 103 235 151 210 105 105 552 420 150 152 SE/SV-500 470 110 257 170 218 98 120 633 468 160 206 SE/SV-750 470 110 257 170 218 98 120 673 508 160 206 Note:*SE/SV-100 : Elbow Type (Optional) 37 Spare Parts Diagram “Full Feature” 38 Spare Parts Diagram “JR/Direct Wire” 39 SE-40 -100 SE/SV-200 -750 Stancor Pump Models SE/SV Material Construction 40 41 Notes: 42 Stancor, Inc. 515 Fan Hill Road • Monroe, CT 06468 203-268-7513 • Fax 203-268-7958 • www.stancorpumps.com www.fluidall.com|800.849.0591 PROUDLY CRAFTED IN THE USA ASSOCIATIONS & MEMBERSHIPS Waste Oil Tank Features• 10 GA and 12 GA Steel Construction• 9” x 12” Lockable Fill Box• At-A-Glance Fluid Level Gauge• Dip Stick for Interstitial Monitoring• Downtube with 2” Camlock and Dust Cap Standard Openings• 2″ Updraft Vent• 3″ Emergency Vent in Outer Tank• 3″ Emergency Vent in Inner Tank The 200 gallon UL-142 rated aboveground Steel Double Walled Waste Oil Tank is engineered and designed to provide a reliable and safe solution for the collection and storage of used oil at auto shops, transportation facilities, commercial or construction sites. 200 Gallon Steel Double Walled Waste Oil Tank Model Capacity Dimensions Weight SDFTDW200 200 Gallons 36” x 36” x 40”576 Lbs. WORLD CLASS FLUID STORAGEWORLD CLASS FLUID STORAGE AND HANDLING SOLUTIONSAND HANDLING SOLUTIONS Description OMNTEC’s LU and LPD leak-detection and overfill-alarm systems provide continuous, accurate monitoring in a variety of applica- tions. Typical applications are reservoirs, sumps, dry interstitial spaces and dispenser pans. These easy-to-install controllers alarm for in tank levels and leak conditions. The LU controllers are capable of accepting up to 9 sensors for high level and leak detection. The LPD controllers are capable of accepting up to 9 sensors for in tank levels and product distin- guishing leak detection. The electro-optic sen- sors used with these controllers allow users to easily cycle all sensors through a simulated leak, with the press of a single button. This feature eliminates the need to remove the sen- sor from its location. An alarm condition is visually signaled by a dedicated LED indicator, which remains lit until the alarm condition is corrected. Alarm conditions are audibly annunciated via a 95- decibel piezoelectric pulsing horn. RA-series remote annunciators add high-level remote audio-visual alarms without the need for exter- nal AC power. The LU-SP series controllers accommodate a variety of special applications. In addition, LU- OW systems are available for use with Oil Water Seperators. The NEMA 4X rating of the LU and LPD series controllers indicates a weatherproof, cor- rosion-resistant product. These controllers are ruggedly constructed to provide reliable and cost-effective performance. Features NEMA 4X weatherproof, corrosion-resistant Remote sensor testing Acknowledge switch Test switch System detect light Easily installed Low-voltage remote annunciator outputs Relay outputs (See Specifications) LED indicators rated MTBF 11 years Specific sensor LED Inputs accept either high level, caution level or leak sensors Low level alarm (LPD controllers only) Distinguishes liquid hydrocarbons from water (LPD controllers only) Removable sensor input connectors U.L. listed Third-party certified Cost effective Modified controllers for special applications OMNTEC R Part Nu mbers: Leak Detection Systems LU-series LPD-series LS-ASC LWF L-R-1 L-series PDS PDWF PDWS OMNTEC R Enclosure:NEMA 4X Power Input:85-125 VAC, 47-440 Hz 16 watts maximum Power to Sensor:2 VDC @ 13 mA Intrinsically safe for Class I, Group D hazardous locations Sensor Cable:Shielded 22 AWG with drain wire (OMNTEC EC-4 or EC-12) Maximum length 2,000 feet Audio-visual Controls: Audible alarm:95 dB pulsing horn Red lights:High level alarm (L-Series) Liquid-leak alarm (LWF and LS-ASC) Amber Light:Low level alarm (L-Series) Water-leak alarm (PD-Series) Green light:Power is on (system detecting) Horn-off button:Silences horn (auto time-out also included) Test button:Tests entire system electronics, from sensors to control panel Response Time:Immediate Relay Outputs:SPST normally open dry contact 1.25 amp, 120 VAC Switches when an alarm condition occurs (1 per sensor up to LU3) Low-voltage Outputs:12 VDC Operating Temperature:0 to 140° F Compatible Sensors *:L-1-Series For high liquid level (see sensor chart)L-2-Series For high liquid level and caution level or high liquid level and low liquid level LS-ASC For liquid-leak detection in both under- ground and aboveground applications For double-wall dry interstice of Xerxes 4-foot fiberglass tanks LWF For double-wall fiberglass dry interstice PDS For product distinguishing liquid-leak detection PDWF For double-wall fiberglass dry interstice PDWS For double-wall steel dry interstice * Additional sensor applications available with SP and OW controllers Accessories:RA-1* RA-2* RA-3* RA-4* RA-NYS * Number denotes number of tanks or alarms Weight:LU1—5 lb. L1PD2 — 6 lb. LU2—6 lb. L2PD4 — 9 lb. LU3—6 lb. L3PD6 — 9 lb. LU4—6 lb. LU6—6 lb. LU9—9 lb. Approvals:U.L. listed 5L04 Third-party certified SpecificationsLU1 LU2, LU3, LU4, LU6 and L1PD2 dimen- sions are same as LU1 LU9 L2PD4 L3PD6 dimensions are same as L2PD4 OMNTEC Mfg., Inc. 1993 Pond Road Ronkonkoma, New York 11779 Phone: 631-981-2001 Fax: 631-981-2007 Email: omntec@omntec.com Web Site:www.omntec.com For technical information: OMNTEC R Note: Current published specifications are subject to change without notification. Ve r ify specifications with manufacturer. For additional information consult factory or pricelist. LS-ASC General Purpose Sensor Sensor for Double-Wall Steel Tanks Leak-Detection Sensors LWF Sensor for Dry Double-Wall Fiberglass Tanks The LWF nondistinguishing sensor was designed to fit into the annular space of dry double-wall fiberglass tanks. With its slim, compact shape and flexible snake- like shaft, the LWF can easily be installed and removed from grade. (When ordering, the part number will denote tank diameter.) For product distinguishing use part number PDWF. 3/4" NPT NIPPLE 3" 1-5/8" Diameter Cable Length 12 Feet The LS-ASC nondistinguishing sensor was designed to accommo- date a variety of applications. With its convenient size and abili- ty to detect liquids at any angle, the LS-ASC sensor is the ideal sensor for sumps, dispenser pans, containment areas and annular spaces of double-wall steel tanks. For product distinguishing use part number PDS for general pur- pose or PDWS for double-wall steel tanks. Cable length 20 feet Sized to tank diameter 1-5/8"5/8" L-Series Product-Level Sensor L-R-1 Sensor for Brine-Filled Double-Wall Tanks The dual-point L-R-1 sensor is designed for double-wall brine-filled fiberglass tanks. This sensor is made of non- metallic corrosion-resistant materials. An alarm is activat- ed to signal changes in reser- voir-liquid level beyond acceptable limits (high or low). The L-series sensors are designed to provide product-level alarms for high, caution or low product levels. L-series sensors can be remotely tested without removal. This sensor is available with multiple alarm points. Cable Length 20 Feet 2" 2.75" 16.00" 13.00" Cable Length 3 Feet Length should be specified in inches by user 1-5/8" D" 5/8" 3/4" NPT 2" NPT OMNTEC sensors are most known for their ease of installation, reliability, cost-efectiveness and remote testability. Electro-optic technology provides accurate and continuous monitoring. Ruggedly constructed, these solid-state sensors are UL listed and Third-party certi- fied. A distinguishing feature of OMNTEC sensors is that they can be tested remotely with the press of a sin- gle button. Enclosure:NEMA 4X (W) 6.75” x (H) 5.50” x (D) 3.75” Pow er Input:12 VDC @ 200 mA maximum Audio-visual Controls: Audible alarm (RA-Series):95 dB pulsing horn Audible alarm (RA-NYS):110 dB pulsing horn Red lights:Liquid-high level alarm Horn-off button on controller:Silences horn Response Time:Immediate Operating Temperature:0 to 140° F Compatible Controllers: LPD-Series LU-Series Wire:22 AWG minimum Weight:1 lb. Approvals:U.L. listed 5L04 Sensor Specifications Power Consumption:2 VDC @ 13mA Sensor Cable:Shielded 22 AWG with drain wire (2000ft maximum) (OMNTEC EC-4 or EC-12) Principles of Operation: Normal Condition:Normally closed beam of light Alarm Condition:Normally closed beam of light opens (refracts) Water Condition:Conductivity electrode (PDS, PDWS and PDWF only) Response Time:Immediate Operating Temperature:-15 to 140° F Approvals:UL-listed, Third Party Approved LED Detector Conductivity Electrode Electrical Conductance LED Prism Remote Annunciators Features Easily installed No external power required Tests remotely NEMA 4X weatherproof, corrosion- resistant LED indicators rated MTBF 11 years High-decibel audible alarm U.L. listed Cost effective Electro-optic Technology with Conductivity for Product Distinguishing SENSOR APPLICATION CONTROLLER PRODUCT DISTINGUISHING LS-ASC leak sensor * LU NO LW F doubewall dry fiberglass LU NO L-1-L,S,D high level LU or LPD NO PDWF doublewall dry fiberglass LPD YES PDS leak sensor * LPD YES L-R-1 reservoir LPD NO * Liquid leak-detection sensors for areas such as doublewall steel tanks,sumps, containment areas, and dispensers pans. Dry Condition Wet Condition OMNTEC Mfg., Inc. 1993 Pond Road Ronkonkoma, New York 11779 Phone: 631-981-2001 Fax: 631-981-2007 Email: omntec@omntec.com Web Site:www.omntec.com OMNTEC R OMNTEC Mfg., Inc. www.OMNTEC.com 1993 Pond Rd., Ronkonkoma, NY 11779 Phone 631-981-2001 Fax 631-981-2007 ls-asc.doc 11/22/2013 OMNTEC LS-ASC Non-product distinguishing Optic Sensor LS-ASC SPECIFICATIONS U.L. LISTED 5L04 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Intrinsically safe Class I, Group D Hazardous Locations when connected in accordance with control drawing nos. L1, L2, L3, L4, L6, L9 LIQUIDS (ex: fuel, water) – photo Optic DRY CONDITION – Normally closed light beam ALARM CONDITION – Opens (refracts) normally closed light beam OPERATING TEMPERATURE SENSOR CABLE -40 TO +140 F Shielded 22 AWG UL-E118830 CM Maximum length 2000 feet POWER 2 VDC @ 13 mA RESPONSE TIME Immediate WEIGHT 1/2 pound WET CONDITION DRY CONDITION LED LED DETECTOR PRISM 1-5/8” 3” 3/4” NPT NIPPLE SHIELD DRAIN BLACK WHITE RED CABLE LENGTH 12 FEET Bar Construction Co Inc 611 A Industrial Ave Greensboro, North Carolina 27406 P: (336) 274-2477 F: 3362745684 Project: 01-21-048 UNC - CH Cardinal Parking Deck Elevator Modernization CIP 724 – CN0000 - SCO# 19-20134-01A 140 Manning Drive Chapel Hill, North Carolina 27599     Submittal #238126.13-1.0 - Ductless Mini-split System  238126.13 - Ductless Minisplit System   Revision 0 Submittal Manager Deanee Popp (Bar Construction Co Inc) Status Approved as Noted Date Created Aug 27, 2021 Issue Date Aug 27, 2021 Spec Section 238126.13 - Ductless Minisplit System Responsible Contractor Trademasters Services Inc.Received From Wayne Sheppard (Trademasters Services Inc.) Received Date Aug 26, 2021 Submit By Aug 27, 2021 Final Due Date Sep 14, 2021 Lead Time Cost Code Location Type Approvers Dwayne Layton (Bar Construction Co Inc), Steve Pulling (RND Architects) Ball in Court Distribution Wayne Sheppard (Trademasters Services Inc.), Deanee Popp (Bar Construction Co Inc), Dwayne Layton (Bar Construction Co Inc) Description Please find attached the Ductless Mini-split submittal for your approval.   Thanks.     Submittal Workflow Name Sent Date Due Date Returned Date Response Attachments General Information Attachments     238126.13-1.0 Ductless Minisplit - for Bar Approval.pdf Dwayne Layton  Aug 30, 2021 Aug 31, 2021 Approved 238126.13-1.0 Ductless Minisplit - BAR approved.pdf   238126.13-1.0 Ductless Minisplit - for Bar Approval.pdf    Comment Please verify warranty is acceptable to SCO Steve Pulling Aug 31, 2021 Sep 14, 2021 Sep 8, 2021 Approved as Noted 238126.13-1.0 Ductless Minisplit - EE reviewed.pdf (Current)   Comment Approved as noted by Edmondson Engineers. See comments on submittal document by reviewing engineer.     Bar Construction Co Inc Page 1 of 1 Printed On: Sep 8, 2021 01:20 PM EDT    Commercial Industrial HVAC 5012 Neal road, Durham, NC 27705 Service: 919-680-6400, Office: 919-382-3330, Fax: 919-382-3332 Letter of Transmittal To: BAR Const. Co. Project: UNC Cardinal Elevator Attn: Dwayne Layton, Deanee Popp Project # SCO# 19-20134-01A CC: Rick Moser Transmittal #01 Phone: Number of Copy (1) Date: 08/26/21 FAX USPS UPS x EMAIL Other X Submittal Data for Approval Submittal Data for Record Manufacturer’s Warranty Statement Operation and Maintenance Instructions Change Order Request for Information Other TSI-01 HVAC – Mini Split Heat Pump System Reply To: Wayne Sheppard Project Manager 919-730-4457 DDL8-30-21 Commercial Industrial HVAC 5012 Neal Road, Durham, NC 27705 Service: 919-680-6400, Office: 919-382-3330, Fax: 919-382-3332 SUBMITTAL Date 08/26/21 Project: UNC Cardinal Elevator General Contractor: BAR Const. Co. Engineer: Edmondson Engineers, PA Durham, North Carolina Provider: Hoffman Hoffman HVAC – Submittal for HVAC Mini Split Heat Pump System 07-26-21 Order No.:Submitting Office: Raleigh, NC Salesman:Scott Antonuccio Date: 620.625.10638 August 26-2021 Project: Engineer: Contractor: Manufacturer: Item: University of North Carolina Cardinal Parking Deck Elevator Renovations Chapel Hill, NC 27514 Edmondson Engineers Durham, NC Trademasters Services Durham, NC Daikin Houston, TX Mini Split Heat Pump System HOFFMAN HOFFMAN, INC. HVAC Manufacturers Representative Website: www.hoffman-hoffman.com SU B M I T T A L DA T A Asheville, NC (828) 296-0111 Charlotte, NC (704) 364-4700 Raleigh, NC (919) 781-8011 Wilmington, NC (910) 791-4775 Chattanooga, TN (423) 693-2890 Knoxville, TN (865)540-9770 Charleston, SC (843) 884-3201 Columbia, SC (803) 765-9360 Greenville, SC (864) 676-1888 Chesapeake, VA (757) 548-1700 Richmond, VA (804) 272-1500 Roanoke, VA (540) 725-8701 Corporate: Greensboro, NC (336) 292-8777 APPROVAL REQUIRED We have exercised care in the preparation of this submittal. We believe it satisfies our interpretation of the designer’s intent and scope. It contains the list of materials, quantities, sizes, style and the finish as we propose to furnish for this job. Please examine and check carefully that all items are exactly as required and that our interpretation of the applicable plans and/or specifications are consistent with the design. Approval by the engineer and purchaser will be required before release of this equipment for production. If any discrepancies are discovered, please notify us as soon as possible.  Specification:23-00-00 Hoffman & Hoffman, Inc. Branch Office: Raleigh 2741 Noblin Road. Suite 100 Raleigh, NC 27604 Ph. 919-781-8011 Fax 919-797-6019 Salesman: Scott Antonuccio Scott.Antonuccio@Hoffman-Hoffman.com Order No. 620.625.10638Submittal Data Date: Project: Location: Manufacturer: Item: August 25, 2021 University of North Carolina Cardinal Parking Deck Drawings Set Dated 6-11-2021 Chapel Hill, NC Daikin Mini Split Heat Pump System MARK MODEL  LOCATION SUPPLY SOUND BTUH BTUH SEER VOLT MCA WEIGHT MARK MODEL  CAPACITY VOLT MCA MOCP WEIGHT REMARKS NUMBER CFM dBA COOLING HEATING PASE LBS NUMBER COOLING/BTUH PHASE AC‐1 FTXS18AXVJU ELEVATOR ROOM 716H, 605L 33‐49 18,000 20,000 18.5 208‐1‐60 NOTE 431 HP‐1 RXS18AXVJU 18,000 208‐1‐60 16.4 20 101 1 THRU 9 REMARKS 1: FAN COIL IS WALL MOUNTED TYPE 2: COOLING CAPACITYIES ARE BASED ON ENTERING AIR  80 F DB AND 67 F WB AND OUTDOOR AMBIENT AIR  AT 95 F DB AND 75 F WB  3: HEATING CAPACITYIES ARE BASED ON ENTERING AIR  70 F DB AND OUTDOOR AMBIENTAIR  AT 47 F DB  AND 43 F WB  4: OUTDOOR UNIT PROVIDES POWER TO INDOOR UNIT 5: MODEL KPW063B4E WIND BAFFLE FOR LOW AMBIENT COOLING TO ‐4 F 6: CONDENSATE PUMP MODEL DACA‐CP1‐1 7: MODEL BRC944B2‐A08 HARD WIRED CONTROLLER WITH 26 FEET OF CABLE 8:  5‐YEAR FACTORY WARRANTY ON COMPRESSOR AND PARTS 9:  MODEL DACA‐WB‐1 WALL MOUNTING BRACKET DUCTLESS SPLIT HEATPUMP SYSTEM SCHEDULE BY DAIKIN INDOOR UNIT OUTDOOR UNIT Daikin North America LLC 5151 San Felipe, Suite 500 Houston, TX 77056 (Daikin’s products are subject to continuous improvements. Daikin reserves the right to modify product design, specifications and information in this data sheet without notice and without incurring any obligations) Submittal Revision Date: September 2020 Page 1 of 4 Performance Cooling (Btu/hr) Rated (Min/Max)18,000 (5,500 / 20,000) Sensible @ AHRI 14,480 Moisture Removal gal/h 0.41 Standard Operating Range 50°F – 115°F Extended Operating Range* -4°F – 115°F Rated Cooling Conditions: Indoor: 80°F DB/67°F WB Outdoor: 95°F DB/75°F WB *With field settings and wind baffle Heating (Btu/hr) 1:@ 47° Rated (Min/Max) 21,600 (5,500 / 24,000) 2: @ 17° Rated 12,700 Operating Range 5°F – 65°F 1: Rated Heating Conditions: Indoor: 70°F DB/60°F WB Outdoor: 47°F DB/43°F WB 2: Rated Heating Conditions: Indoor: 70°F DB/60°F WB Outdoor: 17°F DB/15°F WB Submittal Data Sheet FTX18AXVJU / RX18AXVJU 1.5-Ton Wall Mounted Heat Pump System Efficiency Cooling Heating SEER 18.5 HSPF 9.0 EER 12.5 COP 3.60 Electrical 208/60/1 230/60/1 System MCA 16.4 16.4 System MFA 20.0 20.0 Compressor RLA 16.0 16.0 Outdoor fan motor FLA .99 .99 Outdoor fan motor W 128 128 Indoor fan motor FLA .50 .50 Indoor fan motor W 35 35 MFA: Max. fuse amps MCA: Min. circuit amps (A) FLA: Full load amps (A) RLA: Rated load amps (A) W: Fan motor rated output (W) Piping Liquid (in) 1/4 Gas (in) 1/2 Drain (in) 3/4 Max. Interunit Piping Length (ft) 98.4 Max. Interunit Height Difference (ft) 65.625 Chargeless (ft) 32.8 Additional Charge of Refrigerant (oz/ft) .21 Indoor Specifications Airflow Rate (cfm) Cooling Heating H M H M 716 605 716 605 L SL L SL 467 395 467 395 Sound (dBA) H / M / L / SL 49 / 44 / 38 / 33 49 / 42 / 37 / 33 Dimensions (H × W × D) (in) 11-11/16 × 39-1/2 × 11-1/3 Weight (Lbs) 31 Outdoor Specifications Compressor Hermetically Sealed Swing Type Refrigerant R-410A Factory Charge (Lbs) 3.20 Refrigerant Oil PVE (FVC50K) Airflow Rate (cfm) Cooling Heating H 2,005 H 1,905 Sound Pressure Level (dBA) 54 Dimensions (H × W × D) (in) 27-13/32 × 36-5/8 × 13-13/16 Weight (Lbs) 101 Job Name: Tag# Complete warranty details available from your local dealer or at www.daikincomfort.com. To receive the 12-Year Parts Limited Warranty, online registration must be completed within 60 days of installation. Online registration is not required in California or Quebec. If product is installed in a commercial application, limited warranty period is 5 years. AC-1 & HP-1 Daikin North America LLC 5151 San Felipe, Suite 500 Houston, TX 77056 (Daikin’s products are subject to continuous improvements. Daikin reserves the right to modify product design, specifications and information in this data sheet without notice and without incurring any obligations) Submittal Revision Date: September 2020 Page 2 of 4 FTX18AXVJU Dimensional Data Daikin North America LLC 5151 San Felipe, Suite 500 Houston, TX 77056 (Daikin’s products are subject to continuous improvements. Daikin reserves the right to modify product design, specifications and information in this data sheet without notice and without incurring any obligations) Submittal Revision Date: September 2020 Page 3 of 4 RX18AXVJU Dimensional Data Daikin North America LLC 5151 San Felipe, Suite 500 Houston, TX 77056 (Daikin’s products are subject to continuous improvements. Daikin reserves the right to modify product design, specifications and information in this data sheet without notice and without incurring any obligations) Submittal Revision Date: September 2020 Page 4 of 4 Indoor Unit Included Part Number Description BRP072A43 Wireless Interface Adaptor AZAI6WSCDKB DKN Residential Cloud Wi-Fi Adaptor for Single-and Multi-Zone System (S21) BRC944B2-A08 Wired Remote Controller kit BRCW901A08 Wired Remote Controller Cable –25ft (Included in above kit) BRCW901A03 Wired Remote Controller Cable –10ft DACA-CP1-1 Inline Condensate Pump (Fits inside all Daikin wall & floor mount units) DACA-CP4-1 External Condensate Pump Outdoor Unit Included Part Number Description DACA-WB-1 Powder-Coated Wall-Mounted Bracket KPW063B4E Air Adjustment Grille Optional Accessories Project Name: Location: Approval: Engineer: Date: Submitted to: Construction: Submitted by: Unit #: Reference: Drawing #: Daikin North America LLC, 5151 San Felipe, Suite 500, Houston TX, 77056 www.daikinac.com www.daikincity.com (Daikin’s products are subject to continuous improvements. Daikin reserves the right to modify product desig n, specifications and information in this data sheet without notice and without incurring any obligations) Page 1 of 2 Submittal Data Sheet BRC944B2-A08 – Wired Remote Controller Kit MODEL COMPATIBILITY: Compatible with Single-Zone and Multi-Zone indoor unit models: CDXS, CTXS, FDXS, FTK_N, FTX_N, FTX_U, FTXG*, FTXR, FTXS, FVXS The following indoor units do not have the S21 connection and require an additional interface adaptor (ordered separately) to provide the S21 connector for the One+ communication: Indoor Unit Models Required Interface Adaptor FTX09NMVJU, FTX12NMVJU, FTK09NMVJU, FTK12NMVJU KRP067A41E FTX15NMVJU, FTX18NMVJU, FTX24NMVJU, FTK18NMVJU, FTK24NMVJU KRP980B2E SPECIFICATIONS: PRODUCT IMAGE: FEATURES: • An additional wiring cable is required to use together with the Wired Remote Controller Kit. Select one of the following cables: o BRCW901A03: Non-plenum rated, 10ft o BRCW901A08: Non-plenum rated, 26ft o DACA-BRCW901P10: Plenum rated, 10ft o DACA-BRCW901P25: Plenum rated, 25ft • Selectable auto / cool / heat / dry operation modes with adjustable setpoint and fan speed • Set temperature setpoint in °F or °C units with 1 degree increments Model BRC944B2-A08 Description Wired Remote Controller Kit Maximum Indoor Units 1 Dimensions 4.75 in x 4.75 in x 0.69 in (120mm x 120mm x 17.5 mm) Communication Protocol S21 Comfort Setpoint Range 64°F – 90°F Set Point Range Operation Start / Stop Mode (Auto/Heat/Cool/Dry) Set Temperature Setpoint Fan Speed Airflow Direction Scheduling One-time Timer Daily Timer Project Name: Location: Approval: Engineer: Date: Submitted to: Construction: Submitted by: Unit #: Reference: Drawing #: Daikin North America LLC, 5151 San Felipe, Suite 500, Houston TX, 77056 www.daikinac.com www.daikincity.com (Daikin’s products are subject to continuous improvements. Daikin reserves the right to modify product desig n, specifications and information in this data sheet without notice and without incurring any obligations) Page 2 of 2 Submittal Data Sheet BRC944B2-A08 – Wired Remote Controller Kit • Temperature is controlled through indoor unit temperature sensor • Built in one time or daily timer functionality with up to 2 timer actions per day • Approximately two hour battery backup • Can be used together with the factory supplied standard wireless remote controller DIMENSIONS: DOCUMENTATION: Documentation available on www.daikincity.com and/or www.daikinac.com: • Submittal • Installation Manual • Operation Manual 4-3/4 4-3/ 4 SUBMITTAL DATA SHEET H-AP-S-17 2017 RectorSeal® Mini White Univolt Mini-Split Condensate Pump Kit 100-250v DACA-CP4-1 Project Information: Job Name: Location: Engineer: Submitted to: For:  Reference  Approval  Construction Submitted by: Reference: Submittal Information: Approval: Date: Construction: Unit #: Drawing #: (Sec. I) Product Specifications: Pump Length – 7.125” Pump Width – 2” Pump Height – 4.5” Capacity - 2.9 GPH @ 0' Head / 1.2 GPH @33' Head Max BTUs - 54,000 Max Head in Feet - 39 Max Temperature - 104F Max Suction Lft - N/A Sound Level - 21dB(A) Dry Contact Rating - 3A NC Voltage - 100-250v Amperes - .17 Watts - 16 Remote Reservoir - Y Plenum Rated – N Cable Length – 39” Supply level and pump performance varies with voltage frequency. Pump Selector & Wiring Diagrams Available at http://www.rectorseal.com/aspenpump.html (Sec. II) Ordering Information: Product Code – DACA-CP4-1 Model – DACA-CP4-1 Carton Qty - 1 Carton Weight - 1.5 (Sec. III) Carton Contents: Monobloc Pump Assembly 39" Power Cable Inline Fuse Installation Manual Wall Anchors (3) Screws (3) Hose Clamp Anti-siphon (1) (Fig. I) Product Image: (Fig. II) Typical Pump Locations: (RectorSeal’s products are subject to continuous improvements; RectorSeal reserves the right to modify product design, specifications & information in this data sheet without notice and without incurring any obligations) ASPEN® is a registered trademark of Aspen Oldco Limited Company UK Mini White is a registered trademark of Aspen Pumps Limited Company UK Contact: RectorSeal® 2601 Spenwick Drive, Houston,TX P 71 3-263-8001 800-231 -3345 F 71 3-263-7577 800-441 -0051 W www.rectorseal.com Mini White Univolt Mini-Split Condensate Pump Kit 100- 250v Aspen Pump BTU Calculator Mini White 115v 60Hz Head GPH BTU 0 3.2 54600 5 2.9 49500 10 2.6 44350 15 2.4 42000 20 2.2 37500 25 1.9 33250 30 1.7 29250 33 1.6 27500 Mini White 230v 60Hz Head GPH BTU 0 2.9 49500 5 2.5 42600 10 2.2 37500 15 2 34000 20 1.8 30700 25 1.6 27500 30 1.3 22400 33 1.2 20600 Contact: RectorSeal® 2601 Spenwick Drive, Houston,TX 2017 RectorSeal® 40 30 20 10 He a d ( f t ) 0 ______________________________________________________________________________ 1.4 1.7 2 2.3 2.6 2.9 3.2 Flow Rate (GPH) 115v 60Hz Mini Blanc 115v 60Hz 40 30 20 10 He a d ( f t ) 0 ______________________________________________________________________ 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 Flow Rate (GPH) 230v 60Hz Mini Blanc 230v 60Hz 713-263-8001 800-231-3345 713-263-7577 F 800-441-0051 www.rectorseal.com W P H-AP-S-17 Adjustable wall bracket with bar. Supplied with screws, washers & anchors. WALL BRACKET MODEL DESCRIPTION WT LBS. DACA-WB-1 Material: Galvanized Steel Max load capacity: 242 lbs WALL BRACKET 7.5 15.75" 17.72" 31.5" Nov 2020 Submittal Data Sheet Air Adjustment Grille (Wind Baffle) KPW063B4E Daikin North America LLC, 5151 San Felipe, Suite 500, Houston TX, 77056 www.daikinac.com www.daikincomfort.com (Daikin’s products are subject to continuous improvements. Daikin reserves the right to modify product design, specifications and information in this data sheet without notice and without incurring any obligations). DESCRIPTION Air Adjustment Grille (Wind Baffle) mounts over the standard air grille and allows adjustment in air blow-off direction. SPECIFICATIONS Model No: KPW063B4E Unit Compatibility: RK18AXVJU, RK24AXVJU, RX18AXVJU, RX24AXVJU Qty (1) Unit Names: Air Adjustment Grille (Wind Baffle) Dimensions (WxHxD): 23-3/16” x 23-5/16” x 4-5/16” (589mm x 592mm x 109mm) Shipping Unit Weight: 6 lb. (2.7 kg) Material: Flame Retardant Grade UL94V-HB DIMENSIONAL DRAWING 23-3/16” (589mm) 4-5/16” (109mm) 23 -5/ 1 6 ” ( 5 9 2 m m ) 19-3/8” (492mm) 20 -5/ 8 ” ( 5 2 4 . 5 m m ) 4 – M4x10 8 Specifications MODEL INDOOR UNIT FTX18A OUTDOOR UNIT RX18A Cooling Heating Rated Capacity (Min. ~ Max.)kW 5.28 (1.60 - 5.86)6.33 (1.60 - 7.03) Btu/h 18000 (5500 - 20000)21600 (5500 - 24000) Moisture Removal gal/h 0.41 Rated Running Current A 6.39 7.79 Rated Power Consumption W 1440 1756 EER Btu/h/W 12.5 N/A SEER 18.5 N/A COP W/W N/A 3.60 HSPF N/A 9.0 Power Factor (Rated)N/A Piping Connections Liquid inch (mm)1/4” (6.35) Gas inch (mm)1/2” (12.70) Refrigerant Type R410A Charge lbs (kg)3.20 (1.45) Max. Interunit Piping Length ft (m)98-1/2 (30) Max. Interunit Height Difference ft (m)65-5/8 (20) Chargeless ft (m)32-13/16 (10) Amount of Additional Charge of Refrigerant oz/ft (g/m)0.21 (20) INDOOR UNIT FTX18A Front Panel Colour WHITE $iUÀoZ5ate Turbo CFM 754 High CFM 716 Medium CFM 605 Low CFM 467 Quiet CFM 395 Sound Pressure Level (H/M/L/Q)dBA 49/44/38/33 49/42/37/33 Fan Type CROSS FLOW Drive DIRECT Speed 3 STEPS, QUIET, AUTO, TURBO Fan Motor Type DIRECT CURRENT Motor Output W 35 Running Current (Rated)A 0.145 Power Consumption (Rated)W 47 Air Direction Control UP, DOWN, LEFT, RIGHT Air Filter CATECHIN Dimensions (H X W X D)inch (mm)11-11/16 X 39-1/2 X 11-1/3 (297 X 1005 X 288) Packaged Dimensions (H X W X D)inch (mm)14-1/4 X 42-1/4 X 14-1/8 (362 X 1073 X 358) Weight lbs (kg)31 (14) Gross Weight lbs (kg)38 (17) Condensate Drain Size mm 19.00 OUTDOOR UNIT RX18A Casing Colour IVORY WHITE $iUÀoZ5ate High CFM 2005 1905 Sound Pressure Level dBA 54 Fan Type PROPELLER Drive DIRECT Fan Motor Type DIRECT CURRENT Index of protection (IP)23 Insulation Grade E Running Current (Rated)A 0.99 Power Consumption (Rated)W 81 71 Motor Output W 128 Poles 8 Compressor Type HERMETIC SWING Model D1C128S8P20-PN Oil type DAPHNE FVC50K Oil amount oz (cm3)21.5 (650) Running Current (Rated)A 5.255 6.655 Power Consumption (Rated)W 1312 1638 Heat Exchanger Type FIN TUBE Starting Current A 7.33 Dimensions (H x W x D)inch (mm)27-13/32 X 36-5/8 X 13-13/16 (696 X 930 X 351) Packaged Dimensions (H x W x D)inch (mm)29-7/8 X 42-3/8 X 18-7/8 (760 X 1075 X 480) Weight lbs (kg)101 (46) Gross Weight lbs (kg)110 (50) Drawing No.3D128372 3D128372 Document No. (Set)3D128372 3D128372 1) ALL UNITS ARE BEING TESTED ACCORDING TO AHRI 210/240 STANDARD. 2) ALL SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECTED TO CHANGE BY THE MANUFACTURER WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. COOLING HEATING INDOOR: 80°FDB (26.7°CDB) / 67°FWB (19.4°CWB)INDOOR: 70°FDB (21.1°CDB) OUTDOOR: 95°FDB (35°CDB)OUTDOOR: 47°FDB (8.3°CDB) / 43°FWB (6.1°CWB) 10 Dimensions Dimensions Indoor Unit Model : FTK09/12A , FTX09/12A Note: Dimension in inch (mm) Model : FTK18/24A , FTX18/24A Note: Dimension in inch (mm) FOR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES ONLY FOR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES ONLY 3P601788-1A 3P601788-1A 12 Dimensions Model : RK18/24A, RX18/24A Model / Dimension A B C D E F G H I 18/24 27- 13/32 (696) 36-5/8 (930) 2-19/32 (66) 15/32 (12) 13- 13/16 (351) 1-1/16 (27) 15/32 (12) 24 (610) 6-7/8 (175) Model / Dimension J K L M N O p Q 18/24 5-23/32 (145) 3-1/32 (77) 2-31/32 (75) 13/16 (21) 5-19/32 (142) 5/16 (8) 17/32 (13) 13- 31/32 (355) Note: Dimension in inch (mm) FOR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES ONLY 3P601788-1A 15 Wiring Diagrams Model : RX09/12A Model : RX18/24A 3P599133A 3P599144A 18 Piping Diagrams Model : FTX18A HEAT EXCHANGER 1/2 CuT FIELD PIPING FAN MOTOR 1/4 CuT REFRIGERANT FLOW DISTRIBUTOR 1/2 CuT FIELD PIPING THERMISTOR ON HEAT EXCH. 1/4 CuT COOLING M CROSS FLOW FAN HEATING HEADER Note: Dimension in inch Model : FTX24A HEATING FIELD PIPING 1/2 CuT 1/4 CuT FAN MOTOR THERMISTOR ON HEAT EXCH. M FIELD PIPING 5/8 CuT DISTRIBUTOR HEAT EXCHANGER REFRIGERANT FLOW 1/4 CuT COOLING HEADER CROSS FLOW FAN Note: Dimension in inch 3D128349 3D128352 22 Piping Diagrams Model : RX18A Note: Dimension in inch Model : RX24A Note: Dimension in inch 3D128344 3D128347 29 Capacity Tables Model : FTX18A - RX18A 3D 1 2 7 7 8 3 A 49 Electric Characteristic Electric Characteristic Unit Combination Power Supply COMP OFM IFM Indoor Unit Outdoor Unit Hz-Volts Voltage Range MCA MFA RHz RLA kW FLA kW FLA FTK09A RK09A 60Hz-208V MAX. 60Hz 253V MIN. 60Hz 187V 7.00 15.0 50.0 6.75 0.041 0.36 0.038 0.30 60Hz-230V FTK12A RK12A 60Hz-208V MAX. 60Hz 253V MIN. 60Hz 187V 7.80 15.0 63.0 7.50 0.041 0.47 0.038 0.36 60Hz-230V FTK18A RK18A 60Hz-208V MAX. 60Hz 253V MIN. 60Hz 187V 13.40 20.0 66.0 13.00 0.128 0.99 0.035 0.50 60Hz-230V FTK24A RK24A 60Hz-208V MAX. 60Hz 253V MIN. 60Hz 187V 13.40 20.0 78.0 13.00 0.128 1.00 0.035 0.50 60Hz-230V FTX09A RX09A 60Hz-208V MAX. 60Hz 253V MIN. 60Hz 187V 8.70 15.0 62.0 8.50 0.041 0.36 0.038 0.30 60Hz-230V FTX12A RX12A 60Hz-208V MAX. 60Hz 253V MIN. 60Hz 187V 8.70 15.0 74.0 8.50 0.041 0.47 0.038 0.36 60Hz-230V FTX18A RX18A 60Hz-208V MAX. 60Hz 253V MIN. 60Hz 187V 16.40 20.0 78.0 16.00 0.128 0.99 0.035 0.50 60Hz-230V FTX24A RX24A 60Hz-208V MAX. 60Hz 253V MIN. 60Hz 187V 16.40 20.0 83.0 16.00 0.128 1.00 0.035 0.50 60Hz-230V Symbols: MCA : Min. circuit amps (A) MFA : Max. fuse amps (A) RHz : Rated operating frequency (Hz) RLA : Rated loads amps (A) OFM : Outdoor fan motor IFM : Indoor fan motor kW : Fan motor rated output (kW) FLA : Full load amps (A) COMP : Compressor Notes: 1. RHz is the max frequency that comes in cooling operation and heating operation. 2. RLA is the max current that comes in cooling operatio and heating operation. 3. Maximum allowable voltage that is unbalance between phases is 2%. 4. Select wire size based on the larger value of MCA. 5. Use circuit breaker instead of fuse 3D128371 LIMITED WARRANTY 1 11/2019Part No. PWDDMSTWZH © 2015 - 2019 Models: FTX(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, FTK(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RX(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RK(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RX(09,12,18,24)NMVJU, RK(09,12,18,24)NMVJU, RXL(09,12,15)QMVJU*, RXL(18,24)UMVJU*, RX(09,12,15,18)QMVJU, RXS(09,12,15,18,24)LVJU, RXG(09,12,15)HVJU, RX(09,12,15,18,24)RMVJU*, 2MXS18*, 2MXL18*, 3MXS24*, 3MXL24*, 4MXS36*, 4MXL36*, 5MXS48*, RMXS48*, FTX(09,12,15,18,24)*, FTXR(09,12,18)*, FTK(09,12,18,24)*, FVXS(09,12,15,18)*, FFQ(09,12,15,18)*, FTXS(09,12,15,18,24)*, FTXG(09,12,15)*, CTXG(09,12,18)*, CTXS07, FDXS(09,12)*, FDMQ(09,12,15,18,24)*, CDXS(07,15,18,24)*, BPMKS0(48,49)* If this heating or air conditioning unit has not been properly registered, all references in this document to “the warranty,” “this warranty,” or any similar construction, refer solely and exclusively to the Initial Term Warranty (defined below). If this heating or air conditioning unit has been properly registered (and any other applicable conditions set forth herein are satisfied), all such references refer to the Initial Term Warranty together with the Registered Additional Term Warranty (defined below). Who Is Providing The Warranty? This warranty is provided to you by Daikin North America LLC (“Daikin”), which warrants all parts of this heating or air condi- tioning unit, as described below. To What Type Of Installations Does This Warranty Apply? This warranty applies to heating and air conditioning units in- stalled in owner-occupied residences. Different warranties ap- ply to units installed in residences not occupied by the owner and in commercial properties. Is Registration Required? Registration is strongly urged. As set out below, Initial Term Warranty coverage is available to owners who have not reg- istered, but Registered Additional Term Warranty coverage is only available to registered owners. TO REGISTER, GO TO WWW. DAIKINCOMFORT.COM AND CLICK “PRODUCT REGISTRATION.” If you are a California or Quebec resident, please refer to the “California And Quebec Residents” section below. What Units Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does not apply to: •Units that are ordered over the Internet, by telephone, or by other electronic means unless the unit is installed by a dealer adhering to all applicable federal, state, and local codes, policies, and licensing requirements. •Units that are installed outside the United States, its ter- ritories, or Canada. •Units that are operated in incomplete structures. •Units that are installed in buildings other than owner-oc- cupied residences, such as non-residential buildings or residences not occupied by the owner. What Problems Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship that appear under normal use and maintenance. Other Warranties This warranty is in lieu of all other express warranties. ANY IM- PLIED WARRANTIES BY DAIKIN, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMIT- ED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY. NO AFFILIATE OF DAIKIN, WHETHER OR NOT SUCH AFFILIATE IS THE MANUFACTURER OF THIS UNIT, GIVES ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ON THIS UNIT. Some states and provinces do not allow the exclusion of express warranties and/ or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation exclusion and/or may not apply to you. What Problems Does This Warranty Not Cover? Daikin is not responsible for: •Damage or repairs required as a consequence of faulty installation or application. •Damage as a result of floods, fires, winds, lightning, ac- cidents, corrosive atmosphere, or other conditions be- yond Daikin’s control. •Damage or the need for repairs arising from the use of components or accessories not compatible with this unit. •Normal maintenance as described in the installation and operating manual, such as cleaning of the coils, filter cleaning and/or replacement, and lubrication. •Parts or accessories not supplied or designated by the manufacturer. •Damage or the need for repairs resulting from any im- proper use, maintenance, operation, or servicing. •Damage or failure of the unit to start due to interruption in electrical service or inadequate electrical service. •Any damage caused by frozen or broken water pipes in the event of equipment failure. www.daikincomfort.com For further information about this warranty, contact Homeowner Support by mail to 19001 Kermier Road, Waller, Texas 77484 LIMITED WARRANTY 2 11/2019Part No. PWDDMSTWZH © 2015 - 2019 Models: FTX(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, FTK(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RX(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RK(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RX(09,12,18,24)NMVJU, RK(09,12,18,24)NMVJU, RXL(09,12,15)QMVJU*, RXL(18,24)UMVJU*, RX(09,12,15,18)QMVJU, RXS(09,12,15,18,24)LVJU, RXG(09,12,15)HVJU, RX(09,12,15,18,24)RMVJU*, 2MXS18*, 2MXL18*, 3MXS24*, 3MXL24*, 4MXS36*, 4MXL36*, 5MXS48*, RMXS48*, FTX(09,12,15,18,24)*, FTXR(09,12,18)*, FTK(09,12,18,24)*, FVXS(09,12,15,18)*, FFQ(09,12,15,18)*, FTXS(09,12,15,18,24)*, FTXG(09,12,15)*, CTXG(09,12,18)*, CTXS07, FDXS(09,12)*, FDMQ(09,12,15,18,24)*, CDXS(07,15,18,24)*, BPMKS0(48,49)* •Changes in the appearance of the unit that do not affect its performance. •Replacement of fuses and replacement or resetting of circuit breakers. •Damage or the need for repairs resulting from the use of unapproved refrigerant types or used or recycled re- frigerant. When Does Warranty Coverage Begin? Warranty coverage begins on the “installation date.” The instal- lation date is one of three dates depending on the circumstanc- es of purchase: (1)For units installed in a newly constructed residence, the installation date is the date the owner purchases the res- idence from the builder. (2)For units installed in existing residences, the installation date is the date that the unit is originally installed. (3)If the date the owner purchases the residence from the builder or the date the unit is originally installed cannot be verified, the installation date is three months after the manufacture date noted on the unit. How Long Does Warranty Coverage Last? Registration is not required to obtain warranty coverage, but registration entitles the owner to the Registered Additional Term Warranty described in the following paragraph. If the unit is not registered, the warranty lasts for a period up to 5 YEARS (the “Initial Term Warranty”). If the unit is properly registered online within 60 days after the installation date, an additional warranty (the “Registered Ad- ditional Term Warranty”) is provided and lasts for as long as the original registered owner or his or her spouse (“registered owner”) own and reside in the home in which the unit was orig- inally installed, for a period up to 12 YEARS after the installa- tion date. To register, go to www.daikincomfort.com and click “PRODUCT Registration.” Some states and provinces do not al- low limitation of warranty coverage to registered owner, so the above limitation may not apply to you. If you are a California or Quebec resident, please refer to the “California And Quebec Residents” section below. Neither of these warranties continues after the unit is removed from the location where it was originally installed. The replacement of a part under this warranty does not extend the warranty period. In other words, Daikin warrants a replace- ment part only for the period remaining in the applicable war- ranty that commenced on the installation date. What Will Daikin Do To Correct Problems? Daikin will furnish a replacement part, without charge for the part only, to replace any part that is found to be defective due to workmanship or materials under normal use and maintenance. Furnishing of the replacement part is Daikin’s only responsibil- ity under this warranty and the furnishing of the replacement part is the owner’s only remedy. THE OWNER AGREES THAT THESE REMEDIES ARE THE OWN- ER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF ALL WARRAN- TIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. What Won’t Daikin Do To Correct Problems? Daikin will not pay for: •Labor, freight, or any other cost associated with the ser- vice, repair, or operation of the unit. •Electricity or fuel costs, or increases in electricity or fuel costs, for any reason, including additional or unusual use of supplemental electric heat. •Lodging or transportation charges. •Refrigerant. WHETHER ANY CLAIM IS BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORT, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHER BREACH OF CON- TRACT, OR ANY OTHER THEORY, NEITHER DAIKIN NOR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AF- FILIATE THAT IS THE MANUFACTURER OF THIS UNIT) SHALL IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF USE OF A UNIT, EXTRA UTILITY EXPENSES, OR DAM- AGES TO PROPERTY. Some states and provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential dam- ages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you. How Can The Owner Receive Warranty Service? If there is a problem with the unit, contact a licensed contractor. To receive a replacement part, a licensed contractor must bring the defective part to a Daikin heating and air conditioning prod- ucts distributor. For more information about the warranty, write to Homeowner Support, 19001 Kermier Road, Waller Texas 77484. LIMITED WARRANTY 3 11/2019Part No. PWDDMSTWZH © 2015 - 2019 Models: FTX(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, FTK(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RX(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RK(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RX(09,12,18,24)NMVJU, RK(09,12,18,24)NMVJU, RXL(09,12,15)QMVJU*, RXL(18,24)UMVJU*, RX(09,12,15,18)QMVJU, RXS(09,12,15,18,24)LVJU, RXG(09,12,15)HVJU, RX(09,12,15,18,24)RMVJU*, 2MXS18*, 2MXL18*, 3MXS24*, 3MXL24*, 4MXS36*, 4MXL36*, 5MXS48*, RMXS48*, FTX(09,12,15,18,24)*, FTXR(09,12,18)*, FTK(09,12,18,24)*, FVXS(09,12,15,18)*, FFQ(09,12,15,18)*, FTXS(09,12,15,18,24)*, FTXG(09,12,15)*, CTXG(09,12,18)*, CTXS07, FDXS(09,12)*, FDMQ(09,12,15,18,24)*, CDXS(07,15,18,24)*, BPMKS0(48,49)* This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province. California And Quebec Residents California and Quebec residents do not need to register the product in order to get all of the rights and remedies of reg- istered owners under this warranty, but Registered Additional Term Warranty coverage is only available to the original owner of this unit and his or her spouse. The arbitration provisions of this warranty shall not apply to residents of Quebec. Where Can Any Legal Remedies Be Pursued? ARBITRATION CLAUSE. IMPORTANT. PLEASE REVIEW THIS AR- BITRATION CLAUSE. IT AFFECTS YOUR LEGAL RIGHTS. 1.Parties: This arbitration clause affects your rights against Daikin and any of its affiliates or employees or agents, successors, or assigns, all of whom together are referred to below as “we” or “us” for ease of reference. 2.ARBITRATION REQUIREMENT: EXCEPT AS STATED BELOW, ANY DISPUTE BETWEEN YOU AND ANY OF US SHALL BE DECIDED BY NEUTRAL, BINDING ARBITRATION RATHER THAN IN COURT OR BY JURY TRIAL. “Dispute” will be given the broadest possible meaning allowable by law. It includes any dispute, claim, or controversy arising from or relating to your purchase of this heating or air conditioning unit, any warranty upon the unit, or the unit’s condition. It also includes determination of the scope or applicability of this Arbitration Clause. The arbitration requirement applies to claims in contract and tort, pursuant to statute, or otherwise. 3.CLASS-ARBITRATION WAIVER: ARBITRATION IS HANDLED ON AN INDIVIDUAL BASIS. IF A DISPUTE IS ARBITRATED, YOU AND WE EXPRESSLY WAIVE ANY RIGHT TO PARTICIPATE AS A CLASS REPRESENTATIVE OR CLASS MEMBER ON ANY CLASS CLAIM YOU MAY HAVE AGAINST US OR WE AGAINST YOU, OR AS A PRIVATE ATTORNEY GENERAL OR IN ANY OTHER REPRESENTATIVE CAPACITY. YOU AND WE ALSO WAIVE ANY RIGHT TO CLASS ARBITRATION OR ANY CONSOLIDATION OF INDIVIDUAL ARBITRATIONS. 4.Discovery and Other Rights: Discovery and rights to appeal in arbitration are generally more limited than in a lawsuit. This applies to both you and us. Other rights that you or we would have in court may not be available in arbitration. Please read this Arbitration Clause and consult the rules of the arbitration organizations listed below for more information. 5.SMALL CLAIMS COURT OPTION: YOU MAY CHOOSE TO LITIGATE ANY DISPUTE BETWEEN YOU AND ANY OF US IN SMALL CLAIMS COURT, RATHER THAN IN ARBITRATION, IF THE DISPUTE MEETS ALL REQUIREMENTS TO BE HEARD IN SMALL CLAIMS COURT. 6.Governing Law: For residents of the United States, the procedures and effect of the arbitration will be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act (9 U.S.C. § 1 et seq.) rather than by state law concerning arbitration. For residents of Canada, the procedures and effect of the arbitration will be governed by the applicable arbitration law of the province in which you purchased your unit. The law governing your substantive warranty rights and other claims will be the law of the state or province in which you purchased your unit. Any court having jurisdiction may enter judgment on the arbitration award. 7.Rules of the Arbitration: If the amount in controversy is less than $250,000, the arbitration will be decided by a single arbitrator. If the amount in controversy is greater than or equal to $250,000, the arbitration will be decided by a panel of three arbitrators. The arbitrator(s) will be chosen pursuant to the rules of the administering arbitration organization. United States residents may choose the American Arbitration Association (1633 Broadway, 10th Floor, New York, NY 10019, www.adr. org), JAMS (1920 Main Street, Ste. 300, Irvine, CA 92614, www.jamsadr.com), or, subject to our approval, any other arbitration organization. In addition, Canadian residents may choose the ADR Institute of Canada (234 Eglinton Ave. East, Suite 405, Toronto, Ontario, M4P 1K5, www. amic.org). These organizations’ rules can be obtained by contacting the organization or visiting its website. If the chosen arbitration organization’s rules conflict with this Arbitration Clause, the provisions of this Arbitration Clause control. The award of the arbitrator(s) shall be final and binding on all parties. LIMITED WARRANTY 4 11/2019Part No. PWDDMSTWZH © 2015 - 2019 Models: FTX(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, FTK(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RX(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RK(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RX(09,12,18,24)NMVJU, RK(09,12,18,24)NMVJU, RXL(09,12,15)QMVJU*, RXL(18,24)UMVJU*, RX(09,12,15,18)QMVJU, RXS(09,12,15,18,24)LVJU, RXG(09,12,15)HVJU, RX(09,12,15,18,24)RMVJU*, 2MXS18*, 2MXL18*, 3MXS24*, 3MXL24*, 4MXS36*, 4MXL36*, 5MXS48*, RMXS48*, FTX(09,12,15,18,24)*, FTXR(09,12,18)*, FTK(09,12,18,24)*, FVXS(09,12,15,18)*, FFQ(09,12,15,18)*, FTXS(09,12,15,18,24)*, FTXG(09,12,15)*, CTXG(09,12,18)*, CTXS07, FDXS(09,12)*, FDMQ(09,12,15,18,24)*, CDXS(07,15,18,24)*, BPMKS0(48,49)* 8. Location of the Arbitration Hearing: Unless applica- ble law provides otherwise, the arbitration hearing for United States residents will be conducted in the federal judicial district in which you reside or, for Canadian resi- dents, in the province in which you reside. 9. Costs of the Arbitration: Each party is responsible for its own attorney, expert, and other fees unless applicable law requires otherwise. Daikin will pay your share of the fees charged by the arbitration organization and arbitra- tor(s) beyond the first $200. Where permissible by law, you may be required to reimburse Daikin for the fees of the arbitration organization and arbitrator(s) in whole or in part by decision of the arbitrator(s) at the discretion of the arbitrator(s). 10. Survival and Enforceability of this Arbitration Clause: This Arbitration Clause shall survive the expiration or ter- mination, or any transfer, of the warranty on your unit. If any part of this Arbitration Clause, except waivers of class-action rights, is found to be unenforceable for any reason, the remainder of this clause and the warranty shall remain enforceable. If, in a case in which class-ac- tion allegations have been made, the waiver of class-ac- tion rights under this warranty is found to be unenforce- able with respect to any part of the dispute, the parts of the dispute as to which the waiver of class-action rights have been found unenforceable will be severed and will proceed in court without reference or application of this Arbitration Clause. Any remaining parts will proceed in arbitration. COMMERCIAL WARRANTY COMMERCIAL WARRANTY 9 Models: FTX(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, FTK(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RX(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RK(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RX(09,12,18,24)NMVJU, RK(09,12,18,24)NMVJU, RXL(09,12,15)QMVJU*, RXL(18,24)UMVJU*, RX(09,12,15,18)QMVJU, RXS(09,12,15,18,24)LVJU, RXG(09,12,15)HVJU, RX(09,12,15,18,24)RMVJU*, 2MXS18*, 2MXL18*, 3MXS24*, 3MXL24*, 4MXS36*, 4MXL36*, 5MXS48*, RMXS48*, FTX(09,12,15,18,24)*, FTXR(09,12,18)*, FTK(09,12,18,24)*, FVXS(09,12,15,18)*, FFQ(09,12,15,18)*, FTXS(09,12,15,18,24)*, FTXG(09,12,15)*, CTXG(09,12,18)*, CTXS07, FDXS(09,12)*, FDMQ(09,12,15,18,24)*, CDXS(07,15,18,24)*, BPMKS0(48,49)* 11/2019Part No. PWDDMSTWZH © 2015 - 2019 THE OWNER AGREES THAT THESE REMEDIES ARE THE OWN- ER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF ALL WARRAN- TIES. What Won’t Daikin Do To Correct Problems? Daikin will not pay for: • Labor, freight, or any other cost associated with the ser- vice, repair, or operation of the unit. • Electricity or fuel costs, or increases in electricity or fuel costs, for any reason, including additional or unusual use of supplemental electric heat. • Lodging or transportation charges. • Refrigerant. WHETHER ANY CLAIM IS BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORT, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHER BREACH OF CON- TRACT, OR ANY OTHER THEORY, NEITHER DAIKIN NOR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AF- FILIATE THAT IS THE MANUFACTURER OF THIS UNIT) SHALL IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF USE OF A UNIT, EXTRA UTILITY EXPENSES, OR DAM- AGES TO PROPERTY. How Can The Owner Receive Warranty Service? If there is a problem with the unit, contact a licensed contractor. To receive a replacement part, a licensed contractor must bring the defective part to a Daikin heating and air conditioning prod- ucts distributor. For more information about the warranty, write to Homeowner Support, 19001 Kermier Road, Waller Texas 77484. Where Can Any Legal Remedies Be Pursued? ARBITRATION CLAUSE. IMPORTANT. PLEASE REVIEW THIS AR- BITRATION CLAUSE. IT AFFECTS YOUR LEGAL RIGHTS. 1. Parties: This arbitration clause affects your rights against Daikin and any of its affiliates or employees or agents, successors, or assigns, all of whom together are referred to below as “we” or “us” for ease of reference. 2. ARBITRATION REQUIREMENT: EXCEPT AS STATED BE- LOW, ANY DISPUTE BETWEEN YOU AND ANY OF US SHALL BE DECIDED BY NEUTRAL, BINDING ARBITRA- TION RATHER THAN IN COURT OR BY JURY TRIAL. “Dis- pute” will be given the broadest possible meaning allow- able by law. It includes any dispute, claim, or controversy arising from or relating to your purchase of this heating or air conditioning unit, any warranty upon the unit, or the unit’s condition. It also includes determination of the scope or applicability of this Arbitration Clause. The arbitration requirement applies to claims in contract and tort, pursuant to statute, or otherwise. 3. CLASS-ARBITRATION WAIVER: ARBITRATION IS HAN- DLED ON AN INDIVIDUAL BASIS. IF A DISPUTE IS AR- BITRATED, YOU AND WE EXPRESSLY WAIVE ANY RIGHT TO PARTICIPATE AS A CLASS REPRESENTATIVE OR CLASS MEMBER ON ANY CLASS CLAIM YOU MAY HAVE AGAINST US OR WE AGAINST YOU, OR AS A PRIVATE AT- TORNEY GENERAL OR IN ANY OTHER REPRESENTATIVE CAPACITY. YOU AND WE ALSO WAIVE ANY RIGHT TO CLASS ARBITRATION OR ANY CONSOLIDATION OF INDI- VIDUAL ARBITRATIONS. 4. Discovery and Other Rights: Discovery and rights to ap- peal in arbitration are generally more limited than in a lawsuit. This applies to both you and us. Other rights that you or we would have in court may not be available in arbitration. Please read this Arbitration Clause and consult the rules of the arbitration organizations listed below for more information. 5. SMALL CLAIMS COURT OPTION: YOU MAY CHOOSE TO LITIGATE ANY DISPUTE BETWEEN YOU AND ANY OF US IN SMALL CLAIMS COURT, RATHER THAN IN ARBITRA- TION, IF THE DISPUTE MEETS ALL REQUIREMENTS TO BE HEARD IN SMALL CLAIMS COURT. 6. Governing Law: For residents of the United States, the procedures and effect of the arbitration will be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act (9 U.S.C. § 1 et seq.) rather than by state law concerning arbitration. For residents of Canada, the procedures and effect of the arbitration will be governed by the applicable arbitration law of the province in which you purchased your unit. The law gov- erning your substantive warranty rights and other claims will be the law of the state or province in which you pur- chased your unit. Any court having jurisdiction may enter judgment on the arbitration award. COMMERCIAL WARRANTY 10 Models: FTX(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, FTK(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RX(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RK(09,12,18,24)AXVJU*, RX(09,12,18,24)NMVJU, RK(09,12,18,24)NMVJU, RXL(09,12,15)QMVJU*, RXL(18,24)UMVJU*, RX(09,12,15,18)QMVJU, RXS(09,12,15,18,24)LVJU, RXG(09,12,15)HVJU, RX(09,12,15,18,24)RMVJU*, 2MXS18*, 2MXL18*, 3MXS24*, 3MXL24*, 4MXS36*, 4MXL36*, 5MXS48*, RMXS48*, FTX(09,12,15,18,24)*, FTXR(09,12,18)*, FTK(09,12,18,24)*, FVXS(09,12,15,18)*, FFQ(09,12,15,18)*, FTXS(09,12,15,18,24)*, FTXG(09,12,15)*, CTXG(09,12,18)*, CTXS07, FDXS(09,12)*, FDMQ(09,12,15,18,24)*, CDXS(07,15,18,24)*, BPMKS0(48,49)* 11/2019Part No. PWDDMSTWZH © 2015 - 2019 7. Rules of the Arbitration: If the amount in controversy is less than $250,000, the arbitration will be decided by a single arbitrator. If the amount in controversy is greater than or equal to $250,000, the arbitration will be decided by a panel of three arbitrators. The arbitrator(s) will be chosen pursuant to the rules of the administering arbi- tration organization. United States residents may choose the American Arbitration Association (1633 Broadway, 10th Floor, New York, NY 10019, www.adr.org), JAMS (1920 Main Street, Ste. 300, Irvine, CA 92614, www. jamsadr.com), or, subject to our approval, any other ar- bitration organization. In addition, Canadian residents may choose the ADR Institute of Canada (234 Eglinton Ave. East, Suite 405, Toronto, Ontario, M4P 1K5, www. amic.org). These organizations’ rules can be obtained by contacting the organization or visiting its website. If the chosen arbitration organization’s rules conflict with this Arbitration Clause, the provisions of this Arbitration Clause control. The award of the arbitrator(s) shall be fi- nal and binding on all parties. 8. Location of the Arbitration Hearing: Unless applica- ble law provides otherwise, the arbitration hearing for United States residents will be conducted in the federal judicial district in which you reside or, for Canadian resi- dents, in the province in which you reside. 9. Costs of the Arbitration: Each party is responsible for its own attorney, expert, and other fees unless applicable law requires otherwise. Daikin will pay your share of the fees charged by the arbitration organization and arbitrator(s) beyond the first $200. Where permissible by law, you may be required to reimburse Daikin for the fees of the arbitra- tion organization and arbitrator(s) in whole or in part by decision of the arbitrator(s) at the discretion of the arbi- trator(s). 10. Survival and Enforceability of this Arbitration Clause: This Arbitration Clause shall survive the expiration or termina- tion, or any transfer, of the warranty on your unit. If any part of this Arbitration Clause, except waivers of class-ac- tion rights, is found to be unenforceable for any reason, the remainder of this clause and the warranty shall remain enforceable. If, in a case in which class-action allegations have been made, the waiver of class-action rights under this warranty is found to be unenforceable with respect to any part of the dispute, the parts of the dispute as to which the waiver of class-action rights have been found unen- forceable will be severed and will proceed in court without reference or application of this Arbitration Clause. Any re- maining parts will proceed in arbitration. PRINTED : 2/3/2022 2:10 PM Prepared By: Curtis Shreve 407A Pomona Dr Greensboro,NC 27407 curtis.shreve@capitalelectricsupply.com D:336-209-6469 Proposal Name: UNC Cardinal Parking Deck - ECBs Quote Name: UNC Cardinal Parking Deck - ECBs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Proposal Number:P-220203-2826168 Quote Number:Q-3084643 Through Addenda Number: 0 Sales Representative:Will Kerr Conditions of Sale Except as otherwise provided below, this Quotation is subject to Coordinated Project Terms. See https://www.schneider- electric.us/en/download/document/0100PL0043 Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in the referenced Coordinated Project Terms or any other documentation provided in connection with this proposal, this quote is valid for 30 days. Quoted lead times are approximate and subject to change. Schneider Electric reserves the right to amend, withdraw or otherwise alter this submission without penalty or charge as a result of any event beyond its control arising from or due to the current Covid-19 epidemic or events subsequent to this epidemic / pandemic including changes in laws, regulations, by laws or direction from a competent authority. PRINTED : 2/3/2022 2:10 PM TABLE OF CONTENTS Circuit Breakers This Section Contains Products: Circuit Breakers Proposal Name: UNC Cardinal Parking Deck -ECBs Quote Number: Q-3084643 Quote Name: UNC Cardinal Parking Deck -ECBs PRINTED : 2/3/2022 2:10 PM Seq #Qty Product Description 1 2 Designation : Product Details: 2-HGL36150U33X-MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER 600V 150A HGL36150U33X UL/CSA Rated PowerPact H Frame Termination: Lugs Line/Load Side 150 Amp Capacity 3 Pole Device 600 Vac Rated 80% Rated - Standard rated Interrupting Rating 65kA @ 240Vac/35kA @ 480Vac/18kA @ 600Vac Micrologic Basic Trip Unit - LSI Revision - 2/3/2022 - (S20220202/S20220202) 2/3/2022 7:04:43 PM Source -Selector 2-J250R-TYPE 3R ENCLOSURE 2-SN400LA-NEUTRAL ASSEMBLY 2-PKOGTH150-ENCLOSURE GROUND LUG KIT 15-150A Estimated days to ship, excluding transit:15 working days after customer release to manufacturer. See Conditions of Sale. HGL36150 0. 0 8 [ 2 . 0 ] 0. 6 9 [ 1 7 . 5 ] 3. 6 9 [ 9 3 . 7 ] 6. 4 0 [ 1 6 2 . 6 ] 0. 4 4 [ 1 1 . 2 ] 0. 7 4 [ 1 8 . 8 ] 5. 6 6 [ 1 4 3 . 8 ] 1. 2 0 [ 3 0 . 5 ] 2. 0 4 [ 5 1 . 8 ] 4. 9 9 [ 1 2 6 . 7 ] 5. 2 0 [ 1 3 2 . 1 ] 5. 9 6 [ 1 5 1 . 4 ] 2. 1 2 [ 5 3 . 8 ] Instruction Bulletin GEX56603 — 05/2022 DC Wiring Diagram, PowerPacT™ H-J Retain for future use. Electrical equipment must be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material. Schneider Electric and Square D are trademarks and the property of Schneider Electric SE, its subsidiaries, and affiliated companies. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. © 2022 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Electric USA, Inc. 800 Federal Street Andover, MA 01810 USA 888-778-2733 www.se.com/us ™ Type Ground Negative1 Grounded Middle Point Ungrounded Source 250 Vdc ≤ 250 Vdc ≤ 250 Vdc 2 P 3 P 1 It is acceptable to ground the positive leg. Circuit Breaker Specifications (UL® / CSA® / NOM®) Circuit Breaker Type 250 Vdc 2 D, G, J, L 20 kA 2 250 Vdc ratings only available with PowerPacT H or J circuit breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units (not including MCP.) Instruction Bulletin Boletín de instrucciones Directives d'utilisation NHA82343 Rev. 01, 08/2015 H150 and J250 NEMA 1 and 3R Enclosed Circuit Breaker Installation Instructions for PowerPactTM H and J Circuit Breakers Instrucciones de instalación de los interruptores automáticos PowerPactTM marco H y J en gabinetes H150 y J250 NEMA 1 y 3R Directives d’installation des disjoncteurs PowerPactMC à châssis H et J dans les coffrets H150 et J250 NEMA 1 et 3R Class Clase Classe 611 Retain for future use. / Conservar para uso futuro. / À conserver pour usage ultérieur. ™ Enclosure Installation Instructions: H150 (F, S and R), J250 (F, S, R and RT) and CJ250 (NS and NR) Instrucciones de instalación de los gabinetes: H150 (F, S y R), J250 (F, S, R y RT) y CJ250 (NS y NR) / Directives d'installation des coffrets : H150 (F, S et R), J250 (F, S, R et RT) et CJ250 (NS et NR) Introduction Introducción Introduction This instruction bulletin contains instructions for the installation of the H150 (F, S and R), J250 (F, S, R and RT), CJ250 (NS and NR) enclosures. Este boletín contiene las instrucciones para la instalación de los gabinetes H150 (F, S y R), J250 (F, S, R y RT) y CJ250 (NS y NR). Ce bulletin contient les directives d'installation des coffrets H150 (F, S et R), J250 (F, S, R et RT) et CJ250 (NS et NR). Precautions Precauciones Précautions DANGER / PELIGRO / DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH • Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E, CSA Z462 or NOM-029-STPS. • This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical personnel. • Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside equipment. • Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off. • Replace all devices, doors and covers before turning on power to this equipment. PELIGRO DE DESCARGA ELÉCTRICA, EXPLOSIÓN O DESTELLO POR ARQUEO • Utilice equipo de protección personal (EPP) apropiado y siga las prácticas de seguridad eléctrica establecidas por su Compañía, consulte la norma 70E de NFPA o Z462 de CSA y NOM-029-STPS. • Solamente el personal eléctrico calificado deberá instalar y prestar servicio de mantenimiento a este equipo. • Desenergice el equipo antes de realizar cualquier trabajo dentro o fuera de él. • Siempre utilice un dispositivo detector de tensión nominal adecuado para confirmar la desenergización del equipo. • Vuelva a colocar todos los dispositivos, las puertas y las cubiertas antes de volver a energizar el equipo. RISQUE D'ÉLECTROCUTION, D'EXPLOSION OU ÉCLAIR D'ARC ÉLECTRIQUE • Portez un équipement de protection personnelle (ÉPP) approprié et observez les méthodes de travail électrique sécuritaire. Voir NFPA 70E, CSA Z462 ou NOM-029-STPS • Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer l'installation et l'entretien de cet appareil. • Coupez l'alimentation de l'appareil avant d'y travailler. • Utilisez toujours un dispositif de détection de tension ayant une valeur nominale appropriée pour vous assurer que l'alimentation est coupée. • Replacez tous les dispositifs, les portes et les couvercles avant de mettre l'appareil sous tension. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. El incumplimiento de estas instrucciones podrá causar la muerte o lesiones serias. Si ces directives ne sont pas respectées, cela entraînera la mort ou des blessures graves. Note: Read the wiring diagram and labels inside the cover when preparing to install the equipment. Notice labels contain hub, cable and accessory requirements. Nota: Lea el diagrama de alambrado y etiquetas dentro de la cubierta cuando esté preparando el equipo para su instalación. Las etiquetas de aviso especifican los requisitos de receptáculos, cables y accesorios. Remarque : Lire le schéma de câblage et les étiquettes à l'intérieur du couvercle lors de la préparation à l'installation de l'appareil. Les étiquettes d'avis mentionnent les exigences concernant les manchons, câbles et accessoires. H150 and J250 NEMA 1 and 3R Enclosed Circuit Breaker Installation Instructions for PowerPactTM H and J Circuit Breakers NHA82343 Rev. 01, 08/2015 © 2015 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved / Reservados todos los derechos / Tous droits réservés2 Installing the Circuit Breaker Enclosure Instalación del gabinete del interruptor automático Installation du coffret du disjoncteur 1. Remove screws from the enclosure cover. Remove enclosure cover. 1. Retire los tornillos de la cubierta del gabinete. Retire la cubierta del gabinete. 1. Enlever les vis du couvercle du coffret. Retirer le couvercle du coffret. 2. Remove the appropriate knockouts required for installation of cable clamps or conduit. To remove knockouts, see Figure 1. 2. Retire los discos desprendibles apropiados necesarios para la instalación de las abrazaderas para cables o el tubo conduit. Para retirar los discos desprendibles, vea la figura 1. 2. Retirer les débouchures appropriées nécessaires pour l'installation des serre- câbles ou du conduit. Pour retirer les débouchures, voir la figure 1. Figure / Figura / Figure 1 : Removing Knockouts / Extracción de los discos removibles / Retrait des débouchures 3. Mount the enclosure to the wall. 3. Monte el gabinete en la pared. 3. Monter le coffret sur le mur. 4. Install conduit and necessary fittings. 4. Instale el tubo conduit y los accesorios necesarios. 4. Installer le conduit et les raccords nécessaires. 5. Follow local and national electrical codes for proper wiring methods. 5. Siga los códigos eléctricos locales y nacionales para utilizar los métodos de alambrado adecuados. 5. Observer les codes de l'électricité, local et national, pour les méthodes de câblage appropriées. Note: Refer to the wiring diagram located inside the enclosure for information about accessories. NOTA: Consulte el diagrama de alambrado que se encuentra dentro del gabinete para obtener más información sobre los accesorios. REMARQUE : Se reporter au schéma de câblage situé à l’intérieur du coffret pour obtenir d'informations sur les accessoires. Installing the Circuit Breaker Instalación del interruptor automático Installation du disjoncteur 1. Attach the circuit breaker to the mounting pan using the mounting screws provided with the circuit breaker. See Figure 2. Torque per circuit breaker instructions. 1. Instale el interruptor automático en la bandeja de montaje utilizando los tornillos de montaje incluidos con el interruptor. Vea la figura 2. Apriete los tornillos según las instrucciones del interruptor 1. Attacher le disjoncteur à la cuve de montage à l’aide des vis de montage fournies avec le disjoncteur. Voir la figure 2. Serrer les vis selon les directives du disjoncteur. 2. Install the conductors into the circuit breaker lugs. Torque the wire binding screws according to the torque requirements on circuit breaker. See circuit breaker instructions for wire size. 2. Inserte los conductores en las zapatas del interruptor automático. Apriete los tornillos de sujeción de cables según los requisitos de par de apriete especificados en el interruptor. Consulte las instrucciones del interruptor automático para obtener el tamaño de conductor. 2. Installer les conducteurs dans les cosses du disjoncteur. Serrer les vis de fixation en fonction des exigences de couple de serrage sur le disjoncteur. Voir les directives du disjoncteur pour obtenir le calibre des fils. H150 and J250 NEMA 1 and 3R Enclosed Circuit Breaker Installation Instructions for PowerPactTM H and J Circuit Breakers NHA82343 Rev. 01, 08/2015 © 2015 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved / Reservados todos los derechos / Tous droits réservés 3 Figure / Figura / Figure 2 : Enclosed Circuit Breaker/ Interruptor automático en gabinete / Disjoncteur sous coffret Figure / Figura / Figure 3 : Enclosed Circuit Breaker Trip Setting Access / Acceso al ajuste de disparo del interruptor automático en gabinete / Accès au réglage du déclenchement du disjoncteur sous coffret H150F, H150S, H150R Enclosures / Gabinetes / Coffrets J250F, J250S, J250R, J250RT, CJ250NS, CJ250NR Enclosures / Gabinetes / Coffrets Bonding screw / Tornillo de unión / Vis de mise á la masse SN100FA (shown) or SN400LA neutral assembly / Ensamble de neutro SN100LA (ilustrado) o SN400FA / Assemblage du neutre SN100LA (représenté) ou SN400FA H circuit breaker / Interruptor automático H / Disjoncteur H Bonding screw / Tornillo de unión / Vis de mise á la masse SN400LA (shown) or SN100FA neutral assembly / Ensamble de neutro SN400LA (ilustrado) o SN100FA / Assemblage du neutre SN400LA (représenté) ou SN100FA H or J circuit breaker / Interruptor automático H o J / Disjoncteur H ou J PKOGTJ250 (shown) or PKOGTH150 equipment ground lugs / Zapatas de tierra del equipo PKOGTJ250 (ilustradas) o PKOGTH150 / Cosses de m.à.l.t. de l'appareil PKOGTJ250 (représentées) ou PKOGTH150 PKOGTH150 (shown) or PKOGTJ250 equipment ground lugs / Zapatas de tierra del equipo PKOGTH150 (ilustradas) o PKOGTJ250 / Cosses de m.à.l.t. de l'appareil PKOGTH150 (représentées) ou PKOGTJ250 Note: Do Not use with 2 Pole HD or HG Breakers. Use 4.1 in. wide breakers only. Nota: No utilice con interruptores automáticos HD o HG de 2 polos. Utilice interruptores automáticos de 4,1 pulgadas de ancho solamente. / Remarque : Ne pas utiliser avec les disjoncteurs bipolaires HD ou HG. Utiliser uniquement des disjoncteurs d'une largeur de 4,1 po. Note: H150F, H150S, H150R, J250R, CJ250NR, CJ250NS covers (Does not include breaker trip setting access with cover on) Nota: Las cubiertas de los gabinetes H150F, H150S, H150R, J250R, CJ250NR, CJ250NS (no le permiten acceso a los ajustes de disparo del interruptor cuando la cubierta está instalada) / Remarque : Couvercles des coffrets H150F, H150S, H150R, J250R, CJ250NR, CJ250NS (ne comportent pas d'accès de réglage du déclenchement du disjoncteur avec le couvercle en place) Note: J250F, J250S, J250RT covers (Includes breaker trip setting access with cover on) Do not use two-pole HD or HG breakers. Nota: Las cubiertas de los gabinetes J250F, J250S, J250RT (le permiten acceso a los ajustes de disparo del interruptor con la cubierta instalada). No utilice interruptores automáticos HD o HG de dos polos). / Remarque : Couvercles des coffrets J250F, J250S, J250RT (comportent un accès de réglage du déclenchement du disjoncteur avec le couvercle en place). Ne pas utiliser les disjoncteurs bipolaires HD ou HG. H150 and J250 NEMA 1 and 3R Enclosed Circuit Breaker Installation Instructions for PowerPactTM H and J Circuit Breakers NHA82343 Rev. 01, 08/2015 © 2015 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved / Reservados todos los derechos / Tous droits réservés4 Installing the Ground Lugs Instalación de las zapatas de tierra Installation des cosses de m.à.l.t. If required, install the ground lug assembly kit (PKOGTH150 or PKOGTJ250) using the instructions provided with the kit. En caso de ser necesario, instale el kit de ensamble de zapatas de tierra (PKOGTH150 o PKOGTJ250), siguiendo las instrucciones incluidas con el kit En cas de besoin, installer le kit d'assemblage des cosses de m.à.l.t. (PKOGTH150 ou PKOGTJ250) à l'aide des directives fournies avec le kit. Installing the Neutral Assembly Instalación del ensamble del neutro Installation de l’assemblage du neutre 1. If required, install the neutral assembly SN100FA and torque mounting screws to 30 lb-in or SN400LA and torque to 60 lb-in. 1. Si es necesario, instale el ensamble de neutro SN100FA y apriete los tornillos de montaje en 30 lbs-pulg (3,4 N•m) o el ensamble SN400LA y apriete en 60 lbs-pulg (6,8 N•m). 1. Si nécessaire, installer l'assemblage du neutre SN100FA et serrer les vis de montage au couple de 30 lb-po (3,4 N•m) ou du neutre SN400LA et serrer les vis de montage à 60 lb-po (6,8 N•m). 2. Install the neutral conductors into the lug(s). Torque the wire binding screws according to the instructions provided on the neutral assembly. 2. Instale los conductores de neutro en las zapatas. Apriete los tornillos de sujeción de cables de acuerdo con las instrucciones proporcionadas con el ensamble de neutro. 2. Installer les conducteurs du neutre dans les cosses. Serrer les vis de fixation au couple selon les directives fournies sur l'ensemble du neutre. Note: CJ250NS and CJ250NR have the neutral (SN400LA) factory installed and bonded. NOTA: Los gabinetes CJ250NS y CJ250NR incluyen el neutro (SN400LA) instalado y unido de fábrica. REMARQUE : Les coffrets, CJ250NS et CJ250NR, comprennent un assemblage du neutre (SN400LA) installé et mis à la masse à l'usine. Installing the Bonding Screw Instalación del tornillo de unión Installation de la vis de mise à la masse For service entrance applications: Install green bonding screw (provided) in neutral clearance hole as indicated in Figure 2. The screw will self thread into the enclosure engagement hole. Tighten the screw to 25-35 lb-in. (CJ250NS and CJ250NR green bonding screws are installed at the factory). Para aplicaciones de entrada de acometida: Inserte el tornillo de unión verde (provisto) en el agujero de paso de neutro como se indica en la figura 2. El tornillo se autoenroscará en el agujero de enganche del gabinete. Apriete el tornillo de 25 a 35 lbs-pulg (2,8 a 3,9 N•m) (en los gabinetes CJ250NS y CJ250NR los tornillos de unión verdes vienen instalados de fábrica). Pour les applications d'entrée de service : Installer la vis de mise à la masse verte (fournie) dans le trou de dégagement du neutre comme indiqué à la figure 2. La vis crée son propre filetage dans le trou d'engagement du coffret. Serrer la vis au couple de 25-35 lb-po (2,8 a 3,9 N•m) (dans les coffrets CJ250NS et CJ250NR, les vis de mise à la masse vertes sont installées à l'usine). For non-service entrance applications: Remove the green bonding screw from CJ250NS and CJ250NR enclosures. For other enclosures, do not install the green bonding screw. Para aplicaciones de entrada no de acometida: Retire el tornillo de unión verde de los gabinetes CJ250NS y CJ250NR. Para otros gabinetes, no instale el tornillo de unión verde. Pour les applications autres que celles d’entrée de service : Retirer la vis de mise à la masse verte des coffrets CJ250NS et CJ250NR. Pour les autres coffrets, ne pas installer la vis de mise à la masse verte. Cover Installation Instalación de la cubierta Installation du couvercle 1. Place enclosure cover on circuit breaker enclosure. 1. Coloque la cubierta en el gabinete del interruptor automático. 1. Placer le couvercle du coffret sur le coffret du disjoncteur. 2. Install screws to secure the cover to the enclosure. Torque the screws to 30-50 lb-in. See Figure 4. 2. Instale los tornillos para fijar la cubierta al gabinete. Apriete los tornillos de 30 a 50 lbs-pulg (3,4 - 5,6 N•m). Vea la figura 4. 2. Installer les vis pour fixer le couvercle au coffret. Serrer les vis au couple de 30 à 50 lb-po (3,4 - 5,6 N•m). Voir la figure 4. Energizing Energización Mise sous tension 1. With cover installed and enclosure handle in the OFF (O) position, turn ON (I) the power to the equipment in sequence; start at the source end of the system and work toward the device in this enclosure. 1. Con la cubierta colocada y la palanca del gabinete en la posición de abierto (O/OFF), energice el equipo en secuencia; comenzando por el extremo fuente del sistema y procediendo hasta el dispositivo en el gabinete. 1. Le couvercle étant installé et la manette du coffret à la position d'arrêt (O/OFF), mettre l'appareil sous tension en séquence ; commencer à l'extrémité source et continuer en direction du dispositif dans ce coffret. 2. Turn enclosure handle to the ON (I) position. 2. Coloque la palanca del gabinete en la posición de cerrado (I/ON). 2. Amener la manette du coffret à la position de marche (I/ON). H150 and J250 NEMA 1 and 3R Enclosed Circuit Breaker Installation Instructions for PowerPactTM H and J Circuit Breakers NHA82343 Rev. 01, 08/2015 © 2015 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved / Reservados todos los derechos / Tous droits réservés 5 Figure / Figura / Figure 4 : Cover Installation / Instalación de la cubierta / Installation du couvercle H150 and J250 NEMA 1 and 3R Enclosed Circuit Breaker Installation Instructions for PowerPactTM H and J Circuit Breakers NHA82343 Rev. 01, 08/2015 Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material. Solamente el personal calificado deberá instalar, hacer funcionar y prestar servicios de mantenimiento al equipo eléctrico. Schneider Electric no asume responsabilidad alguna por las consecuencias emergentes de la utilización de este material. Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer l’installation, l’utilisation, l’entretien et la maintenance du matériel électrique. Schneider Electric n’assume aucune responsabilité des conséquences éventuelles découlant de l’utilisation de cette documentation. Square D™ and Schneider Electric™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Schneider Electric. Other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners. Square D™ y Schneider Electric™ son marcas comerciales o marcas registradas de Schneider Electric. Cualquier otra marca comercial utilizada en este documento pertenece a sus respectivos propietarios. Square DMC et Schneider ElectricMC sont des marques commerciales ou marques déposées de Schneider Electric. Toutes autres marques commerciales utilisées dans ce document sont la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Schneider Electric USA, Inc. 800 Federal Street Andover, MA 01810 USA 888-778-2733 www.schneider-electric.us Importado en México por: Schneider Electric México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Ejercito Nacional No. 904 Col. Palmas, Polanco 11560 México, D.F. 55-5804-5000 www.schneider-electric.com.mx Schneider Electric Canada, Inc. 5985 McLaughlin Road Mississauga, ON L5R 1B8 Canada 800-565-6699 www.schneider-electric.ca © 2015 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved / Reservados todos los derechos / Tous droits réservés6 Instruction Bulletin Boletín de instrucciones Directives d'utilisation EAV19625 Rev. 01, 09/2014 L600AWK, 600 A Enclosure Installation Instructions For PowerPactTM L-Frame Circuit Breakers, Motor Protector Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches Instrucciones de instalación de los gabinetes L600AWK, de 600 A para los interruptores automáticos PowerPactTM marco L, interruptores automáticos de protector del motor e interruptores en caja moldeada Directives d’installation des coffrets L600AWK, 600 A , pour les disjoncteurs à châssis L PowerPactMC, les disjoncteurs de protection des moteurs et les interrupteurs à boîtier moulé Replaces / Reemplaza / Remplace Rev. 00, 03/2014 ™ Retain for future use. / Conservar para uso futuro. / À conserver pour usage ultérieur. Introduction This bulletin contains instructions for the installation of the L600AWK, CL600NAWK, L600AWKMC, and L600AWKVW. Introducción Este boletín contiene las instrucciones para la instalación de los gabinetes L600AWK, CL600NAWK, L600AWKMC y L600AWKVW. Introduction Ce bulletin contient les directives d'installation des coffrets L600AWK, CL600NAWK, L600AWKMC et L600AWKVW. Precautions Precauciones Précautions DANGER / PELIGRO / DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH • Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462. • This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical personnel. • Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside equipment. • Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off. • Replace all devices, doors and covers before turning on power to this equipment. PELIGRO DE DESCARGA ELÉCTRICA, EXPLOSIÓN O DESTELLO POR ARQUEO • Utilice equipo de protección personal (EPP) apropiado y siga las prácticas de seguridad en trabajos eléctricos establecidas por su Compañía, consulte la norma 70E de NFPA o Z462 de CSA y NOM-029-STPS. • Solamente el personal eléctrico calificado deberá instalar y prestar servicio de mantenimiento a este equipo. • Desenergice el equipo antes de realizar cualquier trabajo en él. • Siempre utilice un dispositivo detector de tensión nominal adecuado para confirmar la desenergización del equipo. • Vuelva a colocar todos los dispositivos, las puertas y las cubiertas antes de energizar el equipo. RISQUE D'ÉLECTROCUTION, D'EXPLOSION OU D'ÉCLATS D'ARC • Portez un équipement de protection personnelle (ÉPP) approprié et observez les méthodes de travail électrique sécuritaire. Voir NFPA 70E ou CSA Z462. • Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer l'installation et l'entretien de cet appareil. • Coupez toute alimentation de cet appareil avant d’y travailler. • Utilisez toujours un dispositif de détection de tension ayant une valeur nominale appropriée pour s’assurer que l’alimentation est coupée. • Replacez tous les dispositifs, les portes et les couvercles avant de mettre l’appareil sous tension. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. El incumplimiento de estas instrucciones podrá causar la muerte o lesiones serias. Si ces directives ne sont pas respectées, cela entraînera la mort ou des blessures graves. L600AWK, 600A Enclosures’ Installation Instructions Instrucciones de instalación de los gabinetes L600AWK, de 600 A EAV19625 Directives d’installation des coffrets L600AWK, 600 A Rev. 01, 09/2014 2 © 2014 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved / Reservados todos los derechos / Tous droits réservés Installing the Enclosure 1. Mount the enclosure to the wall. 2. Install the conduit and necessary fittings. 3. Pull the cables as required. Note: If the enclosure will be used in an outdoor application, remove the drain screw in the bottom endwall and discard. Instalación del gabinete 1. Monte el gabinete en la pared. 2. Instale el tubo conduit y los accesorios necesarios. 3. Jale los cables a medida que sea necesario. Nota: Si va a utilizar el gabinete en aplicaciones para uso en exteriores, retire y deseche el tornillo de drenaje ubicado en la pared final inferior. Installation du coffret 1. Monter le coffret sur le mur. 2. Installer le conduit et les raccords nécessaires. 3. Tendre les câbles selon les besoins. Remarque : Si le coffret est utilisé dans une application à l’extérieur, enlever et jeter la vis de vidange de la paroi d’extrémité inférieure. Installing the Circuit Breaker or Molded Case Switch Instalación del interruptor automático o interruptor en caja moldeada Installation du disjoncteur ou de l'interrupteur à boîtier moulé 1. Install the L–shaped fiber insulator (A) as shown in Figure 1. 2. Position the circuit breaker or molded case switch under the operating arm with the “ON” end toward the top of the enclosure. 3. Slide the circuit breaker or molded case switch handle into the slot and secure the circuit breaker with the four (4) mounting screws provided (B). Torque to 60 lb-in (6.8 N•m). 1. Instale el aislador de fibra en forma de “L” (A) como se muestra en la figura 1. 2. Coloque el interruptor automático o interruptor en caja moldeada debajo del brazo de funcionamiento con el extremo abierto “ON” orientado hacia la parte superior del gabinete. 3. Deslice la palanca del interruptor automático o interruptor en caja moldeada en la ranura y sujete el interruptor con los (4) cuatro tornillos de montaje (B) proporcionados. Apriete en 6,8 N•m (60 lbs-pulg). 1. Installer l’isolateur à fibre en forme de « L » (A) comme indiqué à la figure 1. 2. Placer le disjoncteur ou l'interrupteur à boîtier moulé sous le bras de fonctionnement avec l’extrémité de marche (ON) vers le haut du coffret. 3. Faire glisser la manette de l'interrupteur à boîtier moulé ou du disjoncteur dans la rainure et attacher le disjoncteur avec les quatre (4) vis de montage (B) fournies. Serrer au couple de serrage de 6,8 N•m (60 lb-po). Figure / Figura / Figure 1 : Installing the Circuit Breaker or Molded Case Switch / Instalación del interruptor automático o interruptor en caja moldeada / Installation du disjoncteur ou de l'interrupteur à boîtier moulé A B B Operating arm / Brazo de funcionamiento/ Bras de fonctionnement Circuit breaker or molded case switch/ Interruptor automático o interruptor en caja moldeada / Disjoncteur ou interrupteur à boîtier moulé Enclosure handle/ Palanca del gabinete/ Manette du coffret Circuit breaker or molded case switch handle/ Palanca del interruptor automático o interruptor en caja moldeada / Manette du disjoncteur ou de l'interrupteur à boîtier moulé Insulator/ Aislador/ Isolateur L600AWK, 600A Enclosures’ Installation Instructions EAV19625 Instrucciones de instalación de los gabinetes L600AWK, de 600 A Rev. 01, 09/2014 Directives d’installation des coffrets L600AWK, 600 A 3© 2014 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved / Reservados todos los derechos / Tous droits réservés Installing the Ground Lugs Instalación de las zapatas de tierra Installation des cosses de m.à.l.t. If required, install the ground lug assembly kit (PKOGTA4) using the instructions provided with the kit. En caso de ser necesario, instale el accesorio de ensamble de zapatas de tierra (PKOGTA4), consulte las instrucciones incluidas con el accesorio. En cas de besoin, installer le kit d'assemblage des cosses de m.à.l.t. (PKOGTA4) à l'aide des directives fournies avec le kit. Installing the Neutral Assembly Instalación del ensamble del neutro Installation de l’ensemble du neutre 1. If required, install the neutral assembly (SNC400LX, SNC800LX, SN400LA, SNC600LXCT, SN1000MA) using the instructions provided with the neutral assembly. Note: In the case of the CL600NAWK, the neutral is factory installed and bonded. 2. Install the neutral conductors in the lug(s). Torque the wire binding screws according to the instructions provided on the neutral assembly. Note: Use SN1000MA and SNC800LX, as solid neutrals only. The CT for these neutrals does not work with the PowerPactTM Circuit Breakers. 1. Si es necesario, instale el ensamble de neutro (SNC400LX, SNC800LX, SN400LA, SNC600LXCT, SN1000MA) utilizando las instrucciones proporcionadas con el ensamble de neutro. Nota: En el caso del gabinete CL600NAWK, el neutro viene instalado y conectado de fábrica. 2. Instale los conductores de neutro en las zapatas. Apriete los tornillos de sujeción de cables de acuerdo con las instrucciones proporcionadas con el ensamble de neutro. Nota: Utilice los ensambles SN1000MA y SNC800LX, como neutros sólidos solamente. El TC para estos neutros no funciona con los interruptores automáticos PowerPactTM. 1. Si nécessaire, installer l'ensemble du neutre (SNC400LX, SNC800LX, SN400LA, SNC600LXCT, SN1000MA) en suivant les directives fournies avec l'ensemble du neutre. Remarque : Dans le cas du coffret CL600NAWK, le neutre est installé et fixé à l'usine. 2. Installer les conducteurs du neutre dans les cosses. Serrer les vis de fixation au couple selon les directives fournies sur l'ensemble du neutre. Remarque : Utiliser SN1000MA et SNC800LX, comme neutres directs seulement. Le TC pour ces neutres ne fonctionne pas avec les disjoncteurs PowerPactMC. Figure / Figura / Figure 2 : Installing the Neutral Assembly / Instalación del ensamble del neutro / Installation de l’ensemble du neutre Neutral assembly SNC800LX (shown) / Ensamble de neutro SNC800LX (mostrado) / Ensemble du neutre SNC800LX (représenté) L600AWK, 600A Enclosures’ Installation Instructions Instrucciones de instalación de los gabinetes L600AWK, de 600 A EAV19625 Directives d’installation des coffrets L600AWK, 600 A Rev. 01, 09/2014 Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material. Solamente el personal calificado deberá instalar, hacer funcionar y prestar servicios de mantenimiento al equipo eléctrico. Schneider Electric no asume responsabilidad alguna por las consecuencias emergentes de la utilización de este material. Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer l’installation, l’utilisation, l’entretien et la maintenance du matériel électrique. Schneider Electric n’assume aucune responsabilité des conséquences éventuelles découlant de l’utilisation de cette documentation. Schneider Electric and Square D are trademarks owned by Schneider Electric Industries SAS or its affiliated companies. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Schneider Electric y Square D son marcas comerciales de Schneider Electric Industries SAS o sus compañías afiliadas. Todas las otras marcas comerciales son propiedad de sus respectivos propietarios. Schneider Electric et Square D sont des marques commerciales de Schneider Electric Industries SAS ou de ses compagnies affiliées. Toutes les autres marques commerciales utilisées dans ce document sont la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Schneider Electric USA, Inc. 800 Federal Street Andover, MA 01810 USA 888-778-2733 www.schneider-electric.us Importado en México por: Schneider Electric México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Ejercito Nacional No. 904 Col. Palmas, Polanco 11560 México, D.F. 55-5804-5000 www.schneider-electric.com.mx Schneider Electric Canada, Inc. 5985 McLaughlin Road Mississauga, ON L5R 1B8 Canada 800-565-6699 www.schneider-electric.ca 4 Installing the Circuit Breaker or Molded Case Switch Conductors Instalación de los conductores del interruptor automático o interruptor en caja moldeada Installation des conducteurs du disjoncteur ou de l'interrupteur à boîtier moulé Install the conductors in the circuit breaker or molded case switch lugs and torque the wire binding screws according to the instructions provided with the circuit breaker or molded case switch. Instale los conductores en las zapatas del interruptor automático o interruptor en caja moldeada y apriete los tornillos de sujeción de cables según las instrucciones incluidas con estos dispositivos. Installer les conducteurs dans les cosses du disjoncteur ou de l'interrupteur à boîtier moulé et serrer les vis de fixation des fils selon les directives d'utilisation fournies avec le disjoncteur ou l'interrupteur. Bolting the Enclosure Door Sujeción de la puerta del gabinete con tornillos Verrouillage de la porte du coffret 1. Replace all parts. 2. Close the door and secure it with the hardware provided. Torque the door bolts to 70 lb-in. (7.9 N•m). 1. Vuelva a colocar todas las piezas. 2. Cierre la puerta y asegúrela con los herrajes provistos. Apriete los tornillos de la puerta a 7,9 N•m (70 lbs-pulg). 1. Remettre en place toutes les pièces. 2. Fermer la porte et la fixer à l’aide de la quincaillerie fournie. Serrer les boulons de la porte à 7,9 N•m (70 lb-po). Instruction Bulletin Boletín de instrucciones Directives d'utilisation Series A01 Serie A01 Série A01 NHA39355 Rev. 02, 11/2019 PKOGTH150 Service / Equipment Grounding Lug Zapata de puesta a tierra del equipo / de acometida Cosse de m.à.l.t. de l’appareil / de service Retain for future use. / Conservar para uso futuro. / À conserver pour usage ultérieur. ™ DANGER / PELIGRO / DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH • Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E, CSA Z462 or NOM-029-STPS. • This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical personnel. • Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside equipment. • Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off. • Replace all devices, doors and covers before turning on power to this equipment. PELIGRO DE DESCARGA ELÉCTRICA, EXPLOSIÓN O DESTELLO POR ARQUEO • Utilice equipo de protección personal (EPP) apropiado y siga las prácticas de seguridad en trabajos eléctricos establecidas por su Compañía, consulte la norma NFPA 70E, CSA Z462 o NOM-029-STPS. • Solamente el personal eléctrico calificado deberá instalar y prestar servicio de mantenimiento a este equipo. • Desenergice el equipo antes de realizar cualquier trabajo dentro o fuera de él. • Siempre utilice un dispositivo detector de tensión nominal adecuado para confirmar la desenergización del equipo. • Vuelva a colocar todos los dispositivos, las puertas y las cubiertas antes de volver a energizar el equipo. RISQUE D’ÉLECTROCUTION, D’EXPLOSION OU ÉCLAIR D'ARC ÉLECTRIQUE • Portez un équipement de protection personnel (ÉPP) approprié et observez les méthodes de travail électrique sécuritaire. Voir NFPA 70E, CSA Z462 ou NOM-029-STPS. • Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer l’installation et l’entretien de cet appareil. • Coupez l'alimentation de l'appareil avant d'y travailler. • Utilisez toujours un dispositif de détection de tension à valeur nominale appropriée pour s’assurer que toute l’alimentation est coupée. • Replacez tous les dispositifs, les portes et les couvercles avant de mettre l'appareil sous tension. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury. El incumplimiento de estas instrucciones podrá causar la muerte o lesiones serias. Si ces directives ne sont pas respectées, cela entraînera la mort ou des blessures graves. Precautions Precauciones Précautions 85901 9939276 Assembled in Mexico with Mexican and foreign parts./ Ensamblada en México con piezas mexicanas y extranjeras. / Assemblée au Mexique avec des pièces mexicaines et étrangères. Assembled in Mexico with Mexican and foreign parts / Ensamblada en México con piezas mexicanas y extranjeras. / Assemblée au Mexique avec des pièces mexicaines et étrangères Schneider Electric and Square D are trademarks owned by Schneider Electric Industries SAS or its affiliated companies. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Schneider Electric y Square D son marcas comerciales de Schneider Electric Industries SAS o sus compañías afiliadas. Todas las otras marcas comerciales son propiedad de sus respectivos propietarios. Schneider Electric et Square D sont des marques commerciales de Schneider Electric Industries SAS ou de ses compagnies affiliées. Toutes les autres marques commerciales utilisées dans ce document sont la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Schneider Electric USA, Inc. 800 Federal Street Andover, MA 01810 USA 888-778-2733 www.schneider-electric.us NHA39355 Importado en México por: Schneider Electric México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Ejercito Nacional No. 904 Col. Palmas, Polanco 11560 México, D.F. 55-5804-5000 www.schneider-electric.com.mx Schneider Electric Canada, Inc. 5985 McLaughlin Road Mississauga, ON L5R 1B8 Canada 800-565-6699 www.schneider-electric.ca © 2019 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved / Reservados todos los derechos / Tous droits réservés Contents Contenido Contenu 2 lugs (wire range 14-2 Al/Cu wire) 2 (12-24) Mounting screws 4 Labels 2 zapatas (calibre del conductor de Al/Cu: 14-2) 2 tornillos (12-24) de montaje 4 etiquetas 2 cosses (calibre du fil en Al/Cu 14-2) 2 vis (12-24) de montage 4 étiquettes Mounting Montaje Montage 1. Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside equipment. 2. Mount lugs to back of box using (2) 0.193 dia. holes and (2) (12- 24) screws provided. 3. Torque mounting screws provided to 25–45 lb-in. (2.8-5.0 N•m). 1. Desenergice el equipo antes de realizar cualquier trabajo dentro o fuera de él. 2. Monte las zapatas en la parte posterior de la caja empleando los (2) agujeros de 0,193 pulg (4,9 mm) de diámetro y los (2) tornillos de 12-24 provistos. 3. Apriete los tornillos de montaje provistos de 2,8 a 5,0 N•m (25 a 45 lbs-plug). 1. Couper l’alimentation de cet appareil avant d’y travailler. 2. Monter les cosses sur l'arrière du coffret en utilisant les deux (2) trous de 0,193 po (4,9 mm) de diamètre et deux (2) vis de 12-24 fournies. 3. Serrer les vis de montage fournies au couple de 2,8 à 5,0 N•m (25 à 45 lb-po). Note:When used for equipment grounding, place “Equipment Grounding Terminal” label near lugs after installation. Attach torque label to box adjacent to grounding lugs. Nota:Cuando se utiliza como puesta a tierra del equipo, coloque la etiqueta “Terminal de puesta a tierra del equipo” junto a las zapatas después de la instalación. Coloque la etiqueta de valores de par de apriete en la caja junto a las zapatas de tierra. Remarque :Lorsqu’elle est utilisée comme m.à.l.t. de l’appareil, placer l’étiquette « Borne de m.à.l.t. de l’appareil » près des cosses après l’installation. Fixer l'étiquette de couple de serrage sur le boîtier adjacent aux cosses de m.à.l.t. PKOGTH150 Torque label Etiqueta de par de apriete Étiquette de couple Ground label Etiqueta de puesta a tierra Étiquette de m.à.l.t. 0.193 dia. hole / Agujero de 0,193 pulg (4,9 mm) de diá. Trou de 0,193 po (4,9 mm) de diam. 0.278 dia hole Agujero de 0,278 pulg (7,1 mm) de diá. Trou de 0,278 po (7,1 mm) de diam. Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale Revision Date: 5/2021 Page 1 of 6 1.Contract Terms These Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale (“Conditions of Sale”) shall apply to any purchase or procurement of Products or Services by the legal entity procuring such Products or Services (“Purchaser”) from the legal entity of the Schneider Electric division that provided the proposal or is selling the Products and Services (“SE”). To the extent that there is a conflict between these Conditions of Sale and a valid signed master agreement between the Purchaser and SE, the specific conflicting terms of the master agreement shall prevail. To the extent that there is a conflict between these Conditions of Sale and another set of SE terms and conditions issued to the Purchaser as part of the proposal or quotation process, the specific conflicting terms of the proposal or quotation document shall prevail. Any other variation from these Conditions of Sale shall require the signed consent of an authorized SE representative. 2.Prices Unless otherwise stated in an applicable quotation or proposal, all prices are subject to change without notice. In the event of a net price change and unless otherwise agreed to in writing, prices for orders scheduled for immediate release shall be those in effect at time of order entry. Prices for orders placed for future shipment without an agreed price and ship date will be billed at the pricing in effect as of the shipment date. All clerical errors are subject to correction. Services Assumptions: SE’s work estimates are based on work performed during normal work hours (8 hours) between the hours of 06:00 and 18:00 local time, Monday to Friday, holidays excepted. Unless specified in writing the following are chargeable in addition to base rates: overtime or premium hours, travel costs, specialized tools and test goods, utility shutdowns, any delays or site issues not caused by SE, additional trips for postponement or delay. No on-site orientation, safety training, work required for site specific requirements is included in a quotation unless expressly specified by SE. Current rates are in SE’s then current SE Field Services Demand Labor Rates document. Field specialists bill a 4-hour minimum charge for travel where Services are performed in less than 4 hours, and an 8-hour minimum charge for Services otherwise. 3.Taxes Unless otherwise set out in SE’s proposal or quotation, prices do not include taxes, duties or any other governmental levies, all of which are payable by Purchaser. Except as may be otherwise provided in the relevant Purchase Order, the price excludes all present or future sales taxes, revenue or excise taxes, value-added taxes, import and export duties and any other taxes, surcharges or duties now existing or hereafter imposed by governmental authorities upon equipment and/or services quoted by SE. The Purchaser shall be responsible for all such taxes, duties and charges resulting from these Conditions of Sale or any associated purchase. SE is required to impose taxes on orders and shall invoice the Purchaser for such taxes and/or fees according to applicable law, statutes, or regulations, unless SE furnishes the Purchaser at the time of order with a properly completed exemption certificate(s) acceptable to the authorities imposing the tax or fees. Any changes in foreign exchange rates, sales taxes, customs tariffs or other taxes shall be chargeable to the Purchaser. 4.Terms of payment Terms are net 30 days from date of invoice. Late payments will be subject to interest charges at the rate of two percent (2%) per month. Invoices for pro-rata payments become due on the date of shipment. If at Purchaser’s request, shipments are delayed beyond the scheduled date, payments for the Products and Services completed to date will be invoiced to the Purchaser, as a percentage of the total Purchase Order price when SE was originally prepared to ship. Products held for the Purchaser shall be at the risk and expense of the Purchaser. If completion of Services is delayed more than 30 days after originally scheduled delivery date and not caused solely by SE, SE reserves the right to ship all Products to the Purchaser who will accept responsibility for Products including payment. Failure to pay any applicable payment on its due date shall automatically cause all installment amounts to become payable and in addition to SE’s other lawful remedies, SE reserves the right to suspend or cancel the PO. If Purchaser fails to pay SE for the Products and Services, SE reserves the right to file in its sole discretion any liens, charges, security interests, or similar encumbrances against the applicable property, building, land, or Products and Services and Purchaser consents to such filings and registrations. 5.Delivery and Schedule Dates for delivery, schedule, or execution for Services or Products set out on a Purchase Order are subject to confirmation by SE and until such confirmation may change solely based on SE’s circumstances. All confirmed dates are based on the prompt receipt by SE of all required information enabling achievement of such dates and SE reserves the right to change such dates in the event additional information is necessary or other information was not provided. DISCLAIMER: The Purchaser acknowledges that the Products or part thereof are produced in, or otherwise sourced from, or will be installed in areas already affected by, or that may be affected in the future by, the prevailing COVID-19 epidemics/pandemic and that the situation may trigger stoppage, hindrance or delays in SE’s (or its subcontractors) capacity to produce, deliver, install or service the products, irrespective of whether such stoppage, hindrance or delays are due to measures imposed by authorities or deliberately implemented by SE (or its subcontractors) as preventive or curative measures to avoid harmful contamination exposure of SE’s (or its subcontractors’) employees. The Purchaser therefore recognizes that such circumstances shall be considered as a cause for excusable delay not exposing SE to Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale Revision Date: 5/2021 Page 2 of 6 contractual sanctions including without limitation, delay penalties, liquidated or other damages or termination for default. 6.Risk of loss Unless otherwise specifically agreed by the Parties, the Products are delivered Ex Works (Incoterms 2010) and the risk of loss or damage shall pass to the Purchaser upon collection of the Products by the first carrier at SE’s premises, plants or warehouses. Delivery of Products by SE will be deemed to be made to the Purchaser upon obtaining a signed receipt from the carrier showing receipt of the Products in good order. Title passes on full payment. 7.Substitutions SE may furnish suitable substitutes for Products unobtainable because of priorities or regulations established by governmental authority or non-availability of materials from suppliers, provided such substitutions do not adversely affect the technical soundness of the Products. SE assumes no liability for deviation from published dimensions and descriptive information not essential to proper performance of the Products. 8.Shortage Claims for shortages or errors must be submitted to SE within 30 days after invoice date, and failure to give such notice shall constitute unqualified acceptance and a waiver of all such claims by the Purchaser. 9.Installments SE reserves the right to make shipments in installments, unless otherwise expressly stipulated in a specific Purchase Order; and all such installments when separately invoiced shall be paid for when due per invoice without regard to subsequent shipments. Delay in shipment of any installment shall not relieve Purchaser of its obligation to accept remaining shipments. 10.Force Majeure SE will be excused from and not be liable for any non-performance of a Purchase Order if such delay or non- performance is due to any cause beyond the reasonable control of SE, or which SE could not reasonably foresee or reasonably provide against, and which prevents SE from carrying out the terms of the Purchase Order. This includes but is not limited to the following: pandemic, war, revolution, insurrection or hostilities (whether declared or not), riot, economic upheaval, civil commotion or uprising, flood, earthquake, tempest, hurricane, lightning or other natural disaster; fire or explosion; strike, lockout, or other industrial disturbance whether at SE or one of its suppliers; sabotage, accident, cyber attack, embargo, car shortage, wrecks or delays in transportation, non-delivery of materials or order or action of government authority. Any delay resulting from such cause shall extend the date of delivery accordingly. SE reserves the right to cancel a Purchase Order, if in its opinion such circumstances threaten or cause extended delay in the performance thereof. 11.Purchaser’s Cybersecurity Obligations Purchaser’s Obligations for Its Systems: Purchaser is solely responsible for the implementation and maintenance of a comprehensive security program (“Security Program”) that contains reasonable and appropriate security measures and safeguards to protect its computer network, systems, machines, and data (collectively, “Systems”), including those Systems on which it runs the Products or which it uses with the Services, against Cyber Threats. “Cyber Threat” means any circumstance or event with the potential to adversely impact, compromise, damage, or disrupt Purchaser’s Systems or that may result in any unauthorized access, acquisition, loss, misuse, destruction, disclosure, and/or modification of Purchaser’s Systems, including any data, including through malware, hacking, or similar attacks. Without limiting the foregoing, Purchaser shall at a minimum: (a)have qualified and experienced personnel with appropriate expertise in cybersecurity maintain Purchaser’s Security Program, and have such personnel regularly monitor cyber intelligence feeds and security advisories applicable to Purchaser’s Systems or Purchaser’s industry; (b)promptly update or patch its Systems or implement other appropriate measures based on any reported Cyber Threats and in compliance with any security notifications or bulletins, whether publicly disclosed on SE’s security notification webpage at https://www.se.com/ww/en/work/support/cybersecurity/security-notifications.jsp or otherwise provided to Purchaser; (c) regularly monitor its Systems for possible Cyber Threats; (d)regularly conduct vulnerability scanning, penetration testing, intrusion scanning, and other cybersecurity testing on its Systems; and (e)meet the recommendations of SE’s Recommended Cybersecurity Best Practices, available at https://www.se.com/us/en/download/document/7EN52-0390/, as may be updated by SE from time to time, and then-current industry standards. Purchaser’s Use of the Products, Software, and Services: SE may release Updates and Patches for its Products, Software, and Services from time to time. Purchaser shall promptly install any Updates and Patches for such Products, Software, or Services as soon as they are available in accordance with SE’s installation instructions and using the latest version of the Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale Revision Date: 5/2021 Page 3 of 6 Products or Software, where applicable. An "Update" means any software that contains a correction of errors in a Product, Software, or Service and/or minor enhancements or improvements for a Product, Software, or Service, but does not contain significant new features. A “Patch” is an Update that fixes a vulnerability in a Product, Software, or Service. Purchaser understands that failing to promptly and properly install Updates or Patches for the Products, Software, or Services may result in the Products, Software, or Services or Purchaser’s Systems becoming vulnerable to certain Cyber Threats or result in impaired functionality, and SE shall not be liable or responsible for any losses or damages that may result. Identification of Cyber Threats: If Purchaser identifies or otherwise becomes aware of any vulnerabilities or other Cyber Threats relating to the Products, Software, or Services for which SE has not released a Patch, Purchaser shall promptly notify SE of such vulnerability or other Cyber Threat(s) via the SE Report a Vulnerability page (https://www.se.com/ww/en/work/support/cybersecurity/report-a-vulnerability.jsp#Customers) and further provide SE with any reasonably requested information relating to such vulnerability (collectively, “Feedback”). SE shall have a non-exclusive, perpetual and irrevocable right to use, display, reproduce, modify, and distribute the Feedback (including any confidential information or intellectual property contained therein) in whole or part, including to analyze and fix the vulnerability, to create Patches or Updates for its customers, and to otherwise modify its Products, Software, or Services, in any manner without restrictions, and without any obligation of attribution or compensation to Purchaser; provided, however, SE shall not publicly disclose Purchaser’s name in connection with such use or the Feedback (unless Purchaser consents otherwise). By submitting Feedback, Purchaser represents and warrants to SE that Purchaser has all necessary rights in and to such Feedback and all information it contains, including to grant the rights to SE described herein, and that such Feedback does not infringe any proprietary or other rights of third parties or contain any unlawful information. 12.Standard Warranty SE warrants: (a)Products manufactured by SE under its own brands and supplied by SE as part of the Purchase Order, if any, against defects in material and workmanship of those Products arising under normal use for a period of 12 months from the date of commissioning or 18 months from the date of shipment from SE, whichever occurs first. (b)Services performed by SE’s personnel as part of the Purchase Order, if any, will be performed by qualified personnel with care, skill and diligence, in accordance with the applicable generally accepted standards recognized by the industry for a period of 12 months from the date of invoice. (c)Software provided with the Products will perform its essential functions during the warranty period applicable to the Products. Exclusive Warranty Remedies: In the event of any warranty covered defects or deficiencies in Products in subsections (a) above, or Services in subs. (b) above, or Software in subs. (c) above, the sole and exclusive obligation of SE shall be to re-perform the Services, or repair or replace the defective Products or part of the Products, or provide an update to the Software to correct the non-conformance or replace the Software with the latest available version containing a correction, at SE’s sole discretion. SE shall have no other obligation to provide updates or revisions. The foregoing warranty coverage is contingent on Purchaser providing prompt notification to SE once such defect or deficiency is reasonably apparent to Purchaser. Exclusions & Limitations: This warranty shall not apply (a) to Products or Software not manufactured by SE, (b) Services not provided directly by SE, (c) to Products, Software or Services that has been repaired or altered by anyone other than SE so as, in SE’s judgment, affects the same adversely, (d) Seller’s conformance with Buyer’s design of the Products, Software, or Services; or (e) to Products, Software or Services that appear to be subjected to negligence, accident, or damage by circumstances beyond SE’s control, or improper any non-SE operation, maintenance or storage, or to other than normal use or service. The foregoing warranties do not cover reimbursement for labor, transportation, removal, installation, temporary power, or any other expenses that may be incurred in connection with repair or replacement. THESE WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS, AND EXCLUSIONS ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND GUARANTEES (EXCEPT WARRANTIES OF TITLE), INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED, TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SE MAKES NO WARRANTY THAT THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL MEET PURCHASER’S REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT PURCHASER’S USE OF THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED, SECURE, OR ERROR-FREE. SE DOES NOT REPRESENT, WARRANT, OR GUARANTEE THAT THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL BE SECURE OR FREE FROM VULNERABILITIES, CORRUPTION, ATTACK, VIRUSES, INTERFERENCE, HACKING, OR OTHER SECURITY INTRUSIONS OR CYBER THREATS, AND SE DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY IN RELATION THERETO. EXCEPT AS MAY BE PROVIDED IN WRITING BY SE, SE SHALL NOT BE SUBJECT TO ANY OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES WHATSOEVER THAN AS STATED ABOVE WITH REGARD TO PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE AND SERVICES SOLD BY SE TO PURCHASER. BY USING THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE OR SERVICES, PURCHASER UNDERSTANDS THESE LIMITATIONS AND AGREES THAT PURCHASER ACCESSES AND USES THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE AND SERVICES AT PURCHASER’S OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND THAT PURCHASER WILL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES TO PURCHASER’S SYSTEMS OR ASSETS OR LOSSES THAT RESULT FROM SUCH ACCESS OR USE. Non-SE Products, Software or Services: With respect to Products or Software not manufactured by SE, or Services Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale Revision Date: 5/2021 Page 4 of 6 provided by non-SE providers, the warranty obligations of SE shall in all respects conform and be limited to the warranty actually extended to SE by such non-SE supplier. 13.Return of Products No Products may be returned without first obtaining SE’s written permission and a returned material identification tag. Returned Products must be of current manufacture, in the original packaging, unused, undamaged and in saleable condition. Returned Products must be securely packed to reach SE without damage and labeled with the return authorization number. For any returns, SE will be pay the carrier and deduct the freight charges from the credit unless if returns result from SE error, freight charges will be paid by SE. Any cost incurred by SE to put Products in first class condition will be charged to the Purchaser. Returns must originate from the original Purchaser account number. Returns will be credited at the original price paid as indicated on the invoice or Purchase Order associated to the Products being returned as provided by the Purchaser. If no invoice number or Purchase Order number is provided, then credit will be issued based on the into stock price in effect 12 months prior to date of return authorization and will also have an additional 25% processing fee applied. SE Products, which are listed in the current product list as returnable and which are accepted for credit, not involving a SE error, shall be assessed a restocking fee of 25% of the invoice price. 14.Intellectual Property SE retains ownership of all right, title and interest (including copyright and patent rights) in and to the intellectual property relating to Products and Services and work product relating to these. Nothing in these Conditions of Sale constitutes a transfer or conveyance of any right, title or interest in such intellectual property, including without limitation any software or firmware contained in those, except the limited right to use it as provided in the documentation. As to Products proposed and furnished by SE, SE shall defend any suit or proceeding brought against Purchaser so far as based on a claim that such Products constitute an infringement of any copyright, trademark or patent in the United States or Canada. This obligation shall be effective only if Purchaser shall have made all payments then due hereunder and if SE is notified promptly in writing and given authority, information, and assistance at SE's expense for the defense of the same. In the event the use of such Products by Purchaser is enjoined in such a suit, SE shall, at its expense, and at its sole option, either (a) procure for the Purchaser the right to continue using such Products (b) modify such Products to render them non-infringing, or (c) replace such Products with non-infringing Products. SE will not be responsible for any compromise or settlement made without its written consent. The foregoing states the entire liability of SE for patent, trademark or copyright infringement, and in no event shall SE be liable if any infringement charge is based on the use of SE Products for a purpose other than that for which it was sold by SE. As to any Products or Services furnished by SE to Purchaser and manufactured or provided in accordance with designs proposed by Purchaser, the Purchaser shall indemnify SE against any award made against SE for patent, trademark, or copyright infringements. 15.Software Any software or computer information, in whatever form, that is provided with Products manufactured by SE or as part of Services (collectively, the “Software”), is licensed to Purchaser solely pursuant to standard licenses of SE or its supplier of such Software, which licenses are hereby incorporated by reference and are available upon request. Purchaser shall not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or apply any process, technique, or procedure or make any attempt to ascertain or derive the source code of any Product, Software or Services. 16.LIMITATION OF LIABILITY NOTWITHSTANDING ANY PROVISION OF THESE CONDITIONS OF SALE OR ANY OTHER CONTRACT DOCUMENT TO THE CONTRARY, IN NO EVENT SHALL EITHER PARTY, ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, AFFILIATES OR EMPLOYEES BE LIABLE FOR ANY FORM OF INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF PRODUCTION, LOSS OF PRODUCT, LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS, OR LOSS OF DATA OR BUSINESS INFORMATION, WHETHER SUCH DAMAGES ARISE IN CONTRACT OR TORT, IRRESPECTIVE OF FAULT, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OR WHETHER SUCH PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THESE CONDITIONS OF SALE OR ANY OTHER CONTRACT DOCUMENT TO THE CONTRARY, AND TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE MAXIMUM LIABILITY OF SE FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNTS ACTUALLY PAID BY PURCHASER TO SE FOR THE PRODUCT OR SERVICE GIVING RISE TO A CLAIM. 17.Indemnification Purchaser agrees to indemnify, defend, and hold harmless SE from and against any and all claims, lawsuits, demands, actions, or other proceedings brought against it by any third party due to, arising out of, or related to (a) Purchaser’s use of Products, Software or Services in a manner not permitted by these Conditions of Sale, (b) Purchaser’s failure to comply with Section 11, including Purchaser’s failure maintain a Security Program in compliance with Section 11 or Purchaser’s failure to promptly and properly install Updates and Patches for the Products, Software or Services in accordance with Section 11, (c) Purchaser’s violation of these Conditions of Sale or the master agreement, (d) any information that Purchaser submits, transmits, or makes available to SE, including but not limited to as part of the Feedback, or (e) Purchaser’s violation of any law, regulation, or third party rights. Purchaser shall pay any and all costs, damages, and Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale Revision Date: 5/2021 Page 5 of 6 expenses, including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys' fees and costs awarded against or otherwise incurred by SE in connection with or arising from any such claim, lawsuit, action, demand, or other proceeding. SE, at its expense, may assume the exclusive defense and control of any matter subject to indemnification by Purchaser, in which event Purchaser agrees to cooperate with SE in asserting any available defenses. 18.Insurance SE shall maintain reasonable insurance coverage (e.g., commercial general liability, worker’s compensation, automobile) in such amounts as SE deems appropriate in accordance with industry practice. Certificate of insurance evidencing this may be provided on request. 19.Import and Export The Products and Services provided by SE under these Conditions of Sale contain or may contain components and/or technologies from the United States of America (“US”), the European Union (“EU”) and/or other nations. Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that the Products, assignment and/or usage of the Products, Software, Services, information, other deliverables and/or the embedded technologies (hereinafter referred to as “Deliverables”) under these Conditions of Sale shall fully comply with related applicable US, EU and other national and international export control laws and/or regulations. Unless applicable export license/s has been obtained from the relevant authority and SE has approved, the Deliverables shall not (i) be exported and/or re-exported to any destination and party (may include but not limited to an individual, group and/or legal entity) restricted by the applicable export control laws and/or regulations; or (ii) be used for those purposes and fields restricted by the applicable export control laws and/or regulations. Purchaser also agrees that the Deliverables will not be used either directly or indirectly in any rocket systems or unmanned air vehicles; nor be used in any nuclear weapons delivery systems; and will not be used in any design, development, production or use for any weapons which may include but not limited to chemical, biological or nuclear weapons. If any necessary or advisable licenses, authorizations or approvals are not obtained, whether arising from inaction by any relevant government authority or otherwise, or if any such licenses, authorizations or approvals are denied or revoked, or if the applicable export control laws and/or regulations would prohibit SE from fulfilling any order, or would in SE’s judgment otherwise expose SE to a risk of liability under the applicable export control laws and/or regulations if it fulfilled the order, SE shall be excused from all obligations under such order and/or these Conditions of Sale. 20.Health and Safety Compliance SE employees shall not perform Services that, in their sole opinion, are not free of reasonably foreseeable harm. This includes working on any equipment, whether provided by SE, Purchaser or otherwise, that in such SE employees’ sole opinion has not been placed in an electrically safe working condition. Purchaser warrants that site and working conditions shall meet or exceed those specified by applicable Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations. Purchaser shall inform SE of: (a) Known hazards, or reasonably foreseeable hazards, that are related to SE’s scope of Services and the site where the Services will be performed; and (b) Information about the worksite necessary to identify hazards and assess risk for the protection of the health and safety of SE personnel. This information might include, but is not limited to: (i) Providing an accurate up-to-date single line diagram of the electrical distribution system; (ii) Providing relevant Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) information such as Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and floor plans indicating areas where hazardous materials are located and emergency exits for service rooms and other areas of operation; and (iii) Other site specific information relative to the Purchaser’s operation, process and safety systems. Any hazardous materials requiring remediation in SE’s sole opinion will be separately chargeable to Purchaser and will be a condition precedent to SE’s performance of such Services. 21.Witness of Tests & Factory Inspections Normal production schedules do not provide the opportunity for Purchaser to witness routine factory tests on Products or make factory inspections. Witnessing of tests or factory inspections by the Purchaser may result in delays of production for which SE will not be responsible and which may result in additional charges and delayed scheduling to Purchaser. Witness testing and factory inspections must be requested at time of quotation, are subject to additional costs and must be confirmed at Purchase Order entry. Standard SE factory testing and inspection will apply. SE will notify Purchaser fourteen (14) calendar days prior to scheduled witness testing or inspection. In the event Purchaser is unable to attend, the Parties may mutually agree on a rescheduled date. However, SE, at its sole option, may consider the witness tests or inspection waived, and ship and invoice the Products and the witness testing charges. Purchaser will be responsible for paying for all scheduled witness testing, whether or not Purchaser attends. 22.Patterns and Tools Notice will be given if special patterns or tools are required to complete any Purchase Order. Charges for such patterns or tools do not convey title thereto or the right to remove them from SE's plant. If patterns or tools are not used for a period of two years, SE shall have the right to scrap them without notice. 23.Nuclear Applications Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale Revision Date: 5/2021 Page 6 of 6 Unless otherwise agreed in writing by a duly authorized representative of SE, Products sold hereunder are not intended for use in or in connection with any nuclear facility or activity. Purchaser hereby represents and warrants that such Products shall not be used in or in connection with any nuclear facility or activity. If so used, SE disclaims all liability for any damage, injury or contamination; and Purchaser agrees and indemnifies SE against any such liability, whether arising as a result of breach of contract, warranty or tort (including negligence) or otherwise. 24.Nature of Relationship Purchaser agrees that SE is an independent contractor and nothing in these Conditions of Sales creates between SE and Purchaser a relationship of partners, joint venturers, or agents of each other, and no Party may so represent itself any of these manners. 25.Termination Any Purchase Order may be terminated by the Purchaser only upon 30 days’ notice to SE and upon payment of reasonable and proper termination charges based on the price of the terminated Purchase Order and reimbursement of all costs and expenses associated with the order caused by such termination and shall include a reasonable profit. Special or custom ordered Products is not cancelable after final acceptance OR approval OF drawings for the commencement of manufacturing. 26.Cancellation SE shall have the right to cancel any Purchase Order at any time by written notice for any material breach of these Conditions of Sale by the Purchaser, including material delays by Purchaser or its authorized representatives in releasing Products for manufacture or approval drawings and excessive changes to specifications or drawings. 27.Amendments No amendment, supplement, modification, waiver or termination of the Purchase Order or these Conditions of Sale is binding unless executed in writing by both Parties. 28.Antibribery and Corruption 28.1 Purchaser acknowledges that SE is committed to eliminating all risk of bribery and corruption, influence peddling, money laundering and tax evasion or the facilitation thereof in its business activities. Purchaser must immediately notify SE of any suspected, or known, breaches of Anti-Corruption Law. Purchaser may raise this alert through their point of contact or through the Trust Line: https://secure.ethicspoint.eu/domain/media/en/gui/104677/index.html. 28.2 None of Purchaser’s employees, beneficial owners, shareholders, or any other person who is involved in or will benefit from the performance of the Contract or has an interest in Purchaser: (a) is a civil servant, public or governmental official; (b) is an official or employee of SE or one of its affiliates; or (c) has been convicted of, or otherwise been subjected to any administrative sanction or penalty for, any offence involving fraud, bribery, corruption, influence peddling, money laundering, or any other criminal offence involving dishonesty as an element. Buyer will immediately notify SE if any such individuals are the subject of any investigation into any such offenses. 28.3 Purchaser undertakes and covenants to SE that it shall not, alone or in conjunction with any other person, directly or indirectly, offer, pay, give, promise to pay or give, or authorize the payment or giving of any money, gift, undue advantage, or anything of value to any employee, official or authorized representatives of SE. 29.Applicable Laws All matters arising out of or relating to the execution, construction, interpretation or breach thereof, are to be governed by the laws of the state of Delaware, USA without regard to the conflict of law provisions thereof. The Parties agree that the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods does not apply to these Conditions of Sale. Page 1 of 4 SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC STANDARD LIMITED WARRANTY The Schneider Electric Standard Limited Warranty applies to the following products: · [Product Names] Geographic Validity: · [List of countries] Length of Warranty: · 5 Years, unless local law requires a longer period in which case it will be that period of time “Schneider Electric” means the local legal entity of Schneider Electric that you purchased directly or indirectly the products from. “Product” means the Schneider Electric or related branded inverter product that you purchased from Schneider or through an unauthorized reseller or retailer. 1. Warranty Claims This limited warranty is provided by Schneider Electric and covers defects in workmanship and materials in your product. This warranty period lasts from the date of purchase at the point of sale to you, the original end user, unless otherwise agreed in writing (the "Warranty Period"). This Limited Warranty is transferable to subsequent owners but only for the unexpired portion of the Warranty Period. 2. Warranty Coverage If a product becomes defective within the Schneider Electric limited warranty period, one of the following options, as selected by Schneider Electric, will be performed at no charge for materials or labor costs, unless this should be impossible or disproportionate. It is mandatory that customer notify Schneider Electric of the product defect within the warranty period, and provided that Schneider Electric through inspection establishes the existence of such a defect and that it is covered by this limited warranty: · Repairing the inverter onsite, · Repairing the inverter at Schneider Electric, · Exchange for a Replacement Product (of equivalent value according to model and age) Alternatively, at Schneider Electric's sole discretion, cash compensation equal to the inverter’s residual value may be offered. The term “disproportionate” applies in particular if the costs to Schneider Electric were deemed unreasonable according to the following criteria: · With reference to the value the product would have without the defect · Taking into account the significance of the defect, and · After consideration of alternative workaround possibilities available to the customer without significant inconvenience If Schneider Electric repairs or replaces a product, its warranty continues for the remaining portion of the original Warranty Period or 90 days from the date of the return shipment to the customer whichever is greater. All replaced products and all parts removed from repaired products become the property of Schneider Electric. Page 2 of 4 3. Warranty Limitations This Limited Warranty does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of the product or cover normal wear and tear of the product or costs related to the removal, installation, or troubleshooting of the customer's electrical systems. The warranty claims that relate to defects caused by any of the following factors are not covered by the Limited Warranty: · Improper Use or Non-compliance with installation, commissioning, operation or maintenance instructions (i.e. not according to the operation & installation manual) · Unauthorized modifications, changes or attempted repairs, · Vandalism, destruction through external influence and/or persons/animals · Use in an unsuitable environment, including any environment or location that causes excessive wear and tear or dirt or dust or debris buildup within the system or that is difficult or unsafe for Schneider Electric representatives to access · Insufficient ventilation · Installation in a corrosive environment · Failure to observe applicable safety standards & regulations · Damages during transportation or storage · Force majeure, examples include, but not limited to: fire, flood, earthquakes, storm damage, overvoltage & lightning strikes · Any fire, water, snow, moisture, or liquid ingress · Used as a component part of a product expressly warranted by another manufacturer · If the original identification (trade-mark, serial number) markings have been defaced, altered, or removed · Consumable components of any type are not covered, including but not limited to fans, fuses and filters etc. · Cosmetic shortcoming which do not impair the use of the product for the intended purpose i.e. supply of energy Warranty claims also exclude: · Damages arising due to the fact that the use of the product for the intended purpose is no longer possible or only possible with restrictions as a result of amendments to the statutory provisions applicable to the operation of the product made after the delivery of the product · Compensation for damages related to loss of power production or any expenses incurred by customer towards repair & replacement of the inverter (including but not limited to labor, transportation, temporary power) · Cost arising from changes to existing PV systems or building installations and like 4. Warranty Return and Repair Process Contact Schneider Electric Customer Service representative with brief description of the error to evaluate & troubleshoot the issue while inverter is in the field as many problems can be solved on site. Please contact your Local Schneider Electric Customer Service Center or visit our website at: http://www.schneider-electric.com/sites/corporate/en/support/operations/local-operations/local-operations.page i. Return Material Authorization (RMA) After attempts to correct the problem with customer’s assistance, if the product has to be returned to Schneider Electric for repair, the customer must obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number and the correct factory "Ship To" address. Product shipments will be refused and returned at your expense if they are unauthorized or returned without an RMA number clearly marked on the outside of the shipping box or if they are shipped collect or if they are shipped to the wrong location. When you contact Schneider Electric to obtain service, please have your instruction manual ready for reference and be prepared to supply: · The serial number and product code of your product · Information about the installation or inspection certificate · Information about the failure and/or reason for the return · A copy of your dated proof of purchase Schneider Electric reserves the right to refuse exchange requests for lack of proper documentation and information. ii. Once the RMA has been issued Page 3 of 4 Schneider Electric will generally ship an equivalent replacement inverter to the specified customer or the distributor location within 48- 72 hours. Standard ground shipping costs are covered by Schneider Electric both ways. Any expedited shipping costs will be the responsibility of the customer and billed accordingly. An allegedly defective inverter must be returned to Schneider Electric in the same transport packaging that the replacement unit was provided in. Schneider Electric will supply all labels and documentation for the return of the defective Inverter. The defective inverter must be shipped back to Schneider Electric within 10 working days after receiving the replacement inverter. If we do not receive the inverter within this timeframe, the unit cost will be billed back to the customer (including shipping and handling fees). Visually evident damage caused by shipping or mishandling is to be reported to the freight carrier within 24 hours. Shipping damage is the responsibility of the freight carrier, not Schneider Electric, and should always be duly noted with the freight carrier prior to accepting and signing for the product Any products that are damaged during the returned shipping process are not covered by this warranty. Schneider Electric assumes no liability for this damage. 5. Service Reimbursement A qualified installer must be available for the inverter replacement and re-commissioning. Schneider Electric offers a service reimbursement amount of €150* per qualifying RMA and additional €30* for each extra inverter that is replaced at the same time and in the same installation. Payment will be made only once replaced unit is received by Schneider Electric. 6. Invalid Warranty Claim If the returned defective Inverter to Schneider Electric pursuant to this Policy, and is found by Schneider Electric to be free of defects that would qualify it for replacement under this Policy, Schneider Electric will charge a flat-rate inspection charge for each Inverter of €100*, plus shipping and packaging costs. 7. Out of Warranty Service If the warranty period for your product has expired, if the unit was damaged by misuse or incorrect installation, if other conditions of the warranty have not been met, or if no dated proof of purchase is available, your unit may be serviced or replaced for a flat fee, as determined by Schneider Electric in its sole discretion. To return your product for out of warranty service, contact Schneider Electric Customer Service for a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number and follow the other steps outlined in "Return Procedure". Payment options such as credit card or money order will be explained by the Customer Service Representative. In cases where the minimum flat fee does not apply, as with incomplete units or units with excessive damage, an additional fee will be charged. If applicable, you will be contacted by Customer Service once your unit has been received. (*): or equivalent in local currency at the sole discretion of Schneider Electric Page 4 of 4 8. Disclaimer Product THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC PRODUCT AND IS, WHERE PERMITTED BY LAW, IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS, GUARANTEES, REPRESENTATIONS, OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH THE PRODUCT, HOWEVER ARISING (WHETHER BY CONTRACT, TORT, NEGLIGENCE, PRINCIPLES OF MANUFACTURER'S LIABILITY, OPERATION OF LAW, CONDUCT, STATEMENT OR OTHERWISE), INCLUDING WITHOUT RESTRICTION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF QUALITY, MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW TO APPLY TO THE PRODUCT SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE PERIOD STIPULATED UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IN NO EVENT WILL SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC BE LIABLE FOR: (A) ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS, LOST REVENUES, FAILURE TO REALIZE EXPECTED SAVINGS, OR OTHER COMMERCIAL OR ECONOMIC LOSSES OF ANY KIND, EVEN IF SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC HAS BEEN ADVISED, OR HAD REASON TO KNOW, OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE; (B) ANY LIABILITY ARISING IN TORT, WHETHER OR NOT ARISING OUT OF SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 'S NEGLIGENCE, AND ALL LOSSES OR DAMAGES TO ANY PROPERTY OR FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY OR ECONOMIC LOSS OR DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE CONNECTION OF A PRODUCT TO ANY OTHER PRODUCT OR SYSTEM; AND (C) ANY DAMAGE OR INJURY ARISING FROM OR AS A RESULT OF MISUSE OR ABUSE, OR THE INCORRECT INSTALLATION, INTEGRATION OR OPERATION OF THE PRODUCT BY PERSONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY WHERE APPLICABLE LAW ALLOWS AND DOES NOT PROHIBIT OR LIMIT, SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC’S LIABILITY FOR ANYTHING RELATING TO THIS PRODUCT, EXCLUDING LIABILITY FOR BODILY INJURY OR DEATH SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. IF APPLICABLE LAW DOES NOT ALLOW AN EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, LIMITATION OF LIABILITY, ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, OR ON THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION(S) OR EXCLUSION(S) WILL ONLY APPLY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH WILL VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. FML4W Low Profile LED Wraparound LINEAR LED FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS INTENDED USE The FML4W wide housing LED wrap was designed with the renovator in mind. While compatible with new construction, it’s no mystery the flexibility of the FML4W will keep renovation simple. A wider housing easily covers up existing blemishes from older fixtures, while the option to adjust lumens grants the perfect amount of light to any room. This is capped off by two dimming options; standard 0-10v dimming and for easy install, triac dimming. Triac dimming is connected straight through line voltage for easy dimming compatibility, especially in renovation or retrofit projects. All this means the FML4W shines in closets, foyers, hallways, laundry rooms, bedrooms, offices, utility work areas, and more. CONSTRUCTION The LED wrap is constructed of a metal housing with decorative plastic end caps. The white polycarbonate diffuser provides even illumination and softens the appearance of the LEDs for a uniform appearance from below the ceiling. OPTICS Triac Dimming (TD): Wrap is 5,000 lumens at 120V only. ALO6: Wraps are switchable between 4,000, 5,000, and 6,000 lumens (MVOLT). ZT: Wraps produce 5,000 lumens (MVOLT). All versions are rated for 60,000 hours life. Thermal formed diffuser is of highly transmissive material to minimize lamp image and provides high- angle brightness control. One piece contemporary design wrap around diffuser soften appearance for improved aesthetics. ELECTRICAL Long-life LEDs, coupled with a high-efficiency driver, provide extended service life. FML4W is rated to deliver L85 performance at 60,000 hours. Fixture operates at 120 OR 120/277 volts, 60Hz. ZT MVOLT (120/277v) version has 0-10V dimming driver, dims to 10%. Triac Dimming (120V) allows dimming of the fixture through line voltage. Fixture mounts to recessed junction box, electrical connections must be made inside junction box. LISTINGS CSA certified to US and Canadian standards. Listed for damp locations. DesignLights Consortium® (DLC) qualified product. Not all versions of this product may be DLC qualified. Please check the DLC Qualified Products List at www.designlights.org/QPL to confirm which versions are qualified WARRANTY 5-year limited warranty. Complete warranty terms located at: www.acuitybrands.com/support/warranty/terms-and-conditions NOTE: Actual performance may differ as a result of end-user environment and application. All values are design or typical values, measured under laboratory conditions at 25 °C. Specifications subject to change without notice. Catalog Number Notes Type Replacement parts RK3FML4W LENS White polycarbonate diffuser Specifications Width: 10 (25.4) Length: 47 7/8 (121.6) Depth: 3 (7.62) Weight: 6.6 lb 2.99kg All dimensions are inches (centimeters) unless otherwise indicated. COMMERCIAL INDOOR FML4W Looking for Contractor Select readily available configurations? Click here to visit Contractor Select™ spec sheet or go to www.contractorselect.com Low Profile LED Wraparound LINEAR LE Catalog Number CRI Nominal Lumens Color Temperature Dimming Voltage Watts FML4W 48 5000LM 835 ZT MVOLT >80 5000 3500K 0-10V 120-277V 53.4 FML4W 48 5000LM 840 ZT MVOLT >80 5000 4000K 0-10V 120-277V 53.4 FML4W 48 ALO6 SEF 835 MVOLT >80 4000, 5000, 6000 3500K 0-10V*120-277V 49 FML4W 48 ALO6 SEF 840 MVOLT >80 4000, 5000, 6000 4000K 0-10V*120-277V 49 FML4W 48 5000LM 840 TD >80 5000 4000K Triac Dimming 120V 53.4 Note: *When using 0-10v dimming with ALO options it is recommended to set the ALO to the MAX output. 23.9 4.6 5.0 22.3 20.9 FML4W 48 ALO6 SEF 840 MVOLT A FML4W LED Linear Flush Mount PHOTOMETRICS FML4W 48 5000LM 840 TD: 5113 Lumens FML4W 48 5000LM 840 ZT MVOLT: 5089 Lumens FML4W 48 ALO6 SEF 840 MVOL: 5874 Lumens For ALO6 configurations FML4W COMMERCIAL INDOOR: One Lithonia Way, Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800-748-5070 www.acuitybrands.com © 2020 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 11/09/20 Recommended Dimmers (Triac Dimming): This list of dimmers does not imply any guarantee or warranty of compatibility within a given application. Dimmers not listed do not imply non-compatibility. Manufacturer Part Number (s) Leviton 6672 Leviton DSL06 Lutron AYCL-153P Lutron CTCL-150H Lutron DVCL-153P Lutron PD-5NE Catalog Number Notes Type Page 1 of 3 Vapor Tight LED Strip Light CSVT FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS INTENDED USE — Ideal for damp/wet locations such as outdoor venues, canopies and locker rooms. Not for use or installation in direct outdoor sunlight. Must be installed under canopy or covered ceiling. For direct sunlight installations, please refer to the FEX product family. Certain airborne contaminants can diminish integrity of acrylic and/or polycarbonate. Click here for Acrylic-Polycarbonate Compatibility table for suitable uses. Certain airborne contaminants may adversely affect the functioning of LEDs and other electronic components, depending on various factors such as concentrations of the contaminants, ventilation, and temperature at the end-user location. Click here for a list of substances that may not be suitable for interaction with LEDs and other electronic components. CONSTRUCTION - Light Gray Polycarbonate housing - Frosted Polycarbonate lens - Poured in place polyurethane gasket - Polycarbonate Latches, optional stainless steel latches available. - Standard 1/2" wet location fitting ELECTRICAL - High Efficiency LEDs meet DLC Standard - MVOLT (120-277V) & 347V - 0-10V Dimming standard Luminaire Surge Protection Level: Designed to withstand up to 2.5kV/0.75kA per ANSI C82.77-5-2015. For applications requiring higher level of protection additional surge protection must be provided. INSTALLATION - Surface (wall, ceiling) using standard brackets - Suspended (chain, cable) using standard brackets LISTINGS - CSA Certified to UL & C-UL Standards for wet location - IP65, IP66 rated per IEC60529 - FCC Title 47, Part 15 Subpart B compliant - 2.5kV/0.75kA Surge Rated per ANSI C82-77-5-2015 - CSA Ambient Listings on Page 3 - Lumen Maintenance Listed on Page 3 DesignLights Consortium® (DLC) qualified product. Not all versions of this product may be DLC qualified. Please check the DLC Qualified Products List at www.designlights.org/QPL to confirm which versions are qualified. WARRANTY — 5-year limited warranty. Complete warranty terms located at: www.acuitybrands.com/support/warranty/terms-and-conditions Note: Actual performance may differ as a result of end-user environment and application. All values are design or typical values, measured under laboratory conditions at 25 °C. Specifications subject to change without notice. INDUSTRIAL CSVT DI M M ABL E TM CSVT L48 ALO3 MVOLT SWW3 80CRI PL Page 2 of 3 CSVT INDUSTRIAL: One Lithonia Way, Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800-705-SERV (7378) techsupport-Industrial@acuitybrands.com www.lithonia.com © 2019-2021 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 06/01/21 CSVT Vapor Tight LED Strip Light Accessories: Order as separate catalog number. CSVT STSL LATCH Stainless steel latch kit (Set of 10) ‡ Series Length Lumen Output Voltage Color temperature Color rendering index Options CSVT Contractor Select Vapor Tight L48 48" 3000LM 3,000 lumens ‡ 4000LM 4,000 lumens ‡ 5000LM 5,000 lumens ‡ 6000LM 6,000 lumens ‡ ALO3 Switchable lumens, 3000LM / 4000LM / 5000LM MVOLT 120-277V 347 347V 35K 3500K ‡ 40K 4000K ‡ 50K 5000K ‡ SWW3 Switchable white, 35K / 40K / 50K 80CRI 80 CRI STSL Stainless steel latches L96 96" 6000LM 6,000 lumens ‡ 8000LM 8,000 lumens ‡ 10000LM 10,000 lumens ‡ 12000LM 12,000 lumens ‡ ALO4 Switable lumens, 6000LM, 8000LM, and 10000LM NOTE: ‡ indicates option chosen has ordering restrictions. Please reference ordering restrictions chart. ORDERING INFORMATION Lead times will vary depending on options selected. Consult with your sales representative.Example: CSVT L48 AL03 MVOLT SWW3 80CRI ‡ Option Value Ordering Restrictions Option value Restriction 35K, 40K, 50K Not available with ALO lumen packages. 3000LM, 4000LM, 5000LM, 6000LM, 8000LM, 10000LM, 10000LM 12000LM Not available with SWW3. CSVT STSL LATCH Requires two for L96 Looking for Contractor Select readily available configurations? Click here to visit Contractor Select™ spec sheet or go to www.contractorselect.com DIMENSIONS All dimensions are shown in inches unless otherwise noted. Length Width Height Length Approximate weight Fixtures per pallet L48 5.4 3.8 50.3 5 lbs 70 L96 5.4 3.8 98.3 10 lbs 70 *Weights will vary slightly with added options. ALO3 MVOLT SWW3 80CRICSVT L48 Page 3 of 3 CSVT INDUSTRIAL: One Lithonia Way, Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800-705-SERV (7378) techsupport-Industrial@acuitybrands.com www.lithonia.com © 2019-2021 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 06/01/21 CSVT Vapor Tight LED Strip Light OPERATIONAL DATA *All values are typical and are at 25C. Actual performance may vary and is dependent on operating environment. PROJECTED LUMEN MAINTENANCE Lumen Maintenance Factor 0.91 0.81 0.75 Operating Hours 40,000 90,000 120,000 *Actual performance may vary based on ambient temperature of installed location. Length Package Voltage Watts 3500 K 4000 K 5000 K Comparable LightsourceLumens LPW Lumens LPW Lumens LPW L48 3000LM MVOLT 24 3033 125 3106 128 3134 129 1-lamp 32W T8, 1-lamp 54W T5H0, 50W HID347 28 108 110 11 4000LM MVOLT 34 4065 119 4163 122 4200 123 2-lamp 32W T8, 1-lamp 54W T5H0, 50W HID347 40 102 105 106 5000LM MVOLT 42 4829 115 4946 118 4989 119 2-lamp 32W T8, 1-lamp 54W T5H0, 70W HID347 49 99 101 102 6000LM MVOLT 49 6066 125 6213 128 6268 129 2-lamp 32W T8, 2-lamp 54W T5H0, 100W HID347 56 42 110 111 ALO3 (3000LM)MVOLT 24 3019 124 3106 128 3141 129 1-lamp 32W T8, 1-lamp 54W T5H0, 50W HID347 28 107 110 111 ALO3 (4000LM)MVOLT 34 4046 118 4163 122 4210 123 2-lamp 32W T8, 1-lamp 54W T5H0, 50W HID347 40 102 105 106 ALO3 (5000LM)MVOLT 42 4806 114 4946 118 5001 119 2-lamp 32W T8, 1-lamp 54W T5H0, 70W HID347 49 98 101 102 L96 6000LM MVOLT 49 6066 125 6213 128 6268 129 2-lamp 32W T8, 2-lamp 54W T5H0, 100W HID347 56 108 110 111 8000LM MVOLT 68 8130 119 8326 122 8400 123 3-lamp 32W T8, 2-lamp 54W T5H0, 100W HID347 80 102 105 106 10000LM MVOLT 84 9658 115 9891 118 9979 119 4-lamp 32W T8, 2-lamp 54W T5H0, 150W HID347 98 99 101 102 12000LM MVOLT 103 12133 118 12425 121 12535 122 4-lamp 32W T8, 3-lamp 54W T5H0, 150W HID347 120 101 104 105 ALO4 (6000LM)MVOLT 49 6038 124 6213 128 6283 129 2-lamp 32W T8, 2-lamp 54W T5H0, 100W HID347 56 107 110 111 ALO4 (8000LM)MVOLT 68 8092 118 8326 122 8420 123 3-lamp 32W T8, 2-lamp 54W T5H0, 100W HID347 80 102 105 106 ALO4 (10000LM)MVOLT 84 9613 114 9891 118 10003 119 4-lamp 32W T8, 2-lamp 54W T5H0, 150W HID347 98 98 101 102 Ambient Temperature Ratings Fixture Length Lumen Package Temperature rating L48 3000LM -40° C - 45° C 4000LM -40° C - 45° C 5000LM -40° C - 45° C 6000LM -40° C - 35° C L96 6000LM -40° C - 30° C 8000LM -40° C - 30° C 10000LM -40° C - 30° C 12000LM -40° C - 30° C Board and Driver Fixture length Lumen package Driver QTY Board QTY L48 3000LM 1 1 4000LM 1 1 5000LM 1 1 6000LM 1 1 ALO3 1 1 L96 6000LM 1 2 8000LM 1 2 10000LM 1 2 12000LM 1 2 ALO4 1 2 READ AND FOLLOW ALL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS! SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS AND DELIVER TO OWNER AFTER INSTALLATION • To reduce the risk of death, personal injury or property damage from fire, electric shock, falling parts, cuts/abrasions, and other hazards please read all warnings and instructions included with and on the fixture box and all fixture labels. • Before installing, servicing, or performing routine maintenance upon this equipment, follow these general precautions. • Installation and service of luminaires should be performed by a qualified licensed electrician. • Maintenance of the luminaires should be performed by person(s) familiar with the luminaires’ construction and operation and any hazards involved. Regular fixture maintenance programs are recommended. • It will occasionally be necessary to clean the outside of the refractor/lens. Frequency of cleaning will depend on ambient dirt level and minimum light output which is acceptable to user. Refractor/lens should be washed in a solution of warm water and any mild, non-abrasive household detergent, rinsed with clean water and wiped dry. Should optical assembly become dirty on the inside, wipe refractor/lens and clean in above manner, replacing damaged gaskets as necessary. • DO NOT INSTALL DAMAGED PRODUCT! This luminaire has been properly packed so that no parts should have been damaged during transit. Inspect to confirm. Any part damaged or broken during or after assembly should be replaced. • Recycle: For information on how to recycle LED electronic products, please visit www.epa.gov. • These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide every possible contingency to meet in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s or owner’s purposes, this matter should be referred to Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. • Disconnect or turn off power before installation or servicing. • Verify that supply voltage is correct by comparing it with the luminaire label information. • Make all electrical and grounded connections in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any applicable local code requirements. • All wiring connections should be capped with UL approved recognized wire connectors. • Wear gloves and safety glasses at all times when removing luminaire from carton, installing, servicing or performing maintenance. • Avoid direct eye exposure to the light source while it is on. WARNING RISK OF BURN • Allow lamp/fixture to cool before handling. Do not touch enclosure or light source. • Do not exceed maximum wattage marked on luminaire label. • Follow all manufacturer’s warnings, recommendations and restrictions for: driver type, burning position, mounting locations/methods, replacement and recycling. CAUTION RISK OF FIRE • Keep combustible and other materials that can burn, away from lamp/lens. • Do not operate in close proximity to persons, combustible materials or substances affected by heat or drying. CAUTION: RISK OF PRODUCT DAMAGE • Never connect components under load. • Do not mount or support these fixtures in a manner that can cut the outer jacket or damage wire insulation. • Unless individual product specifications deem otherwise: Never connect an LED product to dimmer packs, occupancy sensors, timing devices, or other related control devices. LED fixtures must be powered directly off a switched circuit. • Unless individual product specifications deem otherwise: Do not restrict fixture ventilation. Allow for some volume of airspace around fixture. Avoid covering LED fixtures with insulation, foam, or other material that will prevent convection or conduction cooling. • Unless individual product specifications deem otherwise: Do not exceed fixtures maximum ambient temperature. • Only use fixture in its intended location. • LED products are Polarity Sensitive. Ensure proper Polarity before installation. • Electrostatic Discharge (ESD): ESD can damage LED fixtures. Personal grounding equipment must be worn during all installation or servicing of the unit. • Do not touch individual electrical components as this can cause ESD, shorten lamp life, or alter performance. • Some components inside the fixture may not be serviceable. In the unlikely event your unit may require service, stop using the unit immediately and contact an ABL representative for assistance. • Always read the fixtures complete installation instructions prior to installation for any additional fixture specific warnings. • Verify that power distribution system has proper grounding. Lack of proper earth ground can lead to fixture failure and may void warranty. All luminaires that contain electronic devices that generate frequencies above 9kHz from any component within the luminaire comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Failure to follow any of these instructions could void product warranties. For a complete listing of product Terms and Conditions, please visit www.acuitybrands.com. Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. assumes no responsibility for claims arising out of improper or careless installation or handling of its products. ABL LED General Warnings, Form No. 503.203 © 2010 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. 12/01/10 LEA Y RESPETE TODAS LAS INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN GUARDE LAS INSTRUCCIONES Y DEVUÉLVALAS AL PROPIETARIO DESPUÉS DE REALIZAR LA INSTALACIÓN • Para reducir el riesgo de muerte, lesiones personales o daño a la propiedad que pueda surgir de incendios, choques eléctricos, cortes, abrasiones, caída de partes y otros peligros lea todas las advertencias e instrucciones incluidas en la caja o su interior, además de las etiquetas del montaje. • Antes de instalar, revisar o realizar el mantenimiento de rutina del equipo, siga estas precauciones generales. • La instalación y el mantenimiento de las luminarias lo debe realizar un electri- cista calificado autorizado. • El mantenimiento de las luminarias lo debe realizar una persona familiarizada con la fabricación y el funcionamiento de este producto así como con los peligros relacio- nados con este. Se recomienda realizar el mantenimiento regular de los montajes. • Cada tanto será necesario limpiar la parte externa del refractor y de la lente. La frecuencia de la limpieza dependerá del nivel de polvo del ambiente y de la potencia de la luz mínima aceptable para el usuario. El refractor/la lente se debe lavar con una solución de agua tibia y detergente de uso doméstico suave no abrasivo, enjuagar con agua limpia y secar. Si el montaje óptico se ensuciara por dentro, limpie el refractor o la lente como se indicó anteriormente; de ser necesario, reemplace las juntas dañadas. • NO INSTALE EL PRODUCTO SI ESTÁ DAÑADO Esta luminaria se embaló adecuadamente de modo tal que las piezas no resulten dañadas durante su transporte. Inspecciónelas para confirmarlo. Reemplace toda pieza que se dañe o rompa durante su montaje o posterior a este. • Reciclado: Para obtener información sobre cómo reciclar productos electrónic- os LED, visite www.epa.gov. • Estas instrucciones no pretenden cubrir todos los detalles o las variaciones de los equipos ni abarcar todas las posibles eventualidades relacionadas con la instalación, el funcionamiento o el mantenimiento. Si necesita más información o surgen problemas específi cos que no están debidamente cubiertos en la información del producto, remítase a Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. • Desconecte o interrumpa la energía eléctrica antes de realizar la instalación o la reparación. • Verifi que el voltaje de alimentación sea correcto; compárelo con la información de la etiqueta de la luminaria. • Realice todas las conexiones eléctricas y a tierra en cumplimiento con el Código Eléctrico Nacional y de los requisitos del código local vigente. • Todas las conexiones de cableado deben cubrirse con conectores para cable reconocidos y aprobados por UL. • Use gafas y guantes de protección en todo momento al retirar la luminaria de la caja, al instalarla, repararla o realizar operaciones de mantenimiento. • Una vez encendida la fuente de luz, evite la exposición directa con los ojos. ADVERTENCIA: RIESGO DE QUEMADURAS • Antes de manipular la lámpara o el montaje, déjelo enfriar. No toque la carcasa ni la fuente de iluminación. • No supere el voltaje máximo señalado en la etiqueta de la luminaria. • Respete todas las advertencias, recomendaciones y restricciones que propor - ciona el fabricante para: tipo de conductor, posición de funcionamiento, puntos o métodos de montaje, reemplazo y reciclado. PRECAUCIÓN: RIESGO DE INCENDIO • Mantenga lejos de la luminaria y de las lámparas o los lentes, los materiales combustibles y de otro tipo que se puedan incendiar. • No las encienda cerca de personas, materiales combustibles o sustancias calientes o secas. • Jamás conecte componentes bajo carga. • No monte estos montajes de manera que puedan cortar el revestimiento exterior o dañar el aislamiento de los cables. • A menos que las especifi caciones del producto individual consideren lo contrario: Jamás conecte un producto LED directamente a un paquete de reducción de intensidad de la luz, sensores de ocupación, dispositivos de sincronización u otros dispositivos de control relacionados. Los montajes LED se deben apagar directamente de un circuito de interruptores. • A menos que las especifi caciones del producto individual consideren lo contrario: No restrinja la ventilación de las luminarias. Deje un poco de espacio alrededor del montaje. Evite cubrir los montajes LED con aislación, goma u otro material que evitará la convección o el enfriamiento de la conducción. • A menos que las especifi caciones del producto individual consideren lo con- trario: No exceda la temperatura ambiente máxima de las luminarias. • Use la luminaria únicamente en el lugar previsto. • Los productos LED son sensibles a la polaridad. Asegure la correcta polaridad antes de la instalación. • Descarga electrostática (DES): la DES puede dañar los montajes LED. Durante la instalación o reparación de la unidad se debe usar siempre equipo personal conectado a tierra. • No toque componentes eléctricos individuales ya que esto puede causar DES, reducir la vida útil de la lámpara o alterar el funcionamiento. • Es posible que algunos componentes dentro del montaje no se puedan reparar. En el caso improbable de que su unidad requiera reparación, deje de usar la unidad inmediatamente y comuníquese con un representante de ABL para obtener ayuda. • Lea siempre las instrucciones completas de instalación de montaje antes de la instalación para verificar si hay advertencias específicas de montaje adicionales. • Verifique que el sistema de distribución de alimentación tenga una conexión a tierra adecuada. La falta de una toma de tierra adecuada puede conducir a una falla de la luminaria y puede anular la garantía. Todas las luminarias que contienen dispositivos eléctricos que generan frecuencias superiores a 9 kHz desde cualquier componente de la luminaria cumplen con la Parte 15 de las reglas de la FCC. El funcionamiento está sujeto a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) este dispositivo no puede ocasionar interferencias perjudiciales, y (2) este dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia recibida, incluso aquellas que pueden ocasionar un mal funcionamiento. El incumplimiento de alguna de estas instrucciones puede anular la garantía del producto. Para obtener la lista completa de los términos y las condiciones respecto del producto, visite www.acuitybrands.com. Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. no se hace responsable por los reclamos que puedan surgir de la instalación o manipulación inadecuada o negligente de sus productos. Advertencias generales de ABL LED, Form. no. 503.203 © 2010 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. 12/01/10 LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT ET OBSERVER TOUTES LES CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ CONSERVER CES DIRECTIVES ET LES REMETTRE AU PROPRIÉTAIRE APRÈS L’INSTALLATION • Pour réduire les risques de décès, blessures ou dommages matériels résultant d’un incendie, d’un choc électrique, de chutes de pièces, coupures, érafl ures et autres dangers, veuillez lire tous les avertissements et toutes les directives fournis avec l’appareil, sur la boîte et les étiquettes. • Avant l’installation, l’entretien ou la maintenance de cet équipement, veuillez prendre les précautions générales suivantes. • L’installation et le service technique des luminaires doivent être effectués par un électricien licencié qualifié. • L’entretien des luminaires doit être effectué par des personnes au courant de la construction et du fonctionnement des luminaires et des risques impliqués. Un programme d’entretien régulier est recommandé. • À l’occasion, il sera nécessaire de nettoyer l’extérieur du réfracteur ou de la lentille. La fréquence de nettoyage dépendra du niveau de saleté ambiant et du fl ux lumineux minimal acceptable pour l’utilisateur. Le réfracteur et la lentille doivent être nettoyés à l’aide d’une solution d’eau tempérée et de tout détergent domestique doux, non abrasif, puis rincés à l’eau propre et essuyés. En cas de saleté à l’intérieur du bloc optique, essuyer le réfracteur ou la lentille, puis nettoyer comme indiqué ci-dessus et remplacer toute garniture d’étanchéité endommagée au besoin. • NE PAS INSTALLER UN PRODUIT ENDOMMAGÉ ! Ce luminaire a été emballé de manière à ce que les pièces ne subissent pas de dommages lors du transport. Veuillez inspecter et confirmer le bon état. Toute pièce endommagée ou brisée lors de l’assemblage ou après devrait être remplacée. • Recyclage : pour accéder à l’information sur le recyclage des produits électro- niques DEL, veuillez visiter www.epa.gov. • Ces directives n’entendent pas couvrir tous les détails, tous les modèles d’équipement, ni prévoir toute éventualité liée à l’installation, au fonctionnement ou à l’entretien de cet équipement. Pour toute autre information ou en cas d’un problème non résolu par le présent document, l’acheteur ou le propriétaire est prié de contacter Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. • Couper ou éteindre l’alimentation électrique avant l’installation ou l’entretien. • Vérifi er que la tension d’alimentation est adéquate en la comparant à l’information sur l’étiquette du luminaire. • Effectuer toutes les connexions et la mise à la terre conformément au National Electrical Code (NEC) et aux exigences de tout autre code local applicable. • Touteslesconnexionsdoiventêtreprotégéesd’uncapuchondeconnexionhomologuéUL. • Porter des gants et des verres de sécurité en tout temps pour retirer le luminaire de la boîte, l’installation, l’entretien ou les travaux de maintenance. • Éviter d’exposer directement les yeux à la source lumineuse lorsqu’allumée. AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DE BRÛLURE • Permettre le refroidissement de la lampe et du luminaire avant la manipulation. Ne pas toucher au boîtier ou à la source lumineuse. • Ne pas dépasser la puissance maximale indiquée sur l’étiquette du luminaire. • Observer tous les avertissements, toutes les recommandations et toutes les restrictions du fabricant sur : le type de pilote, la position d’utilisation, l’emplacement et les méthodes de montage, le remplacement et le recyclage. • Éloigner toutes les matières combustibles ou infl ammables de la lampe et de la lentille. • Ne pas employer à proximité des personnes, des matières combustibles ou des substances sensibles à la chaleur ou la sécheresse. • Ne jamais connecter des composantes en charge. • Ne pas monter ou supporter ces appareils d’une manière pouvant causer l’abrasion de la gaine externe ou endommager l’isolant des fils. • Sauf si contraire aux spécifications du produit individuel : Ne jamais connecter directement un produit DEL sur un gradateur, un détecteur de présence, un temporisateur ni sur aucun autre appareil de contrôle de ce type. Les appareils DEL doivent être alimentés directement hors d’un circuit à interrupteur. • Sauf en cas de spécifi cations contraires individuelles des produits : Ne pas limiter la ventilation du luminaire. Permettre un espace libre suffi sant autour du luminaire. Éviter de couvrir les appareils DEL d’un matériau isolant, alvéolaire ou tout autre matériau empêchant le refroidissement de l’unité par convexion ou conduction. • Sauf en cas de spécifi cations contraires individuelles des produits : Ne pas dépasser la température ambiante maximale de service admissible. • Utiliser le luminaire qu’à l’endroit prévu à cet effet. • Les produits DEL sont sensibles à la polarité. S’assurer d’une polarité adéquate avant l’installation. • Décharge électrostatique (DES) : Une DES peut endommager les appareils DEL. Un équipement de mise à la terre de protection individuelle doit être porté lors de l’installation ou l’entretien de l’unité. • Ne pas toucher aux composantes électriques individuelles, car cela peut causer une DES, réduire la durée de vie de la lampe ou compromettre la performance de l’unité. • Certains composants internes des luminaires peuvent ne pas être réparables. Dans le cas peu probable où l’appareil aurait besoin d’une réparation, immédiatement cesser de l’utiliser et faire appel à un représentant ABL. • Avant de procéder au montage, toujours lire toutes les instructions de montage des luminaires pour connaître les autres avertissements qui leur sont propres. • Vérifiez que le système de distribution électrique a une mise à la terre appropriée. Une mauvaise mise à la terre peut entraîner une défaillance du luminaire et annuler la garantie. Tous les luminaires qui contiennent des dispositifs électroniques générant des fréquences supérieures à 9 kHz à partir d’un composant situé à l’intérieur du luminaire sont conformes à la section 15 des règles de la Commission fédérale des communications. Son fonctionnement doit respecter les deux conditions suivantes : (1) Ce dispositif ne doit générer aucune interférence préjudiciable (2) Ce dispositif doit accepter n’importe quelle interférence reçue, y compris les interférences pouvant entraîner un fonctionnement non souhaité. Ne pas observer ces instructions pourrait annuler les garanties du produit. Pour une liste complète des conditions et modalités, veuillez visiter www.acuitybrands.com. Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. décline toute responsabilité pour les réclamations résultant d’une installation ou manipulation inadéquate ou négligente de ses produits. Avertissements généraux de ABL sur les produits DEL, pub. no 503.203 © 2010 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. Tous droits réservés. 12/01/10 Page 1 of 10 IMPORTANTES CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ SUR L’ÉCLAIRAGE DEL INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES SOBRE EL LED IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK CAUTION RISK OF INJURY ADVERTENCIA: RIESGO DE CHOQUE ELÉCTRICO PRECAUCIÓN: RIESGO DE LESIONES PRECAUCIÓN: RIESGO DE DAÑO PARA EL PRODUCTO AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE MISE EN GARDE RISQUE DE BLESSURE MISE EN GARDE RISQUE D’INCENDIE MISE EN GARDE : RISQUE DE CAUSER DES DOMMAGES AU PRODUIT U815355 C 2 of 10 LED IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS KEYHOLE JUNCTION BOX MOUNTING A B C REQUIRED TOOLS: INCLUDED FIXTURE COMPONENTS: A B SUPPLIED HARDWARE KIT COMPONENTS: C D ADDITIONAL SUPPLIES MAY BE NEEDED DEPENDING ON THE TYPE OF CEILING FIXTURE IS BEING MOUNTED TO: Drywall or Masonry Anchors and Screws Wood Screws Toggle Bolts INSTALLATION: ❶ TURN OFF THE POWER! ❷ Remove lens and hardware kit from fixture - Press in middle of lens (A) on one end to lower lens below locating feature in endcap. Slide lens into endcap (B) to create gap between lens and endcap on opposite end of fixture (C) Use exposed gap to gently reach under lens and pull away from fixture to remove (D). Set lens aside in a location where it will not fall or become damaged. Remove bag with hardware kit from inside of fixture. ❸ Prepare for fixture mounting - The fixture must be centered over, and mounted to, the electrical junction box. If additional support is required, mounting locations at ends of fixture are provided. Have someone assist in holding the fixture against the ceiling. With fixture junction box mounting holes lined up with junction box, mark the end mounting locations on the ceiling. Use appropriate hardware for the ceiling type that fixture is being mounted to. Typical installation onto a drywall ceiling will use drywall anchors rated to hold at least 20 lbs. For all installs - partially thread screws (provided with junction box or 2x 8-32x1” screws provided in hardware kit) into junction box. Leave head of screw approximately 1/4" away from box (do not tighten). PART DESCRIPTION QUANTITY A LED LUMINAIRE HOUSING 1 B LED DIFFUSION LENS 1 PART DESCRIPTION QUANTITY C WIRE NUT 3 D 8-32 x 1” SCREW 2 2-3/4” box knockouts * For 2-3/4” electrical box only: Use screwdriver to knock out covers in housing for additional mounting slots. Pliers may be necessary to bend knockout several times to remove. D U815355 C 3 of 10 LED IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS E ❹ Make electrical connections in junction box - DO NOT MAKE CONNECTIONS IN FIXTURE Connect the hot and neutral (black and white) wires from the junction box to the corresponding wire colors from the fixture, using the provided wire nuts. Also, connect the ground wire (green) from the fixture to the circuit ground using a wire nut. ❺ Attach fixture to junction box - Position wires and connections up into junction box. Lift fixture up and align larger opening of keyhole with heads of partially threaded screws from Step Three. Rotate fixture clockwise and tighten screws to secure housing to junction box. Use appropriate fasteners at ends of fixture if required. ❻ Reassemble lens to housing - Start with lens parallel to fixture as shown below. With the end of lens 3-4 inches away from the endcap. Support middle of lens up against fixture with one hand. - Begin at the end of fixture with lens-endcap gap, place lens groove around flange of housing (A). Apply pressure to keep this edge pressed against flange. Parallel - Next, flex first 1-2 feet of the other long edge of lens under flange and inside the housing (B). Lens can withstand significant bending without breaking. | lens edge remains outside | lens edge inside | - Then, pull gently on lens (C) to clip lens groove around flange of housing (D). If lens pops out, please repeat this step from the beginning. - Finally; slide lens towards, and under, endcap (E). This should seat the lens groove around the housing flange down the length of the lens. Adjust any un-seated sections of lens groove to housing along the length of the fixture on both sides of lens. Center lens under endcaps so that no gaps exist. http://lithonia.com/FML4Winstall A B C D Scan QR code for lens installation video U815355 C 4 of 10 LED IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS DIFFUSION LENS CLEANING: Use a soft cloth and water to clean the lens. Avoid strong chemicals. Mild soap or detergent combined with water may also be used, be sure to fully rinse lens with clean water. Allow lens to air dry before reinstalling. USE OF ADJUSTABLE LUMEN OUTPUT (ALO) – (IF LUMINAIRE IS EQUIPPED WITH THIS OPTION): WITH POWER OFF and the lens removed from fixture (either before or after the fixture is installed on ceiling) Use a ¼ inch flathead screwdriver to adjust the central knob of the lumen output device. Follow the instructions on the label in the fixture, shown above, or consult table above for output settings. Leave ALO at setting 8 (to provide maximum dimming range) if using 0-10V dimming below. 0-10V DIMMING – (IF LUMINAIRE IS EQUIPPED WITH THIS OPTION): Purple and Pink (or gray) wires for low voltage 0-10V control are provided in light fixtures with that option - DO NOT CONNECT PURPLE OR PINK (OR GRAY) WIRES TO LINE VOLTAGE If unfamiliar with 0-10V wiring, contact a qualified electrician. A ½ inch knockout (KO) is provided to run these wires out of the light fixture to connect to 0-10V controls - While fixture is on floor or a stable surface (not installed), use screwdriver to knock out ½ KO in housing. Pliers may be necessary to bend knockout several times to remove. MAKE SURE POWER IS OFF Route the wires through KO and make connection to low voltage (0-10V) controls outside of fixture. Pre-cut insulation on ends of purple and pink (or gray) wire will need to be removed before making connections (wire nuts not included). If using with a 0-10V wall dimmer, follow installation and use instructions that are provided with the dimming wall switch. Leave the insulation ends on the purple and pink (or gray) wires unless they will be used for 0-10V dimming. If insulation is removed, prevent contact with metal fixture housing by individually capping the purple and pink (or gray) wires with a wire nut (not included). Do not tie these wires together or fixture will be in constant dimmed output. ! PLEASE RETAIN THESE INSTRUCTIONS ! Setting Approx. Wattage % Approx. Lumen % 8 100% 100% 7 100% 100% 6 98% 98% 5 88% 89% 4 78% 80% 3 66% 70% 2 55% 58% 1 43% 46% ½” 0-10V KNOCKOUT PURPLE/PINK (OR GRAY) 0-10V WIRES ADJUSTMENT KNOB Contractor Resources Check out helpful programs, tools, installation videos and more! U815355 C 5 of 10 INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES SOBRE EL LED INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN A B C OJO DE CERRADURA MONTAJE EN CAJA DE CONEXIONES HERRAMIENTAS REQUERIDAS: COMPONENTES DE ACCESORIO INCLUIDOS: A B COMPONENTES DE KIT DE HERRAMIENTAS SUMINISTRADOS : C D SE PUEDEN NECESITAR SUMINISTROS ADICIONALES SEGÚN EL TIPO DE TECHO AL QUE SE ESTÉ MONTANDO EL ACCESORIO: Anclajes y tornillos del panel de yeso o mampostería Tornillo para madera Pernos acodados INSTALACIÓN: ❶ ¡DESCONECTE LA FUENTE DE ENERGÍA! ❷ Retire la lente y el kit de montaje de la luminaria - Presione en el centro de la lente (A) en un extremo para bajar la lente debajo de la función de Ubicación en la tapa del extremo. Deslice la lente en la tapa del extremo (B) para crear un espacio entre la lente y la tapa del extremo opuesto de la luminaria (C) Use el espacio expuesto para alcanzar suavemente debajo de la lente y tire para quitarlo (D). Coloque la lente a un lado en un lugar donde no se caiga ni se dañe. Retire la bolsa con el kit de herramientas del interior de la luminaria. ❸ Prepárese para el montaje de la luminaria - El dispositivo debe estar centrado y montado sobre la caja de conexiones eléctricas. Si se requiere soporte adicional, se proporcionan ubicaciones de montaje en los extremos de la luminaria. Haga que alguien lo ayude a sostener el dispositivo contra el techo. Con los orificios de montaje de la caja de conexiones de la luminaria alineados con la caja de conexiones, marque las ubicaciones de montaje finales en el techo. Use las herramientas apropiadas para el tipo de techo en el que se está montando la luminaria. La instalación típica en un techo de paneles de yeso utilizará anclajes de paneles de yeso clasificados para sostener al menos 9 kg. Para todas las instalaciones: atornille parcialmente los tornillos (provistos con la caja de conexiones o 2 tornillos de 8-32 x 2,5 cm en el paquete de herramientas) en la caja de conexiones. Deje la cabeza del tornillo aproximadamente a 0,5 cm de distancia de la caja (no ajuste). PARTE DESCRIPCIÓN CANTIDAD A LED LUMINAIRE HOUSING 1 B LED DIFFUSION LENS 1 PARTE DESCRIPCIÓN CANTIDAD C WIRE NUT 3 D 8-32 x 1” SCREW 2 Separadores de caja de 2-3/4 in * Solo para cajas eléctricas de 2-3/4 in: Use un destornillador para extraer las cubiertas de la carcasa para las ranuras de montaje adicionales. Puede que sea necesario utilizar alicates para doblar los separadores varias veces para quitarlo. D U815355 C 6 of 10 INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES SOBRE EL LED INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN E ❹ Realice las conexiones eléctricas en la caja de conexiones - NO HAGA CONEXIONES EN LUMINARIA Conecte los cables de fase y neutros (blanco y negro) de la caja de conexiones a los colores de cable correspondientes del dispositivo, mediante las tuercas de cable provistas. Además, conecte el cable de tierra (verde) del accesorio a la tierra del circuito con una tuerca para cables. ❺ Fije la luminaria a la caja de conexiones - Coloque los cables y las conexiones en la caja de conexiones. Levante la luminaria y alinee la abertura más grande del ojo de la cerradura con las cabezas de los tornillos parcialmente roscados del Paso tres. Gire el dispositivo hacia la derecha y ajuste los tornillos para asegurar la carcasa a la caja de conexiones. Use sujetadores apropiados en los extremos de la luminaria si es necesario. ❻ Vuelva a montar la lente en la carcasa - Comience con la lente paralela al luminaria como se muestra a continuación. Con el extremo de la lente a 8-10 cm de distancia de la tapa del extremo. Apoye el centro de la lente contra la luminaria con una mano. - Comience en el extremo de la luminaria con el espacio de la tapa del extremo de la lente, coloque la ranura de la lente alrededor de la brida de la carcasa (A). Aplique presión para mantener este borde presionado contra la brida. Paralelo - Luego, flexione los primeros 0,5 metros del otro borde largo de la lente debajo de la brida y dentro de la carcasa (B). La lente puede soportar una flexión significativa sin romperse. | el borde de la lente permanece afuera | borde de la lente en el interior | - Luego, jale suavemente la lente (C) para enganchar la ranura de la lente alrededor de la brida de la carcasa (D). Si la lente se sale, repita este paso desde el principio. - Finalmente; deslice la lente hacia y debajo de la tapa del extremo (E). Esto debería asentar la ranura de la lente alrededor de la brida de la carcasa a lo largo de la lente. Ajuste cualquier sección no asentada de la ranura de la lente a la carcasa a lo largo de la luminaria en ambos lados de la lente. http://lithonia.com/FML4Winstall A B C D Escanee el código QR para ver el video de instalación de la lente U815355 C 7 of 10 INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES SOBRE EL LED INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN LIMPIEZA DE LA LENTE DE DIFUSIÓN: Use un paño suave y agua para limpiar la lente. Evite productos químicos fuertes. También se puede usar jabón suave o detergente combinado con agua, asegúrese de enjuagar completamente la lente con agua limpia. Permita que la lente se seque al aire antes de volver a instalarla. USO DE LA SALIDA AJUSTABLE DE LUMEN (ALO) - (SI LA LUMINARIA CUENTA CON ESTA OPCIÓN): CON LA ENERGÍA DESCONECTADA y la lente retirada de la luminaria (antes o después de que el dispositivo se instale en el techo) Use un destornillador de cabeza plana para ajustar la perilla central del dispositivo de salida de luz. Siga las instrucciones de la etiqueta en el accesorio, que se muestra arriba, o consulte la tabla de arriba para la configuración de salida. Deje a ALO en la configuración 8 (para proporcionar el rango de atenuación máximo) si usa una atenuación de 0-10 V a continuación. ATENUACIÓN de 0-10 V - (SI EL ACCESORIO CUENTA CON ESTA OPCIÓN): Los cables púrpura y rosa (o gris) para control de bajo voltaje de 0-10 V se proporcionan en dispositivos de iluminación con esa opción - NO CONECTE CABLES PÚRPURA O ROSA (O GRIS) AL VOLTAJE DE LÍNEA Si no está familiarizado con el cableado de 0-10 V, comuníquese con un electricista calificado. Se proporciona un golpe de gracia de ½ pulgada (KO) para pasar estos cables fuera de la lámpara para conectarse a los controles de 0-10 V - Mientras el accesorio está en el piso o en una superficie estable (no instalada), use un destornillador para golpear ½ KO en la carcasa. Los alicates pueden ser necesarios para doblar las perforaciones varias veces para quitarlas. ASEGÚRESE DE QUE LA ENERGÍA ELÉCTRICA ESTÉ DESCONECTADA Pase los cables a través del orificio ciego y realice la conexión a los controles de bajo voltaje (0-10 V) fuera del dispositivo. Se debe retirar el aislamiento precortado en los extremos de los cables púrpura y rosa (o gris) antes de hacer las conexiones (no se incluyen las tuercas de los cables). Si se utiliza con un atenuador de pared de 0-10 V, siga las instrucciones de instalación y uso que se proporcionan con el interruptor de atenuación de pared. Deje los extremos de aislamiento en los cables púrpura y rosa (o gris) a menos que se usen para la atenuación de 0-10 V. Si se quita el aislamiento, evite el contacto con la carcasa del accesorio metálico al tapar individualmente los cables púrpura y rosa (o gris) con una tuerca para cables (no incluida). No ate estos cables juntos o el dispositivo estará en salida atenuada constante. ! CONSERVE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES ! Ajuste % de voltaje aprox % de lúmenes aprox 8 100% 100% 7 100% 100% 6 98% 98% 5 88% 89% 4 78% 80% 3 66% 70% 2 55% 58% 1 43% 46% ORIFICIO CIEGO DE ½ IN Y 0-10 V CABLES PÚRPURA/ROSA (O GRIS) DE 0-10 V PERILLA DE AJUSTE Recursos del contratista ¡Vea programas útiles, herramientas, videos de instalación y más! U815355 C 8 of 10 LED CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES INSTRUCTIONS D'INSTALLATION A B C TROU DE SERRURE MONTAGE DE LA BOÎTE DE JONCTION OUTILS REQUIS: COMPOSANTS DE LUMINAIRE INCLUS: A B PIÈCES DE L’ENSEMBLE DE QUINCAILLERIE FOURNIES: C D DES PIÈCES SUPPLÉMENTAIRES POURRAIENT ÊTRE NÉCESSAIRES SELON LE TYPE DE PLAFOND SUR LEQUEL LE LUMINAIRE EST MONTÉ: Ancrages et vis pour cloisons sèches ou maçonnerie Vis à bois Boulons à ailettes INSTALLATION: ❶ COUPEZ L’ALIMENTATION ÉLECTRIQUE! ❷ Enlevez la lentille et l’ensemble de quincaillerie du luminaire - Appuyez au milieu de la lentille (A) à une extrémité pour abaisser la lentille en dessous de la marque de positionnement dans le capuchon. Faites glisser la lentille dans le capuchon (B) pour créer un espace entre la lentille et le capuchon à l’extrémité opposée du luminaire (C) Utilisez l’espace ainsi créé pour saisir délicatement le dessous de la lentille et tirez pour l’enlever du luminaire (D). Mettez la lentille de côté, à un endroit où elle ne risque pas de tomber ou d’être endommagée. Retirez le sac contenant l’ensemble de quincaillerie de l’intérieur du luminaire. ❸ Préparez le montage du luminaire - Le luminaire doit être centré sur le boîtier de raccordement électrique et monté sur celui-ci. Si un support supplémentaire est nécessaire, des emplacements de montage sont prévus aux extrémités du luminaire. Demandez à quelqu’un de vous aider à maintenir le luminaire contre le plafond. Alignez les trous de montage au boîtier de raccordement sur le boîtier de raccordement puis marquez les emplacements de montage finaux au plafond. Utilisez le matériel approprié pour le type de plafond sur lequel le luminaire est monté. L’installation classique sur un plafond en cloison sèche utilisera des ancrages pour cloisons sèches d’une capacité nominale d’au moins 9 kg. Pour toutes les installations - vissez partiellement les vis (fournies avec le boîtier de raccordement ou les vis 2x 8-32x2,5 cm fournies dans la trousse de quincaillerie) dans le boîtier de raccordement. Laissez la tête de la vis à environ 0.5 cm de la boîte (ne serrez pas). PARTIE LA DESCRIPTION QUANTITÉ A LED LUMINAIRE HOUSING 1 B LED DIFFUSION LENS 1 PARTIE LA DESCRIPTION QUANTITÉ C WIRE NUT 3 D 8-32 x 2,5 cm SCREW 2 Alvéoles défonçables 2-3/4 po * Pour les boîtes électriques de 2-3/4 po uniquement: Utilisez un tournevis pour retirer les alvéoles du boîtier afin d’obtenir des fentes de montage supplémentaires. Une pince peut être nécessaire pour plier l’alvéole à plusieurs reprises afin de la retirer. D U815355 C 9 of 10 LED CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES INSTRUCTIONS D'INSTALLATION E ❹ Effectuez les raccordements électriques dans le boîtier de raccordement - N’EFFECTUEZ PAS DE RACCORDEMENTS DANS LE LUMINAIRE Connectez les fils de phase et de neutre (noir et blanc) du boîtier de raccordement aux couleurs de fil correspondantes du luminaire, en utilisant les capuchons de connexion fournis. Connectez également le fil de terre (vert) du luminaire à la terre du circuit à l’aide d’un capuchon de connexion. ❺ Fixez le luminaire au boîtier de raccordement - Placez les fils et les raccords dans le boîtier de raccordement. Soulevez le luminaire et alignez la grande ouverture du trou de serrure avec les têtes des vis partiellement vissées de l’étape trois. Faites tourner le luminaire dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre et serrez les vis pour fixer le luminaire à la boîtie de raccordement. Utilisez des fixations appropriées aux extrémités du luminaire si nécessaire. ❻ Remontez la lentille sur le boîtier - Commencez avec la lentille parallèle au luminaire comme indiqué ci-dessous. L’extrémité de la lentille doit se trouver à une distance de 8 à 10 cm du capuchon. Pressez d’une main le milieu de la lentille contre le luminaire. - Commencez à l’extrémité du luminaire avec l’espace entre la lentille et le capuchon, placez la rainure de la lentille autour de la bride du boîtier (A). Appliquez une pression pour maintenir ce bord appuyé contre la bride. Parallèle - Ensuite, insérez en les courbant les 0,5 premier metre de l’autre bord allongé de la lentille sous la bride et à l’intérieur du boîtier (B). La lentille peut résister à une flexion importante sans se rompre. | le bord de l'objectif reste à l'extérieur | bord de la lentille à l'intérieur | - Ensuite, tirez doucement sur la lentille (C) pour fixer sa rainure dans la bride du boîtier (D). Si la lentille sort, veuillez répéter cette étape depuis le début. - Enfin, faites glisser la lentille vers et sous le capuchon (E). La rainure de la lentille doit ainsi s’appuyer sur la bride du boîtier sur toute la longueur de la lentille. Ajustez les sections de la rainure de la lentille qui débordent au boîtier sur la longueur du luminaire, des deux côtés de la lentille. Centrez la lentille sous les capuchons de manière à ce qu’il n’y ait pas de fentes. http://lithonia.com/FML4Winstall A B C D Scannez le code QR pour la vidéo d'installation de la lentille U815355 C 10 of 10 LED CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES INSTRUCTIONS D'INSTALLATION NETTOYAGE DE LA LENTILLE DE DIFFUSION: Utilisez un chiffon doux et de l’eau pour nettoyer la lentille. Évitez les produits chimiques forts. Un savon ou un détergent doux combiné à de l’eau peut également être utilisé, assurez-vous de rincer complètement la lentille à l’eau propre. Laissez la lentille sécher à l’air avant de la réinstaller. UTILISATION DU RENDEMENT LUMINEUX RÉGLABLE (RLR / ALO) - (SI LE LUMINAIRE EST ÉQUIPÉ DE CETTE OPTION): AVEC LE LUMINAIRE ÉTEINT et la lentille retirée du luminaire (avant ou après l’installation du luminaire au plafond) Utilisez un tournevis plat pour ajuster le bouton central du dispositif de luminosité réglable. Suivez les instructions figurant sur l’étiquette du dispositif, indiquées ci-dessus, ou consultez le tableau ci-dessus pour les réglages de sortie. Laissez le RLR / ALO sur le réglage 8 (pour obtenir une plage de gradation maximale) si vous utilisez la gradation 0-10V ci-dessous. GRADATION 0-10V - (SI LE LUMINAIRE EST ÉQUIPÉ DE CETTE OPTION): Des fils violet et rose (ou gris) pour le contrôle basse tension 0-10 V sont fournis dans les luminaires avec cette option - NE CONNECTEZ PAS DE FILS VIOLET OU ROSE (OU GRIS) À LA TENSION DE LIGNE Si vous n'êtes pas familier avec le câblage 0-10 V, contactez un électricien qualifié. Une entrée défonçable de ½ pouce (KO) est fournie pour faire passer ces fils hors du luminaire pour les connecter aux commandes 0-10V - Pendant que le luminaire est au sol ou sur une surface stable (non installée), utilisez un tournevis pour éliminer ½ KO dans le boîtier. Une pince peut être nécessaire pour plier plusieurs fois la découpe pour l'enlever. VEILLEZ À COUPER L’ALIMENTATION ÉLECTRIQUE Faites passer les fils par l’alvéole et connectez-les aux commandes basse tension (0-10V) à l’extérieur du luminaire. L’isolation précoupée aux extrémités des fils violet et rose (ou gris) devra être enlevée avant d’effectuer les connexions (capuchons de connexion non inclus). Si vous utilisez un gradateur mural de 0-10V, suivez les instructions d’installation et d’utilisation qui sont fournies avec l’interrupteur mural de gradation. Ne retirez pas l’isolation des extrémités des fils violet et rose (ou gris), à moins qu’ils ne soient utilisés pour la gradation 0-10V. Si l’isolation est retirée, empêchez tout contact avec le boîtier métallique du luminaire en protégeant individuellement les fils violet et rose (ou gris) avec un capuchon de connexion (non fourni). Ne reliez pas ces fils l’un à l’autre, sinon l’appareil sera en sortie de gradation constante. ! VEUILLEZ CONSERVER CES INSTRUCTIONS! Réglage % de puissance approx. % de luminosité approx. 8 100% 100% 7 100% 100% 6 98% 98% 5 88% 89% 4 78% 80% 3 66% 70% 2 55% 58% 1 43% 46% ALVÉOLE 0-10V DE ½ PO FILS VIOLET/ROSE (OU GRIS) 0-10 V BOUTON DE RÉGLAGE Ressources pour entrepreneurs Accédez aux programmes, outils, vidéos et plus encore! Page 1 of 8 912-00235-001 Rev. B LED IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS • To reduce the risk of death, personal injury or property damage from fire, electric shock, falling parts, cuts/abrasions, and other hazards please read all warnings and instructions included with and on the fixture box and all fixture labels. • Before installing, servicing, or performing routine maintenance upon this equipment, follow these general precautions. • Installation and service of luminaires should be performed by a qualified licensed electrician. • Maintenance of the luminaires should be performed by person(s) familiar with the luminaires’ construction and operation and any hazards involved. Regular fixture maintenance programs are recommended. • It will occasionally be necessary to clean the outside of the refractor/lens. Frequency of cleaning will depend on ambient d irt level and minimum light output which is acceptable to user. Refractor/lens should be washed in a solution of warm water and any mild, non-abrasive household detergent, rinsed with clean water and wiped dry. Should optical assembly become dirty on the inside, wipe refractor/lens and clean in above manner, replacing damaged gaskets as necessary. • DO NOT INSTALL DAMAGED PRODUCT! This luminaire has been properly packed so that no parts should have been damaged during transit. Inspect to confirm. Any part damaged or broken during or after assembly should be replaced. • Recycle: For information on how to recycle LED electronic products , please visit www.epa.gov. • These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide every possible contingency t o meet in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s or owner’s purposes, this matter should be referred to Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. READ AND FOLLOW ALL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS! SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS AND DELIVER TO OWNER AFTER INSTALLATION ✓ Disconnect or turn off power before installation or servicing. ✓ Verify that supply voltage is correct by comparing it with the luminaire label information. ✓ Make all electrical and grounded connections in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any applicable local code requirements. ✓ All wiring connections should be capped with UL approved recognized wire connectors. WARNING RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ✓ Allow lamp/fixture to cool before handling. Do not touch enclosure or light source. ✓ Do not exceed maximum wattage marked on luminaire label. ✓ Follow all manufacturer’s warnings, recommendations and restrictions for: driver type, burning position, mounting locations/methods, replacement and recycling. WARNING RISK OF BURN ✓ Wear gloves and safety glasses at all times when removing luminaire from carton, installing, servicing or performing maintenance. ✓ Avoid direct eye exposure to the light source while it is on. CAUTION RISK OF INJURY ✓ Keep combustible and other materials that can burn, away from lamp/lens. ✓ Do not operate in close proximity to persons, combustible materials or substances affected by heat or drying. CAUTION RISK OF FIRE Page 2 of 8 912-00235-001 Rev. B LED IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS All luminaires that contain electronic devices that generate frequencies above 9kHz from any component within the luminaire comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation Failure to follow any of these instructions could void product warranties. For a complete listing of product Terms and Conditions, please visit www.acuitybrands.com. Our Brands Indoor/Outdoor Indoor Lighting Outdoor Lighting Controls Daylighting Lithonia Lighting Gotham American Electric Lighting DARK TO LIGHT SunOptics Carandini Mark Architectural Lighting Antique Street Lamps LC&D Holophane Peerless Hydrel ROAM RELOC Renaissance Lighting Tersen Sensor Switch Light Concepts Winona Lighting Synergy Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. assumes no responsibility for claims arising out of improper or careless installation or handling of its products. ABL LED General Warnings, Form No. 503.203 © 2010, 2016 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. 12/01/10 ✓ Never connect components under load. ✓ Do not mount or support these fixtures in a manner that can cut the outer jacket or damage wire insulation. ✓ Controls for dimming, auto-sensing, or remote control of a luminaire that are not factory-wired to the luminaire must be checked for compatibility with the luminaire prior to installation. LED fixtures must be powered directly off a switched circuit. ✓ Unless individual product specifications deem otherwise: Do not restrict fixture ventilation. Allow for some volume of airspace around fixture. Avoid covering LED fixtures with insulation, foam, or other material that will prevent convection or conduction cooling. ✓ Unless individual product specifications deem otherwise: Do not exceed fixtures maximum ambient temperature. ✓ Only use fixture in its intended location. ✓ LED products are Polarity Sensitive. Ensure proper Polarity before installation. ✓ Electrostatic Discharge (ESD): ESD can damage LED fixtures. Personal grounding equipment must be worn during all installation or servicing of the unit. ✓ Do not touch individual electrical components as this can cause ESD, shorten lamp life, or alter performance. ✓ Some components inside the fixture may not be serviceable. In the unlikely event your unit may require service, stop using the unit immediately and contact an ABL representative for assistance. ✓ Always read the fixtures complete installation instructions prior to installation for any additional fixture specific warnings. ✓ Always ensure that the electrical distribution system is up to NEC (and any applicable local code) requirements. ✓ Verify that power distribution system has proper grounding. Lack of proper earth ground can lead to fixture failure and may void warranty. Page 3 of 8 912-00235-001 Rev. B LED IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FIXTURE PACKING LIST ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY 1. Lens 1 2. Housing 1 3. Mounting Bracket 2 4. Lens Latch 10(4FT) 20(8FT) 5. Wet Location Fitting 1 6. LED tray 1(4ft) 2(8ft) 7. Led Driver 1 8. CCT/INT Switch 1(certain models) Installation Instructions - CSVT Contractor Single Strip Vapor-Tite LED Luminaire When handling the fixture during unpacking and installation take precautions of the plastic Lens and plastic end caps. Dropping the fixture or excess force on the lens or housing can cause damage. Removing the lens from the housing during installation exposes the LED’s and puts them at risk for damage. Damage to the LEDs caused during installation will not be covered under the warranty . TOOLS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION •Safety glasses •Drill •Ruler/Tape measure •3/32” Drill Bit •Flat blade screwdriver •1/2” Drill Bit •Phillips screwdriver •7/8” Drill Bit •Adjustable wrench •Pliers Protect yourself. Before installing, read these instructions carefully and save them for future reference. Date Installed: _______________ Page 4 of 8 912-00235-001 Rev. B LED IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS DIMENSIONS CSVT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS INSTALLATION OF THIS FIXTURE IN ANY OTHER MANNER THAN WHAT IS INDICATED WITHIN THE SUPPLIED INSTRUCTIONS WILL VOID ALL WARRANTIES. These instructions are for NORMAL On/Off operations. Ensure proper voltage will be supplied to the fixture. Check the fixture label on the carton for fixture voltage. Fixture must be grounded before use. Remove fixture from packaging and check for damage. If present remove plastic film from lens prior to installation. GENERAL INSTALLATION This luminaire is suitable for wet locations when labeled accordingly. This luminaire may be surface mounted or suspended by cable or chain (provided by others). For all mounting methods make sure the facility mounting points and mounting hardware (provided by others) is rated for 4X the fixture load. DRIVER AND WIRING ACCESS Once the fixture is mounted: 1. Remove the lens by supporting the lens with one hand and releasing the latches with the other hand. Number of latches vary by fixture length; L48 has 10 and L96 has 20. 2. To open the LED tray, squeeze in on the channel below the led tray in the three places shown in figure 1 and the tray snaps will disengage releasing the LED tray. Slowly lower the LED tray until supported by the safety tethers. 3. Make the electrical connection to the fixture in accordance with your local electrical code. Make all necessary wiring connections, observing proper voltage and polarity. 4. When closing the LED tray ensure that the LED tray is not pinching/catching wires or lens latches. Once closed verify the LED tray is fully engaged. 5. Replace the lens by reversing the procedure outlined in Step 1. FIGURE 1 Page 5 of 8 912-00235-001 Rev. B LED IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FIGURE 2 STEP-BY-STEP GUIDE 1. Remove fixture components and parts pack(s). Check that all parts are included. Note: Turn off power at circuit breaker box! 2. Position the Fixture Housing against the mounting surface and with a pencil, mark the screw hole locations on mounting brackets. 3. Using a drill with a 1/16” drill bit, make two small pilot holes at the marked screw hole locations. If drill bit does not encounter a stud or wood surface, use toggle bolts or suitable fastener depending on structural conditions. If drill bit does encounter wood surface, use #10 wood screw. (FIGURE 2) 4. Install the Mounting Brackets. Attach supplied surface mounting brackets to ceiling making sure ceiling and screws can support 4x the full fixture weight. (FIGURE 2) 5. Install the fixture. Hang the fixture into the mounting brackets by clipping into one side of each bracket and rotating upward to clip into the other side of each bracket. WIRING AND FIXTURE OPERATION CAUTION: Connect fixture to supply wires rated for at least 90°C (194°F). 6. Remove lens by removing all lens latches. 7. Remove Wireway Cover Assembly by lifting upward on exposed edges of part. Start in the middle and work outward. Disconnect Wireway Cover Assembly from Housing Assembly. 8. Disconnect Wireway Cover Assembly from Fixture Housing by pinching Orange or Red connector on Wiring Harness. 9. Insert house power supply cable through wet location fitting 10. Cut supply cable to desired length. Strip black and white wire leads with wire strippers to expose 3/8”-7/16” of bare metal. 11. Using Wirenuts, connect supply (house) wires to fixture wires - white to white, black to black, and green to green or bare copper ground wire. 12. Bundle wires in tight grouping to be out of the way and reinstall Wireway Cover assembly (step 3) 13. Reattach lens by latching all latches ensuring that lens has seated properly into the gasket channel. Trouble Shooting Guide If this fixture fails to operate properly, use the guide below to diagnose and correct the problem. ◼ Verify that fixture is wired properly. ◼ Verify that fixture is grounded correctly. ◼ The line voltage at the fixture is correct. If further assistance is required, contact: Technical Support at: (800) 705-7378 If servicing fixture: ◼ For driver replacement see steps 2 and 11. ◼ For LED replacement see step 2 and note that entire Wireway Cover Assembly will be replaced. Page 6 of 8 912-00235-001 Rev. B LED IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Switchable Settings (Certain Models) Switchable Option (ALO SWW) Fixtures ship with both switches in the center positions, L48 = 4000LM & 4000K, L96 = 8000LM & 4000K. Switch Positions ✓ Disconnect power before adjusting color temperature or intensity switches. WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Page 7 of 8 912-00235-001 Rev. B LED IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Switch Settings (CERTAIN MODELS) Example: If 4000LM and 4000K is desired then both switches would be moved to the Center positions. For all possible settings and combinations see the table below. 4ft Lumens 8ft Lumens Left Switch Right Switch CCT 3000LM 6000LM Left Left 3500K 4000LM 8000LM Center Left 3500K 5000LM 10000LM Right Left 3500K 3000LM 6000LM Left Center 4000K 4000LM 8000LM Center Center 4000K 5000LM 10000LM Right Center 4000K 3000LM 6000LM Left Right 5000K 4000LM 8000LM Center Right 5000K 5000LM 10000LM Right Right 5000K ✓ Disconnect power before adjusting color temperature or intensity switches. WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Page 8 of 8 912-00235-001 Rev. B LED IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS DIMMING All fixtures: Dimmable Switchable fixtures: Maximum light level for switchable luminaires is controlled by the lumen setting on the switch. These products are capable of being dimmed down to 10% when used with 0-10V dimming controls. The fixture with the lowest switch setting on a circuit sets the maximum output for all other switchable fixtures on that same dimming circuit. Switching luminaires are optimized for use with “sinking” dimming controls (most common in residential and commercial applications). If utilizing switchable luminaires in combination with “sourcing” dimming controls (most common in theatre applications), please ensure that no more than 5 dimming devices totaling more than 10mA source current (typical device is under 2mA) are used on a single dimming circuit. Warranty terms are located at the link below: http://www.acuitybrands.com/resources/terms-and-conditions For Technical Support: Email techsupport-industrial@acuitybrands.com or Phone 1-800-705-SERV (7378) Acuity Brands Terms and Conditions of Sale For Shipments Within the United States or Services Performed Within the United States Effective December 1, 2020 These Terms and Conditions of Sale apply to any and all products or services of Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. or Acuity Brands Technology Services, Inc. (collectively, “Acuity Brands”), unless otherwise specifically agreed to in writing by Acuity Brands. PAYMENT TERMS: Purchaser agrees to pay the prices quoted by Acuity Brands and is responsible for applicable shipping and handling charges, taxes and duties as provided below. Payment terms for sales by Acuity Brands of Acuity Brands products are available at http://www.acuitybrands.com/PurchaserResources/Terms_ and_conditions.aspx under Terms and Conditions of Sale- U.S. Sales—Payment Terms. Invoices for services shall be due and payable within (30) days after the date of the invoice. In addition to all other rights and remedies available under these Terms and Conditions of Sale and under applicable law, Acuity Brands may, in its sole discretion, withhold services until such time as purchaser’s account is paid in full or immediately terminate the provision of services without further liability to purchaser. If purchaser does not pay any invoice, in whole or in part, when due, Acuity Brands shall assess a finance charge on any past due balance at the maximum legal rate permitted on open accounts. If any amount due Acuity Brands is collected by or through an attorney, Acuity Brands shall be entitled to recover all costs of collection, including attorney’s fees equal to 15% of the total principal and interest owed. PRICES: All prices are those in effect at the time of quotation and are subject to change without notice. Unless prices are quoted as “firm,” Acuity Brands reserves the right to invoice at the prices in effect on the date of shipment. Acuity Brands reserves the right to require minimum order amounts. Prices do not include lamps unless specified. FREIGHT ALLOWANCE: Any orders that qualify for a freight allowance will be shipped F.O.B. Origin, freight prepaid and allowed or as otherwise agreed to in writing by Acuity Brands. Any orders that do not qualify for a freight allowance will be shipped F.O.B. Origin, freight prepaid and add. For all orders that qualify for freight allowance, Acuity Brands reserves the right to select the carrier and method of shipment and to route shipments at Acuity Brands’ discretion. Acuity Brands will ship in the manner selected by purchaser provided purchaser assumes any additional transportation costs. See http://www.acuitybrands.com/PurchaserResources/Terms_ and_conditions.aspx under Terms and Conditions of Sale- U.S. Sales—Freight Allowance for specific freight requirements. If purchaser requests Acuity Brands to delay shipping all or any portion of an order beyond its scheduled shipment date, Acuity Brands may impose a service charge of $22 per pallet per day. TAXES: Prices exclude all taxes. Purchaser has responsibility for paying and reporting all applicable taxes levied or based on account of the purchase price or the acquisition, ownership, license or use of the products or services. TRANSPORTATION CLAIMS: Title and risk of loss passes to purchaser upon delivery of products by Acuity Brands to the carrier. Therefore, claims for damages or shortages in transit are the responsibility of purchaser. Bills of Lading marked with “Shippers Load and Count” do not constitute a transfer of liability for the freight or damages from purchaser to Acuity Brands. PACKAGING: Acuity Brands reserves the right to optimize packaging at its discretion. Some products may only be available in bulk package multiples or case quantities. SERVICE AREA LIMITATION: Acuity Brands reserves the right to refuse to make quotations, accept orders or make shipments to points of destination outside of the regular or assigned selling and service area of the applicable Acuity Brands distributor. RETURN OF STOCK MERCHANDISE: No merchandise may be returned without prior written authorization from Acuity Brands. Requests to return merchandise must be made within four (4) months from date of shipment by Acuity Brands. All returns must be shipped prepaid to the location designated on the return authorization. Credit will be issued based on the original invoice price, or price in effect at time of return, whichever is lower, less a minimum disposition charge of 35% (to defray the cost of handling). All returned product must be in salable condition in order to qualify for credit. Return authorization will not be granted when the value of all items to be returned is less than $300. NON-RETURNABLE MERCHANDISE: The following products are not returnable: all non-stock, special, custom made or modified products; all stock products containing time-sensitive components that have reached the end of their warranty or shelf life; clearance and limited-availability products; and all Lithonia Lighting C&I stock and non-stock poles. CANCELLATIONS: Orders for stock products may be cancelled prior to shipment without charge. Cancellation of any order for non-stock products will incur charges for work already performed and for special material purchased by Acuity Brands. Cancellation of any product order after shipment will be subject to the return provisions of these Terms and Conditions of Sale. Orders for services are non-cancellable. If services are not provided prior to invoice, the purchaser is entitled to the performance of ordered services only within the 18-month period after the services invoice date. Acuity Brands will cancel orders for services not provided within the 18-month period. LIMITED WARRANTY: Statements of the limited warranties provided by Acuity Brands for Acuity Brands products, services and service offerings are available at http://www.acuitybrands.com/PurchaserResources/Terms_ and_conditions.aspx under Product Warranties. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: The total liability of Acuity Brands on any and all claims of any kind, whether in contract, warranty, tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise, arising out of or in connection with, or resulting from, Acuity Brands’ sale, delivery, resale, repair, or replacement of any products, service offerings, or the performance of any services, shall in no event exceed the purchase price allocable to the specific product or service which gives rise to the claim, and any and all such liability shall terminate upon the expiration of the applicable warranty period. Acuity Brands shall not be liable for damages that result from the delivery of products or the performance of services that do not occur within purchaser’s specified time frame or for any delay or default in delivering products or performing services where occasioned by any cause beyond the control of Acuity Brands, including without limitation embargoes; shortages of labor, raw materials, or fuel; fires; floods; accidents; acts of war; or other similar causes. IN NO EVENT SHALL ACUITY BRANDS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE SALE OR PERFORMANCE OF ANY PRODUCTS, SERVICES OR SERVICE OFFERINGS, OR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OBLIGATIONS UNDER WARRANTY, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, WHETHER AS THE RESULT OF BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY, OR ANY OTHER THEORY, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LABOR OR EQUIPMENT REQUIRED TO REMOVE AND/OR REINSTALL ORIGINAL OR REPLACEMENT PARTS, LOSS OF TIME, PROFITS OR REVENUES, LACK OR LOSS OF PRODUCTIVITY, INTEREST CHARGES OR COST OF CAPITAL, COST OF SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT, SYSTEMS OR SERVICES, DOWNTIME COSTS, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF PROPERTY OR EQUIPMENT, OR ANY INCONVENIENCE. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY: All intellectual property rights, including copyrights, patents, patent disclosures and inventions (whether patentable or not), trademarks, service marks, trade secrets, know-how and other confidential information, trade dress, trademarks, trade names, and logos, together with all of the goodwill associated therewith, derivative works and all other rights in and to all documents, work product and other materials that are delivered to purchaser or prepared by or on behalf of Acuity Brands in the course of providing the products, services or service offerings (the “Deliverables”), including any related software that may be already installed in or included with the products, services or service offerings (the “Software”), shall be owned by Acuity Brands. Purchaser does not acquire any right, title or interest in the Deliverables except the limited and temporary right to use them as necessary solely in connection with purchaser’s use of the applicable products, services or service offerings. No Software is sold, and all Software is protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. Such Software may be subject to additional terms and conditions that may become applicable when the end user installs or accepts the Software or part of a written agreement between Acuity Brands and the end user. Neither the products nor the Deliverables may be loaned or rented, nor may access be provided to the Software, for a fee or otherwise, to any third party. The Software may be permanently transferred, but only as part of a sale or transfer of the products, provided that no copies are retained, all Software is transferred, and such sale is subject to the applicable terms of these Terms and Conditions of Sale. No product, Deliverables or Software shall be duplicated, reverse engineered, or decompiled by anyone other than Acuity Brands except and only to the extent this restriction is prohibited by law. Purchaser may become aware of trade secrets, know-how and other information of Acuity Brands, within the Deliverables or in connection with the delivery by Acuity Brands of the products, services or service offerings, that would reasonably be understood to be confidential under the circumstances (“Confidential Information”). Purchaser (i) must use the same care and discretion as it employs with its own confidential and proprietary information (but in no event less than reasonable care and discretion) to maintain in confidence, and prevent disclosures of, the Confidential Information, and (ii) must not use the Confidential Information except in connection with its use of the applicable products, services or service offerings. CHOICE OF LAW; CONSENT TO JURISDICTION: These Terms and Conditions of Sale shall be construed and enforced in accordance with the substantive laws of the State of Georgia, USA, without regard to such state's laws related to choice of law. Any State or Federal Court in Fulton County, Georgia shall have jurisdiction for the purpose of any suit or other proceeding arising out of the transactions under these Terms and Conditions of Sale. If Acuity Brands is only providing services, the parties agree that these Terms and Conditions of Sale are a contract for services and are not subject to the uniform commercial code of any state. GENERAL: Purchaser may not assign the right to receive services hereunder, whether by operation of law or otherwise, without the prior written consent of an authorized representative of Acuity Brands, not to be unreasonably withheld. Purchaser acknowledges that Acuity Brands may use subcontractors to perform the services. Unless otherwise specifically agreed in writing by an authorized representative of Acuity Brands, any different or additional terms and conditions proposed by any purchaser in a purchase order, response to a quotation or other proposal, are hereby rejected by Acuity Brands and shall not be incorporated into any order or other agreement for the sale of Acuity Brands products, services or service offerings. Purchaser’s assent to these Terms and Conditions of Sale, along with any Acuity Brands policies concerning the sale and/or resale of the products (see https://acuitybrands.com/support/customer-support/online- sales-policies) which are expressly incorporated by reference, shall be conclusively presumed from purchaser’s acceptance of all or part of any products, services or service offerings ordered. If an authorized representative of Acuity Brands has acknowledged purchaser’s order or proposal, and such acknowledgement is found to constitute an acceptance of an offer, such acceptance is expressly made conditional on purchaser’s assent solely to these Terms and Conditions of Sale which shall form part of the acknowledgement, and acceptance or authorized resale by purchaser of any products or services shall be deemed to constitute such assent. If any quotation or other document of Acuity Brands is deemed to constitute an offer to purchaser, purchaser’s acceptance of such offer is limited to these Terms and Conditions of Sale. Field services and other on-site services performed by Acuity Brands are subject to additional terms and conditions available at http://www.acuitybrands.com/PurchaserResources/Terms_ and_conditions.aspx. under Terms and Conditions of Sale- Other—Field Services Terms and Conditions. These Terms and Conditions of Sale, together with the warranty statements by Acuity Brands under LIMITED WARRANTY above and, if applicable, the Field Services Terms and Conditions, constitute the entire sales agreement between Acuity Brands and purchaser, unless they are made part of a written agreement between Acuity Brands and purchaser. No custom, practice, or course of prior dealings between the parties and no usage of trade shall modify or otherwise affect these Terms and Conditions of Sale. Acuity Brands objects to and rejects any terms between purchaser and any other party, and no such terms, including but not limited to any government regulations or “flowdown” terms, shall be a part of or incorporated into any order from purchaser to Acuity Brands, unless agreed to in writing by an authorized representative of Acuity Brands. These Terms and Conditions of Sale supersede all those published or issued previously by Acuity Brands. All orders are subject to final acceptance by Acuity Brands and credit approval. Any design, submittal or layout provided by Acuity Brands is subject to the disclaimer set forth on the design, submittal or layout. Acuity Brands will not accept orders that require purchaser-furnished components, unless agreed to in writing by an authorized representative of Acuity Brands. Acuity Brands price sheets are not offers to sell and possession of a price sheet does not entitle one to purchase. Acuity Brands shall not be bound to sell any products or provide any services unless it shall (in its sole discretion) accept submitted purchase orders. Acuity Brands reserves the right to change these Terms and Conditions of Sale at any time without notice. ONE LITHONIA WAY, CONYERS, GEORGIA 30012 PHONE 770-922-9000 www.acuitybrands.com © 2020 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Terms and Conditions of Sale-Acuity US, Rev. 12/01/20 STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR ACUITY BRANDS LIGHTING, INC LED/OLED COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS 09.01.2022 Subject to the exclusions set forth below, Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. (“Acuity”) warrants its commercial LED/OLED fixtures, including the LED arrays and the drivers and integral control devices (“Product(s)”) to be free from defect in material and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of shipment from Acuity’s facilities (the “General Warranty”). For Products with embedded ultraviolet (UV) based devices that are not separable from the fixture(s), this Limited Warranty shall apply to both the UV based devices and the Products, but the Warranty Period shall be reduced to two (2) years from the date of shipment from Acuity’s facilities. Acuity further warrants that, for one (1) year, the functionality of the firmware embedded in the Product(s) (“Product Firmware”) will conform in all material respects to the Product documentation available at the start of the warranty period. The LED arrays in the Product(s) will be considered defective in material or workmanship only if a total of 10% or more of the individual light emitting diodes in the Product(s) fail to illuminate. For installed Rough Service Product(s), Acuity warrants that, for the lifetime of the Product(s), the polycarbonate lens and/or polycarbonate housing will withstand breakage resulting from occasional physical abuse and rough handling (the “Rough Service Warranty”), notwithstanding the vandalism exclusion set forth below. This Limited Warranty only covers Product function and does not cover existing building systems and/or network performance of any Product(s) or re-programming or field adjustments of any Product(s) done by anyone that has not been authorized or certified in writing by Acuity. Acuity does not warrant the security of any Product(s). Product(s)that are identified by Acuity as requiring on-site commissioning will only be covered by this Limited Warranty if commissioned by Acuity authorized personnel. Warranty coverage shall not apply to any equipment or integration services of another manufacturer used in conjunction with Acuity Product(s) or where Acuity-authorized cables are not used. This Limited Warranty only applies to the Product(s) when sold for commercial purposes and does not apply to residential product(s) provided by Acuity, all of which are governed by separate limited warranty terms. Except as otherwise set forth herein, ballasts, lamps, emergency batteries/invertors, vandal resistant product, poles, replaceable consumables (such as batteries), computer hardware, mobile computing devices, third party gear, commissioning systems, and components specified by others are excluded from this Limited Warranty. Ultraviolet (UV) based devices that are separable from the Product (s) are warranted separately; and the terms of such warranties are located at https://www.acuitybrands.com/support/warranty/terms-and-conditions. Manufacturers of third-party ballasts, lamps, emergency batteries/invertors and poles incorporated into the Product(s) are solely responsible for any costs or expenses related to any claims, repairs, or replacements associated with any such component(s). Applicable manufacturers shall be solely responsible for the costs related to any claims associated with any such third-party devices. Assistance with warranty claims for any such component(s), and/or copies of each applicable manufacturer’s warranty, if available, may be obtained from an authorized Acuity post-sales or customer service representative. Distech Controls® and eldoLED® products are warranted separately and are not covered by this Limited Warranty. Additionally, software (other than firmware), mobile apps, commissioning services, installation services, remote programming, and other professional services are excluded from this Limited Warranty. Services provided by Acuity are warranted separately; and the terms of such warranties are located at https://www.acuitybrands.com/support/warranty/terms-and-conditions. Applicable third-party service providers are solely responsible for the costs related to any claims associated with any such third- party services. Access to software and mobile apps associated with the Product(s) may be subject to the terms of an End-User License Agreement or Terms and Conditions of Use (“EULA”) and, if applicable, warranty terms applicable for such software and mobile apps are set forth in the applicable EULA. This Limited Warranty applies only when the Product(s) are installed in applications in which ambient temperatures are within the range of specified operating temperatures. Acuity will not be responsible under this Limited Warranty for any failure of the Product(s) that results from external causes such as: acts of nature, including but not limited to harmonic oscillation/winds, ice, or other related storm activity; physical damage; exposure to adverse or hazardous chemical or other substances; use of reactive cleaning agents and/or harsh chemicals to clean the Product(s);external site conditions, including but not limited to: accumulation of debris (natural or otherwise), heavy tree cover, cellular, satellite or radio interference; environmental conditions, including but not limited to: exposure to harsh, corrosive, non-condensing humidity conditions, marine or humidity conditions; vandalism; terroristic acts; fire; power failure, overheating, improper power supply, power surges or dips, and/o r excessive switching; induced vibration; harmonic oscillation, or resonance associated with movement of air currents around Product(s); animal or insect activity; fault or negligence of purchaser, any end-user of the Product(s) and/or any third party not engaged by Acuity; improper or unauthorized access, use, installation, handling, storage, alteration, removal of components, testing, troubleshooting, maintenance or service; removal or interference with the tamper proof label indicating unauthorized opening of the unit; any housing, arm or gasket pierced for any reason ; failure to abide by any product classifications or certifications; failure to comply with any applicable standards, codes, recommendations, product specification sheets, or instructions of Acuity; failure of the end-user to provide full and complete requested data; use of the Product(s) with products, STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR ACUITY BRANDS LIGHTING, INC LED/OLED COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS 09.01.2021 processes or materials supplied by any end-user or third party; or any other occurrences beyond Acuity’s reasonable control. Acuity also will not be responsible under this Limited Warranty for any substantial deterioration in the Product finish that is caused by failure to clean, inspect, or maintain the finish of the Product(s). If the Product(s) are used on existing foundations, roofs, buildings, anchorages or structures, the end-user is solely responsible for the structural integrity of such existing foundations, roofs, buildings, anchorages or structures and all consequences arising from their use. Adequate records of operating history, maintenance, and/or testing (as applicable) must be kept by the end-user and provided to Acuity upon request to substantiate that the Product(s) have failed to comply with the terms of this Limited Warranty. Neither polycarbonate nor acrylic material used in the Products is warranted against yellowing or cracking, as yellowing and/or cracking may naturally occur over time due to normal aging. The Product(s) are not warranted against: cosmetic problems or defects that result from normal wear and tear under ordinary use and that do not affect the performance or use of the Product(s); nor are the Products warranted against costs that may be incurred in connection with changes or modifications to the Product(s) required to accommodate site conditions and/or faulty building construction or design; or failures of Acuity Product(s) resulting from installation or use of aftermarket third party supplied products, components, materials, software, services, telecommunicatio ns equipment, networks or the Internet. Acuity does not warrant that the Product(s) meet the applicable project requirements for performance, legality, safety, security, suitability, or effectiveness for use in a particular application. In no event will Acuity be responsible for any loss resulting from any application in which the Product(s) are used including any fines or penalties resulting from illegal use. Modifications/upgrades to Product Firmware that may be required to address changes in laws or regulations are outside the scope of this Limited Warranty. Product Firmware modifications/upgrades that result in changes to functionality to the Product are also outside the scope of this Limited Warranty. The determination of whether any Product(s) fail to comply with the terms of this Limited Warranty shall be made by Acuity in its sole discretion, with consideration given to the overall performance of the Product(s) as compared to the expected performance per the applicable spec sheet. If the Product(s) are within the Warranty Period, Acuity has received payment in full for the Product(s), and Acuity determines to its satisfaction that the Product(s) fail to comply with the terms of this Limited Warranty, Acuity, at its option, will (a) with respect to defects in material and workmanship service, repair or replace the Product(s) with the same or a functionally equivalent Product(s) or component part(s), which may differ in appearance from the original or (b) with respect to non-conformances of the Product Firmware, will make available for installation a patch to be installed by the end-user within a commercially reasonable time frame to remedy the non-conformance. If the patch is not installed within a commercially reasonable time frame, the Limited Warranty will no longer apply with respect to such non-conformances. Acuity reserves the right to utilize new, reconditioned, refurbished, repaired, or remanufactured Product(s) or parts in the warranty repair or replacement process. For purposes of clarity, this Limited Warranty does not include any removal, commissioning, programming, or reinstallation costs or expenses, including without limitation any labor costs, equipment or other expenses required to remove and/or reinstall original or replacement Product(s) and/or parts. This Limited Warranty extends only to the Product(s) as delivered to, and is for the sole and exclusive benefit of, the original end -user of the Product(s) at the original location. This Warranty may not be transferred or assigned by the original end-user. The repair or replacement of any Product(s) or component part within the Product(s) is the sole and exclusive remedy for failure of the Product(s) to comply with the terms of this Limited Warranty and does not extend the Warranty Period. Warranty claims regarding the Product(s) must be submitted in writing within thirty (30) days of discovery of the defect or failure to an authorized Acuity post-sales or customer service representative. Product(s) or component part(s) may be required to be returned for inspection and verification of non-conformance by Acuity, but no Product(s) or component part(s) will be accepted for inspection, verification or return unless accompanied by a “return authorization number” which can be obtained only from an authorized Acuity post-sales or customer service representative. Acuity is not responsible for any costs, expenses, or damages that may occur in connection with shipment of Product(s) to Acuity, but Acuity shall bear all cost and expense incurred in connection with shipment of replacement Product(s) to the end-user so long as Acuity has sole control over all aspects of shipment, including but not limited to Acuity shipping directly to the end-user. In no event will Acuity accept any other charges related to shipment by any other party. Replacement Product(s) and/or parts provided under the terms of this Limited Warranty are warranted for the remainder of the Warran ty Period as if such Product(s) and/or parts were the original components. THE FOREGOING WARRANTY TERMS ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, AND ACUITY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, RELATING DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY TO THE PRODUCT(S), WHETHER ORAL, WRITTEN, OR ARISING BY COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, INCLUDING ,WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANYWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO AGENT, DISTRIBUTOR OR OTHER SUPPLIER OF ACUITYPRODUCTS HAS THE AUTHORITY TO MODIFY OR AMEND THIS WARRANTY WITHOUT EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM ACUITY. The total liability of Acuity on any and all claims of any kind, whether in contract, warranty, tort (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise, arising out of or in connection with, or resulting from, Acuity’s performance or breach of this Limited STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR ACUITY BRANDS LIGHTING, INC LED/OLED COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS 09.01.2021 Warranty, or from Acuity’s sale, delivery, resale, repair, or replacement of any Product(s) or the furnishing of any services, shall in no event exceed the purchase price allocable to the Produ ct(s) that give rise to the claim, and any and all such liability shall terminate upon the expiration of the Warranty Period specified above. Acuity shall not be liable for damages caused by any delays involving warranty services. IN NO EVENT SHALL ACUITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, ARISING OUT OF THE SALE OR PERFORMANCE OF ANY PRODUCTS OR SERVICES, OR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OBLIGATIONS UNDER WARRANTY EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, WHETHER AS THE RESULT OF BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY, OR ANY OTHER THEORY, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LABOR OR EQUIPMENT REQUIRED TO REMOVE AND/OR REINSTALL ORIGINAL OR REPLACEMENT PARTS, LOSS OF TIME, PROFITS OR REVENUES, LACK OR LOSS OF PRODUCTIVITY, INTEREST CHARGES OR COST OF CAPITAL, COST OF SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT, SYSTEMS, SERVICES OR DOWNTIME COSTS, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA, DAMAGE TO OR LOSS OF USE OF PROPERTY OR EQUIPMENT OR ANY INCONVENIENCE ARISING OUT OF ANYBREACH OF THE FOREGOING WARRANTY OR OBLIGATIONS UNDER SUCH WARRANTY. Acuity reserves the right to modify or discontinue this Limited Warranty without notice, provided that any such modification or discontinuance will only be effective with respect to any Product(s) purchased after such modification or discontinuance. If there is any conflict or inconsistency between the English language version of this Limited Warranty and any version translated into any other language, the English language version shall prevail. Trademarks referenced are trademarks of Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. and if marked with the ® symbol are registered in the U.S. and may be registered in other countries. This Limited Warranty shall be construed and enforced in the accordance with the laws of the State of Georgia and the applicable laws of the United States. NOTE: This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. NOTE: Acuity Brands is not a lighting specifier, and product recommendations for any lighting design project are for informational purposes only, without any warranty as to accuracy, completeness, legality for use in a particular application, or otherwise. NOTE: The Product(s) must be returned within ten (10) days after receiving the return authorization number and the shipping box must be clearly marked with the return authorization number. Failure to follow this procedure will delay any potential warranty resolution. Product(s) returned without a valid return authorization number will either be refused or returned to sender at sender’s expense. NO PRODUCT RETURNS WILL BE ACCEPTED BY ACUITY IF NOT ACCOMPANIED BY A VALID RETURN AUTHORIZATION NUMBER. FIELD REPORT Field Report Summary This report is a follow-up to the replacement of Panelboard ‘D’ which took place on Monday, December 12, 2022. The cutover began early Monday morning and was completed at around 6:30pm. The following items were observed as being incomplete or in need of corrective measures. 1. The equipment grounding conductor installed between the transformer and panel ‘D’ was #6AWG. It should be #4AWG. 2. The grounding electrode conductor between the transformer and building grounding electrode is very short and did not make it far into the transformer enclosure. It is only bonded to the transformer at the new feeder conduit ground bushing (feeder to panel d). It is in this bushing with the feeder equipment grounding conductor. This grounding electrode conductor needs to be reworked and landed on a dedicated lug. 3. Please color code the brown and yellow conductors in panel D. 4. Several circuits did not work – the elevator lobby lights and the escort phone (near the security booth and bridge) were noted as not working. All circuits need to be checked and reworked as required to energize equipment. 5. Accurate printed panel schedule and engraved identification label needed. 6. There several open junction boxes in electrical room and one outside of electrical room. 7. One open junction box is a 2-gang box to right of panel D. This box seemed to be pretty packed with conductors and splices. Please provide a box extension as well as a box cover. To: RND Architecture 3608 University Drive, Suite 204 Durham, NC 27707 Attention: Steve Pulling Date of Report: EE Project No.: Project: Location: Contractor: Owner: Weather: Temperature: December 13, 2022 19-112 Elevator Mod. Cardinal Deck BAR Construction UNC Partly Cloudy 48F at 4:00pm Present at Site: Date of Visit: Dennis Hayes December 12, 2022 TDS 12/13 TDS 12/28 TDS 12/13 TDS 12/13 TDS 12/13 TDS 12/13 TDS 12/13 All items above has been completed as of 12/28/2022. Timothy Shores Electrical Technologies, Inc. A WOMAN OWNED BUSINESS 7512 CONNELLEY DRIVE  HANOVER, MD 21076 410-768-2200  800-966-2212  FAX 410-768-5649 CHESAPEAKE, VA 757-436-1301  800-394-2373 FAX 757-436-3176 STERLING, VA 703-834-5399  888-834-5008 FAX 703-834-5396 DOVER, DE 302-527-2373  888-553-2373 FAX 302-346-4806 CLAYTON, NC 919-550-2699  800-849-8886 FAX 919-550-0719 LAURINBURG, NC 910-276-1112 FAX 910-276-5811 WILMINGTON, NC 910-762-5418  800-948-5489 FAX 910-762-9279 MYRTLE BEACH, SC 843-448-9075 FAX 843-448-9020 LANCASTER, PA 717-464-7440 FAX 717-464-1011 YORK, PA 717-741-9980  866-922-2373 FAX 717-741-9981 OPERATION AND MAINTENACE MANUAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM UNC-CH CARDINAL PARKING DECK 140 MANNING DRIVE CHAPEL HILL, NORTH CAROLINA MEMBER NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF FIRE EQUIPMENT DISTRIBUTORS MEMBER NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION MEMBER FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS ASSOCIATION MEMBER AMERICAN FIRE SPRINKLER ASSOCIATION MEMBER AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM ASSOCIATION MEMBER BUILDING OWNERS AND MANAGERS ASSOCIATION UNC CARDINAL PARKING DECK 140 MANNING DRIVE CHAPEL HILL, NORTH CAROLINA OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL NFS2-3030 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM General Contractor: Bar Construction Company, Inc. 611-A Industrial Ave. Greensboro, NC 27406 Fire Alarm Contractor: BFPE International 115 Bestwood Drive Clayton, NC 27520 Project No.: RA-A6258-A-21 Date: January 23, 2023 UNC CARDINAL PARKING DECK 140 MANNING DRIVE CHAPEL HILL, NORTH CAROLINA NFS2-3030 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM O&M TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. NFS2-3030 Fire Alarm Control Panel System Overview 1a. Testing and Maintenance 2. NFS2-3030 Fire Alarm Control Panel Operation Manual 3. Fire Alarm System Preventive Maintenance and Testing Instructions NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 11 Section 2: System Overview 2.1 System Description This manual describes the NFS2-3030, based on the CPU2-3030D (with display) and CPU2-3030ND (without display). It differs from the NFS-3030 as follows: • It has been modified to include more memory. • The display contains more information – a “Controls Active” LED and an “Acknowledge” button. • There are no panel module circuits – panel circuit module functions are performed by Digital Voice Command equipment and SLC devices. 2.1.1 Standard Features • Connections to easily mount from one to ten Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) loops • Network operation • Uses Notifier’s VIEW® early warning fire detection and the FlashScan® or CLIP families of detectors and modules • Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory and Security relays • Support for 32 annunciator addresses with either 64 or 96 points each (depending on the capability of the annunciator) • Supports Style 4, Style 6, Style 7 SLC loops • Logic Equations • Multi-line display • Ability to activate local sounder or relay bases in alarm or pre-alarm • Alarm verification pre-alarm indication (NYC) • Supervisory duct and smoke detectors • Supports Intelligent Sensing algorithms • EIA-485 connections for wiring ACS annunciators (including LDM custom graphic annunciators), TM-4 transmitter • EIA-232 connection for printer • Autoprogram feature for faster programming of new devices • Easy connection to VeriFire® Tools programming utility • The basic system power supply is addressable, charges sealed lead-acid batteries ranging in capacity from 7 to 200 amp hours, and provides up to 5 amps of power for use by the CPU. • Easy connection to auxiliary power supplies and battery chargers for custom design of very large systems. • Diagnostic LEDs and switches • Ground fault detection • Support for Remote Text Display (LCD-160) • Support for Display and Control Center (DCC) functionality 2.1.2 Options Refer to Section 2.2 “System Components” for descriptions of the various optional modules. • Rubberized keypad with a standard “QWERTY” keyboard layout, a 640-character LCD display, indicator LEDs, and switches. • Separately ordered Loop Control Modules and Loop Expander Modules provide up to ten SLC loops. 12 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 System Overview System Components • Optional equipment includes: ACS devices, UDACT Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter, ACM-8R remote relay module to provide additional relay points, and audio/voice components. 2.1.3 System Limitations System expansion must take into consideration the following: 1. The physical limitations of the cabinet configuration. 2. The electrical limitations of the system power supply. 3. The capacity of the secondary power source (standby batteries). 2.2 System Components Central Processing Unit (CPU) and Keypad/Display The central processing unit for the NFS2-3030 system can be ordered with a keypad/display (P/N CPU2-3030D) or without a keypad/display (P/N CPU2-3030ND). CPU2-3030D serves as “primary display” version for ULC applications. CPU2-3030ND is intended for use in network applications; LEDs and momentary switches on the printed circuit board mimic those on the keypad to enable operation and trouble- shooting at the panel when it is used without a local primary display. Power supply The main power supply is AMPS-24/AMPS-24E, which provides +24 VDC power and a battery charger for a basic system. Auxiliary power supplies and/or battery chargers are available to customize large systems. Enclosures Four cabinet sizes are available; doors and backboxes are ordered separately. “A” size backboxes hold one row of modules, “B” size backboxes hold two rows, “C” size backboxes hold three rows, and “D” size backboxes hold four rows. See Section 2.4 “System Cabinets” for basic description. A variety of dress panels, trim rings, and blank modules are available to accompany specific combinations of system equipment; contact Notifier for a complete parts list. SLC Loops: LCM-320, LEM-320 To provide one SLC loop, connect one LCM-320 to the panel. Connect an LEM-320 to the LCM-320 to provide a second loop. Up to five pairs of modules can be installed on the panel to provide a maximum of ten SLC loops. Network Connection Connect a wire or fiber version of the NCM or the HS-NCM to provide a connection to the Noti•Fire•Net (network version 5.0 or higher) or High-Speed Noti•Fire•Net. Annunciators The NFS2-3030 supports ACM-24AT/ACM-48A (and their expanders) with either 64 or 96 points at an address, as well as ACM-16AT/ACM-32A/LDM-32 (and their expanders) with 64 points at an address and Notifier’s other ACS devices. (See Section 2.5 “Compatible Equipment” if looking for specific ACS devices.) Audio System Voice evacuation applications are documented in the Audio System manuals: Digital Audio Series Manual, and the AA-series Audio Amplifiers Manual. !WARNING: UL 9TH EDITION COMPLIANCE THIS PRODUCT HAS BEEN CERTIFIED TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS IN THE STANDARD FOR CONTROL UNITS AND ACCESSORIES FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS, UL 864 9TH EDITION. OPERATION OF THE NFS2-3030/E WITH PRODUCTS NOT TESTED FOR UL 864 9TH EDITION HAS NOT BEEN EVALUATED AND MAY NOT COMPLY WITH NFPA 72 AND/OR THE LATEST EDITION OF UL 864. THESE APPLICATIONS WILL REQUIRE THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION (AHJ). THIS MANUAL MENTIONS PRODUCTS THAT HAVE RECEIVED UL 864, 9TH EDITION CERTIFICATION, AND ALSO MENTIONS PRODUCTS THAT HAVE NOT. FOR A COMPLETE LIST OF ALL PERIPHERALS THAT CAN BE USED WITH THIS FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP), AND WHICH OF THOSE PERIPHERALS HAVE NOT RECEIVED UL 864, 9TH EDITION CERTIFICATION AND MAY ONLY BE USED IN RETROFIT APPLICATIONS, SEE SECTION 2.5, “COMPATIBLE EQUIPMENT”, ON PAGE 16. NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 13 Product Diagram System Overview 2.3 Product Diagram The control panel electronics are contained on one printed circuit board (PCB) that holds the central processing unit (CPU). The CPU can be purchased with or without keypad and display; (see Section 2.2 “System Components” for P/N details). Connections are identical on both versions. The following figure illustrates the location of the various connections, switches, jumpers and LEDs on the circuit board. See Section 3 “Installation” for more details. Figure 2.1 CPU Connections TB4 Alarm Relay TB3 Trouble Relay TB2 SUPV/ALARM Relay TB1 SECUR/ALARM Relay Note: Relay circuits are power-limited only if connected to a power-limited signal source. Relays are rated for 2A@30VDC resistive. See Figure 3.17, “Form-C Relay Connections” on page 32. SW2 Supervisory SW1 Security Future Use TB7 ACS (power-limited, supervised) TB9, RDP pins: LCD-160 or LCD-80 (supervised) *TB5, left side. Printer (isolated) *TB5 CTX/CRX CRT-2 or Keltron printer supervision (TB5 CTX, REF No connection) *J1, Network Connection (NUP), Cable P/N 75556 J4 Backlight connection SW3 Acknowledge SW4 Signal Silence SW5 System Reset SW6 Lamp Test Lithium battery for backup of on-board memory (See Section 3.5.4 “Memory-Backup Battery”) J9 Keypad Connection Test Fixture: No connection TB6 Accessory Power (See Section 3.10 “Connecting Power Sources and Outputs”) J13 Power connections (non-power-limited). See Section 3.10 “Connecting Power Sources and Outputs”. J6 Security switch connection J5 Trouble bus connection CP U 2 3 0 3 0 . w m f Status Indicator LEDs (See Figure 2.3) *J7 SLC Loop Control and Expander Modules (LCM-320, LEM-320) Cable P/N 75565 Service-level switches for local operation without keypad/display Note: Dotted line indicates location of optional keypad & LCD display *Circuits marked with an asterisk are supervised by communication loss. See Appendix A, “Electrical Specifications” for details. J2 LCD Connection TB9, TOut pins: LCD-80 Return J15 USB VeriFire Tools Connection 14 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 System Overview Product Diagram The keyboard/display assembly is shown in Figure 2.2. As shown in Figure 2.3, LEDs on the keyboard/display are repeated on the printed circuit board. This enables operation and trouble- shooting when the panel is used without the display assembly. Figure 2.2 CPU2-3030D (Shown with Two Annunciators in DP-DISP) 2.3.1 Main Power Supply The AMPS-24/E addressable main power supply provides a total of up to 5 A to the CPU. During normal operation, the AMPS-24 can recharge batteries ranging in capacity from 7 to 200 amp- hours. Previous versions of the AMPS-24/E can recharge batteries ranging in capacity from 26 to 200 amp-hours. Previous versions may be identified by the location of the AC power connection on the top edge of the assembly. The AC power connection for the current version is inset from the left edge. The AMPS-24/E also provides: • Up to 5 A/24 V Auxiliary power • Up to 0.5 A/24 V Accessory power • Up to 0.15 A/5 V Accessory power See Section 3.10, “Connecting Power Sources and Outputs”, on page 32 for basic wiring connections; see the AMPS-24/E Manual for complete details. CP U - 3 0 3 0 D - A C S . c d r Figure 2.3 Status Indicator LEDs LED1 Power (Green) LED3 Fire Alarm (Red) LED8 Pre-Alarm (Red) LED7 Security (Blue) LED9 Supervisory (Yellow) LED6 System Trouble (Yellow) LED12 Other Event (Yellow) LED10 Signals Silenced (Yellow) LED11 Point Disabled (Yellow) LED5 CPU Failure (Yellow) LED4 Factory Use Only LEDs on Printed Circuit Board LEDs on Keypad 30 3 0 - L E D S U L 9 t h . w m f , 3 0 3 0 N C A 2 k e y p a d . w m f Controls Active (Keypad only) NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 15 System Cabinets System Overview Refer to the AMPS-24/E Manual to determine whether your system requires an auxiliary power supply. 2.4 System Cabinets The CPU and modules are installed in a CAB-4 series backbox. There are four different sizes available, holding from one to four rows of equipment plus batteries (up to two 26AH batteries). Backboxes are ordered separately from doors. The doors can be mounted on the left or the right side of the cabinet; reversible hinges are provided so that this choice can be made Section 2.5, “Compatible Equipment”, on page 16 in the field. Doors open a full 180 degrees and have locks. Mounting methods include surface-mounting or semi-flush mounting on a wall between 16 inch (406.4 mm) on-center studs. A trim ring option is available for semi-flush mounting. External measurements for each cabinet backbox are provided below. Refer to CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Document (shipped with your cabinet) for specific mounting drawings and dimensions. The CPU and adjacent first-row modules mount in chassis CHS-M3. Additional rows of modules mount in the cabinet using CHS-4, CHS-4N, CHS-4L, or other chassis compatible with CAB-4 series enclosures. Some additional components available in the CAB-4 series include: • DP-DISP. An Inner Dress Panel for covering the backbox area surrounding various modules; for use in the top row. • BMP-1. Blank Module Plate for covering an unused module position. Provides another location for mounting option boards such as TM-4 or NCM/HS-NCM. • BP2-4. Battery dress panel. • DP-1B. Blank panel for covering recessed equipment in second, third or fourth rows of backbox. • ADP-4B. Annunciator dress panel; for use in all but the top row. For information on audio chassis and dress panels, refer to the DVC and DAA Audio Series Manual. A-size backbox (one row) 24.125 in (612.78 mm) wide 20.125 in (511.18 mm) tall 5.218 in (132.54 mm) deep Optional trim ring TR-A4 DR-A4 B-size backbox (two rows) 24.125 in (612.78 mm) wide 28.625 in (727.08 mm) tall 5.218 in (132.54 mm) deep Optional trim ring TR-B4 DR-B4, ADDR-B4 C-size backbox (three rows) 24.125 in (612.78 mm) wide 37.250 in (946.15 mm) tall 5.218 in (132.54 mm) deep Optional trim ring TR-C4 DR-C4, ADDR-C4 D-size backbox (four rows) 24.125 in (612.78 mm) wide 45.875 in (1165.23 mm) tall 5.218 in (132.54 mm) deep Optional trim ring TR-D4 DR-D4, ADDR-D4 16 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 System Overview Compatible Equipment 2.5 Compatible Equipment Compatible Notifier and System Sensor equipment that connects directly to the CPU is listed below. These are the most common devices at time of publishing; the most complete list of compatible intelligent SLC loop devices is provided in the SLC Wiring Manual; for conventional non-addressable equipment see the Device Compatibility Document. These devices are UL and ULC listed unless marked otherwise (in parentheses next to the product). Other control panels and their equipment can also be connected in a network, via Noti•Fire•Net version 5.0 or High-Speed Noti•Fire•Net; refer to the Noti•Fire•Net Version 5.0 Installation Manual or the High-Speed Noti•Fire•Net Installation Manual for details. Some products are documented in a separate manual; see Section 1.3 “Related Documents”. UL 9th Edition Notifier Compatible Equipment AA-30 30-Watt Audio Amplifier AA-100 100-Watt Audio Amplifier AA-120 120-Watt Audio Amplifier ACM-24AT Annunciator Control Module ACM-48A Annunciator Control Module ACM-8R Annunciator Control Module ACPS-610 Addressable Charger/Power Supply ACT-1 Audio Coupling Transformer ACT-2 Audio Coupling Transformer AEM-24AT Annunciator Expander Module AEM-48A Annunciator Expander Module AKS-1B Annunciator Key Switch AMPS-24/E Addressable Main Power Supply APJ-1B Annunciator Phone Jack-G B200S/R Intelligent Sounder Base BX-501 Intelligent Detectors/Sensors Base B501 USA Intelligent Detector Base B501BH-2 Sounder Base B501BHT-2 Temporal Sounder Base B710LP European Intelligent Detector Base B710HD HARSH Detector Base B224RB Low-profile Relay Base B224BI Isolator Base for Low-profile Detectors CMX-1 Addressable Control Module CMX-2 Addressable Control Module CPX-551 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector CPX-751 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector DAA Series Digital Audio Amplifiers DPI-232 Direct Panel Interface DVC-EM Digital Voice Command FAPT-851 (Acclimate Plus™) Combination photo/heat Detector FCM-1NAC Module FCM-1-REL Control Module FCPS-24S6/S8 Field Charger/Power Supply FDX-551 Intelligent Thermal Sensor FDX-551R Intelligent Thermal Rate-of-Rise Sensor FHS Fireman's Handset FTM-1 Telephone Module FMM-1 Monitor Module FMM-101 Mini Monitor Module FMM-4-20 Monitor Module FSC-851 IntelliQuad Multi-Criteria Smoke Detector FSD-751P/RP/PL Duct Detectors FSI-751 Ion Detector FSI-851 Ion Detector FSM-101 Pull Station Monitor Module FPJ Fireman's Phone Jack FRM-1 Relay Module FDM-1 Dual Monitor Module FSL-751 FlashScan VIEW® Laser Detector FSH-751 HARSH™ Photo Detector FSP-751 Photo Detector FSP-851 Photo Detector, listed for use in ducts FSP-751T Photo/Thermal Detector FSP-851T Photo/heat Detector, listed for use in ducts FST-751 Thermal Detector FST-751R Thermal Rate-of-rise Detector FST-851 Thermal Detector FST-851R Thermal Rate-of-rise Detector FST-851H High-temperature Thermal Detector FZM-1 Zone Module HS-NCM-MF High-Speed Network Communications Module (Multi-Mode Fiber) HS-NCM-MFSF High-Speed Network Communications Module (Multi-Mode Fiber to Single-Mode Fiber) HS-NCM-SF High-Speed Network Communications Module (Single-Mode Fiber) HS-NCM-W High-Speed Network Communications Module (Wire) HS-NCM-WMF High-Speed Network Communications Module (Wire to Multi-Mode Fiber) HS-NCM-WSF High-Speed Network Communications Module (Wire to Single-Mode Fiber) HPX-751 HARSH™ Hostile Environment Smoke Detector ISO-X Loop Fault Isolator Module LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display Module LCD-160 Liquid Crystal Display LCM-320 Loop Control Module LDM-32 Lamp Driver Module LDM-E32 Lamp Driver Module LDM-R32 Lamp Driver Module LEM-320 Loop Expander Module LPX-751 VIEW® Low Profile Laser Detector !WARNING: UL 9TH EDITION COMPLIANCE THIS PRODUCT HAS BEEN CERTIFIED TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS IN THE STANDARD FOR CONTROL UNITS AND ACCESSORIES FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS, UL 864 9TH EDITION. OPERATION OF THE NFS2-3030/E WITH PRODUCTS NOT TESTED FOR UL 864 9TH EDITION HAS NOT BEEN EVALUATED AND MAY NOT COMPLY WITH NFPA 72 AND/OR THE LATEST EDITION OF UL 864. THESE APPLICATIONS WILL REQUIRE THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION (AHJ). PERIPHERAL DEVICES WERE LISTED UNDER UL 8TH EDITION AND MAY ONLY BE USED IN RETROFIT APPLICATIONS (SEE SECTION 1.2, “UL 864 COMPLIANCE”, ON PAGE 8). NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 17 Compatible Equipment System Overview MMX-2 Addressable Monitor Module MMX-101 Addressable Mini Monitor Module NBG-12LX Series Addressable Manual Pull Station NCA-2 Network Communications Annunciator NCM-F Network Communications Module (Fiber) NCM-W Network Communications Module (Wire) NCS Network Control Station N-ELR Assortment ELR Pack with Mounting Plate ONYXWorks® Workstation Network Monitoring Workstation PRN-6 80-Column Printer EOL-CR/CB Assortment ELR Pack with Mounting Plate R-120 120 Ohm End-of-Line Resistor R-2.2K 2.2K End-of-Line Resistor R-27K 27K End-of-Line Resistor R-470 470 End-of-Line Resistor R-47K 47K End-of-Line Resistor A77-716B End-of-Line Resistor Assembly RA400 Remote Annunciator RA400Z Remote Annunciator with diode RKS-S Remote Security Keyswitch (Not ULC-listed) RPJ-1 Remote Phone Jack RPT-485F EIA-485 Repeater (Fiber) RPT-485W EIA-485 Repeater (Wire) RPT-485WF EIA-485 Repeater (Wire/Fiber) RM-1 Remote Microphone RM-1SA Remote Microphone SCS-8, SCE-8 Smoke Control System SDX-551 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector SDX-551TH Intelligent Photoelectric and Thermal Detector SDX-751 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector STS-1 Security Tamper Switch (Not ULC-listed) TM-4 Transmitter Module UDACT Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter UZC-256 Universal Zone Coder VeriFire® Tools Upload/Download Software XPIQ Quad Intelligent Audio Transponder (Audio Applications) XP6-C Supervised Control Module XP6-R Six Relay Control Module XP10-M Ten Input Monitor Module XP6-MA Six Zone Interface Module System Sensor Compatible Equipment FSB-200S Single-ended beam smoke detector with sensitivity testing. FSB-200 Single-ended beam smoke detector. A2143-00 End of Line Resistor Assembly EOLR-1 End of Line Resistor Assembly Retrofit Equipment: Compatible Notifier Equipment Listed Under Previous Editions of UL 864 NOTE: The products in this list have not received UL 864 9th Edition certification and may only be used in retrofit applications (see Section 1.2, “UL 864 Compliance”, on page 8). ACM-16AT Annunciator Control Module ACM-32A Annunciator Control Module ACPS-2406 Auxiliary Charger/Power Supply AEM-16AT Annunciator Expander Module AEM-32A Annunciator Expander Module AFM-16A Annunciator Fixed Module AFM-32A Annunciator Fixed Module AMG-1/E Audio Message Generator APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply B501BH/B501BHT Sounder Base BGX-101L Addressable Manual Pull Station CHG-120 Battery Charger FCPS-24 Field Charger/Power Supply IPX-751 Advanced Multi-Sensor Intelligent Detector MMX-1 Addressable Monitor Module NCA Network Communications Annunciator VS4095 Keltron Printer (Dress plate P-40) (Not ULC-listed) PRN-4, PRN-5 80-Column Printers RFX Wireless Transmitter (version 2.0 and higher) (Not ULC-listed): SDRF-751 Wireless Photo/Thermal Smoke Detector; 5817CB Wireless Monitor Module XPIQ Quad Intelligent Audio Transponder (NAC Applications) XP5-C Transponder Control Module XP5-M Transponder Monitor Module XPC-8 Transponder Control Module XPM-8 Transponder Monitor Module XPM-8L Transponder Monitor Module XPP-1 Transponder Processor XPR-8 Transponder Relay Module 18 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Section 3: Installation 3.1 Preparing for Installation Choose a location for the fire alarm system that is clean, dry, and vibration-free with moderate temperature. The area should be readily accessible with sufficient room to easily install and maintain it. There should be sufficient space for cabinet door(s) to open completely. Carefully unpack the system and inspect for shipping damage. Count the number of conductors needed for all devices and find the appropriate knockouts. (Refer to Section 3.11 “UL Power- limited Wiring Requirements” for selection guidelines.) Before installing the fire alarm system, read the following: • Review the installation precautions at the front of this manual. • Installers should be familiar with the standards and codes specified in Section 1.1 “Standards and Other Documents”. • All wiring must comply with the National and Local codes for fire alarm systems. • Do not draw wiring into the bottom 9 inches (22.86 cm) of the cabinet except when using a separate battery cabinet; this space is for internal battery installation. • Review installation instructions in Section 3.2 “Installation Checklist”. 3.2 Installation Checklist The checklist that follows contains references to information included in other manuals; see Section 1.3 “Related Documents” for document part numbers. !WARNING: RISK OF IRREPARABLE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAKE SURE TO INSTALL SYSTEM COMPONENTS IN THE SEQUENCE LISTED BELOW. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN DAMAGE THE CONTROL PANEL AND OTHER SYSTEM COMPONENTS. !WARNING: RISK OF IRREPARABLE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE WEAR A STATIC DISCHARGE STRAP ON WRIST TO PREVENT EQUIPMENT DAMAGE. Task Refer to: 1. Mount the cabinet backbox to the wall. Section 3.3 “Mounting a Cabinet” 2. Attach CPU to chassis Section 3.5 “Attaching the CPU & Chassis” 3. Attach option boards (e.g. SLC loop modules, network communications modules, and other devices of the same size) to chassis. • Section 3.6 “Attaching Option Boards” • Section 3.7 “Connecting the Network Communications Module” • Installation document for the specific device 4. Attach chassis to backbox as appropriate for system design Section 3.4 “Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis” 5. Wire relays Section 3.9 “Form-C Relays on the CPU” 6. Attach & wire other system components †Audio/Voice equipment DVC Digital Voice Command Manual, DAA Digital Audio Amplifiers Manual, AA-series Audio Amplifiers Manual †Annunciators and other ACS devices Installation document for the specific device (such as ACS Manual, ACM-8R Manual, etc.) †Remote Data Port devices LCD-160 Manual Table 3.1 Installation Checklist (1 of 2) NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 19 Mounting a Cabinet Installation 3.3 Mounting a Cabinet This section provides instructions for mounting the CAB-4 Series backbox to a wall. Follow these guidelines when mounting the backbox: • Locate the backbox so that the top edge is 66 inches (1.6764 m) above the surface of the finished floor. • Allow sufficient clearance around cabinet for door to swing freely. (See Section 2.4 “System Cabinets”.) • Use the four holes in the back surface of the backbox to provide secure mounting (See Figure 3.1). • Mount the backbox on a surface that is in a clean, dry, vibration-free area. †Printer or other output device(s) Section 3.13 “Installing Printers” †Network devices Noti•Fire•Net Version 4.0 & Higher Manual/High-Speed Noti•Fire•Net Manual, and/or Installation document for specific device(s) 7. Wire the Signaling Line Circuits (Notification Appliance Circuits and Initiating Device Circuits) Section 3.14 “Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)” and the SLC Wiring Manual 8. Calculate the proper battery rating. Main Power Supply Manual 9. Install main power supply & batteries in separate enclosure. Run cable to main & optional power supplies, DC power outputs, relays, etc. • Section 3.10 “Connecting Power Sources and Outputs” • Section 3.11 “UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements” WARNING: DO NOT ACTIVATE POWER AT THIS TIME. DO NOT CONNECT BATTERIES. †Main power supply.• Main Power Supply Manual • BB-100/200 Cabinet Installation Instructions †Auxiliary power supply and/or external battery charger Auxiliary power supply manuals and/or battery charger manuals. Note: If using multiple power supplies with one set of batteries, refer to main power supply manual for connection requirements. 10. Check that all mounting holes are secured to insure a proper Earth Ground connection. 11. Connect wire shielding to Earth Ground. 12. Remove insulator from lithium battery on CPU Section 3.5.4 “Memory-Backup Battery” 13. Apply AC power to the control panel by placing the external circuit breaker to the ON position. Do NOT connect batteries until AC power is checked (see next step). 14. Check AC power. Section 3.10.3 “Checking AC Power” 15. Connect the batteries using interconnect cable as described in power supply manual. 16. Install the dress panels, doors and covers. CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Document 17. Program the control panel. Programming Manual. 18. Field test the system. Section 5 “Testing the System” Task Refer to: Table 3.1 Installation Checklist (2 of 2) ! !CAUTION: UNLESS YOU ARE FAMILIAR WITH THE PLACEMENT OF COMPONENTS WITHIN THIS BACKBOX, ONLY USE THE KNOCKOUT LOCATIONS PROVIDED FOR CONDUIT ENTRY. 20 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Installation Mounting a Cabinet Follow the instructions below. 1. Mark and pre-drill holes for the top two keyhole mounting bolts. 2. Select and punch open the appropriate knock-outs. (For selection guidelines, see Section 3.11 “UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements”.) 3. Using the keyholes, mount the backbox over the two screws. 4. Mark the location for the two lower holes, remove the backbox and drill the mounting holes. 5. Mount the backbox over the top two screws, then install the remaining fasteners. Tighten all fasteners securely. 6. Feed wires through appropriate knockouts. 7. Install CPU and other components according to this section, before installing hinges and door (see CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Document). Keyholes 2 places Mounting holes 2 places CAB-4 Series backbox, A-size (one-row) CA B 4 c a b i n e t m o u n t i n g h o l e s . c d r CAB-4 Series backbox, D-size (four-row) Chassis- mounting studs (2 per row of backbox) Chassis- mounting studs (2 per row of backbox) Figure 3.1 Backbox-Mounting Holes and Chassis-Mounting Studs NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 21 Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis Installation 3.4 Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis The NFS2-3030 allows for flexible system design. It mounts in a CAB-4 series backbox using either CHS-M3 or CA-2. Follow these guidelines when deciding where to locate equipment in the backbox. There are four basic positions available on a chassis; the number of layers that can be mounted in each position depends on the chassis model and the module size. „CHS-M3 The CPU mounts in chassis CHS-M3 in the top row of the cabinet. The CPU and its optional display occupy the left half of the chassis (positions 1 and 2, see Figure 3.2). Positions 3 and 4 of CHS-M3 can hold up to four layers of equipment including option boards and annunciators (door-mounted in front of CHS-M3). See Figure 3.4 for possible configurations of these four layers. The BMP-1 Blank Module Plate covers unused positions and also provides a location to door- mount some option boards (see BMP-1 Product Installation Drawing for details). „CA-2 The CA-2 Audio Chassis assembly includes hardware to mount an audio command center installation in two rows of a CAB-4 backbox. Equipment will be located in the chassis as shown in Figure 3.6. See Section 3.5.2, “Mounting in the CA-2 Audio System Chassis” and the CA-2 Installation Document. Figure 3.2 Chassis CHS-M3 12 34Four positions on chassis CHS-M3 Positions 3 and 4: Four layers of equipment Positions 1 and 2: CPU and/or NCA-2 CH S - M 3 . c d r Use appropriate mounting slot, see Figure 3.5 on page 23 Figure 3.3 CA-2 Audio Chassis Assembly CA 2 c h a s s i s a s s e m b l y . w m f Half-chassis for control panel and optional pair of Loop Control and Expander Modules. Half-chassis for DVC and optional NCM/HS-NCM. Microphone and handset well Back plate 22 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Installation Attaching the CPU & Chassis „Options for Mounting Other Equipment Second, third, and fourth rows of equipment use any chassis compatible with CAB-4 series backboxes, such as CHS-4N (shipped as part of CHS-4MB) or CHS-4L. Refer to the CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Document for a complete list. Some equipment (such as annunciators) can be door-mounted as shown in Figure 3.9; refer to your equipment’s documentation for instructions. Examples of option boards are LCM-320, LEM-320, wire and fiber versions of the NCM and HS- NCM, TM-4, and DPI-232; see Section 3.6 “Attaching Option Boards”. The documentation shipped with your equipment may also contain device-specific instructions. 3.5 Attaching the CPU & Chassis Note for CPU2-3030D. Due to the difficulty of reaching under the keypad, it may be convenient to remove the insulator from the lithium memory-backup battery before mounting the CPU into the chassis. See Section 3.5.4 “Memory-Backup Battery”. 3.5.1 Mounting in CHS-M3 Mount CPU into positions 1 and 2 of CHS-M3 as follows; equipment may be mounted to the chassis before or after the chassis is mounted in the backbox. Some equipment may be door- mounted directly in front of the CPU; see Section 3.4 “Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis” and the manual shipped with the other device. 1. Attach four stand-offs to chassis as shown in Figure 3.5. CPU2-3030D (with keypad/display) requires the longer stand-offs: 1.5 inch (38.1 mm); CPU2-3030ND (without keypad/display) requires the shorter stand-offs: 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) 2. Slide circuit-board tabs into slots on chassis as shown in Figure 3.5. Layer 4 mounted to PEM studs and tab-slot Layer 4 door-mounted* Layers 1&2&3 mounted to PEM studs on chassis Layers 1&2&3 mounted to PEM studs on chassis Layers 1&2 mounted to PEM studs on chassis Layer 4 mounted to PEM studs and tab-slot; Layer 3 suspended from Layer 4 CH S - M 3 - o p t i o n s . c d r *Note: If CHS-4N is used, door-mounting is only for use with ACM-24AT and ACM-48A series annunciators. Figure 3.4 Configuring Equipment in Chassis (Side View): Positions 3 and 4 of CHS-M3, All 4 Positions of CHS-4N NOTE:It is recommended that system design take into consideration the UL requirements for minimum separation of power-limited and non-power-limited wiring; for example, having all non- power-limited circuits grouped in one area of the cabinet (see Section 3.11 “UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements” and your power supply manual). NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 23 Attaching the CPU & Chassis Installation 3. Place the board over the stand-offs so that mounting holes line up with those on the chassis. Secure all stand-offs with screws provided. 3.5.2 Mounting in the CA-2 Audio System Chassis The NFS2-3030 will mount into the CA-2 chassis assembly—along with a DVC, microphone and optional telephone handset— as part of an audio command center installation. The CA-2 is a two-row assembly consisting of • a back plate that attaches to the backbox • two half-chassis, each of which takes up the left half of a backbox row • a microphone and telephone handset well • a microphone CA-2 can also mount TELH-1, an optional telephone handset. !CAUTION: IT IS CRITICAL THAT ALL MOUNTING HOLES OF THE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL ARE SECURED WITH A SCREW OR STAND-OFF TO INSURE CONTINUITY OF EARTH GROUND. CPU standoffs at Positions 1 and 2: 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) for use with CPU2-3030D or 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) for use with CPU2-3030ND CH S - M 3 . c d r CPU2-3030ND (without keypad/display) CPU2-3030D (with keypad/display) Chassis-mounting slots Figure 3.5 Standoffs on Chassis CHS-M3 NCA-2 (see NCA-2 Manual) Figure 3.6 CA-2 Chassis Assembly CA 2 c h a s s i s a s s e m b l y . w m f Upper half-chassis (FACP) Lower half-chassis (DVC) Microphone and handset well Back plate 24 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Installation Attaching the CPU & Chassis The NFS2-3030 mounts in the upper half-chassis. (Refer to Figure 3.6 and Figure 3.7.) If first mounting an optional LCM-320/LEM-320 pair behind the FACP, refer to Section 3.8.2, “Audio Applications with Chassis CA-2”. Mount the NFS2-3030 to its half-chassis without removing the half-chassis from the back plate. Refer to “Memory-Backup Battery” on page 24 for removal of insulator. Figure 3.7 Mounting the NFS2-3030 onto the CA-2 Half-chassis Refer to the DVC Manual for installation of the DVC, microphone and handset into the CA-2. 3.5.3 Mounting Chassis in Backbox „CHS-M3 Align chassis-mounting slots with chassis-mounting studs (see Figure 3.1 and Figure 3.5 for locations). Secure with nut & lock-washer provided with chassis. „CA-2 Install all equipment into the CA-2 and attach to the CA-2 backplate before the chassis assembly is attached to the backbox. Align four backplate-mounting slots with backbox’s chassis-mounting studs. Secure with nut and lock-washer provided with chassis. For details, see the instructions in the CA-2 Installation Document. 3.5.4 Memory-Backup Battery The lithium battery on the CPU provides backup of the CPU’s on-board memory during power loss. The CPU ships with an insulator to prevent the battery from discharging. To preserve the battery, the insulating tube should be left in place as long as possible before applying AC power. If the insulator is not removed before applying AC power, the control panel will show a trouble situation. This battery’s shelf-life should exceed 10 years, but if for some reason it fails, the control panel will show a trouble when powered up. To replace the lithium battery: 1. Make a full backup of all system settings to prevent loss of all programming data. 2. Disconnect all power sources. Fasten with four screws as indicated. NFS2-3030 Upper half-chassis Slide the tabs at the bottom of the control panel into the inner slot at the bottom of the chassis. (See the DVC Manual for details)NC A 2 3 0 3 0 k e y p a d a n g l d . w m f NC A 2 3 0 3 0 b d o n h a l f c h a s . w m f CA 2 3 0 3 0 h a l f c h a s s i s . w m f Install the 3 #4-40 x 1.5 inch M/F standoffs onto CA-2 Lift clip gently while removing battery Dotted line indicates location of insulator 30 3 0 - l i t h i u m . c d r NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 25 Attaching Option Boards Installation 3.CPU2-3030D only: Disconnect wiring and remove CPU2-3030D from backbox (3 screws at top, lift board tabs out of slot) and remove keypad (4 screws on back, LCD display stays attached). 4. Remove battery from under clip (use fingers, because screwdriver could damage components) and insert new battery. 5.CPU2-3030D only: Replace keyboard, reinstall CPU2-3030D into chassis, and reconnect wiring. 6. Follow system power-up procedures. 7. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire. 3.6 Attaching Option Boards If installing option boards into a CAB-4 Series backbox, mount & connect those boards at this time. This section contains general instructions for mounting an option board; see the documentation that shipped with your board for any product-specific instructions. As described in Section 3.4 “Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis”, up to eight option boards can be mounted in CHS-M3 to the right of the CPU; additional modules can be mounted in other chassis. There are no slots in the first (back) two layers, but option boards with tabs (such as NCM-W) will still fit in those positions. !CAUTION: THE BATTERY USED IN THIS DEVICE MAY PRESENT A RISK OF FIRE OR CHEMICAL BURN IF MISTREATED. DO NOT RECHARGE, DISASSEMBLE, HEAT ABOVE 212°F (100°C), OR INCINERATE. REPLACE BATTERY WITH NOTIFIER P/N 31004 "(RAYOVAC LITHIUM 3 VOLT BR2335)" ONLY. USE OF ANOTHER BATTERY MAY PRESENT A RISK OF FIRE OR EXPLOSION. CH S - M 3 . c d r To mount option boards against the CHS-M3 backplate, attach stand-offs to the chassis studs. Figure 3.8 Mounting Option Boards in CHS-M3 When applicable, slide tabs at bottom of option boards into the matching slot. For mounting in CHS-4L, see Figure 3.14 To mount option boards in the front of the chassis, use stand-offs built into the chassis arms. 26 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Installation Connecting the Network Communications Module Option boards can be door-mounted behind a single-space blank plate (see Figure 3.9), and mounted in any CAB-4 compatible chassis. Mounting procedures 1. Install four 1 inch (25.4 mm) stand-offs onto the chassis as shown in Figure 3.8. 2. Place the first option board over the stand-offs so that holes line up. 3. If no more option boards will be mounted in that position, securely fasten all stand-offs with screws (provided with module). If mounting a second or third option board, attach another layer of stand-offs and repeat steps 2-3. Note: Set the switches on an option board before mounting another layer in front of it. 4. If mounting a pair of SLC loop modules, refer to Section 3.8 “Connecting the Loop Control and Expander Modules” and to Section 3.8.5 “Installing a Multi-layer Module into the Chassis”. 5. For the top (fourth) layer of option boards, slide the tab at the bottom of the board into the slots on the chassis, and lay the board back onto the top of the chassis so that the studs line up with mounting holes on the option board. Securely fasten all stand-offs with screws provided with module. 6. If mounting the option board behind a blank module plate in a dress plate or annunciator backbox, see Figure 3.9 and the BMP-1 Product Installation Drawing. This dress plate is suitable for option boards, which do not need to be visible or accessible when the door is closed. 7. If mounting a pair of loop control/expander modules, see Section 3.8 “Connecting the Loop Control and Expander Modules”. 3.7 Connecting the Network Communications Module If networking two or more control panels (or network control annunciators), each one requires a Network Communications Module; a wire version and a fiber version are available. The wire and fiber versions on the NCM or HS-NCM can be installed in any option board position described in Section 3.6, “Attaching Option Boards”. The preferred positions are immediately to the right of the main circuit board, or in the row below. If the system uses Digital Voice Command, the DVC’s wire Single-space blank plate Fasten option board to the plate with four screws (included). tm 4 a d p 4 . c d r Mount option board onto stand-offs on the blank plate Mount single-space blank plate onto compatible dress panel Note: Mounting instructions for option boards are the same in various dress panels. Figure 3.9 Door-Mounting Option Boards with a Single-space Blank Plate NOTE:Mounting two pairs of loop-control and -expander modules in one chassis position may cause intermittent electrical interference. If this occurs, move one pair to a separate chassis position. NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 27 Connecting the Loop Control and Expander Modules Installation or fiber version of the NCM or HS-NCM can be mounted behind the DVC on its chassis; see the DVC Manual for instructions. If using the Digital Audio Amplifier, the DAA’s wire or fiber version of the NCM or HS-NCM can be mounted on the DAA chassis; see the DAA Manual for instructions. 1. Mount the NCM or HS-NCM in the selected position. If another board is going to be mounted in the slot immediately in front of it, use stand-offs to secure it in place. Otherwise use the screws provided. 2. Connect J1 on the CPU to J3 on the NCM or J6 on the HS-NCM using the network cable provided (P/N 75556). Do not connect two NCMs via NUP ports (aka NUP to NUP). 3.When installing an NCM: Connect Channel A and/or Channel B as described in the NCM Installation Document. When installing a HS-NCM: Connect Channel A to Channel B as described in the HS-NCM Installation Document. 3.8 Connecting the Loop Control and Expander Modules 3.8.1 Mounting Instructions Mount loop control and expander modules within the cabinet with the CPU. Two typical mounting positions are adjacent to the panel or in the row immediately below it. (DVC applications in the CA-2 chassis have specific requirements; see 3.8.2, "Audio Applications with Chassis CA-2" at the end of this section.) Follow the basic chassis-mounting instructions given for option boards. Loop- expander modules are mounted first; Loop-control modules are mounted on top of those. Alternately, loop-control and loop-expander modules can be attached to each other and mounted as a pair to the chassis. See Figure 3.12 for connection instructions, connector locations and stand-off lengths. To suspend a pair of modules in the third and fourth layer of CHS-M3, follow the instructions given in Section 3.8.5 “Installing a Multi-layer Module into the Chassis”. If using loop control and expander modules in CHS-4L see Figure 3.14. After all loop-control and loop-expander modules are mounted in the cabinet, connect the SLC loops to TB1 on each loop-control and loop-expander module as shown in Figure 3.16. Daisy-chain the loop-control modules as shown in Figure 3.15. The ribbon-cable connection runs from header J7 on the CPU to header J1 (“Data in”) on the first loop-control module, from J3 (“Data out”) on NOTE:See the Noti•Fire•Net Version 5.0 & Higher Manual and the NCM Installation Document or the High-Speed Noti•Fire•Net Manual for system configuration information. See the BMP-1 Product Installation Drawing if considering mounting the module (wire version) behind blank module plate in a dress plate or annunciator backbox. NOTE:Over-bending fiber-optic cable can damage it. Do not exceed a 3 inch (7.62 cm) minimum bend radius. NOTE:NCM hardware is not compatible with HS-NCM hardware and should not be mixed on the same network. NOTE:Mounting two pairs of loop control and expander modules in one chassis position may cause intermittent electrical interference. If this occurs, move one pair to a separate chassis position. 28 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Installation Connecting the Loop Control and Expander Modules that unit to J1 on the next unit in the chain, and likewise for up to five loop-control modules. Each module should be assigned a unique SLC loop number (see below); loop number does not need to match the module’s location in this daisy-chain. FlashScan devices can operate in either FlashScan or, for retrofit applications, CLIP mode. Each LCM-320 or LEM-320 running a FlashScan SLC can support up to 159 detectors and 159 modules. CLIP loops are limited to 99 detectors and 99 modules. These and other capacity restrictions for CLIP mode loops are discussed in Section 3.14 “Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)”. Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for wiring requirements and specific details. 3.8.2 Audio Applications with Chassis CA-2 The first pair of loop control and expander modules should be mounted behind the DVC as shown in Figure 3.10, or in the row immediately below the CA-2. Any additional loop control and expander modules should be mounted in the row immediately below the CA-2. 3.8.3 Setting SLC Loop Number Assign a unique SLC loop number to the loop control module by setting SW1 on the module to 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9. The loop expander module which is mounted behind this loop control module will be assigned the next-higher even number. For example, if the LCM-320 is set to loop number 5, the LEM-320 mounted to it will be set to loop number 6. 3.8.4 Enabling External Power Supervision With LCM-320 revision 2.0 and higher, some type codes have external power supervision built into the software; see Section 4.2 “Devices Requiring External Power Supervision” for details. 3.8.5 Installing a Multi-layer Module into the Chassis Follow the instructions illustrated in Figure 3.13 to install a pair of loop control/expander modules into CHS-4N or CHS-M3. See Figure 3.14 to install loop control/expander modules in CHS-4L. 1. Angle the module into the chassis so that the upper end of the rear board (or boards) fits into the top slot. !CAUTION: DO NOT PROGRAM MORE THAN 99 ADDRESSES ON A CLIP-MODE SLC LOOP, BECAUSE THIS WILL SLOW THE SYSTEM DOWN AND COMPROMISE THE RESPONSE TIME OF THE PANEL TO DISPLAY OFF-NORMAL EVENTS. CA 2 3 0 3 0 L C M L E M . w m f Figure 3.10 Mounting First Pair of Loop Control and Expander Modules in CA-2 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 29 Connecting the Loop Control and Expander Modules Installation 2. Bring the module back down so that the lower board edges slip into the bottom slots. 3. Secure the module to the chassis with the two module screws. Tighten securely. 4. Connect the ribbon cable to the module. SW1 Set to assign a unique SLC loop number J3 Data Out to next LCM-320 J1 Data In from control panel or from previous LCM-320 Ground Fault LEDs: D32 Loop Expander Module Ground Fault D28 Loop Control Module Ground Fault J2 LEM-320 Connection TB1 SLC Loop Connection LCM-320 Connection LCM-320 LEM-320 Note: Do not cut any jumpers on the LCM-320 or LEM-320. TB1 SLC Loop Connection LC M - 3 2 0 . w m f LE M - 3 2 0 . w m f Figure 3.11 LCM-320 and LEM-320 Diagram JP2 See note. Stand-off locations JP1 See note. 30 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Installation Connecting the Loop Control and Expander Modules Figure 3.12 Connecting Loop Control Modules with Loop Expander Modules Loop Expander Module Loop Control Module J1 J2 Loop Expander Module Loop Control Module The long-pin end plugs directly into the back of the Loop Control Module board. The short-pin end plugs directly into the top of the Loop Expander Module plug. J2 SLCB+ A+ B- A-TB 1 J1 J1 Stand-off locations J2 on LCM-320 “LEM-320 Data” Loop Expander Module mounted behind Loop Control Module LE M - L C M . c d r !CAUTION: IF THE STACKER-CONNECTOR IS INSTALLED UPSIDE-DOWN, THE SHORT-PIN END OF THE PLUG CAN FAIL TO MAKE A SECURE CONNECTION WHEN PLUGGED THROUGH THE LOOP CONTROL MODULE. !WARNING: RISK EQUIPMENT DAMAGE. USE SPECIFIED STAND-OFF MOUNTING LOCATIONS ONLY. SEE FIGURES 3.11 AND 3.12. DO NOT USE CORNER HOLES FOR INSTALLATION PURPOSES. NOTE:Depending on system components, clearance may be tight. Do not force modules! Move the assembly around gently until you find the angle where components and mounting studs pass each other without scraping together. vo i c e - m o u n t - m o d . c d r Chassis Module Screw Top Slot Bottom Slots Figure 3.13 Inserting a Two-Layer Module into CHS-4N or CHS-M3 Chassis NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 31 Connecting the Loop Control and Expander Modules Installation Angle tab on loop control module into slot on CHS-4L Use a slimline screwdriver (3/32") to fasten down LEM-320 through the hole in the LCM-320 board. CH S - 4 L - L E M - L C M . c d r Figure 3.14 Inserting Pair of Loop Control and Expander Modules into CHS-4L For mounting in CHS-M3, see Figure 3.8 Figure 3.15 Connecting Multiple Pairs of Loop Control and Expander Modules J7 on CPU J1 on LCM-320 “Data in” J3 on LCM-320 “Data out” 3030LCMchainrv2.wmf Figure 3.15 Connecting Multiple Pairs of Loop Control and Expander Modules NOTE: • The red stripe on the ribbon cable indicates position 1. Position 1 of the ribbon cable should line up with position 1 on J7 of the CPU and J1 and J3 of the LCM-320. WARNING: INSTALL THE RIBBON CABLE AS SHOWN. DO NOT FORCE OR MODIFY THE CABLE TO FIT ANY OTHER WAY. EQUIPMENT DAMAGE CAN RESULT FROM INCORRECT ALIGNMENT. ! The red stripe on the ribbon cable is indicated by the dark line LE M - S L C . c d r LC M - S L C . c d r LCM-320 (in front) LEM-320 (in back) Figure 3.16 SLC Loop Connections on Loop-Control and Loop-Expander Modules 32 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Installation Form-C Relays on the CPU 3.9 Form-C Relays on the CPU The panel provides a set of Form-C relays. These are rated for 2 A at 30 VDC (resistive): • Alarm - TB4 • Trouble - TB3 • Supervisory - TB2 • Security - TB1 The Supervisory and Security contacts can also be configured as Alarm contacts by setting switches SW1 and SW2 away from the factory default positions shown in Figure 3.17. 3.10 Connecting Power Sources and Outputs 3.10.1 Overview Complete all mounting procedures and check all wiring before applying power. Electrical connections include the following: •Primary power source. +24VDC, delivered through AMPS-24/AMPS-24E main power supply. If AMPS-24/E is mounted in a separate cabinet, power-supply wiring must be in conduit (for cabinet placement information see Section 3.4 “Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis” and the AMPS-24/E Manual. •Secondary power source. +24 VDC from batteries, installed in the control panel (or in an optional battery cabinet). Secondary (battery) power is required to support the system during loss of primary power. •External power sources. +24VDC auxiliary power supplies that are UL/ULC-listed for fire protective service. !WARNING: REMOVE ALL POWER SOURCES TO EQUIPMENT WHILE CONNECTING ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS. LEAVE THE EXTERNAL, MAIN POWER BREAKER OFF UNTIL INSTALLATION OF THE ENTIRE SYSTEM IS COMPLETE. !WARNING: SEVERAL SOURCES OF POWER CAN BE CONNECTED TO THE CONTROL PANEL. BEFORE SERVICING THE CONTROL PANEL, DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF INPUT POWER INCLUDING THE BATTERY. WHILE ENERGIZED, THE CONTROL PANEL AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT CAN BE DAMAGED BY REMOVING AND/OR INSERTING CARDS, MODULES, OR INTERCONNECTING CABLES. SW1 set to Security SW2 set to Supervisory Move switch to opposite position to convert to Alarm relays. 30 3 0 - 2 - r e l a y s . w m f Figure 3.17 Form-C Relay Connections NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 33 Connecting Power Sources and Outputs Installation •Accessory power for peripheral devices. TB6 on the CPU draws power from primary, secondary and external sources to pass +24 VDC power to devices within the same enclosure as the CPU. If those devices have outputs, the outputs must be power-limited. Power rating is limited by the AMPS-24/24E primary power source, which is +24VDC and 5 Amps max. TB3 on the AMPS-24 (TB6 on previous AMPS-24/E versions) provides a secondary Accessory power source. Refer to the Power Supplies Calculations Table of the AMPS-24/24E Manual for further details. 3.10.2 Connecting the Power Supply Connect J13 Power on the CPU to TB1 on AMPS-24/E with Cable 75637 (see Figure 3.18). This cable is 20 feet long, and must run in conduit between the backbox containing the fire alarm control panel and the backbox containing the AMPS-24/E. See AMPS-24/E Manual for full details and installation precautions. In order to conserve batteries, connect AC power and check it before connecting batteries. Follow the procedures specified in the power supply manual. 3.10.3 Checking AC Power Table 3.2 contains a checklist for checking the system with AC power applied to the main power supply: NOTE:The CPU ships with an insulator to prevents its lithium battery from discharging. To preserve the battery, this insulator should be left in place as long as possible before applying AC power. Some installers may find it convenient to remove the insulator before mounting all equipment. NOTE:If using multiple power supplies with one set of batteries, refer to main power supply manual for connection requirements. 30 3 0 - A M P S - 2 4 r e v 2 . w m f CPU2-3030 Cable 75637 Re d Bl a c k Bl a c k Re d AMPS-24 Main Power Supply Figure 3.18 DC Power Connections: Main Power Supply Br o w n Or a n g e NOTE: For power supply connection wiring for previous versions of the AMPS-24/E, refer to the AMPS-24/E manual. !CAUTION: WHILE CHECKING AC POWER, MAKE SURE BATTERIES ARE NOT CONNECTED. 34 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Installation UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements 3.10.4 Auxiliary Power Supply Connections If an optional auxiliary power supply is installed in the cabinet, connect it at this time. Follow the connection procedures specified in your auxiliary power supply manual. 3.11 UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements Power-limited and non-power-limited circuit wiring must remain separated in the cabinet. All power-limited circuit wiring must remain at least 0.25 inches (6.35 mm) from any non-power- limited circuit wiring. All power-limited and non-power-limited circuit wiring must enter and exit the cabinet through different knockout and or conduits. To maintain separations easily, it is recommended that non-power-limited modules are grouped together. For example, use a separate row or designated side of the enclosure so that power-limited and non-power-limited wiring do not cross. Install tie wraps and adhesive squares to secure the wiring. For a quick reference to control panel circuits, refer to Figure 2.1 at the start of this manual. The power-limiting label inside your cabinet door identifies which compatible modules have power- limited or non-power-limited wiring. Figure 3.19 Typical Wiring in a Four-Row Backbox Component Status CPU The green Power indicator will come on when power is coming from the main power supply. The yellow Trouble indicator will come on until batteries are connected. Main power supply The green AC indicator will come on when AC is supplied. The yellow Trouble indicator will come on until batteries are connected. Each auxiliary power supply The yellow Trouble indicator comes on because batteries are not connected. Table 3.2 AC Power Checklist Nonpower-limited circuit (Assumes relay is connected to a non-power-limited signal source) Power-limited circuits Loop- control & Loop- expander modules NFS2-3030 Side-ViewPower-limited circuits Separating non-power-limited and power limited circuits within the backbox with adhesive squares am p s 2 4 c a b 3 w r n g s i d e . w m f 30 3 0 U L W I R I N G . w m f NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 35 ULC Remote Connection Feature Installation Some devices (such as ACM-8R and LDM-R32) are power-limited only when connected to power- limited sources. When one of these devices is connected to a non-power-limited source, the power- limited marking must be removed, and at the time of installation, each non-power-limited circuit connected to these modules must be identified in the space provided on the cabinet door label. 3.12 ULC Remote Connection Feature ULC requires that devices such as TM-4 and UDACT be disconnected during annual testing to prevent transmission of false alarms. Disconnecting TM-4 for Annual Testing Follow standard installation procedures as described in the TM-4 installation documentation. To disable reporting, slide SW4 Disable All Output switch from “Enable” to “Disable.” Refer to TM-4 documentation for product drawing. Disconnecting UDACT for Annual Testing Install UDACT as the last device on the EIA- 485 line, with a listed key switch such as AKS-1B installed on the EIA-485 line. In this case only, install the ELR between the EIA-485 wires just in advance of the key switch (see Figure 3.20). The key switch should be installed so that key-removed is the closed position; it should be located inside the same backbox as the UDACT, as close to the UDACT as possible. 3.13 Installing Printers This section contains information on connecting a printer to the CPU and for setting the printer options. The basic steps are as follows: 1. Make custom cable & connect it from printer to EIA-232 terminal on the CPU. 2. Connect printer’s power supply. 3. Configure printer settings as described in printer documentation. NOTE:Relays are power-limited only when connected to power-limited sources for the relay outputs. NOTE:During testing when the key switch is turned, the panel will report a communication failure for the UDACT’s address. 30 3 0 - U D A C T - s w i t c h . c d r UDACT CPU Figure 3.20 Wiring a Key Switch to Disconnect UDACT During Annual Testing 36 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Installation Installing Printers „Overview: PRN Printer The PRN provides a printed record (80 columns on standard 9" x 11" tractor-feed paper) of all system events (alarm, trouble) and status changes within the system. The control panel can be configured to time-stamp the printout with the current time-of-day and date for each event. The printer can be located up to 50 feet (15.25 m) from the control panel. Installation and configuration instructions follow. „Overview: Keltron Remote Printer (Model VS4095) The VS4095 is a two-color (red and black), 40-column, 24 VDC printer that can print up to 50 messages in 90 seconds. This printer connects to the EIA- 232 TB5 on the CPU and to the +24V screw on TB3 of AMPS-24/E, and mounts in a separate cabinet next to the control panel. The VS4095 meets UL fire and security requirements for an ancillary device; it is not ULC- listed. For more information on the Keltron printer, contact the manufacturer (Keltron Corp., Waltham, MA). Installation and configuration instructions follow. 3.13.1 Printer Installation Sequence 1. Fabricate a custom cable to connect a printer to the system. Length of the cable will vary with each installation, but should not exceed a maximum length of 50 feet (15.24 meters). Printer must be installed in the same room as panel. Using overall foil/braided-shield twisted-pair cable, properly connect one end to the DB-25 Connector (provided) using the wiring specifications shown in Figure 3.21. 2. Tighten clamp on connector to secure cable. Connect the four open leads of the custom cable to the TB5 terminal block on the CPU as shown in Figure 3.21. 3. If installing a Keltron Printer VS4095/5, connect 24 VDC non-resettable power from a UL-listed power supply to the Keltron printer as shown in Figure 3.21 (14 AWG). 4. If installing a PRN series printer, plug it into your AC power source. Note: PRN printers require a 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz primary power source. If required for the fire alarm system configuration (for example, a Proprietary Fire Alarm System), a remote printer requires a 67 6 9 c o v . t i f NOTE:Depending on which version of the AMPS-24/E is being used, the terminal block designations may differ from those listed. Please refer to the AMPS-24/E manual. 2374237 Note: Outputs are power-limited but are not supervised. DB-25 connector on PRN Series Printer TB5 on Control Panel 30 3 0 - k e l t r o n . c d r DB-25 connector on Keltron Printer VS4095/5* TB5 on Control Panel Keltron Printer VS4095/5 power connections* TB3 of AMPS-24/E 30 3 0 - k e l t r o n p o w e r . c d r DC IN - DC IN + 30 3 0 - p r i n t e r . c d r *Note: VS4095/5 is not ULC-listed. Figure 3.21 Printer Connections NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 37 Installing Printers Installation secondary power source (battery backup). Because a secondary power source is not provided, use a separate Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) that is UL-listed for Fire Protective Signaling. 5. Plug the DB-25 connector end of the custom cable into the EIA-232 port of your printer. Tighten securely. 6. Configure the printer as described in Section 3.13.2 “Configuring the Printer”. NOTE:Depending on which version of the AMPS-24/E is being used, the terminal block designations may differ from those listed. Please refer to the AMPS-24/E manual. 38 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Installation Installing Printers 3.13.2 Configuring the Printer Refer to the documentation supplied with your printer for instructions on configuring your printer. PRN Printer Settings Set the printer options (under the menu area) according to the settings listed in Table 3.3. Keltron Printer VS4095/5 Settings The printer communicates using the following protocol: •Baud Rate – Supervised mode: 2400 – Unsupervised mode: 300 (Supervision is a programmed setting; refer to the Panel Programming section of the Programming Manual for instructions.) • Data bits: 8 •Parity: None • Stop bits: 1 Set the printer DIP switches SP1 and SP2 according to settings in Table 3.4. *Protocol: When printing in graphics mode, set I/O Serial Protocol to “Robust XON/OFF”. Option Setting L/R Adjust 0 Font HS Draft CPI 10 CPI LPI 6 LPI Skip 0.0 ESC Character ESC Emulate FX-850 Bidirectional Copy ON I/O Interface Buffer Serial Baud Format Protocol * Serial 40K 9600 8 Bit, None, 1 Stop ENQ/STX CG-TAB Graphic Character Set Standard Country E-USA ASCII Select Zero ON Auto-CR OFF Auto-LF OFF Option Setting Menu Lock ON Language English Paper Single Form Adjust Trac 1 Form Adjust Trac 2 Form Adjust Auto Sheet Feeder Form Adjust 12/72 12/72 12/72 12/72 Auto Tear OFF F-Eject OFF Form Length Trac 1 Lines Standard Trac 2 Lines Standard 66 10.5” 66 10.5” Barcode Off Barmode Unsecured Table 3.3 PRN Setup Options Supervised Unsupervised Supervised and Unsupervised SP1 On Off SP1 On Off SP2 On Off 1X1X1X 2X2X2X 3X3X3X 4X4X4X 5X 5X 5X 6X6X6X 7X 7X 7X 8X 8X 8X Table 3.4 Keltron DIP Switch Settings NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 39 Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)Installation 3.14 Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) 3.14.1 SLC Overview Communication between the CPU and intelligent and addressable initiating, monitor, and control devices takes place through a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). You can wire an SLC to meet the requirements of NFPA Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 circuits. This manual provides requirements and performance details specific to this control panel; for installation information and general information, refer to the SLC Wiring Manual. For electrical specifications, see Appendix A.2 “SLC Loops”. For additional notes on SLC resistance values, see Section 5.3 “Operational Checks”. 3.14.2 SLC Capacity The NFS2-3030 supports up to five pairs of loop control and expander modules, providing from one to ten SLC loops. Loop capacity depends on operating mode: • Flash Scan: 01-159 intelligent detectors, 01-159 monitor and control modules • CLIP: 0-99 intelligent detectors, 01-99 monitor and control modules FlashScan devices can operate in either FlashScan or, for retrofit applications, in CLIP mode. Older models of CLIP devices only support addresses up to address 99. CLIP loops are limited to 99 detectors and 99 modules. The following configuration guidelines may be used to improve the response times of CLIP loops: 1. All manual pull stations must be assigned addresses from 1-20. 2. Loops must be programmed for Rapid Poll (refer to the programming manual for specific instructions). 3. Modules on a fully loaded loop must adhere to a ratio of two monitor modules to one control module. NOTE:Response times for CLIP loops may vary. CLIP loops must be tested to assure that actuation of notification appliances occurs within 10 seconds after activation of an initiating device. Systems with response time that exceed 10 seconds must be approved by the AHJ. 40 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Installation Connecting a PC for Programming 3.14.3 SLC Installation Install loop control and expander modules as described in Section 3.8 “Connecting the Loop Control and Expander Modules”. Note that the unique SLC loop number assigned to a module does not need to match the module’s location in the cabinet. For details on designing, installing and configuring SLC loops, see the SLC Wiring Manual. 3.15 Connecting a PC for Programming A PC running the VeriFire® Tools programming utility can upload and download the operating program of the control panel when attached to J15 USB Connection, J1 Network/Service Connection (NUP) or to the second Network/Service connection on an attached wire or fiber version of the NCM or HS-NCM. Refer to the VeriFire® Tools CD for instructions. B+ A+ B- A-B+ A+ B- A- T-Tapping is not allowed on a four-wire SLC. Channel B (output loop) Channel A (loop return) Style 4 SLC Loops Style 6 SLC Loops TB1B+ A+ B- A- SLC Loop #2 Connections on Loop Expander Module SLC Loop Connections on Loop Control Modules SLC loop connections are the same for Loop Expander and Control Modules TB1 B+ A+ B- A- Channel B Channel A 30 3 0 - s l c l o o p s . c d r Figure 3.22 SLC Loop Connections and Wiring NOTE:Download operations that change the basic program of the control panel must be performed by responsible service personnel in attendance at the control panel. After downloading a program, test the control panel in accordance with NFPA 72. NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 41 Section 4: Applications 4.1 Overview A listing of chapters and topics covered in this section: „Municipal Box (Auxiliary) Municipal Box applications require a TM-4 Transmitter module. Refer to the Transmitter Module TM-4 installation document for installation details. 4.2 Devices Requiring External Power Supervision With LCM-320 revision 2.0 and higher, certain type codes have external power supervision (FlashScan only) built into the software. An external power-supervision relay is required (see Figure 4.1) unless one of the following typecodes is selected for the device: Figure 4.1 Enabling External Power Supervision Using Relays Chapter Covers the following topics Section 4.3 “NFPA 72 Central or Remote Station Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit)” How to install a UDACT with the CPU for use as a NFPA Central or Remote Station Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit) Section 4.4 “NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems” How to set up a Protected Premises Unit to communicate with a listed compatible Protected Premises Receiving Unit. Section 4.5 “Fire/Security Applications” How to use the CPU as a combination Fire/Security system, including the following: • Installing a Security Tamper Switch into the cabinet • Circuit Wiring NOTE:NFS2-3030 is not listed for Canadian security application. • Control •Strobe • Horn • (Blank) • Release Ckt • Rel Ckt Ulc • Nonreset Ctl • Alarms Pend •Gen Alarm •Gen Super • Gen Trouble • Gen Pend • Trouble Pend Device to be Supervised Non-resettable 24 VDC Power from a listed source – + – + SLC from FACP or LCM/LEM FCM-1 N.C. Supervision Relay Contact Part of EOLR-1 (Not required for FlashScan type codes that provide built-in power supervision.) Power Supervision Relay (EOLR-1) (Not required for FlashScan type codes that provide built- in power supervision.) 30 3 0 - e x t e r n a l - p o w e r - s u p t p H . w m f *If the SLC device does not match the one in this figure, refer to the SLC manual appendix, which contains wiring conversion charts for type V and type H modules. 42 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Applications NFPA 72 Central or Remote Station Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit) 4.3 NFPA 72 Central or Remote Station Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit) The figure below shows typical wiring diagram for a NFPA 72 Central Station Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit) or a Remote Station Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit) using the Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter (UDACT) and NFS2-3030. Connect and program the UDACT according to the directions given in The UDACT Instruction Manual. Typical wiring of a UDACT with NFS2-3030: NOTE:An NFPA 72 Central Station requires 24 hours of standby power; an NFPA 72 Remote Station requires 60 hours of standby power. NOTE: Install a 120 ohm End-of-Line resistor (P/N 71244) UDACT TB1 terminals 3 and 4 if last or only device on EIA-485 line.UDACT in ABS-8RB (shown with cover removed) Solid earth ground To supervised phone lines FACP Cabinet EIA-485 (ACS Mode) TB7 on control panel Supervised and power-limited EIA-485 and power wiring 30 3 0 - U D A C T . c d r +24 VDC non-resettable power from main or auxiliary power supply +24V Gnd RS+ RS- Shield RS+ RS- ACS/Term TERM (NC) Ferrite cores P/N 29090 Figure 4.2 Typical Wiring Diagram for a Central Station Fire Alarm System NOTE:This application can also be done with the TM-4 Transmitter; refer to the TM-4 Transmitter Module manual for more details. NOTE:The following models do not comply with requirements for AC loss delay reporting when used with Central Station Protected Premises systems: AA-30, AA-120, AA-100, APS-6R, CHG- 120. NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 43 NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems Applications 4.4 NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems When connected and configured as a protected premises unit with monitor and relay modules, the NFS2-3030 will automatically transmit General Alarm, General Trouble, General Supervisory, and Security signals to a listed compatible Protected Premises Receiving Unit. A simplified drawing of connections between the receiving unit and the NFS2-3030 protected premises unit is shown in Figures 4.3 and 4.4. Connect the receiving unit to the protected premises unit as shown in Section 4.3 “NFPA 72 Central or Remote Station Fire Alarm System (Protected Premises Unit)”. Install and program the Receiving unit with type codes and zone mappings shown in Figure 4.3; see the programming manual for procedures. Figure 4.3 Typical Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems Wiring Connections: Block View Receiving Unit Compatible With NFS2-3030 SLC Loop (twisted-pair wiring) SLC Loop (twisted-pair wiring) 30 3 0 - R c v g - b l o k . c d r Monitor Modules Relay Modules Type code: Security-L Type code: Trouble Mon Type code: Monitor Type code: Relay Zone mapping: ZF03 Type code: Relay Zone mapping: ZF04 Type code: Relay Zone mapping: ZF01 & ZF02 Type code: Relay Zone mapping: Z000 Type code: Superv NFS2-3030 Protected Premises Unit PRN series printer Note: Remote printers require 120 VAC, 50/60Hz primary power. A secondary power source (battery backup) is not provided; the use of a separate Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) 50 watt minimum, UL-listed for Fire Protective Signaling is recommended. A UPS is required for NFPA 72 Proprietary Protected Premises Receiving Unit Applications. UPS 44 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Applications Fire/Security Applications Figure 4.4 Typical Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems Wiring Connections: Detail View 4.5 Fire/Security Applications 4.5.1 General Operation The NFS2-3030 can be used as a combination Fire/Security system when installed and operated according to the instructions in this section. For security applications, program one or more monitor module (listed for security applications) with the SECURITY-L, SYSTEM MONITOR, or AREA MONITOR Type Codes, and wire as shown in Figure 4.6. Activating these types of modules lights the SECURITY LED, and displays a security alarm condition on the primary display. The panel sounder will sound until you acknowledge the Security alarm. You can also program additional sounders or output devices to activate with the security alarm initiating device. These type codes are designed to indicate an alarm in one or more of the following situations: (a) on an open or short circuit (b) on a ±50% change in resistance value from the End-of-Line resistor value (c) on loss of communication with the device. A tamper switch installed in the cabinet door will indicate a door tamper condition whenever the door is open. If the control panel indicates a Security alarm, you can perform acknowledge, signal silence, and system reset from the control panel. Damage can result from incorrect wiring connections. 4.5.2 General Security Requirements The following security requirements must be met: • Use AMPS-24/E power supply. • Shielded cable must be used on all input/output wiring associated with security functions. • SLC Loop Shielding (refer to the SLC Wiring Manual). • Security Module I/O Circuit Shielding - terminate the shield at earth ground at the junction box containing the module. • When employed as a Protected Premises Unit, the NFS2-3030 cabinet door must be wired with an STS-1 Tamper Switch that is monitored by the control panel. Monitor Module PPU SLC Loop IN PPU SLC Loop OUT Receiving Unit SLC Loop OUT Receiving Unit SLC Loop IN Relay Module 30 3 0 - R c v g - w i r t p H . w m f ELR-47K *If the SLC device does not match the one in this figure, refer to the SLC manual appendix, which contains wiring conversion charts for type V and type H modules. NOTE:The NFS2-3030 is not approved for use in security applications in Canada. NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 45 Fire/Security Applications Applications • If the system has arming and disarming capability, a ringback signal from the Central Station to the arming location is required. The ringback signal informs the Protected Premises Control Panel that the signal to arm/disarm has been received by the Central Station. • A single SLC loop may be used for both Fire and Security Device Connections. There are five software type IDs associated with security operation: ACCESS MONITOR alarm, AREA MONITOR, EQUIP MONITOR, SECURITY-L, and SYS MONITOR. There is also one software function, Security Delay (SDEL). These software elements are essential to all aspects of security operation, including Control-By-Event (CBE) programming. Devices with the type IDs ACCESS MONITOR and EQUIP MONITOR do not automatically display at the LCD or require state change acknowledgment. State changes in devices with these software types may be output at a printer. Refer to this panel’s Programming manual for more information about the characteristics of software type IDs. 4.5.3 Installing a Security Tamper Switch Follow the instructions below to wire the cabinet with a Security Tamper Switch kit model STS-1. 1. Install the STS-1 Tamper Switch onto the side of the backbox opposite the door hinge, pushing the switch through the opening until it snaps into place. 2. Install the magnet on the same side of the cabinet door as the lock. Push the magnet through the opening in the door until it snaps into place. 3. Connect the STS-1 connector to J6 Security on the CPU. 4. Program panel supervision for Tamper Input “Yes”. !WARNING: XP TRANSPONDER CIRCUITS (XPP-1, XPM-8, XPC-8, XPR-8, XPM-8L) ARE NOT SUITABLE FOR SECURITY APPLICATIONS. 30 3 0 - s t s 1 . c d r STS-1 mounting location (side opposite of door hinges) Connect to J6 Security Figure 4.5 Installing the STS-1 Security Tamper Switch 46 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Applications Fire/Security Applications 4.5.4 Receiving Unit For applications requiring transmission of security alarm information to a central receiving unit, the CPU may be connected to a compatible receiving unit. For information on configuring the Receiving unit for Combination Fire/Security applications, refer to the documentation for that control panel. 4.5.5 Programming The control panel can communicate with any number of security devices. To do so, program the points as follows: 1. Select the address of the module(s) to be used for security. 2. Select one of the type codes described in Section 4.5.2 “General Security Requirements”. For detailed instruction on programming Type Codes, refer to the Programming Manual. 4.5.6 Wiring for Proprietary Security Alarm Applications Typical wiring for proprietary security alarm applications with the FMM-1 module. Note the following: • The module is programmed with one of five type codes (see Section 4.5.2 “General Security Requirements”). • Supplementary use only applies to UL-listed systems. • NAC devices used for security cannot be shared with fire NAC devices. • Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for compatible NAC devices. • All monitor modules used for security application must be installed in the control panel cabinet with STS-1 Security Tamper Switch. FMM-1UL-listed, normally-closed security switch UL-listed, normally-open security switch 47K End-of-Line Resistor SLC Channel A or B NFS2-3030 Protected Premises Unit 30 3 0 - b u r g - F M M t p H . w m f Figure 4.6 Wiring Diagram for Proprietary Security Alarm Applications *If the SLC device does not match the one in this figure, refer to the SLC manual appendix, which contains wiring conversion charts for type V and type H modules. NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 47 Fire/Security Applications Applications 4.5.7 Connecting an RKS-S Remote Key Switch The RKS-S Remote Key Switch arms and disarms the system. It can be mounted in a UL listed single-gang electrical box. Both the monitor module and RKS-S must be mounted within the protected area. Figure 4.7 and Figure 4.8, respectively, depict the connection of the FMM-101 or FMM-1 module to the RKS-S. 4.5.8 Single Tenant Security System with Entry/Exit Delay The following system requirements are illustrated in Figure 4.9. • One NFS2-3030 Control Panel • Multiple Security Supervisory Circuits Reporting to Central Station as a Single Area RKS-S (front) Figure 4.7 Connecting the FMM-101 Module to the RKS-S !WARNING: XP TRANSPONDER CIRCUITS (XPP-1, XPM-8, XPC-8, XPR-8, XPM-8L) ARE NOT SUITABLE FOR SECURITY APPLICATIONS. FMM-101 yellow (–) purple (+) SLC red (+) black (–) R-47K End-of-Line Resistor RKS-S (rear) RK S F M M 1 0 1 . w m f RKS-S rear FMM-1 RK S F M M - b t p H . w m f SLC Out SLC In R-47K End-of-Line Resistor Figure 4.8 Connecting the FMM-1 Module to the RKS-S *If the SLC device does not match the one in this figure, refer to the SLC manual appendix, which contains wiring conversion charts for type V and type H modules. 48 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Applications Fire/Security Applications • The minimum security equipment required is as follows: —Multiple MM Monitor Modules per Protected Area —One Group Interface for security alarm —One Group Interface to generate trouble arming system —Contact Switch for Each Entry/Exit Door —RKS-S Key Switch —MM Monitor Modules —Remote Annunciator for Each Entry/Exit Door (ACM-24AT, ACM-48A, ACM-16AT, ACM-32A) —Security Devices Programming Notes for Figure 4.9 1. Programming of Key Switch, Access Points, and Motion Detection RKS Remote Key Switch with Monitor Module Address: LXXMYYY (arbitrary) Type ID: ACCESS MONITOR Zone Map: (none) Custom Label: Arming Switch Contact Switches with Monitor Modules Address: LXXMYYY (arbitrary) Type ID: ACCESS MONITOR Zone Map: ZA Custom Label: Exit Door # Motion Detectors with Monitor Modules Address: LXXMYYY (arbitrary) Type ID: ACCESS MONITOR TENANT A Ar e a 6 _ b . c d r AREA 1 (Perimeter and interior) To Signaling Line Circuit MM To Central Station (via EIA-485 circuit) Entry/Exit Door NFS2-3030 Central Station * Group Interface must be physically located in either the protected premises or the Central Station Key Motion Detector Contact Switch Contact Switch with MM Module Pull Station Smoke Detector RKS-S Remote Key Switch with MM Module Remote Annunciator MM Security Access Monitor Group Interface * CM MM CM Note: See Programming Notes for Figure 4.9. Figure 4.9 Single Tenant Security System with Entry/Exit Delay NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 49 Fire/Security Applications Applications Zone Map: ZB Custom Label: Motion Detection 2. Programming of Logic Equations Logic Equation for 1 minute exit delay: ZLa* = DEL(01:00, 00:00, address of key switch) Logic Equation for Trouble arming system: ZLb* = AND (ZA, address of key switch, NOT(Zla)) Logic Equation to arm system: ZLc* = AND (ZLa, NOT(ZLb)) Logic Equation providing 30-second entry delay: ZLd* = SDEL(00:30, 00:30, ZA) Logic Equation for Security Alarm: ZLe* = AND (ZLc, OR (ZLd)) *Follow the following restrictions on values: a < b < c < d <e 3. Programming Group Interfaces Group Interface for Trouble when system is armed while access point(s) active A. CM programming Address: LXXMYYY (arbitrary) Type ID: RELAY Zone Map: ZLb Custom Label: Arming Trouble Group Output Signal Silence: No Walk Test: Yes/No (Installer Specified) Switch Inhibit: Yes B. MM Programming Address: LXXMYYY (arbitrary) Type ID: TROUBLE MON Zone Map: (none) Group Interface for Security Alarm A. CM programming Address: LXXMYYY (arbitrary) Type ID: RELAY Zone Map: ZLe Custom Label: Security Group Output Signal Silence: No Walk Test: Yes/No (Installer Specified) Switch Inhibit: Yes B. MM Programming Address: LXXMYYY (arbitrary) Type ID: SECURITY-L Zone Map: (none) MM CM 50 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Applications Releasing Applications 4.5.9 Security Annunciation A1P1 Mode: Monitor Source: ZLc A1P2 Mode: Monitor Source: ZLe A1P3 Mode: Monitor Source: LXXMYY A1P4 Mode: Monitor Source: LXXMYY Additional doors can be monitored, up to the number of available annunciator points. 4.6 Releasing Applications 4.6.1 Overview This control panel can be used for non-hazardous agent release or preaction/deluge control applications via the SLC loop. In a properly configured system with compatible, listed actuating and initiating devices, this control panel complies with the following NFPA standards for installation in accordance with the acceptable standard: Refer to installation documents for the individual SLC loop device for voltage and maximum current requirements. 4.6.2 Programming The control panel supports up to ten releasing software zones. You can map these zones to activate control modules. Program control module FCM-1 for the appropriate Type Code according to the chart below: For more information, refer to the NFS2-3030 Programming Manual. ac m - 2 4 a t f a c e . c d r Figure 4.10 Sample Annunciator Display System Status (red is armed) System Alarm (red is alarm) Entry/Exit Door 1 Status (red is unsecured) Entry/Exit Door 2 Status (red is unsecured) Standard Covers NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems NFPA 15 Water Spray Systems NFPA 16 Foam-Water Deluge and Foam-water Spray Systems NFPA 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems NFPA 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems Table 4.1 NFPA Standards for Releasing Applications Type Code: RELEASE CKT • For use in UL applications • Do not use REL-47K • Cannot use power-limited wiring • Supervised for open circuit only • Supervised for power loss Type Code: REL CKT ULC • For use in UL or ULC applications • Requires REL-47K at solenoid • Power-limited wiring • Supervised for open circuit and shorts • Supervised for power loss NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 51 Connecting a Releasing Device to FCM-1 Control Modules (Retrofit applications only)Applications 4.6.3 Wiring Make sure to keep total system current within the limits of the power supply. You can power the module from the power supply of the control panel or any UL-listed 24 VDC regulated power- limited power supply for Fire Protective Signaling. For more information, refer to the Device Compatibility Document. References to wiring diagrams for releasing applications: • To connect a releasing device to control module FCM-1, refer to Section 4.7. • To connect an NBG-12LRA Agent Release-Abort Station, refer to Section 4.9. 4.7 Connecting a Releasing Device to FCM-1 Control Modules (Retrofit applications only) Typical Connections Figure 4.11 shows typical connections for wiring a releasing device to this module. For ULC applications, REL-47K is required; see chart in Circuit Requirements below. Circuit Requirements When connecting releasing devices to FCM-1 control modules, note the following: 1. For NFPA 13 and 15 applications, disable the Soak Timer (Soak=0000); for NFPA 16 applications, set the Soak Timer (0600-0900 seconds). Refer to the NFS2-3030 Programming Manual for instructions on setting the Soak Timer. 2. For applications using power-limited circuits: a) Use an End-of-Line device (P/N REL-47K) with FCM-1 modules. Connect the an End-of- Line device as shown in Figure 4.11. b) All wiring for releasing circuits is supervised against open and shorts. c) Program the releasing circuit for Type Code REL CKT ULC. 3. For applications not requiring power-limited circuits: a) End-of-Line devices (P/N REL-47K) are not required; however, the releasing device circuit is not supervised against shorts. b) Limited energy cable cannot be used for wiring of a releasing device circuit. c) Maintain a 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) spacing between the releasing circuit device wiring and any power-limited circuit wiring. d) In non-power-limited applications, program the releasing circuit for Type Code RELEASE CKT. UL-listed 24 VDC releasing device REL-47K (Use with Type Code Rel Ckt ULC, or see Circuit Requirement 3.) Brown Red Non-resettable 24 VDC Power Re l c o n n - c o n t r o l m o d t p H . w m f – + FCM-1 – + SLC from FACP or LCM/LEM Note: See Circuit Requirements below. Devices for use in releasing applications must be programmed as type code RELEASE CIRCUIT or REL CKT ULC. Figure 4.11 Typical Connection of a 24 VDC Releasing Device to the FCM-1 Control Module *If the SLC device does not match the one in this figure, refer to the SLC manual appendix, which contains wiring conversion charts for type V and type H modules. 52 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Applications Connecting Releasing Devices to FCM-1-REL Control Modules 4.8 Connecting Releasing Devices to FCM-1-REL Control Modules Typical Connections Figure 4.11 shows typical connections for wiring a releasing device to the FCM-1-REL. Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for a compatible releasing devices. NOTE:As per UL 864 9th edition, a supervisory signal must be indicated at the panel whenever a releasing circuit is physically disconnected. Use a monitor module to monitor dry contacts off the switch. See figure 4.12. Refer to the SLC Manual for detailed wiring information. Figure 4.12 Typical Connection of a Mechanical Gas Disconnect Switch ga s d i s c o n n e c t . w m f SLC (-) SLC (+) Non-resettable 24 VDC power (-) (+) Compatible UL-listed 24 VDC releasing device. One (1) device maximum. Module polarities are shown in alarm condition. All wiring shown is supervised and power-limited. Figure 4.13 NPFA Style Y (Class B) Wiring of the FCM-1-REL Compatible UL-listed 24 VDC releasing device. One (1) device maximum. Non-resettable 24 VDC power SLC (-) SLC (+)(-) (+) Figure 4.13 NPFA Style Z (Class A) Wiring of the FCM-1-REL Module polarities are shown in alarm condition. All wiring shown is supervised and power-limited. FCM-1-REL FCM-1-REL When using the FCM-1-REL for Style Y (Class B) applications, remove jumper J1. fc m - 1 - r e l - y . w m f fc m - 1 - 1 r e l - z . w m f NOTE:With software version 14.0 or higher ALL new FlashScan Mode SLC releasing applications require the FCM-1-REL control module. The V-type FCM-1 control module may be used in SLC releasing applications with software version 14.0 or higher. H-type FCM-1 control modules do not support FlashScan mode releasing applications with software version 14.0 or higher. Use H-type FCM-1 for CLIP mode SLC releasing applications. NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 53 Connecting an NBG-12LRA Agent Release-Abort Station Applications Critical Requirements. When connecting a releasing device to the FCM-1-REL module, note the following: 1. See “Power Considerations” on page 52 for information on monitoring 24 VDC power. 2. Do not T-tap or branch a Style Y or Style Z circuit. 3. Only one (1) 24V solenoid or two (2) 12V solenoids in series can be connected to the FCM-1- REL. 4. Do not loop wiring under the screw terminals. Break the wire run to provide supervision of connections. 5. All applications using the FCM-1-REL are power-limited: a. Program the releasing circuit for Type Code REL CKT ULC or RELEASE CKT. b. Circuits are supervised against opens and shorts. 6. Refer to the NFS2-3030 Programming Manual for instructions on setting the Soak Timer. The FCM-1-REL module must be programmed with the correct releasing type code listed in the NFS2-3030 Programming Manual. 4.9 Connecting an NBG-12LRA Agent Release-Abort Station Typical Connections Figure 4.14 shows typical connections for wiring an NBG-12LRA Agent Release-Abort Station. SLC loop to FACP’s LCM-320 or LEM-320 FCM-1 FRM-1 FMM-101 FMM-101 Black Red Yellow Violet Black Red Yellow Violet Non-resettable +24 VDC from AMPS-24/E Manual Abort Manual Release Normal Release NBG-12LRA See Document 51369 for installation details. ELR mode R-47K supervised and power-limited RedBrown 24 VDC UL-listed releasing device C. N.O. 30 3 0 - N B G 1 2 L R A t p H . w m f System Common (–) 24 VDC power from FACP’s main power supply N.C. Figure 4.14 Typical Connections for an NBG-12LRA Agent Release-Abort Station *If the SLC device does not match the one in this figure, refer to the SLC manual appendix, which contains wiring conversion charts for type V and type H modules.REL-47K (use with Type Code “Rel Ckt ULC”) 54 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Applications Connecting an NBG-12LRA Agent Release-Abort Station NOTE:See Circuit Requirements for Section 4.7, “Connecting a Releasing Device to FCM-1 Control Modules (Retrofit applications only)”, on page 51. NOTE:Devices for use in releasing applications must be programmed as type code RELEASE CIRCUIT or REL CKT ULC. NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 55 Section 5: Testing the System 5.1 Acceptance Test When finished with the original installation and all modifications, conduct a complete operational test on the entire installation to verify compliance with applicable NFPA standards. Testing should be conducted by a factory-trained fire alarm technician in the presence of a representative of the Authority Having Jurisdiction and the owner's representative. Follow procedures outlined in NFPA Standard 72’s section Inspection, Testing and Maintenance. 5.2 Periodic Testing and Service Periodic testing and servicing of the control panel, all initiating and notification devices, and any other associated equipment is essential to ensure proper and reliable operation. Test and service the control panel according to the schedules and procedures outlined in the following documents: • NFPA Standard 72, Inspection, Testing and Maintenance. • Service manuals and instructions for the peripheral devices installed in your system. Correct any trouble condition or malfunction immediately. 5.3 Operational Checks Between formal periodic testing and servicing intervals, the following operation checks should be performed monthly, or more frequently when required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. ‰Disconnect all releasing devices to prevent accidental activation. ‰Check that the green POWER LED lights. ‰Check that all status LEDs are off. ‰Press and hold the LAMP TEST key. Verify that all LEDs and all LCD display segments work. ‰Before proceeding: a) notify the fire department and the central alarm receiving station if transmitting alarm conditions; b) notify facility personnel of the test so that alarm sounding devices are disregarded during the test period; and c) when necessary, disable activation of alarm notification appliances and speakers to prevent their sounding. ‰Activate an Initiating Device Circuit using an alarm initiating device or an addressable initiating device on the SLC and check that all programmed active notification appliances function. Reset the alarm initiating device, the control panel, and any other associated equipment. In voice alarm applications, confirm that the proper tone(s) and/or messages sound during alarm conditions. Select the paging function and confirm that the message can be heard in the affected fire zones. Repeat the above step with each Initiating Device Circuit and each addressable device. continued… !WARNING:RELEASING DEVICES SHOULD BE PHYSICALLY DISCONNECTED. DO NOT USE SOFTWARE DISABLE FUNCTIONS IN THE PANEL AS LOCKOUT. NOTE:SLC Resistance Values: The total DC resistance of the SLC pair cannot exceed 50 ohms. For instructions on how to measure the total DC resistance of a populated SLC pair, refer to the “Measuring Loop Resistance” section of the SLC Wiring Manual (P/N 51253). The minimum DC resistance between conductors of an unpopulated SLC pair cannot be less than 1 K ohms. Measure DC resistance on an unpopulated loop as shown in Figure 5.1 on page 56. 56 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Testing the System Battery Checks and Maintenance ‰Zero Ohms to ground will cause a ground fault. ‰On systems equipped with a firefighter’s telephone circuit, make a call from a telephone circuit and confirm a ring indication. Answer the call and confirm communication with the incoming caller. End the call and repeat for each telephone circuit in the system. ‰Remove AC power, activate an Initiating Device Circuit through an alarm initiating device or an addressable initiating device on the SLC, and check that programmed active notification appliances sound, and alarm indicators illuminate. Measure the battery voltage with notification appliances active. Replace any battery with a terminal voltage less than 21.6 VDC and reapply AC Power. ‰Return all circuits to their pretest condition. ‰Check that all status LEDs are off and the green POWER LED is on. ‰Notify fire, central station and/or building personnel when you finish testing the system. 5.4 Battery Checks and Maintenance Maintenance-free sealed lead-acid batteries used in the system do not require the addition of water or electrolyte. These batteries are charged and maintained in a fully charged state by the main power supply's float charger during normal system operation. A discharged battery typically reaches the float voltage of 27.6 VDC within 48 hours. Follow the local AHJ and manufacturer recommendations for battery replacement intervals. Minimal replacement battery capacity appears on the control panel marking label. Immediately replace a leaking or damaged battery. You can get replacement batteries from the manufacturer. • If a battery leaks and contact is made with the Sulfuric Acid, immediately flush skin and/or eyes with water for at least 15 minutes. Water and household baking soda provides a good neutralizing solution for Sulfuric Acid. • If Sulfuric Acid gets into eyes, seek immediate medical attention. • Ensure proper handling of the battery to prevent short circuits. NOTE: The battery test requires fully charged batteries. If batteries are new or discharged due to a recent power outage, allow the batteries to charge for 48 hours before testing. SL C -m e a s 5.c dr SLC Out SLC Return SLC Return SLC Out STEP 2 STEP 3 Step 1. Disconnect the SLC channel B (Out) and SLC channel A (Return) at the control panel. Step 2. Measure and record the resistance at SLC Out. Step 3. Measure and record the resistance at SLC Return. The minimum resistance is the lesser of two and three. Figure 5.1 Measuring DC Resistance on an Unpopulated SLC Loop !WARNING: BATTERIES CONTAIN SULFURIC ACID, WHICH CAN CAUSE SEVERE BURNS TO THE SKIN AND EYES AND DAMAGE TO FABRICS. NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 57 Battery Checks and Maintenance Testing the System • Take care to avoid accidental shorting of the leads from uninsulated work benches, tools, bracelets, rings, and coins. !CAUTION: SHORTING THE BATTERY LEADS CAN DAMAGE THE BATTERY, EQUIPMENT, AND COULD CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONNEL. 58 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Appendix A: Electrical Specifications A.1 Operating Power DC Power The control panel requires connection to AMPS-24, which is a +24 VDC regulated, power-limited power supply, UL/ULC-listed for fire protective service, that can supply 0.1 amps continuous for CPU2-3030ND (0.3 amps for CPU2-3030D). For complete battery/current draw calculations, refer to the main power supply manual; if using an auxiliary power supply, there may be additional calculations in that manual. A.2 SLC Loops Listed below are specifications for a Signaling Line Circuit loop. Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for more detailed specifications and specific device listings: A.3 Notification Appliance Circuits The FCPS-24S6 and FCPS-24S8 power supplies provide Notification Appliance Circuits. Refer to the FCPS-24S6/S8 manual for product-specific specifications. Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for compatible devices and notification appliances. Refer to the FCPS-24S6/FCPS-24S8 Manual for complete details about this power supply. A.4 Wire Requirements Each type of circuit within the Fire Alarm Control System requires use of a specific wire type to ensure proper circuit operation. The wire gauge of a particular circuit depends on the length of that circuit and the current traveling through it. Use the table below to determine the specific wiring requirements for each circuit. Compliance with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Department of Communication regulations on electrical energy radiation requires the following: Use twisted-pair shielded wire for any non-SLC-loop wiring entering or exiting the cabinet that is not enclosed in conduit. Use twisted-pair unshielded wiring for SLC-loop wiring. Item Value Voltage 24 VDC nominal, 27.6 VDC maximum Maximum length The maximum wiring distance of an SLC using 12 AWG (3.25 mm 2) twisted- pair wire is 12,500 ft. (3810 m) per channel. Note: Refer to Appendix A.4 “Wire Requirements” for limitations. Maximum current 130 mA: LCM-320 100 mA: LEM-320 400 mA max*: Single SLC loop *Max short circuit…circuit will shut down until short circuit condition is corrected. Maximum resistance 50 ohms (supervised and power-limited). For additional notes on SLC resistance values, see Section 5.3 “Operational Checks”. NOTE:If running an SLC in conduit with Notification Appliance Circuits, you can reduce problems by exclusively using electronic sounders (such as the MA/SS-24 Series) instead of more electronically noisy notification appliances (such as electromechanical bells or horns). NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 59 Wire Requirements Electrical Specifications Relay Output circuits are “Common” 30VDC, 2A (see Section 3.9 “Form-C Relays on the CPU”). Power output circuits: TB6 on the CPU draws power from primary, secondary and external sources to pass +24 VDC power to devices within the same enclosure as the CPU. If those devices have outputs, the outputs must be power-limited. Power rating is determined by the power source(s). See Section 3.10.1 “Overview”, and the AMPS-24 Manual for more details. Circuit Type Circuit Function Wire Requirements Distance (feet/meters) Typical Wire Type SLC (power limited) Connects to intelligent and addressable modules. Twisted-unshielded pair, 12 to 18 AWG (3.25 to 0.75mm2). 50 ohms, maximum per length of Style 6 & 7 loops. 50 ohms per branch maximum for Style 4 loop. 12,500 ft (3,810 m) 9,500 ft. (2,895.6 m) 6,000 ft. (1,828.8 m) 3,700 ft. (1,127.76 m) 12 AWG (3.31 mm2) 14 AWG (2.08 mm2) 16 AWG (1.31 mm2) 18 AWG (0.82 mm2) or Twisted-shielded pair. NOTE: • Shields must be isolated from ground. • Shields should be broken at each device. 5,000 ft (1524 m) 3,700 ft. (1,127.76 m) 12 to 16 AWG (3.31 mm2 to 1.31 mm2) 18 AWG (0.82 mm2) or Untwisted, unshielded wire, in conduit or outside of conduit. NOTE: Maximum total capacitance for all SLC wiring (both between conductors and from any conductor to ground) should not exceed 0.5 microfarads 5,000 ft (1524 m) 3,700 ft. (1,127.76 m) 12 to 16 AWG (3.31 mm2 to 1.31 mm2) 18 AWG (0.82 mm2) EIA-485 ACS Connection (power limited) Connects to ACS devices such as annunciators and UDACT Twisted-shielded pair with a characteristic impedance of 120 ohms. 18 AWG (0.75mm2) minimum. 6,000 ft (1829 m) (max) 16 AWG (1.31mm2) EIA-485 RDP Connection (power limited) Connects to RDP devices such as LCD-160 Twisted-shielded pair with a characteristic impedance of 120 ohms. 18 AWG (0.75mm2) minimum. 4,000 ft (1219 m) (max) 16 AWG (1.31 mm2) EIA-232 (power limited) Connects to Printers or PC. Twisted-shielded pair. 18 AWG (0.75mm2) minimum. 50 ft (15.24 m) without modem 16 AWG (1.31 mm2) IDC Initiating Device Circuit FMM-1, FMM-101 (power limited) 12-18 AWG Maximum circuit resistance is 20 ohms. 12 to 18 AWG (3.31 to 0.82 mm2) NAC Notification Appliance Circuit FCM-1 (power limited) 12-18 AWG. MPS-24A: At alarm current level, no more than a 1.2 V drop at the end of the circuit, or sized to provide the minimum rated operating voltage of the appliances used. To meet 1.2 V drop, or sized to provide the minimum rated operating voltage of the appliances used. 12 to 18 AWG (3.31 to 0.82 mm2) Releasing Module FCM-1-REL 12-18 AWG. 5 ohms maximum per circuit for class A or B, or sized to provide the minimum rated operating voltage of the appliances used. To meet 5 ohms maximum circuit resistance, or sized to provide the minimum rated operating voltage of the appliances used. 12 to 18 AWG (3.31 to 0.82 mm2) 24 VDC Power Runs (power- limited) To TM-4 Transmitter, Annunciator and FCM-1 modules 12-18 AWG. Size wire so that no more than 1.2 V drop across wire run from supply source to end of any branch. To meet 1.2 volt drop 12 to 18 AWG (3.31 to 0.82 mm2) CHG-120 External battery charger 12 AWG in conduit 20 ft (6.1 m) maximum 12 AWG (3.31 mm2) Table A.1 Wire Requirements 60 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 Appendix B: Canadian Applications B.1 Standalone Application CPU2-3030D, with its integral keypad/display, meets Canadian requirements for standalone applications. Its 640-character, multi-line display complies with ULC requirements for primary displays. B.2 Local Network Application To meet ULC requirements, the network’s Manual Controls may only be operated from one location at any given time. When panels are networked (using Network Communications Modules or High-Speed Network Communications Modules), employ AKS-1 Key Switch on each panel’s Primary Annunciator to enable its functions. NCA-2 may be a Primary Annunciator when AKS-1 is installed. Refer to the NCA-2 Manual (P/N 52482) for more information. The NCA-2 or Network Control Station (NCS) may be employed as a Display and Control Center. In the event that communication fails between the panels and the Control Center, the panels will continue to function in local/standalone mode. B.3 Automatic Alarm Signal Silence If selecting this feature for a system requiring annunciators, consult the Authority Having Jurisdiction. B.4 Annunciator Applications 1. In Canada, the ACM series annunciator modules must be used to annunciate the fire alarm input points/zones only, if no multi-line sequential display is installed. 2. For Canadian applications, the following LED colors must be employed: – Red must be used to indicate active alarm inputs. – Yellow must be used to indicate supervisory, burglary or trouble signals. – Green must be used to indicate the presence of power or an activated output. B.5 Releasing Devices Supervision for shorts is required; use REL-47K and type code Rel Ckt ULC. Refer to Section 4.6 “Releasing Applications”. B.6 Canadian SLC Devices For a complete list of ULC-listed SLC loop devices, see SLC Wiring Manual, Appendix C “Canadian Versions of SLC Devices”. NOTE:Only one key should be issued for a networked system. NOTE:Eclipse devices are not listed for releasing applications. NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 61 Index A AC Power, also see Power 33 Acceptance Test 55 ACM-8R 35 ADP-4B 15 Agent Release-Abort Station 53 Alarm Relays see Relays 32 B Backboxes 12, 15 Mounting 19 Battery Battery Calculations 58 Battery Checks 56 Memory-Backup Battery 24 Blank Modules 12, 15 BMP-1 15, 21 BP2-4 15 C CAB-4 Series, also see Backboxes 15 Cabinets, also see Backboxes 12, 15, 21 Canadian Applications 60 Central Receiving Unit, also see UDACT Manual 46 Chassis CHS-4L 15 CHS-M3 15, 21, 30 Circuit Board, also see CPU 13 Control Panel Circuit Board, also see CPU 13 CPU 12, 13 Drawing 13 Installation Steps 22 D DC Power, also see Power 33 Display and Control Center (DCC), see Program- ming Manual Doors 12, 15 DP-1B 15 DP-DISP 15 Dress Panels 12, 15 E Electrical Connections 32 Electrical Specifications 58 Enclosures, see Backboxes 15 External Power Supervision 41 F FCM-1 51 FCM-1-REL 52 FCPS-24S6/S8 58 Fire/Security Applications 44 FMM-1 46 Form-C Relays, also see Relays 32 H HS-NCM-W/F Mounting 26 I Indicating Device Circuits, also see NACs 58 Installation Checklist 18 Preparation 18 K Keltron Printer, also see Printers 38 L LCM-320/LEM-320, see SLC Loop Modules LDM-R32 35 M Main Power Supply 14 Maintenance 55, 56 Manual Pull Station 39 Memory-Backup Battery Insulator 24 Mounting Backboxes and Doors 19 N NACs Specifications 58 NBG-12LRA 53 NCM-W/F Mounting 26 Networking 26 NFPA Applications NFPA 72 Central Station Fire Alarm Sys- tem 42 NFPA 72 Remote Station Fire Alarm Sys- tem 42 Overview 41 Protected Premises Unit 42 Non-Power-Limited Circuits 62 NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 O–W Index UL Wiring Requirements 34 Notification Appliance Circuits, also see NACs 58 O Operating Power 58 Operational Checks 55 Output Relays, also see Form-C Relays Specifications 32 P PC Connection 40 Periodic Testing 55 Power 33 AC Power Checklist 33 AC Power Connections 33 Auxiliary Power 34 DC Power Connections 33 Installation Steps 32 Main Power Supply 14 Power Supply Calculations 58 Power-Limited Wiring Requirements 34 Specifications 32 PPU 42 Printers 36, 38 Installation 35 PRN Printer Settings 38 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems 43 Proprietary Security Alarm, also see Security 46 Protected Premises Receiving Unit 43 R Receiving Unit 43 Related Documentation 8 Releasing 50 FCM-1 connections 51 FCM-1-REL connections 52 NBG-12LRA 53 Remote Connection Feature 35 S Security Proprietary Security Alarm Applications Wiring 46 Security Relays, also see Relays 32 Security Tamper Switch 45 Service 55 Signalling Line Circuit, also see SLC 39 SLC Loop Modules External Power Supervision 41 SLC Loop Number 28 SLC, also see SLC Wiring Manual Specifications 58 SLC, see SLC Wiring Manual Specifications 58 STS-1, also see Security 46 Supervisory and Security Contacts -Configuring as Alarm Contacts 32 Supervisory Relays, also see Relays 32 Supplemental Documentation 8 System Features 11 Limitations 12 Options 11 System Description 11 System Current Draws, also see Your Power Sup- ply Manual 58 T Testing 55 TM-4 35 Trouble Relays, also see Relays 32 U UDACT 35, 42 UL Non-Power-Limited Wiring Requirements 34 UL Requirements 34 ULC Remote Connection Feature 35 Upload/Download Software 40 V VeriFire® Tools 40 W Wiring, also see SLC 39 Non-Power-Limited Wiring Requirements 34 Proprietary Security Alarm Applications 46 UL Non-Power-Limited Wiring Require- ments 34 Wire Requirements 58 Manufacturer Warranties and Limitation of Liability Manufacturer Warranties. Subject to the limitations set forth herein, Manufacturer warrants that the Products manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility and sold by it to its authorized Distributors shall be free, under normal use and service, from defects in material and workmanship for a period of thirty six months (36) months from the date of manufacture (effective Jan. 1, 2009). The Products manufactured and sold by Manufacturer are date stamped at the time of production. Manufacturer does not warrant Products that are not manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility but assigns to its Distributor, to the extent possible, any warranty offered by the manufacturer of such product. This warranty shall be void if a Product is altered, serviced or repaired by anyone other than Manufacturer or its authorized Distributors. This warranty shall also be void if there is a failure to maintain the Products and the systems in which they operate in proper working conditions. MANUFACTURER MAKES NO FURTHER WARRANTIES, AND DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS, TRADEMARKS, PROGRAMS AND SERVICES RENDERED BY MANUFACTURER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE COURSE OF, OR AS A RESULT OF, PERSONAL, COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USES OF ITS PRODUCTS. This document constitutes the only warranty made by Manufacturer with respect to its products and replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Manufacturer. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligation of this warranty is authorized. Manufacturer does not represent that its products will prevent any loss by fire or otherwise. Warranty Claims. Manufacturer shall replace or repair, at Manufacturer's discretion, each part returned by its authorized Distributor and acknowledged by Manufacturer to be defective, provided that such part shall have been returned to Manufacturer with all charges prepaid and the authorized Distributor has completed Manufacturer's Return Material Authorization form. The replacement part shall come from Manufacturer's stock and may be new or refurbished. THE FOREGOING IS DISTRIBUTOR'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IN THE EVENT OF A WARRANTY CLAIM. Warn-HL-08-2009.fm NFS2-3030/E Installation Manual — P/N 52544:G 05/17/2010 63 World Headquarters 12 Clintonville Road Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA 203-484-7161 fax 203-484-7118 www.notifier.com E P/N 52546:E ECN 10-249 Document 52546 05/21/2010 Rev: Fire Alarm Control Panel NFS2-3030 Operations Manual 2 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Fire Alarm System Limitations While a fire alarm system may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! An automatic fire alarm system—typically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control panel with remote notification capability—can provide early warning of a develop- ing fire. Such a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat detec- tors be located throughout a protected premise following the recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire Protection Association Standard 72 (NFPA 72), manufacturer's recommendations, State and local codes, and the recommen- dations contained in the Guides for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which are made available at no charge to all installing dealers. These documents can be found at http:// www.systemsensor.com/html/applicat.html. A study by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (an agency of the United States government) indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in as many as 35% of all fires. While fire alarm systems are designed to provide early warning against fire, they do not guarantee warning or protection against fire. A fire alarm system may not provide timely or adequate warning, or simply may not function, for a variety of reasons: Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second-floor detector, for example, may not sense a first- floor or basement fire. Particles of combustion or “smoke” from a developing fire may not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors because: • Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, or chimneys may inhibit particle or smoke flow. • Smoke particles may become “cold,” stratify, and not reach the ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located. • Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air outlets. • Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before reaching the detector. The amount of “smoke” present may be insufficient to alarm smoke detectors. Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at various levels of smoke density. If such density levels are not created by a developing fire at the location of detectors, the detectors will not go into alarm. Smoke detectors, even when working properly, have sensing limitations. Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing chambers tend to detect smoldering fires better than flaming fires, which have little visible smoke. Detectors that have ion- izing-type sensing chambers tend to detect fast-flaming fires better than smoldering fires. Because fires develop in different ways and are often unpredictable in their growth, neither type of detector is necessarily best and a given type of detector may not provide adequate warning of a fire. Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate warning of fires caused by arson, children playing with matches (especially in bedrooms), smoking in bed, and violent explosions (caused by escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, etc.). Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and alarm only when heat on their sensors increases at a predeter- mined rate or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire pro- tection specialist. Heat detectors are designed to protect property, not life. IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the same room as the control panel and in rooms used by the sys- tem for the connection of alarm transmission wiring, communi- cations, signaling, and/or power. If detectors are not so located, a developing fire may damage the alarm system, crip- pling its ability to report a fire. Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building. Any warning device may fail to alert people with a disability or those who have recently consumed drugs, alcohol or medica- tion. Please note that: • Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures in people with conditions such as epilepsy. • Studies have shown that certain people, even when they hear a fire alarm signal, do not respond or comprehend the meaning of the signal. It is the property owner's responsi- bility to conduct fire drills and other training exercise to make people aware of fire alarm signals and instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm signals. • In rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can cause temporary or permanent hearing loss. A fire alarm system will not operate without any electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only for a specified time and only if the batteries have been properly maintained and replaced regularly. Equipment used in the system may not be technically com- patible with the control panel. It is essential to use only equip- ment listed for service with your control panel. Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily disabled. For added protection against tele- phone line failure, backup radio transmission systems are rec- ommended. The most common cause of fire alarm malfunction is inade- quate maintenance. To keep the entire fire alarm system in excellent working order, ongoing maintenance is required per the manufacturer's recommendations, and UL and NFPA stan- dards. At a minimum, the requirements of NFPA 72 shall be followed. Environments with large amounts of dust, dirt or high air velocity require more frequent maintenance. A main- tenance agreement should be arranged through the local man- ufacturer's representative. Maintenance should be scheduled monthly or as required by National and/or local fire codes and should be performed by authorized professional fire alarm installers only. Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept. Limit-C1-2-2007 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 3 Installation Precautions Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: WARNING - Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and associ- ated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or insert- ing cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until manuals are read and understood. CAUTION - System Re-acceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 after any pro- gramming operation or change in site-specific software. Re- acceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. All compo- nents, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified. This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49º C/32-120º F and at a relative humidity 93% ± 2% RH (non- condensing) at 32°C ± 2°C (90°F ± 3°F). However, the useful life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic com- ponents may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a normal room temperature of 15-27º C/60-80º F. Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indi- cating device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device voltage. Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to light- ning induced transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Ser- vices Department if any problems are anticipated or encoun- tered. Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifi- cations, verify that they will not interfere with battery, trans- former, or printed circuit board location. Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over- tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before han- dling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit. Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and pro- gramming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper installation. Precau-D1-9-2005 FCC Warning WARNING: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class A computing devices pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which is designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when devices are operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interfer- ence, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense. Canadian Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Department of Communications. Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada. HARSH™, NIS™, Notifier Integrated Systems™, and NOTI•FIRE•NET™ are all trademarks; and Acclimate® Plus, FlashScan®, NION®, NOTIFIER®, ONYX®, ONYXWorks®, UniNet®, VeriFire®, and VIEW® are all registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. Echelon® is a registered trademark and LonWorks™ is a trademark of Echelon Corporation. ARCNET® is a registered trademark of Datapoint Corporation. Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. ©2010 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. 4 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Software Downloads In order to supply the latest features and functionality in fire alarm and life safety technology to our customers, we make frequent upgrades to the embedded software in our products. To ensure that you are installing and programming the latest features, we strongly recommend that you download the most current version of software for each product prior to commissioning any system. Contact Tech- nical Support with any questions about software and the appropriate version for a specific application. Documentation Feedback Your feedback helps us keep our documentation up-to-date and accurate. If you have any comments or suggestions about our online Help or printed manuals, you can email us. Please include the following information: • Product name and version number (if applicable) • Printed manual or online Help • Topic Title (for online Help) • Page number (for printed manual) • Brief description of content you think should be improved or corrected • Your suggestion for how to correct/improve documentation Send email messages to: FireSystems.TechPubs@honeywell.com Please note this email address is for documentation feedback only. If you have any technical issues, please contact Technical Services. Table of Contents NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 5 Table of Contents Section 1: General Information................................................................................................7 1.1: UL 864 Compliance.......................................................................................................................................7 1.1.1: Products Subject to AHJ Approval......................................................................................................7 1.2: Related Documents........................................................................................................................................7 1.3: About This Manual........................................................................................................................................8 1.4: Introduction to the Control Panel ..................................................................................................................9 1.5: Operating Features.........................................................................................................................................9 1.5.1: The Display/Keypad..........................................................................................................................10 1.6: Message Formats.........................................................................................................................................12 1.6.1: System Normal Screen......................................................................................................................13 1.6.2: Event Reporting Format....................................................................................................................13 1.7: Navigating Menu and Programming Screens..............................................................................................15 1.8: The Main Menu ...........................................................................................................................................16 1.8.1: Event Counts Display........................................................................................................................16 1.8.2: More Information ..............................................................................................................................17 1.8.3: Multiple Event List............................................................................................................................19 1.8.4: History Display (History Select Screen) ...........................................................................................21 1.8.5: Read Status........................................................................................................................................21 1.8.6: Program/Alter Status.........................................................................................................................21 1.8.7: Printer Functions ...............................................................................................................................21 Section 2: Operation of the Control Panel............................................................................23 2.1: Overview......................................................................................................................................................23 2.1.1: System Normal..................................................................................................................................23 2.1.2: Acknowledging an Event...................................................................................................................24 2.2: Fire Alarm Event .........................................................................................................................................24 2.2.1: How the Control Panel Indicates a Fire Alarm..................................................................................24 2.2.2: How to Respond to a Fire Alarm.......................................................................................................25 2.2.3: Interpreting Type ID Codes...............................................................................................................25 2.3: System or Point Trouble Event....................................................................................................................26 2.3.1: How the Control Panel Indicates a System or Point Trouble............................................................26 2.3.2: How to Respond to a System or Point Trouble.................................................................................27 2.3.3: Trouble Types....................................................................................................................................27 2.3.4: Interpreting Type ID Codes...............................................................................................................31 2.4: Pre-alarm Event...........................................................................................................................................31 2.4.1: How the Control Panel Indicates a Pre-alarm ...................................................................................32 2.4.2: How to Respond to a Pre-Alarm Warning.........................................................................................33 2.4.3: Interpreting Type ID Codes...............................................................................................................33 2.5: Security Alarm Event ..................................................................................................................................33 2.5.1: How the Control Panel Indicates a Security Alarm...........................................................................33 2.5.2: How to Respond to a Security Alarm................................................................................................34 2.5.3: Interpreting Security Type Codes......................................................................................................34 2.6: Supervisory Signal Event ............................................................................................................................35 2.6.1: How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Supervisory..................................................................35 2.6.2: How to Respond to an Active Supervisory .......................................................................................35 2.6.3: How to Interpret Type Codes............................................................................................................36 2.7: Disabled Points Event..................................................................................................................................36 2.8: Active Event ................................................................................................................................................37 2.8.1: How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Fire Control Point ........................................................37 2.8.2: How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Non-fire Point ..............................................................37 2.9: Operation of Special System Timers, Presignal, and PAS...........................................................................38 2.9.1: System (Panel) Timers.......................................................................................................................38 2.9.2: Presignal............................................................................................................................................38 2.9.3: PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence)........................................................................................................39 Table of Contents 6 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Section 3: Read Status...........................................................................................................41 3.1: Point Select Screen ......................................................................................................................................41 3.2: Smoke Detector............................................................................................................................................42 3.3: Heat Detector...............................................................................................................................................44 3.4: Monitor Module...........................................................................................................................................44 3.5: Control Module............................................................................................................................................45 3.6: General Zone................................................................................................................................................46 3.7: Logic Zone...................................................................................................................................................47 3.8: Releasing Zone.............................................................................................................................................48 3.9: Special Function Zone .................................................................................................................................49 3.10: Trouble Zone..............................................................................................................................................49 3.11: Annunciator................................................................................................................................................50 3.12: DAA Speaker Circuit.................................................................................................................................51 3.13: PAM Points................................................................................................................................................51 Section 4: Viewing and Printing History Information..........................................................53 4.1: Events History..............................................................................................................................................53 4.2: Time and Date Range Selection for All Events...........................................................................................55 4.3: Point Range Select for All Events in Range................................................................................................55 Section 5: Printing Reports ...................................................................................................57 5.1: Printer Functions Screen..............................................................................................................................57 5.2: Print Programming Menu Screen.................................................................................................................58 5.3: Print Programming Menu Screen (2)...........................................................................................................60 5.4: Active Points Report Screen........................................................................................................................61 5.5: Installed Points Report Screen.....................................................................................................................61 Appendix A: Software Type ID Codes ..................................................................................65 A.1: Alphabetical List.........................................................................................................................................65 Appendix B: Releasing Zones...............................................................................................68 B.1: Introduction.................................................................................................................................................68 B.2: How Releasing Zones Operate....................................................................................................................69 Index ........................................................................................................................................71 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 7 Section 1: General Information 1.1 UL 864 Compliance 1.1.1 Products Subject to AHJ Approval This product has been certified to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864 9th Edition. Products that have not received UL 864 9th Edition certification may only be used in retrofit applications. Operation of this panel with products not tested for UL 864 9th Edition has not been evaluated and may not comply with NFPA 72 and/or the latest edition of UL 864. These applications will require the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). A complete listing identifying which products have not received UL 864 9th Edition certification is located in the installation manual of this fire alarm system. 1.2 Related Documents The table below provides a list of document sources (manuals) containing additional information regarding the NFS2-3030 and optional peripherals. The NOTIFIER document (DOC-NOT) provides the current document revision. A copy of this document is included in every shipment. Compatible Conventional Devices (Non-addressable) Document Number Device Compatibility Document 15378 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) and Main Power Supply Installation Document Number NFS2-3030 Installation, Operations, and Programming Manuals 52544, 52545, 52546 AMPS-24/E Addressable Power Supply Manual 51907 DVC and DAA Digital Audio Series Manual 52411 DAA Digital Audio Amplifier Installation Sheet 52410 AA-Series Audio Amplifier Manual 52526 SLC Wiring Manual 51253 Note: For individual SLC Devices, refer to the SLC Wiring Manual *Note: Also documents some retrofit equipment manufactured under UL 8th edition Voice Alarm System Manual 51252 Off-line Programming Utility Document Number VeriFire® Tools CD help file VERIFIRE-TCD Cabinets & Chassis Document Number CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Document 15330 Battery/Peripherals Enclosure Installation Document 50295 Power Supplies, Auxiliary Power Supplies & Battery Chargers Document Number ACPS-610 Instruction Manual 53018 ACPS-2406 Installation Manual 51304 APS2-6R Instruction Manual 53232 CHG-120 Battery Charger Manual 50641 FCPS-24 Field Charger/Power Supply Manual 50059 Networking Document Number Noti•Fire•Net Manual, Network Version 4.0 & Higher 51584 Table 1.1 Related Documents (1 of 2) 8 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 General Information About This Manual 1.3 About This Manual The following graphics appear in the manual to indicate a caution, a warning, or a note. *Note: Also documents some retrofit equipment manufactured under UL 8th edition High Speed Noti•Fire•Net Manual 54013 NCM-W/F Installation Document 51533 HS-NCM High Speed Network Control Module Installation Document 54014 NCS ONYX® Network Control Station, Network Version 4.0 & Higher Manual 51658 NCA-2 Network Control Annunciator Manual 52482 NCA Network Control Annunciator Manual 51482 System Components Document Number Annunciator Control System Manual 15842 Annunciator Fixed Module Manual 15048 ACM-8R Annunciator Control Module Manual 15342 LCD-80 Manual 15037 LCD-80TM Manual 51082 LCD2-80 Liquid Crystal Display Module 53242 LCD-160 Manual 51850 LDM Series Lamp Driver Annunciator Manual 15885 SCS Smoke Control Manual (Smoke and HVAC Control Station) Manual 15712 RPT-485W/RPT-485WF EIA-485 Annunciator Loop Repeater 15640 DPI-232 Manual 51499 TM-4 Installation Document (Reverse Polarity Transmitter) 51490 UDACT Manual (Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) 50050 ACT-1 Installation Document 52527 ACT-2 Installation Document 51118 FireVoice 25/50 Series Manual 52290 RM-1 Series Remote Microphone Installation Document 51138 RA100Z Remote LED Annunciator Document I56-0508 RFX Wireless Interface Manual 51012 UZC-256 Universal Zone Coder Manual 15216 UZC-256 Programming Manual 15976 XP Transponder Manual 15888 XP10-M Ten Input Monitor Module Installation Document I56-1803 XP5 Series Manual 50786 XP6-C Supervised Control Module Installation Document I56-1805 XP6-MA Six Zone Interface Module Installation Document I56-1806 XP6-R Six Relay Control Module Installation Document I56-1804 XPIQ Audio Transponder Manual 51013 Table 1.1 Related Documents (2 of 2) !CAUTION: Information about procedures that could cause programming errors, runtime errors, or equipment damage. NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 9 Introduction to the Control Panel General Information 1.4 Introduction to the Control Panel The NFS2-3030 is an intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with features suitable for most applications. The CPU2-3030 comes with a front display/keypad option, which allows programming and viewing options at the panel. There are two basic configuration options for the NFS2-3030. It can be ordered with: • a front display/keypad, which allows programming and viewing options at the panel, or • no display keypad. This manual gives instructions using the front display/keypad. Displayless Mode When there is no keypad/display at the NFS2-3030, the panel is controlled by remote annunciators. VeriFire® programming is required. The displayless panel has four buttons on its circuit board that are service-level switches for local operation should it become necessary. They are the only buttons, and are clearly marked with ACK for Acknowledge, SIGSIL for Signal Silence, SYSRST for System Reset, and LAMP TEST. These buttons are mainly for installer use: the operator should utilize a remote annunciator for these functions, if possible. The status indicator LEDs on the circuit board are the same as on the display/keypad (refer to Section 1.5.1, “The Display/Keypad”, on page 10 of this manual). Refer to VeriFire® Tools or the NCA-2 Manual for information on programming without the NFS2- 3030 display/keypad. 1.5 Operating Features • Alarm Verification selection, to reduce unwanted alarms • Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) and Presignal per NFPA 72 • Silence Inhibit timer and Auto Silence timer for Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) • Programmable Signal Silence, System Reset, and Alarm Activate functions through monitor modules • Automatic time-of-day and day-of-week control functions, with holiday option • Intelligent Sensing with nine field-adjustable Pre-Alarm levels with programmable Control-By-Event (CBE) • Operate automatic smoke or heat detector sounder/relay base on action Pre-Alarm level, with general evacuation on alarm level • Security alarm point option with separate audible signal code • Centralized voice paging and audible alarm signaling options • Programmable Control-By-Event control of outputs from individual alarm or supervisory addressable devices • Networks with other FACPs and equipment for large applications • Automatic detector sensitivity adjustments based on programmable building occupancy schedules !WARNING: Information about procedures that could cause irreversible damage to the control panel, irreversible loss of programming data or personal injury. NOTE:Information that highlights an important part of the preceding or subsequent text or illustration. 10 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 General Information Operating Features 1.5.1 The Display/Keypad The display/keypad provides an easy-to-use keypad and large LCD (liquid crystal display) that simplifies the programming process. Figure 1.1 The Display/Keypad The Liquid Crystal Display The display is 40 characters wide by 16 lines. It displays all programming screens, as well as events, history, device and other information. Fields may be entered or changed and commands may be issued on the display using the keypad. The Keypad The keypad has several types of keys, described below. Fixed Function Keys Soft Keys Status LEDs Special Function Keys 30 3 0 N C A 2 k e y p a d . w m f NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 11 Operating Features General Information The keypad consists of several types of keys: alphanumerics, special function keys, soft keys, and fixed function keys. Keypad The alphanumeric portion of the keypad is in standard QWERTY format. This keypad is functional mainly when an entry is requested by the system. Otherwise, pressing these keys results in no entry. Soft Keys The ten keys to the right and left of the display function to select commands that appear on the display. Each screen has different information, and each key changes function to suit the screen. Beneath each screen in this manual is a description of the function of each soft key. Fixed Function Keys The nine keys aligned along the upper right edge of the keypad/display are fixed function keys. ACKNOWLEDGE - Press this key to acknowledge an off-normal event displayed on the screen. FIRE ALARM SCROLL/DISPLAY SECURITY SCROLL/DISPLAY SUPERVISORY SCROLL/DISPLAY TROUBLE SCROLL/DISPLAY OTHER EVENT SCROLL/DISPLAY SIGNAL SILENCE - Press this key to turn off all control modules and panel output circuits that have been programmed as silenceable. Signal Silence is disabled while the Silence Inhibit Timer is in effect, or when a device with a Waterflow type code initiates a fire alarm. DRILL HOLD 2 SEC. - Press this key, holding it down for 2 seconds, to activate all silenceable fire output circuits. SYSTEM RESET - Press this key to clear all latched alarms and other events as well as turn off event LEDs. If alarms or other off-normal events exist after reset, they will resound the system and relight the LEDs. Unacknowledged events will not prevent reset from functioning unless the panel is programmed for Receive Mode (refer to the note on page page 24). The SYSTEM RESET key will not function if the programmable Silence Inhibit Timer is running. The System Reset key will not immediately silence active outputs. If the Control-by-event programming conditions for the output are not met after reset, the output will deactivate. (Typically 30 seconds local, 60 seconds network.) Special Function Keys To the right of the QWERTY keypad are special function keys. Arrow Keys - Pressing these keys navigates through the programming fields on a display screen by advancing or reversing the cursor position. Enter - Pressing this key navigates through the programming fields on a display screen by advancing the cursor. NOTE:Key functions are as described below unless the Local Control option is disabled, or the Display and Control Center (DCC) option is enabled and the DCC is at another location. When the Local Control option is disabled, the panel does not have local control of the Signal Silence, System Reset, and Drill Fixed Function keys, or the SIGNAL SILENCE, SYSTEM RESET, and ACKNOWLEDGE soft keys. These functions must be performed by a remote device preprogrammed for this purpose. When this panel is not the DCC on a network, permission must be granted from the DCC before Signal Silence, System Reset, Acknowledge or Drill can be performed at this panel. Pressing one of these keys will automatically send a permission request to the DCC. Scroll through a list of events of these types, each of which will appear on the display once the associated button is pushed. The OTHER EVENT SCROLL/DISPLAY key also scrolls between prealarm and disabled events. 12 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 General Information Message Formats Esc - Press this key once to leave the current field without saving the entry. Press this key twice in succession to discard any changes made on the screen and exit to the previous screen. DISABLE/ENABLE - For future use. No function at this time. PRINT SCREEN - Press this key to print what is displayed on the display screen. LAMP TEST - Press this key to test the LED indicators on the left of the keypad and the piezo. Pressing the key longer than 5 seconds will display firmware version numbers on the display screen. BATTERY LEVELS - Press this key to display battery voltage and charger current. NEXT SELECTION/PREVIOUS SELECTION - Use these keys to scroll through the list of possibilities in a data field on the display screen. F1 and F2 - For future use. No function at this time. LED Indicators There are eleven labeled LEDs aligned along the left edge of the keypad. They light to annunciate certain conditions, as described in Table 1.2 below. 1.6 Message Formats This section describes the formats for system normal, device events and system events screens. For a definition of these types of events, as well as instructions for dealing with them, refer to Section 2, “Operation of the Control Panel” in this manual. LED INDICATOR COLOR FUNCTION Controls Active Green Illuminates when the panel assumes control of local operation as primary display. Power Green Illuminates when AC power is within normal operating limits. Fire Alarm Red Illuminates when at least one fire alarm event exists. It will flash if any of these events are unacknowledged. Pre-alarm Red Illuminates when at least one pre-alarm event exists. It will flash if any of these events are unacknowledged. Security Blue Illuminates when at least one security event exists. It will flash if any of these events are unacknowledged. Supervisory Yellow Illuminates when at least one supervisory event exists. It will flash if any of these events are unacknowledged. System Trouble Yellow Illuminates when at least one trouble event exists. It will flash if any of these events are unacknowledged. Other Event Yellow Illuminates for any category of event not listed above. It will flash if any of these events are unacknowledged Signals Silenced Yellow Illuminates if the NFS2-3030 Notification Appliances have been silenced. It flashes if some but not all of the NFS2-3030 NACs have been silenced. Point Disabled Yellow Illuminates when at least one device has been disabled. It will flash until all disabled points have been acknowledged. CPU Failure Yellow Illuminates if there is an abnormal hardware or software condition. Contact technical support. The panel is out of service when this LED is illuminated or flashing. Table 1.2 LED Indicators NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 13 Message Formats General Information 1.6.1 System Normal Screen The System Normal message appears at the top of the display when no off-normal events exist. It consists of two lines, each 40 characters long. Line one is a custom network message. Line 2 is a standard message giving the System Normal message, the time, day of the week, and date. The Main Menu is selectable using the lower right soft key. Line 5 indicates the current time and date. Figure 1.2 System Normal Screen A custom graphic may be displayed below the system normal message: the graphic must be entered using VeriFire® Tools.The text “Main Menu” will overlay the graphic, if it extends into the last line of the display.VeriFire® Tools 1.6.2 Event Reporting Format The message formats used for event reporting appear at the top of the display, replacing the System Normal message. There are two basic types of message formats: point event formats, which are generated from changes in the state of SLC and panel devices, and system event formats, which are generated from system errors and troubles. Point Events Format When a change of state occurs to an SLC or panel point device, a message is generated to the panel that displays on the top of the LCD screen, and soft keys display available functions that may be used to handle the event. The top four lines contain the event and point information. Event counts display in the next three lines, the current time and soft key information appears after the event counts. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 MAIN MENU 14 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 General Information Message Formats The format of the first line will vary slightly as follows, depending on the type of event.: The second, third and fourth lines always contain the same device information, as follows: The point event example screen below shows a trouble condition that has been generated by the detector on loop 3, address 2. Figure 1.3 Point Event Display Example The event counts display shows the counts for outstanding events. The date in line eight gives the current time. The soft keys may be used to deal with the event; their functions are described in the Operation section of this manual. FIRE ALARM ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z239 SMOKE(PHOTO) 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L03D002 Line 1 Displays the type of event, and whether it has been acknowledged or cleared. TROUBLE DETECTOR FAILED TEST ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z239 SMOKE(PHOTO) 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L03D002 Line 1 Displays TROUBLE, the type of trouble, and whether it has been acknowledged or cleared. Event Format (not trouble or pre- alarm) Event Format (trouble) Line 1 Displays PREALARM, the sensitivity reading and whether it has been acknowledged or cleared. PREALARM 120% OF FIRE SENSITIVITY LEVEL5 ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z239 SMOKE(PHOTO) 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L03D002 Event Format (pre-alarm) FIRE ALARM ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z239 SMOKE(PHOTO) 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L03D002 Line 2 - Displays the custom label and the extended label Line 3 - Displays the primary zone label, the primary zone number, and the software Type ID. Line 4 - Displays event time, event date and device address.Loop number Detector Device address TROUBLE DETECTOR FAILED TEST ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z239 SMOKE(PHOTO) 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L03D002 EVENT COUNTS FIRE ALARMS:000 PREALARM:000 TROUBLE:001 SUPERVISORY:000 SECURITY:000 OTHER: 000 11:58:46A TUE JAN 15, 2008 ACKNOWLEDGE SIGNAL SILENCE MORE INFORMATION SYSTEM RESET PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS BACK NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 15 Navigating Menu and Programming Screens General Information System Events Format When a system trouble occurs, a message is generated to the panel that displays on the top of the LCD screen, and soft keys display available functions that may be used to handle the event. The top four lines contain event information, and are formatted as follows: The system trouble event example screen below shows an annunciator trouble condition. Figure 1.4 System Event Display Example The event counts display shows the counts for outstanding events. The date in line eight gives the current time. The soft keys may be used to deal with the event; their functions are described in the Operation section of this manual. 1.7 Navigating Menu and Programming Screens The Main Menu (refer to Figure 1.5) leads to screens with various menu options. Choices may be made from the menu screens by pressing the soft key closest to the menu option. Field information may be added/modified using the keypad and special function keys. Arrow keys on the keypad can be used to navigate between fields on a screen if there are no soft keys to select the fields. Pressing a BACK soft key on a screen returns the programmer to the previous screen without saving the information entered. TROUBLE ANNUN 1 TROUBLE LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 Line 1 - Displays TROUBLE and whether it has been acknowledged or cleared Line 2 - Displays trouble type Line 3 - Displays custom message. Line 4 - Displays event time and date and node address. TROUBLE ANNUN 1 TROUBLE LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL 11:58:45A WED TUE JAN 15, 2008 EVENT COUNTS FIRE ALARMS:000 PREALARM:000 TROUBLE:001 SUPERVISORY:000 SECURITY:000 OTHER: 000 11:58:46A TUE JAN 15, 2008 ACKNOWLEDGE SIGNAL SILENCE MORE INFORMATION SYSTEM RESET PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS BACK 16 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 General Information The Main Menu Pressing an ACCEPT soft key will save information entered on the screen. It may also return to the previous screen and/or perform other functions as described in the soft key section for each screen. When the panel can not read a specified point (that is, if the point entered on the screen for processing does not exist in the panel’s programming) it will display an error screen for several seconds, then return to the screen where the address was entered. The user must check his input and investigate the state of the point. 1.8 The Main Menu The Main Menu screen is the means by which the programmer can access displays, history information, printing and programming menus. This screen is accessible from the System Normal Screen (Refer to Figure 1.2), and from most other screens by pressing the BACK soft key until it displays. Figure 1.5 Main Menu Screen Soft Keys Pressing the soft keys brings the user to the screens described below. 1.8.1 Event Counts Display Pressing the soft key to the left of the Event Counts Display message on the Main Menu brings up the Event Counts screen. This screen will automatically display if an off-normal event requiring acknowledgement occurs, unless the panel is in programming mode. Fire alarm events will display even in programming mode. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 EVENT COUNTS DISPLAY READ STATUS PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS MULTIPLE EVENT LIST PRINTER FUNCTIONS HISTORY DISPLAY BACK NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 17 The Main Menu General Information Lines six and seven display current counts of off-normal events in six categories. The counts include both acknowledged and unacknowledged events. Figure 1.6 Events Count Display Screen Soft Keys ACKNOWLEDGE FIRE ALARM - Press this key to acknowledge an event. The command will read ACKNOWLEDGE FIRE ALARM if the event is a fire alarm. It will read ACKNOWLEDGE if the event is any other type. The command will not display if there are no events to acknowledge. MORE INFORMATION - Press this key to go to the MORE INFORMATION screen, described in Section 1.8.2 below. This button will not display if no off-normal events exist. PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS - Press this key to go to the PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS screen, which also can be reached from the main menu. This screen will require a password. For programming instructions, refer to the NFS2-3030 Programming Manual. SIGNAL SILENCE - Press this key to silence all NFS2-3030 outputs programmed as silenceable. SYSTEM RESET - Press this key to reset the system. 1.8.2 More Information Pressing the More Information soft key displays a screen that contains additional information about the event shown in the top four lines. Figure 1.7 More Information Screen FIRE ALARM ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z005 SMOKE(PHOTO) 11:57:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L03D052 EVENT COUNTS FIRE ALARMS:001 PREALARM:000 TROUBLE:000 SUPERVISORY:000 SECURITY:000 DISABLE:000 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 ACKNOWLEDGE FIRE ALARM SIGNAL SILENCE MORE INFORMATION SYSTEM RESET PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS BACK ACKNOWLEDGED FIRE ALARM ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z005 SMOKE(PHOTO) 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L03D052 INFORMATION/ACTION CALL 203-555-1212 GO TO ALARM SITE AND INVESTIGATE APPROACH THE ALARM LOCATION WITH CAUTION BRING CELL PHONE AND REPORT WHEN ON SITE VALUES: 121% OF ALARM, 145% OF PREALARM ALARM: 6= 1.66%, PREALARM; 3= 0.47% ACTION/STATUS: NONE/VERY CLEAN PEAKS:56% VERIFY COUNT:02 CO-OP:D100,158 12:22:34P TUE JAN 15, 2008 BACK 18 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 General Information The Main Menu Display Lines 1 through 4 - Event information Line 5 - Screen title Lines 6 through 9 - The Custom Action Message programmed for the point in alarm Line 10 - blank Line 11 and 14 - These lines exist only for smoke/heat detectors. They do not display for wireless smoke detectors. Line 11 VALUES: The screen displays the Alarm and Prealarm values that are in effect when more information is requested. For example, if occupied settings are in effect, occupied values will display. 121% OF ALARM - This field gives the detector reading as it relates to its preprogrammed alarm level value (indicated in the next line on the screen). The example above shows the detector exceeding the alarm level by 21%. Note: For Beam detectors in CLIP mode, the alarm value will always equal zero (0)% when it is not in alarm or 100% when it is in alarm. 145% OF PREALARM - This field gives the detector reading as it relates to its preprogrammed prealarm level value (indicated in the next line on the screen). The example above shows the detector exceeding the prealarm level by 45%. Line 12 The screen displays the Alarm and Prealarm levels that are in effect when more information is requested. For example, if unoccupied settings are in effect, they will display. ALARM: 6=1.66% - Six is the preprogrammed alarm level value for this detector: its value is 1.66%, indicating the percent per foot obscuration value assigned to level 6. PREALARM: 3=0.47% - Three is the preprogrammed alarm level value for this detector: its value is 0.47%, indicating the percent per foot obscuration value assigned to level 3. Line 13 ACTION/STATUS: NONE/VERY CLEAN - This displays the maintenance status of the device. The message that appears in this field depends on the drift compensation value. A detector will automatically compensate for environmental contaminants and other factors over time, until the tolerance value has been exceeded. The FACP will signal a trouble condition when this level has been reached. Refer to the following table for messages and required action. For FSC-851 Intelliquad detectors in CLIP mode, the status will display as None/Very Clean until it displays Needs Immediate Cleaning. No intermediate levels are displayed. Message Drift Compensation % Description None/Very Clean Less than 50 No action necessary. The detector readings are near ideal. None/Fairly Clean 50 - 69 No action necessary. The detector will activate at the selected sensitivity level. Needs Cleaning 70 - 79 Clean the detector soon. The detector may cause a false alarm because it has reached the drift compensation tolerance value. Needs Immediate Cleaning 80 - 100 Clean immediately! The detector is a false alarm risk. The drift compensation tolerance value has been exceeded. NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 19 The Main Menu General Information Line 14 PEAKS: 56% - This value represents the highest percent per foot obscuration reading taken by this detector. It can be a historical figure, and does not necessarily represent the highest reading for this particular alarm. Re-initializing the detector would reset this value to zero. VERIFY COUNT: 02 - This displays the number of times the detector has gone into alarm. This count aids in differentiating false alarms from actual alarms by showing repeated alarm events that have come into the device. In this example, the detector has gone into alarm two times since the verification count was begun. The FACP will signal a trouble condition when the verify count is exceeded. Displays as COUNT for FSC-851 Intelliquad detectors. CO-OP: D100,158 - Indicates the address(es) of any detector(s) linked with the detector that’s in alarm for Co-operative Multi-alarm Sensing. This field does not display for Acclimate detectors, FSC-851 Intelliquad detectors, Beam detectors or Heat detectors. CO: - FSC-851 Intelliquad detector only, FlashScan only - Carbon Monoxide reading in parts per million. TEMP: -Displays degrees Centigrade for Acclimate, FSC-851, and heat detectors Line 15 - The current time and date are displayed in this line. Line 16 BACK - Press to return to the previous screen. 1.8.3 Multiple Event List Pressing the Multiple Event List soft key shows off-normal events simultaneously in groups of eight. One event is shown at the top, and seven are shown in the list below it. The list will consist of the events immediately following the event at the top, with the priority of event types determined by the programmed Event Ordering setting (USA or Canada). • Using the Next Selection/Previous Selection special function keys to scroll through the list will replace the event at the top of the screen with the first event in the series displayed below it. • Using the Up/Down arrow keys to scroll through the list will not replace the event at the top of the screen: pressing the arrow keys will scroll a cursor through the seven events below without changing what is displayed at the top. The arrows will scroll through the list of events sequentially, but will skip the event at the top. • Pressing Enter while the cursor is present will cause the event selected by the cursor to move to the top of the screen, and the list will reflect the events immediately following it. • Pressing one of the Scroll Display fixed function keys will cause the first event of that type (e.g., alarm, trouble, etc.) to display at the top, and subsequent events of that type to display in USA Event Order Canada Event Order Fire Fire Security Supervisory Supervisory Trouble Trouble Prealarm Prealarm Disabled Disabled 20 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 General Information The Main Menu sequence below it. Press the key again to begin scrolling. If there are no events of the type denoted by the Scroll Display key, pressing the key will have no effect. Figure 1.8 Multiple Event List Screen Soft Keys First Event - Press this soft key to return the first event in the event ordering sequence to the top of the screen if scrolling has placed it elsewhere. NOTE:If an unacknowledged event occurs while the Multiple Event list is displayed: For USA event ordering - the Event Count Screen will appear with the Acknowledge button only. Acknowledging the event(s) will bring the Multiple Event list back up. For Canadian event ordering - the Multiple Event list screen will display the unacknowledged event at the top. ACKNOWLEDGED FIRE ALARM ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z005 SMOKE(PHOTO) 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L03D052 FIRE ALARM:001 OF 003 2 ALM MAIN ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING 3 ALM 20-CHARACTER_LABEL 12-CHAR_EXT_ 1 SUP 20-CHARACTER_LABEL 12-CHAR_EXT_ 2 SUP 20-CHARACTER_LABEL 12-CHAR_EXT_ 1 TBL 20-CHARACTER_LABEL 12-CHAR_EXT_ 2 TBL 20-CHARACTER_LABEL 12-CHAR_EXT_ 1 MON 20-CHARACTER_LABEL 12-CHAR_EXT_ ALARM:003 SUPERVISORY:002 TROUBLE:002 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 FIRST EVENT MAIN MENU NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 21 The Main Menu General Information 1.8.4 History Display (History Select Screen) The History Select screen allows the user to select a type of history file to view, and to set time/date or point range viewing parameters. The particular menu items will not appear on the History Display screen if no associated events are in the queue. Figure 1.9 History Display Select Screen Soft Keys ALL EVENTS, ALARMS ONLY, TROUBLES ONLY, SUPERVISORY ONLY, AND SECURITY/OTHERS - Pushing the associated soft key selects the type of history to be viewed. TIME/DATE INTERVAL - Sets a time/date interval of events to be displayed. POINT RANGE - Sets a range of points for which events will be displayed. Refer to the section Section 4, “Viewing and Printing History Information”, on page 53 for a full description of History Select. 1.8.5 Read Status Pressing the Read Status soft key brings up screens to view the present status of points, zones, and other system information. Refer to the section Section 3, “Read Status”, on page 41 for a full description of Read Status. 1.8.6 Program/Alter Status Pressing the Program/Alter Status soft key brings up screens for panel programming, point programming, autoprogramming, clear programming, altering the status of points, walk test, and other information. A password is required. Refer to this panel’s programming manual for information on these functions. 1.8.7 Printer Functions Pressing the Printer Functions soft key brings up screens to print reports. Refer to Section 5, “Printing Reports”, on page 57 for descriptions and illustrations. This key will appear only if a printer has been selected through programming. Refer to this panel’s programming manual for information on printer selection. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 N124 HISTORY SELECT ALL EVENTS SECURITY/OTHERS ALARMS ONLY TIME/DATE INTERVAL TROUBLES ONLY POINT RANGE SUPERVISORY ONLY BACK 22 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 General Information The Main Menu NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 23 Section 2: Operation of the Control Panel 2.1 Overview The control panel periodically checks for events. An event can be any change in the status of a device, a transfer of information between a device and the FACP, or a transfer of information between two devices. Some events are considered background events and are not seen by the user. The events that are of primary concern to the operator are those identified as off-normal events. An off-normal event is an event which indicates activity or change in condition that requires the attention and/or response of an operator. Examples of possible off-normal events are: • Activation or change in condition of a monitoring device such as a detector or module • System troubles, such as battery problems, device supervision problems, etc. When there are no off-normal events, the panel displays the System Normal screen (refer to Figure 2.1). When there is an off-normal event, the panel will display it (for event formats, refer to Section 1.6.2, “Event Reporting Format”, on page 13). The action required will vary according to the type of event. 2.1.1 System Normal The system operates in System Normal mode when no alarms or troubles exist. In this mode, the control panel displays a System Normal message as follows Figure 2.1 System Normal Screen The control panel performs the following functions at regular intervals: • Polls all SLC devices to check for valid replies, alarms, troubles, circuit integrity, and supervisory signals, etc. • Checks power supply troubles and batteries • Refreshes the panel display and updates time • Scans for any panel screen, keypad, and Control Key entries • Performs a detector automatic test operation • Tests system memory • Monitors for microcontroller failure No action is required of the operator when the panel is operating in Normal mode. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 MAIN MENU 24 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Operation of the Control Panel Fire Alarm Event 2.1.2 Acknowledging an Event When the panel detects an off-normal event and the information is displayed on-screen, one of the soft keys displayed on the screen is ACKNOWLEDGE. Use this key to respond to new alarm or trouble signals. When this key is pressed, the control panel does the following: • It silences the piezo sounder on the panel if it is enabled • It transfers the event to the history buffer • If the panel is networked, it will send a network message. There are two types of acknowledge; point and block. Point acknowledge is for fire alarms: fire alarms are acknowledged one at a time when the Acknowledge soft key is pressed. Block acknowledge is for all other types of off-normal events: these events are acknowledged all at the same time, with a single stroke to the Acknowledge soft key. 2.2 Fire Alarm Event 2.2.1 How the Control Panel Indicates a Fire Alarm When an initiating device (detector or monitor module) activates, the control panel does the following: • Produces a steady audible tone (if the piezo is enabled) • Activates the System Alarm relay (TB4). It will also activate the Security (TB1) and Supervisory (TB2) relays if their switches have been configured for alarm • Flashes the FIRE ALARM LED •Displays FIRE ALARM in the upper left corner of the display, a Type Code that indicates the type of device that activated the fire alarm, and other information specific to the device. The message occupies the top four lines of the screen, replacing the System Normal message as shown in Figure 2.2 below. Refer to “Point Events Format” on page 13 for a full description of each message field • Sends an Alarm message to the History buffer and installed printer and annunciators • Latches the control panel in alarm. (You cannot return the control panel to normal operation until you correct the alarm condition and reset the control panel) • Initiates any Control-By-Event actions • Starts timers (such as Silence Inhibit, Auto Silence) • Activates the general alarm zone (Z000) NOTE:If Local Control is disabled, acknowledgements can not be made by pressing the ACKNOWLEDGE soft key on the panel display. Events must be acknowledged from a preprogrammed remote location. When DCC (Display and Control Center) participation is enabled, panel acknowledgement can be performed when it is the DCC. When it is not, permission must be granted from the DCC before the panel can make an acknowledgement. Pressing the ACKNOWLEDGE soft key will automatically request permission from the DCC. NOTE:If the panel is programmed for Receive Mode, events and the clearing of events must be handled one at a time: each event must be acknowledged, and each clear (whether the clear occurs automatically or as the result of a panel reset) must be acknowledged. NOTE:If a monitor module programmed with a WATERFLOW Type Code initiates a fire alarm, the control panel disables the SIGNAL SILENCE key and the Auto Silence Timer. NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 25 Fire Alarm Event Operation of the Control Panel Figure 2.2 Fire Alarm Message Display Example 2.2.2 How to Respond to a Fire Alarm If the control panel indicates a fire alarm, the operator can do the following: • To silence the panel sounder: Press the ACKNOWLEDGE soft key. The local sounder will silence and the FIRE ALARM LED will change from flashing to steady. The control panel will send an acknowledge message to the panel display, history buffer, installed printers and annunciators. • To silence any activated outputs that are programmed as silenceable: Press the SIGNAL SILENCE soft key. SIGNALS SILENCED LED light steady. The control panel sends a Signal Silenced message to the History buffer, installed printers and annunciators. 1. Check the Alarm message for its location and type. Press the MORE INFORMATION soft key to display the MORE INFORMATION screen and view additional information on the device and possibly preprogrammed text for recommended action. (Refer to Figure 1.7 on page 17 for an example of the this screen and an explanation of its fields.) 2. Correct the condition causing the alarm. 3. When the alarm condition is corrected, press the SYSTEM RESET soft key to return the control panel to normal operation (indicated by the “System Normal” message). The control panel sends a “System Normal” message to the panel display, History buffer and installed printer. The soft key PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS is also displayed on this screen. A password is required to enter these menus, which are described in the NFS2-3030 Programming Manual. 2.2.3 Interpreting Type ID Codes The Type ID code that displays in the fire alarm message is related to the type and function of the point that initiates the fire alarm. For example, a monitor module with a PULL STATION Type ID code means that the monitor module connects to a manual pull station. If the Type ID code is unfamiliar, refer to Appendix A, “Software Type ID Codes”, on page 65. This appendix is an alphabetical list of Type ID codes with an explanation of each. FIRE ALARM ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z005 SMOKE(PHOTO) 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L03D052 EVENT COUNTS FIRE ALARMS:001 PREALARM:000 TROUBLE:000 SUPERVISORY:000 SECURITY:000 OTHER: 000 11:59:35A TUE JAN 15, 2008 ACKNOWLEDGE SIGNAL SILENCE MORE INFORMATION SYSTEM RESET PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS MAIN MENU 26 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Operation of the Control Panel System or Point Trouble Event 2.3 System or Point Trouble Event 2.3.1 How the Control Panel Indicates a System or Point Trouble A system or point trouble occurs when the control panel detects an electrical or mechanical fault. The panel will react differently depending on whether or not there are higher priority unacknowledged events. When no higher priority unacknowledged events are exist, the control panel: • Produces a pulsed audible tone (if the piezo is enabled) • Activates the Trouble relay (TB3) • Flashes the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED • Displays a Type Code that indicates the type of device with a trouble (if a point trouble) • Displays TROUBLE in the upper left corner of the panel display and, if a point trouble, the type of trouble and information specific to the device. (A system and a point trouble message are shown in the figures below) • Sends a Trouble message to the history buffer, installed printer and annunciators When an unacknowledged event with a higher priority exists, the control panel retains the indications of the higher priority event (the message, lit LED, audible tone, etc.) while activating the Trouble relay, flashing the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED, and sending a Trouble message to the history buffer, installed printer and annunciators. A system trouble message is shown in Figure 2.3, and a point trouble is shown in Figure 2.4. Refer to Section 1.6.2, “Event Reporting Format”, on page 13 for identification of each message field. Figure 2.3 Sample Message for System Trouble TROUBLE ANNUN 1 TROUBLE 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 EVENT COUNTS FIRE ALARMS:000 PREALARM:000 TROUBLE:001 SUPERVISORY:000 SECURITY:000 DISABLE:000 11:59:35A TUE JAN 15, 2008 ACKNOWLEDGE SIGNAL SILENCE SYSTEM RESET PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS MAIN MENU NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 27 System or Point Trouble Event Operation of the Control Panel Figure 2.4 Sample Message for Point Trouble 2.3.2 How to Respond to a System or Point Trouble If the control panel indicates a trouble, the operator can do the following: 1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE soft key to silence the panel sounder and switch the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED from flashing to steady—regardless of the number of troubles, alarms, security and supervisory signals. The control panel sends an acknowledge message to the History buffer, installed printers and annunciators. 2. Check the trouble message for an indication of the trouble. • Refer to Table 2.1 or Table 2.2 below for point and system trouble explanations, if necessary. • Press the MORE INFORMATION soft key to display the MORE INFORMATION screen and view additional information on the device and possibly preprogrammed text for recommended action. (Refer to Figure 1.7 on page 17 for an example of the this screen and an explanation of its fields.) 3. Correct the condition causing the trouble. If the trouble clears, the control panel sends a Clear Trouble message to the History buffer, installed printers and annunciators. If all troubles clear and no supervisory signals or fire alarms exist, the control panel does the following: • Returns to Normal operation (indicated by the “System Normal” message) • Sends a “System Normal” message to the panel display, History buffer, installed printers and annunciators • Restores troubles automatically - even if troubles are not acknowledged The soft key PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS is also displayed on this screen. A password is required to enter these menus, which are described in this panel’s programming manual. 2.3.3 Trouble Types There are a variety of point or system trouble types that may appear in the trouble message. The tables below give lists of the troubles and indications of their cause. Point (Device) Troubles A message from the “Trouble Type” column in Table 2.1, “Point (Device) Troubles,” on page 28 will appear in the upper right corner of the panel display when a point (device) trouble occurs. Use this table to help determine what the trouble is. TROUBLE DETECTOR FAILED TEST ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR SMOKE(PHOTO) 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L01D136 EVENT COUNTS FIRE ALARMS:000 PREALARM:000 TROUBLE:001 SUPERVISORY:000 SECURITY:000 DISABLE:000 11:59:35A TUE JAN 15, 2008 ACKNOWLEDGE SIGNAL SILENCE MORE INFORMATION SYSTEM RESET PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS MAIN MENU 28 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Operation of the Control Panel System or Point Trouble Event POINT TROUBLES TROUBLE TYPE TROUBLE DESCRIPTION ACTION AC FAILURE The main or auxiliary power supply has lost AC power. Determine whether there is an AC power loss or whether the power supply and wiring is correct. ALIGNMENT MODE A beam detector is in configuration mode. No action is necessary, as the trouble will clear when the configuration is complete. However, the detector will not detect a fire while this trouble exists. BATTERY HIGH The power supply’s battery charge is too high. Check the batteries for problems. Replace batteries if necessary. BATTERY LOW The power supply’s battery charge is low, or the RFX device’s battery charge is low. Check the batteries for problems. Replace batteries if necessary. BEAM BLOCKED Something has come between the detector’s beam and its reflector. Investigate and clear the blockage. BRAND MISMATCH The brand of this SLC device is incompatible with this FACP system. Replace with compatible device. CHARGER FAULT The power supply’s battery charger is not working properly. Correct the fault. CO 6 MONTHS The CO (carbon monoxide) detection element on a FSC-851 detector has six months left to expiration. Replace the detector. CO EXPIRED The CO (carbon monoxide) detection element on a FSC-851 detector has expired. Replace the detector. CO TROUBLE The CO element on a FSC-851 detector is not working properly. This trouble is generated for FlashScan mode only. Replace the detector. COMM LOSS Communication has been lost between the FMM-4-20 module and its 4-20 mA sensor. Check connections between the FMM-4-20 module and the 4-20 mA sensor. DET FAILED TEST This detector has failed the FACP’s periodic detector test for alarm capabilities. The detector should be removed and replaced by an authorized service representative. DEVICE INHIBIT The FMM-4-20 module is in a self-calibration state. No action is required. DUAL ADDRESS There is more than one device of a single type (detector or module) with the same SLC address. A detector and a module can share the same address on an SLC, but two detectors, or two modules, can not. Note that some addressable devices (e.g. certain power supplies, XPIQs and RFXs) may not appear to be detectors or modules, but are addressed on the SLC as such. Readdress the incorrect device. GENERAL TROUBLE The power supply is not working properly. Check the battery for problems. Replace battery if necessary. GROUND FAULT There is a ground fault on the main or auxiliary power supply. Correct the fault. HARDWARE MISMATCH The device installed in the Intelligent Detector Base does not match the device originally installed. Install the correct device in the Intelligent Detector Base. INITIALIZATION MODE A beam detector is running through its initialization sequence. The detector will not detect a fire until the initialization process is complete and this trouble has cleared. INVALID RESPONSE The device has returned a response to the panel that the panel did not expect. Check the device for functionality, addressing and wiring. IR TROUBLE The infrared element is not working properly on a FSC- 851 detector. This trouble is generated for FlashScan mode only. Replace the detector. LOW TEMPERATURE The temperature read by a Heat+ or Acclimate™+ detector is too low. Raise the heat in the area of the detector. LOW THRESHOLD The detector chamber reading is too low; the detector is not operating properly. The detector must be removed and replaced by an authorized service representative. MAINTENANCE REQ The detector is dirty and needs cleaning Clean the detector. MAINT URGENT The detector requires cleaning immediately. It is a false alarm risk. Clean the detector immediately. MISMAT HDWE TYPE The programming information in the panel’s database for this device does not match the type of device at the address specified. Correct programming. MOD EXT PWR LOSS The control module point has lost external power. Determine whether there is a DC power loss. NO ANSWER The device (module or detector) is not responding to the poll. Either the device is not working or it is not connected properly. Determine whether the device is functional, and connected and addressed properly on the SLC. NO THRESHOLDS PROGRAMMED No threshold parameters have been programmed for the FMM-4-20 module. Refer to the NFS2-3030 programming manual. NORMAL Indicates activated monitor module set to monitor trouble condition. Correct trouble condition. Table 2.1 Point (Device) Troubles (1 of 2) NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 29 System or Point Trouble Event Operation of the Control Panel System Troubles A message from the “Trouble Type” column in Table 2.2 will appear in the second line on the left of the panel display when a device trouble occurs. Use this table to help determine the cause of the trouble. OPEN CIRCUIT The module device has an open circuit on its supervised wiring. Check the connections from the module to the input or output device to which it is wired. OPEN ON x There is an open on speaker circuit x Locate and fix the open. OVER RANGE The FMM-4-20’s 4-20 mA sensor has exceeded 20 mA. Determine if the sensor is functional and correctly installed. RFX COMM LOSS Communication has been lost with an RFX device Check the RFX to determine the problem. SECURITY TAMPER An RFX device has been removed from its base. Check the RFX device for tampering. SHORT CIRCUIT The module device has a short circuit on its supervised wiring. Check the connections from the module to the input or output device to which it is wired. SHORT ON x There is a short on DAA speaker circuit x. Locate and fix the short. THERM. TROUBLE The thermistors are not functioning properly on a FSC- 851 detector. This trouble is generated for FlashScan mode only. Replace the detector. TROUBLE1 An FMM-4-20 module threshold trouble as determined in point programming. Refer to the NFS2-3030 programming manual. TROUBLE2 An FMM-4-20module threshold trouble as determined in point programming. Refer to the NFS2-3030 programming manual. UNDER RANGE The FMM-4-20’s 4-20 mA sensor has dropped below 4mA. Determine if the sensor is functional and correctly installed. VERIFY OVER MAX This detector or FZM-1 monitor module, which has been programmed to participate in alarm verification, has gone into and come out of its programmed verification limit without going into alarm. Either something is wrong with the detector or there is a condition nearby (such as someone smoking) that causes it to go into verification frequently. Check the detector and the conditions nearby to determine the problem. POINT TROUBLES TROUBLE TYPE TROUBLE DESCRIPTION ACTION Table 2.1 Point (Device) Troubles (2 of 2) SYSTEM TROUBLES TROUBLE MESSAGE TYPE TROUBLE DESCRIPTION AA TROUBLE BUS FAIL The AA Trouble Bus has failed. Investigate and fix. AC FAIL Loss of AC power. Investigate whether there is an AC power loss, or whether the power supply is correctly installed and wired. ADV WALK TEST There is an Advanced Walk Test in progress. AMPLIFIER LIMIT The DAA is overloaded. Remove outputs to lower the load on the speaker circuits. Press reset when done. AMPLIFIER SUPERVISION The amplifier’s internal supervision is not working. Call Technical Services. AMPLIFIER TROUBLE The DAA is in trouble. The output is overloaded or the amplifier is damaged. Remove outputs to determine if the DAA was overloaded. If it still does not work, call Technical Services. ANALOG OUTPUT x TROUBLE A trouble has occurred on DVC-AO analog output x (1 - 4). The analog output is configured for Style 7, but no audio signal is returned. Investigate and fix. ANNUN x NO ANSWER The annunciator at address x is not responding. ANNUN x TROUBLE The annunciator at address x is in trouble. AUDIO LIBRARY CORRUPTED The DVC’s audio library is corrupted. Re-create and/or re-download an intact database. AUDIO LIBRARY INCOMPATIBLE The audio library version is incompatible with the database and/or the application version. AUXILIARY TROUBLE Auxiliary device connected to the NFS2-3030 CPU at J5 is in trouble or cable is missing. AUXIN TROUBLE Generated when the auxiliary input is supervised (as determined in VeriFire® Tools programming) and no signal is coming from the input. Check wiring and source. BACKUP AMP x TROUBLE The Backup Amp at address x is in trouble. Check wiring and source. BASIC WALK TEST A Basic Walk Test is in progress. BATTERY The power supply’s battery voltage is too high or too low. Check the batteries for problems. Replace batteries if necessary. BUZZER OFF-LINE The piezo is disabled. CHARGER FAIL The power supply’s battery charger is not functioning. Investigate and correct. CORRUPT LOGIC EQUAT The database that houses the panel’s logic equations is corrupt. It must be re-downloaded, or all programming must be cleared and re-entered. Table 2.2 System Troubles (1 of 3) 30 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Operation of the Control Panel System or Point Trouble Event DAA ADDRESS CONFLICT More than one DAA has the same address. Readdress DAA(s). DAA DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS A DAA download is in progress. DAA NO ANSWER A DAA is not responding. Investigate and fix. DAL DEVICE NO ANSWER The DAL device is not communicating with the fire panel. Check wiring and source. DAP PORT x FAILURE Digital Audio Port x (A or B) is not communicating due to a break in the connection, a short, or faulty hardware. Locate and fix the break or short. If the problem is not a short or break, call Technical Services. DATABASE CORRUPTED The DVC database programming file is corrupted. Re-download or re-recreate & download an intact database. DATABASE INCOMPATIBLE The DVC database programming file is incompatible with the application version. DIGIN TROUBLE The DAA has determined that its DVC has stopped transmitting audio data to the Digital Audio Loop (DAL), even though the loop is still functional. Update code, ensure all code on the DAL is compatible. If the DVC still does not transmit digital audio data, call Technical Services. DISPLAY NODE LIMIT EXCEEDED The number of display nodes on the network has been exceeded. This trouble will only be displayed if at least one of the NFS2-3030s on the network are in Network Display Mode and the total number of display nodes has exceeded 25. Remove one or more display nodes to correct this trouble. (Display nodes include NCA, NCA-2, a Gateway node, or an NFS2-3030 in Network Display Mode.) DRILL INITIATED Drill has been initiated locally. DRILL RECEIVED Drill has been initiated remotely. DSBUS x COMMFAIL The DSBUS at address x is not communicating with the fire panel. Check wiring and source. EPROM ERROR The application and/or boot code is corrupt. Service required. EXTERNAL RAM ERROR The external RAM test failed. Service required. FLASH IMAGE ERROR The software is corrupt. Re-download the panel code software from VeriFire® Tools. If the trouble does not clear, call Technical Services. FFT TROUBLE There is a short or open on an FFT riser on a Digital Audio Loop. Check that the DVC’s 4-wire switch is set properly and that there is an end-of-line resistor in place for 2-wire operation. GROUND FAULT A ground fault has occurred within the panel. GROUND FAULT PORT x A ground fault has occurred on DAP x (A or B). GROUND FAULT LOOP x There is a ground fault on loop x. INTERNAL RAM ERROR The internal RAM test failed. Service required. INVALID NODE TYPE MAPPED An invalid node type has been mapped to the NFS2-3030 for Network Display Mode. Check network mapping and correct. Refer to the NFS2-3030 Programming Manual for valid node types. LOADING.NO SERVICE A program or database download is in progress. The panel is NOT providing fire protection during the download. Proper authorities should be notified while a download is in progress so that other means of fire protection can be supplied. LOCAL MIC TROUBLE The DVCs local microphone is in trouble. There is no communication, or paging has been enabled for over 28 seconds and no signal has been received. Investigate whether the mic is plugged into the DVC, or whether there is a problem with the local mic. LOCAL PHONE TROUBLE The DVC’s local FFT handset is in trouble. There is no communication, or paging has been enabled for over 28 seconds and no signal has been received. Investigate whether the handset is plugged into the DVC, or whether there is a problem with the handset. LOOP x- x COMM FAILURE Loops x and x are not responding. The LCM and LEM for those loops must be serviced. MAN EVAC INITIATED Local initiation of DRILL. MAN EVAC RECEIVED Network initiation of DRILL. MANUAL MODE ENTERED An annunciator has been placed in manual mode. NCM COMM LOSS Communication is lost between the CPU2-3030 or DVC and the network communications module. NCM CONNECTION LIMIT EXCEEDED More than two panels have been connected to a high-speed network communications module. NCM SNIFFER MODE ACTIVE The network is in diagnostic mode. NETWORK FAIL PORT x Communication lost between NCM Port x and corresponding node. NETWORK INCOMPATIBILITY An incompatible product exists on this network. NETWORK MAPPING LIMIT EXCEEDED More than 1 fire panel or more than 4 DVCs has been mapped to the NFS2-3030 for Network Display Mode. Check network mapping and correct. NFPA 24HR REMINDER This message occurs every day at 11 am if any troubles exist. NVRAM BATT TROUBLE Battery backup and/or clock backup is low. Replace battery. NO DEV. INST ON L1 No devices are installed on the system. NO POWER SUPPLY INST The AMPS-24 (main power supply) AC fail address (base plus one) has not been correctly entered or the loop is not installed. The AMPS-24 is not configured for “Trouble Reporting”. All four of the main power supply addresses are not programmed for MOD TYPE=Monitor and/or TYPE CODE LABEL=Power Monitor and/or FLASHSCAN=PS Mon. PANEL DOOR OPEN The panel door is open. SYSTEM TROUBLES TROUBLE MESSAGE TYPE TROUBLE DESCRIPTION Table 2.2 System Troubles (2 of 3) NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 31 Pre-alarm Event Operation of the Control Panel 2.3.4 Interpreting Type ID Codes The Type ID code that displays in a point trouble message is related to the type and function of the point that initiates the trouble. For example, a monitor module with a PULL STATION Type ID code means that the monitor module connects to a manual pull station. If the Type ID code is unfamiliar, refer to Appendix A, “Software Type ID Codes”, on page 65. This appendix is an alphabetical list of Type ID codes and an explanation of each. 2.4 Pre-alarm Event The Pre-alarm function is used to receive an early warning of potential or incipient fire conditions. The Pre-alarm function provides one of two settings as follows: • Alert – a non-latching setting that causes a Pre-alarm when a detector reaches its programmed Pre-alarm sensitivity threshold. Non-latching means the condition will automatically restore to normal once the detector’s obscuration readings drop below its Pre-alarm threshold. • Action – a latching setting that causes a Pre-alarm when a detector reaches its programmed Pre-alarm level. Latching means the condition will not restore itself to normal once the detector’s obscuration readings drop below its Pre-alarm threshold. The panel must be reset. PHONE CHANNEL LIMIT EXCEEDED The DVC has allocated all it’s phone channels to DAAs but there are still phones ringing in requesting more channels POWER SUPPLY TROUBLE There is a communication failure with the DAA onboard power supply. Call Technical Services. PRIMARY AMP x TROUBLE The Primary Amp at address x is in trouble. Check wiring and source. PRINTER OFF LINE Communication loss with printer. Restore power and/or printer’s online status. PRINTER PAPER OUT Add paper. PROGRAM CORRUPTED The database that houses the panel’s programming is corrupt. It must be re-downloaded, or all programming must be cleared and re-entered. Service required. PROG MODE ACTIVATED A user is currently using the panel’s programming menus. REMOTE DISPLAY x NO ANSWER The remote display at address x is not responding. REMOTE DISPLAY x TROUBLE The remote display at address x is in trouble. REMOTE MIC TROUBLE The DVC’s remote microphone is in trouble. It is installed and supervised, but no signal is coming from it. Investigate and fix. SELF TEST FAILED Diagnostic test failed. Call Technical Services. SOFTWARE MISMATCH LCM and/or LCD-160 software does not match the version number expected by the panel; and/or the NCM is not network version 5.0; and/or one or more DAAs has a software revision that does not match other DAA software revisions. Update software as necessary. STYLE 4 SHORT x LOOP x Service required. Call Technical Services. STYLE 6 POS. LOOP x There is an open circuit on the positive side of loop x. Style 6 and Style 7 are supervised methods of communicating with addressable devices. If the control panel detects a trouble (open), it will drive both ends of the loop, maintaining communication in an unsupervised method. The latching trouble will display on the panel as a Style 6 trouble until you correct the condition and press reset. Style 7 configuration of the SLC requires the use of isolator modules & bases. STYLE 6 NEG. LOOP x There is an open circuit on the negative side of loop x. Style 6 and Style 7 are supervised methods of communicating with addressable devices. If the control panel detects a trouble (open), it will drive both ends of the loop, maintaining communication in an unsupervised method. The latching trouble will display on the panel as a Style 6 trouble until you correct the condition and press reset. Style 7 configuration of the SLC requires the use of isolator modules & bases. STYLE 6 SHORT LOOP x Style 6 and Style 7 are supervised methods of communicating with addressable devices. If the control panel detects a trouble (short), it will drive both ends of the loop, maintaining communication in an unsupervised method. The latching trouble will display on the panel as a Style 6 trouble until you correct the condition and press reset. Style 7 configuration of the SLC requires the use of isolator modules & bases. SYSTEM INITIALIZATION One or more devices (detectors or modules) can not report activation. This can occur following system startup, when exiting Walk Test, following an autoprogram, or following a device trouble of No Response. Will clear when all un-initialized devices are initialized. SYSTEM TROUBLES TROUBLE MESSAGE TYPE TROUBLE DESCRIPTION Table 2.2 System Troubles (3 of 3) 32 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Operation of the Control Panel Pre-alarm Event Alert and Action settings are set individually with detector point programming. Individual detector sensitivity threshold settings can have a value of one through nine, and are set by the programmer. A sensitivity threshold setting of zero indicates the detector does not participate in prealarm. For more detailed information on Pre-alarm, refer to this panel’s programming manual. 2.4.1 How the Control Panel Indicates a Pre-alarm When a detector activates a Pre-alarm, the control panel does the following if there are no higher priority unacknowledged events: • Pulses the panel sounder (if the piezo is enabled) • Flashes the PRE-ALARM LED •Displays PREALARM in the upper left corner of the LCD, as well as the sensitivity reading, the type code and other information specific to the detector as shown in Figure 2.5. • Sends a Pre-alarm message to the History buffer, installed printer and annunciators. When an unacknowledged event with a higher priority exists, the control panel retains indications of the higher priority event (the message, lit LED, audible tone, etc.) while flashing the PRE-ALARM LED and sending a Pre-alarm message to the History buffer, installed printer and annunciators. The Pre-alarm screen display is the same for both alert and action conditions. Following is a sample screen for a Pre-alarm message. Figure 2.5 Sample Pre-alarm Message PREALARM 120% OF FIRE SENSITIVITY LEVEL4 ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIRST FLOOR DOOR SMOKE(PHOTO) 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L01D134 EVENT COUNTS FIRE ALARMS:000 PREALARM:001 TROUBLE:000 SUPERVISORY:000 SECURITY:000 DISABLE:000 11:59:35A TUE JAN 15, 2008 ACKNOWLEDGE SIGNAL SILENCE MORE INFORMATION SYSTEM RESET PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS MAIN MENU NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 33 Security Alarm Event Operation of the Control Panel 2.4.2 How to Respond to a Pre-Alarm Warning If the control panel indicates a Pre-alarm, the operator can do the following: 1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE soft key to acknowledge the Pre-alarm. 2. Press the MORE INFORMATION soft key to display the MORE INFORMATION screen and view additional information on the device and possibly preprogrammed text for recommended action. (Refer to Figure 1.7 on page 17 for an example of this screen and an explanation of its fields.) 3. Investigate and correct the condition causing the Pre-alarm. NOTE:An Alert Pre-alarm automatically restores to normal when the detector obscuration reading drops below the programmed Pre-Alarm level. 4. Press the SYSTEM RESET soft key if the Pre-alarm message does not clear when the condition causing it is cleared. A subsequent alarm condition for this detector clears the Action indication from the panel display. The soft key PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS is also displayed on this screen. A password is required to enter these menus, which are described in the NFS2-3030 Programming Manual. 2.4.3 Interpreting Type ID Codes The Type ID code that displays in a pre-alarm message is related to the type and function of the detector point that initiates the pre-alarm. For example, a detector with a SMOKE(PHOTO) Type ID code means that the detector is a photoelectric type detector. If the Type ID code is unfamiliar, refer to Appendix A, “Software Type ID Codes”, on page 65. This appendix is an alphabetical list of Type ID codes and an explanation of each. 2.5 Security Alarm Event (Not Suitable for Canadian Applications) 2.5.1 How the Control Panel Indicates a Security Alarm The system indicates a Security alarm when a monitor module point programmed with a security Type Code activates. The panel will react differently depending on whether or not there are higher priority unacknowledged events. When no higher priority unacknowledged events exist, the control panel: • Produces a warbling audible tone (if the piezo is enabled) • Activates the Security relay (TB1) if it has been selected for security • Flashes the SECURITY LED (blue) • Displays a Type Code that indicates the type of security alarm being generated •Displays SECURITY in the upper left corner of the panel display along with information specific to the device • Sends a Security message to the History buffer, installed printers and annunciators When an unacknowledged event with a higher priority exists, the control panel retains the indications of the higher priority event (the message, lit LED, audible tone, etc.) while activating the Security relay if it is selected for security, flashing the SECURITY LED, and sending a Security message to the history buffer, installed printer and annunciators. If there are silenced alarms (the SIGNALS SILENCED LED is lighted), a Security alarm will resound the panel sounder. 34 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Operation of the Control Panel Security Alarm Event A Typical security message that appears on the panel display: Figure 2.6 Sample Security Alarm Message 2.5.2 How to Respond to a Security Alarm A latching Security Type Code latches the control panel in a security alarm. To return the control panel to normal operation, it is necessary to correct what is causing the security condition, as indicated in the numbered steps below, then reset the control panel. If the control panel indicates a security alarm, take the following action: 1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE soft key to silence the panel sounder and switch the SECURITY LED from flashing to steady—regardless of the number of troubles, alarms, supervisory, and security signals. The control panel sends a Security message to the History buffer and installed printers. 2. Press the MORE INFORMATION soft key to display the MORE INFORMATION screen and view additional information on the device and possibly preprogrammed text for recommended action. (Refer to Figure 1.7 on page 17 for an example of the this screen and an explanation of its fields.) 3. Correct the condition that activated the Security point. 4. When the Security condition is corrected, press the SYSTEM RESET soft key to return the control panel to normal operation (indicated by the “System Normal” message). The control panel sends a “System Normal” message to the panel display, History buffer, installed printers and annunciators. The soft key PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS is also displayed on this screen. A password is required to enter these menus, which are described in the NFS2-3030 Programming Manual. 2.5.3 Interpreting Security Type Codes The Type ID code that displays in a security alarm message is related to the type and function of the point that initiates the security alarm. For example, a monitor module with a TAMPER Type ID code means that the monitor module connects to a tamper switch. If the Type ID code is unfamiliar, refer to Appendix A, “Software Type ID Codes”, on page 65. This appendix is an alphabetical list of Type ID codes and an explanation of each. SECURITY ALARM ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR AREA MONITOR 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L01M134 EVENT COUNTS FIRE ALARMS:000 PREALARM:000 TROUBLE:000 SUPERVISORY:000 SECURITY:001 DISABLE:000 11:59:35A TUE JAN 15, 2008 ACKNOWLEDGE SIGNAL SILENCE MORE INFORMATION SYSTEM RESET PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS MAIN MENU NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 35 Supervisory Signal Event Operation of the Control Panel 2.6 Supervisory Signal Event 2.6.1 How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Supervisory The system indicates a Supervisory alarm when a monitor module point programmed with a supervisory Type Code activates. The panel will react differently depending on whether or not there are higher priority unacknowledged events. When no higher priority unacknowledged events are exist, the control panel: • Produces a warbling audible tone (if the piezo is enabled) • Activates the Supervisory relay (TB2) if it has been selected for supervisory • Flashes the SUPERVISORY LED (yellow) • Displays a Type Code that indicates the type of supervisory signal being generated •Displays SUPERVISORY in the upper left corner of the panel display along with information specific to the device • Sends a Supervisory message to the History buffer, installed printer and annunciators. When an unacknowledged event with a higher priority exists, the control panel retains the indications of the higher priority event (the message, lit LED, audible tone, etc.) while activating the Supervisory relay if it is selected for supervision, flashing the SUPERVISORY LED, and sending a Supervisory message to the history buffer, installed printer and annunciators. If there are silenced alarms (the SIGNALS SILENCED LED is lighted), a Supervisory alarm will resound the panel sounder. Following is a typical supervisory message that would appear on a panel display: Figure 2.7 Sample Supervisory Trouble Message 2.6.2 How to Respond to an Active Supervisory If the control panel indicates a Supervisory condition, the operator can do the following: 1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE soft key to acknowledge the Supervisory message. 2. Press the MORE INFORMATION soft key to display the MORE INFORMATION screen and view additional information on the device and possibly preprogrammed text for recommended action. (Refer to Figure 1.7 on page 17 for an example of this screen and an explanation of its fields.) SUPERVISORY LOBBY EAST WING FIRST FLOOR WATERFLOW S 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L01M134 EVENT COUNTS FIRE ALARMS:000 PREALARM:000 TROUBLE:000 SUPERVISORY:001 SECURITY:000 DISABLE:000 11:59:35A TUE JAN 15, 2008 ACKNOWLEDGE SIGNAL SILENCE MORE INFORMATION SYSTEM RESET PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS MAIN MENU 36 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Operation of the Control Panel Disabled Points Event 3. Investigate and correct the condition causing the Supervisory. 4. Press the SYSTEM RESET soft key to clear any supervisory condition caused by a device with a latching type code: the supervisory will not automatically clear when the condition causing it is cleared. Latching supervisory type codes are WATERFLOW S, LATCH SUPERV, and SPRINKLR SYS. The panel will send a system normal message to the History buffer, installed printer and annunciators. 2.6.3 How to Interpret Type Codes The Type Code that displays in the Supervisory message indicates the function of the point that initiates the Supervisory. For example, a monitor module with a WATERFLOW S Type Code means that the module monitors the state of a waterflow switch. If the Type ID code is unfamiliar, refer to Appendix A, “Software Type ID Codes”, on page 65. This appendix is an alphabetical list of Type ID codes and an explanation of each. 2.7 Disabled Points Event The control panel indicates disabled points by displaying a screen for each disabled detector, monitor module, and control/relay module. Disabled points do not cause an alarm or any Control-by-event activity. If more than one point is disabled, the control panel automatically displays each point in the sequence in which the point was disabled. When one or more points are disabled, the control panel does the following: • Holds all disabled output points in the off-state • Flashes the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED •Lights the POINT DISABLED LED • Sends a Disabled Point message to the History buffer, installed printer and annunciators • Displays a message for each disabled point, with DISABLED in the upper left corner of the LCD as well as other information about the point. NOTE:A supervisory condition caused by a device with a “tracking” type code automatically clears and restores the panel to normal when the condition causing its activation disappears. !CAUTION: When a zone is disabled, any input and output devices mapped to the zone are disabled if the zone is the point’s primary zone. (The primary zone is the zone in the first position of the zone map.) NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 37 Active Event Operation of the Control Panel Figure 2.8 Sample Disabled Point Message Soft Keys ACKNOWLEDGE: Press to acknowledge the disable message. MORE INFORMATION: Press to view more information on the disabled point. PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS: A password is required to enter these menus. 2.8 Active Event 2.8.1 How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Fire Control Point A point with a Type ID of FIRE CONTROL is used for air handler shutdown, intended to override normal operating automatic functions. Activation of a FIRE CONTROL point causes the control panel to do the following: • Initiates the monitor module Control-by-Event • Send a message to the panel display, History buffer, installed printer and annunciators • Does NOT light an indicator at the control panel •Displays ACTIVE in the upper left corner of the LCD, as well as a FIRE CONTROL Type Code and other information specific to the device 2.8.2 How the Control Panel Indicates an Active Non-fire Point A point with a Type ID of NON-FIRE is used for energy management or other non-fire situations. NON-FIRE point operation does not affect control panel operation, nor does it display a message at the panel LCD. Activation of a NON-FIRE point activates CBE—but does not cause any indication on the control panel. For example, you can program a NON-FIRE point to turn lights in a zone to a lower setting when activated. In this case, when the point activates the control panel activates the point’s CBE to turn the lights down without any audio or visual indication on the control panel. DISABLED ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIRST FLOOR DOOR TAMPER 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L01M134 EVENT COUNTS FIRE ALARMS:000 PREALARM:000 TROUBLE:000 SUPERVISORY:000 SECURITY:000 DISABLE:001 11:59:35A TUE JAN 15, 2008 ACKNOWLEDGE SIGNAL SILENCE MORE INFORMATION SYSTEM RESET PROGRAM/ALTER STATUS MAIN MENU 38 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Operation of the Control Panel Operation of Special System Timers, Presignal, and PAS 2.9 Operation of Special System Timers, Presignal, and PAS 2.9.1 System (Panel) Timers There are user-programmable time delays for four specific functions: Alarm Verification, AC Fail, Silence Inhibit, and Auto Silence. Refer to this panel’s programming manual for instructions on viewing or modifying these values. (They may be viewed only in programming mode.) Alarm Verification Timer (VERIFY TIME) A timer that directs the control panel to ignore a fire alarm for a smoke detector, programmed for Alarm Verification, while the Alarm Verification Timer is counting. The timer value can be set from 0-60 seconds, and may not exceed 30 seconds for ULC installations. Table 2.3 contains a summary of how the Alarm Verification Timer works. AC Fail Delay Timer This timer delays the time from the start of AC failure to when the trouble is reported. The timer value may be set to none, or from 1-12 hours. A value of “none” will cause immediate notification. The onboard trouble relay and municipal box output will activate when the countdown is complete. Note that this panel notifies the central station communicator as soon as AC failure occurs, and the central station communicator follows its own programmed schedule for reporting the failure. Silence Inhibit Timer This timer disables the SIGNAL SILENCE and RESET key function for the programmed time (MM:SS seconds) when a fire alarm occurs. A Silence Inhibit Timer starts at the first fire alarm. A panel reset is required to re-enable this timer. It can be set with a value from 0 (the timer is disabled) to 5 minutes. Auto Silence Timer This timer functions like pressing the SIGNAL SILENCE key. When the Auto Silence Timer reaches its programmed value (0, 10 minutes, 15 or 20 minutes, with the setting = 20 for Canadian installations), the control panel automatically shuts off all active outputs programmed as silenceable. 2.9.2 Presignal Presignal is a feature that initially delays activation of outputs with ZF0 in their zone map until the Presignal timer has expired. This feature allows for the initial sounding of outputs only in specific areas, monitored by qualified personnel. To participate in Presignal, inputs and outputs must include Special Zone ZF0 in their zone map. The Presignal timer is programmed to a value from 60 to 180 seconds. If this event occurs The control panel does this A second fire alarm occurs while the Alarm Verification Timer is counting Ignores the Alarm Verification Timer and alarms are reported by the panel for both detectors. The Alarm Verification Timer elapses and a fire alarm still exists Activates the fire alarm The Alarm Verification Timer expires and a fire alarm no longer exists The control panel returns to normal operation and increments the verification counter Table 2.3 Alarm Verification Timer Operation NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 39 Operation of Special System Timers, Presignal, and PAS Operation of the Control Panel How the Panel Indicates a Presignal Alarm When an initiating device participating in Presignal goes into alarm, the panel LCD displays a fire alarm message. (Refer to Section 2.2, “Fire Alarm Event”, on page 24.) If a second alarm occurs while the Presignal timer is counting down, the control panel aborts the Presignal timer countdown and activates all programmed outputs. The fire alarm LED flashes and the panel sounder pulses a steady tone. The control panel latches until the alarm is corrected and the SYSTEM RESET key is pressed to reset the panel. How to Respond to a Presignal Alarm Once the Presignal timer has begun counting down, the operator has the duration of the countdown time to respond to the alarm before the control panel automatically activates all outputs with ZF0 in their zone map and CBE linkage to the alarm. The operator can reset the panel if the alarm is determined false, or press DRILL to evacuate the building immediately. 2.9.3 PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence), used in conjunction with Presignal, allows a 15-second time period for acknowledging an alarm signal from a fire detection/initiating device. If the alarm is not acknowledged within 15 seconds, all programmed outputs activate. If the alarm is acknowledged within 15 seconds, the control panel will enter Presignal mode as described above. The PAS Inhibit switch can be used to turn off the PAS delay timer when the control panel is unattended. 40 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Operation of the Control Panel Operation of Special System Timers, Presignal, and PAS NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 41 Section 3: Read Status This section contains instructions and screen illustrations for Read Status functions and menus using the NFS2-3030 display. Read Status allows viewing of detailed device status information without entering a password or halting full fire protection. Information can be viewed while a fire alarm or trouble condition exists. Read Status screens are refreshed periodically with up-to-date information. Read Status can be reached from the Main Menu screen, which is accessible from the System Normal screen and from most other screens by pressing the BACK soft key until it displays. (Refer to Figure 1.5 for an illustration of the Main Menu screen.) Press the READ STATUS soft key on the Main Menu screen to bring up the following screen. 3.1 Point Select Screen When READ STATUS is pressed at the Main Menu, the following screen appears. Figure 3.1 Point Select Screen for Read Status Soft Keys POINT SELECT - Pressing this soft key scrolls through the various device types. The types and their address formats are illustrated in Table 3.1, “Address Formats,” on page 41. Type Address Format* Detector NxxxLyyDzzz L=Loop, yy=Loop number (1-10) D=Detector, zzz=Detector address (1-159) Module NxxxLyyMzzz L=Loop, yy=Loop number (1-10) M=Module, zzz=Module address (1-159) General Zone NxxxZyyy Z=Zone, yyy=General Zone number (0-999) Logic Zone NxxxZLyyyy ZL=Logic Zone, yyyy=Logic Zone number(1-1000) Annunciator Point NxxxAxxPyy A=Annunciator, xx=ACS address (1-32), P=Point, yy=Point address (1-96) PAM (Prioritized Audio Matrix) NxxxIyyyyAzzSn N indicates Node number, xxx=DVC/DVC-EM Node number, I indicates audio input number, yyyy=audio input number, A indicates DAA-5025 or DAA-5070 Audio Amplifier, zz=DAA address (01 through 32), S indicates DAA speaker circuit, n=DAA speaker circuit (A, B, C or D). Release Zone NxxxZRyy R=Releasing Zone, yy=Releasing Zone number (00-09) Table 3.1 Address Formats (1 of 2) LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 POINT SELECT POINT SELECT: NxxxLyyDzzz (DETECTOR) NEXT POINT ACCEPT PREVIOUS POINT BACK 42 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Read Status Smoke Detector Enter an address to view its attributes (the cursor will be in the underlined section). NEXT POINT/PREVIOUS POINT - Press to view next or previous point. ACCEPT - Press to accept the displayed point for further viewing. Pressing the ACCEPT soft key on the Point Select Screen will display the information that corresponds to the chosen point. Each point type has its own screen. 3.2 Smoke Detector When a detector address is entered into the Point Select Screen and the ACCEPT soft key is pressed, the following screen will display if the detector is a smoke detector. Figure 3.2 Smoke Detector Screen - Read Status Display Lines 1- 4 - This could display any current event message, or, as in this example, the System Normal message. Line 5 - This line contains the screen title and the address of the point being read. Special Function Zone NxxxZFxx ZF=Special Function Zone, x=Special Function Zone number (00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 09) Trouble Zone NxxxZTyyy ZT=Trouble Zone, yyy=Trouble Zone number (1-100) DAA Speaker CKT NxxxAyySn N indicates Node number, xxx=DVC/DVC-EM Node number, A indicates DAA-5025 or DAA-5070 Audio Amplifier, yy=DAA address (01 through 32), S indicates Speaker circuit, n = Speaker circuit number (1-4).. * The Nxxx preface to all the above address formats refers to the node number, where N = node, xxx = the network node number. Type Address Format* Table 3.1 Address Formats (2 of 2) NOTE:The first four lines of the display may indicate an alarm for a point unrelated to the requested point information displayed below them. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 READ ADDRESS: N124L03D052 AUTOMATIC INACTIVE ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z005 SMOKE(PHOTO) Z005, Z027, Z066, , , ,,,,, VALUES: 011% OF ALARM, 045% OF PREALARM ALARM: 6= 1.66%, PREALARM: 3= 0.47% ACTION/STATUS: NONE/VERY CLEAN PEAKS:56% VERIFY COUNT:02 CO-OP:D100,158 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 BACK PEAKS:56% COUNT:02 CO:200PPM TEMP: 100o F For FSC-851 detectors, the values appear in line 14 above. Refer to More Information on page 17 for explanation of fields. NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 43 Smoke Detector Read Status The area between the separator lines, lines 6-14, shows all information concerning the selected point, which is N124L03D052 in the above example. Line 6 - Line 6 displays two statistics that display for inputs (detectors and modules) and zones; in the above example they are: AUTOMATIC INACTIVE The first field displays the point control. There are three designations that could appear in this field The second field displays the point status. There are three designations that could appear in this field. The device is a detector (an input device) so by referring to the descriptions below, it can be determined that the point is in a normal state. Inputs: (detectors, monitor modules, zones) If the point is not in trouble or disabled, and the point is automatically controlled by the panel, the display will be one of the following: AUTOMATIC INACTIVE AUTOMATIC ACTIVE AUTOMATIC PREALARM If the point is disabled, the display will be one of the following. The Trouble Status field will appear if the point is in trouble. DISABLED INACTIVE <Trouble Status>* DISABLED ACTIVE <Trouble Status>* DISABLED PREALARM <Trouble Status>* If the point is in trouble, the display will read: TROUBLE INACTIVE <Trouble Status>* TROUBLE ACTIVE <Trouble Status>* TROUBLE PREALARM <Trouble Status>* *The field <Trouble Status> will contain one of the device trouble messages listed in Table2.1, “Point (Device) Troubles,” on page 28. Line 7 - The custom label for this point. Line 8 - Continuation of the point’s custom label, first zone, and device type. Lines 9,10 - a display of all the zones that contain the current point being read. These lines will have values in them only if the device is a detector. Lines 11 through 14 - These lines display only if the device being read is a smoke or heat detector. Refer to Section 1.8.2, “More Information”, on page 17 for an explanation of these fields. Line 16 - BACK - Press to return to the previous screen. Point Control Designation Description AUTOMATIC The point is being controlled automatically by the panel. DISABLED The point has been disabled by an outside source. TROUBLE The point is in a trouble state and is no longer functioning automatically. Point Status Designation Description INACTIVE The point is currently reporting no events. ACTIVE The point is currently in an off-normal status. PRE-ALARM The point is currently in a prealarm status. 44 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Read Status Heat Detector 3.3 Heat Detector When a detector address is entered into the Point Select Screen and the ACCEPT soft key is pressed, the following screen will display if the detector is a heat detector. Figure 3.3 Heat Detector Screen - Read Status Display Lines 1 through 10 - Refer to the descriptions in Section 3.2, “Smoke Detector”, on page 42. Line 11 - VALUES - This field indicates the percentage of alarm value being read by the detector. Line 15 - The current time and date are displayed in this line. Line 16 - Press BACK to return to the previous screen. 3.4 Monitor Module When a module address is entered into the Point Select Screen and the ACCEPT soft key is pressed, the following screen will display if the point is a monitor module. Figure 3.4 Monitor Module Screen - Read Status Display Lines 1 through 10 - Refer to the descriptions in Section 3.2, “Smoke Detector”, on page 42. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 READ ADDRESS: N124L03D052 AUTOMATIC INACTIVE ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z005 HEAT Z005, Z027, Z066, , , , , , , , VALUES: 023% OF ALARM ALARM 2=57o C TEMPERATURE=21o C 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 READ ADDRESS: N124L03M052 AUTOMATIC INACTIVE ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z005 PULL STATION Z022, Z027, Z066, , , , , , , , 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 BACK Battery voltage and charger current will appear in lines 13 and 14 if the module is monitoring an AMPS-24, ACPS- 610/E, or an ACPS-2406. See text below. Current 4-20mA sensor readings will appear in line 12. See text below. NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 45 Control Module Read Status Line 12 - When a Read Status is performed on an FMM-4-20 module, the current 4-20 mA sensor’s reading will be displayed in the units specified in point programming. Lines 13 and 14 - When a module is monitoring an AMPS-24, ACPS-610/E, or an ACPS-2406, information will appear in these lines in the following format. BATTERY VOLTAGE: 27.9 VOLTS CHARGER CURRENT: 0.0 AMPS Line 15 - The current time and date are displayed in this line. Line 16 - Press BACK to return to the previous screen. 3.5 Control Module When a module address is entered into the Point Select Screen and the ACCEPT soft key is pressed, the following screen will display if the module is a control module. Figure 3.5 Control Module Screen - Read Status Display Lines 1 through 10 - Refer to the descriptions in Section 3.2, “Smoke Detector”, on page 42 with the exception of line 6, which is described below. Line 6 - This line displays statistics that display for control module output points; in the above example they are: AUTOMATIC OFF The first field displays the point control. There are four designations that could appear in this field The second field displays the point status. There are three designations that could appear in this field. Point Control Designation Description AUTOMATIC The point is being controlled automatically by the panel. MANUAL The point has been forced into manual control state by an outside source. DISABLED A status change other than a change to MANUAL control has caused the point to go off automatic control.TROUBLE Point Status Designation Description OFF The point is currently not activated. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 READ ADDRESS: N124L03M052 AUTOMATIC OFF ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z005 CONTROL Z005, Z027, Z066, , , , , , , , WALK TEST: YES SWITCH INHIBIT: YES SILENCEABLE: YES - RESOUND FIRE 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 BACK 46 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Read Status General Zone The device is a control module (an output device) so by referring to the descriptions below, it can be determined that the point is in a normal state. Outputs: (Control Modules) If the point is not in trouble or disabled and the status is Automatic, the display will read: AUTOMATIC OFF AUTOMATIC ON AUTOMATIC OFF-HOOK If the point has been forced into a manual control state, the display will read as follows. <Trouble Status> will appear when there is a point trouble. MANUAL OFF <Trouble Status>* MANUAL ON <Trouble Status>* MANUAL OFF-HOOK <Trouble Status>* If the point is disabled, the display will read as follows. <Trouble Status> will appear when there is a point trouble. DISABLED OFF <Trouble Status>* DISABLED ON <Trouble Status>* DISABLED OFF-HOOK <Trouble Status>* If the point is in trouble, the display will read: TROUBLE OFF <Trouble Status>* TROUBLE ON <Trouble Status>* TROUBLE OFF-HOOK <Trouble Status>* *The field <Trouble Status> will contain one of the device trouble messages listed in Table 2.1, “Point (Device) Troubles,” on page 28. Line 11 - blank. Line 12 - WALK TEST - Displays YES if the device sounds during audible Walk Test. Line 13 - SILENCEABLE - Displays YES if the operator can manually silence an activated output. The output resounds for fire. Line 14 - SWITCH INHIBIT: YES - Displays YES if the operator can not manually activate an output. Line 15 - The current time and date are displayed in this line. Line 16 - Press BACK to return to the previous screen. 3.6 General Zone When a general zone address is entered into the Point Select Screen and the ACCEPT soft key is pressed, the following screen will display: ON The point is currently activated. OFF-HOOK The telephone point is currently off-hook. NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 47 Logic Zone Read Status Figure 3.6 General Zone Screen - Read Status Display Lines 1 through 7 - Refer to the descriptions in Section 3.2, “Smoke Detector”, on page 42. Line 15 - the current time and date 3.7 Logic Zone When a logic zone address is entered into the Point Select Screen and the ACCEPT soft key is pressed, the following screen will display: Figure 3.7 Logic Zone Screen - Read Status Display Lines 1 through 6 - Refer to the descriptions in Section 3.2, “Smoke Detector”, on page 42. EQUATION: The logic equation for this logic zone is displayed here Line 15 - Current time and date. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 READ ADDRESS: N124Z066 AUTOMATIC INACTIVE 66TH FLOOR Z066 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 BACK LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 READ ADDRESS: N124ZL0066 AUTOMATIC INACTIVE LOGIC ZONE NUMBER 66 ZL0066 EQUATION: AND(L1D1,L2D1) 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 BACK 48 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Read Status Releasing Zone 3.8 Releasing Zone When a releasing zone address is entered into the Point Select Screen and the ACCEPT soft key is pressed, the following screen will display: Figure 3.8 Releasing Zone Screen - Read Status Display Lines 9 through 7 - Refer to the descriptions in Section 3.2, “Smoke Detector”, on page 42. Line 9 - DELAY TIME - Gives the delay time setting - a value from 0 to 60 seconds - for this releasing zone. Line 10 - ABORT SWITCH - Displays the type of abort switch; ULI, IRI, NYC or AHJ. Line 11 - CROSS ZONE - Displays the cross zone setting; NO, YES, ZONE, or HEAT. Line 12 - SOAK TIME - Displays the Soak Time setting; 0 to 9999 seconds. Line 15 - Displays the current time and date. For further information on Releasing Zones, refer to Appendix B of this manual. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 READ ADDRESS: N124ZR08 AUTOMATIC INACTIVE RELEASING ZONE NUMBER 08 ZR08 DELAY TIME: 30 SECONDS ABORT SWITCH: AHJ CROSS ZONE: NO SOAK TIME: 3600 SECONDS 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 BACK NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 49 Special Function Zone Read Status 3.9 Special Function Zone When a special function zone address is entered into the Point Select Screen and the ACCEPT soft key is pressed, the following screen will display: Figure 3.9 Special Function Zone Screen - Read Status Display Lines 1 through 6 - Refer to the descriptions in Section 3.2, “Smoke Detector”, on page 42. Line 7 - The special zone number and function is displayed here. 3.10 Trouble Zone When a trouble zone address is entered into the Point Select Screen and the ACCEPT soft key is pressed, the following screen will display: Figure 3.10 Trouble Zone Screen - Read Status Display Lines 1 through 6 - Refer to the descriptions in Section 3.2, “Smoke Detector”, on page 42. EQUATION: The equation for this trouble zone is displayed here. Line 15 - Current time and date. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 READ ADDRESS: N124ZF03 AUTOMATIC INACTIVE SPECIAL ZONE NUMBER 03 ZF03 SECURITY BACK LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 READ ADDRESS: N124ZT008 AUTOMATIC INACTIVE TROUBLE ZONE NUMBER 008 ZT008 EQUATION: AND(T15,T16) 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 BACK 50 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Read Status Annunciator 3.11 Annunciator When an annunciator address is entered into the Point Select Screen and the ACCEPT soft key is pressed, the following screen will display if the point is a monitor module. Figure 3.11 Annunciator Screen - Read Status Display Lines 1- 4 - This could display any current event message, or, as in this example, the System Normal message Line 5 - Screen title and the address of the point being read. Line 6 - Displays the annunciator mode. Line 7 - Displays the state of the active LED. Line 8 - Displays the state of the trouble LED. Line 10 - Displays the annunciator source(s). LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 READ ADDRESS: N124A08P09 MODE: CONTROL ACTIVE LED: OFF TROUBLE LED: OFF SOURCE: L01M001 L01M002 BACK NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 51 DAA Speaker Circuit Read Status 3.12 DAA Speaker Circuit When a DAA Speaker circuit address is entered into the Point Select Screen and the ACCEPT soft key is pressed, the following screen will display. Figure 3.12 Speaker Point - Read Status Lines 1- 4 - This could display any current event message, or, as in this example, the System Normal message Line 5 - Screen title and the address of the point being read. Line 6 - Refer to the line 6 description in “Control Module” on page 45 for explanations of the messages that can appear in this line. 3.13 PAM Points When a PAM (Prioritized Audio Matrix) address is entered into the Point Select Screen and the ACCEPT soft key is pressed, the following screen will display. Figure 3.13 PAM (Prioritized Audio Matrix) Point - Read Status Lines 1 - 6 - Refer to the line 6 description in “Smoke Detector” on page 42 Line 9 - DVC General Zone Map. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 READ ADDRESS: N012A23S2 AUTOMATIC OFF 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 BACK LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 READ ADDRESS: N012I0234A28SA AUTOMATIC INACTIVE Z103, Z035, Z199, Z200 MAPPED LOGIC EQUATION: NONE WALK TEST: NO SWITCH INHIBIT: YES SILENCEABLE: YES 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 BACK 52 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Read Status PAM Points MAPPED LOGIC EQUATION: - The logic equation associated with this PAM point is displayed here, or NONE if there is no associated equation. WALK TEST: - The screen will display the PAM point’s programmed setting for Walk Test participation (Yes or No). SWITCH INHIBIT: - The screen will display the PAM point’s programmed setting for Switch Inhibit (Yes or No). SILENCEABLE: - The screen will display the PAM point’s programmed Silenceable setting (Yes or No). NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 53 Section 4: Viewing and Printing History Information The control panel maintains a history file of alarm, trouble, supervisory, and security events, each with a time/date stamp. An alarm history is maintained in a buffer that can include up to 1000 events. All events, including alarms, are included in a 4000-event buffer. History events may be viewed onscreen, and a printed list may be generated. To choose a history display screen: Press the HISTORY SELECT soft key at the Main Menu. The following menu screen titled History Select will appear. Press the soft key for the type of event history desired to view all of those types of events that are in the history buffer, OR Press the TIME/DATE INTERVAL or POINT RANGE soft key to choose limiting parameters for what will display onscreen. The following sections illustrate and explain the history displays. 4.1 Events History Pressing a soft key on the History Select screen will display the history for whatever event type chosen. The SECURITY/OTHERS softkey will display disable, pre-alarm, active, active outputs, and security events. If the ALL EVENTS soft key is pressed, any events in the history file will display, no matter what the type. The screen below is an example of what displays when the ALL EVENTS soft key is pressed. The displayed fields are the same for each event type. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 N124 HISTORY SELECT ALL EVENTS SECURITY/OTHERS ALARMS ONLY TIME/DATE INTERVAL TROUBLES ONLY POINT RANGE SUPERVISORY ONLY BACK 54 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Viewing and Printing History Information Events History Figure 4.1 Event History Screen Display Lines 1-4: Displays any current event message, or, as in this example, the System Normal message Line 5: Screen title. It will vary depending on the history type chosen for viewing. For example, it will display ALARM HISTORY if the ALARMS ONLY soft key is pressed at the History Select screen. Line 6: Queue location of event that is described in lines 8-11: In the above example, the fire alarm is the fourth of 17 events in the history file. Lines 8 through 11 give more information about the event. Refer to Section 1.6.2, “Event Reporting Format”, on page 13 for an explanation of these fields. Soft Keys NEXT EVENT - Press to view next event (In the above example, event 005 of 017). PREVIOUS EVENT - Press to view previous event (In the above example, event 003 of 017). PRINT “xxx” HISTORY - Press to print the history for the event(s) chosen. (In the above example, all 17 events). The report will look like this: LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 EVENT HISTORY EVENT 004 OF 017 FIRE ALARM HEAT ELEVATOR LOBBY EAST WING FIFTH FLOOR Z005 SMOKE ACCLIM 10:43:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 L03D157 NEXT EVENT PRINT EVENT HISTORY PREVIOUS EVENT BACK NOTE:If an Acclimate™ Detector activates, the event history screen will display whether it was due to heat or smoke. This will be shown in Line 8 and will also show in a printed history report. ******EVENT HISTORY************************************************************* TROUBLE TM4 NO ANSWER 08:52:05P SAT MAR 8, 2008 ACK TROUBLE TM4 NO ANSWER 08:53:35P SAT MAR 8, 2008 CLEAR TROUBLE TM4 NO ANSWER 08:54:05P SAT MAR 8, 2008 ******************************************************************************** NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 55 Time and Date Range Selection for All Events Viewing and Printing History Information 4.2 Time and Date Range Selection for All Events Pressing the Time/Date Interval soft key on the History Select screen displays the Time & Date Range Select screen. This screen allows for selection of a time period that defines the range of events to be viewed and/or printed. Figure 4.2 Time & Date Range Select Screen Display See description in Section 4.1, “Events History”, on page 53 for lines 1-5. Soft Keys START TIME: - Use the keypad to enter a start time for event viewing in the following format: HH:MMA/P DDD MM/DD/YY END TIME: - Use the keypad to enter an end time for event viewing. EVENT TYPE: - Press this soft key to scroll through the following: ALL EVENTS, ALARMS ONLY, TROUBLES ONLY, SUPERVISORY ONLY, SECURITY ONLY, OTHER ONLY. Stop scrolling at the desired event type. ACCEPT: - When entries are made, press this soft key to proceed to the All Events in Interval Screen. All Events in Interval Screen This screen is the same as the Event History screen, except for its title. Refer to Figure 4.1 on page 54. 4.3 Point Range Select for All Events in Range Pressing the Point Range soft key on the Local History Select screen displays the Point Range Select screen. This screen allows for selection of a beginning and an end point that defines the range of events to be viewed and/or printed. Range is selected in the following order: 1. Loop 1 Detectors 2. Loop 2 Detectors, etc.… 3. Loop 10 Detectors 4. Loop 1 Modules 5. Loop 2 Modules, etc. … LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 TIME & DATE RANGE SELECT START TIME: 12:00A THU 01/10/07 END TIME: 02:00P MON 01/14/08 EVENT TYPE: ALL EVENTS ACCEPT BACK 56 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Viewing and Printing History Information Point Range Select for All Events in Range This FACP can have up to 10 loops, which would all follow the above order for range selection. 20. Loop 10 Modules The range selected below includes all supervisory event types for every point: the selection begins with the first detector on loop one and ends with the last module on loop 10. Figure 4.3 Point Range Select Screen Display See description in Section 4.1, “Events History”, on page 53 for lines 1-5. Soft Keys START POINT: - Press this key to scroll through the list of various device types: the format will change for each device. Stop at the desired format/device type, then use the keypad to enter a start point for event viewing. END POINT: - Press this key to scroll through the list of various device types: the format will change for each device. Stop at the desired format/device type, then use the keypad to enter an end point for event viewing. EVENT TYPE: - Press this soft key to scroll through the following: ALL EVENTS, ALARMS ONLY, TROUBLES ONLY, SUPERVISORY ONLY, SECURITY ONLY, OTHER ONLY. Stop scrolling at the desired event type. ACCEPT: - When entries are made, press this soft key to proceed to the All Events in Range Screen. All Events in Range Screen This screen is the same as the Event History screen, except for its title. Refer to Figure 4.1 on page 54. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 11:58:45A TUE JAN 15, 2008 POINT RANGE SELECT START POINT: L01D001 (DETECTOR) END POINT: L10M159 (MODULE) EVENT TYPE: SUPERVISORY ACCEPT BACK NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 57 Section 5: Printing Reports A variety of reports can be generated and printed from the NFS2-3030. Reports listing all event, alarm, trouble, supervisory, or security history can be generated from the history screens in Section 4, “Viewing and Printing History Information”, on page 53. The following section describes how to print programming, Walk Test, and active point information. 5.1 Printer Functions Screen The following screen displays when the Printer Functions soft key is pressed at the Main Menu. This key will appear only if a printer has been selected through programming. Figure 5.1 Printer Functions Screen Soft Keys PROGRAMMING: Press this soft key to display the Print Programming Menu screen. ACTIVE POINTS: Press this soft key to display the Active Points Menu screen. WALK TEST: Press this soft key to print point activations for the last Walk Test performed. The report looks like this: NOTE:Report formats are shown below as printed by an 80-column printer. When these reports are printed on a Keltron, which is a 40-column printer, the formats are the same except they are displayed on two lines instead of one. LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 PRINTER FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING ACTIVE POINTS INSTALLED POINTS WALK TEST DETECTOR MAINTENANCE REPORT BACK ******WALK TEST RESULTS********************************************************* TEST NO ANSWER DETECTOR 73 Z003 SMOKE(ION) 02:54:04P WED MAR 12,2008 L01D073 TEST FIRE ALARM ROOM 101 1ST FLOOR Z001 HEAT 02:54:31P WED MAR 12,2008 L01D003 TEST FIRE ALARM ROOM 221 2ND FLOOR Z001 SECURITY L 02:54:59P WED MAR 12,2008 L01M004 TEST ACTIVE LAB 3RD FLOOR Z004 CONTROL 02:55:09P WED MAR 12,20058 L01M005 58 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Printing Reports Print Programming Menu Screen DETECT MAINTENANCE REPORT: Press this soft key to print a list from the printer connected to the control panel that contains the detector maintenance status for each installed addressable detector. The report looks like this: INSTALLED POINTS: Press this soft key to display the Installed Points Menu screen. 5.2 Print Programming Menu Screen This screen displays when the PROGRAMMING soft key is pressed on the PRINTER FUNCTIONS screen. Refer to Figure 5.1 on page 57). ******DETECTOR MAINTENANCE****************************************************** NORMAL SMOKE(LASER) Detector L01D001 000330us 000340us Comp:000% Pk: 002% Alarm: 000% PreAlarm: 000% A6P6 V000 L01D001 NORMAL SMOKE ACCLIM Detector L01D002 000030us 000000us Comp:000% Pk: 000% Alarm: 000% PreAlarm: 000% A8P8 V000 L01D002 Field Identification Detector Maintenance Report State Label Extended Label Current reading of raw analog value in microseconds Long term average of raw analog value in microseconds Compensation percentage Detector peak AddressPercent of alarm threshold* Percent of prealarm threshold* Verification count Programmed alarm sensitivity* Programmed prealarm sensitivity* Alarm: 000% PreAlarm: 000% A6P6 V000 L01D001 NORMAL SMOKE(LASER) Detector L01D001 000330us 000340us Comp:000% Pk: 002% * Whichever occupancy value is in effect when the report is printed. NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 59 Print Programming Menu Screen Printing Reports Figure 5.2 Print Programming Screen Soft Keys NETWORK PARAMETERS: Press to print node number, node label, Channel A and B threshold, network style. The report looks like this: PANEL SETTINGS: Press to print broadcast time, event ordering, and block acknowledge. The report looks like this: PANEL TIMERS: Press to print timer values for Auto Silence, Silence Inhibit, AC Fail Delay time and whether it has been enabled, Proprietary Reminder, and Remote Reminder timers. The report looks like this: PRINT PROGRAMMING MENU NETWORK PARAMETERS LCD DISPLAY PANEL SETTING PANEL TIMERS MORE BACK ******NETWORK PARAMETERS******************************************************** NODE:N124 STYLE 7 NO NODE LABEL: LAKEVILLE GENERAL HOSPITAL CH A. THRESHOLD: HIGH CH B. THRESHOLD: HIGH IP ACCESS:OFF ******************************************************************************** ******PANEL SETTINGS************************************************************ LOCAL CONTROL: NO TROUBLE REMINDER: YES PIEZO: ON POWER MANAGEMENT MODE: OFF PROPRIETARY SUPERVISING STATION: NO EVENT ORDERING: USA DISPLAY ADDRESS: YES DCC PARTICIPATION: NO REGIONAL SETTING DEFAULT LCM LOCAL MODE: NO RAPID ALL CALL: NO ******************************************************************************** ******PANEL TIMERS************************************************************** VERIFY TIME: 30 VERIFY=PREALARM: NO MAXIMUM VERIFICATION COUNT: 00 AC FAIL DELAY: 8 HOURS SILENCE INHIBIT: 00:00 AUTO SILENCE: 10 MINUTES PAS OFF PRESIGNAL DELAY 03:00 ******************************************************************************** 60 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Printing Reports Print Programming Menu Screen (2) LCD DISPLAY: Press to print information about backlight handling during fire alarm, backlight intensity, and display language. The report looks like this: 5.3 Print Programming Menu Screen (2) The second PRINT PROGRAMMING MENU screen displays when MORE is pressed at the first PRINT PROGRAMMING MENU screen: Figure 5.3 Print Programming Screen Soft Keys SUPERVISION: Press to print information on power supply and printer monitoring. The report looks like this: CUSTOM ACTION MESSAGES: Press to print all custom action messages (1-100). The report looks like this: EVENT LOGGING: Press to print non-fire and output activations if these events have been chosen for logging during panel programming. The report looks like this: ******LCD DISPLAY*************************************************************** LCD INTENSITY: 040 BACKLIGHT: ON LANGUAGE: ENGLISH ******************************************************************************** PRINT PROGRAMMING MENU SUPERVISION EVENT LOGGING CUSTOM ACTION MESSAGES BACK ******SUPERVISION*************************************************************** MAIN POWER SUPPLY ADDRESS: L01M006 PRINTER: 80-column TAMPER INPUT: NO AUXILIARY TROUBLE: NO ******************************************************************************** ******CUSTOM ACTION MESSAGE***************************************************** CAM 1 GO TO ALARM SITE AND INVESTIGATE APPROACH THE ALARM LOCATION WITH CAUTION BRING CELL PHONE AND REPORT WHEN ON SITE CAM 2 CALL MANAGER WITH REPORT ******************************************************************************** ******EVENT LOGGING************************************************************* NON-FIRE ACTIVATIONS:NO OUTPUT ACTIVATIONS: NO ******************************************************************************** NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 61 Active Points Report Screen Printing Reports 5.4 Active Points Report Screen This screen displays when the ACTIVE POINTS soft key is pressed on the PRINTER FUNCTIONS screen (refer to Figure 5.1 on page 57). Figure 5.4 Print Active Points Screen Soft Keys This screen provides a menu for printing a list of active points for whatever type of list is chosen. The soft key will display on the screen only if there is at least one event in the queue. 5.5 Installed Points Report Screen This screen displays when the INSTALLED POINTS soft key is pressed on the PRINTER FUNCTIONS screen (refer to Figure 5.1 on page 57) Figure 5.5 Print Programming Screen LAKEVIEW GENERAL HOSPITAL SYSTEM NORMAL 10:22:34A TUE JAN 15, 2008 ACTIVE POINTS ALARMS ONLY PREALARMS TROUBLES ONLY DISABLED POINTS SUPERVISORY ALARMS ACTIVATED OUTPUTS SECURITY/OTHER BACK NOTE:For a printed list of history information, refer to the history screens in Section 4, “Viewing and Printing History Information”. INSTALLED POINTS MENU SLC POINTS RELEASING ZONES SPECIAL ZONES GENERAL ZONES TROUBLE ZONES LOGIC ZONES RANGE ACS BACK 62 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Printing Reports Installed Points Report Screen Soft Keys SLC POINTS:Press to print information on installed SLC points. When the soft key is pressed, a field appears to allow choice of a single SLC or ALL. Toggle until the desired choice appears in the field, then press ACCEPT. The report looks like this. GENERAL ZONES: Press to print a report of installed general zones. LOGIC ZONES: Press to print a report of installed logic zones. NORMAL SMOKE (ION) Detector L02D129 *** *** NTL*Y *** ** 6666 Z002 , , , , , , , , , L02D129 Status Software Type ID Detector or Module Point label, extended label Multi-Detector Co-op Addresses Local Mode Participation (Y or N) Alarm Tracking (T) or Latching (L) Pre-alarm Alert (T) or Action (L) Alarm Verification Testing (V or *) Custom Action Message No. Weekly Occupancy Schedule No. Left to right - Alarm Threshold occupied, Alarm Threshold unoccupied, Prealarm Threshold occupied, Prealarm Threshold unoccupied ******INSTALLED POINTS********************************************************** NORMAL SMOKE (ION) Detector L02D129 *** *** NTL*Y *** ** 6666 Z002,,,,,,, , , L02D129 ON RELAY Module L02M005 NL * *** ** ZL001,,,,,,, , , L02M005 ******************************************************************************** Device AddressTen zone fields of zone map (separated by commas) Field Identification SLC Detector Installed Points Silenceable (S or * - Sounder/Relay Base Only) ******INSTALLED POINTS********************************************************** ON GENERAL ZONE General Alarm Z000 ON GENERAL ZONE Zone 001 Z001 OFF GENERAL ZONE Zone 002 Z002 ******************************************************************************** ******INSTALLED POINTS********************************************************** ON LOGIC ZONE AND(Z1,NOT(L2M6) ZL0001* OFF LOGIC ZONE AND(ZL10,NOT(Z75)) ZL0011 ******************************************************************************** An asterisk in this position indicates this zone appears in a point’s zone map. NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 63 Installed Points Report Screen Printing Reports ACS: Press to print information on the device types for addresses 1-32. The report looks like this: RELEASING ZONES: Press to print a report of installed releasing zones. SPECIAL ZONES: Press to print a report of installed releasing zones. TROUBLE ZONES: Press to print a report of installed trouble zones. ******INSTALLED POINTS********************************************************** BOARD 01: 64SYS ALARM/TROUBLE N00A01P01 SILENCE N00A01P02 RESET N00A01P03 SUPERVISORY N00A01P04 (SECURITY)N00A01P05 BATTERY LOW N00A01P06 AC FAIL N00A01P07 MONITOR L01D01 N00A01P08 ******************************************************************************** Point function column Mapped point column ACS point address column ******INSTALLED POINTS********************************************************** OFF RELEASE ZONE ZR0* OFF RELEASE ZONE ZR1 ******************************************************************************** An asterisk in this position indicates this zone appears in a point’s zone map. ******INSTALLED POINTS********************************************************** OFF SPECIAL ZONE ZF0* ******************************************************************************** An asterisk in this position indicates this zone appears in a point’s zone map. ******INSTALLED POINTS********************************************************** OFF TROUBLE ZONE OR(ZT049,ZT050) ******************************************************************************** 64 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Printing Reports Installed Points Report Screen RANGE: Press to bring up the following screen, which allows the programmer to choose a range of installed points to print. Figure 5.6 Installed Points Menu - Range Soft Keys START POINT: Press to place the cursor in this field, and to toggle between the choices, which appear in print order: DETECTOR (loop1, detector 1 through loop 10, detector 159), MODULE (loop 1, module 1 through loop 10, module 159), GENERAL ZONE, LOGIC ZONE, RELEASE ZONE, ACS PTS, SPECIAL ZONE, TROUBLE ZONE. Using the keypad, type in the start point address. END POINT: Press to place cursor in this field, and to toggle between the choices as described above. Using the keypad, type in the end point address. INSTALLED POINTS MENU START POINT: LO1D001 (DETECTOR) END POINT: ZT10 _(TROUBLE ZONE) NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 65 Appendix A: Software Type ID Codes A.1 Alphabetical List The following chart lists NFS2-3030 Type ID codes in alphabetical order. These codes are assigned during programming based on the types and functions of the devices they are assigned. The codes appear in point message formats. Software Type ID Code Device ABORT SWITCH Monitor that provides an abort function for a releasing zone through connection to a UL-listed abort station) ACCESS MONTR Monitor for building access ACK SWITCH Monitor used to silence panel sounder, and to give an acknowledge message on the panel display AIR REF FSL-751 detector used to monitor air quality entering a protected area ALARMS PEND Control module or NAC for output that will activate upon receipt of an alarm condition, and remain in the alarm state until all alarms have been acknowledged. Programmed for switch inhibit ALLCALL PAGE Monitor used for emulation of AMG-1 All-call switch, activating all speaker circuits AREA MONITOR Monitor for building access AUDIBLE CKT Control module/ relay used on audible circuit NAC AUDIO SYSTEM Monitor for audio equipment BELL CIRCUIT Control module used with NAC with bells blank Operates as CONTROL with no Type ID label CONTROL Control module used with NAC CONTROL NAC Control module or NAC DRILL SWITCH Monitor used for activation that emulates panel Drill switch, activating silenceable fire outputs EQUIP MONITR Monitor used for recording access to equipment EVACUATE SWITCH Monitor used for activation that emulates panel Drill switch, activating silenceable fire outputs FIRE CONTROL Monitors non-fire activations FMM-420 Monitors 4-20 mA industrial sensors FORM C RESET Control module used to interrupt 24V power to four-wire conventional detectors for 30 seconds upon reset. Used in conjunction with a monitor module with a conventional detector Type ID GEN ALARM Control module, XPC-8 circuit, or XP5-C (NAC mode) configured as a Municipal Box Transmitter for NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems applications (MBT-1 required). This Type ID can also be used for general alarm activation. It is programmed as “switch inhibit”. GEN PEND Control module, XPC-8 circuit, or XP5-C (NAC mode) that will activate upon receipt of an alarm and/or trouble condition, and remain in the ON state until all events have been acknowledged GEN SUPERVIS Control module, XPC-8, or XP5-C (NAC mode) activated under any supervisory condition (includes sprinkler type). It is programmed as “switch inhibit” GEN TROUBLE Control module, XPC-8, or XP5-C (NAC mode) activated under any System Trouble condition. It is programmed as “switch inhibit” HAZARD ALERT Indicated a hazard condition, tracking HEAT Adjustable threshold heat detector HEAT+ Adjustable threshold heat detector with a low temperature warning. HEAT(FIXED) Intelligent 135ºF thermal sensor detector HEAT(ROR) 15ºF per minute rate-of-rise detector HEAT DETECT Monitor for conventional heat detector HORN CIRCUIT Control module relay module used with NAC with horns INST RELEASE Control module used with NAC. Always non-silenceable and switch-inhibited ISOLATED NAC Supervised NAC for notification appliance, used with audio isolators. Activates even if there is a short on its NAC circuit. Canada installations only. ISOLATED SPK Supervised NAC for speaker circuit, used with audio isolators. Activates even if there is a short on its audio circuit. Canada installations only. LATCH SUPERV Indicates latching supervisory condition MAN RELEASE Monitor module that provides manual release for a releasing zone through connection to a UL- listed pull station MAN REL DELAY Monitor module that provides manual release with a 10 second delay for a releasing zone through connection to a UL-listed pull station Table A.1 Software Type ID Code s, Alphabetical List (1 of 3) 66 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Software Type ID Codes Alphabetical List MONITOR Alarm-monitoring device NON FIRE Monitors non fire activations NONRESET CTL Output unaffected by “System Reset” command PAS INHIBIT Monitor used to inhibit Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) POWER MONITR Monitor for main and auxiliary power supplies PROCESS AUTO Indicates process condition, tracking PROCESS MON Indicates process condition, latching PULL STATION Manual fire-alarm activating device REL AUDIBLE Activates audio or visual devices steady when releasing starts REL END BELL Control module used to activate NAC audio or visual device when releasing circuits shut off REL CKT ULC Control module used to direct outputs to perform a release function as required by ULC RELAY Form-C relay control module REL. FORM C Form-C relay that directs outputs to perform a releasing function RELEASE CKT Directs outputs to perform a releasing function RESET SWITCH Monitor used to reset the control panel RF MON MODUL Wireless alarm-monitoring device RF PULL STA Wireless manual fire alarm-activating device RFSMOKE(PHOTO) Wireless smoke detector RF SUPERVSRY Wireless supervisory-monitoring device SECOND SHOT Monitor module that provides a second manual release for a releasing zone through connection to a UL-listed pull station SECURITY L Monitor for activation of latching security alarm SIL SWITCH Monitor used as Signal Silence switch, turning off all activated silenceable outputs SMOKE ACCLIM Combination photoelectric/heat detector SMOKE(ACCLIM+) Combination photoelectric/heat detector with low temperature warning SMOKE CONVEN Conventional smoke detector attached to an FZM-1 SMOKE DETECT Conventional smoke detector attached to an FZM-1 SMOKE(DUCTI) Duct ionization smoke detector SMOKE(DUCTL) Duct laser smoke detector SMOKE(DUCTP) Duct photoelectric smoke detector SMOKE(HARSH) HARSH smoke detector SMOKE(ION) Ionization smoke detector SMOKE(LASER) Laser smoke detector SMOKE(MULTI) Multisensor smoke detector SMOKE(PHOTO) Photoelectric smoke detector SPEAKER Control module for speaker SPRINKLR SYS Monitor for a waterflow device STROBE Control module used with NAC with strobes SUP L(DUCTI) Duct ionization smoke detector, latching SUP L(DUCTL) Duct laser smoke detector, latching SUP L(DUCTP) Photoelectric smoke detector used as a duct detector to report supervisory condition rather than alarm, latching SUP L(ION)** Ionization smoke detector, latching SUP L(LASER)** Laser smoke detector, latching SUP L(PHOTO)** Photoelectric smoke detector, latching SUP T(DUCTI)*, ** Duct ionization smoke detector, tracking SUP T(DUCTL)*, ** Duct laser smoke detector, tracking SUP T(DUCTP)*, ** Photoelectric smoke detector used as a duct detector to report supervisory condition rather than alarm, tracking SUP T(ION)*, ** Ionization smoke detector, tracking SUP T(LASER)*, ** Laser smoke detector, tracking SUP T(PHOTO)*, ** Photoelectric smoke detector, tracking SYS MONITOR Monitor for equipment security TAMPER Monitor for activation of tamper switch TELE PAGE Monitor used to emulate the page button on an FFT-7, allowing remote paging to a fire area Software Type ID Code Device Table A.1 Software Type ID Code s, Alphabetical List (2 of 3) NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 67 Alphabetical List Software Type ID Codes TELEPHONE Control module for standard telephone circuit TRACKING SUPERV Monitor for waterflow tamper switches for alarm points TROUBLE MON Monitor for trouble inputs WATERFLOW Monitor for waterflow alarm switch WATERFLOW S Monitor for supervisory condition for activated waterflow switch WEATHER ALRT Monitor for weather condition, tracking *Not suitable for Canadian applications. **Subject to AHJ approval. Software Type ID Code Device Table A.1 Software Type ID Code s, Alphabetical List (3 of 3) 68 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Appendix B: Releasing Zones B.1 Introduction The control panel provides ten Releasing Zones (ZR00-ZR09). These are special zones that can be used for up to ten independent releasing operations. This section contains descriptions of each releasing function option and an example of how Releasing Zone options work. For instructions on programming Releasing Functions, refer to this panel’s programming manual. Each Releasing Zone includes the following releasing options: The Read Status function allows the operator to view the current selections for a Releasing Zone. Refer to Section 3.8, “Releasing Zone”, on page 48 for more information. Option Description Cross Zone Cross Zones let you program the control panel to activate a Releasing Zone when two or more detectors are alarmed. Cross Zone selections are: Yes Two or more detectors are alarmed that are mapped to one of the ten Releasing Zones (ZR00-ZR09). Zone Two or more detectors are alarmed that are mapped to two different Software Zones and mapped to one of the ten Releasing Zones (R0-R9). Heat At least one smoke detector mapped to one of the ten Releasing Zones (ZR00-ZR09) is alarmed and at least one heat detector mapped to the same Releasing Zone as the smoke detector is alarmed. None Cross Zones are not used. Delay Timer A 0–60 second programmable delay before activating a zone. Abort Switch An Abort Switch Type Code used to abort activation of a zone. Manual Release Allows immediate zone activation by overriding the abort function, cross-zone function, and delay timer. Soak Timer Automatically shuts off the releasing device after a preprogrammed period of time. Select 0001-9999 seconds for Soak Time or 0000 seconds for no Soak Time. Table B.1 Releasing Options NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 69 How Releasing Zones Operate Releasing Zones B.2 How Releasing Zones Operate The figure below contains an illustrated example of how Releasing Zones work, using cross zone selections with four detectors and an NAC mapped to Releasing Zone 1 (listed as ZR01 in the zone map). Table B.2 on page 69 lists the cross zone selections and the conditions that activate the Releasing Zone: Figure B.1 Illustrated Example of Cross Zone Programming Listing of each Cross Zone option and the conditions required to activate the Releasing Zone, according to the example shown in Figure B.1 on page 69. . Cross Zone Selection (Cross=)Condition(s) Required to Activate the Releasing zone Cross=NONE An alarm from any detector activates the releasing circuit. Cross=YES An alarm from any two detectors activates the releasing circuit. Table B.2 Example of Cross Zone Selections Releasing Zone ZR01 General Zone Z002 General Zone Z001 Smoke Detector L02D101 Smoke Detector L02D103 Heat Detector L02D104 Smoke Detector L02D102 SLC NAC Zone map = Z002 ZR1 Zone map = Z001 ZR01Zone map = Z001 ZR01 INPUTS ZONE MAP L02D101 Smoke Detector Z001, ZR01 L02D102 Smoke Detector Z001, ZR01 L02D103 Smoke Detector Z002, ZR01 L02D104 Heat Detector Z002, ZR01 OUTPUT SLC Module Releasing Circuit ZR01 70 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 Releasing Zones How Releasing Zones Operate Cross=ZONE An alarm from two detectors mapped to different Software Zones, but mapped to the same Releasing Zone. • An alarm from L02D101 and L02D103 – detectors mapped to different zones, but both list ZR01 in their zone map. • An alarm from L02D102 and L02D104 – detectors mapped to different zones, but both list ZR01 in their zone map. • An alarm from L02D101 and L02D104 – detectors mapped to different zones, but both list ZR01 in their zone map. • An alarm from L02D102 and L02D103 – detectors mapped to different zones, but both list ZR01 in their zone map. Cross=HEAT Activation of heat detector L02D104 and one smoke detector (L02D101, L02D102, or L02D103). Cross Zone Selection (Cross=)Condition(s) Required to Activate the Releasing zone Table B.2 Example of Cross Zone Selections NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 71 Index A Abort 68 AC Fail Delay Timer 38 Setting report 59 ACCEPT soft key 16 Acknowledge An Event 24 Block and point 24 Acknowledge soft keys disabled local control 11 ACS Points Report 63 Active Fire Control Point Panel indication 37 Active Non-fire Point Panel indication 37 Active Points Report 61 Address formats 41 Alarm Verification timer 38 Alphanumeric keyboard, function of 11 Annunciator Address format 41 Read Status 50 Arrow Keys about 11 use of 15 Auto Silence timer 38 Setting report 59 B BACK soft key 15 BATTERY LEVELS key, about 12 Block Acknowledge 24 Block acknowledge setting report 59 Broadcast time setting report 59 C Canada Event Order 19 Canadian Applications 33 CAUTION Information about the Caution notation 8 When a zone is disabled, any input or out- put devices mapped… 36 Control Module Read Status 45–46 Co-operative Multi-Alarm Sensing display 19 Cross Zone 68 Cross Zone Programming illustration 69 Custom Action Message 18 Custom Action Messages report 60 D DAA Speaker Ckt Address 42 DCC, see Display and Control Center Delay Timer 68 Detector Action/Status display 18 Address format 41 Co-operative Multi-alarm Sensing 19 Heat Detector Read Status 44 Peaks display 19 Read Status 42–44 values display 18 Verify Count display 19 Device Troubles 27 DISABLE/ENABLE key, about 12 Disabled Points Panel indication 36 primary zone 36 Display and Control Center (DCC) 11, 24 Displayless Mode 9 service-level switches, ACK, SIGSIL, SYSRST, LAMP 9 Drill disabled local control 11 DRILL HOLD 2 SEC. fixed function key 11 E Enter key, about 11 Esc key, about 12 Event Acknowledging 24 Definition of 23 Fire Alarm 24 History report 54 History screen 54 Off-normal 23 Event Logging Report listing 60 Event Ordering 19 Event ordering setting report 59 Event reporting format 13 point events 13 system events 15 F F1 and F2 keys, about 12 Fields, adding/modifying 15 Fire Alarm How to respond 25 Panel indications 24 FIRE ALARM SCROLL/DISPLAY fixed func- 72 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 G–P Index tion key 11 Firmware version numbers, to view 12 Fixed Function Keys, functions of 11 G General Zone Address format 41 Read Status 46 General Zones Installed Points Report 62 H History Information, viewing & printing 53–56 All events 53 Event History report 54 Event History screen 54 Point Range 55 Range 56 Time & Date Range 55 I Installed Points Report 61 Interval selection, all events 55 L label 14 LAMP TEST key, about 12 LCD Display report 60 LED Indicators 12 Local Control option 11 Logic Zone Address format 41 Read Status 47 Logic Zones Installed Points Report 62 M Main Menu 16 Event Counts display 16 History Select 21 More Information 17 Multiple Event List 19 Printer Functions 21 Program/Alter Status 21 Read Status 21 Manual Release 68 Message Formats Point Events 13 System Events 15 System Normal 13 Message Formats, about 12–15 Module Address format 41 See also Control Module 45 See also Monitor Module 44 Monitor Module Read Status 44 Multiple Event List 19 N Navigating menu and programming screens 15 Network parameters report 59 NEXT SELECTION/PREVIOUS SELECTION key, about 12 Note For a printed list of history information, re- fer to… 61 If a monitor module programmed with a Waterflow type code… 24 If an unacknowledged event occurs while the Multiple Event list displays… 20 If Local Control is disabled… 24 If the panel is programmed for Receive Mode… 24 Information about Notes 9 Key functions are as described below un- less… 11 Report formats are shown below as printed by an 80-column printer… 57 The first four lines of the display may indi- cate an alarm for a point unrelat- ed… 42 O Off-normal events 23 OTHER EVENT SCROLL/DISPLAY fixed function key 11 P PAM Address format 41 panel when it can not read a specified point 16 Panel resound if security alarm and Signals Silenced 33 if supervisory alarm and Signals Silenced 35 Panel Timers, See System Timers 38 PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) 39 Point (Device) Troubles table 28 Point Acknowledge 24 Point events format 13 Point Range select, all events 55 Point Trouble How to respond 27 Panel indication 26 Power supply supervision setting report 60 Pre-alarm Action 31 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 73 Index R–S Alert 31 How to respond 33 latching 31 non-latching 31 Panel indications 32 Presignal 38 How to respond 39 Panel Indication 39 Primary Zone Disabling 36 Print Programming Menu 58 Programming Menu 2 60 PRINT SCREEN key, about 12 Printer supervision setting report 60 Printer Functions screen 57 Program/Alter Status 21 Proprietary Reminder timer Setting report 59 R Read Status 41–50 Annunciator 50 Detector 42 General Zone 46 Heat Detector 44 Logic Zone 47 Monitor Module 44 Releasing Zone 48 Special Function Zone 49 Trouble Zone 49 Receive Mode 11, 24 Releasing Zone Abort Switch 68 Address Format 41 Cross Zone 68 Delay Timer 68 Manual Release 68 Read Status 48 Soak Timer 68 Releasing Zones (R0-R9) 68–69 Releasing Zones Installed Points Report 63 Remote Reminder timer Setting report 59 Removed panel circuits from poll description. 23 Report ACS Points 63 Custom Action Messages 60 Event Logging 60 Installed Points 61 LCD display settings 60 Network parameters 59 Settings 59 Supervision 60 Timers 59 Reports 57 Resound, see Panel Resound S Security Alarm How to respond 34 Panel indications 33 SECURITY SCROLL/DISPLAY fixed function key 11 SIGNAL SILENCE fixed function key 11 Silence Inhibit timer 11, 38 Setting report 59 SLC Installed Points Report 62 Smoke Detector, See Detector 42 Soak Timer 68 Soft Keys, functions of 11 Software Type ID Codes 65 Speaker Address format 42 Special Function Keys 11 Special Function Zone Address format 42 Read Status 49 ZF0 and Presignal 38 Special Function Zones Installed Points Report 63 Supervision report 60 SUPERVISORY SCROLL/DISPLAY fixed function key 11 Supervisory Signal (Active Supervisory) How to respond 35 Panel indication 35 Supplemental Documentation 7 Supplemental Information 7 System (Panel) Timers AC Fail 38 AC Fail Delay 59 Alarm Verification 38 Auto Silence 38, 59 Silence Inhibit 38, 59 System event format 15 System Normal Internal panel activity 23 System Normal screen 13, 23 custom graphic 13 System Reset disabled local control 11 if Silence Inhibit Timer is running 11 silencing active outputs 11 SYSTEM RESET fixed function key, about 11 System Trouble How to respond 27 Panel indication 26 System Troubles 29 74 NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 T–Z Index T Time & Date Range selection, all events 55 Timers - See System (Panel) Timers 59 Trouble - See System or Point trouble 27 TROUBLE SCROLL/DISPLAY fixed function key 11 Trouble Zone Address format 42 Read Status 49 Trouble Zones Installed Points Report 63 Type ID codes, see Software Type ID codes 65 U USA Event Order 19 V VeriFire entering custom graphic 13 Use with displayless mode 9 W WARNING Information about the Warning notation 9 Z ZFO, See Special Zone ZF0 38 Zones Address Formats 41 Primary, disabling 36 See also General Zone, Logic Zone, Trou- ble Zone, Releasing Zone, Special Function Zone Manufacturer Warranties and Limitation of Liability Manufacturer Warranties. Subject to the limitations set forth herein, Manufacturer warrants that the Products manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility and sold by it to its authorized Distributors shall be free, under normal use and service, from defects in material and workmanship for a period of thirty six months (36) months from the date of manufacture (effective Jan. 1, 2009). The Products manufactured and sold by Manufacturer are date stamped at the time of production. Manufacturer does not warrant Products that are not manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility but assigns to its Distributor, to the extent possible, any warranty offered by the manufacturer of such product. This warranty shall be void if a Product is altered, serviced or repaired by anyone other than Manufacturer or its authorized Distributors. This warranty shall also be void if there is a failure to maintain the Products and the systems in which they operate in proper working conditions. MANUFACTURER MAKES NO FURTHER WARRANTIES, AND DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS, TRADEMARKS, PROGRAMS AND SERVICES RENDERED BY MANUFACTURER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE COURSE OF, OR AS A RESULT OF, PERSONAL, COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USES OF ITS PRODUCTS. This document constitutes the only warranty made by Manufacturer with respect to its products and replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Manufacturer. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligation of this warranty is authorized. Manufacturer does not represent that its products will prevent any loss by fire or otherwise. Warranty Claims. Manufacturer shall replace or repair, at Manufacturer's discretion, each part returned by its authorized Distributor and acknowledged by Manufacturer to be defective, provided that such part shall have been returned to Manufacturer with all charges prepaid and the authorized Distributor has completed Manufacturer's Return Material Authorization form. The replacement part shall come from Manufacturer's stock and may be new or refurbished. THE FOREGOING IS DISTRIBUTOR'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IN THE EVENT OF A WARRANTY CLAIM. Warn-HL-08-2009.fm NFS2-3030 Operations Manual — P/N 52546:E 05/21/2010 75 World Headquarters 12 Clintonville Road Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA 203-484-7161 fax 203-484-7118 www.notifier.com NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE 1. Application. 1.1 The inspection, testing, and maintenance of fire alarm systems, their initiating devices, and notification appliances shall comply with the requirements of this chapter. 1.2 The inspection, testing, and maintenance of single-and multiple-station smoke and heat alarms and household fire alarm systems shall comply with the requirements of this chapter. 1.3 Procedures that are required by other parties and that exceed the requirements of this chapter shall be permitted. 1.4 The requirements of this chapter shall apply to both new and existing systems. 1.5 The requirements of Chapter 7 (NFPA72, 2013) shall apply where referenced in this section. 2. General. 2.1 Purpose 2.1.1 The purpose for initial and reacceptance inspections is to ensure compliance with approved design documents and to ensure installation in accordance with this Code and other required installation standards. 2.1.2 The purpose for initial and reacceptance tests of fire alarm and signaling systems is to ensure system operation in accordance with the design documents. 2.1.3 The purpose for periodic inspections is to assure that obvious damages or changes that might affect the system operability are visually identified. 2.1.4 The purpose for periodic testing is to statistically assure operational reliability. 2.2. Performance 2.2.1 Performance Verification To ensure operational integrity, the system shall have an inspection, testing, and maintenance program. 2.2.1.1 Inspection, testing, and maintenance programs shall satisfy the requirements of this Code and conform to the equipment manufacturer's published instructions. 2.2.1.2 Inspection, testing, and maintenance programs shall verify correct operation of system. 2.2.2. Impairments / Deficiencies 2.2.2.1 The requirements of Section 10.21 (NFPA72, 2013) shall be applicable when a system in impaired. 2.2.2.2 System deficiencies shall be corrected. 2.2.2.3 If a deficiency is not corrected at the conclusion of system inspection, testing, and maintenance, the system owner or the owner's designated representative shall be informed of the impairment in writing within 24 hours. 2.3 Responsibilities 2.3.1 The property or building or system owner or the owner's designated representative shall be responsible for inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system and for alterations or additions to this system. 2.3.2 Where the property owner is no the occupant, the property owner shall be permitted to delegate the authority and responsibility for inspecting, testing, and maintaining the fire protection systems the occupant, management firm, or managing individual through specific provisions in the lease, written use agreement, or management contract. 2.3.3 Inspection, testing, or maintenance shall be permitted to be done by the building or system owner or a person or organization other than the building or system owner if conducted under a written contract. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE 2.3.4 Where the building or system owner has delegated any responsibilities for inspection, testing, or maintenance, a copy of the written delegation required by 2.3.3 shall be provided to the authority having jurisdiction upon request. 2.3.5 Testing and maintenance of central station service systems shall be performed under the contractual arrangements specified in 26.3.3 (NFPA72, 2013). 2.3.6 Service Personnel Qualifications and Experience Service personnel shall be qualified and experienced in accordance with the requirements of 10.5.3 (NFPA72, 2013). 2.4 Notification 2.4.1 Before proceeding with any testing, all persons and facilities receiving alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals and all building occupants shall be notified of the testing to prevent unnecessary response. 2.4.2 At the conclusion of testing, those previously notified (and others, as necessary) shall be notified that testing has been concluded. 2.4.3 The owner or the owner's designated representative and service personnel shall coordinate system testing to prevent interruption of critical building systems or equipment. 2.5 System Documentation Prior to system maintenance or testing, the record of completion and any information required by Chapter 7 regarding the system and system alterations, including specifications, wiring diagrams, and floor plans, shall be provided by the owner or a designated representative to the service personnel upon request. 2.5.1 The provided documentation shall include the current revisions of al fire alarm software in the systems with which the fire alarm software interfaces, shall be verified for compatibility in accordance with the requirements of 23.2.2.1.1 (NFPA72, 2013). 2.5.2 The revisions of the fire alarm software, and the revisions of the software in the systems with which the fire alarm software interfaces, shall be verified for compatibility in accordance with the requirements of 23.2.2.1.1 (NFPA72, 2013). 2.6 Releasing Systems Requirements pertinent to testing the fire alarm systems initiating fire suppression system releasing functions shall be covered by 2.6.1 through 2.6.6. 2.6.1 Testing personnel shall be qualified and experienced in the specific arrangement and operation of a suppression system(s) and a releasing function(s) and shall be cognizant of the hazards associated with inadvertent system discharge. 2.6.2 Occupant notification shall be required whenever a fire alarm system configured for releasing service is being serviced or tested. 2.6.3 Discharge testing of suppression systems shall not be required by this Code. 2.6.4 Suppression systems shall be secured from inadvertent actuation, including disconnection of releasing solenoids or electric actuators, closing of valves, other actions, or combinations thereof, for the specific system, for the duration of the fire alarm system testing. 2.6.5 Testing shall include verification that the releasing circuits and components energized or actuated by the fire alarm system are electrically monitored for integrity and operate as intended on alarm. 2.6.6 Suppression systems and releasing components shall be returned to their functional operating condition upon completion of system testing. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE 2.7 Interface Equipment & Emergency Control Functions 2.7.1 Testing personnel shall be qualified and experienced in the arrangement and operation of interface equipment and emergency control functions. 2.7.2 Testing shall be accomplished in accordance with Table 4.3.2. 2.8 Automated Testing 2.8.1 Automated testing arrangements that provide equivalent means of testing devices to those specified in Table 4.3.2 at a frequency at least equivalent to those specified in requirements of this chapter. 2.8.2 Failure of a device on an automated test shall result in an audible and visual trouble signal. 2.9 Performance- Based Inspection & Testing As an alternate means of compliance, subject to the authority having jurisdiction, components and systems shall be permitted to be inspected and tested under a performance-based program. 2.10 Test Plan 2.10.1 A test plan shall be written to clearly establish the scope of the testing for the fire alarm or signaling system. 2.10.2 The test plan and results shall be documented with the testing records. 3 Inspection 3.1 Unless otherwise permitted by 3.2, visual inspections shall be performed in accordance with the schedules in Table 3.1 or more often if required by the authority having jurisdiction. 4.3.3 Video image smoke and flame detectors shall be in spected, tested, and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Table 3.1 Visual Inspection Initial Periodic Component Acceptance Frequency Method 1. All equipment X Annually Ensure there are no 3.4 changes that affect equipment performance. Inspect for building modifications, occupancy changes, changes in environmental conditions, device location, physical obstructions, device orientation, physical damage, and degree of cleanliness. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 3.1 Visual Inspection (cont) 2. Control equipment (a) Fire alarm systems monitored Verify a system normal for alarm, supervisory, and condition. trouble signals. (1) Fuses X Annually (2) Interfaced equipment X Annually (3) Lamps and LEDs X Annually (4) Primary (main) power supply X Annually (5) Trouble signals X Semiannually (b) Fire alarm systems Verify a system normal unmonitored for alarm, supervisory, condition. and trouble signals (1) Fuses X Weekly (2) Interfaced equipment X Weekly (3) Lamps and LEDs X Weekly (4) Primary (main) power supply X Weekly (5) Trouble signals X Weekly 3. Reserved 4. Supervising station alarm systems - Verify location, physical transmitters condition, and a system (a) Digital alarm communicator normal condition. transmitter (DACT) X Annually (b) Digital alarm radio transmitter (DART X Annually (c ) McCulloh X Annually (d) Radio alarm transmitter (RAT) X Annually (e) All other types of communications X Annually 5. In-building fire emergency voice / alarm communications equipment X Semiannually Verify location and condition 6. Reserved 7. Reserved 8. Reserved 9. Batteries Inspect for corrosion or 10.6.10 leakage. Verify tightness marking of the month/year of manufacture (all types). (a) Lead-acid X Monthly Visually inspect electrolyte level. (b) Nickel-cadmium X Semiannually (c ) Primary (dry cell)X Monthly (d) Sealed lead-acid X Semiannually 10. Reserved 11. Remote annunciators X Semiannually Verify location and condition. 12. Notification appliance circuit Verify proper fuse 10.6 power extenders X Annuallyratings, if any. Verify that lamps and LEDs indicate normal operating status of the equipment. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 3.1 Visual Inspection (cont) 13. Remote power supplies X Annually Verify proper fuse 10.6 ratings, if any. Verify that lamps and LEDs indicate normal operating status of the equipment. 14. Transient suppressors X Semiannually Verify location and condition. 15. Reserved 16. Fiber-optic cable connections X Annually Verify location and condition. 17. Initiating devices Verify location and condition (all devices). (a) Air sampling (1) General X Semiannually Verify that in-line filters, 17.7.3.6 if any, are clean. (2) Sampling system piping Verify that sampling 17.7.3.6 and sampling ports X system piping and fittings are installed properly, appear airtight, and are permanently fixed. Confirm that sampling pipe is conspicuously identified. Verify that sample ports or points are not obstructed. (b) Duct detectors (1) General X Semiannually Verify that detector is 17.7.5.5 rigidly mounted. Confirm that no penetrations in a return air duct exist in the vicinity of the detector. Confirm the detector installed so as to sample the airstream at the proper location in the duct. (2) Sampling tube X Verify proper orien- 17.7.5.5 tation. Confirm the sampling tube protrudes into the duct in accordance with system design. ( c) Electromechanical releasing X Semiannually devices (d) Fire extinguishing system(s) or suppression system(s) switches X Semiannually (e) Manual fire alarm boxes X Semiannually (f) Heat detectors X Semiannually (g) Radiant energy fire detectors X Quarterly Verify no point requiring 17.8 detection is obstructed or outside the detector's field of view. (h) Video image smoke and X Quarterly Verify no point requiring 17.7.7; fire detectors detection is obstructed 17.11.5 or outside the detector's (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 3.1 Visual Inspection (cont) (i) Smoke detectors (excluding X Semiannually one- and two-family dwellings) (j) Projected beam smoke detectors X Semiannually Verify beam path is unobstructed. (k) Supervisory signal devices X Quarterly (l) Waterflow devices X Quarterly 18. Reserved 19. Combination systems Verify location and condition (all types). (a) Fire extinguisher electronic X Semiannually monitoring device / systems (b) Carbon monoxide X Semiannually detectors / systems 20. Fire alarm control interface X Semiannually Verify location and and emergency control function condition. interface 21. Guard's tour equipment X Semiannually Verify location and condition. 22. Notification appliances Verify location and condition (all appliances). (a) Audible appliances X Semiannually (b) Audible textual notification X Semiannually appliances (c ) Visible appliances (1) General X Semiannually 18.5.5 (2) Candela rating X Verify that the candela 18.5.5 rating marking agrees with approved drawings. 23. Exit marking audible X Semiannually Verify location and notification appliances condition. 24. Reserved 25. Area of refuge two-way X Annually Verify location and communication system condition 26. Reserved 27. Supervising station alarm systems - receivers (a) Signal receipt X Daily Verify receipt of signal. (b) Receivers X Annually Verify location and normal condition. 28. Public emergency alarm Verify location and reporting system transmission condition. equipment (a) Publicly accessible alarm box X Semiannually (b) Auxiliary box X Annually (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 3.1 Visual Inspection (cont) (c ) Mater box (1) Manual operation X Semiannually (2) Auxiliary operation X Annually 29. Reserved 30. Mass notification system (a) Monitored for integrity Verify a system normal condition. (1) Control equipment (i) Fuses X Annually (ii) Interfaces X Annually (iii) Lamps / LED X Annually (iv) Primary (main) power supply X Annually (2) Secondary power batteries X Annually (3) Initiating devices X Annually (4) Notification appliances X Annually (b) Not monitored for integrity; Verify a system normal installed prior to adoption of condition. the 2010 edition (1) Control equipment (I) Fuses X Semiannually (ii) Interfaces X Semiannually (iii) Lamps / LED X Semiannually (iv) Primary (main) power supply X Semiannually (2) Secondary power batteries X Semiannually (3) Initiating devices X Semiannually (4) Notification appliances X Semiannually (c ) Antenna X Annually Verify location and condition. (d) Transceivers X Annually Verify location and condition. 3.2 Devices or equipment that is inaccessible for safety considerations (e.g., continuous process operations, energized electrical equipment, radiation, and excessive height) shall be permitted to be inspected during scheduled shutdowns if approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 3.3 Extended intervals shall not exceed 18 months. 3.4 The visual inspection shall be made to ensure that there are no changes that affect equipment performance. 4 Testing 4.1 Initial Acceptance Testing 4.1.1 All new systems shall be inspected and tested in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 14. 4.1.2 The authority having jurisdiction shall be notified prior to the initial acceptance test. 4.2 Reacceptance Testing 4.2.1 When an initiating device, notification appliance, or control relay is added, it shall be functionally tested. 4.2.2 When an initiating device, notification appliance, or control relay is deleted, another device, notification appliance, or control relay on the circuit shall be operated. 4.2.3 When modifications or repairs to control equipment hardware are made, the control equipment shall be tested in accordance with Table 4.3.2, items 1 (a) and 1 (d). (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 3.1 Visual Inspection (cont) 4.2.4 When changes are made to site-specific software, the following shall apply: (1) All functions known to be affected by the change, or identified by a means that indicates changes, shall be 100 percent tested. (2) In addition, 10 percent of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, also shall be tested and correct system operation shall be verified. (3) A revised record of completion in accordance with 7.5.6 (NFPA72, 2013) shall be prepared to reflect these changes. 4.2.5 Changes to the system executive software shall require a 10 percent functional test of the system, including a test of at least one device on each input and output circuit to verify critical system functions such as notification appliances, control functions, and off-premises reporting. 4.3 Test Methods 4.3.1 At the request of the authority having jurisdiction, the central station facility installation shall be inspected for complete information regarding the central station system, including specifications, wiring diagrams, and floor plans that have been submitted for approval prior to installation of equipment and wiring. 4.3.2 Systems and associated equipment shall be tested according to Table 4.3.2. Table 4.3.2 Testing Initial Periodic Component Acceptance Frequency Method 1. All equipment X See Table 3.1 2. Control equipment and transponder (a) Functions X Annually Verify correct receipt of alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals (inputs); operation of evacuation signals and auxiliary functions (outputs); circuit supervision, including detection of open circuits and ground faults; and power supply supervision for detection of loss of ac power and disconnection of secondary batteries. (b) Fuses X Annually Verify rating and supervision. (c ) Interfaced equipment X Annually Verify integrity of single or multiple circuits providing interface between two or more control units. Test interfaced equipment connections by operating or simulating operation of the equipment being supervised. Verify signals required to be transmitted at the control unit. (d) Lamps and LEDs X Annually Illuminate lamps and LEDs. (e) Primary (main) power supply X Annually Disconnect and test all secondary (standby) power under maximum load, including all alarm appliances requiring simultaneous operation. Reconnect all secondary (standby) power at end of test. Test redundant power supplies separately. 3. Fire alarm control unit trouble signals (a) Audible and visual X Annually Verify operation of control unit trouble signals. Verify ring-back feature for systems using a trouble- silencing switch that requires resetting. (b) Disconnect switches X Annually If control unit has disconnect or isolating switches, verify performance of supervised function of each switch. Verify receipt of trouble signal when a supervised function is disconnected. (c ) Ground-fault monitoring circuit X Annually If the system has a ground detection feature, verify the occurrence of ground-fault indication whenever any installation conductor is grounded. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) (d) Transmission of signals to X Annually Actuate a supervisory device and verify receipt of a off-premises location alarm signal at the off-premises location. Create a trouble condition and verify receipt of a trouble signal at the off-premises location. Actuate a supervisory device and verify receipt of a supervisory signal at the off-premises location. If a transmission carrier is capable of operation under a single- or multiple-fault condition, activate an initiating device during such fault condition and verify receipt of an alarm signal and a trouble signal at the off-premises location. 4. Supervising station alarm systems - transmission equipment (a) All equipment X Annually a)Test all system functions in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's published instructions for correct operation in conformance with the applicable sections of Chapter 26. Except for DACT, actuate initiating device and verify receipt of the correct initiating device signal at the supervising station within 90 seconds. Upon completion of the test, restore the system to its functional operating condition. If test jacks are used, conduct the first and last tests without the use of the test jack. (b) Digital alarm communicator X Annually Except for DACTs installed prior to adoption of the 2013 transmitter (DACT) edition of NFPA 72 that are connected to a telephone line (number) that is also supervised for adverse conditions by a derived local channel, ensure connection of the DACT to two separate means of transmission. Test DACT for line seizure capability by initiating a signal while using the telephone line (primary line for DACTs using two telephone lines) for a telephone call. Ensure that the call is interrupted and that the communicator connects to the digital alarm receiver. Verify receipt of the correct signal at the supervising station. Verify each transmission attempt is com- pleted within 90 seconds from going off-hook to on- hook. Disconnect the telephone line (primary line for DACTs using two telephone lines) from the DACT. Verify indication of the DACT trouble signal occurs at the premises fire alarm control unit within 4 minutes of the detection of the fault. Verify receipt of the telephone line trouble signal at the supervising station. Restore the telephone line (primary line of DACTs using two telephone lines), reset the fire alarm control unit, and verify that the telephone line fault trouble signal returns to normal. Verify that the supervising station receives the restoral signal from the DACT. Disconnect the secondary means of transmission from the DACT. Verify indication of the DACT trouble signal occurs at the premises fire alarm control unit within 4 minutes of detection of fault. Verify receipt of the secondary means trouble signal at the super- vising station. Restore the secondary means of transmission, reset the fire alarm control unit, and verify that the trouble signal returns to normal. Verify that the supervising station receives the restoral signal (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) to complete the transmission to the DACR. (c ) Digital alarm radio X Annually Disconnect the primary telephone line. Verify transmitter (DART) transmission of a trouble signal to the supervising station by the DART occurs within 4 minutes. (d) McCulloh transmitter X Annually Actuate initiating device. Verify production of not less than three complete rounds of not less than three signal impulses each by the McCulloh transmitter. If end-to-end metallic continuity is present and with a balanced circuit, cause each of the following four transmission channel fault conditions in turn, and verify receipt of correct signals at the supervising station: (1) Open (2) Ground (3) Wire-to-wire short (4) Open and ground If end-to-end metallic continuity is not present and with a properly balanced circuit, cause each of the following three transmission channel fault conditions in turn, and verify receipt of correct signals at the supervising station: (1) Open (2) Ground (3) Wire-to-wire short (e) Radio alarm transmitter X Annually Cause a fault between elements of the transmitting equipment. Verify indication of the fault at the pro- tected premises, or transmission of trouble signal to the supervising station. (f) Performance-based technologies X Annually Perform tests to ensure the monitoring of integrity of the transmission technology and technology path. Where a single communications path is used, dis- connect the communication path. Manually initiate an alarm signal transmission or allow the check-in (handshake) signal to be transmitted automatically. b)Verify the premises unit annunciates the failure within 200 seconds of the transmission failure. Restore the communication path. Where multiple communication paths are used, dis- connect both communication paths. Manually initiate an alarm signal transmission. Verify the premises control unit annunciates the failure within 200 seconds of the transmission failure. Restore both communication paths. 5. Emergency communications equipment (a) Amplifier / tone generators X Annually Verify correct switching and operation of backup equipment. (b) Call-in signal silence X Annually Operate/function and verify receipt of correct visual and audible signals at control unit. (c ) Off-hook indicator (ring down) X Annually Install phone set or remove phone from hook and verify receipt of signal at control unit. (d) Phone jacks X Annually Visually inspect phone jack and initiate communications path through jack. (e) Phone set X Annually Activate each phone set and verify correct operation. (f) System performance X Annually Operate the system with a minimum of any five handsets simultaneously. Verify voice quality and clarity. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) 6. Engine-driven generator X Monthly If an engine-driven generator dedicated to the system is used as a required power source, verify operation of the generator in accordance with NFPA 110, Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems, by the building owner. 7. Secondary (standby) power supply c)X Annually Disconnect all primary (main) power supplies and verify the occurrence of required trouble indication for loss of primary power. Measure or verify the system's standby and alarm current demand and verify the ability of batteries to meet standby and alarm requirements using manufacturer's data. Operate general alarm systems a minimum of 5 minutes and emergency voice communications systems for a minimum of 15 minutes. Reconnect primary (main) power supply at end of test. 8. Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) X Annually If a UPS system dedicated to the system is used as a required power source, verify by the building owner operation of the UPS system in accordance with NFPA 111, Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power Systems. 9. Battery tests Prior to conducting any battery testing, verify by the person conducting the test, that all system software stored in volatile memory is protected from loss. (a) Lead-acid type (1) Battery replacement X Annually Replace batteries in accordance with the recommen- dations of the alarm equipment manufacturer or when the recharged battery voltage or current falls below the manufacturer's recommendation. (2) Charger test d)X Annually With the batteries fully charged and connected to the charger, measure the voltage across the batteries with a voltmeter. Verify the voltage is 2.30 volts per cell +/- 0.02 volts at 77 degree F (25 deg C) or as specified by the equipment manufacturer. (3) Discharge test X Annually With the battery charger disconnected, load test the batteries following the manufacturer's recommen- dations. Verify the voltage level does not fall below the levels specified. Load testing can be by means of an artificial load equal to the full fire alarm load connected to the battery. (4) Load voltage test X Semiannually With the battery charger disconnected, load test the batteries following the manufacturer's recommen- dations. Verify the voltage level does not fall below the levels specified. Load testing can be by means of an artificial load equal to the full fire alarm load connected to the battery. Verify the battery does not fall below 2.05 volts per cell under load. (5) Specific gravity X Semiannually Measure is required the specific gravity of the liquid in the pilot cell or all of the cells. Verify the specific gravity is within the range specified by the manufac- turer. Although the specific gravity varies from manufacturer to manufacturer, a range of 1.205 - 1.220 is typical for regular lead-acid batteries, while 1.240 - 1.260 is typical for high-performance batteries. Do not use a hydrometer that shows only a pass or fail condition of the battery and does not indicate the (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) (5) Specific gravity (cont) specific gravity, because such a reading does not give a true indication of the battery condition. (b) Nickel-cadmium type (1) Battery replacement X Annually Replace batteries in accordance with the recommen- dations of the alarm equipment manufacturer or when the recharged battery voltage or current falls below the manufacturer's recommendations. (2) Charger test X Annually With the batteries fully charged and connected to the charger, place an amperemeter in series with the battery under charge. Verify the charging current is in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation, use 1/30 to 1/25 of the battery rating. (3) Discharge test X Annually With the battery charger disconnected, load test the batteries following the manufacturer's recommen- dations. Verify the voltage level does not fall below the levels specified. Load testing can be by means of an artificial load equal to the full fire alarm load connected to the battery. (4) Load voltage test X Annually With the battery charger disconnected, load test the batteries following the manufacture's recommendations. Verify the voltage level does not fall below the levels specified. Load testing can be by means of an artificial load equal to the full fire alarm load connected to the battery. Verify the float voltage for the entire battery is 1.42 volts per cell, nominal, under load. If possible, measure cells individually. (c ) Sealed lead-acid type (1) Battery replacement X Annually Replace batteries in accordance with the recommen- dations of the alarm equipment manufacturer or when the recharged battery voltage or current falls below the manufacturer's recommendations. (2) Charger test X Annually With the batteries fully charged and connected to the charger, measure the voltage across the batteries with a voltmeter. Verify the voltage is 2.30 volts per cell +/-0.02 volts at 77 degree F (25 deg C) or as specified by the manufacturer. (3) Discharge test X Annually With the battery charger disconnected, load test the batteries following the manufacturer's recommendations. Verify the voltage level does not fall below the levels specified. Load testing can be by means of an artificial load equal to the full fire alarm load connected to the battery. (4) Load voltage test X Semiannually Verify the battery performs under load, in accordance with the battery manufacturer's specifications. 10. Public emergency alarm reporting system - wired system X Daily Manual tests of the power supply for public reporting circuits shall be made and recorded at least once during each 24-hour period. Such tests shall include the following: (1) Current strength of each circuit. Changes in current of any circuit exceeding 10 percent shall be investigated immediately. (2) Voltage across terminals of each circuit inside of terminals of protective devices. Changes in voltage of any circuit exceeding 10 percent shall be investigated immediately. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) (3) e) Voltage between ground and circuits. If this test shows a reading in excess of 50 percent of that shown in the test specified in (2), the trouble shall be immedi- ately located and cleared. Readings in excess of 25 percent shall be given early attention. These readings shall be taken with a calibrated voltmeter of not more than 100 ohms resistance per volt. Systems in which each circuit is supplied by an independent current source (Forms 3 and 4) require tests between ground and each side of each circuit. Common current source systems (Form 2) require voltage tests between ground and each terminal of each battery and other current source. (4) Ground current reading shall be permitted in lieu of (3). If this method of testing is used, all grounds showing a current reading in excess of 5 percent of the supplied line current shall be given immediate attention. (5) Voltage across terminals of common battery on switchboard side of fuses. (6) Voltage between common battery terminals and ground. Abnormal ground readings shall be investigated immediately. Tests specified in (5) and (6) shall apply only to those systems using a common battery. If more than one common battery is used, each common battery shall be tested. 11. Remote annunciators X Annually Verify the correct operation and identification of annunciators. If provided, verify the correct operation of annunciator under a fault condition. 12. Reserved 13. Reserved 14. Reserved 15. Conductors - metallic (a) Stray voltage X N/A Test all installation conductors with a volt / ohmmeter to verify that there are no stray (unwanted) voltages between installation conductors or between installation conductors and ground. Verify the maximum allowable stray voltage does not exceed 1 volt ac/dc, unless a different threshold is specified in the published manu- facturer's instructions for the installed equipment. (b) Ground faults X N/A Test all installation conductors, other than those inten- tionally and permanently grounded, for isolation from ground per the installed equipment manufacturer's published manufacturer's instructions. (c ) Short-circuit faults X N/A Test all installation conductors, other than those inten- tionally connected together, for conductor-to-conductor isolation per the published manufacturer's instructions for the installed equipment. Also test these same c circuits conductor-to-ground. (d) Loop resistance X N/A With each initiating and indicating circuit installation conductor pair short-circuited at the far end, measure and record the resistance of each circuit. Verify that the loop resistance does not exceed the limits specified in (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) (e) Circuit integrity X N/A For initial and reacceptance testing, confirm the intro- duction of a fault in any circuit monitored for integrity results in a trouble indication at the fire alarm control unit. Open one connection at not less than 10 percent of the initiating devices, notification appliances and controlled devices on every initiating device circuit, notification appliance circuit, and signaling line circuit. Confirm all circuits perform as indicated in Sections 23.5, 23.6 and 23.7 (NFPA72, 2013). N/A Annually For periodic testing, test each initiating device circuit, notification appliance circuit, and signaling line circuit for correct indication at the control unit. Confirm all circuits perform as indicated in Sections 23.5, 23.6 & 23.7 (NFPA72, 2013). 17. Initiating devices f) (a) Electromechanical releasing device (1) Nonrestorable-type link X Annually Verify correct operation by removal of the fusible link and operation of the associated device. Lubricate any moving parts as necessary. (2) Restorable-type link g)X Annually Verify correct operation by removal of the fusible link and operation of the associated device. Lubricate any moving parts as necessary. (b) Fire extinguishing system(s) X Annually Operate the switch mechanically or electrically and or suppression system(s) verify receipt of signal by the fire alarm control unit. alarm switch (c ) Fire-gas and other detectors X Annually Test fire-gas detectors and other fire detectors as prescribed by the manufacturer and as necessary for the application. (d) Heat detectors (1) Fixed-temperature, rate-of-rise, X Annually Perform heat test with a listed and labeled heat source rate-of-compensation, restorable (see 4.4.5) or in accordance with the manufacturer's published line, spot type (excluding instructions. Assure that the test method for the pneumatic tube type) installed equipment does not damage the nonrestorable fixed-temperature element of a combination rate-of-rise / fixed-temperature element detector. (2) Fixed-temperature, X Annually Do not perform heat test. Test functionality mechan- nonrestorable line type ically and eclectically. Measure and record loop resis- tance. Investigate changes from acceptance test. (3) Fixed-temperature, X See Method After 15 years from initial installation, replace all devices nonrestorable spot type or have 2 detectors per 100 laboratory tested. Replace the 2 detectors with new devices. If a failure occurs on any of the detectors removed, remove and test additional detectors to determine either a general problem involving faulty detectors or a localized problem involving 1 or 2 defective detectors. If detectors are tested instead of replaced, repeat tests at intervals of 5 years. (4) Nonrestorable (general) X Annually Do not perform heat tests. Test functionality mechanically and electrically. (5) Restorable line type, X Annually Perform heat tests (where test chambers are in circuit), pneumatic tube only with a listed and labeled heat source or in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions of the detector or conduct a test with pressure pump. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) (6) Single- and multiple- X Annually Conduct functional tests according to manufacturer's station heat alarms published instructions. Do not test nonrestorable heat detectors with heat. (e) Manual fire alarm boxes X Annually Operate manual fire alarm boxes per the manufacturer's published instructions. Test both key-operated pre- signal and general alarm manual fire alarm boxes. (f) Radiant energy fire detectors X Semiannually Test flame detectors and spark/ember detectors in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions to determine that each detector's operative. Determine flame detector and spark/ember detector sensitivity using any of the following: (1) Calibrated test method (2) Manufacturer's calibrated sensitivity test instrument (3) Listed control unit arranged for the purpose. (4) Other approved calibrated sensitivity test method that is directly proportional to the input signal from a fire, consistent with the detector listing or approval. If designed to be field adjustable, replace detectors found to be outside of the approved range. Do not determine flame detector and spark/ember detector sensitivity using a light source that administers an unmeasured quantity of radiation at an undefined distance from the detector. (g) Smoke detectors - functional test (1) In other than one- and two- X Annually h) Test smoke detectors in place to ensure smoke entry family dwellings, system into the sensing chamber and an alarm response. Use detectors smoke or a listed and labeled product acceptable to the manufacturer or in accordance with their published instructions. Other methods listed in the manufacturer's published instructions that ensure smoke entry from the protected area, through the vents, into the sensing chamber can be used. (2) Single- and multiple- station X Annually Perform a functional test on all single- and multiple- smoke alarms connected to station smoke alarms connected to a protected protected premises systems premises fire alarm system by putting the smoke alarm into an alarm condition and verifying that the protected premises system receives a supervisory signal and does not cause a fire alarm signal. (3) System smoke detectors X Annually Conduct functional tests according to manufacturer's used in one- and two- published instructions. family dwellings (4) Air sampling X Annually Test with smoke or a listed and labeled product accept- able to the manufacturer or in accordance with their published instructions.Test from the end sampling port or point on each pipe run. Verify airflow through all other ports or points. (5) Duct type X Annually In addition to the testing required in Table 4.3.2(g)(1) and Table 4.3.2(h), test duct smoke detectors that use sampling tubes to ensure that they will properly sample the airstream in the duct using a method acceptable to the manufacturer or in accordance with their published instructions. (6) Projected beam type X Annually Test the detector by introducing smoke, other aerosol, or an optical filter into the beam path. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) (7) Smoke detector with X Annually Operate both portions of the detector independently as built-in thermal element described for the respective devices. (8) Smoke detectors with control X Annually Verify that the control capability remains operable even output functions if all of the initiating devices connected to the same initiating device circuit or signaling line circuit are in an alarm state. (h) Smoke detectors - sensitivity testing In other than one- and two- family N/A See 4.4.3 i) Perform any of the following tests to ensure that each dwellings, system detectors smoke detector is within its listed and marked sensitivity range: (1) Calibrated test method (2) Manufacturer's calibrated sensitivity test instrument (3) Listed control equipment arranged for the purpose (4) Smoke detector/control unit arrangement whereby the detector causes a signal at the control unit when its sensitivity is outside its listed sensitivity range (5) Other calibrated sensitivity test method approved by the authority having jurisdiction (i) Carbon monoxide detectors / X Annually Test the devices in place to ensure CO entry to the carbon monoxide alarms for sensing chamber by introduction through the vents, to the purposes of fire detection the sensing chamber of listed and labeled product acceptable to the manufacturer or in accordance with (j) Initiating devices, supervisory (1) Control valve switch X Annually Operate valve and verify signal receipt to be within the first two revolutions of the handwheel or within one-fifth of the travel distance, or per the manufacturer's pub- lished instructions. (2) High- or low-air pressure switch X Annually Operate switch and verify receipt of signal is obtained where the required pressure is increased or decreased a maximum 10 psi (70 kPa) from the required pressure level. (3) Room temperature switch X Annually Operate switch and verify receipt of signal to indicate the decrease in room temperature to 40 degree F (4.4deg C) and its restoration to above 40 degree F (4.4deg C). (4) Water level switch X Annually Operate switch and verify receipt of signal indicating the water level raised or lowered a maximum 3 in. (70 mm) from the required level within a pressure tank, or a maximum 3 in. (70 mm) from the required level of a nonpressure tank. Also verify its restoral to required level. (5) Water temperature switch X Annually Operate switch and verify receipt of signal to indicate the decrease in water temperature to 40 degree F (4.4 deg C) and its restoration to above 50 degree F (4.4 deg C). (k) Mechanical, electrosonic, or X Semiannually Water shall be flowed through an inspector's test con- pressure-type waterflow device nection indicating the flow of water equal to that from a single sprinkler of the smallest orifice size installed in the system for wet-pipe systems, or an alarm test bypass connection for dry-pipe, pre-action, or deluge systems in accordance with NFPA 25, Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. (i) Multi-sensor fire detector or X Annually Test each of the detection principles present within the multi-criteria fire detector or detector (e.g., smoke/heat/CO, etc.) independently for combination fire detector the specific detection principle, regardless of the config- uration status at the time of testing. Also test each de- tector in accordance with the published manufacturer's instructions. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) Test individual sensors together if the technology allows individual sensor responses to be verified. Perform tests as described for the respective devices by introduction of the physical phenomena to the sensing chamber of element, and an electronic check (magnets, analogue values, etc.) is not sufficient to comply with this requirement. Confirm the result of each sensor test through indication at the detector or control unit. Where individual sensors cannot be tested individually, test the primary sensor.J) Record all tests and results. 18. Special hazard equipment X Annually Operate abort switch and verify correct sequence and (a) Abort switch (dead-man type) operation. (b) Abort switch (recycle type) X Annually Operate above switch and verify development of correct matrix and each sensor operated. (c ) Abort switch (special type) X Annually Operate above switch and verify correct sequence and operation in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. Observe sequencing as specified on as-built drawings or in system owner's manual. (d) Cross-zone detection circuit X Annually Operate on sensor or detector on each zone. Verify occurrence of correct sequence with operation of first zone and then with operation of second zone. (e) Matrix-type circuit X Annually Operate all sensors in system. Verify development of correct matrix with each sensor operated. (f) Release solenoid circuit k)X Annually Verify operation of solenoid. (g) Squibb release circuit X Annually Use AGI flashbulb or other test light approved by the manufacturer. Verify operation of flashbulb or light. (i) All above devices or circuits X Annually Verify supervision of circuits by creating an open circuit. or combinations thereof 19. Combination systems (a) Fire extinguisher electronic X Annually Test communication between the device connecting the monitoring device / system fire extinguisher electronic monitoring device/system and the fire alarm control unit to ensure proper signals are received at the fire alarm control unit and remote annunciator(s) if applicable. (b) Carbon monoxide l) X Annually Test communication between the device connecting the device / system carbon monoxide device/system and the fire alarm control unit to ensure proper signals are received at the fire alarm control unit and remote annunciator(s) if applicable. 20. Interface equipment m)X See 4.4.4 Test interface equipment connections by operating or simulating the equipment being supervised. Verify signals required to be transmitted are received at the control unit. Test frequency for interface equipment is the same as the frequency required by the applicable NFPA standard(s) for the equipment being supervised. 21. Guard's tour equipment X Annually Test the device in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. 22. Alarm notification appliances (a) Audible n)X N/A For initial reacceptance testing, measure sound pressure levels for signals with a sound level meter meeting ANSI S1, 4a, Specifications for Sound Level Meters, Type 2 requirements. Measure sound pressure (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) levels throughout the protected area to confirm that they are in compliance with Chapter 18. Set the sound level meter in accordance with ANSI S3, 41, American National Standard Audible Evacuation Signal, using the time-weighted characteristic F (FAST). N/A Annually 0) For periodic testing, verify the operation of the notifi- cation appliances. (b) Audible textual X N/A For initial and reacceptance testing, measure sound notification appliances pressure levels for signals with a sound level meter (speakers and other appliances meeting ANSI S1, 4a, Specifications for Sound Level to convey voice messages) Meters, Type 2 requirements. Measure sound pressure levels throughout the protected area to confirm that they are in compliance with Chapter 18. Set the sound level meter in accordance with ANSI S3.41, American National Standard Audible Evacuation Signal, using the time-weighted characteristic F (FAST). Verif audible information to be distinguishable and under- standable and in compliance with 4.11. N/A Annually 0) For periodic testing, verify the operation of the notifi- cation appliances. (c ) Visible X N/A Perform initial and reacceptance testing in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Verify appliance locations to be per approved layout and con- firm that no floor plan changes affect the approved lay- out. Verify that the candela rating marking agrees with the approved drawing. Confirm that each appliance flashes. N/A Annually For periodic testing, verify that each appliance flashes. 23. Exit marking audible X Annually Perform tests in accordance with manufacturer's notification appliance published instructions. 24. Emergency control functions p)X Annually For initial, reacceptance, and periodic testing, verify emergency control function interface device activation. Where an emergency control function interface device is disabled or disconnected during initiating device testing, verify that the disabled or disconnected emer- gency control function interface device has been properly restored. 25. Area of refuge two-way X Annually At a minimum, test the two-way communication system communication system to verify operation and receipt of visual and audible signals at the transmitting and receiving unit respectively. Operate systems with more than five stations with a minimum of five stations operating simultaneously. Verify voice quality and clarity. 26. Special procedures (a) Alarm verification X Annually Verify time delay and alarm response for smoke detector circuits identified as having alarm verification. (b) Multiplex systems X Annually Verify communications between sending and receiving units under both primary and secondary power. Verify communications between sending and receiving units under open-circuit and short-circuit trouble conditions. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) Verify communications between sending and receiving units in all directions where multiple communications pathways are provided. If redundant central control equipment is provided, verify switchover and all required functions and operations of secondary control equipment. Verify all system functions and features in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 27. Supervising station alarm systems -- receiving equipment (a) All equipment X Monthly Perform tests on all system functions and features in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's published instructions for correct operation in conform- ance with the applicable sections of Chapter 26. Actuate initiating device and verify receipt of the correct initiating device signal at the supervising station within 90 seconds. Upon completion of the test, restore the system to its functional operating condition. If test jacks are used, perform the first and last tests without the use of the test jack. (b) Digital alarm X Monthly Disconnect each transmission means in turn from the communicator receiver (DACR) DACR, and verify audible and visual annunciation of a trouble signal in the supervising station. Cause a signal to be transmitted on each individual incoming DACR line (path) at least once every 6 hours (24 hours for DACTs installed prior to adoption of the 2013 edition of NFPA 72). Verify receipt of these signals. (c ) Digital alarm radio X Monthly Cause the following conditions of all DARRs on all receiver (DARR) subsidiary and repeater station receiving equipment. Verify receipt at the supervising station of correct signals for each of the radio equipment. (1) AC power failure of the radio equipment (2) Receiver malfunction (3) Antenna and terconnecting cable failure (4) Indication of automatic switchover of the DARR (5) Data transmission line failure between the DARR and the supervising or subsidiary station. (d) McCulloh systems X Monthly Test and record the current on each circuit at each supervising and subsidiary station under the following conditions: (1) During cunctional operation (2) On each side of the circuit with the receiving equip- ment conditioned for an open circuit Cause a single break or ground condition on each trans- mission channel. If such a fault prevents the functioning of the circuit, verify receipt of a trouble signal Cause each of the following conditions at each of the supervising or subsidiary stations and all repeater station radio transmitting and receiving equipment; verify receipt of correct signals at the supervising station: (1) RF transmitter in use (radiating) (2) AC power failure supplying the radio equipment (3) RF receiver malfunction (4) Indication of automatic switchover (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) (e) Radio alarm supervising station X Monthly Cause each of the following conditions at each of the receiver (RASSR) and radio supervising or subsidiary stations and all repeater alarm repeater station receiver station radio transmitting and receiving equipment; (RARSR) verify receipt of correct signals at the supervising station: (1) AC power failure supplying the radio equipment (2) RF receiver malfunction (3) Indication of automatic switchover, if applicable (f) Private microwave radio Cause each of the following conditions at each of the systems supervising or subsidiary stations and all repeater station radio transmitting and receiving equipment; verify receipt of correct signals at the supervising station: (1) RF transmitter in use (radiating) (2) AC power failure supplying the radio equipment (3) RF receiver malfunction (4) Indication of automatic switchover (g) Performance-based X Monthly Perform tests to ensure the monitoring of integrity of the technologies transmission technology and technology path. Where a single communications path is used, dis- connect the communication path. Verify that failure of the path is annunciated at the supervising station within 60 minutes of the failure (within 5 minutes for communication equipment installed prior to adoption of the 2013 edition of NFPA 72). Restore the communica- tion path. Where multiple communication paths are used, dis- connect both communication paths and confirm that failure of the path is annunciated at the supervising station within not more than 6 hours of the failure (within 24 hours for communication equipment installed prior to adoption of the 2013 edition of NFPA 72). Restore both communication paths. 28. Public emergency alarm reporting system transmission equipment (a) Publicly accessible alarm box X Semiannually Actuate publicly accessible initiating device(s) and verify receipt of not less than three complete rounds of signal impulses. Perform this test under normal circuit con- ditions. If the device is equipped for open circuit opera- tion (ground return), test in this condition as one of the semiannual tests. (b) Auxiliary box X Annually Test each initiating circuit of the auxiliary box by actuation of a protected premises initiating device con- nected to that circuit. Verify receipt of not less than three complete rounds of signal impulses. (c ) Master box (1) Manual operation X Semiannually Perform the tests prescribed for 28(a). (2) Auxiliary operation X Annually Perform the tests prescribed for 28(b). 29. Low-power radio X N/A The following procedures describe additional acceptance (wireless systems) and reacceptance test methods to verify wireless pro- tection system operation: (1) Use the manufacturer's published instructions and the as-built drawings provided by the system supplier to verify correct operation after the initial testing phase has (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) been performed by the supplier or by the supplier's designated representative. (2) Starting from the functional operating condition, initialize the system in accordance with the manufac- turer's published instructions. Confirm the alternative communications path exists between the wireless con- trol unit annunciation. Test the system for both alarm and trouble conditions. (3) Check batteries for all components in the system monthly unless the control unit checks all batteries and all components daily. 30. Mass notification systems (a) Functions X Annually At a minimum, test control equipment to verify correct receipt of alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals (inputs); operation of evacuation signals and auxiliary functions (outputs); circuit supervision, including detec- tion of open circuits and ground faults; and power supply supervision for detection of loss of ac power and disconnection of secondary batteries. (b) Fuses X Annually Verify the rating and supervision. (c ) Interfaced equipment X Annually Verify integrity of single or multiple circuits providing interface between two or more control units. Test interfaced equipment connection by operating or simu- lating operation of the equipment being supervised. Verify signals required be transmitted at the control unit. (d) Lamps and LEDs X Annually Illuminate lamps and LEDs. (e) Primary (main) power supply X Annually Disconnect all secondary (standby) power and test under maximum load, including all alarm appliances requiring simultaneous operation. Reconnect all secondary (standby) power at end of test. For redundant power supplies, test each separately. (f) Audible textual notification X Annually Measure sound pressure level with a sound level meter appliance (speakers and other meeting ANSI S1.4a, pecification for Sound Level appliances to convey voice Meters, Type 2 requirements. Measure and record messages) levels throughout protected area. Set the sound level meter in accordance with ANSI S3.41, American National Standard Audible Evacuation Signal, using the time-weighted characteristic F (FAST). Record the maximum output when the audible emergency evacua- tion signal is on. Verify audible information to be distinguishable and understandable. (g) Visible X Annually Perform test in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Verify appliance locations to be per approved layout and confirm that no floor plan changes affect the approved layout. Verify that the candela rating marking agrees with the approved drawing. Confirm that each appliance flashes. (h) Control unit functions and no X Annually Review event log file and verify that the correct events diagnostic failures are indicated were logged. Review system diagnostic log file; deficiencies noted in file. Delete unneeded log files. Delete unneeded error files. Verify that sufficient free disk space is available. Verify unobstructed flow of cooling air is available. Change/clean filters, cooling fans, and intake vents. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE Table 4.3.2 Testing (cont) (i) Control unit reset X Annually Power down the central control unit computer and restart it. (j) Control unit security X Annually If remote control software is loaded onto the system, verify that it is disabled to prevent unauthorized system access. (k) Audible / visible functional test X Annually Send out an alert to a diverse set of predesignated receiving devices and confirm receipt. Include at least one of each type of receiving device. (l) Software backup X Annually Make full system software backup. Rotate backups based on accepted practice at site. (m) Secondary power test X Annually Disconnect ac power. Verify the ac power failure alarm status on central control equipment. With ac power disconnected, verify battery voltage under load. (n) Wireless signals X Annually Check forward/reflected radio power is within specifi- cations. (o) Antenna X Annually Check forward/reflected radio power is within specifi- cations. Verify solid electrical connections with no observable corrosion. (p) Transceivers X Annually Verify proper operation and mounting is not compromised. a) Some transmission equipment (such as but not limited to cable modems, fiber-optic interface nodes, and FoIP interfaces) are typically powered by the building's electrical system using a standby power supply that does not meet the requirements of this Code. This is intended to ensure that the testing authority verifies full standby power as required by Chapter 10. Additionally, refer to Table 4.3.2, Items 7 through 9 for secondary power supply testing. b) The automatic transmission of the check-in (handshake) signal can take up to 60 minutes to occur. c ) See Table 4.3.2, Item 4(a) for the testing of transmission equipment. d) Example: 4000 mAh x 1/25 = 160 mA charging current at 77 degree F (25deg C). e) The voltmeter sensitivity has been changed from 1000 ohms per volt to 100 ohms per volt so that the false ground readings (caused by induced voltages) are minimized. f) Initiating devices such as smoke detectors used for elevator recall, closing dampers, or releasing doors held in the open position that are permitted by the Code (see NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 9.6.3) to initiate supervisory signals at the fire alarm control unit (FACU) should be tested at the same frequency (annual) as those devices when they are generating an alarm signal. They are not supervisory devices, but they initiate a supervisory signal at the FACU. g) Fusible thermal link detectors are commonly used to close fire doors and fire dampers. They are actuated by the presence of external heat, which causes a solder element in the link to fuse, or by an electric thermal device, which, when energized, generates heat within the body of the link, causing the link to fuse and separate. h) Note, it is customary for the manufacturer of the smoke detector to test a particular product from an aerosol provider to determine acceptability for use in smoke entry testing of their smoke detector/smoke alarm. Magnets are not acceptable for smoke entry tests. i) There are some detectors that use magnets as a manufactuerer's calibrated sensitivity test instrument. j) For example, it might not be possible to individually test the heat sensor in a thermally enhanced smoke detector. k) Manufacturer's instructions should be consulted to ensure a proper operational test. No suppression gas or agent is expected to be discharged during the test of the solenoid. See Test Plan of 2.10. l) Testing of CO device should be done to the requirements of NFPA 720, Standard for the Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection and Warning Equipment. m) A monitor module installed on an interface device is not considered a supervisory device and therefore not subject to the quarterly testing frequency requirement. Test frequencies for interface devices should be in accordance with the applicable standard. For example, fire pump controller alarms such as phase reversal are required to be tested annually. If a monitor module is installed to identify phase reversal on the fire alarm control panel, it is not necessary to test for phase reversal four times a year. n) Chapter 18 would require 15 dB over average ambient sound for public mode spaces. Sometimes the ambient sound levels are different from what the design was based upon. Private operating mode would require 10 dB ovr average ambient at the location of the device. o) Where building, system, or occupancy changes have been observed, the owner should be notified of the changes. New devices might need to be installed and tested per the initial acceptance testing criteria. p) See A.4.3.2, and Table 4.3.2, Item 24. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE 4.3.4 Gas detectors shall be inspected, tested, and maintained in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 4.4 Testing Frequency Unless otherwise permitted by other sections of this Code, testing shall be performed in accordance with the schedules in Table 4.3.2 or more often if required by the authority having jurisdiction. 4.4.1 Devices or equipment that are inaccessible for safety considerations (e.g., continuous process operations, energized electrical equipment, radiation, and excessive height) shall be permitted to be tested during scheduled shutdowns if approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Extended intervals shall not exceed 18 months. 4.4.2 If automatic testing is performed at least weekly by a remotely monitored fire alarm control unit specifically listed for the application, the manual testing frequency shall be permitted to be extended to annually. Table 4.3.2 shall apply. 4.4.3 In other than one- and two-family dwellings, sensitivity of smoke detectors shall be tested in accordance with 4.4.3.1 through 4.4.3.7. 4.4.3.1 Sensitivity shall be checked within 1 year after installation. 4.4.3.2 Sensitivity shall be checked every alternate year thereafter unless otherwise permitted by compliance with 4.4.3.3. 4.4.3.3.After the second required calibration test, if sensitivity tests indicate that the device has remained within its listed and marked sensitivity range (or 4 percent obscuration light gray smoke, if not marked), the length of time between calibration tests shall be permitted to be extended to a maximum of 5 years. 4.4.3.3.1 If the frequency is extended, records of nuisance alarms and subsequent trends of these alarms shall be maintained. 4.4.3.3.2 In zones or in areas where nuisance alarms show any increase over the previous year, calibration tests shall be performed. 4.4.3.4 To ensure that each smoke detector is within its listed and marked sensitivity range, it shall be tested using any of the following methods: (1) Calibrated test method (2) Manufacturer's calibrated sensitivity test instrument (3) Listed control equipment arranged for the purpose (4) Smoke detector/fire alarm control unit arrangement whereby the detector causes a signal at the fire alarm control unit where its sensitivity is outside its listed sensitivity range (5) Other calibrated sensitivity test methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction 4.4.3.5 Unless otherwise permitted by 4.4.3.6, smoke detectors found to have a sensitivity outside the listed and marked sensitivity range shall be cleaned and recalibrated or be replaced. 4.4.3.6 Smoke detectors listed as field adjustable shall be permitted to either be adjusted within the listed and marked sensitivity range, cleaned, and recalibrated, or be replaced. 4.4.3.7 The detector sensitivity shall not be tested or measured using any device that administers an unmeasured concentration of smoke or other aerosol into the detector or smoke alarm. 4.4.4 Test frequency of interfaced equipment shall be the same as specified by the applicable NFPA standards for the equipment being supervised. 4.4.5 Restorable fixed-temperature, spot-type heat detectors shall be tested in accordance with 4.4.5.1 through 4.4.5.4. 4.4.5.1 Two or more detectors shall be tested on each initiating circuit annually. 4.4.5.2 Different detectors shall be tested each year. 4.4.5.3 Test records shall be kept by the building owner specifying which detectors have been tested. 4.4.5.4 Within 5 years, each detector shall have been tested. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition NFPA 72, 2013 Edition, Chapter 14 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE 4.4.6 Circuit and pathway testing of each monitored circuit or pathway shall be conducted with initial acceptance or reacceptance testing to verify signals are indicated at the control unit for each of the abnormal conditions specified in Sections 23.5 through 23.7 (NFPA72, 2013). 4.7 Public Emergency Alarm Reporting Systems 4.7.1 Emergency power sources other than batteries shall be tested at least weekly in accordance with 4.7.1.1 and 4.7.1.2. 4.7.1.1 Testing shall include operation of the power source to supply the system for a continuous period of 1 hour. 4.7.1.2 Testing shall require simulated failure of the normal power source. 4.7.2 Unless otherwise permitted by 4.7.3, testing facilities shall be installed at the communications center and each subsidiary communications center, if used. 4.7.3 Testing facilities for systems leased from a nonmunicpal organization shall be permitted to be installed at locations other than the communications center if approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 4.8 In-Building Emergency Radio Communication Systems In-building emergency radio communication systems shall be inspected and operationally tested in accordance with the manufacturer's published requirements by the local fire department, the building owner, or a designated representative. 4.8.1 Signal Level Testing Signal level testing shall be conducted to verify the signal strengths as required in 24.5.2.3 (NFPA72, 2013) at the following times: (1) Initial assessment of radio coverage in accordance with 24.5.2.2.1 and 24.5.2.2.2 (NFPA72, 2013) for new or existing buildings. (2) After installation or modification of public safety radio enhancement system needed to ensure compliance with 24.5.2.2.3 (NFPA72, 2013). (3) On an annual basis or other interval as specified by the authority having jurisdiction. 4.8.2 System Commissioning Testing System commissioning tests shall comply with the following: (1) The building owner shall be responsible for ensuring that a commissioning test of the public safety radio enhancement system occurs prior to final acceptance testing with the authority having jurisdiction. (2) The commissioning test shall ensure that two-way coverage on each floor of the building meets the minimum coverage requirements of 24.5.2.2.1 and 24.5.2.2.2 (NFPA72, 2013). (3) Tests shall be made using the frequencies assigned to be the jurisdiction. (4) Testing shall be coordinated with the authority having jurisdiction to ensure no undue interference to any public safety operations. (5) All testing shall be done on frequencies authorized by the FCC> 4.8.3 Test Procedures The test plan shall ensure testing throughout the building. Test procedures shall be as directed by the authority having jurisdiction. (c) NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Quincy, MA, 2013 Edition SECTion 4 AS-builTS Division 01 – General – BAR Construction Company, Inc. 017700 BAR As-Builts A001 Cover Sheet A002 Building Code Summary A101 Reference Floor Plans A201 Enlarged Floor Plans and Sections M101 Mechanical Plans E101 Electrical Demolition Plans, Specifications & Symbols Legend E102 Electrical Renovation Plans E103 Power Risers & Details E104 Electrical Panel Schedules and Details E105 Fire Penetration and Fire Alarm Details E106 Telecommunications Plan P101 Plumbing Plans and Specifications P102 Plumbing Details 21048 Ground Rod Detail Division 14 – Conveying Equipment 142400 Hydraulic Elevators - Resolute Elevator (See O&M’s) Divisions 26 - Electrical 260000 Electrical Electrical Technologies, Inc. – Electrical As-builts: E101 Electrical Demolition Plans, Specifications & Symbols Legend E102 Electrical Renovation Plans E103 Power Risers & Details E104 Electrical Panel Schedules and Details E105 Fire Penetration and Fire Alarm Details E106 Telecommunications Plan Divisions 28 – Fire Alarm 283111 Fire Alarm BFPE - Fire Alarm As-builts: FA101 Elevator Lobby Layout FA201 Installation Notes FA202 Detailed Riser Project Number: Drawn: Checked: Date: In Association with Professional Seals Sheet Title Sheet Number Original drawing is 24 x36. Do not scale contents of this drawing. 19-112 RND Architects, PA 3608 University Drive, Suite 204 Durham, NC 27707 T 919.490.1266 www.RNDarchitects.com a r c h i t e c t s ED M O N D S O N E N G I N E E R S 19 2 0 H w y . 5 4 , S u i t e 7 0 0 , D u r h a m , N C 2 7 7 1 3 Ph . 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 1 9 3 6 · F a x 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 2 5 4 0 · L i c e n s e : C - 1 8 1 3 Revisions No.Date Description Key Plan These drawings and specifications are instruments of service and as such remain the property of the architect. Their use is restricted to the original site for which they were prepared and publication there- of is expressly limited to such use. Re-use, reproduction, or publication by any method, in whole or in part, is prohibited. ©RND Architects, PA.2019 UNC Cardinal Deck Elevator UNC-Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, NC Construction Documents P102 CTC 9-8-2021 LDH Plumbing Details S N IO L AOEF P R 028862 SEAL S N EEG E N I R LW ORC.TSEL R A H C N O R T H C AROLI N A MATERIALS AND LABOR BY MECH./PLUMBING CONTRACTOR MATERIALS AND LABOR BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR 2 P102 Motor/Equipment Installation - Division of Work Typical Wall Penetration Detail3 P102 1 P102 Elevator Sump Pump Detail 4 P102 Project Number: Drawn: Checked: Date: In Association with Professional Seals Sheet Title Sheet Number Original drawing is 24 x36. Do not scale contents of this drawing. 19-112 RND Architects, PA 3608 University Drive, Suite 204 Durham, NC 27707 T 919.490.1266 www.RNDarchitects.com a r c h i t e c t s 6-11-2021 ED M O N D S O N E N G I N E E R S 19 2 0 H w y . 5 4 , S u i t e 7 0 0 , D u r h a m , N C 2 7 7 1 3 Ph . 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 1 9 3 6 · F a x 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 2 5 4 0 · L i c e n s e : C - 1 8 1 3 Revisions No.Date Description Key Plan These drawings and specifications are instruments of service and as such remain the property of the architect. Their use is restricted to the original site for which they were prepared and publication there- of is expressly limited to such use. Re-use, reproduction, or publication by any method, in whole or in part, is prohibited. ©RND Architects, PA.2019 UNC Cardinal Deck Elevator UNC-Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, NC Construction Documents E101 JDH KFF Electrical Demolition Plans, Specifications & Symbols Legend 1 E101 Existing Elevator Machine Room & Electrical Room - Level 1 I N A A RO LTH ON R C SEYAHSINNED N H O J · · · · · · · · · · · LEVEL 1 0' - 0" Elevator Machine Room M M1 Electrical Room 1 Elevator Machine Room Elevator Lobby PARKING PA R K I N G Elevator 1 L M 5 M1 M2 4A' 4C' Electrical Room 2 K Project Number: Drawn: Checked: Date: In Association with Professional Seals Sheet Title Sheet Number Original drawing is 24 x36. Do not scale contents of this drawing. 19-112 RND Architects, PA 3608 University Drive, Suite 204 Durham, NC 27707 T 919.490.1266 www.RNDarchitects.com a r c h i t e c t s 6-11-2021 ED M O N D S O N E N G I N E E R S 19 2 0 H w y . 5 4 , S u i t e 7 0 0 , D u r h a m , N C 2 7 7 1 3 Ph . 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 1 9 3 6 · F a x 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 2 5 4 0 · L i c e n s e : C - 1 8 1 3 Revisions No.Date Description Key Plan These drawings and specifications are instruments of service and as such remain the property of the architect. Their use is restricted to the original site for which they were prepared and publication there- of is expressly limited to such use. Re-use, reproduction, or publication by any method, in whole or in part, is prohibited. ©RND Architects, PA.2019 UNC Cardinal Deck Elevator UNC-Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, NC Construction Documents E102 JDH KFF Electrical Renovation Plans 2 E102 Elevator & Lobby Level 2 1 E102 Elevator Machine Room & Electrical Room - Level 1 I N A A RO LTH ON R C SEYAHSINNED N H O J 3 E102 Elevator & Lobby Level 3 4 E102 Elevator & Lobby Level 4 Electrical Room 1 Elevator Machine Room Elevator Lobby PARKING PA R K I N G Elevator 1 L M 5 M1 M2 4A' 4C' Electrical Room 2 K Elevator Lobby Elevator 1 4C 4A' 4C' Elevator Lobby Elevator 1 4C 4A' 4C' Elevator Lobby Elevator 1 4C 4A' 4C' 5 E102 Elevator Sump Pump Detail 2,4,6 Project Number: Drawn: Checked: Date: In Association with Professional Seals Sheet Title Sheet Number Original drawing is 24 x36. Do not scale contents of this drawing. 19-112 RND Architects, PA 3608 University Drive, Suite 204 Durham, NC 27707 T 919.490.1266 www.RNDarchitects.com a r c h i t e c t s 6-11-2021 ED M O N D S O N E N G I N E E R S 19 2 0 H w y . 5 4 , S u i t e 7 0 0 , D u r h a m , N C 2 7 7 1 3 Ph . 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 1 9 3 6 · F a x 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 2 5 4 0 · L i c e n s e : C - 1 8 1 3 Revisions No. Date Description Key Plan These drawings and specifications are instruments of service and as such remain the property of the architect. Their use is restricted to the original site for which they were prepared and publication there- of is expressly limited to such use. Re-use, reproduction, or publication by any method, in whole or in part, is prohibited. © RND Architects, PA. 2019 UNC Cardinal Deck Elevator UNC-Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, NC Construction Documents E103 JDH KFF Power Risers & Details I N A A RO LTH ON R C SEYAHSINNED N H O J 2 E103 Renovation Power Riser ATS-1'P1''F''B''A' 'ELL''MDP''OSH' 'OSL' 'D' 1 E103 Demolition Power Riser ATS'P1''D''F''B''A' 3 E103 Trench Detail Underground Conduit Rise To Above Grade/ Floor4 E103 Project Number: Drawn: Checked: Date: In Association with Professional Seals Sheet Title Sheet Number Original drawing is 24 x36. Do not scale contents of this drawing. 19-112 RND Architects, PA 3608 University Drive, Suite 204 Durham, NC 27707 T 919.490.1266 www.RNDarchitects.com a r c h i t e c t s 6-11-2021 ED M O N D S O N E N G I N E E R S 19 2 0 H w y . 5 4 , S u i t e 7 0 0 , D u r h a m , N C 2 7 7 1 3 Ph . 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 1 9 3 6 · F a x 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 2 5 4 0 · L i c e n s e : C - 1 8 1 3 Revisions No.Date Description Key Plan These drawings and specifications are instruments of service and as such remain the property of the architect. Their use is restricted to the original site for which they were prepared and publication there- of is expressly limited to such use. Re-use, reproduction, or publication by any method, in whole or in part, is prohibited. ©RND Architects, PA.2019 UNC Cardinal Deck Elevator UNC-Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, NC Construction Documents E104 JDH KFF Electrical Panel Schedules & Details I N A A RO LTH ON R C SEYAHSINNED N H O J - - - - - - SPACE - - (On Exterior Wall) 200 10 10 30 2P 150 Panel ELL - - Site LT/Traffic Cnt Panel OSH Via ATS-OS Space Space 1500 - - Panel F Wire Trough Via ATS-1 200 1176Disc-Elev Sump Pump Holding Tank Alarms 3P - -Sump High Level Alarm 100 ELEV CTRL RM LTS 1000 1200 0 0 0 Spare Spare Spare Top Level Pole Lights Coke Machine 8333 - - Project Number: Drawn: Checked: Date: In Association with Professional Seals Sheet Title Sheet Number Original drawing is 24 x36. Do not scale contents of this drawing. 19-112 RND Architects, PA 3608 University Drive, Suite 204 Durham, NC 27707 T 919.490.1266 www.RNDarchitects.com a r c h i t e c t s 6-11-2021 ED M O N D S O N E N G I N E E R S 19 2 0 H w y . 5 4 , S u i t e 7 0 0 , D u r h a m , N C 2 7 7 1 3 Ph . 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 1 9 3 6 · F a x 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 2 5 4 0 · L i c e n s e : C - 1 8 1 3 Revisions No. Date Description Key Plan These drawings and specifications are instruments of service and as such remain the property of the architect. Their use is restricted to the original site for which they were prepared and publication there- of is expressly limited to such use. Re-use, reproduction, or publication by any method, in whole or in part, is prohibited. © RND Architects, PA. 2019 UNC Cardinal Deck Elevator UNC-Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, NC Construction Documents E105 JDH KFF Fire Penetration & Fire Alarm Details I N A A RO LTH ON R C SEYAHSINNED N H O J 1. Floor or Wall Assembly — Min 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) thick lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400 kg/m3) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Max diam of circular through opening is 32-1/2 in. (826 mm). See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers. 1A. Steel Sleeve — (Optional, not shown) — Nom 12 in. (305 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 40 (or heavier) steel pipe sleeve cast into concrete floor or wall. Sleeve to be flush with or project max 2 in. (51 mm) from top surface of floor or from both surfaces of wall. As an alternate, nom 12 in. (305 mm) diam (or smaller) sleeve fabricated from nom 0.019 in. (0.48 mm) thick galv steel cast or grouted into floor or wall assembly flush with floor or wall surfaces. 2. Through — Penetrant — One metallic pipe, conduit or tubing installed either concentrically or eccentrically within the firestop system. The annular space between pipe, conduit or tubing and periphery of opening shall be min of 0 in. (0 mm, point contact) to max 1-3/8 in. (35 mm). Pipe, conduit or tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. The following types and sizes of metallic pipes, conduits or tubing may be used: A. Steel Pipe — Nom 30 in. (762 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 10 (or heavier) steel pipe. A1. Iron Pipe — Nom 30 in. (762 mm) diam (or smaller) cast or ductile iron pipe. B. Conduit — Nom 6 in. (152 mm) diam (or smaller) rigid steel conduit. C. Conduit — Nom 4 in. (152 mm) diam (or smaller) steel electrical metallic tubing. 3. Packing Material — Polyethylene backer rod or nom 1 in. (25 mm) thickness of tightly-packed ceramic (alumina silica) fiber blanket, mineral wool batt or glass fiber insulation material used as a permanent form. Packing material to be recessed from top surface of floor or from both surfaces of solid concrete or concrete block wall as required to accommodate the required thickness of caulk fill material (Item 4). As an alternate when max pipe size is 10 in. (254 mm) diam and when max annular space is 1 in. (25 mm), a min 1 in. (25 mm) thickness of tightly-packed ceramic fiber blanket or mineral wool batt packing material may be recessed min 1/2 in. (13 mm) from bottom surface of floor or from either side of solid concrete wall. 4. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials* — Caulk — Applied to fill the annular space to the min thickness shown in the following table: Max Pipe Diam In. 10 (254) 10 (254) 30 (762) Max Annular Space In. Packing Mtl Type (a) Min Caulk Thkns In. 1 (25) BR, CF, GF or MW 1/2 (13) (b) 1 (25) CF or MW 1/2 (13) (c) 2-1/2 (64) BR, CF, GF or MW 1 (25) (b) (a) BR=Polyethylene backer rod. CF=Ceramic fiber blanket. GF=Glass fiber insulation. MW=Mineral-wool batt. (b) Caulk installed flush with top surface of floor or both surfaces of wall (c) Caulk installed flush with bottom surface of floor or one surface of solid (non-concrete block) wall 3M COMPANY — Type CP 25WB+ or FB-3000 WT (Note - W Rating applies only when FB-3000 WT is used on top surface of floor and when it laps onto concrete for sleeved opening.) * Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification (such as Canada), respectively. Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with permission from UL -© 2021 UL LLC System No. C-AJ-1001 March 05, 2007 F Rating – 3 Hr T Rating – 0 Hr W Rating – Class 1 (See Item 4) A A 4 2 3 4 1 System No. W-L-5001 May 19, 2005 F Ratings — 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1) T Ratings — 3/4, 1 and 1-1/2 Hr (See Item 3) L Rating At Ambient — 2 CFM/sq ft L Rating At 400 F — less than 1 CFM/sq ft 1. Wall Assembly — The 1 or 2 hr fire-rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials and in the manner described in the individual U300, U400 or V400 Series Wall or Partition Design in the UL Fire Resistance Directory and shall include the following construction features: A. Studs — Wall framing may consist of either wood studs or steel channel studs. Wood studs to consist of nom 2 by 4 in. (51 by 102 mm) lumber spaced 16 in. (406 mm) OC with nom 2 by 4 in. (51 by 102 mm) lumber end plates and cross braces. Steel studs to be min 3-5/8 in. (92 mm) wide by 1-3/8 in. (35 mm) deep channels spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC. B. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick, 4 ft (122 cm) wide with square or tapered edges. The gypsum board type, thickness, number of layers, fastener type and sheet orientation shall be as specified in the individual Design in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. Max diam of opening is 14-1/2 (368mm) in for wood stud walls and 18 in. (457 mm) for steel stud walls. The hourly F Rating of the firestop system is 1 hr when installed in a 1 hr fire rated wall and 2 hr when installed in a 2 hr fire rated wall. 2. Through Penetrants — One metallic pipe or tubing to be centered within the firestop system. Pipe or tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. The following types and sizes of metallic pipes or tubing may be used: A. Steel Pipe — Nom 12 in. (305 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 10 (or heavier) steel pipe. B. Copper Tubing — Nom 6 in. (152 mm) diam (or smaller) Type L (or heavier) copper tubing. C. Copper Pipe — Nom 6 in. (152 mm) diam (or smaller) Regular (or heavier) copper pipe. 3. Pipe Covering* — Nom 1 or 2 in. (25 or 51 mm) thick hollow cylindrical heavy density (min 3.5 pcf or 56 kg/m3) glass fiber units jacketed on the outside with an all service jacket. Longitudinal joints sealed with metal fasteners or factory-applied self-sealing lap tape. Transverse joints sealed with metal fasteners or with butt strip tape supplied with the product. When nom 1 in. (25 mm) thick pipe covering is used, the annular space between the pipe covering and the circular cutout in the gypsum wallboard layers on each side of the wall shall be min 1/4 in. (6 mm) to max 3/8 in. (10 mm) When nom 2 in. (51 mm) thick pipe covering is used, the annular space between the pipe covering and the circular cutout in the gypsum board layers on each side of the wall shall be min 1/2 in. (13 mm) to max 3/4 in. (19 mm) See Pipe and Equipment Covering Materials (BRGU) category in Building Materials Directory for names of manufacturers. Any pipe covering material meeting the above specifications and bearing the UL Classification Marking with a Flame Spread Index of 25 or less and a Smoke Developed Index of 50 or less may be used. The hourly T Rating of the firestop system is 3/4 hr when nom 1 in. (25 mm) thick pipe covering is used. The hourly T Rating of the firestop system is 1 hr and 1-1/2 hr when nom 2 in. (52 mm) thick pipe covering is used with 1 hr and 2 hr fire rated walls, respectively. 4. Firestop System — Installed symmetrically on both sides of wall assembly. The details of the firestop system shall be as follows: A. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials* — Wrap Strip — Nom 1/4 in. (6 mm) thick intumescent elastomeric material faced on one side with aluminum foil, supplied in 2 in. (51 mm) wide strips. Nom 2 in. (51 mm) wide strip tightly wrapped around pipe covering (foil side out) with seam butted. Wrap strip layer securely bound with steel wire or aluminum foil tape and slid into annular space approx 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) such that approx 3/4 in. (19 mm) of the wrap strip width protrudes from the wall surface. One layer of wrap strip is required when nom 1 in. (25 mm) thick pipe covering is used. Two layers of wrap strip are required when nom 2 in. (51 mm) thick pipe covering is used. 3M COMPANY — FS-195+ B. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials* — Caulk or Sealant — Min 1/4 in. (6 mm) diam continuous bead applied to the wrap strip/wall interface and to the exposed edge of the wrap strip layer approx 3/4 in. (19 mm) from the wall surface. 3M COMPANY — CP 25WB+, IC 15WB+, FireDam 150+ caulk or FB-3000 WT sealant * Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification (such as Canada), respectively. Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with permission from UL -© 2021 UL LLC 1 E105 Fire Alarm Riser 3 E105 Service Grounding & Bonding Detail MATERIALS AND LABOR BY MECHANICAL/PLUMBING CONTRACTOR MATERIALS AND LABOR BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR Motor / Equipment Installation - Division of Work2 E105 Project Number: Drawn: Checked: Date: In Association with Professional Seals Sheet Title Sheet Number Original drawing is 24 x36. Do not scale contents of this drawing. 19-112 RND Architects, PA 3608 University Drive, Suite 204 Durham, NC 27707 T 919.490.1266 www.RNDarchitects.com a r c h i t e c t s 6-11-2021 ED M O N D S O N E N G I N E E R S 19 2 0 H w y . 5 4 , S u i t e 7 0 0 , D u r h a m , N C 2 7 7 1 3 Ph . 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 1 9 3 6 · F a x 9 1 9 - 5 4 4 - 2 5 4 0 · L i c e n s e : C - 1 8 1 3 Revisions No.Date Description Key Plan These drawings and specifications are instruments of service and as such remain the property of the architect. Their use is restricted to the original site for which they were prepared and publication there- of is expressly limited to such use. Re-use, reproduction, or publication by any method, in whole or in part, is prohibited. ©RND Architects, PA.2019 UNC Cardinal Deck Elevator UNC-Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, NC Construction Documents E106 JDH KFF Telecommunications Plan I N A A RO LTH ON R C SEYAHSINNED N H O J 1 E106 Conduit Routing - Level 1 2 E106 Conduit Routing - Level 2 3 E106 Conduit Routing - Level 3 4 E106 I.T. CLOSET Enlarged Office Area Electrical Plan NOTES: See Enlarged View 4/E106 This Sheet 3 E106 Telecommunications Riser Elevator Lobby Elevator 1 L M 5 4C M1 M2 4A' 4C' Electrical Room 1 Elevator Machine Room Elevator Lobby PARKING PA R K I N G Elevator 1 L M 5 M1 M2 4A' 4C' Electrical Room 2 K Elevator Lobby Elevator 1 L M 5 4C M1 M2 4A' 4C' Elevator Lobby Elevator 1 L M 5 4C M1 M2 4A' 4C' Ph : 9 1 9 - 5 5 0 - 2 6 9 9 11 5 B E S T W O O D D R I V E CL A Y T O N , N C 2 7 5 2 0 We b : w w w . b f p e . c o m EXIT Ph : 9 1 9 - 5 5 0 - 2 6 9 9 11 5 B E S T W O O D D R I V E CL A Y T O N , N C 2 7 5 2 0 We b : w w w . b f p e . c o m Ph : 9 1 9 - 5 5 0 - 2 6 9 9 11 5 B E S T W O O D D R I V E CL A Y T O N , N C 2 7 5 2 0 We b : w w w . b f p e . c o m